(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "01 The New Testament in Indonesian INdonesie Asia India Perjanjian Baru - Alkitab"

Le Nouveau Testament 



Les quatre Evangiles - (la vie de Jesus de 

Evangile seion Matthieu 

Evangile seion Marc 

Evangile seion Luc 

Evangile seion Jean 

les Actes des Apotres, 

Epitre aux R o m a i 
Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens 
Deuxieme epitre aux Corinthiens 
Epitre 
Epitre ai_.. _ 
Epitre aux Philippiens 
Epitre aux Coli 
Premiere epitre aux Tl 
Deuxieme epitre a 

Premiere epitre a Timothee 

Deuxieme epitre a Timothee 

Epitre a Tite 

Epitre a Phile""" - 

L' Epitre ai 



iere epitre de Pierre 
Deuxieme epitre de Pierre 

liere epitre de Jean 
Deuxieme epitre de Jean 
Troisieme epitre de Jean 

Epitre de Jude 



the :ncew 



THENEWTestament 



03- Gospel of Luke 
04 - Gospei of John 
n 5 - Acls of Apostles, 

06 - Epistle to the Ro 

07 - First Epistle to the Corinthians 

08 - Second Epistle to the Corinthians 
" 1- Galatians 

10- Ephesians 



14 - II Thessalonian 
15-1 Timothy 

16- II Timothy 

17- Titus 



THE BIBLE 



INJIL I MUQADDAS, 

ya'se, 

HAMiKE KHUDAWAND AUB KAJAT-DEKEWALE 

YISU' MASIH 

KA NAYA 'AHD-NAMA: 

13 KA TABJVMA YtSASi ZOHaN SE ZUbAs I CRtiU MEN 
BAKaBAS TBAJ.-6I.ATT0S COWKITTfiJE 8K EIT^ <3AyA, 

jibb tas,h1h kakkk ab riscirwis 

BAH CE'IIAPWA'rE HAIN. 



THE BRITISH A^D FORE1GN BIBLE SOCIETY. 
1878. 



INJIL I MUQADDAS 

MATI KP INJIL. 
MARQUS KI INJIL. 
LU'QA KI INJIL. 
YU'HANNA KI' INJIL. 



RASULON KE A'AMA'L. 

PULUS RASUL KA' KHATT 
RU'MION KO. 



PU'LUS EASU'L KA' PAHLA' 
KHATT gUKINTI'ON KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DUSEA' 
KHATT QUEINTION KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT 
GALATION KO. 



PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT 
AFSlON KO. 



PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT 
FILIPPION KO. 



PULUS EASUL KA' KHATT 
CJULUSSION KO. 



PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA 
KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA DU'SEA 
KHATT TASSALUNIOJ'ON KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA* PAHLA 
KHATT TIMTAUS KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA' DU'SEA 
KHATT TIMTAUS KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT 

TITUS KO. 

PU'LUS EASU'L KA KHATT 

FILEMU'N KO. 

TBEANI'ON KO KHATT. 
YA'QU'B KA KHATT I 'A'MM. 



PATRUS 
KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM. 

PATEUS 
KA' DU'SRA' KHATT I 'AMM. 



YU'HANNA 
KA PAHLA' KHATT I 'AMM. 

Y'UHANNA 
KA' DU'SRA' KHATT. 

YU'HANNA KA TI'SRA KHATT. 



YAHU'DA'H 
KA' KHATT I 'AMM. 

YU'HANNA' FAQIH KE 
MUKASHAFAT KI KITAB. 



INJIL I MUQADDAS, 

TA'.VTB, 

HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUB NAJA'T-DENEWA'LE 

YISU' MASIH 

K A NA YA 'AHD-NiMA: 



1S KA TABJUMA. TlSsist ZCBAN 6E ZCTAK I UR&t KEN 
BASiEAS THANST.ATIOK CCIMM1TTEE BK KITA* GATA, 

j isis tas,hIh kahke ab FAScnwfs 

BAR CHHAPWiTE HAIK, 



THE BHITISH A^D FORE1GN BIBLE SOC7ETY. 

1878. 



MATI KI' INJI'L. 



T BA'B. 

\TiSI'" Masih, 



DAta 



X Abirahim ki nasabnama. 

2 Abiraham «e Iz,hiq midi hoa ; 
aur Iz,hiq se Ya'qub paida hiti ; aur 
Ya'qub se Yahiidih aur uh ko bhiii 
pai di h u e ; 

3 Aur Yahridih so Phiras aur Zi- 
rah Tamar ke pet kg paida hiie ; aur 
Phiras 8e Hasrom paidi hiia, aur Has- 
rim i si* A'rim paida hi'ia ; 

4 Aur A'rira se 'Aininadib paidi 
hiti ; aur 'Aminadab se Nahsiin paidi 
hiia; aur Nahsiin so Salmon paidi 
U* ; 

5 Aur Salmon so BoV. IlAhah ku 

S!t «j paidi Mi ; aur Bo'az ao 'Obed, 
ut ke pet so paidi Inti; aur 'Ubed 
86 Yassi paida IhU ; 

O' Aur Yassi se T)AAd baduhih pai- 
di hiii ; aur Daud badshah se Sulai- 
man, uh so jo U'riyih ki jorii thi, 
paida hiid ; 

7 Aur Sulaiman se Rahabi'Am pai- 
di hiii; aur Rahabi'im se Abiyib 

E ahli htii ; aur Abiylh se Asi paidi 
fii; 

8 Aur Asi se Yfthta&t paidi hiii; 
aur Yaluisafat ao YurAm paidi hiii ; 
aur Ydrim se 'Uzziyih paidi hui; 

Aur 'Uzziyih se Yutirn paidi 
Inti ; aur Yiitim se A'khaz paidi hdi; 
aur A'khaz se Ili/.uiyah paidi hui; 

LO Aur Hiwpyih ko Munassi paidi 
hui; aur Munassi se Aoiiin paidi 
aur Arrniii se Ydsiyih paidi 



jua ke bhai, jis waqt Bibul ko uth 

ibu i ,jaun para, paidi hde ; 



Aur Bibul ko uth jine ke ba'd, 

Yakiiniyih se Salatiel paidi hci ; aur 
Salatiel so Zanibibul paidi htii; 

13 Aur Zarubibul ao Abiud paidi 
,ui; aur Abiud se RliyAalm paidi 

hiii; aur EliyAnim ee 'Aziir paidi 
hdi; 

14 Aur 'A'ziir so Saduq paidi Inti; 
aur Badiio, so Akhim paidi hai ; aur 
Akhim se Eliuil paidi hui ; 

15 Aur Eliud bc Ele'izar paida hiia; 
aur Ele'azar so Matthin paidi hui; 
aur Matthin se Ya'qiib paidi hiti ; 

1G Aur Ya'qitbse Yiisuf paidi htii, 
jo shauhar thi Mariyarn ki, jis M 
Tisu', jo Masih kahliti hai, paida 



btfa 
Mi 



hui. 

17 Paa, sab pushten Abiraham se 
Diiid tak chaudah pushten hairi ; aur 
DAud se Bibul ko uth jine tak chau- 
dah pushten ; aur Bibul ko uth jino 
so Masih tak chaudah puhtag hain. 

18 f Ab Yisii' Masi'h ki paidii»h 
yiin hit; ki Jab ub ki mi M^riyam 
ki wMinjnl Yiisuf ke ftitfa hiti, to un 
ke ikatthe ine ae pahle, w uh Ruh ul 
Quds su'himila pii gayi. 

18 Tab u» ke shauhar Yusuf ne, 
jo risthaz thi, aur na chihi ki use 
tash,hir kare, irida kiyi ki use chnp- 
ke eo chhor da 

20 Wuh ia biton ke soch hi mcn 
thi, ki deklio, Khudsiwaud ko ek 



firishte ne us par khwib roen Kohir 
jhoke kahi, Ai Yusuf, Ibn i Diud, aj>- 
11 Aur Yusiyib. se Yakiiniyih aur'nf jorti Mariyam koapne yahin lo ine 
3 •* 2 



Jl/o/iisi'oji bi Masih pan tina. MAT 
so mac dar; kytinki jo ue ke rihm 
lucu hai, bo Rdli ul Quds bg hai. 

21 Aur wuh beti jauegi, aur tii 
kd ndm YIMU" rakhe#i; "kyunlri wuh 
liput! IogUQ ko un ke gunrtlion ft 

22 Yih sab kuchli tnid, ki jo Kliu- 
ddwand eo nabi ki ma'rifat kahd Lkd 
pi'ird ho ; ki 

2:1 Dekho, ek kiinwari hiimila hogi. 
aur beti janegi, aur ub kd nam 'Iui- 
tuaauei rakhonge, jis kd tarjuma yih 
ii=ii, Kiiuda Jiiuudre aith. 

24 'Tab Yusuf ne, aoto se uthkar, 
jaisS K'lunliiwaud ke tirishte oe uso 
iarmdya thd, kiyd, aur apni jord ko 
apne yahdn lc dyd: 

25 Tar uh ko na jdnd, jali tak ki 
wuh apnd palauthd betd na jani ; aur 
us kd ndm Y1SU" raklid, 
II BA'ft. 

AUR jab Yisu', HcTodls bddshdh ke 
waqt, Yahudi ya ko Baillabam 
iiieij paidd lui a, tn dekho, kai maju- 
fiuu ne, piirab se Yanisalam merj dko, 

2 Kati; ki Yahiidion kd bddshdh 
jo pftidi hiid 80 kalian hai? ki ham 
ne pdtafc mej "B kd sitara dcklid, aur 

. kanta ko do hain. 

3 Jab H'Tmlis hiiishab ue yih su- 
nd, tab widi aur ub ko sdth tamdm 
Y arti salam ghabrdyd. 

4 Tab us ne, sah Rarddr kalunoii 
aur q aum fce faiplion ku Jam'a Eatka, 
un se puchhd, ki Masih kahdn paidA 
boga ? ' 

D I/nlion ne us se kahd, Yalnidiya 
ke BaUlahtm mag ; kyi'mki nabi ki 
ma'rifut yi'm iikhd hai; ki 

6 Ai liaitlaliam, Yahrldah ki sar- 
7,amin, tu Yahuddh ke anrddron rum 
knrgiz kamtarin uahin hal; kylinki 
nijh iiii'i_ se ek Sardar uiklogd, jo meri 
(lanm Isrdel ki ri'dyat karegd. 

7 Tab Herodis ne majusion ko 
chupke se buldkar un se tahqiq ki, ki 
wuli sitdra kab dikhldi diya. 

8 Aur unhcn yih kabke Baitlaham 



I', II, AifnJ ha, gatl hor,6. 

men bbeja, ki Jdknr u.i larke ki bdbat 
kluib darydft karo; aur jab uso pSo, 
mujho khabar do, ki main bhl jdko 
use sijda karun, 

y Wc bddshdh se yih sunke rawii- 
na hiie, aur, dekho, wuh sitdra, jo 
unlmn ne piirab nun dekhd thd, uu 
ke dge dgo chal rahd, aur us jagah ke 
upar.jaban wuli larka thii.jSke thahra. 

10 Wc ub sitdro ko dekhko bahul 
hl khuali hiie. 

11 1T Aur us ghar muu pahnnch- 
kar ub larke ko ua ki raa Mariyam ke 
salh payd, aur us ko dge girku DM 
sijda kiyd; aur apni jliolidn kholke 
aoud, aur lubdn, aur muTr, uao nazi* 
guarana, 

12 Aur khwab men agdht pdkar ki 
Herodis ke pds pbir na jdweii, we ihis- 
ri rah hb apne uiulk ko phire. 

13 Jab we rawana iide, Co dekho, 
Kr.i-lawaiid ke ek tirwhta ue, Yusuf 
ko khwab men diklidi deke, kahd, 
Dth.'ua larke aur us ki md ko sdth le- 
kar Misr ko bhdg ja, aur wahdu rah, 
jab tak ki main tujhe khabar ua ddn ; 
kyiiiiki Herotli» is lafka ko dliuudlie- 
gd, ki mar dale. 

14 Tab wuh uthko, rdt hi ko, larko 
aur ub ki md ko sdth lekar iiisr ko 
rawdna hdd : 

10 Aur Herodifi ke ruame tak wa- 
hdn rahd, ki jo Khuddwand ne nabi 
ki ma'rifat kahd tlii pura ho, ki Main 
ue apne bete ko Misr se buldyd. 

10 T J»b Herodia ne dekha, ki us 
ne majusion se fareb khayri thd, to 
nihdvat guswo hud,"aur Iflgon ko bhej- 
kar tiaillaham aur us ki sdri tatbaa- 
don ke sab larkon ko, jo do bara -s ke 
aur ub se chtaote tlie, ua w»qt ke niu- 
wdnq ki us ne majusion se tahu.iq ki 
tii, qatl karwdyil. 

1T Tab wuh, jo Yaramiydh nabi no 
kahd thd, piird hiid; ki 

IH Hdmah meo ek dwdz sunne men 
di hai, ndla, aur rone, aur bftf i 
ki, ki Rdkhil apne larkon par roti,"nur 



Yuhannd kd 

tasalli nuLin chAhti, is liye ki we 

nahin hiiin. 

19 K Jab HerodiB mar gayA, to 
dokho, Khudiwaud ke nrlsnto DB, 
Min men Yusuf ko khwdb incii dikh- 
M dekc," 

20 KahA, Uth, aur uh larke aur ub 
Jti mi ko stlth lekar Israel ke inulk 
men ja ; kyuiiki jo uh larke ki jan ke 
khwAhAn t' 10 mar g^y- 

^1 Tab wah ulba, aur us larke aur 
HB ki ma ko sdth leke IsrAol ko inulk 
men a ya. 

22 Magar jab suna, ki Aikliilius, 
apue bAp Hcrodis ki jagah, Vuliusliya 
HB baashihat karta hai, to wahan 
jAno 80 dara; aur khwdb men agahi 
pakar Jalil ki atraf men rawdna bui. 

23 Aur ek shahr meg.jis k;i u;iiii 
Nasarat thd, jAke rahd, ki wuh jo 
riabfon ne kahd thA pura ho, ki Wuh 
Nasar! k;ihlaegA. 

UT BA'B. 

X dinon men Yuhaand baptisma 



MATI', III, IV. 



t&hir hotid. 



D 



_ denewdld, Yainidiy.i ke biyab.ii) 
men zdhir boko, manAdi karne, 

2 Aur yih k a bn c laga, ki Tanba 
karu; kyunki AsruAn ki bAdKhAhat 
nazdikhai. 

3 Ki yih wuhi hai, jis ka zikr Yas'- 
aiydh nabi nc yih kahkc kiyA, ki 
Jangal meo ek pukayjuwale ki AwAz 
bal, ki Khuddwand ki rAb ko durust 
karo, aur ub ke rastnn ko sidhA bando. 

4 Is Yuhannd ki poshak uut ke 
liab.iij ki tlii, aur chauire ka kamar- 
baud us ki kamar men tha; nur tiddi 
aur jangli shahd us ki khiirak thi. 

5 Tab Yarusalam, aur saru Yahd- 
diya, aur Yardan ke s:ili jspAs ke 
ralmowile, us pAs chale Ae. 

G Aur uuhon ne apne gunAhon kA 
icjrar karkc Yardan men us se baptisma 
pAyd. 

7 1 Par jab us ne dekha, ki bahut 
se Farisi aurSttdiitji baptisma pAne ku 
us piU Ae bain, to utihen kaha, ki Ai 



sAmpon ke barbel io, tuinhi-ij AuewAlc 
gazab bo bhdgnA kis ne sikhlAyd ? 
S' Pas tauba ke lAiq pbal lAo : 

9 Aur apne dil ineii aisA knbne ka 
kliiyiil niat karo, ki AbirahAm ha- 
mdra bAp hai ; kyunki main turo t>e 
kalitA hun, ki KhudA inhin pattharon 
se Abiraharn ke liyo aulAd paidA kar 
sak t A hai. 

10 Aur darakhton ki jar ]wr ab 
kulhArA rakhA liai ; ]su> bar ek dar- 
aku"! jo acbchhA phal nahin lata, kAtd 
aur Ag men daja jAtA hai. 

11 Main to tumhon tauba ke liye 
pani so baptisma duta h i'; n ; lekin 
wuh jo mere ba'd AtA hai, inujh se 
zorAwnr hai, ki roain us ki jutidri 
ut.hane ke lAiq nahin; wuh tumben 
Rlih i Quds aur Ag so baptisma degd : 

12 Us kA siip ub ke hAth men hai, 
aur wuh apno khulihaa ko khub sAf 
karegA, aur apne " gehun ko kh^tte 
num jam'a karega; par bbiise ko us Ag 
men, jo hargi» naliin biijhti, jatAwegA. 

13 f Tab Yisu' Jalil se Yardan ke 
kanAre Yuhanna ke pas AyA, IA ki us 
H ki]-itii>ma iiAwo. 

14 Par YvibannA Deuseman'a itiya, 
aur kaha, ki Main tujh bc baptisma 
pAue kA muhtAj bun, aur tii taat pas 
AyA hai ? 

15 Yisu' ne j:nv;ib men us se kabA, 
Abhouede; kyurjki hainen mundaib 
liai.ki yuubin sal> rdstbdzi piiri karen. 
Tab us ne hone diyA. 

16 Aur YisA' baptisma pike wun- 
bin paui se nikalke upar dya, aur, 
dekbo, ki us ke liye dwindn kbul gayA, 
aur us ne KIiudA ki Kuli ko kabdtar 
ki mAnmd utarte, aur apne upar ate 
duk ha. 

17 Aur dekbo, ki Asniau seek Swia 
yib kahti di, ki Yih merd piyaia Bctd 
hai, jis se main. khush hiig. 

IV BA'B. 

TAB Yisu' Ruh ke waaile ImyAbAn 
men ldyd gayA, ^a ki Sbaitan 



Madi H MATI', IV. 

2 Ain jali cMlfl ilin aur ehAlfs rAt 
rota rakh chuki, Akhir ko bhukha 
huA. 

a Tab AKiimish-karm'wAle ueuKpAi 
i'.kfi kahA, Asar tu Khudd kA botA 
hai, to kuli, ki yc paltliar inti lxm 

4 TJs ne jawAb mi-» kalui, LikliA 
i.ai, ki InnAn sirt' roti se nahiri, baiki 
liar ck bafBe, jo Khuda ke munh se 
nikahi, jitA hai. 

5 'lab Shai t.;)Ti nw iiRiqariilas whahr 
meB Spne ^iilli k gaya, aur haikal ke 
kangiire DM khara karke us M kali», 
ki • 

6 Agar tu KhudA ki tetf hai, to 
«pneta.irt niche j»ira da; kyi'iiiki likba 
hai, ki VVuli tera liye apne firiahtog lio 
tivmaegi, aur we tujhe hatimu per 
uLlid Icijgo, aisA na lio ki tue pa%w 
ko patthar se thes lage. 

T Yi.Mi'neusTe kahA, Yih Mu likha 
hai, ki Tu KhudAwand apne KhudA 
ke niat i?.m&. 

8 i'liir Shail&n usc ab bare unche 
■i 1« ^ti'.i, aur duuyA ki uari 
bAdshAhateg, aur uii kr fbau o ahaukat, 
uan dikhAin ; 

a Aur uh «; kahA, Agar Ul girko 
mujhe sijda kaie, to yih nal) kuchh 
■Lujhf. diiyua, 

10 Tab Yisii' nc iise kahA, Ai Shai- 
tan, dtir lii>; kyunki likliii liai, ki Tu 
Khudawand apne K^huda ku njda kar, ' khabar! ki 
aur US akele ki baiHiayi kar. 

11 Tab Sliaitau use cliiior gaya, aur, 
dekho, firisbton ue ako u* k 1 i I . i ' ■ ■ 



12 t Jab Yi*ii' no Bund ki Yu- 
owoi uirifiar hii;i, tab Jalil ko chalA 

L8 Aur Niiwirat ko cbhorkar Ka- 
faniahum men, jo daryA ko katiAre 
"' lIh'iIi'hi aur Nafuli ki sai'liaudon nion 
hai, 14 raba: ki 

14 Jo Yaa'&iy&h nabi ki ma'rifat. 
kahA gaya IhA, pura boj 

15 Zabulun ki sarzamin aur Xaf- 



azTKaya. ja>i" . 
tali ki snrzamin, ya'ne, gair-qaumon 
kA Jalil, jo darya ki rAh Yardan ke 
par hai ; 

~16 Un Iojwjij m, jo andhero meu 
bait.ho thc, bari rosbsl dekhi, aur un 
par, jo maut ke mulk aur saya men 
liaitbv t.lie, nur cbamka. 

17 V L'KiVaift se Yisu' ne imihaiii 
l.aiiM. aur yih knhna shurii' kivri, ki 
Timba karo ; kyfinki asiuan ki bad- 
shaliat nazdik Af. 

18 5 Aur jab Yisti' Jalil ke daryA 
ke kanAre cliala juta th», to u« ne do 
hbAi, ya'ne, Sttama'ua ko, jo Patrus 
kablAtA hai, aur u s ku bhAi AndrvA» 
ku, daryA men jAl diilto dekhA, ki we 

.icbliiie the. 

19 Aur unh-;n k ah A, ki Mere efebhe 
chale Ao, ki main t.iunlitn Admiori ko 
macldiwe batuiunga. 

20 We usi waqt jAlon ko cbhorkar 
ua ke pichhc ho liye, 

21 Aur wahin. ne barhke us ne aur 
do bhai, ya'ne, Sabadi ke"beto Ya'qdb, 
aur ub ke bhai Yiihauua ko, npne bAp 
Zaliadi ke sAtb nAw pur apne jiilojj ki 
marammat karto*"dekli<i, aur antan 
bulAyA. 

22 Wunhin ndw anr apne 
chhorkar we us ku pichhe lio liye. 

38 T Aur Yirtii', tamim Jalil weo 

phirtA huA, un ke 'ibadatkhAnon mey 

ta'lim detA, aur bA^lwhaViat ki kluif,!i- 

■Adi kartA, aur kigor 

ke sAre dukh aiu- bimAri dafa karta 



24 Aur us ki khahii' tamani Ruriyn 
men phaili, aur sab biniaron, ko, jo 
tarah tarah ki bimAri aur "a^Ab men 
giriftar the, aur unben jin par defl 
oharhe the, aur mireihos, %m 

mAre hiion k", us pu Em, aur um ne 
urlicn cn"anga kivA. 

25 Aur bari liari bhir Jalil, aur 
WkApulia, aur Y'arusiilam, aur Ya- 
bfidiya, aur Yardaii ke par se uk ke 
pichhe ho li. 



i'ahdr par MATI', V. Masih kd wa'z. 

V BA'B. 16 Isi tn.mli tumhari mahm Admion 

ke saniune chamke, til ki we tiiinhAre 
nuk kAmon ko dekhen, iur tumhare 
bap El, jo AaniAii par hai, sitdish 
harem 

17 T Yih khiyiil unit k:.ro, ki main 
taurel ya iiabum ki kitab mansukh 
korne ko Aya; main maosukb. karnc 
ko nahin, baiki puri kamu ko aya- 
li iin. 

m Kyiinki main tum n aach kali- 
tA hun, ki Jab tak Asruiii aur /amin 
fal n;i jaen, ek Lyqta ya ek ahosha 
fauret ki hargiz na m i tega, jab tak 
nb kuelili purii ua ho. 

19 Pas jo koi iu hukinou uien Re, 
sah se chhotc ko tal dewe, aur wai(j 
hi admion ko Bikhiwe, aaman ki bAd- 
shahat men sal) se chhota kahliiegii; 
|iar jo ki 'amal kare, aur siklilawe, 
wuhi AsmAn ki badshdhat mefl Uua 
kahlAegA. 

20 Kyiinki main. tumherj kalita 
liiin, ki Agar tumhari rastliAzi Faqi- 
hun aur Fa ria ion ki m ziyAda na lio, 
tum auman ki~badshakat men kiai 
tarah dAkhil na liogo. 

21 f Tum suri ehuk« bo, U ag3os 
M k ah a gaya, Tii kluin. mat kar; aur 
jo koi khun karc, 'adAlat men sazA ke 
laiq kuga: 

22 Par main tumhen katili hun, ki 
Jo koi apno bhai par be-sabab guaea 



"tTTUTI bhty ko dekhkar ek paluir 

W par chnrh gaya; aur jabbait.lia, 
UI ke shagird tu l»As Ac : 

2 Tab'wuh apni zubAn kh"lke un- 
hon sikhlane lagi, aur kahii, ki 

5 Mubarak we jo dil ke garib hairj ; 
kvunki asman ki 'badshahat unhiii ki 
hai 

4 Muliirak we jo gamgin hain ; 
kyiinki we taaalli pAwenze. 

5 Mubarak we jo halim hain : 
kyiinki we zaniin ke waris bOBgB. 

' 6 Mubarak we jo rastbAzi ke bhti- 
tim aur piyase hain ; kyiinki weasuda 
honge. 

7 Mubarak we jo rahm-dil hain 
kyiinki un jmiv rahra kiya jaegA. 

a Mubdrak we jo pak-dii hain 
kyiinki Wfl Khinld ke dekhense. 

i) Mubarak we jo silih kamewAle 
hain; kyiinki wo Khuda ke fajjiand 
kahlienge. 

10 MubArak we jo rast.bairt ke sa- 
liab sajie jAte hain ; kyiinki asniAii%i 
had s h «liat unhin, ki hai. 

1 1 Mubarak ho tum, jab mere wistc 
tumben la'n ta'n karen, nur salilweg, 
aur liar tarah ki buri bateij jiuitli se 
tumhare haqq men kaben. 

12 Khusb ho aur kliuslii k»KI ; 
kyfigki Asmin par tumhare liyc bani 
lunllu hai ; is liye ki uuhon UO un 
n:il>ioii ko, jo tum ac Age the, isi tarah 
aatayi hai. 

13 *§ Tum stamin ke camak ho : 
par agar namak kA maza bigar jAe, to 
wuli k ia chia «e mazadAr kiya jie? 
wuh phir kisi kam kii n;ihin, siwa u,« 
ke ki bahar phenkA jae, aur adiuiun 
ke ]iiii_nvuij tale raunda jae. 

14 Tum (lunya k"o inir lio; jo ahahr, 
ki pahir par IhirA hai, chhip nahin. 
Bakti. 

16 Aur cliirfi^ bAlke [MiimAiia ke 
tals nahin, baiki chirigdAn par rakhtc 
Iniij : nb un uab ko jo gbar men )i 
rosbai detA. 



lio, 'adalat mon BazA ke aAbil hoca | 
aur jo koi apne bhai ko BAplA kaho, 
Sadr-majliB men sazA ke lAiq hoga ; 
aur jo us ko Ahuiaij kalie, jahaiinait; 
ki u ka BaaAwir hogi, 

23 Pas agar tii qurbiingah mrn ajui: 
nasir le jdwe, aur wahan tujlii' ya>: 
Aw«, ki t*ra iibAi tujh se kuchh ii_w- 
khAlafat rakhta hai ; 

"24 To wahan apni nazr ciurbAngiih 
ke sAmhne chhorke chalA jA; pahle 
apne bhai m mcl kar, tab Ake apni 
nazr guzran. 

25 Jab tak tu apne miKkla'i ke lith 
rAh mejj hai, jald us se m^ja; na ho, 



PaUrjwr MATI' 

ki niiidda'i tujlie qd/,i ke haw.-Ua kare, 
nur qizi tujbe piydda ke aupurd karo, 
aur tii qaid nicn pare. 

26 Main tujh ee saoh kahtS Mn. 
ki Jali tak kauri kauri add na kare, tu 
wahdn se kisi tarah na chbutega. 

27 "T Tum suri chuke lio', ki aglon 
ho kahd gaya, Tu zina na kor ; 

28 Par main tumlien kabtd Inln, ki 
■To koi shahwat se kisi 'aurat par nigdh 
karo, wuh apne dil men u» ke aath 
zina kar chukd. 

29 So agar teri dahini ankk tere 
thekar khaiio kd bius ho, BM nikal, 
aur apne pas bo phenk de ; kyiinki 
tera angon men se «k Isa Di ralniii 
tero liye ue Be blhtar hai, ki terd sdrd 
badan jahannam men ddld jawe, 

30 Yd agar terd dahina hdth tero 
liye thokar khdne kd bd'is lio, us lu 
kiit dai, aur apne pas bb phenk de ; ky- 
imki tore angon mcn se i?k kd na rnhiia 
tero liye ns bo bihtnr hai, ki terd sdrd 
badan jahannam men dftla jde. 

:;i Y ih bhi likhd gayd, ki Jo koi 
nperj torf ko chhor de, usc talaeuiania 
likh de : 

82 Ph main tumben kabtd lu 
Jo kol apni jord ko, zina ke siwd, kisi 
aur sabab bo chhor dewe, ub so zini 
Itarwata hai ; aur io koi ub chhori hui 
se bydh kare zind kartd hai. 

33 1T Phir tum «un chuke ho, ki 
aglun se kah4 gaya, ki Tii jhi'ithi 
«asam na khd; baiki apni qosanicrj 
Khudawand Ise liye puri kar : 

84 Par main tunihon kabtd lilin, 
Hargis aaaam na khdna; na to isman 
ki, kyiinki wuh Khuda kd takht b*l ; 

35 Na zamin ki, kyiujki wuh ub ke 
pati w ki ekiuiki hai ; aur m Yarujalam 
ki, kyiiiiki wuh buzurg badakah kd 
ehahr hai ; 

3(> Aur na apne air ki qasam kha, 
kyiinki tu ek bdl ko Bufed yd kdld 
nahin kar sakti. 

37 Par tumhdri guftogu mori, han 
ki bdn, aur nahin ki nahin ho ; ky- 



VI. 



L JO IB 



Masih Icd iva'z. 
-, ziyada hai so burdi so 



hotd hai. 

38 ^ Tum Bun chuke ho, ki kahd 
gaya, A'nkh ke badle duk h, aur ddnt 
ko badlo tldnt: 

30 Pir main tumben kabtd hiin, ki 
Zalim kd nuiqab.tla na kanta; baiki 
jo tere dahine gdl par tamdncha mdre, 
dusrd bhi ub ki taraf pher de. 

40 Aur agar koi oSahe, k! tujli pai 
ndlish karke teri qabi h, kurte ko bhi 
usoleue d e. 

41 Aur jo koi tujlie ok kos begdr le 
j A wc, us ke siitli do kos chala j;i. 

42 Jo koi tujh se kuchh inarjge, use 
de; aur jo tujh so qarz chihe, us sc 
inunh ua mor. 

43 t Tum' sun ebuke ho, ki kaha 
gaya, Apne porosi se dosti ralih, aur 
apne (luslimaii mi 'addwat : 

ii Par main tuiulien kabtd hiin, ki 
Apne duahmanon ko piydr karo; aur 
jo tum ]>ar laknat karen, un ke liye 
l>ar;ik:it cbiibo; jo tum so kina roklien, 
urf kd bbali karo ; nur "Jo tumben 
dukh den, aur satdwcn, un ke bye 
du'd mdngo ; 

45 Ta ki tum apne Bdp ke, jo ds- 
man par hai, iarzand lio; kyiinki 
wuh apno suraj ko hadon aur nekon 
par ugiiti. hai, aur rdston aur nd-rdstoii 
[iar mcTili barsdtd hai. 

40 Kyiinki a.yar tum unhiij ku 
piyir karo, jo tumben piydrkarte hain, 
to tumhdrc liye kyd »jr hai? kyd 
majiaiil-lenewdle bhi aisd nahin karte? 

47 Aur agar tum faqat apno bhdion 
ko saldm kam,to kyd ziyada kiyd'i' kyd 
mahsnl-lenewalc bhi aisii nahirj karte V 

48 Pas tum kamil ho, jaisd tum- 
hdra Ilip.jo iisindn'par hai, kiimil liai. 

VI BA'B. 

KHABARDA'K roho, ki tum apne 
nok kimo-a kologon ke sdrahnc 
dikhldne ke liye na karo, nahin to 
tuuiliarr l'.iiji W, Jo dsniau par hai, ajr 
ua inileira. 



Pahdr par MAT 

2 ls.liye lab ki tii khairdt kare, apne 
s&mhnc turbi niat baji, jaise riydkdr 
'ibadat k hifiioij aur CMfOO men karte 
hain, td ki log un ki ta'rif kareij. Main 
tum ee statsli kahti hiiii, ki W o apiid 
ajr pa chuke. 

3 Par jab tu khairdt kare, to cha- 
hiye ki teri bayan hith na jdne, jo 
teri dobiua hath kartd bai ; 

4 Ta ki teri khairdt poskida rahc, 
aur tera Bdp jo poehidag) meii dekbta 
hai, khud zahir meo tujhe badid dewe. 

5 1T Aur jab tii du'd minge, riyd- 
karofl ki minimi rnat ho ; kyiinki we 
'ibadatkhdnon men aur raaton ko kon- 
on par khare hoke du'a mingne ko 
dost rakhte hain, ta ki log unhen de- 
khon. Main tara «e sach kahtft lilin, 
ki We apna badla pd chuke. 

6 Lokio jab tii du'a mdnge, apni 
kothri men ja, aur apna darwaza baud 
karke apne Bap ea jo poshidagi men 
hai du'a mdng ; aur teri Bdp jo poshi- 
dagi men dekhtd bai, zikir aun tujlif 
bodli degd. 

7 Aur jab du'd miugtc lio, gair- 
qaunioii ki inaniud be-faida bak 'bak 
rnat karo; kyurjki we samajhto hain 
ki un ki ziyiaagoi se un ki suni jdegi, 

8 Par unTtT mdnind niat ho, kyuii- 
ki t umbari Bdp, tumhdre manguo ke 
jiahlo, jdnta hai, ki tumben km kin 
chizon ki zariirat hai. 

9 Pas tum iai tarah du'a mdngo, ki 
Ai baindre Bdp, jo dsnidn par hai, 
Tera ndm ki taqdia lio. 

10 Teri badsnahat dwe. Teri mar- 
zi, jaisi dsmdn par hai, zamin par bin 
bar dwe. 

11 1 lamari rozina ki roti dj ham ko 
bakhsh. 

12 Aur jis tarah ham apne qarz- 
ddrorj ko bakbslite hain, tii apne dain 
ham ko bakhsh do. 

13 Aur harneii dzmdish men na dai, 
baiki burdi se bacha : kyiinki badshd- 
bat aur qudrat aur jahil hamesha tere 
hi hain. A'iuin, 

"9 



', VI, Masih kd wVs. 

14 la liyc ki agar tum admion ke 
gunati hajdishogo, to tumhdrd Bdp 
hhi, jo asmdn par hai, tunihun bakh- 
sh egd. 

15 Par agar tum ddmion ko un ko 
gimih na bakhnhogc, to tumhdrd Bdp 
bin lumhdre.gundh na bakhsbcgd. 

16 ^ Phir jab tum roza rakho, riyd- 
kiron ki mdnind apni cliihra udds na 
bando : kyiinki wo apna munh bigdrte 
hairj, ki logorj ke nazdik rozadifzdhir 
hon. Main. tum sg sach kalita hiin, 
ki Wo apnd badla pd clmko, 

17 Par jab tu roza rakbe, apne air 
par ciiikna lagi, aur munh dhn; 

18 T4 ki tii admi par nahiii* baiki 
tere Bdp par, jo poshida hai, rozaddr 
zdhir lio ; aur terd Bdp, jo poshidagi 
men dekhtd hai, iahkiri tujbo badli 
de. 

19 Tf Mil apne wdste zamin par 
jam 'a na karo, janin Xiri, aur mo,rcha 
Ithardb karto hain, aur jahdn chor 
sendh dete, aur churdte hain : 

20 Baiki mil apne liye isman par 
jam'a karo, jabdn na kiri na moreba 
khardb karto, aur na wahdn chor sc.ndli 
dete, na chnrate hain : 

21 Kyiinki jahdii tumhdrd MuKana 
hai, wahin tunihara dil blii lagi ra- 
hegd. 

2i Badan kd chirdg dnkh hai ; pas 
agar teri dnkh adf ho, to terd siri 
badan roshan hogi. 

23 Par agar teri dnkh slf nahin, to 
terd sdra badan andbera boga. 1^ liyo 
agar wuh m'ir, jo lujh men bai, tiriki 
ho, to kaiti ariki th&hregl I 

24 Koi ddirudoklidwiiidonki khid- 
mat nahin kar Haktd: ia liye ki yd ek 
se dushinani rakhegd, aur diisre se 
dosti; yd ek ko ininega, aur du3ro 
ko na-chiz jdnegd. Tuin Kbudiaur 
daulat douon ki khidmat naLin kar 
nkte. 

26 lw liye main tum se kahtd in'ui, 
ki Apni zindagi ke liye fikr na karo, 
ki ham kya khdenge, aur kyd piengc, 



MATI' 
na ai)ii*; badan ko liye, ki kyA pahin- 
enge. KyA jAn khurik se bihtar na- 
bi», aur badan posbak se? 

26 Hawa ke paraudog ko dekho; 
we na botc, na laute, na kothiou rocn. 
jam'a karte hain, tm bbJ tumbai-a 
iisiniiiii lliip im ko pika hai Kya 
tum un se bahut bihtar naMrj lu»? 

27 Tum raen se kaun hai jo fikr 
karke apni 'umr nierj ok ghari barha 
saku tua? 

28 Aur pnshak ki kyi'in fikr karte 
ho? Jangli bowuwo ko dekho, ki we 
kia tarah m barhti hain ; we na mi h- 
nat kiirii, na katti hain : 

29 Pur main Tumben kahtA htirj, ki 
Sulaiman bM apni «iri aliAn o shaukat 
men, un mcn se ek ki mariiiul ] riliinr- 
ufl thA. 

30 Pas, jab Khudamaidan ki ghAs 
ko, jo aj hai, aiir kal Lani'ir □ ■ 

jati. yiin paltinAtd hai, fb kyA tum ko, 
■ii kam-i'atiqiido, ziyAda na pahina- 
p.g&'t 

31 Is live vib kabke fikr mat karo, 
ki Ham kya khAengc ? ya Kya pierjge f 
ya Kya pahinerjge ? 

32 Kyiinki iu sab chfzon ki talash 
men gair-qauini>n rahli hain, aur tum- 
i.ara a*m6i-i Mp jantd h::i, ki tuni un 
cnb chi'/.on ke nmhtaj ho. 

33 Par "tum pahle Kliudri. ki bfid- 
shabat aur 08 UrfistbM kodliiindbo, 
to yib sah chizen bhi tnmbeii milegai 

34 Pas knl ki fikr na karo ; kyiirjki 
kal apni cliizon ki ap lu fikr kar lega. 
A'i ka dukh aj hl ke liye bas hai. 

VII BA'B. 
f A IB na lagao, ki tum par bhi 'aib 
A Dii lagayii jAwc. 

•i Kyiiijki jiy tamli tum 'aib Iftg&te 
h o, usl tarah tum pir bhi Wb lagays 
jAoga; aur jispaimAne se tuiu nAptoho, 
lisi se tumhare wdate n Apa jaega. 

3 Aur kvun ua tinjiti ku, Jo tOM 
lihai ki auk'li mcn hai, dekhtAhai.par 
us kaiiri par, jo teri Aukh meg bui, 
nazar nahm karta? 



VTT. 



Manh kd « 



4 Ya kyiinkar tii apne bliai ko kan- 
ta, ki Us tinke ko, jo teri dukh merj 
hai, Ui nikiil ebin ; aur, dek h, khud teri 
aukh men kanri hai ? 

5 Ai riyakar, mhta kanri ko apnf 
dnkh se nikiil. tob iu tlaks k" apne 
bhdi ki Aukh so achchhi tarah dekhke 
nikdl sakegd. 

(i ^f Wuh chiz jo pak hai kntton 
ko mat do, aur apne moti suaron ke 
Ago na phenko ; aisA na lio ki we un- 
horj pamdl karen, aur phirke tumben 
phAren."~ 

1 1 Mingo, ki tumben diy;i jii^L'i j 
dhiindho, ki tum iwioge ; kh:iikli:it;i", 
to tumbare wdstc kbola jiegA i 

8 Kyiinki jo koi mangla hal, nse 
milt* ; aur jo koi dhundhta, bo pita 
hai ; aur jo koi kbatkhatata, uh ke 
wastc kholA jaega, 

H Ya, tum men se kaun UkwA im, 
ki agar us ka l*ta ns »e roti mange, 
ivuh use patthar deweV 

10 YAttgaruiachhli mauge, uae samp 
do? 

11 Pas jab ki tum jo bure ho apne 
larkon ko acbchhi ebizen dene jdnte 
ho, to kitnft ziyada tumhara BAp, jo 
asmin par hai, unhen jo ub se mangte 
hain, achcbhi chizen degA ? 

12 Pas jo kuchli luni chAhte ho, ki 
log tumhArc sAth karen, waisA tum bhi 
un ke sdth karo ; kyiinki tauret aur 
nabion kA kbuldsa yibi bai. 

13 "l Tan^darwAze se dAkliil ho ; 
kyiinki chaurA hai wuh darwAso, aur 
kiinhada hai wuh rasta, jo haJAkat ko 
paBunoMtt hai, aur bahut hain j" na 
sedAkhil hoto: 

14 'KyA hi tang hai wuh fitrwaza, 
aur sakri hai wuh r;ili, jo zindagi ko 
ItthuncTidti, aur thore halrt jo use 
pate 1 

15 f Pur jhntlic nabion nc kbab- 
ardar raho, jo tumhArc pAs bhflfon ke 

: jo, par ha(jtc|at merj pkar- 
uowAle bheriyr hain. 

W Tum'unhaD un ke piiaknj nc 



M'ifih ira v 



pahcbdnoge. KyA kdnfcon se angur, 
yA lintkatAron se anjir tortc hnin f 

17 0« taruh har ek achchhA dft- 
rakkt achchhe phal lata, aur burA 
darakht bure ]>lial latA hai. 

18* AchchhA ikrakhl. hiire phal nn- 
hirj la snkrA, na bura' darakht achchhe 
phal ia sak t A. 

19 Hat- ek darakht. jo achelihephal 
mihiri hilA, kata aur Ag inen dali jfltA 
hai. 

20 Pas, un ke phalon se tuni unhcn 
pahchAnoge. 

21 Tf Na har ek jo mujlie KhudA- 
wand, Kbudawand, kiilita hai, d.sniau 
ki bAdsliAhat men ehamil hogA, magnr 
wuhi jo mere asniiini Bdp ki marzi 
par chalti hai. 

22 TJb din bahutcrc mujhe kaherjgc, 
Ai Khudawand, ai Khudawand, kya 
hairi oe tcre nara se nubiiwat nahin ki. 
aur tere naiu se dton ko nahin nikah», 
aur tere uain se bahut si kardniAt 
zAhir nuliirj kin V 

23 Aur ua waqt main un se sAf 
kahiiris'a, ki Main kal.ln tum se wAqif 
un ihA; ai badk.iro, mere pAa ao dur 
ho. 

24 ^f Pas, jo koi meri ye bAten 
suntA, aur unhen 'amal meij l;il.:i hai, 
main 086 us 'rit^Mjiiiitl ki niAimid 
thuhrata hun, jis ne chutAn par upiiA 
ghar 'Tianayi: 

25 Aur menhbarsA,aiirbdrhcn ain, 
aur andhian chalin, aur us gliar mr 
zor mara ; par wuh na gini, kyiiuki us 
ki new chatan par dali gayi 1 1 ■ i. 

26 Par jo koi meri yc hatcn suntA, 
aur Ufl par 'amal naliiij karta, wuh us 
bewuqtif adim ki rniinitid tkahrega, jis 
ne apoA ghar rcti |iar banayA : 

27 Aur menh barsa, aur barhen Air, 
aur Andhirin chaMn, nur us ghar par 
zor mArA, aur wuh gir para, aur us ka 
ginia hauinak wAai'a hiui. 

28 AiiraisA l.uA, ki jab Tisu' yih 
biteg kah duikA, to wuh bhir ub ki 
ta'lim se daughui: 

11 - 



MATI', VIII. Ek korlii ko changa hama. 
20 Kyfinki wuh faqihon ki iiianiiil 



nahin, baiki ikhtiyarwalu ke taur par 
sikhfatd thA. 

VIII BAT*. 

JAB wuh un pahar se utra, bahut s: 
bbfr us ke piehhe ho li. 

2 Aur', dekho, ek korhi ne Ake use 
sijda kiyA, aur kahi,""Ai Kbudawaml, 
agar td chAhe, to mujlie pak adf kar 
sakta hai. 

3 Tab Yisu' ne liftth harhdke use 
chhiifi, aur kaha, Main ehtttiMn, tii 
pffi sAf ho. Aur wunhin us kA korh 
jAU raha. " . 

4 Phir YisiV ne use kahi, Dekh, 
kisi sr nakahiyo; par jAke «prii- talQ 
TiAliiii ko dikhA, aur jo na/.r MiisA ne 
miTqnrrar ki, guzTAn, tA ki un ke liyc 
gawAhi h o, 

TJ T Aurjab Yisii' KaftmAhum nicvi 
dAkhil hiid, ek sdhadar us pAa AyA, 
aur us se ininjjat karke kalia, ki 

(l Ai KliiidAwaud, merfi ehhokra 
jhole kA mArA ghar inen para, nur 
niliayat duk h men hai. 

7 Tah Yisil' ne us se kalni, Main 
Ake use changA karAngA. 

8 Stibadar ue kwib rnen kaki, Ai 
KhudAwand, main ifl lAiq nahin ki tii 
meri chhat tale Awe ; baiki sirf ek 
bAt kah, to merA chhokiA changA ho 

9 Kyunki main bhi Admi hi'in jo 
diisre ke ikhtiyAr inen nun, aur sipAhi 
mne bttkm men bain i atirjabekko 
kahtd hun, JA, wuh jdtA hai ; aur dtisre 
ko, ki A', «uh AtA hai ; aur apne 
guldm ko, ki Yih kar, wuh kartA hai. 

10 YisA/ ce yih sunkar ta'ajjub 
kiya, aur un ko jo piehhe Ate the 
kahA, Main tum se sach kahtA hun, ki 
main m aisA imAu IsrAel men bhi 
nahin pAyA. 

i L Aur main tum se kahtA hun, ki 
Bahutere purah aur pftebch&im M 
Awonco, aur AbirahAui D I/.,hAq aur 
Ya'q"db ke sAth AaniAn ki hdiishdhat 
men iwiithenge. 



A'ndhi ko thamd «fcnd. MATI' 

12 Par hadahdhat ke farzand biliar 
ke andhere men dale jaenge; wah a n 
rona aur ddnt pisnd hogd. 

13 Tab Yisti'ne uHsubaddrkokaha, 
Ja, aurjaiad tii fiudn Jaya, tera liye 
waisd hi ho : aur usi ghari us kd 
chhokri changd ho,gaya. 

14 K Aur Yisii' ne Patrus ke ghar 
merj ake dekhd, ki us ki aas pari, aur 
ns par tap charhi hai, 

15 Aur ub ka hath chhud ; aur tap 
us par se atar g&yf, aur wuli uthi, aur 
uu ki khidmat kame lagi. 

16 T Jab sham hui ua ko pai 



baliutoii ko, jiu MI diK) charhti the, Ide ; 
aur us uo mi ruhon ku kalam hi ne dur 
kiyd, aur sab k*o jo bimar the uhangA 
kiyd : 

17 TA ki jo Yfw'aiyAh nabi ne kahd 
thd pura howe, ki Us ue dp hauidvi 
niaiidagidiik' lin.aur haiudri bimdridrj 
utlid lin. 

'18 "f Jab Timi' ne bahut si bhir 
apne ds pds dekhi, us ne hukm kiyd, 
ki p4LJftivoD. 

19 Aur ek faqih ne dke us se kaha, 
Ai UatAd, jahAn kabin tii jde, ntairi 
tera pichhe ehaldngd. 

20 Aur Yisu'uc ussckahd, ki Lom- 
riou ke liye uiduderj, aur liawd ke 
jiarandon ke wAsto baserc hain, pai 
Ibu i A'daro ke liye jagah nahin jalian 
apitd air dharc. 

21 Uake shagirdon men sedusrene 
us sc kabd, Ai Khudawimd, mujhe 
rukhsat de, ki pablo jdkur apne bdp ko 
gdnin. 

22 Par Yisti'ne us ae kahd, Tti mere 
pichhe d, aur murdon ko apno murde 
gdrne de. 

23 1 Aur jab wub naw par charha, 
us ke ahagird us ke pichho dc. 

24 Aur, dekho, daryA raeQ aiai bari 
andhi tii, ki ndw lakron men. chhip 
jali tbi ; par wuli aola thd. 

25 Tab us ke ahdgirdon ne pds dke 
me jagdyA, aur kalid, Ai Kbuddwaml, 
bKDHg bacii, ki bftm balak hote hain. 

12 



IX. Ek majltij ho changd k triui. 

2fi Us ne unheii kaha, Ai kain- 
'iatkpido, kyuii dane ho? Tab us ne 
uthke bawd aur daryd ko diilita, to 
bard niwd ho gtivd. * 

27 Aur log Ci'ajjub l;arkc kalmo h- 
ge, ki Yih kis tarah ka admi hai, lu 
hawd aur darya bhi us ki mdnte hain ! 

28 f Jab us pdr Gargasimm ke 
mulk men pahuncEa, do shakhs, jin 
par deo cbarhc the, qabron soiiikalkur 
use mile; we aiso tutid the, ki koi us 
rAste se chal na sakfll thd. 

29 Aur, dekho, unlioii ne eh il la k e 
kahd, Ai liati.', KhudA ke Bete, liamen 
tujh se kyd kdm ? td yahdn Ayd, ki 
waqt se pahle hamen dukh do ? 

30 Aur un se kuclih dur bahut sii- 
UOQ kii gol chai'ti tha, 

31 So deVm ne us ki minuat karko 
kahd, Agar tu bani ko uikaltd hai, to 
bameg un wdaron ke gol men janc do. 

32 Tab us nc unlion kahd, Jao. 
Aur we nikalke un siiarua ke gol men 
gaye ; aur, dekho, suaron kd sdrd gol 
kardro parsa darya iuce kudd, aur pdni 
nii'TJ'dub mari. 

Tab cliardnewale bbige, aur 
ihabl men jakar sah^inajard, aur un 
kd ahwaljin pardeoculirhe tin 1 , bftyio 
kiyi. 

34 Aur, dckbo, adri sbahr Yisti' ki 
mulaiidt ko nikla, aur use dekbke us 
ki iuiuuat ki, ki un ki aarhaddon .se 
bdhar jdwe. 

IX BAU 

P HIU ndw pir charhkc pdr utra, aur 
apno abahr men dyd. 

2 Aur, dekho, ek jhole ke mare ko, 
jo chdrpdi ]>ar pard thd, us pds lae. 
Yisii' ne unk:L iuniii di'lih ke us jhole 
ke mare se kaha, Ai bete, khatir jam'a 
rakh ; tere guiidh mu'di" bue. 

3 Aur, dekku, ba'zc hafhog ue apnc 
■lil men kalid, ki Yih kutt 1'akj.d hai. 

4 Yisu' ne uu ke khi\; : 

karke kahd, Tum kyr.n apne dilon 
men bml-gmiidni karto ho? 



ShdgirJon ha roza MATI 

5 KyA kahmi asan hai, yih.kiTere 
gutiah mu'Af hue, yA yih, ki Uth, at 
ehal ? 

C Lokin ta ki tum jdno, ki Ibn 
A 'dam ko zamiii par gunAh inu'At' 
kanie kA ikhtiyar hai, ua no us jhola 
ke maro se kahA, Uth, apnl charpai 
utlid le, aur apne ghar chalA ji. 

7 Wuh uthkar apne ghar chala 
gaya. 

H Tab logon ne yih dukhkar ta'ajjub 
kiya, aur KhudA ki ta'rif kanie 
ki a;ni uudrat insan, ko bakhahi. 

t( \ Phir jab Yimi 1 wakAn se Ago 
barbi, to Mati name ek shakhs ko 
Dtttbtdl ki chauki par baithu dekha, 
aur usb kahA, More pichhe' a. Wuh 
uthko us ku picbhe chalA. 

10 *$ Aur yiin huA, ki jab YimV 
ghar men khane baithA, dekho, babut 
su niabsul lenowdly aur guiiabgar akc 
us ko nur us ke shagirdon ko aath 
kbane baithe. 

11 JabFarision ne yih dekhA, uske 
■htebd o n ae kaha, Turohara ustAd 
mahsnl-lonowalon aur gunahganm ke 
satb kyiin kbata~haiy 

L2 Yisu' ne yih sunkar unhen kahA, 
Bhale diangon ku hakim darkiir naiiiij, 
baiki bimAron ko. 

13 Par tum jake ua ko ma'ne dar- 
yai't karo, ki Main qurbanl ko nahin, 
baiki rahm ko chahti hiin; kytinki 
niaiii lirtbfaofl. konahiri, baiki gunah- 
akm& ko tauba ke liye'bulAne ko aya 
I mu. 

14 % Ua wAqt YtihannA ke sha- 
girdon ne ua pas aku kaha, ki Ham 
aur Paria! kyrin aksar roea rakhtu 
hain: par tera shagird roza nahin 
rakhtc ? 

15 Yisu' ue unhen kahA, Kyaharati, 
jab tak dullul tm ko satb hai", udis ho 
aakte hain? lokin we din Awenge, ki 
dulki un so juda kiya jiegA; "tab we 
roza rakbcnge. 

16 Koi purAni qabi par Xore kapre 
ki paiwand nahin la'gata, kyunki wuh 



IX. na rakhna. 

paiwand qabi se kuchh khainch luta 
hai, aur us ka cbir barli jitA, 

17 Aur nayi mai purani masbkon 
men nahin bharte : nahin to mashkeu 
pliut jatin, aur mai bah jiti, aur mash- 
keg khar&b ho jitin ; baiki nayi mai 
nayi maskkou mon bharte hain, to 
donon bachi rahtl hain. . 

IH \ Jab wuh yih bAten un ne kab 
mha tha, dekbo,ek sardar ne akar use 
sijda kiya, aur kalia, Mori bcti ab 
tamani bui, par tu ehal, aur apnd hath 
uh par rakh, ki wuh ji Hfliegi 

10 Tab Yisu' utbke apuo shilgirdun 
ke sath us ke picbho chala. 

20 \ Aur, dekho, ek 'aurat nc, lla 
k;i barah baras se lahii jari thA, us ke 
piohhe ake us ko kurte kA daniati 
eh hua. 

21 Wuh apne ji men kahtl thl, Agar 
main sirf us kA kurtA cUtnuingi, bhali 
changi ho jaiin^i, 

22 Tab Yisu' ne picbhe pbirke use 
dekhA, aur kaha, Ai beti, kbdtir jam'a 
rakh, ki tere imiln no tujlie «lianga 
kiya. Pas, wuh 'aurat nsi ghari h 
changi ho gayi. 

23 Aur jab Yisii' ua sardir ko ghu 
pahuneha, aur us ne bAnsli bajdue- 
walon aur jami'at ko gul macbAte 
duk ha, 

24 To unhen kahA, Kan&ro ho. ki 
larki mari nahin, baiki got! I 

us par hanae. 

25 Jab we log bAhar nikAlit gaye, us 
ne andar jAke us kA hath pukra, aur 
wuh larki uthi. 

26 Tab uh ki shidjrat us tamAm 
niulk mcn phailt. 

27 D Aur^ab Yiad' wahan so ra- 
wAna huA, do andhe ufl ke pichhc 
pukarte Ae, ki Ai Ibn i Ddiid, ham par 
rahm kar. 

2U Aur jab wuh ghar men pahun- 
chA, we audhe us pas Ae: Yisu' no 
unhen kahA, KyA tumben i'atinad hai, 
ki roargyib karsaktAhiinV "Webole. 
HAn, ai KhudAwand. 



Do andhon ko dnkk den A. 



MATI', S. Samifon ko kain par bfajna. 



2u Tab us ne un ki inkhon ko 
chhuki> ktthA, ki Jaisi tumhiri j atiqid 
hai,*waisA tumbire liye ho. 

30 Aur uu ki Aukbun khul inviii ; 
MH Itetf ne unhen tikkl karke kuini, 
Khnbardar, koi na jam 1 . 

31 Par unhog no jakc 
mulk tnog uh ki shuirat kf. 

32 •( Jis waqt wo biliar nikle, dc- 
Mw^legdcg^aa ko jU pardeo charhi 
thd, us pis lioT 

33 Aur jtib dco nikala gayA, wub 
giinga bola. Aur logon ue ta'ajjub 
karke kahi, Aisi kabhi U>a«l nu-n a» 
dekhi tbi 

34 Par Farision no kahi, ki Wul 
dcoi) ke siiriliir ki mailad se dt'ori ko 
nibalta hai. 

30" Aur Yisd' un sah shahron. aur 
bastioy men jiko un ke 'ibadatkhiaon 
men ta'lfm deta, aur badhhabat ki 
khushkhahari ki mariadi, aur tafog ki 
hai ok bluiArf aur dukh dani «iur karta 
UiA. 

36 % Aur jab us ne jami'aton ko 
dekili, us ko un par rahm ayi ; 
kyunki to, un bheron ki miliiud, jin 
ki charwAhA na do, 'ajis aur paresiiAu 
tiiin. 

37 Tnb us ne apno shiginkm se 
kalut, ki Pakko khut tu bahut bain, 
par nuuulnr thote ; 

38 Is liye tum khet ke milik ki 
minnat karo, ki wuh apne khet kitne 
ke liye mazduron ko bhej dewa. 

X BATJ. 

PHI1I us ne apno birah shigirdon 
ko pda bulike unheo qudrat 
bakhshi, ki ndpik niliori ko nikilen, 
aur Uar tarah ki biiuiri aurdukh dard. 
ko dur karet). 

2 Aur birah rasulon ke yo nim 
hain ; Pahla, BbauiiTuD, jo Patrus kah- 
lilA, aur us ki bhAS AndryAB ; Zabadi 
ki beta Ya'qd b i aiir m ^A bnii 
YuhanuA ; 

3 Fail Ini* aur IWthulftiiia ; Thuma, 

J4 



aur mahMl-lenewila Mati ; Haiti ka 
btita Ya'qiib,aur Labbi, jo Thaddi bhi 
kaiilitA ; 

4 Sbamn'un Kaniiri, aur YabudAli 
Is^anyiki, jia «e use pakajwi bhi 
diya. 
tamani I 5 Un birahori ko Yisu* no farniake 
bbef», ki GattipHimoij ki t;iraf «ajaiii, 
aiu- Simarion ke kini sliahr inen dakhil 
n a boni : 

G Baiki pahle Ieriol ke ghar ki 
kboi hiii bheron ke pas jio. 
"^7 A"ur cbaite hiio manili karo, aur 
kabo, ki A'smau ki hAdahihat aa»dik 



8 Bimiron ko chau^i karo, korbion 
ko pdk sif biro, murdou ko jilio, deog 
ko nikilo • tOBB no nu4't ])iyi,"rnuft dn. 

9 Na soni, na rilpi, DA tiuibi apni 
kajiiar men rnkho. 

10 Rasto ke liye na jholi, na do 
kurto, na jiitian, na lithi lo; kyiinki 
kburik mawUir ki baM hai. 

U Aur jia shalir yi baati men di- 
kliil ho, diiryalt klM ki liiiq waban 
liaiin hai, aur jab tak walii'm m m 
niklo, wahin raho. 

12 Auriab tutu kiai gbar men jio, 
uae aalim karo. 

13 Agar wuh ghar Jiiq hai, to tum- 
biri salim use pahunebega ; aur aj^ar 
Iiiq nahiii, tu turohiri salim tutu par 
pbir iwegi. 

14 Aur jo koi tumben qabril na 
kare, aur tumbari batoii oa «une, us 
ghar ya ua ahahr se nikalke apno 
pinwon kf gard jbir do. 

16 Main tifTh ee sach kahia hritj, ki 
Adihit ka din tSadfim aur 'Amurah 
ki zamin ke liye us sha'nr ki nistat 
ziyada asini bogi. 

16 K Dtkho, main tumhcg bberon 
ki minind bbcriyou ke hich men 
bbejti bun ; [«3 tum «Anirioti ki Urnh 
hoahyir, aur kabutarou ki miniud 
be-bad ho. 

17 Magaridmtonsckliabnr'l.'ir PallO, 
ki we tumben apni kauhahriuu inun 



Un, Aojtt'dnu, ki tum MATI' 

bawal» luHmuB. aur apne 'ibddatkhin- 
uQ men koro mirotige; 

18 Aififi tum mere wiste hikimon 

aur bidahihon ke simbne hd/.ir kiyc 
jioge, ki un par aur guir-qau.niuo par 
g ftw& hi ho. 

19 Lekin jab wo tumben hawiln 
liurpij, tikr na karo, ki haru kis tarah, 
yd kyi kahenge; kyunki jo kuchh 
tumhen kabne boga, so uai gkari tum- 
ben uh ki igihi hogi. 

20 KyuijkfTiahiiewAle tum nahin, 
baiki tumbire Bip ki Ruh jo tum men 
bolti hai. 

21 Bhii bbii ko, aur Mp bete ko, 
qatl ke liye bawAla karegd, aur larke 
apne mi bip ki mtikbahlat men uth- 
eijge, aur unhen luarwaaiUenga. 

22 Aur mere nim ko bi'is sah tum 
so dushmani karenge ; par wuh jo 
akhir tak bardisht karogd, so hi najit 
piwegi, 

23 Jab we tumben ck shahr men 
Hfitaweu, to ddsre m e n bhag jao : 
tum se sach kahtd hfijj, ki Tum Israel 
ke Bab shabrurt saja na. phir chukoge, 
jab tak ki Ibn i A'dam na a h. 

24 SihAgird apne ustad se bari na- 
hin, na naukar apne khiwind ae. 

25 Has hai ki shagird a.pnc ustad 
ki> aur naukur apne khdwiud ki ini- 
nind bo. Jab unhoy ne ghar ke 
milik ko B»'al-xabul kahd hai, tc 
kitni r.iyida us ko logorj ko na ka> 
henge ? 

2G Pas un so na daro ; kyiinki kol 
rim dhnmpi nahin, jo khul na jas, aur 
na chbipi, jo jAni na jdo. 

27 Jo kuchh main tumben andhere 
nien kabtd hdn, ujalc men kah< 
j" Jiui'iiii tumhare "kdnon men kahd 
i;i<\ kothon par n ia nadi karo. 

28 Aur un ne, jo badan ko qatl 
karte, par jin ko qatl nahin kar saktc, 
mal daro; baiki usise daro, jo jin aur 
badan, donon ko, jahannara men haldk 
kar sakti hai. 

29 Kyi ek p&iee ko do gaurc nahin 

15 



X. Injil ke ba'is xat&cj'doge. 

ia? aur un men se, ck bbi, tum- 
bdre BAp ki be marzi, zainin par na- 
hin girti. 

30 Baiki tumlutnj air. ke hal bUi Utfc 
ginc hue hain. 

31 Pas matdaro, tum bahut gaurorj 
bihtar ho. 

32 Ia liye jo koi ddminrj ke Age 
mord icjrdr karegi, main bhi apne Bap 
ke dge, jo dsman par hai, us ki iqrdr 
kaninga. 

33 Parjokoiddmion keigcmeriiu- 
kir kaiegi, main bW apni; Bip ke 
ige, jo damiu par hai, us ki inkir 
kiin'med. 

34 Yih mat samjhn, ki main zamiu 
par silih karwine dyi ; sulh karwdno 
nabin,' baiki tatwdr clialine ko'dyd 
Ulin. 

35 Kyunki main ayd hfin, ki mord 
ko us ke bip, aur beti ko ua ki mi, 
nur babu ko us ki ais so judi karun. 

36 Aur idmi ke dushman us ko 
ghar hi ko log honge. 

37 Jo kol bip yi mi ko mtijh H 
Eiyida chilitd hai, mrrc laiq nabin 
hai ; aur jo kol boti yi beti ko nuijli 
se Kiyida piydr kartd, mero h'uq naliiu 
hai. 

38 Aur jo koi apni salib uthiko 
mere pichhe nahfn dti, mere ldiq na- 
hin hai. 

39 Jo koi apni jin bjichiti hai, use 
khocgi j par jo koi mere wdste apni 
jin khoegi, ubo piegi. 

40 t Jo tumten" qabdl karti, nm- 
jhe qabul karti hai ; aur jo mujlie qa- 
bi'il karti hai, use, jis no mujlie bhejd, 
(jahili karti hai. 

41 Jo koi nabi ke nam se nabi ko 
«jabiil karti hai, nabi kiajtpiegi-, aur 
jo rastbiz ke nim se idstbdz ko qabul 
karti, raatbdz ki ajr pdcgi, 

42 Aur jo koi ic chhoton raon se ek 
ko, ahigirdke tidm se, Impit ek piynki 
t ha tuli pini pilacgi, main tum so B*ch 
tahta 1 hiin, ki wuh apni badld ba piu 
na rahegi, 



Tab Yfihanna ne qaidkbine men 
Masih ke kimon ka hal aunkar apne 



MATI', XI. gtidr otir darja. 

XI BA'B. I 13 Kyiinki sab nabi mtt tmiretue 

l UR aisa hiia, ki jab Tisu' apne lYiihanna ke waqt tak agc ki khabar 
' di. 

14 Aur Jliyas jo itnewtUa tha, yihi 
hai ; chaho, to qabiil karo. 

15 Jia kisi ke kau sunne ke hon, 

BtlOO. 

1G ^ Lekin i» zaman« ke logon kn 
main kia «e tamsil drin? Wfl uiflar- 
kon ki manind hain, j» ba/aron meg 
baithke apne yaron k» pukarke kahte 
hain, ki 

17 Hara ne tuniharo waste bdnsli 
bajai, pnr tum na nache ; ham no 
tumhare liye malam, kiya, p«y ftl» i.v 
chhati na piti. 

18 Kyunki Yiihanna kbatapita na- 
bin aya, aur we kahfcj bain, ki TJs par 
t'k deo liai. 

19 Ibn i A'dam kh&ta pita aya, aur 
we kahte hain, ki Dekho, ek khaii, aur 
shar&bi, aur uialisiil lenewalnn aur 
gunah<;riron ka yar. Par hikmat apiie 
far/andog kY age ras t thahri, 

20 f Tab un Bhahron ko, jin men 
uh ke bahut se mu'ajiza zahir huo, 
malamat karne hai, kyunki unhon ne 
(aura na ki tbi : ki 

21 Ai Kurawa, tujh jmr afsoa! ai 
Bait-Saida, tujh par afsos I kyunki 
yih mnajize Jo tum uicn dikhae gaye, 
agar Siir o Saidd dmq dikbiie jiitr?, lo 
we tiit orhkc, aur k hak men buithkc, 
kali Ee tanba kar diukir. 

22 Pas main tum se kahta hi'in, ki 
Siir o Saida ka liye 'adalat ko di u tum 

ziyada asini hogi. 

23 Aur, ai Knfarnahnra, jo asman 
tak palvunciiaya gaya, tii dozakh itioij 
giraya jacga : kyiinki yih mu'ajize jo 
tujh ucn dikhae gaye, agar Sadiim 
men dikhae jate, to aj tak qdjm rnhta. 

*i4 Par main tum 3c kalita bun, ki 
'Adalat ke din Sadrim ke umlk par 
tujh h sdyada a«ani hogi. 

25 T Usi waqt Tisu* phir kahuo 
laga, ki, Ai bap, asniiin aur /amin ku 
Kliuiiawaud, main, teri ta'rif karta 



bara.ii sbagirdon ko bukm de 
(j)iuka, to wahai) so rawana htia, ki uo 
ko Ehahrou men ta'lirn aur roaua&i 
kare. _ 

na ne qr 
j ka hal 
pliagirdon inci] se do ko bheja, aur 
se puchhwaya, k i 

'A Kya, jo artewala tha, tii hi hai, 
ya bani dusre ki rdli takeu ? 

4 YisiV ne jawas meh unhen kahi, 
ki Jo kucbh tum sunteaurdcklitc lio, 
jake Yiihanna so baydn karo; ki 

5 Andhe dekbte, nur langre cbnlte, 
korlii pak aaf hote, ftur bahre uunte, 
aur murde ji utbte hain, aur garibon 
ko kbush-khabari sunai jati bai. 

Aur mubarak wub hai, jo mere 
sabab thokar.ua khde. 

7 1T Jib we rawana buc, Yiad" Yii- 
bauna ki bibat janja'atoD ho kahne 
lagi, ki Tum jangal nien kya dekbne 
ko gaye ? Kya, ek sark;inda, jo bawa 
se bilta hai ? 

S Phir tum kya dckhne ko gaye ? 
Kya, ek mard ko, jo ruihin knpj-a i>a- 
hine hai V dekho, jo mih'm jwsliak 
pabinte badshihoQ ke muhallon nu'n 

9 Phir tum kyd dekbne ko gaye? 
Kya, ek nabi? han, main tum se 
kahta hdn, baiki nabi se bara. 

10 Kyiinki yih wuh hai, ji* ki ba- 
bat likha hai, ki, Dekbo, main upna. 

■ :igo bliujta hiin, jo tere ige 
teri rah durust karegi. 

11 Main tum Be sach kahta hiin, ki 
Un men se jo "auraton so jiaida hie, 
Yuhanna bapMama-deoeww* »o koi 
bani zahir naluri bui ; k-kin jo asman 
ki bailshahat men ebbotd hai, so us se 
bara hai. 

12 Y(ihauna baptisma-denewile ko 
waqt Ne ab tak asman ki b&dsbahat 
par /.abardasti hoti hai, aur zabardaet 
lug use (.'l i liin lete hain. 

m 



A'rdm.jo W Musik m kata. MATI', XII. Farisian Jei zid-l H babat. 



In'ui, ki tii ne in cbi/.on ko ddiiAon aur 
'anjuianduii so ehhipaya, aur b 
par khol diva. 

2<i IIAn, ai Bap, ki yunhin tujhc 
pasam.i a ya. 

27 Hero Bap «o Bab kuchh mujko 

Zpa gaya, aur koi Bete ko nabin 
a, niagar Uap; aur koi Bap ku 
n&hlrj janta, magai Beta, aur wuh, jis 
par lletd tiso z&hir kiya chdhta. 

28 ^f Ai tum los", j" thake aur bara 
bojh Be dabe ho, sab mere pas do ; ki 
main tutimetj ariim diinga. 

29 Mera jv.a apoe lipar le lo, aur 
mujh ao aikho ; kyiinki main halim, 
aur ilil sc khaksdr lifin; to timi apue 
jion men araiTT paoge. 

80 Kyiinki men jua inulaim, aur 
merd bojh halkd hai. 

XII BA'B. 

U S waqt Yisii" nbt ke din khetnn 
nun ee jala iba, aur ns ke 
abigird bhiikhe tlie, aur we balen tor 
tor kliane lage. 

2 Tab Fariaion ne dekhke us se 
kahd, Dckli, u.Tu sbdgird wuh k Ain 
karte bain, jo sabt ke din kami rawi 
nabin. 

3 l'ar ua ne uiibcn kahA, Kyi tum 
ne nabin pftTbjf fo Daml ne kiyii, jali 
wuh aur us ke sathi bhuklic thc? 

4 Wub kyiinkar Khuda ku ghar 
men. gaya, aur nazr ki rotian khaiu, jo 
us ko aur us ko sdthion ko khdnd rawa 
na tba, magar fsujat kuhinon ko rawa 
tba? 

5 Aur kyd rum ne tauret men na- 
':in parha, ki kahin sabt ke din baikal 

- ki hurmat nabin karWj tau 
l:u «B-gunah haTn? 

6 Aur main tumben kahtA hfin, ki 
Yulian ek shakhs hal, jo baikal se bM 
boznrg bai. 

7 l'ar agar twn us ki ma'ni jante, 
ki Main <]iirbani ko n:ihin, baiki rahm 
ko chahtd hiin, to tum bo-gunihuu ko 
gunahgdr na thahrAte. 

17 



8 Kyiinki Ibu i A'dam sabt ka bbi 
Khudawand hai. 

!! l'bir walnln .se niwatia boke un 
ke 'ilj:iil:itkhaua men gaya: 

10 ^ Aur,dokho, wahan ek ahakhs 
thd, jis ka InUh ciikh gayd thd. Tab 
union uv, is irade se ki ua par n aliah 
karen, us se piichha, ki Kyi sabTke 
din enangi karud rawa hai? 

11 Us ne unben kahA, ki Tum men. 
se aisd kaun hai, ki jis ke pas ek bher 
ho, agar wuh sabt ke din garhc mej 
gire, wuh use pakar ke na nikale ? 

12 Tas adui! btier se kitnd bibtar 
hai? Ia liye sabt ke diu nekf karnl 
rawA bai. 

13 Tab ua ne ua uhakhs ko kahd, ki 
Apiia hath lambi kar. Aur us ne use 
liunba kiya, aur wuh duere ki mdnind 
"dbanga ho gaya. 

14 *[ Tab Farision ne bdhar jdkc 
ua ki zidd par saldh ki, ki use kyiin- 
kar riiiir dalen. 

15 Yisii' yib jdnke wabdn se chala ; 
aur babat si jamd'aten ua ke pichhe 
ho lin,auruanc un aabkodiangakiyd; 

IB Aur unben Ukld ki, ki raujho 
/ahir na karna: 

17 TS ki wuh, jo Yas'aiydh nabi ne 
kabd thd, piird ho, ki 

18 Deklio meni khadim, jise main 
ne cluina, aur mera piyarii, jia so merd 
dil kbusb bai, main apni nih us par 
daliiuga,aur wub gair-qaumon ae ahai'a 
liayan karegd. * 

l'J Wub jliagrd aur ahur na karegd, 
aur baziirofl meg koi us ki Awdz na 
BunegA, 

20 Wub masle biie aarkando kt> na 
toregri, aur dhduwdn uthtc hue aan ko 
na bujlidwoga, jab tak insaf ko gdlib 
n a kardwe. 

21 Aur us ke ndm par gair-qaumcn 
asri mkhengi. 

22 t Tab us pda ek nndho gungo 
ko,jia pai deo cbai-hd thd, !Ae, aur ru 
m uw ohangA kly'd; chutianobi wuh 
andhii giiugi duklmu boiue laga» 

B 



Ek andha gunge ko MATI' 

23 Aur sAri Vihir dftBg lio gayi, aur 

kahne lagi, Kyi y ih Diud ki beti 

•J-l I'nr Pnrision ne aunke kahi, ki 
Yih deog ku naluri nikahi, inagar 
dtsin ku sarilar lia'al-y.abiil ki raadud 

25 Yisti' no un ke khtyalon ko 
darvift karke onheg kahi, Jo jo bad- 
ahahat ipas men lurkbilaf ho, wiran 
hojiili; aurjia Jis ahahr ya gliar lucu 
inukhalafat ho, ;iMd na i : ■- 1 ■ 

26 Aur agar Shnitin Hhaitan ko 
nikalo, Lu wuh atmi hi mukliiilif hila ; 
jiliir lis ki badshahat kvi'mkar aiim 
rahegi? 

27 Aur agar main Ba'al-zabul ki 
madad ne d«>n ko nikalti lilin, lo tuni- 
hire befi uulieii kis ki madad m rnkiltt: 
linin? is liye m bi tumhdri 'adalat 
karegge. 

28 PM ftgftr main Khudiki Riih se 
dpon ko nikalti hiin, to a 1 hatta Khudi 
ki had,-h:ihat timi pi» a pahuncM. 

29 Mahin to, kyimkur ho sakti lifti, 
ki kof kiai -iorawar ke ghar men jakar 
u» ke asbab hit lo, inagar yili, ki pahle 
ns aorfwai kubainllie? tabus k&ghar 
ldte. 

30 Jo more sith nahin, meTa mu- 
klnilil' Jiai ; aur jo men sith jaui'a 
nabiij kana, l>itbrari hai. 

81 T Ia liyo main tum so kahti 
lilin, ki Logon ki liur tarah ka gumih 
aur ku IV inn';if kiya jicgi; magar wuh 
ku&, jo Hiih ke hau^ men ho» legen 
ko uiu'af na hogi. 

32 Jo ko! Ibu i A'dam ko haqq men 
buri kahe, use mu'if ho eakuga ; par 
jo ttuh i Quds ke haoo men buni kaho, 
use hargiz u m' A i' na hogi, na ia j a hiu 
muTj, na us jahdn men. 

33 Ya to diirakht ko achchhi kalm, 
aur us ke phal ko achchhi, ya darakht 
ko bura kaho, aur us ka phal buri ; 
kyuiiki darakht phal hi so pabchaiii 
jati hai. 

34 Ai sampon ke bachcho, tum bure 

13 



SIT. chaiiyd ftanuS, 

jhoie kyiinkar achchhi bit kali sak t e 
ho? kytinkijo dil men bhara hai; M 
bi mirah par iti hai. 

35 Achchhi fidiui dil ke acliclihe 
khazane «n achchhi chizeg nikalti hai, 
aur buri idmi huro khazane Rfl buri 
ohkes bahu liti. 

S Par main tum ae kali ti hiin, ki 
Uar ■:]; l»*]n'k'.a lnit, jo ki Ji.^ kulifij, 
'ailalat ko din uh kii hiwil.t den-.'. 

37 Kytinki ttt apnloiton hi so riet- 
kir elui jaoga, aur npui baton hi so 
f;iuia]i;;!ir tlialnoga. 

1f 1'ab ba'ze faq(hon aur I'au- 
stog oekwib mq kahi, ki Ai i i d, 
ham tujh su ek niehiu dekha chibta 
hain. 

3'J TJa no unhea jawib diyi, ki Ia 
zaniano ke bad aur harAmkar log nislian 
dhunijjitc hain; pu Yrtuaa nabi ko 
nishiu ke niwi, koi nishin nuhen dikh- 
iyi ua jaogi. 

•tO Kyunki jaisa Yijnas tin rit diu 
machlili ko pet men raba, waisa hi Ibu 
i A 'dam tio rat diu zjutiiu ke andar 
rahegi. 

41 Ninawah ke log ia zamane ke 
logoii ke sath 'adalat ko diu afhenge, 
aur unhDn gunahgar thahraengu; ky- 
iiuki unhon ueYunas ki raauadi par 
tauba ki, aur, dekho, yauiii ek hai jo 
Yunaa se bu/urg hai. 

42 Dnkhin ki begam is itamine ko 
logon ke satli 'adalat ko din uthagi, 
aur unhen gunahgir thahriegi : kyim- 
ki wuh zamki ko kariare sc Sulaiman 
ki hikmat sunno ko ai; aur, dok ho, 
yahan ek Sulaiman so buzurg hai. 

43 Jab nii(i:ik riih adud se bahar 
nikalti, to siikhi jagahofi inen i ram 
dhundhti phirti, aur jab nahin pati, to 
ktilili.'ki 

4 1 Main apne ghar men, jis w nikli 
hurj, phir jiungi; aur ako use khali 
aur jhaii aur lais pati hai. 

46 «b wuh jakc aur ait rthon, jo 

t«I hain, apne a&th lAi i ; aut 

wedakhil hoke waiiin baslihain; so 



Bonewdlc aur U} MATI' 

us Admi ka piehhlA lidi n?le se buni 
hota hai. [i zamana ke logofl U hai 
blii aisa bt hogA. 

46 f Jab wuli jnmfi'aton se vih kah 
viiha lini, dekho, us ki roJ aur ua ki 
lihai bahar khare ua se bit ki ya ehAhte 
llic. 

47 Tab kiwi no us se knhi, ki lVkh, 
teri ma aur tere l)hai bahar klmre bujb 
s(r hat k iya. chahte hain. 

4ri Par us iie jawab men khabar- 
deuewilou .se kaba, Kaus hai meri 
mi ? aur kaun hain mere bhat ? 

40 Aur KpnA bal h apne ahagiruorj 
ki taraf barbake kuha, ki Dokh meri 
ma aur mere bhiU 

50 Kyuiiki jo kd mera Mp ki, jo 
bunian par hai, raarzi par eh:i!ia b:ii. 
mcrf bbai, aur baliin, aur mi, woilii 
hai. 

XIII TiA'It. 

U SI' roz Yisii' ghar s<> nikalke 
ikirvri ke kanaru jii, baithi. 

2 Aur aisi bari bhir us pas jam'a 
bui, ki wuh ek nuw par charh baithi, 
aur sari bhir kanAro par kuari rabi. 

3 Aur wub unhas babat ai laten 
tamsilon men kahne laga, ki Uokho, 
ek kisau bij bom* gaya; 

4 Aur bote waqt kuobh rah ke ka- 
il Aro giri, aur chiriyon ne akar use 
ehug UyA : 

5 Aur kucbh patthrili Kamin par 
girajahan bahut mitti na mili : aur is 
eabab ki bahut mitti na pai, jald uga : 

li Par jab dhupiuii, jalgaya; aur i s 
liy<' ki jar ua pakri thi, stikh gaya. 

7 Aur kucbh kaiitou men giri; 
kantin ne barhke use daba liya. 

8 Aur kuchh achchbi zamin men 
giri, aur pbal lava, kuchb sau guna, 
kuchh Bit.li guuA, kuchh tis gunA. 

Jia ke kati surme ke liyo hon, to 

10 Tab shaginlon na pas Ake ua 
kahA, Tii uu se tamsilon men kyi'm 
kalam harta 1 hai f 

11 Us no jawAb men unben kahA, 

19 



XIII. UtamtH 

ki Tumben 'iuAyat bni, ki asmin ki 
badshahat ke bhed jAnu, par uuhen 
'iniyat nahin lnii. 

12 Kyiiuki jia pAa kuchb hai, use 
diva jiega, tui tu ki bahut bariui 
bogf ; pai jis pas kuobh nahin, us se, 
jo kuchb ki ua pAs hai, 80 blii le liya 
jaegA. 

13 Ib liye main un se tamsilon men 
bit karta hun: ki wu dfikbta h m- na- 
hin (iekhte, aur ;;uiue hiie nahin sunte, 
aur nabiij samjylit.c hain, 

14 Aur un k* haqq men Taa'aiyAb 

kS nubuwat puri hui: ki Tum kAuon 
ae to sunoge, masar Bamjbogc rtaliin, 
aur Ankbon so dekhoge, par daCTift na 
karogH : " z * 

15 Kyunki is qaurn kA dil mota 
hua, aur we apua kiimin U linciiA sunte 
bain.aur unhun ne aani ankhcy mu&d 
lin, t-A aisA na bo, ki we Ankhog se 
dL'klu'ii, aur kAuon so aunen, aur dil so 
samjhen, aur ruju' laweti, aur main 
iiii]m-;j Changi karun. 

lfj Par mubarak tumliAri AukliPn, 
kyiinki we dekbtin, aur mubarak tum* 
hiro kan, ki we suute hain, 

17 Kyiinki main tum se saoh kabta 
hun, ki Bahut «i nabi aur riatbAzon 
no Arzii ki, ki Jo tum dflkbte bo 
dekhen, pai na dekhA, aur jo tum 
sunte ho sunen, par na aund. 

Iti *i Abtuni lusin ki tamafl rona. 

19 Jab koi us bAdshibat ki bit 
suni:l-, aur nahin Rauiajhta, to wub 
sharir Ata, aur jo kuchh u» ke dil 
men boyA gayA le jdti hai; yih wuli 
hai, jo rah ke kanAro l«>yA gayA. 

20 Jo patthrili Kamin men boy4 
gaya, wub hai, jo kulim suutA, aur 
jald khushi B0 inAn kita hai ; 

21* Lekin is sakab ki jar nahin 
pakri, Cba&&-f0ca hai : ki jab wuli 

kalam ke Babab musibat mag partai, 

ya satayi jati hai, to jald tlmkar 
kbitA hai, 

^2 Jo kantan men boyA gayA, wub 
hai, jo kalam ko suutA, par is dunyi 



Jtij lonewalc ki ««r MATI', XIII. talkh ddnon H tamsilev. 

'M Yih sab Iidten Yisii' ne un ja- 
md'aton ko tamstlon nien kabin : bot 



ki (ikr, aur daulat kd farcb, kaldm ko 
dahd diatfl, aur wuh bc-plia! hoti bal 

23 Pfte jo ocliclihi /.amin men boyd 
gaya, wuh hai, Jo kalam ko mati, aur 
Sftmajota, aur phal laba, aur taiydr bhi 
botd, ba'ze men Bau guna, ba f 
s;ifli gund, liaV.i.! men i.is guna. 

24 1[ Phir ua iic. i-k aur lamsU lako 
unhen kahd, ki A'smdn ki badshdhat 
ua admi ki mdnitnl hai, jis Ba ackchhd 
bij apne khet men boyd. 

35 Var jab log ho gaye, us kd duah- 
nm» ayd, aur ua ke gfth&S k» dai- 
miydn karwa dana boke chald guyd. 

26 Jiswaq) aukurd nikla, aur hdlon 
lagin, tab kans-a dana blii {tabir hiia. 

27 Tab us gharwdle ke naukaron 
ne dke ua ae kahd, Ai adhib, kyii tii ae 
khet men achchhe bij na Ixio the? 
phir karwe ddna kalian ae Ae ? 

28 lfs ne unheii kahd, Kisil dush- 
man ne yiii kiya. Tab naukftKfl ne 
kahd, Agar marzi bt>, to bara jako un- 
hen jaru'a karon. 

2i> Us iit! kahd, Nabin ; aiad na ho, 
ki J(ib tum karwe dantm ko jaui'a 
karo, w u» ku adili gelmu bhi ukbdr 
lo. 

30 Kdrne ke din tak donoii ko 
ikatthe barhne do; ki main katne 
k.; WKjt kar.newdlnn ko kuhi'njgd, ki 
Pahlekarwedanejanvn karo, aur jaJAne 
ke mSate un ke gatthe bfedfao; par 
geiiiin mere khatte mea ja.m'a karo. 

SI 1 W uh un ke wanLo ek aur 
tamsil htjTJ, ki A'smdn ki badskdbat 
khanial ke dana ki mdniud hai,Jlse 
ek abakhs nalekeaute khet moa boyi. 

32 Wuh sab bljfifj mrri cnnofA; 
BU Jab uga, 1« *ab tarkdrion st: baya 

■■r niwi per hobi, ki cblliyierj 
: iialion par bascra kartiri. 

33 ^ Us ne un k« ek aur tamsil 
kahi, ki A'smdii ki ba.lshahat khamir 
Iri minind hai, jise "'k 'aurat ne le-kar 
ate ke tin jiaimanon mcn niildyi, 
yahda tak ki wuh sab kaamlra lio 

g«yd- 



Lie tamsil un se na boltd tbd: 

35 Td ki jo nabi ne kah.4 tbti, pura 
ho, ki Maiii tainsili'Tj lakar kulim 
kan'ing.i; main un bdton ko, jo dunyd 
ke ehurii' se ]K>nhida hain, zabir kar- 
v.ij. i'i. 

36 Tab l'iau' un jama'aton ko 
rukhsat karkc ghar ko gaya ; aur ua 
ke ibagirdog Dfl m pu tik kalia, 
Kbi't ke karwe ddna ki tamail bameg 
Uita. 

37 Us ne unhen jawdb men kahd, 
Achchlie hij kd bunewdla lbn i A'dara 
hai ; 

38 Khct, dunvd bnd; aclnihlic liij, 
is badsbaliat ke larke hain ; aur karwo 
dana, sharir ke larzand ; 

39 W u h diiMhuiau, jis nc unberj 
boyd, Bhaitaii hai ; kdtno kd wagt, 
is dunyd ka dkliir ; aur katuuwdle, 
tirisbte hain. 

40 l'aa jis tarah karwe dana jam'a 
kiye jdte, aur ag raeij jaldo jate kain, 
is jahdn ke dkbir raefl ai.~;i, lu hogd, 

41 Ibu i A'dam a|>ne firialitori ko 
bbejegd, aur we sab thuUar-khilaiK- 
wdli cbJzon, aur badkdrojj ko, us kl 
bad*hahat moti so chunkar, 

42 Unheti ja)U' lauiirnicuddldengoj 
aur wahan rond aur diiitt jtisni lu iga. 

43 Tab" riWbaz ajjiie Uap ki b.id- 
shahat men dftdh ki niiinind mirani 
bogge. Ji;o kau Btuvuo ke liye ton, 

-14 % Phir, asnidrj ki bddsbdhnt us 
khazdne ki mdnind hai, jo khet niea 
gord hai, jiae ok shakha pdke chbipi 
deii hai, aur khush\ ke min Jdko 
apnd aab kuchh becbtd, aur ua khei 
ko mul letd hai. 

45 1 Phir, taman kf bddshAhftt us 
sauddgar ki mduind hai, jo qimali 
moticn ki taldah men hai. 

4G Jab us u ek beBh-tjiattt moti 
pAyi, to jdkejo kucfab »s kd thd sab 
bech ddldj aur uso mol liya. 



MaehJdt kej'dl ki tamsil. 



MATI', XIV. Y>A'-inii<>. ke gir kii h'ita ja-na. 



47 t Phir, aamaii ki badahdliat as 
jal ki maiiiiid hai, 30 daryd meg dahi 
gaya, aur har tarah ki macbhli samet 
lava. 

18 Jab wuh bhar gayd, OM kanare 
khaiiioh Ide, aur baithko achchbi 
lnaehhlian bu n anuti men jani'a kin, par 
buri pheuk «13. 

49 lu jakdn ke dkhir men aiaa hf 
hogd ; firisliu; awerjge, aur rastbazorj 
meu su shariron ku alag karegge, 

50 Aur utiheii jalte tauiir uuen dai 
dcnge; walidu roua aur daut piara 
bogd. 

51 Yisii* no unhen kahd, Tum yih 
eab BauijheV Unboii ne kaha, Han, 
Klimiawand. 

L>li Tab us ne unhen kaha, Itar ek 
fiicjili jo asinan ki badtduUiat ki ta'liiu 
pa cbuka, us gharwale ki nuiiiiud hai, 
jo apuo kliazanc se uayi aur purani 
chfsei] (likiilta bal 

53 T Aur aisa hud, ki jab Yisft' 
yili tamsitOB kali chuka, to wahin se 
rawana h i'. a. 

54 Aur apue watan men ake us ne 
un ke 'ibadatkhana men unhen ai.-u 
la'lin; di ki ive kairan hue, aur kahue 
laga, ki Aisi hikmat, aur nm'ajize, U3 
m: kalian so \&e'( 

00 Kya yiii barhai ka beta nahirj ? 
aur us ki uni. Manyam nuhin kaulari? 
aur u» ke bluii Ya'ipib, aur Yosea, aur 
Shama'tin, aur Yahud&h ? 

5G Aur ua ki aab bahinon hamare 
sdth nahin hain.? Pas ua ue yih Bab 
kuelui kalian, se paya? 

67 Unhon ne us so thokar khdi ; 
par Siali' ue unhen kaha, ki Nnbi 
apuo watan aur g liar ke siwd, 
kabin be-'izzat nahin hal 

06 Aur us ne un ki be-ia'thpidi ke 
sabab wahan bahut uiu'ajize nalu'11 
dik liat'. 

XIV BA'B. 

U B waqt milik ki chauthai ke 
lidkiin Herodis ne Yiad' ki 
sbuhrat suni, 
21 



- Aur apoe naukarou se kaha, ki 
Yih Yuhaniia bnntisina-donewdla hai , 
wuhi ruui-don men. »0 ji utiiahai; ia 
liye ua ae iiiu'aji/.<: zahir hote hain. 

■'i % Ki Herudis ue Ytibaiiua ko 
Herodiyds ko aabab, jj us ke bliai 
Faillhiis ki jorii tlii, giriftar kiyii, aur 
baodhke qaidkbirie meu dai diya iba. 

4 Js liye ki Yuhanua n*.- us «e kaltii 

a, ki Tujbe ua ko lakbna rawa 
nabja. 

H Aur Herodia De chaha, ki use 
iiuir dale, par 'awaimu »0 dara ; kyun- 
ki we use nabi jiiucc the, 

li Par jab Berodia ki salgirih lagi, 
Hcrtidiyaa ki Udl uu ko darmiyda 
udclii, aur Ilerodia ko khutfa Ifiyt 

7 Chunanchi us no qatam khdke 
wa'da kiyii, ki Jo kuchh iii tnangOgi, 
niaiii lujlic dunga, 

W Tab wuh, jidsa U3 ki ind ne uso 
aikhd rakhd tha, lx)li, ki Y'f.hamii 
bnptisma-denewdla ki sir thali men 
yahin inujiic ruaugwa dy. 

y Bddshah dilgirhiid: parusqa«im 
ke, aur un ke «abah jo us ku .-aih 
khdne baitlie the, us ue hukin kiya, 
ki UM ld «lewen. 

10 Tab ua ne logtm ko bhejkar 
ipiidkhdne men us ka air katwdyd ; 

1 L Aur us ka bir tliali men Idke us 
larki ko diya: wuh apui uia ke pas 
leai 

12 Tab us ke shdgirdoij ne ake laafa 
uthdi, aur use gara, aur jakc Y'isii' ko 
khabar di. 

13 ^ Jab Tiau' ne auna, to wahdn. 
we kiabti par liaithko alag ek wiriao 
meu Wkjii lug yih suriko shahron 
se nikie, aur khushki ki rali se us k« 
pichhe ho liyo, 

14 Aur Y'isu' ne nikalkar ek hari 
libir dekbi ; un par use ratun dya, aur 
jo un men bimar the, utiluaj ohaiigd 
kiyd. 

iii % Aur jab shdm MI, ua ke 
shagirdon ne us pa» ako kaha, ki 
Jagah wirdua hai, aur ahaui ho gayi, 



Mbutft tctmtmdar por eSe&4. MATI' 

logou ko rukiisat kar, ki we b&atfonl 
nienjdko apae ffitte k bau o ku mol 
k-u. 

['i Yisi'i' ne un sc kabd, U" kd 
jdi\d fewihb zaito mhin ■, tum yub«$ 
klidue ko do. 

17 Unliim ne HB » kabd, ki Yahdri 
liiiiiumipits ji;itj( b rofi..niuirdomachh- 
linu ke mv.ii, kw/lili iialiUi Uni. 

18 Wnh bola, ki Uuhen yahdn 
mara pita Idu. 

19 Phir iirf ne bukro kiyd, ki log 
gfafa parbaifhe&; tabun pandi roH'Hj 
nur do machhliorj ko liyd, aur aainan 
ki taraf dflkhkat harakat <li,-,uir ro$Us 
torki; «hrigirckm ko, nur lUgirdon Jll; 
logoo ko din. 

20 Aur wo tmli khdbe asi'irk hifo; 
«nr unhon nn t.nkrnn ki, Jo bach rnbe 

■ n inkrisin l'liiiii uthdfn. 

21 Aur we, jiulion Bfl khdyd tha, 
siwa 'nuratoii aur larkurj ke, qarib 
piinch bazar ke inard thc. 

22 % Aur us dam Yi~ii' B$ VpBt 
Shigiraog ko takid sc farmdya, ki 
kitbti j!!ir dnirliko niere 6gt pir jio, 
i;ll. tuk in:Uh fogog ko mkEsat kanin 

23 Pkir dp, logon korukhsat kurku, 
' thi'd ke lij'f pakar par akola charb 

: u'jal) slLam hi'ii, wahin akcla 
rahii. 

24 Par w uh fciubtf, M waqt, daryd 
ke bich pahunelikar lalifon so ilag- 
DWgitJ t'tii: kyiiuki hawa ruukhalif 
Uii. 

2Ji Aur rat ko piobhle pahnr Yisii' 
: ■ ili.ilci bu nn |.<is dyd. 

26 Jnb shdgirdoQ ne ubo daryd par 
chalte dekha, wo gnabrSke i ■ 

Vili l'lnii hai ; aur dnrk*! r.hilld\ 

27 W'r'iijiiin Yisi'i' ae uiuicii LiH, ki 
Kli&tu jain'iC rakho; «jam hi buai' 
mat daro. 

2H'Tah Patrna nc us sejawab men 
■ KliuiUittiiiii], agar u'ihibai.to 
mujfce fanoa, ki main. pdm par cbftlke 
U're pas Aiin. 

29 Uh ne kabd, A'. TabPatr'ifikisb 



XV. Furision ha mnlamat pand. 
ti ]iar se utnrke fAni i>ar chalne lagi, 
ki Yisii* ke pdsjie. 

30 Par jab oekhd ki bawd toz hai, 
todjura; aur jab dtibne laga, chillake 
kaba, Ai Kbnviawand, mujbe bachs. 

g] SVi'inhiij Yir.ii' ne liitb barbake 
Dge pakar liyii, aur ua st; knha, Ai kam- 
i'ati<idd, ti kyiip. fihakk liya? 

32 Aur Jab we kwbLi i»r de, Siawd 
tbam gayi. 

33 Aur unbon ne, jo kiwliti par tim, 
dke uae aijda karke kabd, Tu aacb 
tnucb Kbudd kd lfetd bai, 

3-1 11 Phir par utarke Gannt-sarat 
ko inulk nieij paliuitche. 

3. r ) Aur wahAii ko logOfl nu use 
pabohejoke us Uat&ta girdnawdh men 
sbnbrat di, aur wib binuiioTi ko m pda 
Ide; 

30 Aur us k( minnat ki, ki bqftt ub 
ki pushak kd ddman cblnlen : nur jit- 
iioii ne cbbiia, bilkull cbarigeho gayo. 

XV BA'B. 
TpAB Yartisalain ko farphon aur 
| Fariaitm w. YUd' piis dke kabd, 

2 Tore shagird kyibj buziir^orj ki 
riwdyatorj kr» tdl deta hain'' si ro^ 
khaim ke warjt npm* Uath iviliiij dlifto. 

3 Us ne unheu jawab men kabd, ki 
Tuiii kiri wtUte apui riwayaiug ko 
.Siilnib Kliuda kd hukm tal detfl flO F 

I Kyunki K'hndd ne' fannayft hai, 
lu Apne itid bdp k( 'kzat kar; aur jo 
nid yd bdp par Wnat kara, jan ko mara 
jde. 

6 Par tum kalite ho, ki Jo koi apne 
bdp yd md ko kalut, ki Jo kuohh 
mttjhs liijii ko licini wajib thd, so 
Keliki ki nttjtr Jiuii; 

u' Aur apne bdp ya md ki 'izzat ria 
kari:, tu km lili iiiu/ayarjanaliin. I'au 
WKi ne apni ri-nay?,t &e KbuAi ko 
hukm ko batil kiyd. 

7 Ai riydkiiro, Yas'aiydh rio kyd 
khub tunihdre Jiaf[(] inen nubdwat ki, 
jali kabd, ki 

8 YiU log apne niunli 8e meri mz- 
diki dhilndtitc, aur honthtm ae meri 



Ek fcrki ko MATI 

'izzat karto hain, par un ke dil mujh 
bc dur hai n t 

9 Lekin iro 'abai tupt'i paraslisb 
karte hain ; kyunki foi'lim karun men 
insan bi ke luikra aunitc hain. 

10 1T I'liir n> M jamd'at k<i balakar 
un sc kahd, Simo aur Bamjho : 

11 Jochiz munh men jati hai, Aditif 
b) Tiripik nahin karti, bulki wah Jo 
uumh sc Dikaiti hai, wuhi wlrnl ko 
uapak karti hai. 

12 Tab lis ko shdgirdon no us pd« 
&ke iis s? kuini, Kya ni jdntd hai, ki 
larisi yib bfit Kinkat nira/. Ml V 

18 &■ ne nn sc jawab men kah&j Jo 
paudhd mcre asmdni IMp ne tiuhiri 
lagaya, jar ae ukhiird jdegd. 

14 Unhen jdne do: «o andhe an- 
dhon ke rdh-dikhlant'wdle hain. Phir 
agar andhd andhc ko rah dikhdwe, to 
donon garhe nlt 'U g"'''!. 1 -"-- 

15 Patrua nc unhcn jawab men 
kuini, W u h tamsil hamen sunjhd, 

10 Yisu' ne kaha, KyA tiua bhi ab 
tak be-samajh bu? 

17 Abtak tum nahin aamajhtfi, kJ 
jo kuchb tnunh nion jati, pct men 
partd hai, aur garhe nion jihenka lata r 

18 Par wuh baten jo munh sc 
nikaltfn, dil se ati hain ; wc adim ko 
napak karti hain.. 

19 Kyunki ban khiyul, klinn, zina, 
hardrnkAri, cbori, jh.iif.iii gawahi, kufr, 
dil bi se nikaltc hain. 

20 Vilii lvatena.lfiiikinapakkarnp- 
w:ili hain: BU UU Shot h&th khami 
khdna ddmi ko napAk nahin karti.. 

21 % Tab Yisii' wahiiij se rawan a 
boke Stir aur Su'ula ki atraf men 
gayfc 

22 Aur, dckho.ck Kati'aui 'aurat 
wahan ki sarzamta sc uikalke use 
pukartl lnii, chaU di, ki Al Khuda- 
ii-anii, Daud ke bete, mujh pnr rahm 
kar, kl merl beti ek deo ke galbe se 
behal bal 

23 Us ne ktichh jawab na diya, 
Tab us ke shdgirdon, ne pas akar 

23 



f XV. changi fcomti, 

uh kl minnat ki, ki Use rukhaat kur, 
kyuiiki wuh ham&rc pichha eh i liati 
hai. 

24 Us ne jawab men kahd, Main 
Israel ke gliar U khoi bui bheron ke 
BiwA, aur kisi pin imbin biiejil gaya. 

25 Par wuh ai, MU use sijda karkc 
kahd, Ai Khmliiwaml, mati matlad 
kar. 

20 Us no jawAb diya, Mundsib 
nahin ki lafkon ki roti lekar kutton 
ko pHenk dewen. 

■21 Us nc kalui, Sacli, ai KhinU- 
wand, magar kutio bhi, jo tukre un 
ke khudiiwand ki mcK se girto, khate 
iiain. 

2H TabYisii'nc jawab men use kaha, 
Ai 'aurat, terd i'atiiuid liari liai : jo 
chdhti hai, tere liyc ho. Aur uai ghari 
ua ki beti changi ho gayt 

29 Phir Yisu' wahin se rawana 
hoke Jaiil ke daryd ko nazdik ava ; 
aur sk pahar par clnulikar waluiu 
balthi. 

80 Aur bnhut jama'ati'n, langrtm, 
ainllion, gi'nigou, nm tiindun, aur un 
ke wwi baluiLrroij ko siitb lekar ua 
pds Ain, aur unheri Yisn' ke pdnwon 
par dald; aur ua ne unlien changd 
kiyd:" 

31 Aisd ki jab un jamd'aton no de- 
klnl, ki guuge bolte, tunilc tajidurust 
hote, langrc chalte, aur andho dekhte 
hain, to ta'ajjub kiyi, aur Israel ko 
Klui'i.iivand ki sitiLth ki. 
" 32 t Tab YUu' na apne sbigirdon 
ko apno pas bulike kaki, ki Mujhe ia 
jamd'at par rahra ata hai, ki tin dln 
merc pAth rahi, aur un ke pas kuchh 
khdne ko nahiij ; aur main nahin chdh- 
tA ki unhtn faqa «e mfbaU karun, 
aisa nn ho ki rah men kaiiiu na-tiqat 
ho jden. 

33 Us ke Bhagird'irj ne us so kahd, 
ki Iswirano men ham itni ro^lin ka- 
!,;\'j u piwaa, ki iiisi jama'at ko asiida 
kares ? 

31 Tab Yiaii' ne uuhen kahd, ki 



Fartai ek nhhdn nu'tngte. 

Tiujilidrr pas kiini rutidij haiii? Wu 

bole, S&t, aur kai ek chlmti machhli. 

SS T» UI uu jtiuuPaturi ko liukm 
kiyd, ki zamiu par baith j&we_ 

.% Phir mi M:'tt rotioii aur niaelihllon 
ke lckar shukr kiya, aur torkar apne 
Kliigirdan ku diyd, aur shagirdon 
bgoii ko. 

37 Aur Rah khike asudahne: aur 
tukron ae, j" bach rana the, unhon ne 
B&t l'ikviiin bh sukar uthdin. 

38 Aur klianewdlc, siwd 'auraton 
aur larkon ke, chdr hazdr lnard the, 

39 Aur jamaaton ku rukhnafc karke 
klafiti par charbJ, aur Mandau! ki atra f 
meri liya. 

XVI BAU 

FARI'.SI'ON aur Saduqfon ne dko 
azinaish ke liye ub se ekahd, ki 
Ek dtmiani tuakan haincn dikhd. 

2 Us ne jawab men uu kc kabd, ki 

.i lioti, tum kahte h«, ki Kal 
pharahha boga, kyi'mki dsmdn lal hai. 

3 Aur eulili ko kahte, ki A'j dndhi 
chalagi, kyugkiasnian lalaurdhiuidh- 
ld hai. Ai riyakdro, tum a-sman ki 
surat ko imtiydz kar sakti) lio, par 
wai|t(jn ki iiishAiiian naluri daryaft 
kar Mktsr 

4 Is zaindne ko had aur haramkar 
tog tii.dian dliiiudhie haiti ; par Yiinas 
nabi ke nisbdii ke siwd" kui undian 
uuhen dikh&yd na jiegd. Aur wuh 
imbau ohhorke clia'd gftyd. 

5 Aur us ku shagird pdr piilmiiche. 
aur roti witb leue Vihiil gnye the. 

ti T Yisii' ne nnhen. kaha, Farisfog 
aur Baddolon ke khaniir se khabarddr 
aur chaukas rabo. 



■ 
i> hai, kiliai 



lage, Us ki yih. sabab hai, ki liam roti 
na Ide. 

y Lekfal Yi-'i' M yih daryaft karke 
kaha, ki Ai kaza-?atiqado, Win apne 
dil men kyt'm soehte ht>, ki yih roti na 
line ke sabab n hai ? 

& Ab tftk nahirj samajhtc ho? un 
pduch hazar ki pduch toff&n uahin yad 
24 



i XVI. .Vti.nA fri babat 

takhta, aur ki kitni tokrian bhari 
uthdin ? 

10 Aur na un ckdr bazar ki sat 
rotidn, aur ki tum ne kitui tokrian 
bharkar uthdin ? 

11 Yih luiit kyiin tiahiii .samajbte 
ko, ki main ue tum se Mti ki babat 
nakiu kabd, ki tum Farision aur 
S:iduL]iou ke kharm'r sechaukiw raho? 

12 Tab unhoii ne ma'liiin kiyd, ki 
ub no roti ke kliamir su nahin, baiki 
Fariaon aur Haduiporj ki ta"liiu se 
chaukas ralmo ko kaha thd. 

13 T[ Aur Yisu'nc Qaisarij'd Filip- 
pl ki ati'df men akar apne uiagirdon 
se piichhd, ki Loa kyd kahte hain, ki 
maiii, jo Ibu i A'dam hiig, kami hiin? 

14 Unhon uo kahd, ki Ba'ze kfthte 
liain, ki Tu Yiihannd baptisma-dene- 
wald hai ; ba'se, lliyds ; aur ba'/.e, 
Yaramiyiib, y.-i nabion men se kol. 

15 Ua ne uiihw kahd, Par tum kya 
liahte Ini, ki main kami hriij 't 

16 Shama'un Patrus ne jawab majj 
kaiia, Tfl Masih ziuda Khuda ka Bata 
hai. 

17 Yisti' ne jawdb men use kalut, 
iVi Shaiuii'ilu Bar-Yiinas, uiubdrak tu; 
kyonki jisui aur klu'm ue nahin, baiki 
more Bdp »e, jo dauidu par hai, tuju. 
pai yili tabir kiyd. 

\H Malg yih bhi tujh sc kahia liiin, 
ki T6 Patrus hai, aur main is pattbar 
par apui ka'.iniyi kuiduiigd : aur do- 
/,akh kd ikhriyar us ]tir na chahwft. 

19 Aur nmiii asrudn ki bdd^bahat 
ki kunjidn tujhe dunga: jo kuchh tu 
zamiu par hand karegd, dsiudu par 
baud kiyd jdegd ; aur jo kuchh t d 
samin par khulega, dsmau par khold 
' ' -.i. 

MO Tab us ne apne slidgirdon ko 
hukni kiya.ki ki.*ii se na kalnui, ki 
mais Swl' Uaaib liiin- 

21 i Us waqt ae YiNiVaprie shigir- 
don ku khabar dene lagi, ki zariirliai 
ki main Yaruaabu.ii k^ jatui, aur bu- 
zurgon, aur sardar kahinonj aurl'aqih- 



Patrus hl iqrar. 



MATI', XVIL J/k si/i Iri surat k& l<adal .}&»&. 



o» se. bnhut dnkh uthii'm, aur niari 
jaili, aur tim iliu ji utlnirj. 

22 Tab Patrus uao khiiro le gaya, 
aur jlnuijhlikar kahne lagi, ki Ai 
Klni'Uuaml, teri wilamati ho: yih 
tuju jar kabhi n» hoga. 

23 Par usne phirke Patru9se kabi, 
Ai Sriuitii.il, mere B&mhne se dor ho ; 
tii mere liyo thokar ka ba'is hai ; 
kyt'mki Iri Khmli ki biton ka naluri, 
baiki insan ki baton ki khiyalraklui 
hai 

24 Tf Tab Tisi'i'neapnt' shigirdon 
bq kalii, Agar kui chahe ki mere 
pichhe awe, to apni inkir kare, aur 
upui salib uthako mori pair&ui kare. 

25 Kyurjki jo kui apni jin bachayi 
cliiiie, uso khue^i; par jo kof merfl 
liyc jan khocgi, um? paiigA. 

20 Kyunki admi ko kyi iaida hai, 
agar tamani jahin ko hasil kue, aur 
apni jin khowo? phir admi apni jnu 
ke badle kyi de sakti hai? 

27 Kyunki Ibu i A'dam apne Bipkc 
jalai mcri apne firisliton ka sath iwe- 
gi ; tab har ek ko us ko a amal ko 
muw&flg badla iiegi. 

28 Main tuni se sach tahta lilin, ki 
Un rnon se Jo yab.au khare hain, baV 
hain, ki jnb tak Ibu i Adam k<> apni 
bidshahat ineri dekh ua len, maut ka 
triiw.i ua chakherige. 

XVII BA'B. 

A CR cliba dia bft'd Yisu' Patrus, 
aur YVquh, aur us ke bhai Vi'i- 
hanui ko, alag ek unclie puhur par ic 
gaya, 

2 Aur un ke samhne un ki surat 
badai gayi : aur us ki chibra iftab ka 
si cliamki, aur U3 ki iwsh&k nur ki 
maumu sufed ho gayi. 

■'i Aur, dekno, Mu» aur Iliyaa us se 
biterj kartu imheij dikhai di\e. 

i Tab Patrus no Yiefi' se jawib merj 
kalii, Ai KJmdiw.ui.l, huniare liye ya- 
han rahna aehslihi hai: agar marzi 
ho, to ham yahin tiu dere bariawen, ck 



tero, aur ek Miisa, aur ek Iliyis ku 
live. 

'u W uh yih kahta 1 ■ i tlnl, ki dekbo, 
ttk nurani budlf ne un par siya kiyi ; 
aur, dekho, ua badai «c ek iwi/. \m 
roazmtia ki ii, ki Yih mori piyari 
Beta hai, jis ae maiti khush hun ; tum 
us ki su n o, 

6 Shagird yih aunke niunh ke bal 
giro, aur uibiyat dar gaye. 

7 Tab Yisd J ue ike uiiLen chliu^, 
aur kahi, ki Utho, aur mat daro. 

8 Aur unhon ne apni ink'h utliike 
Yiad' ke Biwa aur kisi ko ua dekLa. 

9 Jab we pahir se utarte the, Yisti' 
uu unin'ti tikid ku farmayi, ki Jab 
tab Ibn i A'dam murdun coejj se ji na 
ujhe, is roya ki zil;r kisii m na karo. 

10 Aur ua ke shigirdon ne us se 
pik'bha, Pliir faqili kyi'iii kahte baiii, 
ki |iahle iliyis ka ini zarur hai? 

11 Yisd 1 ne uiihen jawib diya, ki 
Tliyaa albatta jiahle awt'^a, aur sab 
cbimm ki baudobast kan^i. 

12 Par main tuiu se kahtA hda, ki 
lliyas to d chuki, ltjkiu uulion ne ua 
ko iiahin palichani, baiki jo cTnihi us 
ki> s;Ll1i kiyi. Isi tjvrab. Ibu i A'daiu 
bhi un «o duk h uthawegi. 

13 Tab BhigirdoB no samjha, ki us 
ne un u Yiihanni baptisina-denewale 
ki babet kahi. 

14 ^f Jab we jarni'at ko pis pa- 
himche, ek sbakhs ua pas iya, aur us 
ke ago ghuttie tekke kalii, 

15 Ai Kbudawand, niero bejfl par 
ralnii kar; kyuii(<i wuh siri hai, aur 
bahut dukh utbati hai ; ki aksar ig 
nn girri, aur aksar pani merj, 

lti Aur main us ko tore ahigiidorj 
,ke jjis Uyi thi, par we use changd na 
jkar sakeo. 

17 YisiV ne jawib inen kahij Ai 
Iw-i'atiipUl aur terhi qtma, maic kab 
tak tuiuliare sith' rahiirigi? kab tak 
tumlftri li;iruj.siit kaflJBgi? u.suyabin 
mere pis ii. 

ld Tab Yigff ne deo ko diiamkayi; 



Ek -tiri Admi ko ditingakarna. MATI', 
wuh n» Be nikal gayii; aur wuh 
ohhokri usi gkari changa ho gaya. 

19 Tab- sMgirdon vio alaa YisiV pas 
iike kalii, llam kytiri us ku mkul M 
sukun 'i 

20~Yi*u' M umVij kalta, Apni be- 
Imani ku aabab ; kyunki main tum si: 
padi kahta" hi'in.ki Agar tambat] rai 
ke dano ko harabar iman botft, to agar 
tuui ia puhar m kahte, ki Y'uhiin M 
wabaii chala jft ; to wuh chala jata ; 
aur kol bat tuinhari na-mumk'm ua 
hati. 

'Jl Wagar is tarah ke ileo, bagair 
du'a o roza ke, nahin nikitte jdto. 

22 "f Jali w« Jali! meij pniri kasta 
the, Yisii' ne unhen kalia, ki Ibn i 
A'da.m logog ko hath men hawala 
kiyft jaega ; 

23 Aur we usc qatl karcngc ; phir 
wuh tian din ji iith-.'-iii. Tab wo ni- 
hiyal gamgfii inic. 

24 f' Jab wo Kafaniahum men ae, 
nim- mitrai ke lenewakm no ]ia« ako 
Patrus bo kaha, ki Kya ttimhara ustad 
Mijii-in(s.|jiJ ualiin duta ? Us no kaha, 
Han, dori hai. 

25 Jab wuh ghnr men aya, tab 
Yisii' no ua ke bomo ko pesbtar, ua ae 
kahd, ki Ai Shama'an, Mi kya ea- 
m&jhta hai? duayake, hadshih khiraj 
yii j j /ya ]ria 86 latfl kain '( apofl larkoii 
su, ya galltm 88? 

!'■ l'.im.is ne ua N kalia, Grairtra bo. 
YW ne lis so kuna. Pas to larke us ho 
fotid hak 

2" l.eTdn ta ki ham unlien thokar 
im khilawen, tu jake darya men hausi 
dai, aur jo niaclihii ki pahlo nikk, asa 
lVkc uh ka munh khoi, to ek sikka 
]iawega : wm Toko mere aur apne 
waatu unhon d». 

XVIII BA'D. 

U S mujt ihAgvrdO]] uc Yisft' pas akv 
us sg m'ichhd, ki A'sman ki 
badshahat men. sab so bara kann hai? 
2 liati' ne ek clihota larka bulake 
use un ki? bScli min khani kira, 

m 



XVIII. Ta'lim dm&kifarot><.', I 

3 Aur kaha. Main tum se sach 
kahta hun, Agar tum log tauba na 
kari), aur chhote Wkon ki maulud na 
bano, 'o Asma» ki baduhahat men har- 
gii diltbil na hogo. 

I ™,}o koi ap ko is hachche ki 
iiianiud cldidfa ]&w, wuhi asraan ki 
bddwhahat fiien sab se bani hai. 

5 Aur ji.) kui mere ruim par niso 
Iwchcho ki khalirdari karc, mori kka- 
tirdiri kart4 hai. 

b' Par jo koi in chhoton men ne, jo 
mujh par iman l.iii: haiy, ek ko tho- 
kar khilawc, to u* ke Uyu yih bihtar 
hal, ki chakki kd pat us ko gale meii 
iatkaya jawe, aur samundarko gahrao 
tuen dubdya Jas. 

7 f Thokar khililitewall ckizon ke 
sahab diiuya par afsos hai ! ki fhokar 
kbildnewali diizon kii. ani aaritt; pac 
afsos us shakha par jis ko aabah tho- 
kar lago ! 

h Agar UTii, haili, ji tori pimw, 

(njho [dokar khilawc, US6 kat. dai, aur 

apne Nuae pbmk ae: I» i iatigri ya 

tundihokar/iml.'iui w. -i .■lini .■..!.. 
tore liye us m bihtar hai, ki do hitfa 
y4 do pd ii w hoto httmosfaa ki ag men 
d;ila j4we. 

tar agar ted ankh tujhethokar 
khiliwe, use nikil dai, aur phonk do: 
l.yunki k4na hokar «indahi nien ilii- 
kliil hon.a toro liyo ua su lahtar hai, ki 
teri do ankh hon, aur tu jahannam ki 
ag mes 'ktU jawe. 

10 Khabardar, in clihoton men sc 
kisi ko naotiiz ua janu: kyilnki main 
tum so kahta hun, ki A 'aman par ua 
ke firiahte taen l'.a|>kaninnh joasmaD 
]«r hai hameslia dokhto Lain. 

II Kyiiijki llm i A'dam iya hai, ki 
khoo luiurj ko dhundhke bachawe. 

12 Tum kya samajhte ho? Agar 
ki3\ shakhs ke pis aau bbet bon, aur 

■ i; kho jae, kyii wuh ninna- 
nave ko ua chkoregd, aur pahipon pai 
jako uk khoi hrti ku na dbi'mdhega? 

13 Aur agar aiaa ho, ki use jijiwe, 



Bhaion ko mu'dfkarne kafarz. MATI', XIX. B»-rahm naukar ki tamsil. 



main tara.se snch kahti ban, ki w uli 
ias ko nbab nn ninnAuavc ee, jokho 
na gayi thin, ziyada khush boga. 

14 Isi tarah tumhAro Uap ki, jo 
AsmAn par b;ii, marzi nahin, ki iti 
clilioton men «e koi balak liowo. 

15" ^ Phir agar tera lihai tera gtmah 
kiire, ja, aur uso akele u ion sarajr.A; 
agar wuh teri suno, td ne apno bhai 
ku paya. 

16 Agar wuh na sune, to ek ya do 
Bhakha upno eath la, ta ki Iur ek liat 
do ya un gawahon ku lminh se sAbit 
ho. 

17 Agar wuh un ki na m.ino, to ja- 
roa'at ee k;ih; par agar wuh jama'at 
ko bfai na raane, to ua ko Bjair-qt,ttm- 
walo ki manisi be-diri, aur niahsiil- 
leuewile ko bar» bar jin. 

18 Main timi se Moh kahtA hvin, Jo 
kric-Jih tum znm'm par baudhoge, Asnian 
par bandhA jAcgd : aur jo kuchh tam 
zaniin par khologe, asuian par khola 
jaega. 

19 Phir main tuui se kahti nun, 
A^iir tum nieii sc do shaklis amin 
p»r kiat bat ke liye mel knrkc du'A 
mAngen, wuh mere Eap ki taraf se, jo 
asman par hai, un ke Iiyo hogi. 

20 Kyiinki jalian do y& tin mere 
nam par ikatthe bon, wahan main un 
ko bich lilin. 

21 % Tab Patrus ne us pAs Ake 
kaha, Ai KhudAwand, agar meri bhai 
rnera gunAh kara, to main uso kitni 
marfaiiii mu'af kariin '{ sat martaba 
tak? 

11 Yist't' no usb kaha, Main tujhe 
Saf martaba, tak nahin kabti, baiki 
Saitar ke sAt martaln tak. 

28 ^ Is liye ki AsmAn ki badshSimt 
ek badshali ki nntmnd hai, jia ue apno 
logoB se hisab lene chAhA. 

24 Jah hisab loue laga, ek ko 
pas lae, jia se ua lio das bazar tore 
panu t h e. 

25 Par ia wAste ki us pAs kuchh adi 
karne ku na thii, us ko kkudawiind ne 

27 



hukm kiyA, ki wuh aur us ki jorl, aur 
oa k« MU bachehe, aur jo kuchh ua 

kA ho, bechA jawe, aur qarz b ha r HyA 

jr'nvc. 

20 Tab us naukar ne girko ujn si jda 
kiyA, aur kaha, Ai KhmlAwand, gabff 
kar, ki main tera sara o&rz ada kar- 
ung A. 

27 lis naukar ko sAhib ko rahm 
AyA, aur uao chhorkar qara usu bakhsli 
diya, 

28 TJ si naukar nonikalkcapnesArhi 
naukaroij men ae ek ki> piyA, jis |iar 
uh ko sau dinar £te ihe ; us ne us ko 
pakarkar us ka gala (tbontfi, aur kaha, 
Jo iTn.'i':i iil.ii hai, mujho de, 

29 Tab us kA sithi naukar us ko 
dbowob WC girA, aur us ki minnat 
karko kaha, Sabr kar, ki main sab ada 
kariingi. 

HO Par as no na mana, baiki jike 
usc qaidkhAne men dalA, ki jab tak 
(jarz adi na karc, qaid" rahe. 

31 Ua ko sAthi naukar yih makara 
rlekbko nihayat gamgin hrtc.aur jakar 
apne khawind ee tamim iilcval hayiia 
kiya,' 

32 Tab ua ke khawind no use bulA- 
kar ua se kahA, ki Ai aharir chakar, 
main ne wuh sah qarz tujhe bakhsh 
diya, kydnki td ne meri minnat ki : 

33 To kyA lazim na thA, ki jaisA 
ain nc tujh par rahm kiyd, tii bhi 

apne ham-khidmat par rahm kartA? 

34 So ua ke khAwiud nc gussa hoks 
n-i ko ii;ir"^a ke hawai* kiya, ki jab 
tak tamAm qara adi ua karc, qaid rahe. 

35 Isi tarah mera asinani Bap bhi 
tum se karpija, agar bar ek tum men 
se apno bhAion ke qusdr ko dil se 
mu'Al'na karega. 

XIX BA'B. 

AUK yiin hAA, ki Tisii' jab us ka- 
lam ko tamAm kar chukA, Jalil 
»e rawdna hnA, aur Yardsn ke par 
Yahudiya ki sarbadd men AyA; 

2 Aur bari hbir us ke picliho ho li; 
aur us ne uuhen waban chaugi kiya. 



Tifl'm ko Masih pas Idnd. MATI', 

3 % Aur Varisi ub ki azmdiah ke 
liye uh pis do, aur us se kahd, Kya 
rawd hai, ki mard har ck sabab ae upni 
jorfi ko chhor dewe? 

4 Us no jawab mcn u n se kaha, 
Kyd tum no nahiri parha, ki Khi1i<| 
n« shunV ku*» unhen ek hi mani aur 
ek ki 'nurat banai, 

5 Aur farmdyii, ki Is liye mani apne 
nia bdp ko ehhorega, iu:r apiii j"v\i w 
niild nihega: aur W8 donon. ok lan 
boogfl ? 

6 Is liye ab we do urViiii, baiki ck 
tau hain. Pas, jise KUuui no jord, 
use insan tia tore. 

7 Uuhon no us so kahd, l'lur Musd 
m' k yi'm Imkm diya, ki taUojMtau use 
deke use chhor do ? 

8 Uh ne un se kuini, MiifiA ne tuin- 
hari sabkt-dili ke sabab mm ko npni 
jordon W chhor dcue ki ijdzatdij par 
shurii' ae aisd na tba. 

9 Aur maig tum se kalita hi'm, ki 
Jo koi apni jorfi ku, siwa zina ke, aur 
sabab se chhor de, aur diiuri bb byah 
kue, zina kartd hai: aur jo koi ua 
clili-iri bui 'aurat ko bydhe, ziiid kartd 
hai. 

10 % Us ke shaeirdog no ub bo 
kahd, Agar mard kd lidi joru ke 
sath yih hai, to joru karnd acnchlid 
ualiin. 

11~ Us ne un se kaha, ki Sab ia bdt 
ko qabul nahin karto kain, magar we 
jiuheii di y d gaya. 

12 Kyiinki ba'zo kbnjo hain, jo mi 
ke pct lii se aise paid'd hue ; aur ba'ze 
khoje'hain, jinhen logon ne bandyd ; 
aur ba'ae klioju bait», jinhon ne dsnsdu 
ki bddslidhat'ke liyedp ko khoja ban- 
dyd hogi. Jo us ko qabul kar saktd 
hai, io ksire. 

13 t Tab log chhote larkon ko us 
pas Ide, k i wuh un par hiith rakhe.aur 
du'a kare: par ahdgirdon ne unhen 
dai Ltd. 

14 Yisii' no un bb kahi, ki Larkon 
ko chbor do, aur unhen inero pds dne 

28 



XIX. jtfiMift kipoiraui ke anfim. 
so nian'a na kuro; kyiiijki asmdn ki 
Ibddshahat aiaon hi ki bui, 

15 Aur us no apiia hdth un par ra- 
kbe, aur wahfin se rawdna In'id. 

lu Tf Aur, dekho, ek ne ako ua bq 
kahd, Ai nek Uatdd, niaiij kami sa Dflfc 
kdiii karun, ki baiiiesjlm ki 2mdagi 
pdun ? 

17 Ua ne uso kabd, T& kyuri paojhe 
aek kahti bvuV Dek bo koi nabiij, 
magar ek, ya'ne, Kimda; par agar tu 
zindagl mcn dikhil hiid chahe, to 
huimon pu 'amal ku. 

18 Us ne uao kahd, Katui su hukm ? 
Yisd' ne uao kala, Yih, ki T.i khdn na 
kar, Zind na kar, Chori ua kur, ,1 ln'ubi 
gawahi na de, 

19 Apne bdp aur npni md ki 'izzat 
kar:aur,Apno pawai koaisipiydr.kar, 
jaisd dp ko. 

liO Ub jaw;in ne us ae kalid, Yih Bab 
main larakpan M kg iiiauta iya: ab 
iiiujlui kya baiji hai? 

L'L Yiad' ne kahd, Agar tii kdmii 
hiid ohihfl, to jiike sab kuchli jo tera 
hai bech ddl, nur muhtdjon ko de, ki 
tujhe asmau pu khuzaua niilegd: tab 
dke mere piclihe ko lo. 

22 Wuh jawdn yih aunkar gamgiu 
clinld gaya: kyiiijki liard tndldar tha. 

23 1 Tab Yisii' no apne ahdgirdon 
so kulid, Main tum so sach kahtd lnin, 
ki DaulatniMud ka asindn ki liddahdhat 
inc-ii daklii! bona muihkil hai, 

U4 l!u]ki maiiL tum se kalild lnin, 
ki Cut kd siii ko ndke se guzsr jauu, 
us ae asan hai,ki ck daulatniand Klui- 
da ki Mdsliahat inen ddkliil hu. 

25 Jab uske shiigiidi>ii Be yih «umt, 
lu alhayat h*4rdn lioke bolo, Phir kaun 
Hajat ] 'd tiakta hai '.' 

26 Yisii' no uu jmr nazar karke un- 
lifii kahd, Yih insdu sennhin hosakta; 
par Khiiila se sjib kuuhh ho siktd bai. 

21 f Tab Patrua ne jawib loeO uae 
kalut, Dekli, ham ucsab kutbhchhord, 
aur ten picnlic ho liye; pas bani ko, 

kya milegi? 



Tdkidiln ke mazd&ron MATI' 

28 VisiV ne unhcti kahA, Main tum 
se sach. kahtA httn, ki Timi jo itktc 
pichhe ho Uye, jab nnyl khilqat men 
Ibu i A'dam apno jalai ke takbt par 
hanlw^A, tam bhf bdrah takliton p»r 

■ ■■. nur [sriel ki bArah guruhon 
ki 'nddlat karoge, 

29 Aur jis 04 ghar, ya bhAi, ya ba> 
hln, yA nii'i bii.p, yA jorii, yA bal bacb- 
dmn, ya -/amin ku, nun n£m W» 
rlilii'i'iL, san fftuiip4wcgA,aur hauieaha 
ki zindagi ki wira hogA. 

30 l'ar bahut ne jo pahle hnin, 

Eichhle ho jderige; aur jo pichiile 
ain, pahle bojjga 

XX BA'B. 

KrU'^KI aamail ki badsbafcat us 
sAhib i khAua ki maubd hai, jo 
tarke babar niklA, i;i ki apuc angiiris- 
tdn men masdar lagAwe. 

2 Aur us lio niazduron kd ek ek 
dinar rozfna mmjarrar kurku unben 
u] aii'Ti'iristiin meii bhejA. 

3 Aur u» ne pbir, dia charhe, bahar 
jake auron ko bazAr men bo-kdr khare 
dok h A, 

4 Aur on fio kaha, Tum bhi angu- 
ristan inen jdo, aur jo kuclib wajibi 
hai, tumben diiijga. So we gaya. 

5 Pbir ua ho, do pahar, aur tisre 
pahar ko, bahar jako waisa hi kiya. 

b' Ek ghant.A diri rahto, pbir bahar 
jake lumu ko be-kdr kharo pAyA, aur 
uu se kaha, Turu ky&n yahAn tamani 
di» bc-kar kharc rahte ho ? 

7 Unbori ne us bu kaha, Ia Hyc ki 
kisi ue liam ko mazduri juir nahiii ra- 
kha. Ob ho uubeij kaha, Tur» bhi ua- 
giiristdn Biefi jao, aur jo kuchh wajibi 
hai, fio p.iuge. 

8 Jab ihim hui anguristdn ke malik 
lic apne kAniule .-■■ kaha, Mazduroy ko 
buJil, aur pichhlon bu leke pflMon tak 
uu ki mazdiiri de. 

9 Jab wo, jitihon ne gliante bhar 
Hiu kiya thd, ae, fco ok ek dinar pdyd. 

10 Jab agle 4e, uubou yib gumau 



', XX. M to.mstf. 

thd, ki ham ziyada piweiigo ; par un- 
boB ne bhi ok ek uinAr jviyd. 

11 Jab unhon rie yib pAyd, to gliar 
ko mdlik par kurkurde, 

12 Aur kahd,' pichhlon ne ek U 
ghante ka kain kiya, aur tu HB unherj 
ousan butCbat Ini diyi, jintan M 
tamdm diu ki mihnat auriibup sahi 

13 Ua ne nn mon se ek ko jawib 
mag kalia, Ai ruiyan, main teri be- 
InSMi uiihin karia ; kya tCi ne ok diuar 
par mujh se iqrAr ualdn kiyAV 

14 Tu apna le, aur cliilla |A: par 
main jitnA tujhe detA btiri, piohhle ko 
bhi dungA. 

15 KyA nmjhe rawa naliin. ki tpoa 
mAl se jo cbAbiin ho kan'nj'? Kyd W la 
liyc bnn nazar sc dekhtA liai, ki main 
nek bini 

l<i Isi MnkptoBhle pahle horjge, aur 
pahle piehlilc : kyiinki bahut sa bulae 
;aye, par barguzida tliore hain. 

17 ^ Aur jab Yisi'i* Varusalam ko 
jAtA ihA, rAh nierj bArah ahagirdon ko 
ahvg le jako un se kahA, 

16 Dckho, hain yardaalarn ko jAte 
hairj ; aur Ibu i A'dam sardar kdhiuog 
iiiir taijilioTi ke hawila kiya jat'^A, aiu' 
wc us par qatl kA hukra denge, 

19 Aur use gair qaumoti ko kawAla 
karenge, ki fhat.thon mes urAwco, aur 
kore ludren, aur eaTib jiar "khigehen : 
par wuh tiare din phir ji uthegA. 

20 t Tab Zabadi ko beton ki nid 
apue beton ko leke us pas A), aur use 
sijda karke cbabd, ki us &e kuchh 'avz 
kare. 

■II Vb ne ua se kahA, Tu kyd chdhli 
hai ? Wuh bui), Farma ki mere donon 
bete, teri badshAhac men, ek turf dahni, 
aur diisrA teri bAirj taraf bairheu. 

22 YiHii' ne jawdb mes kahA, Tum 
nabin jante, ki kyd mAn'gte ho, Kya 
wuhpiyAla,jo main piue par hilii, pi 
aakte ho? aur wuh baptisma, jo main 
pala lu'in, tum pi nakte? \V"e ua ae 
Iwle, lima sakte hairj. 

-j Ua do uu se kaha, Tum albatta 



Farotani karut kafan. MATI', XXI. Masih Yarusalam ko pita. 

mera piyAla piogc, nur wuh baptisma, I 2 SAmhne ki basli uien jAo, aur 
jn ruam pai A mm, pau;i>' ; WtHi Tjit-i'i wahan efc gadhi bandhi, nur uske sath 
dahni mir n iuri b&in taraf buitlma, |ek bauhcha pAoge : khulke mcre pAs 
racre ikhtiyar men nahin ki kisi ko lio. 



rifiji, magar n» ko, jin ke liye mcrc 
Bap nc rmiqarnir kiya. 

24 Aur jahundason ne yih guna, un 
do bhAioij pnr guwao hi'ie. 

25 Tab Yisu ne unheii bulak c Italia, 
ki Tura jAnte lio ki g»ir-qBmnon ke 
hakim uu per hukiiuiat jatah, 
ikbtiyarwale uu pai apuu ikhtiyar 
dikhate hain ; 

26 Par tum logon men aisA na ho- 
ga : baiki Jo tum ui«n bara hiiA chAho, 
tuiiihaia kli:iilhu ko ; 

27 Aur jo tuiu men sard&r bana 
chAhe, tumharA banda lio 

28 ChunAnchi Ibn i A'daru bhi is 
liy- BBbin liya, ki khidmat le, baiki 
khidmat kare, aur apui jan bakutoron 
ke liyo lidiya men de. 

£9 .Ini' m Yarihu so rawan» hone 
lago, bari hiu r uk ko pioHhfl bo H. 

30 f Aur, dekho, do andhc jo rAh 
ke kinAre baithe the.jab suni ki Yini'i" 
chalA jAtA liai, pukArno lage, ki Ai 
Khudawand, Iba. i Daud, bani pur 
t.ilun kw. 

31 Par jama'at no unken d&utd, ki 
chup ralien : lukin we aur KU cliilnif. 
aur bole, ki Ai Khudawand, lbn i 
Daud, baca par mani kar. 

32 Tab Yisii' khnrilraha, aur unhen 
bulakc kahA, Ttira kyt't chdhto ho ki 
main tuinhAre liye karun? 

3iJ "UDhon ne uue kalut, ki Ai Khu- 
dAwand, hamAri ankhen khul jden. 

34 Yisii' ko rahm AyA, aur un ki 
Ani; lu m ko tblniA: aur us»i dam uu ki 
Ankhen bina hi'iiri, aur we us ke pichhe 
ho liye. 

XXI KA.1t. 

AUR iab we Yarusalam ke nazdik 
pahunchkcBaitfitgA men Zaitun 
ke pahAr pAn Ae, tab Yisii' ne do BhA- 
girdon ko yih kabke bhejd, ki 
" 30 



3 Aur agar koi tum ko kucbh kahe, 
to kahiyo, ki KhndAwand ko yih 
darkAr hain; ki wuii. usi dam imlien 
bhej degA. 

4 Yih sab kuchh hi\A, tA ki jo nabi 
ne kahA tbdpiira ho, ki 

6 Saibiin ki beti ne kaho, Dekh, terS 
BAdshAh farotani so, gadhi par, baiki 
-lilin ku bucheho par sawit hoke tuju 
pas Ata hai. 

6 So shAgirdnn ne jAkn, jalai Yisii' 
ne unln'Ti faniiaya tha, baja lac, 

7 Aur lu gadhi ko bachche sametlo 
Ae, aur apne kapre un pv dAle, aur uso 
unpar bithlAya. 

8 Aur «k bari jama'at ria aptie kapre 
rAste men bichliao; aur kitnon no 
liaiuUiluri ki dAliaii kalko nih men 
chhitrdin. 

!> Aur bbir jo uHkeAgn pielibe cbali 
jati pukArke kahti tlii, lbn i Daud ko 
ilusii'iMina; Mubarak wuh jo Khuda- 
wand ke nAm par AtA hai : Use AamAn 
par IIosh'atuiA. 

10 Aur jab wuli Yariinn]imi m"ii 
dakhil huA, sAre shahr men gul macliA, 
BUI kalitiolatit, ki Yib kaun bal? 

11^ Tab bhir ne kahA, ki Yih JaliL 
ke NA.sarat ka Yisii' nabi hai. 

12 f Aur Yisu' KlmdA ki haikal 
men gayA, aur un sab ko jo haikal 

_ kliurui ferokht kar rahe. ihc, nikil 
diyA,aur sairAfon ke takhte.aur kabii- 
tar-faroslion ki uliaukiaii ulat din, 

13 Aur un ae kaha, Yih likhA hai, 
Meri gh»l 'ibAdat kd ghar kah- 

latigA ; par tum ne u.-*e chorou ka kLoli 
bau iya. 

14 Aur aneho aur langre haikal 
men us pas ae; tis ne uahen changA 
k i y7i. 

10 Jab sardarkahinon, aur faoihon 
neun karamatorj ko, jous DC dikliAiij, 
aai Lirkon ko haikal men pukarle, aur 



Anjir ht dnrdkU par la'nat. MATI', XXI. Bagbanon U famaO. 

Ibn i Ddild ko Howh'anna kahto de- se, to Wmm sg darte hain ; kyuyki 
h M, to bahu t gusse hue, 



1<> Aur us se kahd, Tu suntd hai, 
ki ye kyi kahte haiiiV Yisd' ne un- 
hen kaha, Han ; kya tam nc kahhi 
nahin parhd, ki Bachchog aur shir- 
khwArofl ko iriunh so tu no kdrail ta'rii' 
karwai ? 

17 \ Fhir wuh unkcn chhurko 
ahahr ko bahar Bait'aniyd men gaya ; 
aur wahan rat bitdi. 

18 Aurjab subh ko shahr inen jant 
laga, OM bhiikh lagi. 

11) Tab anjir kd ok darakht rali ke 
kindrc dekhkar ns pas gayd, aur jali 
patton ke siwd us men kuclih na pdya, 
to kahd, Ah m tujh rnen kablui phfU 
na lage. Wunhiij anjir ka darakht 
Biikh gaya. 

MO Aur shdgirdon ne yih dokbkar 
ta'ajjub kiyd, aur kahd, ki Yih anjir kii 
darakht kya M jahlmikh gaya I 

21 Tisu' ric jawab men unheii kahd, 
Main tum se aacb kahtd hi'in, ki Agar 
tum yaqin karo, aur shakk na lao, to 
na fiirf yilii kar sakugo, jo anjir ke 
darakht par hi'id, "baiki agar ia paharse 
kahoge, Tii tatkar uaryd men ji gir, to 
waisd lii hogd. 

22 Aur jo kuchh du'a mes 
raiiigssA .-r ■ paoge. 

23 ^ Jab wuh haikal men dyd,aur 
ta'lim detd thd, tab sardar kdkinon aur 
n aum ke buzurgon ne us pas ake tahi, 
Tu kis ikhtiyar ao yih kartd hai ? aur 
kis ne tujlie yih ikhtiyar diya ? 

24 ']'ab Yisu 1 ne jawab men unhen 
kahd, Main bhi tum se ek bat piicbli- 
liti; agar baiao, to main bhi tumben 
kiiaiin, ki yih kis ikhuyar ee kartd 
hdn. 

25 Yuharma kii bapUama kahdn se 
thd? dsniaii se.ydinsan Bc'r Woapne 
dil men aochuc lage, ki agar bani 
kation, A'snian se, to wuh hnm sc 
kahegd, l'hir tum ne use kyun, na 
m dua ? 

2b' Aur agar bani kab.cn, ki Insdn 
31 



tab Yubauna ka nabi jauh' hain. 

Tab unhon ne jawab men, Yiad' 
se kaha, Iluni ualrin jdntc. Us ne 

kahd, Main bhi tumben nahin. 
batata, ki kis ikhtiyar se yih kartd 
hum 

28 U TCyun, tumkyasamajhteho? 
Ek ddmi ka uo beto the ; us ne bare 
pds jdke kalid, Ai beto, jd, dj mere 
Ujgaristin nieakam kar. 

29 Us ne jawab men kahd, Main 
nahin jaungd ; ciagar pichhc pachh- 
take gaya. 

30 Pliir chliote p:ls jikarwuhi kahi. 
Us ne jawdb mog kaha, Achchhd, ai 
khuddwand ; par na gaya. 

31 Un donon nn?n &■ kaun npnobap 
ki nwzi par chala? We bole, Hara. 
Yisn' no un se kahd, Main tum ee sach 
kabid hiin, ki Malisiil-lonewdle aur 
kasbidn tum so pahle Khuild ki hdd- 
ihdliat men tilik h il hote hain. 

32 Kyiinki 'Yiihannd rasti kl rdh 
se tum pds ay&, aur tum ne us ki na 
mani, jpar lualisiil-lonewdlon aur kas- 
bion no ua kl mani ; tum yih dekh- 
kar picliho hai na pauhhtae ki us ki 
nidno. 

33 1 Ek aur tamsil auno : Ek 
ghar kd mdlik thd, jis ne angi'iristdu 
lagdya,aur us ki ebaron taraf riindhd; 
aur us ko bich men khodke kolha 

tara, aur hurj bandyd, nur bdgbdnon 
u Bompkfl dp paidai g»yi; 

34 Aurjab mewa kd mausim qarib 
dyd, us ne apne mmkaroB ko bagban- 

m cia bhejd, ki us kd phal Idwen. 

35 Tar un bdgbanon ne us ke nau- 
karon ko jiakarke ok ko pitd, aur ek 
ko mdr dald, aur ek ko pattlirao kiya. 

3b' Ph'ir us ne aur naukaron kojo 
pahlon se liarhkar tlie, bheja; unhon 
ne un kc sdth" bhi waisa hi kiya. 

37 A*kbir, us no apne bete ko un 
pds yih kahkar bhejd, ki We mero 
bete so dabenge. 

38 Lekiu jab bdgbdnon ne beto ko 



Shah30.de ke bydh MATI', 

rif'Uljii, ipu men knhne Igge, Waris 
yihi hai ; do, iso inar ddlcn, ki is ki 
miras uarn&ri ho jAo. 

39 Aur om pakarku aur 
tin ke bdh&r !<• jdkar qatl kiy 

40 Jab angiirisfdn kd nialik aire- 
gd, to in bagbdnon ke sdth kyd ko- 
regi! 

41 We ubo bole, In badon ku buri 
tarah mar dAlega, nur angiiristAn ko 
aur Mgbanuii ku somjn-^a, jo 
mausim par im-wa jcihunchaweii. 

42 YiaiV ne unlicn kuini, Kyd tum 
ne nawishtou mtri kablii nahin parhd. 
ki Jis patthar ko rfjgftoj] ae iia-paKand 
kiyd, w uh i konc Ua sini hu'd; yih 
Kiiiidawaiid ki taraf se hai, aur hamd- 
ri naxarorj men 'ajib? 

43 Is liye main tum se kahtii Jiiitt, 
ki Khudd ki badshdhat tum sc le 1i 
jdegi, aur «k qaum ku, jo us ke mcwa 
Jdwe, rll jdegf. 

44 Jo is patthar par girega, chii: 
ho jiegd ; par jis par wiih gire, use pis 
rldlega. 

45 Jab sardar kdliinon aur Fari- 
Bion ne W ki yik tamaUsn siinijj, tO 
uinsjfa gaye ki liamare hi haqq inen 
kahta hai. 

46 Aur unlion ne chdha, ki tue 
pakar luij, par 'awamm su dare, kyiiij- 
ki we aba nah? jante tho. 

XXII BA'B. 

Y ISU" unhen phir tnmsilorj men 
kahne la'id, ki 

2 Almari ki badshdhat ua bddshah 
ki minimi hai, jis ne apnc bcte kii 
byah kiyd ; 

3 Aur u w ne apne naukaron ku bbe- 
}&, ki roihmaTmri ko bydh nien buld- 
wi'ij ; par unhou ne na chdkd ki 
awun. 

4 rbir us ne aur naukaron ko yih 
Jtahke bhejd, ki Mihm&nun sc kabu, 
ki Pokho, main ne khdni taiyar kiyd: 
mere Kail, aur mofe mnte jinmu sabh 
hue, aur sab kucbji taiyar hai: bydh 
mon ao. 

32 



XXII. H tamsil. 

5 Par wc kuchh khiydl men na 
lakttt cbalf goye, A apne kbet, aur 
dumi apni sauddg;ari ko ; 

(J Aur bitjiuij nc us ke naukanm 
ko pakarke unhen be-lflUt kiyii, aur 
mar ihlla, 

7 Tab badsridh sunknr gnssa hiid; 
aur apui fauj bhejkc uu klitiuion ko 
njar ilala, aur un ka shahr piuiuk 
diya. 

S Phir us ne apnn chdkarou rc ka- 
hd, Uydli ki laiydri to hiii, par we, jin 
ku liuUyd, ualdi<j the. 

9 Pas tum farakon par jau, aur jit- 
ne tumben inileij, bydh men buldo. 

10 So un naukarorj no raston p&r 
jdke bhalo liuro jo unhen iniU-, sab 
ko jam'a kiyd ; aur byah kd ghar 
iniiirn:iri(.iij m-, hhar gaya. 

11 t Jab badshah inilimdnon ko 
dekbne andar dyi, us ne wahdg ek 
admi dckhd, jo sliddi kd libds pabine 

m tl.:t: 

12 Aur us se kaha, Af miydD, tii 
ihadi ke kapro pnhine bagair yalidrj 

kydn dyd? 'Us kt zuban baud ho 

g^yi- 

13 Tab bddehdh ne naukarun ko 
k:iii:L, Ub ki? liat h pair banuhko use 
1^ jao, aur Iidhar andhere meQ ddl do ; 
wahan rund aur d.int pisud h tiga, 

14 Kyfinki wojo bul&e gayo babut 
hain, par barguzitio thore. 

16 f IM» Farfdou 'ne jdke saldh 
k(, ki use kydnkar us ki bdtun men 
[ihansiwen. 

16 So unlion ne apne shdginlon ko 
SerodJoQke satH un pds bhejd, ki ua 
se kanon, Ai Usiad, ham jdntc hain, 
ki tii sacbcha liai, aur sacbdi se Khu- 
dd ki nih batiti'i, aur kisi ki kucfah 
parwa nahin rakhld; kyiinki tii dd- 
mion ke zdhir lidi par nazar nahin 
kartd hai. 

17 l'as, ham so kah, Tu kyi khi- 
ydl kartd hai? Qaisar ho jizya di;nd 

i :i nahin? 
lo Par Yisii' ne uu ki sbardrat s;i- 



(■'",-ixh)2 nur S<i'lu(,U,n .'n MATI 
majhko kahA. Ai riyakAro, mujhtt 
kyun Azmdtc ho? 

19 Jlzya k;'i Bikks mujho dikhlao. 
Wfl ok dinar us pAs Ue. 

20 Tab us ne un se kahA, Yih sit- 
rat nur sikka kis kA hai? 

21 Unhon ne kahA, Qai*ar kA. 
Phir us ne kuhd, Pan, jo clmen Qai- 
sar ki hain, Qaisar ko ; aur jo Kliudi 
ki li:iin, Khuda fco do. 

22 ('iilmii ne yih sunkar ta'ajjub 
kiyA, aur uae chhorkar chale gayo. 

23 ^ Usi diii Sadi'iqi, jo qiyamat 
ke raunkir hain, us pas de, aur us se 
rawi) kivA, ki 

84 Ai TTstdd, Hitisf nu kaha hai, Jab 
koi be-aulad mar jde, to us ka hhdi 
us ki juru ko bvii )e, U ki fcptu blidi 
ko liyo nnsi jdri kare. 

25 8o hamAre. darmiydn sAt bhaf 
the ; pahld byAh karke mu piya, 
ftUl ia BBihftb ki ua ki aulad na tld, 
apni jorii apue bhai ke wAslc chlior 
gaya. 

2fi Yunhin di'iarA, aur Uari lihi, 
sAtwen lak. 

27 Sab ke ba'd wuli 'aurat bbi m a r 
gayi. 

28 Pas wuh, tjiyaniat merj, un aAt- 
on raen se kis ki jorii hotpr kyurjki 
sabiiog no ns «u byali kiyi thd. 

"SI Yisu' ne jawab inen un sc kaha, 
Tam nawishton aur KluidA ki qtidrat 
ko na jankar guatl karle liu, 

■'i' 1 Kyiinki cuyamat mon log na 
byah kurte, na hydlie jd'e hain, baiki 
auman par Khuda ke firishton ki nia- 
lliiul Ikiim. 

31 Aur niurdon ke ji uthne ki babat 
Khuda ne, jo tumben farmdyd, wuh 
tum ne nahin pafhi, ki 

32 Main Abiraham kA KhudA, aur 
Iss,h4q kA KhudA, aur Ya'qiib kA 1 
KbudA hurj? KhudA murdon kA na- 
liiii, baiki ziurion ka KhudA hai. 

33 .TaiiiA'aten yih sunkar us ki ta'- 
lim se daog iiuin. 

34 1 Jab Fariaion nc sunA, ki us ne 



XXIII. -munh haott hoj&nd. 

KadiMjion ka miirjh batui kiyA hai, w- 
jaiu'a biie. 

35 Aur un men so eh ari 'a t ke ek 
sikhiAnewAle ue us se, a/.mane ke liyc, 
yih pi'iehlui, ki 

3(i Ai Ustdd, sliara men bara hukm 
kaun had? 

37 Yisu' ne us se kabd, Klmdawand 
ko, jo lerA KhudA hai, apue sd c dil, 
aur apni sAri jan, aur apni sari samiijii 
so piyar kar. 

38 Palli aur bara hukm yihi hai. 

39 Aur diisrd us ki niAniiul hai, ki 
Tu apue porosi ku aisA piydr kar, jaina 
Apko. 

40 Inhin do ahkdm ]>ar «Ara nhar'a 
aur sab nahion ki baten mauqui' hain. 

41 1 Jab Parisi jaiu'a the, Yisu' m 
un so puchhd, ki 

42 Masih ko hoqq nieri tumliard 
kyi mirurtn hai? Wah ki^ kA beiil 
hai? Wo belo, Daud kA. 

■13 Us ne un ee kahA, Phir Ditid, 
riih ke Ijatanc bc, kyuukar uso Kiiu- 
d>iw;uiil kahtA hai, ki 

44 KhudAwaud ne mere Khuda- 
wand ko kahd, ki Jab tak main toro 
dushmanou ko tero pAnwiin k! chauki 
na karun, td nipre dahine baith 'f 

45 Pas, jab Daud us ko Klmda- 
wand kalitA hai, to wuh us kA beta 
kyiinkar thahrA? 

46 Par koi us ke jawab mm ok bit 
na b"l saka, aur us diu so kisi U 
hiwdo na parA, ki us se phir kuelui 
suwal kare. 

XXIII HA'IS. 

TAB Yiaii' logon aur ajino sliapin!- 
on se kalino laga, ki 
2 Fiujili nur Farisi MiisA ki gaddi 
par baitbe hain j 

'A Js liyo jo kuchh we tunilien mata' 
ne ko kahen, uidno, aur 'amal men 
ldo ; U'kin un ke so ki'uu na karo : ky- 
tirjki we kahte hain, pnr karto ualiii:. 
4 Ki wo bhSri bojhen, jin kA utha- 
nA mnafakil hai, bdndhte, nur logon 
C 



Musih kdfaqV>OQ aur HATI', 

ke kandhori par rakhte hairj ; par ap 
unheB nt! ek uigii ae saikauc pai' 
rizi nahin hairj. 

5 We apne sab kfi.ni logorj ko di- 
khanc ke wasit: kurir hai m ; apne fca'- 
wi/. el.aure,aurai>ne Jubborj kedamau 
Iftmbo baiiilo hain, 

B Aur mihmauiorj taeg ndrjagah 

BUI 'iliiiilrLiUlnimm nu'ij miwal kursi, 

7 Aur buang men salam, aur yih 
ki log unhcn Jtiibbi, Itablji, knlu'ij, 
ohibte liiiin. 

8 Par tum Kabbl nn. kahlao: ky- 
uijki tiiiuliarii Hadi ek hai, ya"m\ 
Masih, aur tam ttfa bhdi ho. 

9 Aur umbi pnr kimi ko apnfi, bap 
mat kahu: kyirnki tuinbdra ek hi 
Ban hal, jo asman par hai. 

10 Aur ria timi liatii kahlao: kyi'm- 
ki tum hara Hadi ek hai, ya'ii", Misili. 

11 I'alki jo tum irirn bara hai, 
timi hara- khadim hoga" ; 

12 Aur joapko bara jani'^a, ohhotA 
kiya jaega ; aur jo ap ko chhota sam- 
jhegi, wo barf kiya jaega. 

13 ^f Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Farisio, 
linu pai alknl U liye ki auman ki 
badshiihat ko logon ke age band karte 
ho: na luni ap us meti jtUe, aur uh 
jimewftlon ko uh turi; juta dete. 

i i Ai riyakar lacpbo, aur Farisio, 
rum par ai&js! ki bewaoj I. Ii .■ 
uiwiil jdu-, mu' makr se lambi chauri 
mumi/ [arliteho; ia sabab tum ziyi- 
datai saza' paogc. 

15 Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Farisio, 
tum par afros 1 ki tum tari aur khush- 
ki ka daum ia liye karte ho, ki ek ku 
:i|iii" iiin mon Jiio, aur jab wuh 
chnka, to apne kg dumi use julianiic 
ka" farzand bimrtte ho. 

Hi Ai andhe rah-dikhanewalo, tum 
parafeos, ki kahr.o ho, Apar koi hai- 
kal ki qasam khdvrc, (o kuchh im;- 
/ilyaoa nahin; pn agar ba-ibal ke 
oook ki qat<am khiwe, to us ko pura 
karun zarur hai! 

17 Ai nad&iio, aur ai andhc. kano 
34 



XX IH. F'.vihf-iii J.o mah'iiwtt harna, 
bara hai, sona, ya haikal, jo aoao ko 
pak karti ¥ 

18 Phir tum kalite ho, Agar kol 
qurbing&h ki quam khdwo, to kuchh 
muaayaqa nahin ; jjar agar mur ki, 
jo um par disirhti, qa*a.m khawe, tO 
us ko m'ira kami fain hai. 

10 Ai nidioo, aiir ai audio, bara 
kaun hai, atar, ya iiurbanga"h, jo uazr 
ko pak karti ? 

i!0 Paa jo qurbiin.::ili k i qa8am 
khaiii haf, us ki aui un sib chi/.nu ki, 
jo us par eharhirj, qasa)ii khaiii. 

L'l Aur jo hiiikal ki qaaam kluita 
liaj, nn ki aur jo ua uieu lahnewdld 
liai, us ki bhi qasam khita hai. 

22 Aur jo umfto ki qaEaia khati 

hal, Khudii ke takht aur us par jo 
balthaewall hai, uu ki bhi qasaru 
klidta hai. 

-."I Ai riyakar faqiho, aur Fftrfsio, 
tum pai fifeosl kyiiiiki pocuna, aur 
aniriun, aur y.ira ki liuliyaki lagat6 ho, 
pai .-li ni'at ki bhari biion, ya'ne, in- 
saf, aur raluo, aur iman ko obilO{ 
diya; lazim thd ki tum unhen ikhti- 
yar karte, aur inlien bhi na chhortc. 

2i Ai aiidhe rAh-dikhanewalo, ki 
maoholihar chhaotte, aur i'mt ko Lignl 
jale lio. 

26 Ai riyakar fturlho, aur Fariclo, 
tum par aiV.os! ki tum piyila aur 
rikabi ko lipar se saf karte, par we 
andar UU aur liur;ii m* liiiare hain. 

£0 Ai andhe Farisi, rn pahle myala 
aur rikabi andar se saf kar, ki we 
bahar ho bhi tif hojj. 

^T Ai riyakar l'aqiho, aur Farisio, 
tum par al'sus I ki tum MiiVdi phlri 
hiii nabron ki mauind ho, jo bahar m 
bahut jwliclilii iiia'li'mi licti h.iin, par 
bbitur murdou ki haddiim aur liar 
tarah ki uapikrta bbart hairj. 

28 Isi tarah tum bhi ziliir mag 

logoii ko raktba>.dikbai dute, j.ar i atiu 

■ ir,;uvr (hararat wj bhare ho. 

L'y Ai riyiikar l'uqiho, aur Farfrfo, 
tam par afeoe ! kyiinki Dabtog ki 



Slahr u haikal H garat ki HATI', 
qabtvri Laniito, aur r&ttMwg ki goren 
snmvarte ho, 

30 Aur kahte, Agar hnm «pot Wp- 
ihuli'LJ k* dirjon m e n hotc, to nabion 
ke khrin innj un kfi sbarik na bute. 

31 Isi tarah tum RpM par gawalii 
dete ho, ki timi nabion ku qalilun k o 
farzand ho. 

<M Pas apne bapliidou ka painiana 
bharo. 

38 Ai sampo, aur ai samp ku Imuh- 
ch", tum jahuimaiiL ke 'azab se ky- 
unkar bhagoge? 

34 lf Is liye, dekho, main nabion, 

gen, aur laqiium ko tumharu 
pas bhejt* hi'm ; tum Ufi iiii'ii h 
hvznn ko qatl karoge, aur salib par 
khinctiuge, aur ba'zon koapiie'ibadat- 
khauon meg kore niiiroge, aur shahr 

ba shafai sataoae: 

35 Td ki sab rastbazon ka khun jo 
zaiuin par bahaya gaya tum pai aw, 
Habil rasiba/, ke klii'm se barakhiyah 
ko bete Kakariyaii ke khun lak, jise 
tum ne haikal aur ijurbaugah ke dar- 
luiyan ij:ni k iya. 

S8 Main timi mo sach kalilii iuin, ki 
Yih sab kuchli is zamauu ke logoti 
. u- im j:''.. 

37 Ai Yarusalrim, ai Yanisalain, jo 
n;iliioh ko mar dalti, aur unhtn, jo 
lujh pas bheje gaye, pathrao karti 
hai, main ne kitni bir chaha ki tera 
larkun ku, jis tarah inurgi apne baeh- 
ch'jn ko paroy tale ikatthc kani hai, 
jam'a kanin, par tum hu ua chaha I 

38 Dekho, tuinhara ghar tuinliat'i: 
liyo virau. clahora jala hai. 

31) Kyi'inki uuiitj tum se kahta hnn, 

ki Ab M tum rnujiiu phir na dekhogo, 

jab tak ki kahoge, Mubarak hai wuh 

jo KUudawand ke ndm par ata hai. 

XXIV BAB. 

AUR Yiau.' haikal se nikalkc cliahi 
gayi; aur us ko BLagird ns pas 
ie, ki usa haikal ki 'imaraleii dikhd- 
wen. 

2 Y'mi'i' no uu se kahii, Tum yih sab 



XXIV. Hator,jia Jfiwfl "e Sf/a h H. 
chizen, dekhte lio? main tum sc nacii 
kaht4 ln'iM, ki Yah.in ck p^itthar pat- 
thar par na chliutega, jo giraya ua 

3 ^ Aur jab wuh Zaitun ke pahar 
par baithi tha, ns ke thagirdoti uo 
klialwat lucu us pax aku kaha, Ilaui 
>:o kah, ki yih kab boga? aur tfi« aua 
k,i aur zainana ke akldr lione ka ni- 
hIij'ui kyii hai ''. 

i Tah Yisd' ne jawab mrn un se 
kahii, KliaLpardiir, koi uunheii giinuiili 

i kare. 

b Kyiiijki bohutera mtsra nAin par 
;i.wcrige, aur kalungi), ki Main MauiJi 
luin; aurbahuton kuguinrah kftrejjge. 
Anr tiun laraion anr laraiuii ki 
afwiilion ki khabar Bimoge ; khahai- 
dar, mat gliabraiyo: kyiinki un sab 
biton ka hona zardr hai, par ab tak 
akhir mihiii hai. 

'l Ki <|aum tiuum par, ruir badshii- 
hat Liidyliahat par charh awegi, KUI 
kal aur mari paregi, aur jagah jagah 
bhunelial awengo. 

« Yih nah Stuohh nmsibaton ka 
shuftV hai. 

!J Tob we tumlion luiyat nien d,il 
dengo, aur tumheB mar Halengo ; aur 
mere uam ke sabab sab qaum tum su 
kina rakhengi. 

10 Us wai|t bahutere thokar kliaim- 
•10, aur ek dusre ko pakarwacg», aur 
ek di'isro so kina rakhega. 

11 Aur bahnt jhiltho nabi uthenge, 
jo bah u ton ko guuirali karetige, 

1^ Aur bc-dini ke barh jam H ba- 
hutou ki niahabbat tiumdi ho jaegi. 

13 Par jo akhir lak taliuga, wuhl 
najitt pawega. 

14 Anr badshdhat ki is kluislikha- 
bari ki luaaadi taniam duuya nicij 
hogi, ta ki sab qaumon par jawabi 
ho; bab akhir hoga. 

15 Pas, jab tum u» winln karnewali 
makruh chia ko, jis ki khabar Daniol 
nabi ne- di, pak jagah merj ktttft 
deklioge, (jo parhe, bu sainajli U :) 



'A'l'ihd karne ke liye MATI', 

lfi Tab jo Yrthndiya mnj bon., pa- 

hSmn par bhdg jA*n : 

'l7 - Aurjii kothe par lio, na utre ki 

tijHic ghar s« kuclih nik&ln.: 

18 Aurjnkhet men ho, pichbe na 
phirc, ki apne kapre le. 

19 Par un par nisos, jo un dinon 
pehvAliAn.wurdudh-pilAnewAHAri bon ! 

80 Bo tam du'A mangu, ki t umbara 
bMgns, jdre men., vi eabt ke din na 
lio: 

23 Kyiinki ua waqt aini bari mu- 
wbat hogi, ki dunyA ke shuru' ra ab 
tak na hal, baiki oa kabhi hogi. 

JJ2 Aur agar we din ghatAe na jAte, 
to ek tan najAt na pAtA ; par b&rgusl 
il<.in ki khatir yn din ghatAe jAenge. 

23 Tnb acar koi tura k kahe, ki 
Dekho, Masih yahdn, ya wahan bai; 
lu uh na mdnnA. 

24 Kyunki Un'il-lie Ma.nili aur jlu'ithe 
i : i otneggej iur fcifle baw nishAn aur 
kardmaten dikhdwenge ki, agar bo 
sakld, to wc barguaidon ko bhi guuirdh 
karte. 

25 Dekli n, main tumben Age hiokah 
il '-■ 

20 Pa«, agar we tumben knhen, ki 
Dekho, wuh bayaban men bai, to 
bahar na j%<>;' ya ki, dekho, waU. 
kothri men bai, to na/nAuiyo. 

27 Kyiinki jaisi biili piirab se 
kfundbke ifii'lit'libiui tak chamaktt, 
walsa h) Ibn i A'dam ka anAbMhogd. 

28 Kyiinki jnliAn murddr ho, wahAn 
giddh bhi jam 'a bonge. 

29 T Undiiion ki musibat ke ba'd, 
turi. stiraj aiwlherA ho JA?kA, aur chdnd 
apni roslini na degd, aur sitere AsmAn 
M gir jacngc, aur AsiriAn ki qi'nvat.en 
hi! jAeggi r 

30 Tftb Ibn i A'dam kd nislian As- 
nidn par 7-Abir hogA; aur un wnqt 
/.amin ke Btiro gbnr&tio chhnt.i pitenge, 
aur Ibn i A'dam ko ban qudrnt aur 
jalai ke sAth AsmAn ki badliorj par Ati 
uekhcnge. 

31 Aur wu.li narsiii^c ke bare slior 

30 



XX f V. 



M'ts i h fa 



fa -a.t)i apne firishum ko bhejegA, aur 
we us ke bargu/.idon ko, chAron tarat 
se, AsmAn ki i» hadd se us hadd tak, 
jam 'a karengo. 

,12 Ali anjir ku dnrakbt seok tamsil 
bikini, ki Jab us ki dali narni hoti, aur 
pmtto nlkalte, bom jinte ho ki (jaml 
nazdik bai : 

33, Ini larah jab yib sab deklin, to 
jdno ki wuh nazdik, biilki darwdze bi 
par bai. 

34 Main tum B6 sm.'li kubtd htin, ki 
Jab tak yili sal) kucbh ho na le, is 
zainAnc ke log gui-,ar na jaenge. 

35 A'stnAn aur Kainin lal jAeijR'', 
pai incl'i baten bftrgbS M t:il''lJ.L'i. 

30 % Lokin un din aur un gbari ko. 
men BA|t ke siwii, AHmdn ker Brifthtoj) 
tak koi naliin jantA, 

37 JaisA Kiib ko dinon men h6i, 
waigf lii Iba i A'dam kA AnA bhl hega. 

33 Kvi'mki jis tarali un dinon meij 
tufan ke .ign, kbAtc, pilu, by:ih fcarte, 
liyalic |ate tlu\ us din tak ki Kuli 
kisliti jwir cbarhA, 

39 Aur na jAnte llie, jab tak ki tu- 
lari iya, wr tui mA ko Ia &.fi", fa! 
tarah Ibn i A'dam kAAnA bn I Dgi, 

40 Do Admi kbet mm bongc; ek 
pakrft, $&wi chhora jAt-ga. 

41 Do 'aitraton chakki plstian 
hoggl ; ck pakt-i. ihisvi ohhofi jicgt 

42 'f Ts liye jagtc rahoi liynil- ■ 
tuiiiliuij ma'iiim nnliiij ki kie glinri 
tumliarA Khudawand dwegA. 

43 Par'yib tum jantc bo, ki agRt 
phar ke itiAlik ko iiia'lum liota ki 
c.hnr kin ghari AwegA, to wuh jagtA 
rabtA, aur apne pliar moa «sndli mArni' 
n a dot A. 

44 Ts liye tum bhi taiydr ralio: 
kyiinki jis gbari tumben gnm.ln na 
ho, Ibn i A'dam AwegA. 

4t> Pas kann hai, wuh diyAnatdar 
anr hosbyar khadim, jine ua ke kbA- 
wind ne apne naukar cbakarnu par 
mnqarrar kiyd, ki waqt par unhei.i 
kbdna de ? 



kl iiishiiiiiun. 



MATI, 



4t> Mubarak hai wuh khddim, jiwo 
us k;i khawind Akar aiad iii karte 
pawe. 

47 Main timi sc aach balita hi'm, ki 
Wuh use apnu sab mal par mukhtar 
karegd. 

48 Par agar wuli had khddim kpM 
<!il men kahc, ki M era khawind due 
imsn iler barta hai ; 

4it Aur apne haiu-khidmaton ko 
m&rnc, aur rnatwdbm ke aath khane 

phw lage; 

50 Uh naukar ki khawind ini din 
dwegd, ki wuh us ki rah na take, aur 
m gharl, ki wuh uh. j:ino, 

BI Aur om do tukre karke us kd 
hiaaa riydkdron ke sath mutjarrar 
karegd: waluiu rona aur ddnt piand 
bogd. 

XXV BA'H. 

U S waqt dsmdn ki bdtlshdhat dus 
kimwarion ki maniiid hogi, jo 
apne mash'ak-ii lebar dulhd ke isli<|bsU 
ke wdsto niklin. 

9 Uti men pauch hosnyir, aur panah 
u.'ulan iliin. 

3 Jo ndddn thifl, unhon no apne 
itiash'ale liye, magar tel sath na liyd ; 

4 Par boHhydmn 06 &prjfl mash'alon 
ke nilh liartanon men tel liya. 

o Jab dulba no der ki, nah i'inghue 
UtgfO, aur H gayiii. 

'i A'dlii rat ko dbum machi, lii 
Dflfcho, dulba ala hai ; ua ke istiqbdl 
ko wiste niklo. 

7 Tab un sab kimwdriim iic uthkar 
ajnii iiiash'alen durust kin. 

5 Aur luidanun ne boahyirog H 
■;aiid, Apne tol mori m bunsg bbi 
do, ki luiuiai'i mash'alen bujbi jdti 
liain, 

Par hoshyaron ne jawab men 
kahd, Aisa na ho, ki hamdrc aur tuni- 
liare waate kilayat na kare: bihtar 
hai ki beelmewakm ke pas jdo, aur 
apne w&tte mol lo. 

10 Jab we kburidiif! gayfj), dulhd a 
■ il.iii'']i;i, auf vn jo taiydr tbin na ko 

37 



XXV. Ti'ron H tamsil. 

siitb shadi ke ghar iui-ii f;ayirj : aur 
darwa/a bumi luia. 

11 Picbhe <re dilari kuuwdridn bbi 
liiij, aur kahne lairin, Ai khudawand, 
ai khuddwaml, luimaic liye darwdza 
khol 

12 Tab U3 iic jawab uicn kalut, 
Uairj tam u meh ubta l-r.ij, ki tum- 
ben uhin uahrjhanta. 

19 la liye jagte ralio, kynnki timi 
uabiu jauto ki kami H iliu, ya kauri 
si glutrL lini i A'dam dwega. 

14 f' Ki wuh us admi ki mduiud 
iiaijjis uo dt'ir mulk men anfar kfirte 
waqt apne iiaukaron ko bulakar uiiben 
apnd m di supurd kiyai 

16 Bk ko pdncb tore, du.-trc ke do, 
tiftro ko ek ; bar ek ko us ki liydiiat 
ke itiuwaliij d i ya ; aur turt «Uar 
kiv:i. 

16 't'ab jis sb jiaucb tore pdc tbe, 
jdkar aur ku den tarku panen, tore 
aur jiaiiia kiye, 

17 Yiiuhm us ne bbi, jis« do iniie 
tlic, do aur kanide. 

18 Par jis no ek pavd, gaya, aur 
Bjuafn khodkar apne kiudawand ki; 
rupiya ^ar diye. 

10 Muddat ba'd, un uiuikaron kd 
klidwiuil dyd, aur un se bisdb loiie 
laga. 

20 So jis no pdnch toro pac the, 
pdnch tore aur bhi lekar dyd, aur kfr> 
hd, Ai khuddwand, tu ne nnijhe paueh 
tore BOfflpe; dekb, main ne un ko 
siwa pdnch tore aur bbi kamair. 

21 Us ku kliawind us us so kabd, 
Ai achcbhe aur diydnatddr naukar, 
shdbdsb 1 tu tb'irc, men diydnatddr 
nikla, main tujho babut cliizon pat 
ikhtiyar duriga: tu apne kbdwiud ki 
bliusiii men sbamil ho. 

22 Aur jis ne do tore pdc the, wuh 
bbi dkar kahno bi^d, Ai khudawaml, 
di ae mujba do tore sompe : dekh, 
un ke siwd mairj ue do toro aur bbi 
kiyc. 

23 Us ke khdwind ne us se kalisi. 



A'khiri 'addlal MA1T, 

Al Bohehbe aur diyiutitdar nauknr, 
■hibiahl lu thops mag dlySnatdiF 
iiiklA, main tujhe bahut chtaen par 
ti.i.klii Ar kanlngfii atpM khnwind ki 
khushi ihcl idiiinil ha, 

1M Tab wuh bhi, jis nc ek tora 
pAvA tbi, aku kuhuc Iag6> Al klui-lu- 
w siuri, «min tujlte «k sakbt aiisaj 
admi jautd thA, ki jaluin Bawa bayi, 
wahifl t.t'i kdttS, aur jahaij nahin 
chlntrayA, wnba-j jamta kaiti haj ; 

■ ,.iih ila ii, aur .jakt- U.Tii turS, 
«amin mon rlihipAya; dekh, teri jo 
hai maujlSd hai 

2tl I7s ke milik ne jaw&b mcn (B 88 
kahi, Ai had nur mM IHMlkar, lii (M 
jAni, ki main waliin kaiti hiirj, janin 
nabfg IkivCl, nur wididn jaui'n kartd, 
jalniii naluri clihiupi: 

27 Pn tujhe muniaib iha, ki mcre 
rdf&ya wirraf"i_i ko deti, ki main Ike 
apni mil sod tomat piii. 

2d Bo Ib m jdh tera ehhi&kar, jis 
] .As <i;i- ("V'' h ain iific do. 

29 Kyuijki jis pin hadbh hai, mM 
diyft jAegA, aur D8 ki barhti liogi ; nur 
j:.- pai kuchb nahin, us se, wuh blii jo 
liil.l.ti'L ho, la liyi jiogA. 

30 Aur ih iiikamuii' aaukar ko bi- 
liar audhare mag dai do: waiig ronA 
aur ildnt pUni hogi. 

31 *j Jab Ibn i A'dam npne jalai 

i, .iur sah p4b firiahte u k. 
eatb, tab wuh apa» jalai ke takht p*r 
baithega* : 

32 Aur sali KUD Ut b ., I 
ki jaengl: nur j» taf 

rorj ko bakrion se Jadi kai 
ok ko dusro ,«<■ juoA knn'jiii. 

33 Aur bhertni ko dahi;.". 
rfon i;" basg kuari k.iregA. 

84 Tab badshah u»h.erj jo us ke da- 
hjM baiQ, kahega, Ai maro Bip ke 
mubarak logo, ua bidahihat ke, jo 
dunya ki bunyad d&lte lii tumhnre 
liye taJv*' ki gaji, mfraa nu-ij lo: 

85 K; -nki main bhukhi Min, timi 
m: liiuilir khAiia kliilava : main piyasi 



XXV. HoAtpi/, 

tliA, tum nc ituijho ]inni ]>iltiyA: ma% 
paroesi tlia, tum no mojha apuc gbar 
nicn utArA: 

86 Nanga tbi, tum ncinujhe kajini 
imbindyA: bimAr tbi, tim M BWrl 
i'yibl:it ki : qaid nieii tliA, (um merc 
pie fa. 

-'7 Ua Mwl rastbaa aae jivv.ib mcn 
kabegee, Ai ^budiwantL kafe bam nc 
tujhe bhdkhAdekhi.Bttt tcUtol kbili- 
j'A? yA piydsa, aur pial |iilAya P 

38 Kah liam ne tujhe pardcddekba, 
(HUT avine ghar mcij utArAV yi 

aur kajira pahiniyi? 

39 Ilmu kab lujlie Mrair \:1 oiaci 
mcn dekhkar Uijb j4s &eV 

40 Tali Hidshali uu M jawab mvij 
kabegi, Uabj tum se «ach kabtA biln, 
ki Jab tum ai men un aab m obboic 
bbitog men kg ok ke sAth kiya, to 
mere sAtli kiyri. 

'l"! Tab ivuli liAin tarafwAlnu nc bhl 
kabega, Ai mal'iiiio, nnare sfenbne se 
us hanwaba ki ag man jAo, Jo Bhaitto 
nur us ko firishton ke liyc taiyir k : , 
gay! baii 

12 Ky6nl;i mabj bkiikliA tbA, pat 
tum ae unobe kbioa ko iu diyA : pi- 
yaaa* tbi, tera m nmjM pftnl ua pi- 
JAya: 

^3 l'aniobi tliA, tum ne mujlie apno 
giiar ulen aa utara: nangA lini, tara 
ne mujliu kapri oa [linbayt: bimir 
aur qaid men tbi, tum ne mari khabar 
na li. 

44 Tab we bbj }«w4b imn ua b 
kabegge, Ai Kbudiwand, knb liam nc 
tujhe bbukbd, y* inyasji, jnl pardesi, 
yA n:iut;ii, ya biniAr, yi qaidi ciekha, 
aur torl khidmat ua ki 'i 

i» Tab wuli uiiherj jawib men ka- 
hegA, Maiis tum H wicl kabti hun,ki 
Jab tum ne mpro in eab bo cbfiefe 
bhAiou meg se ok ke Bit h na kiya, u> 
mere Hit h bhl na kiyA. 

46 Aur we bamesha ke 'azAb men 
jiengo : par rfctbiz bamesha kl zin- 
ilr.'i DMQ> 



Manlh par 'U? fltiltid. 

XXVI J1AT5. 

AOB yi'in hiia, kijab YisA' yili sah 
baten. kar cinika, fc.t us ne apne 
ab&gtrdOB H kabii, 



MATI', XXVI. 'J./» i •: «i *•;.»>■<" U aitwtf. 

jahle dui, shigirdoii ne Y isu' pas ikar 
aim Ke kaha, To kahin cMhti hai ki 
haiii tero liye &cah taiyarkiire», ki ti't 
uae khae'.' 



2 1 uh" |&nte ho ki do rrwbaM 'M i 18 Us ne kaha, Shahr Enen fulanc 



{asah iioyi.nur lbiiiA'dsm Imwiikk 
i: ■ i, l i salib jiar Brffichaj4we. 

8 Tab sardar kahiu, aur faqih, nur 
qaum ke huzurg, Qayafa nama .sardiir 
kabin ke ^har meij ikalthe liiie, 

4 Aur sahih ki,"ki Ylwu' ko ftttofe 
pakarke mtfr $tteg. 

5 Tak uuho'n ne kaha, Td ko tubin. 
ua lio ki lo#m mi'ij l'nsv.l machn. 

<i ^ Jis w«f(t Yisu' liail'amyi mvn 
S 'i'iiH:-."i' , ,n knrlii ke gbar nu'u iba, 

7 l'"k 'aurat sang i manuar ke 'ilr- 
ilan nien oltaatl 'itr ua [)is Jai, aur 
jnb'wuh khine baithi, us ko sir par 
dbati. 

8 TJs ke sbigird yili dekhkar kbaTa 
li'.kf kabut laga, K*he ko yth baftada 
klmrch hiii? 

B Kvi'inki yih 'itrbarcdam par bik 
la, aur wuli muhlajou ko diya jati. 

10 Visi'i* ne yih jtittkar unaeo kaki, 
Kyon. is 'aurat ko taklif dek hal ni 
(M t', initg iatb nok kam kiya. 

11 Kytfulsi mulitaj hninesha tem- 
1 1 A r» 1 B&tb baiii; par main bameski 
luinharcsith na rahunga. 

(L' Ki us ne jo meru badan ]iar 'i! 
rihala, to yili mere kafan ke liyc kiya 
bal. 

/:> Main timi se «aeli knlita biitj.ki 
Tamani dunyi men, jabati kabin is 
Injil ki manadi hogi, yih bhi,io us 
ae kiya, is ki yadgari ke Eya kaba 
bte«L 

1 1 *i Tab mi barnh mag bb, ek ne, 
jla ki nim Yahidib Iaqariyotf tha, 
turdarkihimm ks pas jakar kahi, 

16 Jn maiQ usa tttmbm pakarwi 
dufl, tojnujbe kya doge? Tab unuon 
ne us »e tlsrupiya ki iu/ar kiya. 

16 Aur wuli ub waqt seuikepakaf- 
uiiiji ki: liyc (pilui dhuudbta tba. 

17 ^ So, be-kbamiri rotion ki'idke 



skakbs fwlfi jakar us se kaho, ki D«t4d 

farmiia hai, Mcra waot nazdik pa- 
huneba ; main apuc siu'igii.lou smnet 
tere yahan 'id i fosali karOEgi, 

1!) So jaisi Yinu' ne aiiaginhiii ku 
luikiii kiya tha, wc bajd lac, aur foaaii 
laijir kiyi, 

20 Jab iba» biit, wuh mi batabon 
ke >&fa khane liaitha. 

21 Jab we kba faho the, us M kaha, 
Maig tuni se sauh kali ia hiitj, ki Tum 
meij soek raujhe i^karvva dega, 

22 Tab we nihayat dilgir hiie, aur 
liar ek uu mci] fio us ku kaline la^A, 
Ai Khuiiawaiid, kya main htin ? 

23 Us ne jawab mon kaha,.ln mera 
s:iih tab4q tuetj htitli daliii liiii, wobi 

ujIm> ia;,.irwA dfgft. 

'24 Ibu i A'dam, jis tarah us ]:•■ 
haqq meg liklia hai, jdla hai: l'.kiu 
ub shaklis par afejs, .jis .so I bn i A'dam 
giril'tdr l;anvnya j&ta; agar wiih 
shakhs paida na liota, ua kfl liy 
hi},i':ir thi. 

26 Tab Yalniilah ne, Jo UB ki )>a- 
karwiiutwiilii tha, jawib nifii kabft, 
Ai IJnbbi, kya mai^huii J Usneknha, 
Til ne Ap hi kaha. 

26 T Un ke kltSte waqt Yisii' do 
roti li, aur harakat maagk» tori, phir 
sluigirdon ko dekar kahi, Lo, kbao; 
yih mera Iwdau hai. 

27 J'bir piyali lekar ehukr kiya, 
aur uiiheti deiiar kaha, Tum sah i.« iwv 
ne piu ; 

28 Kyauki j-ib mori labfi liai ; 
a'ne, oaye'abo kii laini, jo bahutoti 
.e gimihon ki mu'al 1 ! ke hye bahaya 

jati. 

2fl Main tum se kabti kiin, ki 
Anulir ke pliiii l;a ras phir it;i (»iurj^, 
us ilin tak ki tumhire silh ap 
ki b&cUb&h&t men nayi na piiin, 



A!fi mag Kutik UjfabwL MATI', 

30 Phir wegitgak e Zaitun kepahdr 
ko gaye. 

31 Tnb YisiV ne un se katai, Tum 
sab isi rit mara sabab thokar khAogo . 
kvi'mki hkhd hai, ki Main garariyeko 
imirunga, aur galle ki bheren littur 
hit.ta.i- ho jAengi. 

32 Lalim iiniiij apue ji ut.hne ke 
ba'd tum kg iga JaKl ki> jruingA. 

83 Patrua nc jawab merjUBse kahA, 
Agarchi sab teri babat l-hokar khacii, 
pflT main kabin Jaokar mv khafiijga. 

34 Yiad' nc ussekahd, Main tujli a 
sudi kfthtfi ln'ih, ki Ti'i isi rat, murgki 
bAn j di ne ke pahle^tfo bar mori iaiir 
karega. 

36 l'atnis iip as sn katai, Agar tere 
s.ifh inujhe marnd bhi zarlir ho, tau 
lilii tera itikaf na kart'mga. Aur sab 
shagirdon iie bhi yih kafan. 

36 K Phir Yisu' un ku sath Gat- 
semani n ani ek rm-upim meij AyA, 
aur shagirdon bc kahA, Yahdij bnilho, 
jab tak main wahan jakar dn'a 
niiingiin. 

87 Tabun ne Putra» aur Zabadi ke 
do b'.'i.i- cith liyc, aur ganigin aur Hi- 
kayat, dilgirhotie laga. 

3b* Tab us ne un sc k a ha, ki MerA 
dil nihayat gaingin hai, baiki meri 
iiiiiiit ki m baiat liai : tum yahdn thah- 
ro, aur merc sath jAgtc raho, 

:i:i Aur kuchh ago barhko ituirili ku 
bal giri, aur diVa mdngte huokahA,ki 
Ai mete BAp, agar ho sake, to yih ni- 
yala mujh «e srussar jAe: tau bhi mori 
khwahisb nahin, baiki teri khwahish 
ko mutablq ho, 

40 Tab shagirdon ke pis AyA, aur 
imhen. ao£e pakui' Patrua #e kalid, Kya 
tum mere sAih ek glumta naluri jig 
eakte ? 

11 J&gO, aur du'i maiigo, la ki ini- 
titain uwii ua (lajo : n'.h to iiiiista'idd, 
par jism suat hai. 

■J'J Phir us nc do bara jAkar duit 
mangf, aur kabA, ki Ai inure Uap, 
agar nici-p pine ke bagair yih pivala 
40 



XXVI. Masih H 

jinujh H nabi 3 guzar sakti, to teri 

| matai ho. 

48 Us ne Ake phir unhon sotc jm'ivA : 
kyiinki un ki ankhen niud «e bliari 
tldn. 

44 Aur unhen chhorkar pliir gavA, 
aur wuhi bat kahkar tiari bAr du'A 
mangi. 

45 Tab apne shAgirdori ke pifl Akar 
un se kabi, Ab sote raho, aur Aram 
kam ; dek bu, wuh ghari a pahunchi, ki 
I bn i A'dam gunaligiron ke hath 
hawdla klyijiti hai. 

46 Utbo, cbalen : dckho, jo vnujhe 
pakarwdui hai, u:i/.dik hai. 

47" \ Wuh yih kah hi rahd thA, ki 
dekho, Yahi'idab.jo un birahon men 
so ek tliA, AyA, aur us ke wit.h ek bap 
hliir talwAren aur IdthiAn liye, sardar 
kaiiinnn aur qauin ke buaurgon ki 
taraf se A pahuiK'.hi. 

48 Us ke pakar wiaewik w unherj 
yih kalike pati diyi thd, ki Jise main 
chiirorin, wubi hai; u w pakar lemi,. 

49 Us ne wuijhin Yi.sti' pas Akar 
kaha, Ai Habbi, salam ; aur UH eluiiu 
liya, 

50 Yiaii" ne asa kahd, Ai miyAn, tu 
kahc ko AyA ? Tab uuhun ne pas Akar 
ViMiV par bati. dnlc, aur UBS pakar 
liya. 

51 Aur, dckho, Yiuu? ke eitbioj] 
men * u 8^ ne hith barbAkar apni tal- 
war khincai, aur eardir kAhin ka 

nikar [iar ebaldkar ua kA kan ari 
diyS. 

52 Tab Visn'ne us se katili, ApnJ 
talwAr miyAn mon k-ir; kyiinki sab jo 
tahvdr khiachte hain, ttlwii hl le 
oiire (ienaa. 

58 Kya n'; ualiia jduld, ki main afabj 
apne BAp se ming sakta hun, aur wuh 
lirisbluu ko liArah turnau se «iyAda 

irc liyc hazir kar degi V 

54 Par n&wlabton ki Wt, ki yun- 
hin houA zariir hai, tab kvunkar pari 

55 Uhi ghai'i Yisil' logog fe kahne 



pukarivdi/d jdni. MATI', 

lagi, ki Tum, jaise chor ke Bye, tal- 
ivaren nur hiihian. lekar mere pakarao 
ko nifelo- lio ? main liar roa haikal men 
tiiinlniri: s'lili batyhka ta'liin detA tk£, 
pur tum ne mujhe na pakrd. 

56 Lckin yih aab is liye liua, ta ki 
nahiorj ku uawishte piirc bon. Tab aab 
shAgird use eli)»>rke bhitg gaye. 

57 T fto jiuhon ne Yisu' ko pakrA, 
wo-uso QayafA dAhi sarddr kAhin pas 
1« gaye, jahAn faqih aur bu/ 

the. 

58 Patrus dfir ddr us ke rjfehltti MT* 
lilr kAhin ke (rji* 1 ' tak chalA Bayi, aur 
andar jAke naukanm ke sdth bakhil, 
ki dekhe, ki Akhir kya liota hai. 

59 Tab sardAr kAhin aur btworg nur 
sari majlis Yiati' par jhnthi gawAbi 
dlniiidhne lag«, ta ki oh uulr daleu ; 

00 Par na pil; aur aflaronl hahut 
jhtithe gawah ae, par kni hat na 
thahri. A'khir, do jhtitlie gawAhon nc 
akar, 

'i L Kali A, ki Is nokaha hai, M Main 
Khud&ki haikal kodlii sakti, aurphir 
tiri din men nse banA saktA lilin, 

62 Tab sardar kAhin ne uthkar us 
m; kahi, T u kuchh jawab nahin detd ? 
ve tujh par kya gawahi detc hain ? 

63 Par Tisu' cbup raba, Tab sar- 
dar kAhin ne us se kaha, Main tujlm 
zinda KhudA ki qasam detd liuri, ki 
agar ui Masih, Kbuda ka Beta hai, tfl 
hain se kali. 

64 Yimi' tifi us se kahA, HAn, wuh 
JO i'i kahta hai : baiki main tum se 
kahLa iiiin, ki Is ke ha'd tum lbn i 
A'diun ko Qadir i madu ki ilahini 
taraf baithu, aur AsmAn ke badnlan par 
Atc dokhoga, 

lio Tab sardAr kAhin ne apnc kapri' 
phArkar kahA, ki Yih kufr kali chukd 
lial ; ah baincrj aur g&wil) kyA zartir' 
tum ne Ap us ka kufr suna. 

66 Ali UiinhAri kya salAh? Unhoi_ 
11« jawab men kaha, Wuh <]atl ke lAiu. 
hai. 

67 Tab uuhog ne us ke munh par 



XXVII. Patrus H intcdr karnA. 

thuka, aur UM ghunsd mArA, aur diu;- 
ron ne use tamAiaha rnArki; kaha, ki 

68 Ai Masih, hamen nubdwat so 
batA, ki kis ne tujhe mArA? 

69 t Jab Patrus bahar dalan men 
baithA thA, ok laut) d i ne us pan Aso 
kahA, Tu bhi Tisu' .ialil! ke sath tha. 

70 Par us no mil: ke samhne inkAr 
karko kahA, Main nahin jantA ki ti'i 
kya kahti hai. 

71 l'hir Jab wuh usare ki taraf 
bAhar chala, ek diisri uc uso dokokar 
un se jo wahAn tbe kaha, ki Yih bhi 
Yisti' Simti l.i 1 sath tha. 

72 Tab us nc qasaiu khAko phir in- 
kAr kiya, ki Main us ahakht ko nabirj 
jAntA. 

"'i Thori der ba'd unhon ne jo wi« 
hAn khare tlie Patrua pA& Akc kaha, 
Boshakk tii hhi un nun so hai, ki turi 
buli tujhe aahir k arti hai. 

74 Tab us no la'nat bhejkar aur qa- 
sam khAkar kahA, Main is shaklis KO 
iiahiii jantA. Wunhin inurg ne bang 

75 Tab Patrus ko Yisu' ki bdl. yAd 
Si, jo us no us se kahj thi, ki Murg ke 
liAng dene se pable u'i tiu bar merA 
inkAr karegA. Wuh baliar jake air 
zar royi, 

XXVII BA'B. 

JAB subb. h d i', sab sardAr kaliinon 
anr rraum ke buntrgon ne Yisd' 
ki bAliat salAh ki, ki uso kyiinkar cjatl 
kart'ij : 

'l Phir SM handhkar hAhar lo gayc, 
aur Puntius Pilatim liAkim ke hawala 
k iya. 

3 ^1 Tab Yahv.dAh, jis ne use pa- 
kanvA diyA tha, dekhkar ki us ka q*tl 
ki iiukm huA, pachhtiyA, aur wuh tia 
riipiyc sardir kihinon aur btusorgog 
pAs pher laya, 

i Aur kahA, Main tic gunAii kiyA, 
ki hc-gunah ko uatl ko liye pakanvA- 
ya. We bulu, Hamen kyA? tu jan. 

5 Tad wuii nipiyo baikal ineu 



Masih hi PUatm ketiyc dni. MATI', 
phenkkar chala gayd, aur jdke dp ko 
jihdnsi'di. 

6 Par sarddr kdliinon ne ru futr» 
lekar kabd, luhep klu17fi.no moa ddlnd 
rawd nahin.ki yih kbiin kii dam hai. 

7 Tab uuhoij H «atth karke un ru- 
■ ■■ i iimuLdr kd khet, pardorierj ke 

yrirne ke liye, kharfda. 

8 Is sabab d'j tak wuh khet. Khun 
M khet kahlatf hai 

O Tab wuh jfi Yaramiyih rabi ki 
marital kabi gayA thi, ptirA hiia, U 
Unbori ne wuh tis rupae liye, ua ki 
thahntf bui ofroat, ji.-s ki sirnal ban) 
iurdel lucii H ba'zon 06 t hahrdi ; 

10 Aur uuboii ne wuh rfLpae knm- 
lidr ke khet ke wdstc diyc, jnisa Klm- 
dawand ne mujhe formdyd. 

1 1 Tliir Yisii' hakim Ke nibnrti klia- 
nl Ihd: aur lidkim uc oa Be pii.'Lha, 
K ya U'i Yalmdioii kd Badshdh lini? 
Ywtf ne un sc kabd, Hifl, W thik 
kaliiil lini. 

12 Aur us wan, t saruar kdliin aur 
buang B* pr faryad kar rahe the, par 
wuh kucbli Jawab na detd tlid. 

1^ Tab Plldtus ne uso kaha. Kyd 
tfi ualiiri .«unta, ki y e iujli par kitnl 
l^awdhidn dftte Lilin ? 

14 Par us ne us ki ok bat ka bhi ja- 
wab na iliyd; chundiiehi hakim ne 
i.iln:! ta'ajlub kiyd. 

lj) Hakim ka diatur thi, ki bir 'W 
kl khdtir ck bandhui.jiBe we 
elidluc, ehtior deta thi. 

](! Ua wai|t uu kd Harnhluis ndme 
ek nmahbrtr bandln: 

17 So jab wo ikali lu.- t» ■ 
ne un-se- katul, Tum kias chahte bo,H 
maijituinlidre liye ohhardu£ ? Parah- 
bds, yd Yisii' ko, jo Masih kabldtd hai ? 

18 Kyiinki wuh samajh gayd, ki 
unhon ne use ddh sp lunvala kiyd. 

19 % Aur jab wuh masmu! par bai- 
tlid, us ki joru nc use kaili bheji, ki 
i'ii is caatbac bc kuchh kain na rakh; 
kyiinki main nc Aj kliw.'iL meii us ke 
«aba b lahut lasdi'a pai. 

42 



XXVII Mattk par /«('■•« hottd, 

20 Lekin Bax4&T kdliinnrj nur lm- 
zurRorj ne logon ko uhhdrd, ki Parab- 
bas ko mdng Ten, aur YinV ko qatl 
kini-n. 

j 21 Hdkim ne jibirim n kabd, Tum 
in doiimi men fif kise clidiita lio, ki 
main tumlidre liye chhor diin V Wfl 
IkiIp, BarabbdH ko. 

22 Pildtus ne un se kabd, Phir Yi- 
Kii' ko, jo Maeih kabldtd hai, main 
kyd karuQ ? Uli sabbon ne us se ka- 
ha, Use salib de. 

23 Hdkim na kabd, Kyiin 't us ne 
kyihadf ki? l'ar imh<m ne aur bhi 
.'liilliil^.' kaha, ki !*«•? wilili da. 

24 f Jali l'iidlus ne deklid, ki 
kuehh bau naliiu nafta, Laiki aur bhi 
bullar liold hai, to ji'ani leke Ltiir I ■■■ 
ii^o apnt hdlh dhoe, aur kabd, Main is 
rdstbdKkektji'mpeiidk lilin ; tum jdim. 

25 'l'ab aab logosj ne jtmtb d»b 
knhd, Us kd kMn ham j»r, aur ham- 
dri aulad nar bo. 

2(i T Tab ua nc Baiabbaa ko un ke 
liye chhor <liyd, aur Yi^i' ko kor.- 
uiarkai- l.'awdla kiyd, ki salib pir 
khim'mi jawe. 

27 Tab hakim ke wipdbioT. ne Yi^ii' 
ko diwaQ-khaii« m«g (e jiiW apnl 
latodm gumb us ke giri jam'a ki. 

2H Aur us ke kapre utdrkar use 
qirmii!i jiairdlian pabindyd. 

29 U AurkdnUm kd tdj ban i 
ke a i n nikha, aur ek sarkandd us 
ke dahine hdth inen diyd, aur us k.' 
age ghatne tekkar us pai thatthd 
mdrke kabd, AJ Yahudion ke Hddftbdli, 
Saldm! 

80 Aur us par tluika, aur wuli uar- 
k.'iii'ia lekar us ke sir pai nidrA. 

31 Aur jab wc ua w |hiitj»jbi kar 
cbuke, t» Oli )nirdli!in ko llfi par BC 
afairkar phir tim ka kapre use pahi&ae, 
aur aalih parkhrnohfie ko use to ohale. 
Jab bdbar jite tlie, unhon nc ek 
Qurf n! ddmi Shania'nn uame ko pliyS : 
uw begar jiakii, ki us ki salib u$hd le 
cbalo. 



U* io ia'na dm&. MATI', 

•13 Aur pk iunqdm (idlgatA n Ani c 

ya'no, kliopri ki jabali par, pahanehka, 

34 \ Titt niilA Hud sirka w pinc 
ko diyd : us ae chakhkc na chAka ki 
jiif. 

35 Aur unlmi) ne usc salib jrar 
kbiiichd, aur ub ke kaprun par chitthi 
daMke unhen bdnt Hya, ta ki to nabi 
iip kahA t h A, pfirft DO, ki Uuhon nc 
roere knpre Apas incn hnnt liyi 1 , aur 
ii ii T,> lilu'is ]i;it uliittiii ddli. 

30 Phir wahAn tiaithkous U iiigah- 
bdni ksmo lage; 

87 Aurus ke tjatl kd tabah likhkar 
us ku sir se i'uicfid iAng divA, ki Y1H 
Visi" YAllU'Dl'O^ KA' liA'D- 
SHA'H HAL 

38 Anrus ke sdth do chor bbJ salib 

Rar fchbjcha gaya, ek dahJJae, diisrd 
(en, 

30 • Aur Jo idhar udhar ae f&te, 
sir biiakar une makin ia t kari" tln\ 

40 Aur kahte the, Wali! Tri jo 
baikal ka dliAiiewnhl, aur tiu din iuri; 
I m; i .\uiiii hai, Ap ko baciid. Agar 
n'; Klmdd kA Betd hai, salib par uc 
utiir il. 

-U Yiinhirj sarddr kdhinorj nc bbi 
(aqiboa nur buzurgun ke sdth thatlkd 
niiii'kn kaha, 

42 la cc auron ko bachdyA, par Ap 
ko nahin bachA sakti; agar Isrdcl kd 
B&dahdli hai, to ah wi pai se utar 
iwa, to haru oi jiar SmAn ttwagge, 

43 TJa no KhudA par bharosA rak- 
lia ; a^ar wuli us ko chdhtA hai, to 
wuh CO us ko rhhurdwe : kyfmki wah 
kahrd tha, ki Main KhudA kd ltcta 
lui U. 

44 Isi (arali n-e ehor bhi, jo uh kp 
t&th salib pat kkirjchc gayo the, usc 
ta'na mdrte thc. 

45 Tab chhathweij ghantc m lekc 
tmraj ghaute tak, edri tarfftflrfr par 
ondhart chiia gayi. 

48 Nawen gnanteka riarib, Yisu'ns 
hare ehor Be chilldkar kahA, EH, Kli, 
lama Babaqtanf ? ya'ne, Ai merc Khn- 
43 



XXVII. N'ttiit. hi. d'ifi' kiy&jano. 
dd, ai mete TThuda, lu w. kyim mujln' 
dibor diyt ? 

47 "Un nien &e ba'zon M Jo w;didii 
khafc the sutikar kalid, ki wuli liiyaw 
ko pukdrtd hai. 

i& U'ujiliiu un mejj aeek ue daur- 
kar badai liyd, aiir airka moa bbi- 
goyd,aur narknt par rakhkur use cini- 
sdyi. 

40 Bdrtior, no kahd, nah jd, ham 
dckbcn, Iliyds utw cbhurauo AtA hai, 
ki nabin. 

50 Tf Aur Yitu' nc ph'ir bare shot 
ae cldlldkar jdn di, 

51 Aur, deklio, haikal ]fi r 
i'i|*T se iiichc tak phat jiuyA ; aur za- 
miu kdmpi, aur jiatthar taruk gaya; 

52 Aur qabreu khul gayin ; aur 
bahui Idahen jidk Jogon ki, jo drdra 
uion thc, uthin : 

53 A or lis ko uthne ke ba'd, qabrorj 
sp nikalkar, aur nmqaddas Bhahr merj 
jikar, haluitno ko Daur ain. 

54 Jab aiihaddr ne aur jo ns ke 
Hdth Vist'i' ki iiigahbdni karte tho, 
liliiiiirl^al aur wira majard deklid, k> 
iiihaya* dar gaye, aur kahiio lage, Yili 
iio^hakk'Kliudd kA lVt.A tliA. 

55 Aur wahdfl bahu t si 'auraleij, 
jo Jalil BoYisiVkc pichho pichhc uski 
idiiiituai kaiti di Uiin, diir bc diikii 
r'ahiri: 

56 Un nico Mariyaui KagdaHnt, 
aur Ya'qrib aurYiiaee kimd Miriyam, 
aur Zabadi kp beton ki lud tlilu. 

57 Jab Bhfiro hfii, Yusuf liAme Ara- 
matlyd kA ok daulatmnud, jo YisiV k;i 
bhi sbAgird tlid, Avd. 

58 Vs ne l'ildtUH pda jAke Yist'i' ki 
IAbIi mAnpi. Tab FilAttis ue hnkiu 
diyd, ki law'n OBB den. 

59 Yasuf M Idsh lokar ariti aAf 
chadar men lapeti, 

60 .\kc apu] uayi ijabr taen,jo cha- 
tin merj khodf tbi, rakbi : aur ok 
hhiiri ]iatthar qabr ke muuh ]>ar dhal- 
kdke chala ttyi, 

til Aur Mariyani Magdaliui aur 



Ushejii'U.n- MATI', 

di'isri Mariyatn wahin qabr ke mfanhmi 
baithi thin. 

62 T Di'usrc roz, jo taiyiri ko din 
ke Iwi'd hai, simlar k.ilimun aur r'ari- 
uion nr milkar 1'iliUun ku pas jam 'a 
hoke kaha, ki 

93 Ai lihmiiiwiind, hamen yad hai, 
ki wuh dagabaz apnc jito ji kaliti tha, 
ki Main tin din beM ji uilnin^a. 

64 Is liyo huktu kar, ki tisre din 
tak qabr ki mgahbdni karen, na ho 
ki iis ki-sliagird rit ko akar ubc churi 
lo jien, aur logon se kahen, ki Wuh 
murdon nn-n sejiuthi; to yih pichkli 
fa reli |ialilc so had tar hngA. 

65 PilAtus ne un se kaha, Turuhire 
pas pahrewale hain; jiikc magdPJ 
bhur us ki niyahbani kara 

C6 Unhon nc jikar iis patther pai 
iimlir kar di, aur pahre bithakar qabr 
ki nigahbani ki. 

XXVm RA'B. 

SAUT ke ba'd, jab hatta ke pahlc 
din pau phatue lasi, Mariyam 
Mngda-Kni aur diisri Mariyam qahr ko 
delcsoe ain. 

2 Aur, dekho, ek bati blnmckal aya 
thi: kyriijki Khudawand ki firishta 
atasan H utarke aya, aur patthar ko 
qabr se dhatkike us par baitli gaya, 

Ji lis ka chihra bijli k.i si, aur us 
ki BORB& sufwl bar f ki si thi ; 

4 Aur ub ko <lar H n igali ban kamp 
uthe, aur murde se h n gaye. 

6 Par firishte ne mukhitib hokar 
un 'aurjitiin M kaha, Tum mat daro: 
main jinti hiin ki iinn Yisii' ko, JQ 
silih yur kbiiiclia gaya, dhundhti ho. 

ti Wuh yahari naiiiu hai; kyiinki 
jaisi us ne kaha tha, wuli uthi hai. 
A'o, yih {agah, jahit) Khudiwaml 
pari thi, dekho. 

7 Aur jald jiikc lu ke ubajprdon so 
kaJio, ki Wuh murdon men so ji u Iba 
li.ii: aur, dekho, wuh tumharo Ago 
Jali! ku jati. hai; wahAn tum usu de- 
khoge: dekho, main ne tumben jati 
u iya. 

44 



8 We jald qabr par ae hara khaiif 
aur hari khushi ke sith rawina hukar 
us ke shagirdon ko khabar deno dati- 
rin. 

T Jab we us ke ahigtrdarj ko 
khabar dene jati thi D, dok lio, Y bui' 
nnhcn mila, aur kaha, Salam. Unhon 
ne pak ikar us ko qndnm pafcre, aur 
use sijda kiya. 

10 Tal> Viisu' ne unbon kahii, 3Iat 
daro; par jiiku iniiro bhaion Re kaho, 
ki dalil ko jiwen ; wahan mujlie de- 
kheuge. 

1 1 ■[ Jab wc chali jiti thin, dekho, 
jwilirowilon men s« kitnon no shahr 
men ikar eab kuchh io huii tha, BM- 
ddr kdhiuon so bayan liya. 

12 Tab uiilum ne lni/uigon ke sdth 
ikatthe hokar salali ki, aur un pahl*- 
w&lon ko bahut nipae diye, 

18 Aur kaha, Tum kaha ki Hit ko 
jab ham soto tlie, un ke nhigird ake 
ubo ohuri le gaye. 

14 Aur agar yih hakim ke kan tak 
pnhunclie, batu use sauijiiiikiii ui:hI.-h 
khatre so baehii leii^e. 

15 Chuninolu unhon nc rupafl Ifl" 
kar sikhlane ko muwi)i(| kiya: aur 
yih bitaj tak Yalnidicn ineu mauhMr 
hai. 

16 f Phir wc gyiirali sliisird Jalil 
ke us jialiar ko, jahan Yisii' ne unlieij 
farmiyi thd, gaye. 

17 Aur use dekhkar unhon e 
ko sijda kiyi; par btt'zo dufcdhc meji 
r:dii', 

IS Aur YisiV ne pas ikar uu uo 
kaha, ki A'sman aur /ninin 
khtiyir lmijiie diy:i nyi ; 

10 l' Is liye tnui jiikur sab qaumon 
ko Bhigird karo, aur imlirn Bip 6W 
l'ete aur Kiih i Quds ke nain se bap- 
biama do, 

20 Aur unhon sikhl&o, ki un sab 
batas ! ,;Lr ' i' 11 k& niairj ne rum ko 
hukm diyi hai, 'amal karen j aur, de- 
kho, main zamane ke taiuiiu titmu (ak 
bar roz tumhiro silb liari. A'min. 



MAEQUS KI' INJIL. 



I BA n. 

TTHUDA' ke Betc STtatf Masih ki 
XV iojii k& riiuru'; 

2 JaUA nabioit ki kitdhon men. lilthd 
hni, ki Dokii, main apne rasul ko tere 
Age biiejti hrtii ; wuh teri rah ko tere 
Mimlini' uiyar karegA. 

3 Bayahiiii men ek pukdrnewdle ki 
ti.wdz hai, ki Klmddwand ki rAh ko 

'■s: uh ke raston ko sidha karo. 

4 Ydhanud baydban hi men bap- 
ti-i,i:i detA iba, aur -imabofl ki mu'dfi 
I- Hye taubit ke baptisma lu manadi 
kartd iba. 

5 Aur aari sarzamin i Yahi'idiya kr- 
am - Yarusalarn ke rahnewale ua pAi 
niknl ir, aur wibhon ne apne gtuiAhon 
kd iqrdr karke Yardan ke daryd men 
01 B6 baptismu pav;t. 

6 Aur YfirmiiiiA ttnt ke lidlon ki 
pofihak pahino, aur chamre kd katnar- 
TwiTid npni kamar men handhe tba, aur 
tiddi aur jangli shahd khara tba ; 

7 Aur maiiadi karld t ha, ki Mew 
pichhe ck mujli se zorawnr dtd hai, aur 
main i3 ]iii<i nahin ki jhukke us ki 
jiition kii iasma kbolun. 

H Main no to tumben paul sc bap- 
tisma diyd; par wuh tumben B&h i 
Q?ids ;»■ baptitma degd. 

9 Aur uabin dinoii men aisa hua, 
ki Yinu' ne NAmmt i .Talil nc Akar 
Yardan mcij Vuiiaiina ke liat h u bap- 
tisma paya. 

10 Aur jyiLiiliiTi wuh ]*ani so bahar 
ay;i, us ne asindn ko kimia, aur Mh 
ko kabutarkl manind apne d par utarte 
dekhA; 

11 Aur dsmdn ee ek Awdz di, ki Tu 

45 



merd 'aziz BotA hai, jis ro main rdzt 
hiin. 

I- Aur Ruh uw) filfaur bayahin 
meii lc gayi. 

13 Aur wuh waiidn baydbdn men 
ckAIis din tak rabke Shait&n eu &■/.- 
mAyd gayd; aur jangal ke janwamij 
ko sdth tahtd tlia ; aur firishte us kl 
khidmat karto the. 

14 Pliir Ytihannd ki giriftdri ke 
Wd YisiV ne, .Jalil mm fte, Kkudd 
ki badshdhat kl khush-klialNm ki 
manddi ki, 

15 Aur kabd, ki Warjt pi'irA hild, 
aur KliutU ki baduhdiiat nnzdik &f; 
tauba karo, aur Tnjil par imdn lAo. 

lfi Aur Jalil ke dsrvA ke kiiidnf 
phirte hi've uane Shama'dn, aur us ko 
bhii Andryds ko, darya morj jii! dai tv 
dekbd: ki wc machhw ( > the. 

17 Yisti' ne nnhen kahd, Tum men 
pfchhe chalo Ao, aur raain tumlicn 
ailinictn ke macliiiwe bauduijgd. 

18 Aur we wunhin apne jdlon ko 
chhorkar uh ku pielilie lio liyo. 

19 Aur walidii ao thori durbarhke 
us ne Zabadi ke bete Yu'ipih, aur us 
ke bhii Yi'ibanna ko bhi, klakti par 
apne jdkirj ki maranunai karle dakhA. 

20 Aur dlfaur unhen biddyd, aur 
we apno bap ^alwdi ko kidJiti men 
inazdiiron ko sdth ohborke us ke 
piclibe lio liye. 

21 Tabwe KaiUrnrflium men ddkbit 
h(ie; aur wuh fllfaur saht ko din k o 
'Lbadat-kluine men jdke ta'lim dene 
lagd. 

22 Aurweuski ta'iimaehairAnlu'ie, 
ki wuli mi ko, iklitiyrirwale kl tarah, 
na. faqihon ki mAnind, ta'lim detd thA. 



Masih ki baAutere MA1IQUS, N. 

23 Waluin un ke "ibadatkhdne men 
c k sliakhs tkd, jis men ek ndpak nih 
thl; wah y lin kaliku eTiillayd, U, 

24 Ai ilrt* .Ndsari, clihor dej ha- 
mcn tuju ec bya kini ? tii haluan, 
balak kamu aya hai V main tujhe 
jdnta hilD. ti ti\ kaun hai, Khuda ka 
(juddna. 

25 Yisii' no nn danl/i, aur kaba, k 
Chup, aur us iupi.i *e nik;i] ja, 

26 Tab napak ruh use marorku, 
RUT bari awa/, ^u ihillaku, iu 
niknl njrii 

27 Aur wo Bab hair&n noka Apu 
ii'rn yih kali lu hi'ie bah» karte tbe, ki 
Yih kya hai ? yih ka.isi nayi tftlim 
hai? ki wuh a£p&k riilmu ko hhi iijl.i 
tlar se bukni karta hai, anr we us ko 
juatiti hain. 

28 Wunhin us ki shuhrat dalil k: 
chdron taraf pbail gayi. 

29 Aur we lill'aur 'ibadatkhdne w 
nikalke Ya'qiib aur Yiihaiina ko s:illi 
Shamit'un aur Andryas ko ghar men 

gam 

80 Aur Shaina't'in ki sis tap se pari 
ihi ; tab unhon dc filfatir us ki khabar 
UM di. 

31 Ua nn dke aur us ka hath pa- 
kaike use uthaya; aur fill'aur ue ki tap 
j:L'.' ia! i, aur ua DB uu ki khidmat ki. 

32 Sliam ko, jab siiraj ili.b gaya, 
saru bir;iarrm aur uu tab ku jii: 
deo ■ ■liarhi: lho us pas Ide. 

33 Aur sdrd shahr darwdze par 
jam 'a hiid tha. 

84 Us ne balutan ko, jo tarah 
taiab ki bimariun w.<-i\ giril'tar the, 
abtigi kiyd, aur bahu t se deon ko 
nikahi ; aur deon ko bolu e ua diya, 
kyiinki unhon ne use pahelidna lli;i. 

itu Aur baru tarku ku.chb.rat rahte, 
wuh uthko nikld, aur ok wirdn jagali 
men jdko wahan du'd niiingi. 

'Mi Aur SbatnaMn aur ua ko sdthi ub 
ke pfchhe enak'. 

37 Jab unhon ne uae paya, to ua sejus mafliij ku kaba, A i L» t o, tere gunah 
kahd, ki Tujhe sab dhiindhtc hain, j mu'al'hiie. 



marizon ko changii harnA. 

38 Ua no unheij kahd, A'o, aspds ko 
shahron men jawen, la ki maiti wahan 
hhi nian adi karun; kyiinki main bn 
liye nikla biiij. 

39 Aur wuh sdri Jalil ke 'ibadat- 
khduoy men mauddi karta, aur daon 
ko d u r karia tlia. 

40 Tab ek kurhi no aku us ki uiiu- 
nat ki, aur us ko Mfeoh&a Rliutiu; (ek- 
knr us so lxi]a, ki A^ar tii chahe, to 
mujhe pdk kar sakta hiii. 

41 Yisii' no itu par rahm karke hath 
barhaya, aur use chiiiia, aur us sc ka- 
hii, ki Main chahhi lum ; tii piik lio. 

42 Yih bat kabto hi uu kd kurh ja;a 
rahd, aur wuh pak hl\a. 

43 Aurusne usc takid karke jaM 
ruklisat kiyd, 

44 Aur ushc yih ktilui, H Pukh.kisi 
kc kuokh mat kah, baiki ja, aur apno 
ta,in kdhin ko dikhd, aur tpne pak 
hono ki babat un chfaag ko, jin ka 
lmkiii MunI ce diyft, guzran, td ki wo 
un pai ^.iH'iihi bon. 

45 Par us no bahar jako bahut 
bdt<'n kabin, aur khdss karke is tdt 
ko aisd niashhnr kiyd, ki Yisii' zdhird 
sh;vhr men ddkliil na bu wikd, par 
bdhar wiran jagahon men raha : aur 

chdron taraf so us |>iis avit kive. 
II BA'If. 

AUR kai diu ba'dwnh Kafarnihum 
men pbir ayd, aur sund gaji ki 
wuh ghar men hai. 

2 Tab hJiaurwalidn itne Admi jaiu'a 
hiio, ki darwdzo ki dahli/. tak l/ni uti 
ki samai na hi'ii ; aur us ne unhcn 
kalam kah suiidyd. 

3 Aur ok maflfij ko char ailmiun sa 
ut hwake us pds le de. 

4 Jab wc bhir ke aabah us ko naz- 
dik ua d sakeij, to unhon ne us chhat 
ku, jali an wuh ibd, k bui diyd ; aur jali 
khodke utird thd, to us kbatolo ko, 
jisi par mafiiij lutd tha, latkadiyl 

5 YUu' ne nn kd i'iitinad dfkhkar 



Som m rakhie MAKQl'S. 

(i Par ba'ze la<ph, jo wahan baithe 
the,apiig dilon ulcm khiyal karne lage, 



7 Yih kyiin aiai ktifr bukti hai 
Klnidiike siwa kaua ganih. mu'&f km 

sakti hai ? 

8 Aur ulfaur Yiku' no apni ruh 
malam k.irke ki m KpBS diloii me» 
aiae kliiy:il kftrta hahj, uahm kalni, ki 
Tuin kyi'm npne diion nien aisu khiyal 
karte ho 'i 

9 Us mnfluj ko kyi kabna lUantar 
hai, yih, ki Tere gunih muai' bude, 
yjt yih, ki [fth, aur ui>ua khatola ie 
«hal? 

10 Lckin ti ki tum jino, ki Ibu i 
A'dam /amin par guuabon ke mu'af 
karne ka ikhti ydr takhta hai, us no us 
luafluj ko RUM, 

11 Main tujhe kahti hiiii, Yih, aur 
apna khatola uthiike apue ghar ko jil. 

12 Aur wah fill'aur utha, aur apna 
khatokl utliakar UB sah ke sainbne 
nikal s;aya; aur sab ilang ho gaye, 
BUI K'iU-ia ki tarif karka bole, ki 
II am ne ia (arah ki kabid ria dekha 
t h a. 

M) Aur wah phfe bahar daryi ki 
kinare Raya; aur siri bhir ua pas ai 
aur us ne unhen ta'liiii di. 

14 Aur jatti ht'ia Halia ke bete 
Ijewl ko malu>ul ki ehauki par baithe 
(ioklisi, aurus Ke kaba, Mere pichhe ho 
k\ VV'uh uthke km n pichhe ha l'iyd. 

15 Aur jab wuh us ke ghar uien 
kli;un' lu\itha, tlia, yun hud, ki bahut 
«e luahaiU-k'NewiUe aur gunthgitr Yisu' 
aur ua ke shagirdon ke H&tll baithe; 
kyi;nki we bahut t lio, aur us kcpichhe 
ho liye. 

16 Aur jab !aqihon aur Farision ne 
:■ iii»:-i-lt'in-wali>n aur gunahgaron 

ko situ kbite dok ha, tab us ke sha- 
girdon so kaha, Yih kya bai, ki wuh 
mnrwnl kmirffilnn aur gunahgaron ko 
Nilh khita pilii hai? 

17 Yisu' ue suukur unhen kaba, Un 
ke liye ji> iaiidurustJiaiii, hakim kuchb 

47 



fo sah b. 
zarur nahin, baiki un ke liye jo biimir 
hairi : main listba/.on ko nahin, baiki 
gunahairoa ko bulane iya, him, ki m 
tauba karen. 

18 Aur Yiibanna aur Farision ke 
3hagirdro.zarukht.othe: unkon neake 
us se kaha, ki Yuhanna aur FarWon 
ke sbagird kyiin roaa i'akliK! baiij, aur 
tere Bbijprd KH» uahiu rakbtoV " 

19 YibiV ue unhen"kaha, ki KyA 
barati, jab tek ki diilba un ke ■-. I. 
hai, rum rakh sakto haiu i' wo jab 
tak ki dulha un ke i-ath hai, roza rakh 
naliiii aakte, 

20 ia'kiu we din &weQga, jab duliui 
un se judi kiya jaega, tab unhin diiwu 
nien TT6 roza riibliciigo, 

21 Kore than ke tukrc sc purdui 
ptthik uien koi paiwand nabiu kartA ; 
nahin u>, wuh naya tukra jo ua uien 
li.giiyil guya bai porine ko khinehia 
hai, aur wuh cliir tmrh jati hai. 

22 Aur nayi mai ko puraid moshk- 
on nien koi nuhirj. bharti hai ; nahiu 
to, iua«hkoTi nayi mai se phat j;ifi liain, 
aur uiai bah jati hai, aur"iuashkc"_i 
barhdd hoti hai» ; baiki nayi mai ko 
nayj Duistikoii uien raklina chaliiye. 

23 Aur yun hiid, ki wuh sabt ke 
diu kheton meti hokfl jara thii, aur us 
ke sbdgba rak inen chalte htie balcn 
ton j e lage. 

L' 1 Aur Farision ne us se kaha,Dekh, 
ki,s liye . we sabt ko diu wuh kita. 
karte, jo rawa nahin hai ? 

25 Us ne unhen kaba, Kva Uun no 
kabhi nahin parhit, .ki Kami ne, jab 
wuh aur us ke sathi muhiaj aur bliilk- 
ho the, kya kiyd ? 

2(i WuIl kyiiukar Hj.nlar kdhiu 
Abiyatur ke waqt men Klmdakeghar 
men gaya, aur nazar ki roti a n, jin kii 
khini kiibinon ke siwd kisi "k o rawa 
ua tha, khiin, auratme lAthioii ko bhi 
din ? 

27 Ub ne unhen kaha, Sabt ki din 
insdu ke wiiste hud, na, mada sabt ko 
din k'.' wiate. 



\&th ehanga kami. MARQUS, III. Bdrah rasMon ka cltuiia jd»d. 
28 Pas Ibn i A 'dam sabt ke din ka' 13 Phir pk pahar par Raya, aur jin 
bhi K huda wand hai. ko ap chahta tha, unhen pas bulaya ; 

III BA'B. aur we uh pas ae. 

W UH 'ibadnikhann mei_i phir dii- U Aur BJ U Mutah ko muqan,ir 
khil h ria ; wahan rk shaklis kiyft, ki we uh ke sath raherj, aur ki 



tha, jis kn. ek hath srikh gaya tha. 

2 Aur we ua ki ghat men lage, ki 
ii^iir wuh u» sah t ke diu changa knrc, 
to DI par ualish karen. 

5 Ua ne ua shakha ko, jis ka hath 
mikli gaya tha, kuda, ki Itieh meri 
khara lio. 

4 Aur us ne unhen kalut, ki Sul.l ke 
din neki karni rawa hai, yaba<li kami? 
jiin baehana ya jan ae mama ? We 
chup lio rahe. 

6 Tali us Be mi ki sakht-dili ke 
aabab gamgiu huke gufiseae un sab ki 
taraf dekbii, aur us suialj}n kokaha, ki 
Apna hath barha. Us ne barhava; 
aur us ka hath, jaisa diisra tha, misa 
chaosj lio caya. 

6 Tab Farision ne filfaar bahar 
jakc Herodiorj ke sath us ki Kidd meii 
niaHliwurat ki, ki UM kyurjkar qatl 
karoii. 

7 Aur Yisu' apne sha.airdraj ke sath 
darri ki talai jdiira» aur ek bari bhir 
Jalil, aur Yahiidiya, 

B Aur Yart'iHalam, aur Adum, aur 
Yardan ke par se, us ke pichhe ho li ; 
aur Hiir aur Saidii ke a.-pris se bhi ek 
bari bhir yih khabar sunkc ki kais* 
ban kaui us ne kiye, itu pas ai, 

9 Uh ho «pun shagird* >!} ko kaha, ki 
Rhir ke tabab ek cliliut i si ki-hti m 
ke liye t&iyar kar rakhen, ki we uae 
daMnadalee. 

10 Kyunki mne bahutunkochangd 
kiya tha, yahau lak ki m jo tahui 
i> : i i| men giril'tiir the, us par giro 
parte the, ki use clibi'i Icn. 

11 Aur najnik ruhej), jab OM dtikb- 
tiri, ua ke azG siir parti ibiri, aur pu- 
karfco kalitin, k: Vf K\ui\\i ka I-llil 
hai. 

12 Tab us no unhen bari takid ki 
ki uae mashliur na karen. 

48 



un ko luanadi karne ko bhcje, 

15 Aur ki we sab bimarfon ko 
cliaitg» karne, aur deorj ko nikalne ki 
qudnit rakhen : 

16 Ya'ne, Shama'un ko, jis ka nara 
Patrus rakha ; 

17 Aur Zabadi ke lieto Ya'qnb ko, 
aiir Ya'qi'ib ke bhai Yrihanua ko, jin- 
hen lloannrjea nam rakha, ya'ne, Dani 
Ba'ad : 

18 Aur Andryas, aur Failbda, aur 
IS:\i tiinlaiii;!, ani MaLi ko, aur Thr:in;i, 
aur Halia ke bete YaViiib ko, aur 
Thartdi, aur Shaina'fin Kau'ani ko, 

19 Aur Yalnidah iMkariyiiti fco,jc 
us ka pakai-waucwala bhi thd : aur we 
ghar men ae. 

20 Aur itno log phir jani'n bde, ki 
we roti bhi na kha saki'u- 

21 Jab us ke nAteHaron ne yih au- 
Jii., to we usc pakarnekonikk'; kyrij- 
ki unhon ne kalia, W uh be-khud hai. 

22 U Tab faqihon ne,jo Yarftaalam 
se ae the, kahd, ki Ba'al-ssabul us ke 
sath hai, aur wuh dflag ke sardat ki 
ruadad ae deon ko nikalta hai, 

23 Tab us ue unhen pas bulakar 
niiiisiliiii hk'tj linlid, Kyi'tnkar ho sakti 
hai ki Sliaitan Shaitau ko nikale ? 

2+ Aur agar kisi biiiUhahat men 
phut pare, to wuli b'ni^hiibat qaim rah 
nahin sakti. 

2:"> Aur agar kiflf ghanbM men phut 
]>nn'. t" wuli gliarana qattn rab iialiin 
viki;i. 

L'i; Aur acar Sliniian npna Li mn- 
khalif hoke ap se ])hvit kara, i" wii'i 
qaim rah mihin sakld, baiki us ka 
akhir ho iawegi, 

'27 Kisi Boriwnrko ehtx men ghiia- 
ke us ke asbfib kn koi Irit nahin sakti, 
iabtak ki wuh pahle us wrtwai ko 
na bandhe, tab us ke ghar ko lu tega. 



JiiJ honewale MARQ1 

28 Main tum se sach kahtd him, ki 

dam ke sab gunah aur kul'r ju 
wo bakte Kain, niu'df kiyo jdenge: 

29 Lekin wuh jo Kuh i Quds ke 
haqq men kufr bako, iis ki miuifi 
hai-^iz nahin hoti, baiki wuh hameaha 
ke 'azab kd sazdwdr lio chuki: 

30 Kyi'mki unhoti M kahd thd, ki 
Us ke a&th ek napak ruh hai. 

31 *f U b wocjtus ke bhdi aur m ki 
md di, aur biliar kbare ruhku use 
bulwd hlu'il 

82 Aur jamd'at us ke ds pas haithi 
thi, aur uuhoii m u* m kahiuki Dek h, 
teri mii aurteru bhdi bdhar tujhe talab 
kurte hairj. 

33 Us no unhon jawab diya, Kaun 
hai meri mil, yd rucre lihai 'i 

84 Aur un par jo ub ke as pfc bni- 
$ho tho, nigdh karko kahd, Dekfao 
meri md aur mere bhdi ! 

35 Is liye- ki Jo kui Khudd ki mant 
par ctialta hai, meri Midi, aur meri 
bahin, aur md, wuhi hai. 
IV BA'B. 
"lTT"Un phir darya ke kindrn par 
V' V lalim karne lagd : aur ek ban 
bhir US paw jinii'a hiii, aisi ki wuh 
daryd men ek kihhti ]iar onari baithii -. 
aur sd;i bhir khushki men daryd ke 
kindre pnr rabi. 

2 Tab us ne unken tamsilon men 
bahut kucbh sikhldyd^aur apni ta'iim 
men. un su kaha, 

3 Suuo; Dekhiyc, ek Hafal bone 
ko gaya 



8 Alir kuehh aehchhi samin ineo 
gira; wub ugd,airrbarhkephald,ba'zc 
tis guna, ba'ze sdth, aur ba'zc sau 
gun£ 

!l Pbir ih ne unherj kahd, ki Jis ko 
sunneke kdn bon, sutie. 

10 Aur jab wuh akela liria, unimu 
ne, Jo us ke «Uh tbc, uu bara h se mil- 
ke as ne us tamsil ke ina'ue pfiohhe. 

11 Us ne uuhen kahd, ki Khudd U 
bdil-hiliat. ke bhod ko janud tumben 
diya gayd hai, par un ko liye jo bahar 
hairj, eab bdten tamsilon men hoti 

12 Td ki wo dekhne men dpkhen, 
magar Mjhen nahin ; aur kau sc 
sunen, par samjhcn nahin; na howe 
ki we kabhi phirerj, aur un ke guudh 
bakhshe jden. 

13 I'hir us no unhen kahd, Kyd 
tum yili tamsil nahin BUtajhW J ti> 
Bab tamsilon ko kyiinkar samjhoge ? 

II S Kisdn kaidui botd hai. 

15 Aur wiih jo us rdh ke kindre 
pard, jabdn kaldm boyd jdtd iiai, we 
luiirj, ki jab uuhon ne sund.to Sbaitin 
fitfanr dke ua kaldm ko, ji un kudilog 
men boyd gayd thd, lc jdtd hai. 

16 Aur usl tarah jo sangin zamin 
men boyd gayd, we hfdn, jo" kalam ko 
sunke filfaur khushi so qabdl kar 
lele Iriin; 

17 Aur dp men jar nabirj rnkhte, 
baiki tbori muddat ke liaiij: akhir, 
Jftb U kaldm ke wistfl taklii oAtfl 
ya .satdc jdte, to jald thokar kiidle 



4 Aur botp wa.|t yun Inia, ki kuohli liain. 
rah ke kin.lre pra, aur bawd kc| 18 Aur jo kdnton kedarmiyan boyd 



pa i tt n dfl dke use chug gaye. 
5 Aur kucbh sangin /.amin par cird. 



gayd, we iiain, jo kaldm Mimte bai_, 
IH Aur diinyi ki fikrerj, aur daulat 



jahan^use hahut. mini na r.iili ; rarjki dagabd/.i, arir aur chizoQ kililaen, 



ub jald ueji, kytinki us ne daldar 
.'.amin na pdi : 

6 Aur jab Bdiaj nikla, wub jal gayd. 
aur jnr ua rakhne ke salmii siikh gayd. 

7 Aur kucbh kdnturj men gird, aur 
kdntnn ne bnrhke use daba divd, aur 
wuh phal na Idya. 

4J 



ddkhil b(.ike kaldm ko dabd deto hain, 
aur wub Iw-phal hotd hai. 

20 Atnr jo aehchhi /.amin men "boyd 
gaya, we hain, jo kaldm ko sunte ham, 
aur qabdl kar ke pbal lita bain, b»'» 
da gani, ba'zo with, aur ba'ze sau 
goni, 

D 



Khardal ke rl, 

21 5 Aur lis nc unben kahji, Ky» 
chira<* ih liye. ht4, ki psimaaa ya pa- 
lang ke tua rafchen, aur clurigdan 
P&r na rakhrn? 

22 Koi cliiz poshida nahin, jo zfibi: 
»;i ki jiw«; aur ca chhipi lioi, magar i 
liye ki zuhur rooij awo. 

23 Jis ko uunne lu kau hnn, sune. 
21 I'lik us nfl unhan InbaVld GJam 

karo ki tuin kyii smitoTio ; jispahiiaiio 
60 tura nfote iiu, tisi se tumharu liye 
napi jacgA ; aur tumben jo auute ho, 
ziyada diya jaupii 

26 Is liye fei'jis ke pas kuchh liai, 
usediyi jacgA; aur jia ke pas kafiWi 
nahin, us ue wuh bin jo m ke pas hai 
te liya jaegd. 

36 li Aur m ae kal.fi, KhudA ki 
biid.thahaf. aisi hai, jalai ck Bhakha jo 
zamiu men bij bowe; 

27 Aur rit o din wub sowe, uthe, 
aur wub b! j ia tarab uge aur barbe', ki 
wub na jttne, 

28 Ih liye ki samin Ap sg &p phal 
lati hai, pahle sahsf, pbir bal, ba'd 
ke bal men taiyar dana 

23 Aur jab dina pak cbuka, te wuh 
filfaur hansiia hhijwari bai, kyiinki 
kfttne kti waqt. pahuncha bai. 

30 t Pbir us ne kaba% ki Hain 
Kirabi ki bidabihat kt. kis ne akibat 
karcn, aur us ke Liye kaun si misal 
liwen ? 

31 Wuh khardal kedineki manisi 
liai, kt jab zamin men buya jati hai, 
zamiu ke sah bijorj se chhtila'bai : 

82 Par jab boyi gaya, to ugtii hai, 
nur aab iaik;irii>n bo barh jati, aur 
hari diliari nikalta, yaliari tak ki hawi 
ka para&de (u ke Raya KtOfi baseri kar 
sakit" hain. 

33 Aur wuh un se aisi bahuteri 
tamsikm mon, ua ki saninjh kt luu- 
waficj, kalam tahta thi. 

34 Aur be-lamsil un se biten na 



MATIQUS, T. kitamwl. 

35 Usi din, jab shim hrij, us j»o 
unben kaba, ki A 'o, bam p&r jawen, 

3fi Aur *ra us jarua'at h» rukhsat 
karke use, jis tarah se ki kishti par 
thi, le clmle. Aur ua ke sath aur bhi 
tbbofi kishtian tftfg. 

37 Tab bari indhi chali. aur lshren 
kishti par yaluiti lak lagin ki wuh 
jiani se libur chali thi. 

38 Aur wub pst.wii.rki taraf sirtale 
lakyarakhko so raba tba; tab unhori 
ne use jagake kaba, AJ UMad, tujfae 
flkr nahin ki bam sah halak biota 
hain? 

39 Tab ua no nthk B hawa ko 
dauti, aur darya ko kaba, Tbalicir ja; 
tbania rab. To bawa thabar gayi, 
aur liari nfwA ho gaya, 

40 Phir urihuii kaba, Timi kyi'in 
aise khaufnak biii\ aur kdbu ku i'ntKpid 
nabin rakhte? 

41 We nibayat dare, aur apas men 
kahne lagi*, Yih kis tarali ka bai, kl 
bawa aur darya bhi us ke farmanbar- 
ddr hain ? 

V BA'B. 

AUR we darya ke pdr fiadarimou 
ko mulk mt'ri pahunche. 

2 Aur jyi'm wub kisliti se utra, 
wunhin ek ddmf, jis nen ek a&ptk 
ruh Ibi, iiabron so nikaTte hue use 
mili: 

3 Wuh qabron ke dartniyan ralui 
kartd tha, aur koi use zaujiron 8o bbi 
jakar na sakta tbi: 

4 Ki wuh bir bar berion aur zanjir- 
j se jakra gayi tba, aur us ne zanjir- 

on ko tora, aur U-Hoii ka jfokre tufepe 

kiyo; aur koi uso fab'i men na lawikii. 
6 Wuh haniesha rat diu i^haron 
ir qabron ke bieh chilliyi karti, aur 

ftpM (a,]'i_i jiattharuri se katta tba. 
6 Par jyiin us ne Tin' ko diir as 

deklia, dauri, aur use aijda kiya, 
Aur Imri awiz s 



. .-. cbillike kaba, 
karti; lekm khalwat mag apnfl sha- Al Khuda 'l'a'iitd ke Bo(e YW, majhe 

girdon ko sab bilon ke nm'iio batlataltujli se kyi kira V tujbe Khudi" ki 
,lltt - |<iasam doti brjn, mujba na sati. 



Murii, ■ k i><hni to chiiiird/ii, MAltQUS, 

H Kydnki us no om kaha thd, ki Ai 
ndpak ruh, us aumi mag bo nika! A. 

9 Pliir ua ne us se~pdchhi, Tera 
kya n ini hal ? Tab us ne jawab diyi, 
ki Jlerd nam Tuuian h:ii, is Uy» ki 
bom bahut liniij. 

10 Phir us ne us ki bahut iiiinn.it- ki, 
ki haiiiey is uarzamin se niat nikil. 

11 Aur wahan naliuion ko nazdik 
BttafOB ki ek bara gol ciiarti tbi, 

12 So Bab deon ne ne ki minnat 
karke kaha, ki Ilam ko un sdaron ke 
■ianniyan bhej, ta ki ham un men 
paithen. 

13 Yisd* ne filfanr unhen ijissat di ; 
aur m uapak nihon nikalke sdaron 
men pai Ih gayin ; aur wuh gol karirc 
[iar se darya men, kuda ; aur we oarib 
do bait ko tho, jo darya men ddbko 
lcar gaye. 

H Aur wn jo rfum ko chardte tho 
bhige, aursbahr aurdihat men khabar 
pahunchii. Tad we ua mijare ko 
tk'khne ko iiiklt', 

15 Aur Yisd' pia ae, nur ua dtwdno 
ko, jis men deon k a tuinan thi, baithe, 
aur kapre pahiue, aur husbyir dekhi: 
aur dar gaye. 

16 Aur jinhon ne yih dekhi thi, us 
diwane ki Riri ahwil, aur sdaron ki 
tamani majard, un se bayan kiyi. 

17 Tab we ua bi minnat karat lago, 
ki un ki «arhad<l se nikal jiio. 

16 Jydn wuh ki.shti par ayi, nsne, 
jis men deo thi, us se minnat ki, ki us 
ku sii.Ui rahe. 

19 Lekin Yisd' ne uso ijiznt na di, 
baiki uw kaha, ki Apao Koar ja. apae 
logog pas, aur unhen khabar de ki 
Khudawand ne lujh jiar rahm karke 
t'ujh sg kya kara kiyi. 

"0 Tab wuh traya, aur Dikdpulis ke 
mulk men, un kamon ki, jitno Yisd' 
no us ke liye kiye the, manadi kame 
lagi; aur sabhon ric ta'ajjub kiyi. 

21 Aur jah Yfsd' kishtt par phir pir 
iya, lari bhir us jiAw jam'a hui; aur 
WOh darya ke nazdik t ha. 



fU men bahttt deo Aft 

22 Aur, dekho, ki 'ibddatkhdne ke 
sa.rdaron inen se ek shakhs, jis ka naiii 
Jiiirus thi, ityd, aur uso dekhkar Ud 
ke (jadamoij uar giri; 

23 Aur yih kahke ki Meri chhoti 
betf marno par hai, us ki bahut min- 
nat ki, ki wuh awe, aur apne bitli us 
pir rakhe, ki wub changi boj to vuh 

24 Tab wuh Us ke yathgayd; aur 
bari bhir us ke picbhe chali, aur ttse 
daba I iya. 

26 Aur pk 'aurat jis kd birali baras 
se lalui jari thd, 

2f> Jis no bahut se hakfmon ki 
dawaen khai tliin, aur apni sab mil 
kharch karkc kui-hh faida na piya 
thi, baiki us ki bimiri aur bhi barh 
gayi ihi, 

27 Yisu' ki kbaliar sunke nn bhir 
niffli us ku pii'hhe se ii, aur us ke 
kapro ko eblui liyi. 

2& Kyunki us ne kahi, ki Agar 
main airf us ke kapre ko clihii lun, to 
changi ho jaVingi. 

29 Aur tillanr tis ke labu kd sotd 
band ln'ul; nur us M apne badan ke 
ahwil si; jaiin, ki main us alat so 
cbftogf liui. 

30 Tab Yisd' no filfaur apne men 
ni, ki Mujh men se <piwat nikli, un 

bhir ki taraf mutawajjil» hoknr kaha, 
ki Mara tapfC ko kia no chhiii? 

31 Us ke shigirdon ne us st! kahd, 
Tu dekhli bai ki log lujh |uir gire 

iarte hain, pbir td kaliti hai, Mujhe 
tis ne chhiii ? 

32 Tab us no cbaron taraf nisrdb bi, 
t a ki use, jis ne yih katu kiyi thii, 
dek b e. 

33 Aur wuh 'aurat sab kucbh jin- 
kar jo us par wiqi' bdi thd, dnrti aur 
kampti ii, aur us ke ige gir pari, aur 
sab sach sach us se kahi. 

34 Tab us no ubo kahi, Ai beti, 
torn iiniri no tujhe baohayi ; saldmat 

r apni ifat se bacin rah. 

Jab wuh yibi kabti thi, 'ibi- 



Jairtis M be/j. koj'ihind. . MARQUS, VI. Masih H hilal logon H rde. 

datkhanc ke sardfir ke yahan se logop 1 
ne ako kaba, ki Turi Ticti mur guyi, ab j 
kyun Ustad ku ziyiWa taklif detil hai? i 

3f> Yltiu? ne ii» bit ku, jo wo knh 
rahe the, aiintc hi, 'ibadat k hane ke > 
lardai ko kaha, Mati Iur, tfcqa£i'atto > 4d 1 
rakh. 



' Aur ua ne, siu-ii l'ntnw, aur 
Ya'aAb, aur Ya\|i'ih ku bbai Yuhanna 
«i', ki.fi k/j apnu Mith jam' na diri, 

3H Alir 'ibadat-khane ku f&rofr ke 
ghar nieii dke sbot aur gul, nur logon 
ko bahut tote pitte dekha. 

■'W Aur bbitM jaku uuhen kaha, 
Tum kahe ko gul karte, aur lOta bor 
larki innr nahfn gayi, baiki unti hal 

40 We us par hanso; lekin w uli sab 
ko bahar karke larki ke ma bap ku, 
aurapno siithioii ko toke, jahan wub 
larki pari thi, andar aya. 

41 Aur us larki ka inif.h pakarkar 
nafi kaha, Talirha qnuii ; jin ka tarju 
ma jrib hai, ki Ai larki, main tujh 
kain a. hi'uj, tith. 

42 W'dijliirj wnh irtrki nthkechalae 
lagi; kyuiiki vvuii harah bara* ki tbi. 
Tdb wf kihufc bi iiairan iiiie. 

43 Fhir us rit! uuhen bubut takid hc 
huktn kiyji, ki Yib ko: ua jaiie; aur 
r.iriiulva, ki Uw kuciili kkaue ko den.. 

VI liA'B. 

PU I II wabiin so rawan» htH, 
apBfl walau map iyaVj aur us ke 
shigrrd us ke pfchhe ha liye, 

2 Jab sabi. ka iiiu hr.a, wub 'ihri- 
dfttkhone ic i«rj i:i']iin dana lagi: aur 
bahutog ne miakB hairin bakai kaha, 
ki Yih bsiten uh ne kalian se p&in? 
:iiir yih ky:i hikmat hai, Jo usedi Bayi 
bal, ki uisi keramat us ko hith n 
zahir bott haiQ? 



be-'izzat nahin hai, magar apne walau 
aur apne kunbe, aur apuu ghar 
inen,. 

6 Aurwuli koi rmi'ajiwi waintn na 
■likhlii saka, siwi in ko, ki thnre ro 
t ■ i u i ri i«. ■ r i p;u hathrakhkuutinencJiangiL 
kiya. 

Aur us no ua ki bo-fmani pe ta- 
'njjub kiya. Aur fiupaa ko g&QW0Q 
lu'-ii tii'lim datA (ibira. 

T Aur un l»arah ko buiaya, aur 
un ki> do do karke bhejna slnirii' kiya, 
uuhejj na^ak ruhon par ikhtiyar 
diya; 

S Aur unhen mikni kiya, ki eafar ko 
liye, aiwa lathi ke, kiloah na lo, na 
jholi, na roti, na tfue kanuubuud inen 
paise : 

li UaflU ji'itian pahino ; par do 
kurto ruat paltiuu. 

10 Aur unlitit kaha, JahSij tum ki- 
si ghai uu'ii ilukhil lio, to jab talt tum 
ua jagai sc jao, wahin raho. 

11 Aur jittio tuiuheij 0*M1 na ka- 
2, aur tumhari tu kuiU'ji, to jab tum 

wabau se niklo, apue pariwun ki ^urd 
jbar (lena, ta ki un par gawahi ho. 
Main tuiu n eaeh kahta hiin, ki 'm Irilat 
ko din, Saib'un aur 'Amiirah ko liye, 
us shaiir ki banUbat, barda«ht karni 
iahaj hogi. 

12 Aur unhun nojako mand4.li ki, 
ki Tauba karo. 

13 Aur bahot ao daoQ ke di';r klj i, 
aur haliLiuin ko, jo bimar the, un i>ar 
tel dlialko changa kiya. 

14 Aur jab OOKtffl bdd^hdh ne sn- 
na, (kyiinki us ka nain mashhiSr hua 
Iba;) tab us ne kaha, ki Ydlmniia 
ba|Hisina-dent)wii!ii murdon inen saji 
ufhi, isi liye ua ho bari ulsir-bakhsh 



a Kya yih Mariyam ka Hcli liarhai karamaten hoti hain. 
nabin? aur Ya'qiib, aur Yv.ecs, aur lo Auron ne kabil, ki Wuh EOyii 
V.iiii.-;.'i!,. n ShftBja'u» ka bbrii cahin l' hai. J-'hir aurwi ne kaha, Yih ok na- 
aur kya us ki bfthineg baiuaK pfojbi hai, ya nabkm mon su k;4 ki mi- 
yaban nabtr bah}? Aur ttnhojj na us nlad bai. 
ih thokar khrti. | 10 l' aT Hcrodis ne mrikar kahfi, ki 

4 Tab Yhui' ne unhen kahil, Nabi Yih to Yahauni bai, jis kd sir main 
52 



Yiihnna kd sir KAEQCS, VI. M/djnmK 

iic katwiyi hai ; w uh mtirdon men &e aur m lnrki ko diyd ; aur us larki ne 
ji utha hai. apni md ko diyi. 

17 Kyiujki Hen>di.-< nedpHerodiyds' 2El Tali us ku ehdgird sunkar de, 
ke wdate, jo uakc lihai FailhriNki jorii aur us ki liitili ko utbdke oabr men 
tbi, log bhejkar Ynhannd ko pakar-rakha. 

wdke qaidkhdno men band klya';| KO Aur «ipiU Yisu' ke pil jam'a 
kyiiiiki us lio us Ke bydh kiyd tha. [htie, aur jo k nol ih unhon ne kiyd, aur 

IH Aur Yuhanna u Bero'iis ko;jo kuchh sikhlaya tha, jsuLj us Beb&ylm 



kahd tha, ki Apne bhdi' ki jorti rakh 
na tuju par rawa nalnn. 

19 I» liye Herndiyits us kd kina 
rnklui, aur chdhti tlii ki us<; jin se 
nidro ; jwir wuh na kar sak t : 

20 Is wdste ki Herodis, Yuhannd ko 
mani i rdstbaz nur muuaddaa jankar 
us sc dartd, aur us ki piadirl kartd, 
aur us ki sunkar bubut si baton par 
'amal kartd, aur uh ki bdten kliushi sc 
Buutd thd. 

21 Alihir, qdbu kd din dyd ki He- 
rodis ne apni sdlgirih men apne bu- 
zurgon, aur risdladaron, aur Jalil ke 
amiron ki zivdfat ki ; 

22 Tab Hen-liyds ki beti andar di, 
aur uachke Herodis aur us ku mih- 
iiidnoa ko khush kiyd : tab bddshdh 
ne us larki ko kahd, Jo tii elidhe, so 
tii mang, ki main tujhe dtiflga. 

2.3 Aur us hc Msam khai, ki Mcri 
aillii bUsbihat tas, j" km-hh td mujh 
se ma-jge.main tujhe diirgd. 

24 Aur wuh ehali gayi, aur apni md 

i.'i, ki Main kyii mdngun? 
Wuh boli, ki Yuhannd baprisiua-de- 
nowdlo kd Hr. 

25 Tab wuh fitfaur bddshdh ke pds 
ehdldki so di, aur us «<■■ 'a r z kaike ka- 
hd. Main chdhti ain, ki tii Ynhannd 
baptisiiia-denewdle kd air ek thaii men 
ablii imyhe de. 

26 Itadsliali bahu t garngin hi'id, par 
apiti (pisaui, aur sdth bailltnewalon ke 
ubah na ehdhd ki us se inkar kara. 

27 Tab bddshdh ne fil&Uf jallad ko 
hukm karke bhejd, ki us kd sir lawe. 
"Us no jdkc us kd sir (jaidkhdue mcti 
kdtd, 

2B Aur ek thali men rakiike lavd, 
53 



kiyd. 

31 TaJi Dsne unhen kahd, Alagwf- 
rdna men chalo, aur zarra SNBtio, is 
iiye ki wahdn bahu!- log; dte jdtc ilie, 
anr unhen khdnd khdite ki bhi fnrsat 

tlii. 

32 Tab we aku: kishti par charhke 
ek wirdne men gftj«. 

Par logon ne unheii jdte dek h d, 
aur bahuton ne use pulichdnd, aur ndre 
viiiiliiun m klinshki khushkl udhar 
daure, aur un H d^e jd jiahunche, aur 
ikatthe lioko us pas du. 

34 Aur Yisu' ne niknlke hari bliir 
ko dekhd ; OM un par ralun livi. kv- 
linki w« un blienm ki mdnind the, ki 
jin kagararlyi nahin ; aur wuh unhen 
balint si Ivdten sikhldno Ingd. 

35 Jab din baliut •)\\-A\i, us ke sha- 
girdon ne us pds dke "kahd, Yili Jagal 
wirdn hai, aur bahut der hui : 

36 Unhen rukhsat kar, td ki we chd- 
ron taraf ke pdnwon, aur hastion men 
jdke apne liye n.iti mol leii ; ki khdne' 
ko im pds kuchh nahin. 

37 Us ne unhen jawdb men kalta, 
T u m unhen khdne ko do. 1»D W* 
bole, Kyd huni jri.hr do sau ilinar ki 
rotidn mol leij, aur uuiun kliilaucij V 

38 Us ne uuhenkalni, Tumlidre pan 
kitni rotidn liain V jake dekho. Un- 
hon ne 'darvdl't karko kahd, Piach 
rotidn, aur do machhlidn. 

30 Tab uw M unhen hukm kiya, ki 
Un sah ko hari gbas par paut pint 
karki hithlio. 

40 W o sau sau, aur pachds pachas, 
pint men baithe. 

41 Tab usne wuh pdncli rotirin nur 
do maehhlidu lekc dsiudn ki tar;if 



PA'n-h htwAr ko khihi/td. MAKQl'S, VII. Ftirisitm H riivatj'ilr», 

doklike harakat ch&hi, aur rotian to-jshahr, yi gin w men gaya, iltlIh.ii ae 
riij, aur asoe akagisdi ri ItO diij, ki uii[ biuifLion ko biiiron men rak hi, aur us 
koigcrakheii ; «urus ae wedomuuhu- ki minmu ki kis;rfuski ponhik ke 
liin un sab inefl bantin. datiuin ko dihii i«n ; nur jituoii ne use 

42 We eab khike ser hue, chbiia, aehcbhfl ha gwe, 

43 Aur \iti!i-.ij ae t ■ il; i- 'U W birali : VII BATtV 
fokriiirj bharin, aur kttCci maoiihikirj fTIAH Fatfei atar ba'w &qfe Yariisft- 

X lain mi' akc us paa jam'a hue, 

'i Jub unimu nc us ke ba'ae ahigird- 
on ko napak, yu'ne, bin dhoe Lithori 
w) mti khite dekili, to 'aib higiyi. 

8 U liye ki l-'ami, baiki .sah Yahudi, 
buzurgon ki riwayat par 'amal karke, 
j;ib tak ki apne hath kabul tak uadko 
ii'ii. u k:.. ■u.', 

4 Aur bazar se ike jab tak gas! tia 
kar Icij, uahir, khute. Aur bah u t ei 
aur biten baiti, jin ko we riwij ke 
Babafa mute Imiri, jaise piyilon aur 
Lojofl aur timbe ke bartanon aur char- 
pafog ki dboni, 

5 Tab KarUion aur feajhog ne us se 
pdefabi, ki Tew sbagiid btuargeg, ki 
riwayat par kyun naliiii diulir, pat- 
roli i.in diW hitfaaa kh;ite hain ? 

6 Ub ue urilich jawab owgj kabi, ki 
Yas'aiyih nn tum rijAktroT) ke hauq 
tua]] kyi khiih Dubowat ki hai, jai^a 
ki likhi bui, ki Ye log Yionthcm so 
oifti bu/.urji karte hain, par mi ku .lil 
(UUjh se dftf haiii. 

1 Aur we be-i'iida mori paras twh 
kartir lini», kyiiuki ju ta'lim we sikh- 
lite kain, iriNau ku aiikiiiu iiain. 

H Ia liye tum Khudi ke liuk m ko 
tark karke insan ki riwayat, jaise 
loton aur piyilon kii dhotii, maute ho; 
aur aise bahutere kim hain, jo tum 
karto ho. 

9 Aur «s ne unht'n kafaa, 'J'nm 
Khudi ke hukra ko bakhubi batil 
karte ho, ta ki apui riwayat ko <j;iiiu 
r:ik hn. 

10 KyiSnki JSAei ne kahA, ki Apno 
bip aiir apiii rn;i ki tiiV.iiu kar ; aur, 
Jo koi l>a[> ya nia ko koge, wuh jiin se 
mini U& 

11 Pai 1 tum kahte hcij Agar koi ap- 



i bhi uthiiin, 

44 Aur wo jinhon ne rotiin khiiii, 
paiich bazar mani ko qarib the. 

45 Aur filfiuir us ueapuo Bbiffirdog 
ko takiii n iiukiii kiya, ki Jab tak 
i l i r l i [_i logog ku rukhsiit karun., tum 
kit-liti par charho.aur us pir liaiUuuda 
ko age jao. 

4ti Aur dp unricii rukhnat karko 
pahar par du i untuiuie ko paya. 

■17 Aur jab ahaiu Inii, ki.dui bich 
daryi men thi, aur wuh akela khush- 
ki pai tha. 

48 U» no dekili, ki we kbswnfl Bi 
bakui Umg haiii, kyiitiki lmwi un kt 
mukhalif thi; tab pkliiile pakar rii 
k'> wuh «arya par chalti h tia uu ku 
j-iis liya, aur curiiid ki uji he tiga bafkfi. 

49 Jab uuhon no uso daryi par 
clialte dekhA, khiyal kiyi, ki bhiit 
luii, aur chilli uthe : 

50 Kyiijiki »b no iiho dekia, aur 
ababnie, nt wah OJfiuu un se kalain 
kuke unhen kahae k«i, KhAtir-ja- 

.'.i . imMio; niiiin iiiin ; niat daru. 

51 l'hir wuh kishli par uu piaehap- 
!iii, aur bftwjf Uiam ptyi ; tab iiulujti 
uo apne ililoii BtsQ niliiyai hairan hokt? 
ta'ajjab kiya. 

62 Ia liye ki uulion ae rotinn ke 
jiiuajiaa ko r.ji saujjlii tha; kyi'iuki 
uu ke dil Nakhc the. 

53 Aur wo |iir gasuike Quum mnl 
!,: mulk Hi'-Tj :ie, «UT duit iiir lajriiy.L. 

54 Jlib we kihhti pat ae utre, ihlaur 
l)Qg use pahdianki!, 

55 Uh mulk ki bar taraf se daure, 
aur bimiroii ku ohirpiioo par rakhke, 
jahin nnhog no niaa thi ki wuh hai, 
!<• jaiio lage. 

5ij Aur wuh jahin knkin bawti, yi 
&4 



Paki aur nApdki ki bdhat. MARQUS, VII. 
ne bip ya md ko kahu, ki Jo fdida 
niujhe tuju ko pahuuchdnd thd, 30 
Qurban, ya'ne, hadya hiid ; 

12 So turi om us ke bdp ya uh ki 
md ki kuchh minimi karuo nahin 
deto ; 

13 Yun tum Kbudd ke kaUm ko 
apni riwayat se, jo tum ne jari ki hai, 
batil kartu lio ; aur aisd bahut kuchh 
kart« bo. 

14 ^j Phir ub ne sab logon ko pas 
bulake kaha, ki Tum nb ke aab mori 
Buno, aur samjho : ■ 

15 Aisr koi chiz ad/ni ke bahar na- 
bi» hai, jo us nu-n dakhil buku itts 
odpdk kar sake; uar wub clii/'-ij jo IU 
meg se nikahi hain, we M adiui kn 
□apak karti baiti. 

16 Agar kUi ke kdn sunnc ke hon, 
toBuue. 

17 Jabwuh bbirkepassegbar men 
gaya, ub ke sha;rjr<lun ne us «e us tam- 
sil ki babat puchbd. 

1S Tab ua ne unhon kaha, Kya tum 
bhi aise nd-samajh lio i Kya tum na- 
hin jfotc bo, ki jo chiz bahar n lidmi 
ke bhitar jati hai, usc ndpdk nahin 
kar sakti ; 

19 Ia liye ki wub us ke dil men na- 
hin, baiki pet men jati hai, aur pae- 
khane men mkalli hai, yuij sab khaue 
ki najasat eb ha t jati hai V 

20 Phir ua ne kaha, Jo drlmi men 
se tiikalta hai, wulii aumi ko ndpdk 
karta hai. 

21 Kyunki andar, ya'ne, ddmi ke 
dil hi ne, bure andeaba, zinakarian, 
hardinkdrian, qatl, 

22 ChorFag, Idlach, badi, makr, 
ma>ii. l«id-uaziiri,kulr,iihckhi, nddani, 
rtikalti bain : 



J£k bakire ko chniKjn fatnu'<,. 

25 Kyunki ek 'aurat, jia ki chhot.i 
ln'ii mag oiaik ruh thi, us ki klia- 
oar sunke di, aur us ke panwon par 
Siri : 

26 Yib 'aurat Yunani aur nauin ki 
Surufiniki thi; us ne minnat ki, k i 
wuh us deo ko ua ki liet! par ac 
utdre. 

27 Par Y!b4' ne uso kahd, ki Pahle 
farzandon ko »er boae de: kyrinki 
i'ar/aiuloii ki roti leke kutton ke dg« 
ddlna laiq uahin. 

lir! Us ne jawab mm kaha, Han, 
nj Khudawand, lekin kutfce niez k» 
tale farzandon ki roti ke tukrun meii 
.so kha-te hain. 

29 Tab ue ne «so kahd, Ia bat ko 
sibalj m ehalf jd; wub deo teri beti 
par se utar gaya. 

30 Jab wuh ghar men pabunchi, 
to kyd dekhA, ki deo dfir ho gaya, 
aur i h -t i i)ii'iihaun'' par j «iri hai. 

31 t Aur pbir wuh Sfir aur Hai.la 
ki sarhaddon ae rawdnahud, mu Di ka- 
pal]* ki sarliadd'iti men hokar Jtttl ke 
darya ke pas Ayd. 

32 Aur Union, ne uk balibe ko jis 
ki zubdn men luknat thi w iias Idke 
us ki minnat ki, ki ajma biith ua par 
rakhe. 

33 % Wuh ua ko bhirrneri se kina- 
re le gayd, aur apni ungiian us ke kdu- 
OD men dalin, aur apiid thdk leke us 
ki /uban par lagdya ; 

'M Aur asi 1 liii ki tam f nazar karke 
ek ah ki, aur use kaha, Htbitah, ya'ne, 
Kliul i do. 

35 wunhin ua ke kdn khul gaye, 
v& us ki zulian ki girah hbikhul {yiyi, 
aur wuli kluih bolne higd. 

36 Aur ua ae unhim hukm diyi, ki 



23 Yib aab buri eiiizen andar s*' ni- kiai ne na kabeti ; lekin jitnd ua ne 
kaiti hain, aur admi ko ndpdk karti mnu'a kiyd t.iiii,, we utuaziyada iiiash- 
hain. liur karLe the : 

24 T Phir wabdn se titbke Stir auri 37 Aur uuhon ne nihayat bat&B 
Raidi ki wfttddDB mcn givHt, aur ek Imko kaha, Us ne sah kuchli achohhii 
gbar men dakbil hoke obdhd ki koiikiya: ki bahiron kn sunne ki, aur 
U ji'-n.' j b kin p^sliida na rah saka. 'gungoij ko hulno ki tdqat deta hai. 

55 



Ekandheko MAI'.QU 

VIII BA'B. 

U N dinon, men jab bari bhir jam'a 
thi, aur uu pas km-l.li kbaun fco 
Uli Tiiii, Visu" m- apne ^lisi^ii Jun kupas 
buliikc unlien kahd, 

'2 Mujhe ia bhir par rahm dti. hai, 
ki ab tin diu puzrekiye Ing merona t h 
haiii, aur un ke pas kuohh kiidue ku 
nahin. : 

3 Agar main unhcij bliukho 
jdne ko ruklisat karun, to we rah uien. 
mdnde paivn^e : kyrinki ba'ze uu. men, 
liain, jo dor m ati bain. 

4 U* ko «bagirdun ne uBe jawab 
diya, ki Ih winine inci; kabin se kot 
admi roti pdwe, ki iriben ser kare r 

5 Tab ttt m- un.se piichha, ki Tum- 
baru iws ki mi rotian hain V W e bule. 
Bit. 

G l'hir ub nc leburi ko hukm k iya. 
ki 2Ai»in par bnith jaen; aur uh ne 
wulii t4t rotian lir, aur fibukr karke 
tivrin, aur apne sbagirdon ko din, ki 
un ke age rnkhen ; aur urihon nc logon 
ko ■:'_:: rakh din. 

7 Aur un ke l>an kat ek ehhoti 
maehhlidn thin ; bo us n« harakat 
mdnekc bukm kiyd ki unkcn bhi uu 
ke age dhaivti. 

B Chimanchi unhon ne k baya, aur 
eer hiio: aur uu tukron ki, ju bacb 
rahe the, sat tokrian utliain. 

9 Aur khdnewale chdr ha^dr ke 
naiih ilio. Tbir ub ne uiihen rukhsat 
k iya. 

10 T Aur wuh apne &Iidpirdon ke 
Balb fauran kislitl parcharhku DaFma- 
unta ki atrdf men iya. 

11 Tab Fa risi uikle, aur us se htij- 
jut karke ub ke imtihdn ke liye denidn 
ho kol undian chaha. 

1*2 Ub lio apne dil se ah kbfnchkc 
Italia, 1b mndnu ko log kyrtn nisha» 
cliiibto hain/ main tum t,e sacb kahtd 
bilii, ki lu zam&ne ko logon ko koi 
nbd iin diya ua jaega. 

13 Aur wub un ne judo* hoke phir 
kislili par cbarhke par gaya. 



S, VIII. dnkh dtnA, 

14 % Aur w© roti lene kobhnlgaye 
the, aur kishti jiar, siwa ck roti ke, ini 
pAa kurhli na tlia. 

15 Aur us ne unhen yi'in farmdya, 
Khalardar, Farisiun ke khainir, aur 
Herodis ke khamir we parhea karo. 

Iti Tab we apaa men giiftngt'i kai'kc 
k:iiiiic [a^e, Viii is Hy« iiiii, ki iiaiiuiru 
MUh !"■ -r i liabin. 

17 litd'ne yilidaryai't karkcunben 
fiinnayn, Tum kyiijj kiiiyal karte ho, 
ki yili i- liye bai, ki Jimiiare «itli roti 
uidiin? kyii tuni ab tak nabiij jatite, 
aur iialitn sjuiiajhte 'i kya timUnira dil 
ab tak saklit bai 't 

IH A'nklien bote hiic, tnm nabin 
dekbte? nur kau hote hue, nahT^ 
sunte? aur kya tumben yad nabii, f 

H* Jis watjt main ne wuh pancli 
rotian panen bazar ke liye torin, timi 
ne tiikroij ag kifui t<fkria(i bbari 
iii.l,;-; n_. 'i UnhoH ne ua se kabd, IldraL. 

20 Aur jib woqt aat char ha/Ut ko 
liye torin, tum ne tukron sc kitni 
tokrian bhari utliain V dnLffl tte ka- 
Li, BH, 

21 Tab us nounben kahA, Pliirtum 
kyiln uabiri nauiftjhMa? 

22 T| Pfiir wuh Baitsnida men Sya ; 
aur m vk tituUit: k» us pd.s liie, aur t»s 
ki minnat ki, ki wuh DW chhi'nw. 

23 Wnk luandheM bith pekarke 
use liasti ke babar le paya, aur Ua ki 
ankbon meu tlnikke ajinc hiit.li us pai" 
rnkbe, aur us se iniehlia, Kyatu kuchh 
dekbtahai? 

24 Ub ne nazar i'ipnr uthakc kabd, 
Main durakliton se idmiuji ko cbalte 
dekii ta hiiii. 

25 Tab ub ne phir ua ki ankbon par 
apne liat h rakbo, aur pbir ipar dekli- 
ne ko farmayd ; aur wub ehanird bua, 
aur sftb ko acbchlii tarah deklul. 

S6 Aur uh ne use yih kaliku ghar 
bheJ4 ki Battf men na ji, aur Buni 
— Qfl kisi bo mat k;di. 

27 t Tab Tiri* aur ub ke ehd ird 
Qaiaa*fyB Filippi ki bastion men «ayo, 



Patrus ho maUmat barnd. MAKQUS, IX. 
aur nili in.-n n.- ur ,i ■ 
piichbA, aur niibrtj kaha, ki Log kyA 
kalnc haiTj ki main krnin bmi? 

2» Unbon Dfl jawab diya, ki Yfi- 
Jiainii l'uptisma-deuewa'Ift, aur ba'ze 
Iliy:v, pai ImV.i' nabiog men se ek. 

2'j Pbir us ne unhen kali A, Tum 
kya kahte lio ki maiii kami h*D 
Patrua ne jawab men us se kaha, Tu 
!■: .Mii.-ih boL 

30 Tab us ne unhen tAkid ki, ki 
nieri babat kisi «e yih ruat kat 

31 Fbir wuh unlien sikhlAi 
ki Znnir bai ki Ibu i A'dm bahut"sA 
dukb uthawe, aur wuh bnzurg<_ 
samar kAbinon aur faqihon se ra<ld 
kiyA jAr, nur inani jAe, aur tin roa ke 
ptchhe ji uthe. 

3" Aur u> iifl yih bat Riif babi. Tab 
FateUi UM alag lo jAke us par jhunjh- 
lAno laga. 

33 i'inis ne phirke, aur apne rIiA- 
giriioij par nigAh karke, Patrus par 
jininjhiAyA,aur kahA, Ai ShailAn,merc 
Bambu*: se dir ho : kyi';i_iki r.u KbudA 
ki ebfsog ki niibiij, baiki insAn ki 
cbin?B ki fikr kurtahai. 

84 5 Tab ue ne mi iogon ko apne 
sbnjiniou ke sdih bulak e un hc kaha, 
Jo kol men plchhe Aya obuta, chAbi- 
yo ki wuh apno sc iukAr kare, aur apiii 
salib kn uthAke mcri pairaui kare. 

35 /s liye ki jo koi eliabtn ki asnl 
jAn bachawe, asa i^anwAtgA ; par jo koi 
nier? aur Injil ke liyc npui jiin ko 
gimwai^a, wuhi use bachawe^A. 

3G Kyunki agar koi ddmi Pari 
dunya ko hasil kare, aur aimi jau ka 
iui-i^Ali uthAwe, to uae kya. fAida 
hmai '' 



37 Aur Admi apni jAn ko badlemen 
kya ■■„■_■,.. I 

3£ Kyunki jo koi is /makar aur 
khatAkar zamAna merj mujh se aur 
meri Mtog se shanmi. ei, Ibn i AMaca 



bhi, jab apne Bap ki bashmat se j^klki pakta IliyAs ka ana zariir 
Briahtag ke sAth iwj», us se sbar- 12 U» ne jawab moa uni 



mauga. 



Masih M surat ka badai jiind. 
IX BA'B. 

U 9 no unheii kahA, Main. tum rc. 
sacb kublA bi'jn, ki Tu muj t^e 
jo yahaii khare hain, bu'ze bain ki 
jab tak Kluidaki baiisbilbat qudrat st* 
ati iir dekben, maut ka maza na cba- 
kherjge. 

li 'j Aur eliha din ba'd Tiad' ne 
Patrus, aur Ya'o/ib, aur Yubauiia ko 
satb liya, nur nnben ek tinche pabir 
par alag ie gaf« : aur un ke Age us k'i 
slirat bada) ffktL 

3 Aur us ki posbAk cbamakti. aur 
babut sufeii, bart' ki tarah ho gayf, ki 
waisi duuyd nien koi dbobi mAcl im 
kar sake. 

4 Tab IliyAs Musa ke «Atb unbpri 
ilikhAi diya; aur we Visii' se gufUigd 
karte tim. 

o Patrus no nuikluitib beku VinV 

kabA, ki Ai Kabbi, hainiin !iv. 

bibtar liai ki yabau ta&tea, aur tin 

dere banAweii, ck tcre, aurek Musa ke, 

aur ek IliyAs ke live. 

b' Kyiiilki wub im jAnt.4 tbA.ki kyA 
kabtd; ia Jiyc ki we babut dar gaju 
the. 

7 Tab ck bAdai ne un par saya 
kiyA ; aur us badai intiij so ok Awas; Ai, 
aur yib kabti tbi, ki Ylh nierA piyara 
lieta hai : us ki suno. 

b Aur ekAok uubon ne idbar udhar 
naear karke Visu 1 ko wiwA ki.^j ko apne 
'Al.li na di'klia. 

i) Jab we pabAr se utarte tlie us ne 
uuhen hukiti kiyA, ki Jo kuchb tum 
ne dokbA bai, jab tak ki Ibu i AMam 
murdon men so ji na ut.be, Ub>i to ua 
kabnA. 

Aur wo ua kabSm ko Apaa hi 

_ nikhke cbaroliA karte tb<>, ki 
nmiiioii nn'ii se ji utbmt ke kyA nia'no 
hain. 

11 T Pbir unbon ne us so kaliA, 
aur puohliA, k i Fauib kyiin kabtc hain, 
t1! "Ab kA AuA zarur lini V 

jawAb nifii unlien kabA, 
ki Iliyas to i»alile AtA liai, aur sab 



Sk 'jii-mji ruh ko 

kuchh bahal karta hai; 



1U|I| i 

ii:ii, ki Wuh tahui sa ranj uthawega, 
aur hatjir kiya jaega ? 

ia Lckin main tum se kalita Ini n, 
ki Iliyas a ehuka hai, nur jaisa M ke 
haqq men likha gaya tha, unhoT) nojo 
kuohli ki chiiliA, iu ko with kiya. 

14 T Aur jab wuh apne shdgirdon, 
ke pas aya, Un ki diaron tat&f kiri 
Lini-, aur BMjitoB ko, uu so bahs karte 
dek k a. 

15 Aur filfaur sari bhfj use dekhk: 
nihayat hairan lnii, aur un \As, daurke 
use giiUiri kiya. 

H) Tali uh ne faqihim se piichha, 
Tum un se kya bahs karte ho ? 

17 Ek no uh bhir meti si; jawab diya 
aur kaha, Ai Ustad, main apne bete 
ko, jis men guugt ruh hai, tere pas 
laya hiin. 

18 Wuh jiihan kabin use pakarti. 
pitak doti hai ; n,ur wuk kaf hhar lata 
Ini, aui kpu« dant pinta liai, aur wuh 
siikli jdti liai : main no tere shagirdurj 
M kaha thii, ki we use bahar kar den, 
pir wo na kar saken. 

19 Ufl na ub ku jawAb men kaha, 
Al be-fenan naum, main kab tak tum- 
hire sat.fi rahim? maifl kafe Lak tum- 
hiiri barddsht kurun ? use mere pii» lao. 

20 W c useuspAs la.e ; aur jalin* ne 
oae dekba, fdl'nur ruh ne OM ainthaya : 
aur wah mula pw ^h;!, aur bu BOW 
Jake lotne lagi. 

'Jl Tah lis ni! us k'- 'i ;i)i -" pii< liliii, 
Kitflf niuddat se j ih is ko hiU? Wuh 
bvla, llachpan se. 

22 Aut lalim bdr use dg DOW aur 
pjini nien daiti thi, ta ki use jin ko 
indre: par "agar Ui kuchh kar saktd 
hai, tt> bani par rahm karke human 
madad kar, 

23 YisiV no use kalia, Agftl r.u iman 
Ia sake, to i mandar ke liye sab kudik 
brj saktd hai 

24 Tab illfaur us larko kd brip 
ckiilaya. aur ant-ii buhake kalia, Ai 

58 



MAI1Q1JS, IX. mkdlnn. 

Ibu i Khudawnnd, main iman iatdhan; tfi 
meri be-tmaui ka chaia kar. 

25 JabYisd'nedekba ki lt>g daurko 
jaaVa hote babi. tu (U) uapak riih ko 
malamat karke na bo kaba, Ai gdngi 
bahrl riih, main tujhe hukin karS 
hiiii, ia se babar nikal, aur is men pliir 
kabhi mat ddkhil ho. 

liii Wuh ckillaknr, aur use bahut 
aini.liakar, OB M nikal g^yi : aur Wtlb 
murda ni lio gayd, aM ki bthstog M 
kahi, ki Wnii mar gaya. 

27 Tab Yiaii' no u« ka bath pakar- 
ke use utliaya, aur wuli u t b kar k hara 
bua. 

28 Aur jab wuh ghar nieij iyi, ih 
ke .•■ii-'(.]ii'i"ii m khahvat mag ta m 
piR'Idia, ki "kam uso kyiin na. nikal 
haken 'i 

'i\i TJsne unhen kaba, ki Vih jit^, 
siwa du'a aur rosa ke,, kisi aur tarah 
ac nikal nalun sakti. 

30 % Phir we wafcan bc rawio* 1ii';c ( 
ani- Jalil mag hoke fpuai gaye, aur us 
ne cbaha ki koi na jane. 

::i [ ■ ,'-.-.■ ki i,-;... 
ko rikhlAyS, aur unbuy kaha, ki Ibu 
i A'datn logon ke luiili men giril'tar 
karwdya jatd hai, aur V6 we Hll 
(cari'ri^r: aur wuli niard jake tJ«r*> <lin 
pbir v iitnegA. 

S2 Lekin uriboii ue yih bat na 
samjhi, aur us «o piiuhlmc iin-ij daro. 

Sii V Phir wuh Kafarnalium men 
aya, aur ghar mori pahunuiike OB H 
pLiuliha, ki Tum raste men bahaui kya 
blba karte the? 

34 Par we chup raho, is liye ki we 
rdb men ek di'isre ae bahs karte the 
ki hai n men se bara kann hai ? 

35 Phir us ne baitliki' un bir&fa ko 
bulaya, aur unhen kulih., Agar koi 
chaiic ki pahle darja ka ho, wuh sah 
tnefl plobbw, aur wali ka khidim bogi. 

3(i Anr ek elibote larke ko kk« un 
ke bich men kliara kiya, aur jab use 
godj iiicri liy.i tha, un se kaha, 

37 Jo kol niere aim ke liye ai^ie 



SJtdyirdo/i ko nasihat Jttirnu. MAI!Q.US, X. Tnlaq dene ki Idhitl. 

larkon tiivii N«k keMpibiil fcn.ro, mujhejrakhte hi'io jahannam ki ag men dahi 
qabtil kartA hai; aur jo kot mujhejjAwo: 
q:ibiil karta hai, na mujhe, baiki Usa, 43 Jabati im ka kira uakin mari d, 



i niujlie bheja liai, cpihiil karta 

38 K Tab Yuhanni M uso jawab 
deke kaha, Ai Ustad, bam nu f k k o 
tere ndm se deon, ku uikaUe dckhii, 
aur wuh hamira pairati uaiiiij : aur 
ham IH tUfl mari 'a kiya, kyiiiiki wuh 
haniari pairaiti nahin karld. 

3!) Tab YiuiV no kahA, Use man'a 
na kam; kyilnki :us:t kol nabin jo 
: :i lckc koi kaniimU kari.-, nur 
mujiie lilfaur burd kali saka. 

40 Wuhfo liainttrdinukbilif nahin 
haiuari tam t' hai. 

41 Im Bya ki jo koi mert> nani par 
e k piyaia pan i mmheii. is waste.ki tuin 
ktaau Ice 00, pim> ku da, main tam bb 
Mefa kajati biin, ki wuh apuii ajr kabhi 
na kiiuega. 

42 Aur jo koi in chbolojj men, se. 
jo tnujh pur iman late hain, ek ku 
thokar kiiiidwe, ua ke liye yiii biluar 
Uni, ki chakkl ka pAt us ke gaLe lu t; n 
bandhA jAwe, aur wuii sanutudar weij 
dalA jawe, 

43 Aur agar teni hAth tujhe t.ho- 
kiir khilawu, t-> uae kit dai ; ki ziu- 
dagi men tunda dakliil Imna tvru Uji* 
us K bihtar hai ki do liALb rnkhw 
h&e jaliiinnaiu ke bkb, us ag mag jo 
kabhi D»hifl bujhti hai, daia jAa: 

44 Jahan uu ka kira iiahin ruarta, 
aur ag nahin bujhti. 

^5 iur agar teri panw tujhe thokar 
khihiwe, u.*o kat 'UI: kyiinki zindagi 
men laugra dAkhil houA tera livo ua 
ae liJiiur hai ki do pan w rakhte iuir 
iabannaui ku liicb, us Ag nieii ju kabhi 
miliin bujbti, dala jdwe : 

•IH Juiiah im kii kiri tiahin marta, 
aur ag nahin bujhti. 

47 Aur agar teri aukh tujhe rhnkar 
khiiawe, use nikdl dai : ki KhudA ki 
badsbdbjit men kdiia dakhil boBa taru 
liye iu so bibtar hai ki do aukliun 



nahin bujhii. 

49 Kyuaki bar tik shakba Ag se 
namkin kiya jacga, auv bar «k iiui'hdai 
liarnak se nainkiii ki jaegi. 

50 Naraak auhuhiii ebiz hai : lekin 
agar naniak be-mnza lio Jiwa, lo kis 
•B use UBMtdJS fcaroge? Pas Ap men 
muuak rakbo, aur Ajiaa men irulan 
kam. 

X i: A 'i:. 

Pil I R wah wjiliau te uthkar Yardan 
ke | >iir Yalnidiya lu uarbaiidun 
men ij'dj aur Ing us pas phir jan:'a 
bui) ; aur wuh apne daatiir ke miiwAili; 
pbir linhen ta'liin karne laga. 

2 % Aur Pftrtflfofl nc ua pas aku 
iintihitii ki rfth so us se pochha, Kyd 
iiiwd hai ki mard Juni ku talAq iie 'i 

3 Us no miheg jawab men kahA, ki 
Miisa db tumben kya hukm diya? 

4 We Vxile, Miisa no to ijazat di hai 
ki talaq-narna liklike talaq deg. 

5 Tab Yisii' no jawab diya, aur 
unhen kaha, Us ue tuinliari sakbulili 
ke sabab se tuutliare liye yih hukm 
likhd. 

B Lokin kliilijut ki ibtida ee to 
KhudA H unhen ek uar aur ek mAiia 
lia.na.ya. 

7 Is sabab se mard apne nia bap ko 
. mrapaijorf h mlUl raJiega: 

B Aur we doaog ck tau huiige: m 
we ab do tau nuluii, baiki h tau 
Iiain. 

U Pas jiae Klmda ne juri hai, Admi 
juda na karo. 

10 Aur gliar men hoke ua ke s!.,i.- 
ginbnj nt' uu we is bat ki b&bat puchba. 

11 Uh nc unhen kali A, Jo koi jorti 
ko chhore, aur duk «e byah karu, to 
us ki alabal zinA kartd hai. 

12 Aur agar jorii apne ahauhar ko 
:hhor de, aur dt'iKre se byahi jfa, M 

wah bbi Kina kard hai. 

13 t I'hir we chhcite larkon ko us 



Lnrtcn ko MARQ 

pa- I;ir, t.i ki wuh unhen ehhrie ; pat 
elid^irdon ne un linewalun ku daiihl. 

14 Yitu'i' yih dekhke ua-khindi biid, 
aur uiihejj kahd, Cbbcte larkorj ko 
morc paa dne do, aur uiihen nian'a 
kar.i: kviinki Khudd ki badsbdhat 
alaog hi ki bal 

15 Main tam ia meb kahta hi'm, 
Jo koi Khudd ki bddahahat ko chho- 
te lnrkc ki tarah qabiil na karc, wuh 
us men ddkhil na hoga, 

16 Ph i r us no unhen apui god men 
liya, aur un par hath rakhko uukeii 
harakat di. 

17 T Aur jnh wuh nih men chala 
jata tlia, tk mhakhs ns pil* daurti dyn, 
aur u* ke Agc ghutiio tokke us sc 
piichha, Ai nek Ltrtad, main kya 
kariAii td ki hatnesha ki nindagi ka 
waris hun 'i 

18 Yisu' no us sc kahd, Tu mujhe 
nok kyiin kahta hai? ki nek koi ua- 
hig, mag» ok, ya'no, Khudn. 

19 Tu hukinoy ko j:iiitd hai, ZltlR 
na kar, Kbiin na kar," Ohori na kar, 
Jlii'itlii ^iwdhi na do, Farcb na do, 
Apne ma bap ki 'izzat kar. 

'M T"s no jawab mori use kahd, Ai 
Ustad, main ne jawani bq in sab ko 
uaiid hai. 

21 Tali YifUi' ne ub par nigdh karke 
use piyar kiya, aur ub h kahd, Ek chi?: 
tujh men baui hai; j A, aur ya kuchh 
teri lio, beuh diil, aur gaiibon ko dc, to 
tu Asiudn par khazdna pdwegd; aur 
iiihur a, aur salib uthake mere pichhe 
ho le. 

22 Wuh u« hat se ud&s hdd, aur 
gam kli:'ii:L iiv.a chala gayd, kyiinki 
bara uialdar tha, 

23 1 Tab Yiwu' ne eh Aron taraf 
nazar karke ftpne shagirdon bo knha, 
Kliuda ki bidahahat tnerj dnulatiuaud 
ka ddkhil honA kyahi mushkil hai] 

24 fehdgird us ki balon bo hair&n 
ln'iL', Tah Timi' tta phir jawAb men 

linimu katili, Ai Iftffco, .j" log 'hllht 

par bhnrosa rakhte hain, un ko liye 
o'O 



U8| X. harakat >te»n. 

Khuda ki badabakat men diikhii lumu 
kyA hi mushkil hai! 

25 Ki siii ke ndko so tint ka jdnd, 
Khuda ki biidahdhat naii daulatmand 
ke ddkhil hone se, dsan hai. 

UB VVe babat hi hairdn hokc apas 
tnen kahuc bg«, Phir kaun najat j.a 
sakta hai? 

27 Yisu'no unki taraf ntjrih karko 
kahd, ki Insan ke nazdik nd-niuinkin 
hai, ]iar Khudd ke nnzdik naiiirj ; 
kyiinki Khuda ko nazdik aab kuchh 
ho saktA liai. 

28 f Tab Patrua m ne k«hne Inu'd, 
Dttkh, hsffi ne nah kuclih ofahofi, ;inr 
terc pichiie lio liye. 

"'J Yi-ii' B6 bw&b men knha. Main 
tam H Heb kahta h\\n, Aisa ki7i 
naliin, jis ne ghar, ya bhaion, ya 
bahinon, yd bdp, yd md, yd jora, yd 
larke balon, yd kiu't<>n ki; mere a'ur 
Injil ko liye clihor diya hai, 

30 Jo bilfi'iil is jahati men sau 
guna na ptlwo, ghar, aur blidi, nur 
Uihin, nur md, aur larke, aur khet, 
taadi'flg ke sdth ; aur dnewdle jahdn 
nun haniesha ki zindagi pdwoga", 

31 Lckin bahuturtt, jo ag!e hairj, 
pichhlo; aur jo piohhle, a^Ie feonse. 

32 ^ Aur jab wc r:Ui men hoke 
Yarfcalam ko J4te the, Visti' un se 
age l-iiriii'i; tab wo hairan hdo, aur 
pichhe chalto chnlto baluit dur gaye. 
Aur phir Mrahofj ko luke jo kuchh 
u» par honcwdld thi un ae kahne 
lagd : ki 

33 Dekho, hain Ynnisahni ko y'dr 
hain, aur Ilm i A'dam Wrdir kahinojj 
aur J'iiijiliHij ke hawalekiya j.iogd ; aur 

.is ke qntl kd hukin derjge.aur use 

^lir-'j.iurnon ko hawalo karciiL"' : 

31 Aur we us H hansi kan.ijL'e, aur 

e kore martjijae, aur us par tlu'ikongo, 

aur use nail karenge; aur wuh tisro 

diu ji ntlu-^d, 

35 1 Tab Znbadi ko lieton YaVjiib 
itur Yuhniuid ne us rjrfs ako kiiliii, 
Ai Ut-tdd, ham chaltCc baig ki ju 



Bhogirdon Jco maria Isamd, MARQUS, XI. ki apni bardi na chahen. 

kue h h ham mdngen, tu haindro liye I 47 Aur yih sunkar ki wuh Yisii' 

Ndsari hai, chilbiuo mir kabue lagd, 

""i Ua ne un m kahd, Tum kydlAi Daud ko boto, Yisu', mujii par 



chdhto bu, ki main tumhdro liyc 
k ani n ? 

37 Unhon ne oa ne kahd, Bam ko 
bakhsh, ki tera jala! men, ham, ek 
teru dahine hdih, aur dusra tere bden 
hdth, biitlivn. 

38 Tab Yisii' ne iinhen kahd, Tum 
uahiu j:littc ki kyd mdngte ho : kyd 

wuh ]ii\iU:t, ji ilti pfaut pH lii'.ti. 

tum pl sakte ho? aur wuh baptismu., 
b main jiiiuo par him, tum pd saklc 
ho? 

39 Unhon ne us se kahd, ki ITatii 
■akta hiliri. Yisii' dg unhi-n kaiid, 
Tum towuh piydla, jo main pita h titi, 
>,./. . iur wuh buptwuia, jomain jiane 
pai' lilin, ]':h' L :.' : 

•10 Lekiu mero dahine aur bden 
hdth kisi ko baithne dena, merd kain 
naliitj, magar uu ko, jiu ke liye yih 
tiiiydr kiyi gaya liai. 

•11 Jab un dason ue sund, to wu 
Ya'qub aur Yuluumi par khafa koue 
lage. 

42 Tab Yinii' ne unhen apne pati 
buldyd, aur unlien kahd, Tum jdnte 
ho ki we jo gair-i|aumon ke sarddr 
kahlate hain, un par kliawiudi kartu 
haiu, aur un ke buzurg un par huku- 
inat kartu li..ij. 

43 Pte tam men aisa na DGjia : 
baiki jo tum men hara hud chdhe, 
tmiihdm khddim hugd: 

44 Aur tum mon sa jo koi sarrtar 
hiid ohahe, wuh Bab ka bauda boga. 

45 Kyiinki Ibu i A'dani bhi nahtn 
aya ki us ki khidmat ki jdwe, l>alki 
tip khidmat kare, aur apni jan bahut- 
(jii ke liye kai'ave mag aewe. 

4U ^ l'hir wu Yarihuniende ; aur 
jab wuh, aur uh ke sliagird, aur ck 
BRfj hliir, Yarilui M nikahi tht, Timai 
ka beta Bartimai, jo nmlha tba, r Ah 
ku kintire baithd hua bbikh mingtd 
tim : 

01 



mluii kar. 

48 Aur harchnnd lmhuton no usc 
ddntd, ki chup rahe, par wah aur bhi 
ziyada chilldya, ki Al D Atid ko beto, 
luujli naf mliiii kar. 

49 Tab Yisu' ne khare hoke hukm 
kiyd, ki Uae buldo. Unhon ne na 
andhe ko yih kabko bulayti, ki Eh .i- 
tir-jam'a rakh, uth; wuh tujlie bu- 
ldtd hai. 

50 Wuh apnd kapj-d phoukkcuthti, 
aur YisiV pas Ayd. 

51 Yisu' ne mukhatib hoke us se 
kaba, Tu kyd uliahtd hai ki main tera 
liye kariin ? Us andhe ue us se kahd, 
Ai lialil'i, yih, ki main apni aiikhen 
{Kiiin. 

52 Yisu' ne us se kabd, Ji, tere 
Enutn ne tujhe bachaya. W'unhirj u$ 
ne aiikhen piiin, aur rah mc-ii Yisii' ku 
phihhe chald. 

XI BATI. 

JAB we Yanisalam kn nazd!k. Zait- 
un ke paliar ke pas, Hailtagdaur 
Iiiiit'aiiiyd men ae, us ne apuu s>hi- 
girdon men bg do ko blicja, 

Aur uu bp kahd, ki U* Iwisti men, 
jo tumhdre samhne hai, jdo, aur jab 
tum us men dAkhil ho^e, ek gadhi ke 
bandho hiie bachche ku pd'igi', ji,- |iar 
kablii kui Mwil nahin hua; use khoi- 
ko le do. 

.'! Aur agar kol shakhs tuiuhon 
kahe, ki Tum yih kyuii karte ho? 
tum kabiyo, Kbudiwaiid ko u» ki 
zarurat hai ; to wuh iihaur use yahaii 
bhej dt-gd. 

i Wo gaye, aur us bachche ko dar- 
wdza ke na/,dik liihar bandba hiid, ja- 
b&B do-rahd ihd, i>dyd, aur u* khola. 

5 Ba'fcou ne, uu iin'n K jo wahan 
khare the, unherj kahd, Yih kyd karte 
ho, ki gadhi ke bachche ko kholta 
tu '.' 
I ij Unhon ne, jaisa Ylsd' ne l'inuaji 



Madh shiihana tuurpar MAT1QT"S, XI. Tarusalam men /iakhi! kota. 

, kabA; tab unhon no ua ko jauelyih suni, aur flkr men thc ki use 



lUya. 

7 We iis gadhi kebachche ko YisiV 
paslae, aur apne kapre ns jiar dai diye: 
aur wuh ue. par rawAt hua. 

y Aur bahu ton ne apni pophak ko 
nih men bkhhava; aur auron. ne 
darakhton kl dalian kaike rah men 
bithrain. 

1» Aur we ]o &es pirhhe jatc thi», 

Kakfeke kiilitf the, ki Boahfaanf i 
lubarak wuh jo Khudawand ke nam 
I«r ata hai : 

10 Itamare Mp Daud ki badabahat 
jo Khudawand ke nam «ssti hai, Mu- 
barak! 'Alam i bala men UnsVanna 
] ) Yixu' Yaruflalam mag dakhil 
hfii, aur bnikal men Aji; aur jali 
obArOfl taraf sab Datang par raulahana 
kiri, wub uji barahon ke «aib Bait'- 
miivi ko gav», kyiinki shain ka waqt 
thi 

12 1 Dfim din ko, jab wc Tbi.it'nn 
iya ko biliar ae, ua ko bluikh lagi : 

13 Aur d u r «« anjir ki ek darakhi 
pattaE se lada hua dekhke wuh gaya, 
ki ftfityad tu men feucrih piwo; jab 
wnii ob pfia iya, to pattori ko »iwa 
kuchh napaya; kyiinki anjir ka mau- 
»im ria iba. 

14 Tab YisiV ne UI M khilab karke 
kiii,;i, J\<;i tujh se pbal kablii na 
khawn; aur uu ku »hagirdon, n« yili 
suni. 

15 T We Yanianlnm men ao; aur 
YisiV baikal men «hikhil hoke unhen, 
Jo l.aikal men bttthfea IDI mol lele tho. 
baliar uikalne lagi, aur sarrafoii ke 
takhta, nur kabutar-bechiiewAlon ki 
chaukian, ulat din ; 

16 Aur kisi ko baikal men lioku 
bartan le jine na diyi. 

17 Aur unhen yili kahke saTnjliiyA, 
Kyi yib nahin likhi lini, ki M era 
ghareab aaurnon ke Uye 'ibadatkhaua 
kahliegi f le.kin lura tie iisu oWon 
kii gar banaya bai. 

18 PaofllOjj aur saruir kobioon ne 

62 



I kisi tarah jari w mirrm ; kyi'mki us se 
darte ihe,is liye ki sab log uski tn'lim 
h dana bo g»je the. 

li) Aur jabsliim bui > wub shahr ko 

kiictr BtJ*. 

20 ^ Aur sulih ko, jab we udhar 
se jtuzre, to dekhi ki wuh anjir ka 
damkbl i:ir se siikh gaya. 

21 Tab Putrns ne vid karke ita se 
kahii, Ai Kabbi, dekii, anjir ka yih 
ilariiklit, ji« par tu ne la'nat ki ihi, 
sukh gaya hai. 

22 Yiaii'ne jawab men unhen kah4, 
KbudA jiar i'aHqad rakho; ki 

2t Main !,um se saeli kabti hun, Jo 
koi ia jaliar ko kalie, Utli, aur daryd 
men gir par, aur apne dil men shakk 
OB la wo, baiki yaqin knre ki yib 
baten, jo wuh kahta bai, hojicngi, to 
jo kucbb wuh kahegi, so hog&. 

'^4 Is liye main tum ne kalila ln';n, 
ki Du'a Dien jo kucbb turn m&ngtc bo, 
yaqin lao ki milega, to tum pii'-gc. 

25 Aur jab ki tum du'a ke liyc 
kharo hetfl bo, agar tumhen kisi par 
kuchb shikayat bo, to use uju'af karo, 
la ki tumblra Biip bhi, Jo asunan par 
liai, tumhiire ipimiron ko mu'af kare. 

26 Aur agar tmn mu'af na karoge, 
b> tiiinliara Bap, jo tanin pai bal, 
tumhiire oumir bbi mu'af na karega. 

21 «i Wo pbit Yaruaalam men ac. 
.liili wuh lniikal men jiliirta tbi, aar- 
ddr kdhin aur faipb aur buzui-g us ko 
p&a ac, 

28 Aur u9 ee kabi, ki Tii kis ikhti- 
yar m yih kitu karti hai ? aur kit> no 
tujbe ikbtiyar diya ki yih kam karc? 

29 Tab YisuV n« jawab men unhen 
kaba, ki Main bhi tum ne ■■!■. bal 
puchhta lilin ; tum jawab do, to main 
tinulu'ij baliliiii^a ki main kis ikhti- 
ar se yih kam karta bon. 

30 Yuhanna ka bapti.sma asman so 
thii, yi insan se ? mujhe jawab do. 

iil Tuli «*e apaa men aochke kahno 
tage, ki Agar batu kahen, Asinan se, 



Tdkistdn ki tati $U, MARQUS, XII. 

to wuh kahega, Phir tum kyiin us par 
uu&n. naiiin \m- '.' 

3:i Aur agar haru kahen, Insdn se, 
to logo n. se oarte; ia liye ki sah Yu- 
Lanui ko nai>i barhao/] jdnttj tbe. 

33 Tab unhon ne Visu' se jawdb 
men kaha, Ham nahm Unta. Yisi'f 
nc jawab men unhen kaha, Main bhi 
tum .-t! naiiin kahfd ki main kis 
ikhtivar M vih kain kartd hun. 
XII BAU 

PHIR Maih unhen tiimsikm men 
kahno lagd. ki Ek ahakhs Dfl 
aiigtir kd bag Jagdyd, aur ua ki chdr- 
m taraf ghera, aur kolhii ki jagah 
khodi, aur ek burj liandya, aur us.' 
WjbanOB ko SUpnw karke pardes gaya, 
'l l'Iiir mausim mag us ne ek nau- 
k;i: ko b£gb£aon [■as bhcjd, td ki wuh 
bdgbdnon M angiir ke bag ke phal 
im-u si- kiii.lili le. 

3 Unhon nc use nnkarke mara, aur 
khdli hdth bheja. 

4 Us ne dobdra ek aur naukar ko 
un p&a bliL-ja; unhon nc* us par pat* 
thar phenkke ua ka sir phora, aur be- 
hunnat karke pher biieja. 

5 l'hir us ne ek aur ko Lhcjd: 
unhon ne use (jati kiya; phir aur 
bahuteron ko; un taen se ba'zoti ko 
pita, aur ba'zon ko mdr ddld. 

6 Ah us k;L ek hi beta' thd jo us kd 
ptyard tha. akhir ko us no usti hhi un 
pas ylh kahke hheja, ki Wu meru bete 
tse dabenge. 

7 Lekin un Ldglwinon ne apas men 
kahd, Yih waria hai; do, bam uae mdr 
il;ileu, to miris hamdri lio jdejji. 

a Aur unhon na use pnkarks qatl 
kiyi, aur angiir ko bag ke bdhar pheuk 
diyd. 

8 Pas bag M mdlik kyd karega? 
wuh dwegd, aur un bagbatuog ku bar 
Idk karke angiir ka bdg aimin ko dega. 



lizyn c 



e ki b£bai. 



i 1 Vih Khuddwaod ki taraf sc bud, 
aur hamari na/,aron men 'ajib hai ? 

12 Tab unhon no ehdhri- ki use pa- 
kar len, par logon ae darte the ; kyunki 
wc samajh gptyv the, ki us ne yih 
liuusil un par kalii; aur we uae 
chhorke chah: gaya. 

13 1f Phir unhon ne bn'ze Fariaion 
aur ] 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 1 3 i ■_. ti ko us |ida bhejft, ki uae 
us ki h.-iton se pbande men dalen. 

14 Aur jab we de, to ue bv kalid, 
Ai T'stad, ham jaufi> luiin, ki tfi 
wachcha hai, nur tujh ko kisi ki parwa 
nahiu, kyunki tii logon ki twafddri 
Dflhfrj kara, baiki Khuda ki rah rasti 
se batdtd hai; Qaisar ko jizya dcnd 
tewi hai, yd nahin? 

15 Ham dewen, ya na dcwrn ? Us 
ne un k d makr Kamajhke unlien ka- 
hd, Tum mujlie kyi'm dzmdte ho? ek 
dinar mujh pds lai>, ki main dekhiin. 

16 We ldo; tab us ne u&te puebra, 
ki Yib kia kf surat, aur kia kd aikka 
hai ? Unhon ne kahd, Qaisar ka. 

17 Yiaii' ne jawdb nien unhen kahd, 
Jn ch'm-.t} Qaisar ki hctin, Qaisar ko, 
aur jo cliiwn Khudi ki hairi, Khudd 
ko do. Tab wo ua w hairdn hue. 

18 1 l'hir Kaduq[, ju .|iydmat kd 
inkdr karte hain, us pds de ; aur un- 
hon ne us sc suwal karke kahd, ki 

l'.* Ai Uetdd, hamdre liye Musa no 
likhd hai, ki Agar kisi ka bhdi mar 
jde, aur us ki jorti rahe, aur rkrea&d 
ua ho, to us kd bhdi un ki jonl ko 
lewa, td ki apno bhai ke iiyo aulad 
paldi k a re. 

20 Ab sdt bhdi the; pahio ne jord 
ki, aur he-aul-id mar gayd. 

21 Tab ddare ne uh liyd, aur mur 
gayd, us kd bhi kol farzand na rahd ; 
aur nsi tarah .se tinro ne. 

t'2 Yunbin sdton ne use liyd, aur 
auldd naiiin elihor gaye; aab ke pi- 



10 Kyd tum ne yib naviahta nahiu i:)ilic wuh 'aurat bin mar gayi. 
parhd, ki Wuh patthar, jiBe mPamironj TA Qiydmat men jab we uthengc. 



I ud-iiasand kiyd, wuhl kooe kd aird wuh 



biid : 



| kyunk 



nien se kis ki joni hugi? 
wuh saton ki jorii hiii thi. 



Ekfayh ke mwal kj. jawab. MAUQU8, XIII. Ganh hcwa ke do ■■hha-b'<m. 
24 Tu&'va jawab men unhon ka-jAur ba'd ua ko kisi ne jur,at na ki, 



ha, ki Kya tmii la sabah'ao bhtifnien ki a 



iiahin pare ho, ki tam ua unvishton' 
ke, na Khuda ki qudrat k o jamu ho? 



35 lf Phir YisiV haikal men wa'z 
karte Iii'wj kohne lagi, ki Fai]ih~kyTm- 



26 Kyi-jjki jab mnrde utheiige., tolku kahte hain, ki Masih Daud ki 



wc ua liy:lii kimti^c, mi livak: jaen«e, 
baiki jelse firiahtejo asman par hain, 
WHtM hortgo. 

'2(i Aurtnurdon keji utlmc ki 1 li- 
bat kya turn iio Miisa ki' kitab men 
nahin parha, ki Khuda no jhari meri 
se us ae kytinkar kaha, ki Main Abi- 
rahamka Klnuhi,, aur l/.liiuikd, Khuda, 
mi r Ya'i|iiii ka Khuda. In'nj? 

27 Wuh murdog k& Khuda- nah iri, 
baiki zindon ka Kbuda hai; pa» tuui 
bari pila.r.i karte ho. 

28 t Tab fa-nlmt; men sc ek jis 
un ka suujil o uwifa mnka samjha ki 
us ne unhen khiib jawab diya, pas 
.iya, aur ua ko puchha, ki Sab hukinorj 
mag auwal kaun bai? 

29 Yisu' ne ua se jawab men kaha, 
ki Sab hukiuon morj amval yih bai, ki 
Ai Israel, sun ; "Wuh Khudawand, jo 
iiamara Khuda bai, ek hi Khudawand 
hai: 

30 Aur tu Khudawand ko, jo torsi, 
Khnda hai, apne sare dil sg, aur apni 
sarijan se, aur njmi siri 'aql m, aur 
spna sirire aur ee, piyar kar; auwal 
lnikii: yilii hai. 

31 Aur .irisra jo ua ki manind hai, 
yih bai, ki Tri apm> papotij ko apne 
barabar piyar kar. Ia se bara" uur koi 
hukm nahir. bai. 

32 Tab uh faqih no us se kaha, Kya 
khtih! Ai Ustad, tu ne sach kaha, 
kyiiiiki Kbuda ek hai; us ke siwAaur 
koi nahiii: 

33 Aur n« ko sare dil se, aur uari 



beta hai ? 

86 Kyunki Paiid ap hi Rilh i Quds 
ke hatane se kanta hai, ki ^imWwftnd 
nc mere Khudawand ko' kaha, Tii 
inere dahiriw harh baitb, jab tak main 
teredushmanonkotere j-fttiwimrakbuo 
ki chauki karun. 

37 Daud to ap h! ukc Khudawand 
kahta bai ; phir wuh ua ka beta 
];viirik;ir hai 'i Aur "awamui khushi ae 
uh ki sunte the. 

38 ^ Us ne apni talfm mon imhen 
kaha, Faqibon so lioshyar raho, jo 
tambo j;i;iu' pahinke nb kurmi, aur 
bazar un mvQ Kalamon k o, 

S0 Aur 'ili.iriatkhanon men sadr 
kursiim ko, aur ziyafaton raen uochj 
Ja«bojj ko, chahto hain : 

40 W e bt'-won ke gharon ko nigalte 
haiii, aur makr'se nainiiz"ko tiil dete 
hain; uulien /.j y ada aaza hogi. 

41 K l'liir 'Vi-ii' l.:ut-u)-T[iiil ke 
TOinhtic baitbkar dekb raha tha ki log 
bait-ul-mdl iiu'ij palsu kis tarah oaltt 

liain; aur labur daulatmandofl ne 

bahut kncdih dala. 

42 Aur ek girib bewa no dkc do 

chhadira, ya'ue ek adheia, us men 
dala. 

48 Tab us re apne ahairirdori ko 

bulake unhen kaha, Main nun ee each 

kahta biin, ki Is kangal bewa ne un 

ib se, jo bnit-ul-mil mea dalte hain, 

iyriiia d.ili bai. 

U Kyiiiiki sobhotj ne apne bahu t 

mal meg MU kucbh dalii, par uh ae 

\v[\ *e, aur sari jaa ne, aur sara zor tu, Bfarf ^aribi se, jo kuch'h ki u.s ka thi, 

piyar karua, aur B^me partai ho npna npni sari punji dali. 



l'uriilMrmuhabbatraklma.hahsrjkbtoni 
ipirbanion aur zablhon se hihtar hai. 

34 Jati Yisu' no dekha ki tu ne 
danai h few£b diyi, to us «e kabd, Td 
Khudi ki badsbab.it w &6i naW 
64 



.XIII lU'R. 

JAR wub haikal se babar jAta tha, 
us ke itMfghdog men se *k ne ua 
ne kab.A, Ai Ustad, dekh, ye kitne bare 
pattiar, aur kilnl bari Wsmtcg hain! 



Dukfijo shiiyird pawrnge. MAT»QUS, 

2 Yistl' ne jawab mcn us se kahd, 
ki Tii in bari 'hnaraUin ]wr nig&h 
kartU hai? yahdn patthar par patthar 
na chhutegd, Jo girdyd na jdegd. 

3 Jab wnh Zaitun ke pahir pai 
haikal ke sdmhne baithd thd, Patrus, 
aur Ya'qub, aur Yiihannd, aur Andryds 
ne uinile men us ae pnchha, 

4 Ram ne kah, k i yih kafe hogd, 
aur uh waqt kd, jab yih sab kuthh 
pfird hogd, kyd uishfin hai 'i' 

5 Yisu' ne jawab mcn unhcti kahna 
ihurd' kiyfi, Hoshyar ratto, ki tumben 
koi gumrdh na kare : 

6 Kydijki bnhuterc mcrd nam lcke 
dwenge, aur "kahenge, ki Main wuhi 
hiin, aur bahuton ko gumrdh karenge. 

T Aur jab tuiu laraian aur lardioti 
ki afwahen suno, mat ghabrdiyo; 
kyunki un chizon kd waql hona Bft- 
nfr hai ; lokin dkbir abhi nahin hogd. 

8 Kyiinki oauni qauiu par, aur 
bdtUhdhat bddshdhat par charhegi, 
aur kitni jagahon men E&lzale Kongo, 
aur kdl parongi 1 , aur fasdd uthenge; 
y>h musibaton ka shttru' hai. 

9 1 Par tum &\> so khabarddr rabo; 
kyiinki we tumben niajlison ke ha- 
wdle karenge, aur ibadatkhamm meg 
tum nidr khi'mgc, aur hakinion aur 
badsbahon ke dge inere wdste hdzir 
kiye j&ofl», la ki un par gawdhi ho. 

10 Lckin «arni bai, ki pahlc Bab 
qaumon ke dge Injil ki manddi ho. 

11 Tar jab tuuihen le jdke hawale 
karen, age se fikr na karo, ki ham kyd 
kahenye, aur na soclio : baiki jo kuchh 
us ghari umihen batayd jdwe, wuhi 
kahiyo; kyiinki kabnewdle tum na- 
hin ho, baiki Iliin i Quds bai. 

12 Bhdt bhdi ko, aur bdp bete ko 
<qn.t l ke wdsto pakarwdegd; aur Wke 
ma bin kd samuni karke unhcn inar- 
wd ddlenge. 

13 Aur luiTd ii.'Lin ke sabab se sah 
tumbare dushrnan honge; i*ir jo koi 
akhir tak sabr karegd, wuhi inijat 
piwegt. 



XIII. A'fatenjo YahMioiipar 6,wengc- 

14 ^ Jiswaqt tuin us kliardb-karne- 
wdH makruh chiz ko, jis kd Ddniid 
nabi ne /ikr liiyd, 08 janah inerj, jahan 
uh kd khard hona rawi nahin, dekrit), 
(jo parhtA hai, so samajli le,) tab we 
jo Yahudi ya mon hon, paltaron pir 
bhdgen : 

15 Aur wuh jo kothe par ho, ghar 
men na utre, aur apiie ghar se koi 
obu nikalue ke !iyo nn jde: 

1C Aur jokbet men bai, apni poshdk 
ulliauu ke iiye pichhe na phire. 

17 Aur un par jo un dinon men 
hamiU bon. aur un par jo dudh pild- 
tidn bon, al'so,- hai ! 

18 Aur du'd mdngo, ki tuiuhdrd 
bniena jtn men na ho. 

18 Kyunki un dinorj met] aisi taklif 
hogi, ki ibtidd e khilqat w, jise Khu- 
dd ue khalq kiya, ab tak, na lidi, aur 
na hogi. 

20 Aur agar Khudawand un dinon 
ko na gbat.dtd, to ek ddini na hicKta ; 
par un barguzidon ke waate, jin ko us 
□e chund hai, un dinon ko ghatdya. 

21 Us waqt agar koi tumhcn kahe, 
Dekho, Masih yahdn, yd dokho, wahdn 
hai, io yaqiu na ldiyo : 

22 Kyunki jlnitbe Masih aur jhu- 
the nabi uthen-ic, aur nishdnidn aur 
kardmdt diklildenge, ki agar ho maktd, 
to barguzidon ko bhi gumrdh karb;. 

2'i Par tum khabarddr raho ; dekhn, 
main ne tinnhen sah kuchh pahle hi 
kali diyd hai. 

24 Tf Aur un dinon men, us taklif 
ke ba'd, niiraj andhc-ra boga, aur ch&pd 
apni roshni nu degi ; 

25 Aur Asiudn se nitdre girenge, aur 
asuidn ki quwaten Mlai jdengi. 

26 Aur us waql Ibn i A'dam ko 
bddalon j)ar bari qudrat aur Jalai k< 
sdth atedekhcnge. 

27 Aur us waqt wuh apne finshton 
ko bhejcgd, aur apne barguzidon ko, 
zainin ki hadd se demdn ki liadd tak, 
chirofl taraf s" il;:Llfliu karega. 

28 Ab anjir ke darakht so tamsil 

E 



Jftntt far '#r m-Jaa, MARQU8, XIV . Masih id dHiri fawh Mana. 

eiklio; Jab us ki iiiiroi tlalf hotf, aur 

INilto nikalto ham, tiib tum jduti: ln> 1 
.: ^ijniii ruizdik hai: 



L?y U si tarah tum bhi, jab dekho ki 
yih abn-d! hone lage, to jduo, ki wuh 
nazdik, baiki dazwwe par hai. 

30 Main tum se snch kanta In'm.k 
h /amane ke log guzar na jaongc, jab 
tak yiti sah kjBcEh wa^'i na howe. 

31 A'sman aur «amin tal jdcngo, 
par mori bdteri na talengi. 

32 T Magar us din, aur us ghari ki 
babat, siwd l(ap ke, na to firishte jo 
dsmdn par hain, aur na Beta, koi 
nahin jiutd hai. 

JH Tum khaharddr ho, jagte raho 
aur du'd nia'ngo : kyfinki tum nahin 
jdiite ki waijt kab hai, 

M Yih ai&d hai, jait;d ek shaklisjo 
nptii ghar chhorko pardes gaji, aur 
apae naukaron ko ik htiyar dekar bar 
ck ko us ka kara diyd, aur darban ku 
hukm kiytl ki ja<;td rsbe. 

35 Ie liye tum jd^to rnlio, kyunki 
tum mUiin janto ki ghar kamalik kab 
awuga, shdm ko, yd ddhi rit ko, ya 
inurg ke bang dete waqt, ya aubh ko ; 

33 Ta aisi na ho, ki achdnak ake 
wuh tum ko mte paive. 

37 Aur jo kuchli main tum se kan- 
ta hi'ui, eab se kabta hun, Jdgto raho. 

XIV BA-a 

DO din ke ba'd f»«ah aur fatiri roti 
ki 'id thi ; aur saniar kdhin aur 
t'uqih tadbfr kar rahe tho ki use kyun- 
kar makr se pakarkc jau se niaren. 

2 l'nr unhon ne kaha, ki 'I'd ke din 
nahm, aLad na lio, ki logon men balwa. 

3 T Aur jab wuh Bait'aniyd men 

Slniiiia'iin kurbi ko gharkbdiie baithd* 
ck 'aurat jataindsi ka bosh-qimat kbd- 
lis 'itr marmar ke 'itrdan men UU, aur 
rlibiyd torke 'itr ko us ke air par 
4hala. 

4 Tab ba'ze apno dil men dzurda 
hoke kahne lage, 'Itr ki yiir^barabi 
kislivehfit? 



5 Kydnki yih 'itr tiii sau d(mtr ko 
bik sakti, aur garibon ko diyd jdta. 
Aur we inw nmlamat karnc lage. 

fi Tab Yi*ii' nekaha, Use chhordo; 
kyun nm aatate bo'i* u» ne mere sdth 
aoliulihi BoJfik kiya hai. 

7 Is wdste ki garib gurbi hamesha 
tumhare sdth hain, aur jab tum chalio 
un sekeki kar sakte ho; iiar main 
hatnewha tumharu sath na rabunga. 

8 Jo kuchh wuh knr aaki, ao kar 
obukf , us ne sabqaikarke meru badan 
ko kafan ke liye mu'atiar kiya, 

9 Alaiii t'irii eo sach kahta haQ, kt 
Tam&m elunya men, jah.in kabin yih 
Injii manadi ki jat'gi, yih bhi jois ue 
kiya hai, U ki yadgdri ko liye bayau 
kiya jaega. 

10 1 Tab Yahi'idah Iaqariyiiti, jo 
un barahon men se thA, sardar kalun- 
on ]i;ih gaya, ta ki uae un ke hath 
pakar w a dewo. 

11 We yih sunke khush hde, aur 
us ko riipiyo dcue kd iqrdr kiyd; tab 
WUh (ikr men laga, ki kis tarah qabu 
pdkc use pakarwd de. 

1U t Aur 'id i fatfr ke pable din, 
jab wc fa.tah ko zabh kartu the, us ke 
fcbacirdon ne use kaJia, Tii kahdy 
chalitd hai ki luun jaerj aur taiyaii 
karen, ki tu fiisah ko khfcwe? 

13 Ub ne apue Bhigirdog men se do 
ko bheja, aur uuhetj kaha, Sliahr men 
jdn ; wahdn ek sbnkhs pdni kd gliaia 
uthae hiio tumlion. milegd; ua ke 
pichhc chale jdo, 

14 Aur wuh jia ghar men dakhil 
howe, tum uh gbar ke nni/ik ae kaho, 
Usidd kahtd hai, ki Wuh utame ki 
jagab, jahdn main apne shdprdon ke 
sath fasah khiiiin, kahdrj hai ? 

L5 Wul, ,-k Twra baldkhana farsh 
bScbbi aur drdsla tumben dikbawegd ; 
«■alian liamdre liye taiyrtri karo. 

16 Tab us ke ahdgird chale gaye, 
aur shahr men dke, jaiai us ne uiiben 
k.'ilui ihd, waisd hi pdyd, aur lasad 
taiydr kiyd. 



17 Jab tshdm hiU, wuh U 
ItB MUI :iv;i. 



18 Jab wc baitlike khdne lagc, YisiV 
ne kahd, Main fcoin se sach kahtd liiin, 
ki Ek tum men .se, jo m t' re sdth khitd 
hal, mtljhe pakarwdegd. 

10 Tab we garngro. hone lage, aur 
un men so ek ek ksrke us se kain»' 
lage, Kyd main min? aur dusrd, Kyd 
main has ? 

20 Ua ne jawab merj un se kali A, ki 
Rambun men se ek hai, jo incrc sdth 
basan men hdth ddltd hai. 

21 Ibu i A'dam to, jaisd uh ke haqq 
men likhd hai, jdtd hai ; lekin afac* us 
s, hak L s nur, jis ke wasile Ibn i A'dam 
pukiirwdyd jdtA hai ! M ddmi ke liye 
Dibiar thd, ki wuh paidi na hotd. 

22 1 Jab we khdte the, Yisu' ne 
roti uthai, aur shukr karke ton, aur 
unhen dekar kahd, I/>, kbdo; yih 
nierd hadan hai. 

23 Phir U8 no piyala lekar ahukr 
kiyd, aur unhen diya; aur un sabhon 
ne u» se piyi. 

24 Aur us no unhen kahd, ki Yili 
raera naye 'ahd kd laliu hai, jo bahu ton 
ke liye bahaya jati hai. 

26 Main tum ac sach kahta hiin, ki 
Main anulir ka ras, jis din tak Khudd 
ki kulsdidhat meg use naya na pilin, 
phir na pitirjgd. 

2(i ^ Tab we ek zabtir gdko bahar 
nikle, aur Zaitun ke pahdr pft* IKK. 

27 Aur YisiT ne un se kaha, Tum 
sah dj ki rdt mi're haqi[ men thokar 
khdogc, ia liye ki yih likhd hai, Main 
garatiyo ko mininga, aur bheren pard- 
gaiida ho jdengi. 

28 Par main apne nthno ke ba'd 
tum M dgo Jalil ko jdunjjd. 

29 Tab Patrus ne us ne kaha, Agar- 
ebi sab thokar khawen, par main na 
kJjaiiij^A. 

30 Visu' ne ua se kahd. Main tujh 
BS sach knhtd huu, ki A 'j 'm hi rat ko, 
murg ke do bdr bdng dene ke dge, tu 
tin bdr mord inkdrkaregd. 



MAHQUS, XIV. fcrf UI 

bdrahon' 31 Tab na ne bir bdr kahd. Agar 
tera aat-h mori marnd sar&r \m. t»u 



bhi hargiz terd inkdrnakariingd. Aur 
un sabhon nc blil waiad hi kahd, 

Phir we ek jagah men, jis kd 

ndm Gatsomane Uid, de; aur ua ne 

■ne shdgirdcin ko kaha, .lab tak ki 

main du'd mdngun,, tum yabdrj baitlie 

Aur Patrus aur Ya'uiib aur Ytl- 
bannd ko apne sdth liyd, aur wuh 
ghabrdne aur bahut udds hone laga ; 

34 Aur un so kahd, Mori jdn k» j>am 
maut kd sd hai ; tum yahdrj thahro, 
aur jdgte raho. 

36 Aur wuh thord dgc jakar zaniin 
par gira, aur du'd tilangi, ki a^ar lio 
sake, to yih ghari mujh ae tal jac. 

86 Aur kahd, Ai Abbd, a'i Bip, sah 
kuchh tujh so ho sakti hai ; is piydlu 
ko mujh se til de ; lekin na wuh jo 
main chdhtdhi'm, baiki jo tii chdhtdliai. 

37 Phir wuh dyd, aur unhen tuta 
pdyd, aur Patrus ko kahd, Ai Bh*- 
raa'iin T tii soti hai? kyd td ek ghari 
jdg na nak A ? 

38 Jayt* raho, aur du'd mdngo, td 
aisd na ho, ki tum Imtihan men paro : 
nih to musta'idd, par jis m sust hai. 

39 Wuh phir gaya, aur wuhi bat 
du'd men nidngi. 

40 Aur phir dke unhen sote paya, 
kyunki un ki dnkhen biidri thiii, aur 
we nahin jdiite the ki use kyd jawdb 
dewen. 

4l"Phir tisri bdr dke unlien kahd, 
ki Ab sote raho, aur drdui karo ; lui.s, 
waqt d pahunehd ; dekho, Ibu i A'dam 
poTidh^amri ke hdthon mi.n hawdla 
kiyd jdtd hai. 

42 Utho, ham chalon; dekho, wuh 
|o mujhe pakaprAttl hai, nazdlk hai. 

43 1 Wuh "yih kahtd hi thd.ki fil- 
laur un bdrnh men st: ek Yaln'id.'ih 
ndme, aur us ke s&lh BardAr kihinoj 
aur f:i(|ihoii aur buzurgon ki taraf se 
ek haribhir, talwircn aur latliiln lokc 
d pahunehi. 



Malt ih par 

44 Aur paksrwAnewdle ne unhen 
y ih palA diyA tbA, ki Jis kA main I Mina 
Un, wulti hai; uso tum pakarku bila- 
zat 90 1g jAo. 

45 W uh Ake filfaur ub pAs gaya. 
aur kaha, Ai Kabbi, ai Kabhi, aur u«e 
dihina, 

46 ^ Aur unhon ne us par hdtli 
dAlke usc pakar liyA. 

47 Ek nc, uo men se Jo wahAy hA- 
f.ir thc,tahvAr khincLkar sardir kabin 
ke ttakv ko lagai, aur ub ka kAn 
uiyA. 

48 Tab YisiV nn se niukhAtib hoko 
kahnp laga, KyA tum talwAren aur 
lAthiAn teh» mujhe chur ki manind 
pakanie ko Ae ho? 

49 'Main to har roz tumhAre pAs 
liaikal mctj taliin detA tbA, aur tuin 
no nnijhe naliin pakni; lekiu yili hua 
ki navinhte pi'irc howeii, 

50 Tab we Bftb use chhorke bhag 
gaya. 

51 Magar ek jawan, Jo sriti chAdar 
apne badan par oftto tha, ns ke piclihe 
ho liyA, aur jawAuon no use pokra : 

52 Tar wuh suti ehAdar un ke hAtli- 
un n>«n chliorkar rianya bhagA, 

'b'A ^ Tab -m Yis& ko aardAr kA- 
hin pin le gaye ; us ke yaLAg Bab 
^ardAr kAliin aur buzurg aur ia.ph 
ikatthe Ae. 

54 Aur PatriiB dur se ua ke pichhe 
sariAr kahiu ke dALAu ko Bndu tak ho 
livA, aur naukaron ke sAth baithkar 
:i r ' tapne taga, 

56 Tab Barito kibinwj aur sAri sadr 
laajlis De Yisu' par gawahl dhundhi, 
ki use jAn ko Diaron ; par ne, pAi. 

5ii A^ardii bariton p«us par jliutbi 
gawA-hi di, par uu ki gawahiAn nmwA- 
ti.j u Ihiij- 

57 Tab ba'/.on ne uthke us par yih 
jhuthi jawabi di, aur kahA, ki 

6iH Ham ne use kaht« aunA hai, ki 
Main b haikal ko, JO bath sc baui bai, 
ijhA dflnea, aur tin dia mvn ck diisri 
ko, jc-i hAlh se na baBfl, baiiAutjgA. 
68 



MABQU9, XIV. jhvijiiwih^h k<r><.L 

59 Tia par bbi uu ki gawahi mu- 
wAfifj ua thi. 

60 Tab sardar kAhiu nc bich rneii 
khare ho Yisu' se puchha, KyA tu 
kuchh jawftb naliin detA? ye tujh jiar 
kya jawabi di-t,e bainV 

CL l'ar wuh chup nihi, aur kuchh 
jawAb ua diy.l Pliir aanlAr kAhiu ne 
us se piichhA, aur us se kaliA, KyA ti'i 
Misili, as Muliarak kA l*tA bot? 

(Ili Yi.sii' M us N kaha, Main wubi 
luin ; aur tum Ibn i A'dam ko Alq_adir 
kedahiue bath baithe, aur Asinin ke 
bAdalon par Ate dekhoge, 

«3 Tab sardar kAbiu ne apne kapre 
pbArke kahA, Ah hanien aur jiaivali 
kyi'darkAr liain? 

(34 Tum no yih kufr miua; tum ko 
kyA ma'lom hotA hai? Un BHhhon ne 
fatwA uiyA, ki wuh qatl ke laiu luii. 

(J5 Tab kitne ua par thiiknc, aur us 
ka inuiib dln'unpne, aur use plninse 
mArne, aur uae kahno lage, Nubiiwat 
se khabar de: aur uaukaroii ne liAth 

U80 thapere mAre. 

66 1 .fab' l'atrus niclie ddlaii tneri 
thA, aardAr kAhiu ki laundiem men u 

. w ah;i 'j A! ; 

07 Aur PatruB ko Ag ta>te d*kb,- 

;r, ua ki taraf iiaaar karke, kabne 
lagi, Td bhi Yisfi' Nasari ke uAth tha. 

68 Us ne yih kabie inkAr kiyA, ki 
Main uue nahiu jant.a, aur nahin wa- 
niajhtA ki tu kyA kaliti hai. Aur 
biliar salin ineii gayA; aur murg ne 
bang di. 

69 Phir wuh laundi uae dekhkar 
i se jo wahAn khare tlie kahne lagi, 

Yih unhin mon se ek hai. 

'0 Us'ud phir inkAr kiyA. Aur 

iri der pichhe phir onhog nc ,)o 

wahia k'nare the, Patms ko kahA, 

Saob n'i imb'in nien ee hai, kyiinki ui 

Jalili, aur teri holi waisi hl hai. 

"1 Par wuli U'uat karne, aur qnsam 
khAne lagA, aur kahA, ki Main ub 
shakhs ko, jis kA tum alk* karte ho, 
[nahiti jAnti. 



MmH ba Piidtits 

72 litiari liar murgno bang di. Tab 
l'atrus ko wuhi bat, jo Ytsii no tut no 
k&hl tiii, yad Ai, ki Peshtar ns «e ki 
mnrg do bar ban.K ilu, til lio bar mori 
uikar karega, Tab is ka gaur karte 
kartu wuh roM lagi. 

XV BAT». 

J OH subh hiii aardar kahinon DO 
b'izurgon aur faoihon aur i4H 
saur majJis ko aAtb. mashwarat karke 
Yisii' ko bfedb*. 



MARQUS, XV. V % ihard hond. 

main us ko, Sw tum Yahtidion k A Kud- 
Hhah kahto ho, kyA kari'iu ? 

1 3 VW )ihir chill&e, ki Uso salib de. 

1 1 Piliitua tie phir UH se kaha, Kyiin, 
ia no kyA burai ki hai''' Tab we aur 
bhi ziyadu chilli'u', ki U mi salib de-. 

15 1 Tab Pilot us ue, loguri ki raza- 
maudi chabkar, uii ko liye Bu-abbas 
ko dibor diyii, aur Yimi' ku kate mar- 
ka liawile kiya, ki salib pi»r khinoh» 



uh: lc jakar jae. 



PilAtus ke hawAk- kiya. 

2 PilAtus no us uu prii-hha, Kva Ui 
Yahu.ili.iu ki btdabifa hai? Ua ne 
jawab mcn us se kaha, Tii sauh kanta 
hai. 

y Aur sarddr kahinon no us par 
biihut ni faryaden kin: par us ue 
kucjhh jawab na diyd. 

4 Tab PUittw m us rc yih kahke 
phir mii.'lihil, Kya tii kuchh jawab na- 
bin tlctd? dekil, we tujh jar kinu 
gawahian dete hain. 

5 Tau" bhi Yisii"' ne kuchh aur ja- 
wab na diya, yahan tak ki PilAtus nt- 
ta'ajjub kiya. 

6 Aur 'id mun wuh ok qaidi ko, jisc 
we chahte the, mi ki khatir chhor detil 
thsi. 

T Aur ek abakus BarabbAs nauie uu 
logon ke sat.ii (j/M ihl, ju iVsdd meii 
us ke aharik hiie the, aur ki (biliun ne 
fcMulhimenklmnkiyA thA. 

8 Tab bblrcfcilUke «■ n 'w tawne 
lagi, ki Jaisa tera dastiir hai, waisA hi 
haniare waste k ;< r. 

y PilAtus ne unhon jawab diyd, aur 
kaha, Kya tinn uhAhto lio, ki main 
rum haru liye Yahudioii ko ItaushAh ku 
ehhor diin 'i 

10 Kyonki wuh jdntd thA, ki sar- 
dar kiUiiru itj ue ha.su i se us ku hawale 
kiyA tba. 

Ll Par sardar kahinon ne kwog ku 
ubhard, ki wuh bar'aks un ke liye 
IlarabbAs ko chhor de. 

L2 Tab PilAtus no jawab deke phir 
uu ac kaha, Ab tum kya chahte ho? 
69 



lfi Aur wipalii ua ku Ufl djtttt) meii, 
jahan hakim kamabkaiua ti isi, lugayn: ; 
aur aairs rtsita ko Ocatjjha kiy.-i. 

17 Uuhuu ne uh argawlni fcttp» 

pahintic, aur kiiuton ka tdj sajko us ko 
Bir par rakha. 

18 Aur use salam karnc \.\>z<\ ki Ai 
Yalu'ulidij ko BiidshAh, Salam! 

19 Aur we us ke sir per narfcaf so 
mArte the, aur ns per thiikte the, aur 
ghutue tokko use sijdo kai'lo lho. 

20 Aur jab us se liausi kar chuke, 
to us par so aryawani kapro utire, aur 
usi ka kaprd uso pahiiuike salib dene 
ku 1« chalo." 

21 AurukshakhsQ.uriiii ShamaVni 
uaine, jo Sikandar aur Riifus kii biip 
thii, dihiit se lito hiie udhar sc gilsrf ; 
tmbon ue use begar pakri, ki us ki 
talib uthii lo chalo. 

22 Aur w r e use maqam i Guli:ut:i 
i, jis kA tarjuma Khoprl ki jagah 



!:»,■- 



'±'<1 Aur mai men murr milake uso 
pfrw ku diya : juir us no ua liya. 

24 Aur unhon no use salib par 
khSnchko us ko kaprc bante, aur un 

t mr uiir'a dtila, ki liar ek «liaklis kya 
ya le. 

25 Aur tiara" ghautA thA, ki unhon 



s ko s 



i. -H. 



26 Aur nalishndma, jo us par likhii 
thi, s., yih iba, ki Y1II YAIIU'DI'ON 
KA' BA'DSIIA'II HAI. 

27 Aur unhon ne us ke sAth do 
Cihoron ko, ek ko dahine bath, aui 
ddsre ko batin, salib per khinchi. 



Matih kd salib par jan dena. MAF.QUS, XVI. 



Ut kd d'/n kiiji JinA. 



28 Tab wiih nariahta, 
kd, ki Wuhbadkdrori mori gind gaji, 
pura lidi. 

2S* Aur we jo udhar sc jdto the, air 
hiliilt; tim, aur Tifa kaliku om mala- 
rnat karte tlie, ki Wah, td p haikal 
ko dbdtA, aur tin diu mori liaudtd thd, 

30 Apne ta,in bacha, aur salib par 
si! n tar a. 

31 Isi tirah sarddr kahinon ne bhi 
:ii u merj faoihorj ke wiili tbftflbe 
kart-B hiio kaba, Us ne auron ko ba- 
cbaya ; apne ta,in bachd nahin sakti. 

32 Boni WdU lfcidshdh,~ Masih, 
ab salib par se ular awe, td ki iirun 
dokhen, aur iman hiwrn. Aur inhon 
nu bhi, jo ua kesath salib par khinche 
gaya, uue tnaldmat ki. 

33 Aur jab clihatha ghanta hiid, us 
sari Bttiiarniii jiar andhord obhd gnyd, 
aur nawen ghante tak rahd. 

34 Aur nawen ghanto Yisii' bari 
awilz eo chilldke bold, Eli, BH, kuna 
sabarjtdiii, jis ki tarjiinsa yih hai ; Ai 
mere Khudd, ruere Khudd, tu ne 
niujhe kydn clihora? 

35 Baze un merj, jo wahdrj kharo 
the, yih sunke bolu, Dikho, wuli lli- 
yas ko balita hai. 

36 Aur «k ne daurko isfanj ko sirke 
meij bhiguko, aur ek narknt par rakli- 
ko, uso chusdyd, aur kahd, liat tto, 
bani dokluen t«, ki Iliyds uso utdrue 
iwo. 

37 Tab Yisu' no bari iwiz se chil 
Uk*r dam chhor diyd. 

38 Aur imikal kd jmrda dpar se 
niche tak phat gayd. 

3« T Aur us sdbaddr no, jo ua ke 
sainhrio kirnya thd, usu yi'm uhilldti 
aur dam enhorte dekLlCO kulia, ki 
Yih Bhftkbl saeb ruuoh Khudd kd 
Beta thd.' 

40 Wahan kai 'aura t r n dni sc daki 
rabi thm: un rneii Mariyaui Hfogda- 
lini, aur Mariyain uhlioto Ya'qfib aur 
Yuses ki nid, aur Sahmu thiri. 

41 Uithon uo jab wuh Jalil merj 



tbd, us ki pniraui ki, aur us ki khid- 
mat bhi ki tlii ; phir aur bhi babat 
si 'mualim thin, jo us ko sdth Yard- 
salam mun ai fliin. 

4L' % Aur jab ki shdm hrti, is liyo 
ki taiydri kd diu thd, jo sabt se pahit; 

43 Yusuf Arimatiyd, jo ndmwar 
rnusbir, aur wuh kliud Khudd ki bad- 
■shdliat ka inuntasur thd, ayi, aur 
dilari se l'ildtus pds jdke Yoaii' ki 
Idah mingL 

44 Aur Pildtus ne muta'ajjib hokai' 
shubha kiyd, ki wuh aisd jald m. u 
gaya, aur sdbaddr ko bulakc us ->■ 
piichhd, kyd der Mi ki wuh mar 
gayd ? 

45 Aur jab suhaddr se aisa ma'lum 
kiyd tbd, to lasli Yusuf ko ditd di. 

41 Aur us ne mihin siiti kapra mol 
liya thd, aur uso utdrku us ka[>re mi 
kafndyd, aur ek qabr men, jo chatan 
ke hicli kbodi gayl tbi, uso rakhi, aur 
us >[abr ko darwdzu par ck jiaith.ir 
dhalkd diyd. 

47 Mariyam Magdalini, aur Yiises 
ki uid Mariyam, us ja^ah ko, jahdn 
wuh raklid gayd, dekh mbi thin. 

XVI BA'B. 

JAB sabt ki din Kiusr gaya. Ma- 
riyatu Magdiilini, aur Ya'.pih ki 
ma Mariyam aur Kalomo ua khushbu 
cbizen mol liu, ia ki dukar us pir 
uiakfu. 

'J Aur hafte ke pabla din bahnt 
sawure sdraj uikalto hiio qabr |iar ain. 

3 Aur apa» nian kabut* lagin, ki 
Hamdru liya patthar ko, qabr ku dar- 
wdzo uar so, kauu dhaikdegd? 

4 Jabunlioti no nii;dh k i, to us rat- 
Lliar ko dhftftiji hda dekha ; kyujiki 
wuh bahut bhari tbd. 

5 Aur qabr mcn jdkar unhon no 
ok jairtta ko Siifl 'l jima p.ihine dahim 
taraf luit.ho hiio dokhd, aur gbabrd 

C Us ne urihon kahd, Mat ghabrdo; 



Masih keji uthw, LU'QA', I. aur asman parjiine kd ahiual. 

Tum Yi«u' Ndsari ko, jo salib parjab we khaniOwiithe the, dikhdi diyd, 
khincha gaya, dhundhtian bot wuh, aur vm ki lm-imarii aur sakht-'lili pw 
ji uthd lini; wuh yahdn nnhin; dc- mulamat ki, kyunki we un ki bdtuii 
kho yih jagah, jis men unhon ue use par, jitihoii M ua ko ji nthno ke ba'd 
rakha thd. luse ilekha t h d, yaqin na lae the. 

7 Ah tum jdo, aur ub ke shdgirdonl 16 Aur uh ue unli.'ij kahd, ki Tum 
ku aur 1'iit.rus ko kaho, ki Wah tum J taindm dunyd mim tfke tuli ek makl.- 



j dge Jalil ko jatd hai ; aur jaind ua 
m' tumben kahd thd, tum uae wahdn 

>l<-l;tn !:: 

8 Aur we jald nikalke qabr se bhd- 
gin ; aur larzish aur haibat ue unhen 
liyd; aur we kisi se kuchh ua boliii, 
kydnki darti thin. 

9 1T llaflo ke pahle roz wuh sa- 
were uthkar pahle Mariyain Mug'ht- 
liui ko, ji.s men se ua ne sdt deo ni kdle 
the, ilikhdi diyd. 

10 Ub ne jake ua ko aatliion ko, 
jo uh ke liyu gamgin aur rute the, 
khabar di. 

1 1 We yih sunke ki wuh jitd hai, 
aur use dikhai diyd, yaqin na lae. 

12 f Ub ke ba'd wuh. dtiwri B6rat. 
men, uii meri s-e do ko, jis waqt ki we 
paidal chalto the, aur dihdt ki taml' 
jdte the, dikhdi diyd. 

IA Unhon ni' bhi j;Vku bdqi logon 
ko khabar di; magar un [>ar bhi we 
ynqiu n a Ide. 

14 1T A'khir, wuh uu gydrahon ko, 



luq ke sdmhue Injil ki manddi karo. 

16 Jo ki iiiiiin l&td, aur baptisma 
pdtd hai, najat pacgd: aur Jo iman 
nnhin ldtd, ua par nazi kd hnkiii kiya 
jdegd. 

17 Aur we jo Imdn ldenge, uii kn 
s.'itli fe 'alaman-n hongt; ki we mere 
ndm ee deon ko uikdletigc; aur nayi 
zubdnra bolenge j 

18 Sampon ko n t ha lenge ; aur 
agar koi hnlak-karnewdlf uhiz pN^ge, 
unhen kuchh nuqein ua boptj W 
binidron par hath rakbenge, to chiiup' 
ha \toaae, 

19 *j[ Q*ru, Khuddwaud unhen 
aisd farmdue ke ba'd aaimln par utli- 
dyd gaya, aur Khudd ke dahine hath 
baitha/ 

20 Phir nnhoii ne hdhar jakar bar 
jagah manddi ki,n.ur Klmildwaii'i Hath 
hoke krim anjdm detd thd, aur kalam 
ko, un rnu'aji/.orj ke wasile U fe) 9i ke 
suiidne ke h-.\'<\ liote thu, sdbit kiin.'i 
rabd. A'iniu. 



LU'QA' KI' INJIL. 



1 BA'B. I 3 Main ao bhi mnnasih jdnd, ki 

CHU'liKl bahuton ue kamar bdn-isab ko sire se sahih taur par daryaf't 
dhi ki un kdmon kd jo nlwaqi' | karkc tere liye, ai buzurg Thecfllus, 

L jC_~ .1 .-•-., ',-^A ,* hiiUa> Iii'hj li-n-'in Ih'i turlili liL'luni 



hamdre darmiyda anjdm hiie, bayan 
karcn, 

2 Jis tarah se unhon ne, jo shurii' 
se khud dekhnewdle, aur kalam ki 
khi(imat-karuewale the, liam se riwa- 
yat ki ; 

71 



ba tertib liknog, 

4 Td ki tii vm bdton ki haq(qat ko, 
jin ki tu ne ta'liin pai, jdne. 

5 ^.TTAHUTIIYA ke hddshih 

j Besodis ke dinon men, 
Abij';Lli ke l'ariq men ife Zakariydh 



EkfirMUi U LU'QA' P I- Zakariyah ko, 

nimoclckAhinthA: u» Itf joni H4ruti:iinV kytinki main bikha hiin, nur 
H ln-ii.iri raag t* tlii, aur us kA nam. meri jnni ki ban 'umr Ihii. 
llisabat tha. " l fl Firishle ne jawab men U «c 

6 We donon KhudA ke huziir rAst-l kahA, Main Jabrik hiin. ju KhudA ke 



baz, aur KhudAwand ke sar« linki _ 
aur cjanunon par W-'aib chalnewale 
tlie. 

7 Aur uu ke larkA na thA, kyi'inki 
IlisabAt banjh tliij aur doOOfl bahu t 
din ke tho. 

8 Aur aisa huA, ki jab wuh KhudA 
ko busur, apno fario_ ki hari par, kabin 
ka karubar kartA tha, 

9 KAhini ke dastiir par us ki chit- 
thi nikli, ki KhudAwand ki haikal 
men jAke khushbui jalawe. 

]"0 Aurlogon kl «ari jama'at, khush- 
biii jalate waut, bahar dua mang rahi 
thi. 

11 Tab us ko KhudAwand ka firiah- 
ta, Umshhui 3fl.lo.1u? ke. mutah ki 
dahini taraf kharA hmt, dikhiii diyA. 

12 Zakariyah' dekhkar ghabrAyA, 
aur babat dara. 

13 Par firishte ne us se kahA, ki 
Al Zakariyah, mat dar, ki teri du'A 
suni gayi, aur teri joni Uisabilt tero 
liye ek beta janegi; tii us ka nam 
Y('ili:ii]ii:i rak lini. 

14 Aur tujbt! khushi o khiirmmi 
bogf : aur bahutere ua ki paidaiah se 
kiiush horjge. 

lfl Kyiinki wuh KhudAwand ke 
huziir bu/,urg boga, aur na inai, aur 
na koi nasha piegA ; aur apni ina ke 
pet hi se Ruh i Quds se bhar jAegA. 

16 Aur bani UEMJ men ae bahuton 
ko un ke KhudAwand KhudA ki taraf 
pherega. 

17 Aur wuh ua ko age IliyAs ki 
tabi'at aur qiiwat ke »Ath chutega, ki 
biijidadon k* di Ion ko larkon ki taraf, 
aur na-farmanbardaron ko raatbfeOB 
ki dAnai ki taraf phcrke, KhudAwand 
ke liye ek muata'idd qauin taiyar 
kara. 



huzur kharA rahta hlirj i ««r bhuja 
^ iya ki tuj'he kaln'm, aur yih khush- 
kh'abari tujhe dtin. 

20 Aur,dekh,tugungahojaega,nuT 
jin din tak kiyili cbizi-n wtoi'na bon, 
bol na sakegA, la liye ki tii U owrf 
balon ko,jo apcewaqt par puri hoiv^i, 
yaqin nn kiya. 

81 Aur ]i>g Zakariyah ki rahdekhte 
the.aur haikal mori ua ke derkarnese 
ta'ajjub karte tbe. 

22 Jab wuh bahar dko un se bol na 
saka, urtbon ne uaryAft kiya, ki us ne 
haikal incjj kof roya dekhi thi : aur 
wuh un aelahara karta thi, aur gunga 

tali mfi, 

23 AmaWhui.kijabaiki khidmat 
ke din piire biie, wuh apne ghar gaya. 

24 Aur un dinorj ke ba'd us ki juru 
IlisabAt harnila hui, aur ub ne panci» 
mahine tak apne ta,m yih kahke cbhi- 
paya, ki, 

25 Jin dinon men Khndawand ne 
mujh par nazar ki, meru sdth aisd kiya, 
ta ki logon men se meri sbarmindagi 
ili'ir kare. 

26 Aur chhathe mahine Jabriel 
firishta Khuda ki taraf se Jalil ke ''k 
shahr r/i'en, ji» ka uAui Nasarat tha, 
bhejii gaya, 

27 Ek kunwari ke pas, jis ki Yiisul 
namo ek maril -se, ]o Daud ke ghar&ne 
se iha, mangni hiii thi; aur us kurj- 
wari kA uAm Mariyam tha. 

28 Us Grishte ne u» pas* kodal aka 
kabA, ki Al pasaudida, salam I Kliu- 
dAwand tere sAth : tu 'auraton men 
mubarak hai. 

20 Par wuh uso dekhkar us ki bat 
ae ghabrAi, aur soehne lagi ki yih 
kaisa saiiini hai. 

30 Tab tirisbto ne us se kahA, ki Ai 



IH Tab ZakariyAb ne firUhte kol Mariyam, mat dar; ki 14 ne Khudi 
kabA, Main is ko kyunkar aach JAa-Jke huafir fazl (AyA. 



r phir Mariyam ko, 



LU'QA', I. 



31 Aur, <iekh, t6 hamil» buH, aurildi, ki yih bdtog,, jo Kliudawaud ki 
beta jatiegf, aur ua ki nam ?BU" | taraf so kahi giijin, puri hongi. 



■Lkl.i-";. 

32 Wuh bnsurg hogd, aur Khudd 
Ta'dld ki Beta kahldega ! aur Khudd- 
wand Khudd "us ke bap Daud ka tak h t 
uuo dega ; 

33 Aur wuh nada Ya'ufib ko ghrtr- 
duc ki bddshahat karegi; aur us ki 
liadsliahat lik Lir as bOB. 

34 Tab Mariyam ne ririshte bb kahi, 
Yili kyuukiir boga, jii hal lneii main 
tnard ko nabin jinti? " 

35 Firishto ne jawdb men us se 
kaliii, ki Ruh i Quds tujb par utrogi, 
aur Khudd Ta'ili ki qudrat ka <;i.ia 
t-ujli par ln'iia : is safaab se wuli oed- 
dufl bhi jo paidi boga. Khudd ka Beta 
kaliiiii-.'.'a. 

36 Aur, dekh, teri rishtaddr Bisabdt 
ko bhi burhape mon beta honewdla 
liai ; aur yih us ka, jo biiijh kaulari 
Lai. chlialba tiiahini hai. 

37 Kyiinki Khuda, ke ago koi bat 
ahlimu nahiu. 

38 Aur Mariyam no kaha, Dikii 
Khuda wand ki batidi ; mujb }«ir tere 
kahne ke niuwatiq howe. Tab fimhta 
us ko pas se chali gaya. 

39 Aur unhiij diuon men Mariyam 
uthkar jaldi ae pahamu par Yahiidah 
ke ek shahr ko gayi ; 

10 Aur Zakariyah ka gbar men 
ddkhil hokcilisabit ko aaldin kiyd. 

41 Aur aisi hiia, ki jonhin Ilisabit 
no Mariyam ki saldin suni, larka us 
ke pet men uclihal pard; aur Ilisabit 
ltub i Quds se bhar gayi : 

42 Aur zor se pukarke kahi, ki Tu 
'auratog mori mubarak hai, aur teru 
pet kd pria! mubarak hai. 

43 Mere liye yih kyunkar hui, ki 
mere Khudawaud ki mi muih pas di? 
ki, 

44 Dekh, tere salam ki dwiz jonhin 
mere kari tak pahunchi, larka mere 

-■ mej kim-tii so uchlial para. 

45 Aur mubamk hai wuh jo [mdu 

73 



4G Aur Mariyam nc kaha, ki Mori 
jau Khudawaud' ki barai karti hai, 

47 Aur mori nih mere najdt deue- 
waio Khudd se khush hiii. 

48 Ki ui> ne apni bandi ki pas t ha! i 
par nazar ki : is liyc, dekh, ab se liar 
zamine ke log mnjh ku mubarak 
k&henoe. 

49 Kyunkiuane,joqudraLwaIihai, 
mere liye bare katn kiye liniu ; aur uh 
ki nim pak liai. 

50 Aur us ki ralim iiu par, jo ub 86 
$arte faasj, pu&Ut dar puaht liai. 

51 U» ne nptie hazii ki zor dikha- 
yd; aur un ko, jo apu u dil ko khiy.il 
men aptie ta,iii hari Baiuajhte haiij, 
jiaroshan k iya. 

52 Qu.dratwair>n ko tak rit se giri 
diyd,aur past-lidlorj kobuhnd kiyi. 

53 Ub ne hbuklion koathchhichiz- 
on se dauda kiya; aur dauIatniaimY.ti 
ko khili hdth bh«ja. 

54 Us neapnc baude Isrdel ko sam- 
bhdl liyi, us rahmat ko y M karke, 

55 Jo Abirahini aur us ki aulad par 
sadd ko tbin, jaihd us ne liamaro bap- 
dddon bo farrciyi tbi. 

51 j Aur Mariyam tin ruahine ke 
qarib us ke sath rahke npna gbar ko 
pli iri. 

57 Ab Ilisabdt ko janne kd waqt 
pabuncha ; aur beti jani. 

5H Aur us ke paronion aur riwhta- 
ddron ne sund, ki Kbudiwaud ne us 
par Iuri rahmat ki; aur unimu ne us 
kesdth khusbS ki. 

5W Aur yiin h n d, ki wc ithwcn din 
larke ki khaiua kaiue de; aur M kii 
uim Zakariyah, jo OH ke bip ki th;i, 
rakhnc lage. 

60 Par us ki md ne jawab men 
kahd, ki Nahin ; baiki us kd nam 
Vuhannd rakbi jdwe. 

GL Unhoii u us so tahi, ki Tere 
gharane men kisii kd yih uaui uahiji. 

(ki Tab unhon no us ke bip ki taraf 



Mariyam ke thitkfAnt ha ylt. LU'QA', II. 
ishira kiyd, ki wuh n» kd kyd udm 
rakhi chdlita hai. 

63 Db ne takhtf mangdko likhd, ki 
Yuhaund uh kd ndin hai. Aur sabhon 
ne ta'ajjub kiyd. 

64 Aur usi dam us ki rnimh aur 
zuban khul gayi, nur wuh bolnu laga. 
aur Khudi ki ta'rif ki. 

65 Tab rire Ah pas ku rahuewdle 
dar gaye: BUI Yaliuiiiva ke taTiidru 
kohistan men 'm sab baum kd chavebd 

138 Aur sabbon ne, jn sunte the, apnc 
dil men socbkar knhi, ki Yib kuat 
larka hogd ! Aur Khuddwand ki hath 
us piir tua. 

67 Aur uh kd bap Zakariyah Ruh i 
Quds se bhar gaya, aur nubuwat ki 
rfib n kahne laga, ki 

68 Hamd Khuddwand kf, Jo Intel 
ki Khudi hai; kyuiiki us ne apne 
logon par nazar ki, »01 unlicu uhlmt- 
ka.ro. diyd, 

69 Aur hjunAlB liye najftt ka sing 
Mnt bude I.Viiid ke gliar men se 
□ikilke khara kiyd ; 

70 JaisA ns no apue pak nabiorj ki 
luari fat, jo dunyd ke sauri' sc hote 
ae, ka lia : 

71 Ham ko hainare duskmanoD ee, 
aur uu ko hitli se jo ham se kiua 
raklite hain, riliai bakhshi ; 

72 Ta ki wuh rtihiu, jis kd hamdre 
bri.iwiadon ke ftaih oardr kiyd, ki 
ftj>no pak *ahd ko ydd nkhfl ; 

73 Usi tjasam ko, jo us no hamare 
bap Abirahdm se ki, ki 

74 Wuli liatuen y j h degd, ki apne 
duahniaium ku hdth ee chhutkdrd 

ntora, 

75 'Umr bhar us ko age, iidkizagi 
aur sachdi Ke, be-khauf ub ki b&odftj ' 
karen. 

76 Aur,ai Iurku, tt'i Khudi Ta'alit kd 
nabi kabhlcgd : kyuijki tu Khuddwand 
ke dge us ki rdhon ko durost karta 
jdegdj ki 

f 7 "H* ke logou ko najit ki khaba: 



Zakariy6& M jmMngtn. 

dewe, jin ao un ke gunahuu ki inu'dfi 
howe, 

8 Jo hamdre Khudi ki khdss rah- 
mat, se hai ; jis ko sabab subh ki roshni 
upar se ham tak pahunchi, 

79 Td ki uu ko joaudheroaiirmaut 
ke saya murt baithu hain, ror-liiii liakli- 
she, aur hainari hidayat kara ki sald- 
nmti ki nih par oadam inaron. 

80 Aur wuh larka barbtd, aur ruh. 
en qnwat pdti gaji, aur apnt' ta,m 

Isrdel par Bihlr katne ke din taJt 
bayibdn men rahti. 

II UA'B. 

AI.H; un dinoD men ydn htid, ki 
Qstisar Augustus ki taraf m 
liukm uikiii, ki hiu- basti ke logon ke 
udui likhe jden. 

2 (Auryili pnhli istu-nawisf t.hi, jo 
Suriya ke hakiui Qureniu» ko wtn|t 
iiii-ij h<H.) 

3 Tab har ek apue apiifl ahahr ku 
uim likliain.' cbald. 

4 Aur Yusuf bui Jalil ke sbahr 
NisaMt st, Yiiln'uliya mi'n Difid ko 
sbdtt ko, jo Buitlaham kahldtd hai, 
gaya ; ia liye ki wuh Ddiid ke gharane 
aur aidad ko thd ; ki 

5 Apni ruaugetarMariyam ke sdth, 
jo hdmila thi, udiu likkdwe. 

6 Anraisa hr.ii.ki j;il> wewahdn tLe, 
ua ke janne ke din pure hiio. 

7 Ani- i|-i.- ; i.l n' ii l ii. r?, i.nii. ;n i 
us ko kajiru men lapetke charui men 
rakhd; kyiinki uu ko sard men jagah 
na mili. 

8 Uh miilk men garariye the, jo 
i r i r i i ■ I : L l i awfl ralite, aur rdt ko liari ban 
apue jhund ki chauki karie ihe. 

9 Aiu, deklio, ki Khudawand kd ek 
flriabte un par sibir hai, aur Khudd- 
waucl kd ntb" un ke chacgird chainka ; 
aur wo nihdyat dar gaye. 

10 Tab Srisht'e uu unben kabd, Mat 
dii.ro: kvuijki, dek bu, main tumhep 
bati kbushi ki khabar detd liun, jo MD 
Io;t(>ij ke waslc liogl, ki 

11 Daud ku abahr men dj tumhdre 



Mrfih ka taim'htd. 



H;'Q,A', II. 



Masih kd kfattna ho; 



liye ek Najdt-dcnewdlapaida htid ; wuh jera, ya kabiitar ko do bacl:,chequrbaiii 



Masih Khuddwaud hai, 

12 Aur tumhdre liye yihi pati hai ; 

ki tam ok larke ko kapre men lapeta 

.i iiiL-ii rakha ln'ia |. . 

YA Aur ek bargi us firishte fee Bdth 
asmdni lashkar ki ek jami'at Khuda 
ki ta'rif karti, aur yih kahti zahir bui, 
ki 

1+ Khuda ko dHmdu par ta'rif, aur 
zaiuin par saldmati, aur adtnion se 
razauiaudi howe. 

15 Aur aisa iiiia, ki jab firishtc un 
ko pas ao asinku |Hir guye, garariyon 
Ki' apu owg kaha, ki Ao, bara liuii- 
lahaui tak jaen, aur is bit ko jo bui 
hai, jis ki Khudawaud uu haiucij 
khabar di hai. deklien. 

Itj Tab unhorj nu jaltlt Jtke Mari- 
yam, aur Yusuf ku, aur us larke ko 
charui men rakin'i bud paya. 

17 Aur dekhke us bdt ko, jo is 
larke ke hiiqq nieii un se kalii gayi thi, 
nbaUdyi. 

ld Aur Bab yunnewilon no in baton 
se, jo garariyon ne unhen kahin, ta'aj- 
jub kiyd. 

l'.) I 'ar Mariyam ne in sah bdton ki 
apne dil men gaur karke ydd rakhd. 

20 Alir garariyo in sab baton k' 
sabab, jo unhon ne sunirj, aur jaisi m 
n kahi gayi thin, dekhin, Khuda ki 
ta'rif aur barai karte htie ph 

21 Aur jab dth din pure hiie, ki 
larke ka khat.na ho, us ka ndmYISU'" 
rakhd gaya, jo us ke pet. ruerj panie ke 
dgc lirisihtu ne rakha thd, 

22 Aur jab Musa ki s ha r i 'a t ki 
rauwa6q us ko pak honc ke dia pure 
hue," wc im krko ko Yarusakm rnen 
hie, ti ki Khudawaud ke age hassir 
kareg ; 

2o (Jaiaa ki Khndawanrl ki slsari'at 
men likhd hai, ki liar ek palauthd 
brka Khudawaud ko liye u tak ha u s 
kahlaegd ;) 

-l Aur ki Khudawand ki shari'at 
ki- hnkm ke muwdttq, Qumrion kd ek 



karerj. 

2y Aur, dekho, ki Yarusalaio men 
SharuaYni nim ek shtikhs tlid, jo 
rdstbdz, aur diiiddr, aur Israel ki 
tasalli ki rdh dekhti tlid, aur Riil t i 
Quds us par tlii. 

26 Us ko Mh i Quds uo khabar di 
thf, ki jab tak Khudawaud ko Masih 
ko ua <iekh le, maut ko na dektugii. 

27 Aur wuh Huh ki hiddyat se 
baikal men iya: aur jis waqt mii bap 
us larke YisiV ko andar Idte tlie, ta ki 

ke bye shar'a ke daatiir par 'amal 

28 Us ne use apue hdthon par uthd 
liyd, aur Khudd ki ta'rif karke kaki, 

29 Ai Khuddwand, ab td apue bando 
ko, apne kalam ke muwah^, saldmati 

rukhsat detd hai : 

30 Kyuuki mori dnkhon no teri 
iiajat dekhi, 

8] Jo tu no sab logon ke age taivdr 
klhai; 

12 Qaumon koroshan karne ke liyo 
ek mir.aur apne log Israel ke liye jalai. 

38 Tab Yusuf aur Yisu' ki mi uu un 
bdton so, jo us ku haq<i meij kahi gayiu, 
ta'ajjub kiyd. 

34 Aur Shama'iin ne unhetj du'd di, 
ir us ki ma Mariyam ko kahd, Dekh, 

yih Israel men bahuton ke glrne aur 
uthue ke liye, aur khilaf kabno ke 
uishdn ke Waste, rakha liud hai ; 

35 (Aur talwdr teri jdn ke andar 
bhi guzar jdegi,) ta ki baliuLon ko dilon 
ke khiyal khul jaeu. 

36 Aur AVer lio {fhardnc sc Annd 
nam Fdniiel ki beti ek uabiya tbi, jo 
bubut burhi titi : aur as ne apue kuri- 
waripau se sdt baras ek khasam ke 
sath iiibdh kiyd thd ; 

37 Aur wuh bcwa qarib chaurasi 
baras ki thi, ki haikal m Judft na bui, 
pai rOU rakhne, aur du'a mangue se 
rat din bandagi karti rahi. 

3tt Usneuai ghari akar Khudawaud 



Yuhanna H LU'QA', ITT. wa'iz ke fatn 

ka shukr kiyii, aur un sab ko, jo Yarv'i- aur Khuda ke aur insan ko uazdik 



salam men ulihutkare ki rah dekhte 
the, us ki babat k'aha. 

39 Aur jab we KhudAwand ki 
shari'at ke nmwAfiq sab kuchh kar 
chukc, to Jalil men apue shahr Nasarat 
ko phir gaye. 

40 Aur Uirka barhtA, aur hikmat 
bharkarub menquwat pAtarahA: aur 
KhudAwand ki fad uh par tha. 

' 41 Vs ke ma bAp har baras 'id i 
fasali iiuti Yanisalam ki' jate the. 

42 Alir lab wah Urah LuiraskAhuA, 
aur we 'id ke cku-tur par Yarusalain ko 
gaye the, 

43 Aur uu dinon ko pur.i kiya tha, 
jiid phirne lage.wuh larkA Yisu' Yaru- 
salain men rali gaya; par Yusuf aur 
us ki ma ue na jAnA. 

44 Baiki yih samajhke ki wuh 
qiitile meii hai, ek man/.il gaye ; aur 
IUH ritduadAron aur jAn-palLclaui>ii 
men sah kahin dlnlndhA. 

45 Aur ua pakar us ki talash har 
kahin kartu hue Yanisakm ko phire. 

4(1 Aur aisA hria. ki unhou uo Un 
roa piehho nse haikal men ustadon ke 
Web. baithe hile, un ki aunte, aur un a» 
tsuwal karte payA. 

47 Aur sab jo us ki sunte the, u 
ki samajh aur uh ke jawaborj se diiuj 
the. 

43 Tab w<3 use dokhkar hairAn hfio 
aur us ki ma ne us se kaha, Ai Bute, 
kis liye tu ne ham se aisa kiya V dekh, 
tari !>Ap aur main kurhte hiie tujhe 
dhundhte the. 

4!f "Us ne unhen kari A, Kyiin tum 
nmjhe dhiindbte the? kya tum ne ua 
jiiua, ki nmjhe apne bdp ke yahan 
ruhna zanir hai? 

50 Par we is bat ko, jo us ne nnlien 
kahi, na samjho. 

51 Aur wuh un ke sath rawina 
hokar Nasarat men ayA, aur un ku 



maui liliyal tuwj, laraqqi karia gaya. 

ih u a' k 

A B Tibcrius Qaisar ki badshahat ko 
ptttidrahweti baraa, jab 1'undus 
PiLAtus Yalui'liya ka hakim, aur 
Herodis Jalil ki cbauthai ka, aur 01 
ka bhiii Fail bus Itiiriya ki cbauthai 
aur Trakonitis ke umlk ka, aur 
LisAniyas Abileno ki cbauthai k a 
hakim tha, 

'S Ji» mqt AnnAs aur Qayafas sar- 
dar kahin the, Khuda ka kalam ha- 
yaban men Zakariyili ke bete Yu- 
hanna ko pahuneba. 

'A Aur wuh Yardan ke eire aspas 
ke mulk men ake gunahon ki muafi 
ke iiye tauba ko baplisma ki inaiiadi 
kari a raha ; 

4 Ghunanchi Yas'aiyah nabi ki 
balon ke daftar men yih liat likhi bal, 
ki llayiibiiu men uk pukarnewale ki 
awaz hai, ki Tum Khudawand ki rah 
ko durust karo, aur us ke rdstun ko 
sidha karo. 

5 Har ek garha bhara jae^a, aur wab 
jwiharaur tile niche kiyaJHEBgfr) WB 
{«riil jagahori ttdhi, aur bihar rahen 
baribar banen^i ; 

6 Aur liar uk inaan Khuda, ki najat 
dskbegi, 

7 Tab ua ne un gurohog ko, jo uh 
se baptisma pane ko nikli thin, kulia, 
Ai sampon ki nasi, tumben kis ue 
butayil ki anewate ga»ib se bhago ? 

8 Tas tauba ku laiq mewe lao, anr 
apne dilon rnon khiyal na karo ki 
Abirabam hamara' bap hai; kyinjki 
main tumhen kahti hun, ki Khuda 
Abirahaiu keliye iri pattharon se larke 
paida kar sakta hai. 

9 Aurdarakhton ki jar pnr kulhdri 
taklii hai : ao jo darakht aehcbhe phal 
nahin lata, kata aur 'ag merj dala jali 
hai. 



liibi' raha. Aur us kima ne yih sabi 10 Tab un gurohon ne us se piichha, 
baten apne dil mon iskbirj. Iki Phir ham kyi karen? 

52 Aur Yistf, hikmat, aur qadd, f 11 Ua no un ee JftwM mou kahA, ki 



ihuru' kanui. 
Jis ke c. 



LCQA\ III. 



Masih k'i nate&tl&ma. 



kurto bon, uh ko, jia ke pds I 23 Aur Yisti' ap baras tis ek kd hiia 

i W„+ J... „... ;;.. i.„ „i ' :_v .1 ji li_/ ,..,,. 



nahin hai, bant di? ; aur jis ke pds 
khdne ko ho, wub bhi aiea hi karc. 

12 Tab mnhsul-lciipwdlo bhi bap- 
tisma pane ko de, aur us se kahd, ki Ai 
ustad, bani kya karet) ? 

13 Us ae un «c kahd, ki Tumhare 
liye jo muqarrarliai,us seziydda nalo. 

14 Sipdhion ne bhi us se puchha, 
ki Hani kya karen? Us ne unhcn 
kahd, ki Na kisi par zulm karo, na 
iRtunat l&g&o ; aur apne rozine par 
rdzi raho. 

15 Aur jab log mun?nxir the, aur 
Bab aptie dil mcii Yiihannd ki babat 
Bochte tho, ki kya wub Masih hai ki 
nal iiii ; 

Hi Yiihannd ne un sab ke jawdh 
raen kahd, ki Main lo tumben pani sc 
haptisnia deta kurj ; ]iar 111 1 1 j 1 1 m t' k 
qawitar dtd hai, jis ki juti ko band 
kholne ko main ldiq nahig hiiii : wub 
tumben l!uh i Quds aur dg ae baptisma 
degd. 

17 Us ke hiith men sup hai, aur 
wuh apno khalihdn ku khubwir kar- 
ena, aur gehtin ko apni kothi mag 
jam'a karogd ; par bhfisi ko us dg men, 
jo nahin bujhti, jal&wttga. 

18 Aur wuh logon ko nasihat kf 
bahut aur hdwn karta, aur khushkba- 
bari dctd raba. 

19 Par Htrodli chauthdi Uo hrtUim 
ne, apne bhdi Fail bus ki joni Hero- 
iliyas ke sabab, aur un sab badion ke 
liye jo Herodis ne kin, Ytihanua se 
ruaiamat uihdke, 

20 Sab par yih ziydda kiyd, ki Yii- 
hannd ko qaid rakhd. 

21 Aur aisa hiid, ki jab sab log 



jab shurti' kiyd, aur (jaisd ki guman 
tha) wuh Yusuf kd bon thd ; aur wuli 
Heli kd, 

24 Aur wuh Matthdl kd, aur wuh 
Lcwi kd, aur wuh Mnlkhi kd, aur wuh 
Yannd kd, aur wuh Yusuf kd, 

25 Aur wuh Mattdthiyds kd, aur 
wuh Amus kd, aur wuh Kadin kd, aur 
wuh Asli kd, aur wuh Naggai ki, 

26 Aur wuh Mdliata kd, aur wuh 
Mattdthiyds kd, aur wuh Sima'i kd, 
aur wuh Yusuf kd, aur wuii Yiidd kd, 

27 Aur wuh Yuhmind ka, aur wuh 
Resd ka, nur wuh /arubdbal kd, aur 
wuh Saldtiel kd, aur wuh Nol k.i, 

28 Aur wuh Malki kd, aur wuh 
Addi kd, aur wuh Wusdm kd, aur wuh 
Almn.liitn kd, aur wuh 'Er kd, 

29 Aur wuh Ynses kd, aur wuh 
Ili'azar kd, aur wuh Yorim kd, aur 
wuh Matthdt k d, aur wuh Lcwi kd, 

30 Aur wuh Shama'un kd, aur wub 
Yahuddh kd, aur wuh Yusuf ka, aur 
wuh Yiindn kd, aur wuh lliydijim 

31 Aur wuh Malaya kd, aur wuh 
Mainan kd, aur wub Mattathd kd, aur 
wuh Ndtan kd, aur wah DAud ka. 

32 Aur wuh Yassf kd, aur wuh 
'Obed kd, aur wub Bo'az kd, aur wuh 
Salmon kd, aur wuh Nahsun kd, 

33 AuTwuh'Aminaddbkd, aur wuh 
Ardm kd, aur wuh Hasroni kd, aur 
wuh Pharas kd, aur wuh Yahuddh ka, 

34 Aur wuh Ya'tjiib ka, aur wuh 
Iz,hdq ka, aur wuh A hi rahim kd, aur 
wub Tarah kd, aur wuh i'ahur kd, 

35 Aur wuh Sdrnkh kd, aur wuh 
Ra'ri kd, aur wuh Fdlik kd, aur wuh 



haptisnia pd chuke the, aur YisuV bhi 'i'br kd, aur wuh Silah kd, 



baptisma pakar du'a mang rahd tha, 
dsmdn khul gaya, 

22 Aur Ruh i Quds jism ki aurat 
men, kahutar ki tarah, ua par utri, aur 
asuidn ae ek dwaz di, jo yih kahti thi, 
ki Tu merd piydrd Beta hai; tujh se 
i;;ain rd/i lu'.n. 



3(5 Aur wuh Qiudn kd, aur wuh 
Arfaksad kd, aur wuh Sim kd, aur 
wuh Niih kd, aur wnh I-amak kd, 

37 Aur wuh Mathiiaildkd, aur wuh 
Uanuk kd, aur wuh Ydrid ka, aur wuh 
MaliLilaliui kd, aur wuh Qindn kd, 

38 Aur wuh Anua kd, aur wuh Set 



Musik Shfiitdn w dzmfiya j\itd. LU'OA', IV, 



Musih ku mi'k }■■ 



ka, aur wuh A'dam ka, aur wuh Khu- 
.1.1 kd tim. 

IV BA'B. 

AUR Visi* Ruh i Quda bc bharA 
MA Yardan se phirA, aur Jtiili 
ki rahnuruAi «o bayAbAn raets gaya, 

2 Aur cbAlis din tak ShaitAn se 
limiayi gaya. Aur un dinop, men. 
kitchh na kliAyA : jali wuh dia purc 
Inic, akhir fa>bUkfii Mi. 

3 Tab Shait4,ii ne ua se kaiti, ki 
A(H t.ri Khuila ka Befi hai, to is 
) miliar ku kali, ki l'.iti bau jAe. 

4 Yisu' uc jawab uicjj us se kahA, 
LikhA hai, ki IntAn siif roti se tiah'ta, 
baiki KhudA ki har ek bAt'se jitA hai. 

5 Aur Bhaitan no usc ek i'mche 
]>ahAr par le jAke dunyA ki siri bid- 
siiahaten ok dam mert dikhAin. 

6 Aur ShaiiAn ne US so kaha, ki 
Main yib sArA ikhtiyAr, aur un ki 
shAn oshaukat, tuihe diirjga: kyfVnki 
yili Timili ko souipA gaya hai ; aur jia 
ko chAhtA hi'ia, dotA hun. 

7 Pan agar tii mrijlie flijda kare, sah 
lori hogA. 

8 Yisu' ne use jawAb men kahA, ki 
Ai ShaitAn, more sAmbne se jA: ky- 
iiyki likbA hai, ki Tu KhudAwand 
apue KhudA ko eijda kar, aur sirf usi 
ki handali kar, 

9 Wuh use Yarusalam inen lAyi, 
aur haikal ke kangurc uar k h: . 
karke us «c kahA, Agar tu KhudA ka 
Beta bai, to fcjpae ta,in J'abAn se girA 

10 Kyunki UkhA hai, ki Wuh tere 
liye apue nrisiiton ko 1'armAwegA, ki 
turi khnlwdAri karen : 

11 Aur tujlio hatbon par utba Jcn, 
kahin aifA na ho ki tere p&nw ko jtat- 
thar se tlics laga. 

1 'J Yi'-itL' m; jawab nicn use farmAyA, 
ki kahA gayA hai, Tii KhudAwand 
apne KhudA ko, mat AzmA. 

IH Aur Shaitftti jali tamAm AzmA- 
ifili kar chukA, muddat tak ub ne dur 
nhi- 



14 ^ Aur Yieii' Mh ki uiiwat se 
.Talil ko filiira; aur sAreaspAa kemulk 
men u ki abahrat Ml 

15 Aur wuh un ko 'ihAdat.khanon 
men ta'Jfm detA raba, aur sah us ki 
tii'rirkarte the. 

1G f Phir wuh NAsarat ko, jahAn 
parwarifth j:Ai thi, AyA, aur apue dastur 
DAI Ifcbt kfldlfl 'ikidalkliaueniengaya, 
aur parhne ko fcbnrA had, 

17 Anr Vas'aivah DtM ki kltibu 
ko di gayi. Aur kitAb kholkar wuh 
maqAm j>AyA, jabAn yib likhA tha, ki 

18 Kliudawaiid ki HCih mnjli par 
hai ; us n« is liye mu.jht> Masih kiyA, 
ki garibon ko khusliklialiaii dan ; 
mujh ko bhejA, ki tflte dilon ko du- 
niht kariin, qaidii>u ko chhiUne, aur 
andhou ko dekhue ki kliabar sunAiin, 
aur jii bep.Fii ae gbAyal hnin unhfln 
cbhurAr.u, 

19 Aur KhudAwanu ko sal i mailbiil 
ki manAdi kaniii. 

20 Aur kitAb hnnd karke, aur kiid- 
rmtt-kan]e\v.i]fi ko dekfl, wuh baith 
gaya. Aur aalihon ki Aiikhen, j n 'iba- 
datkhAne men tbe, us par lagi tbJo. 

2i Tab wuh uniirn kjluU iftgi, ki 
A'j yih navishta, jo turo ne sunA, piira 
hi:L 

22 Aur sab ne us par gawAbi di, aur 
uu fa^l ki bAton se, jo ua ke mitOD se 
tiifcaili lin'n, ta'ajjnh karke kahA, K ya 
yih Yusuf kA l>eLa nahiu? 

23 Ua ne unb'eri kali A, ki Tuni be- 
sbakk yih masai mujh par kahoge, ki 
Ai hakim, apue ta,in changA kar; jo 
jo ham ne sunA, ki tujb se Kafaraa- 
bunt men hdA, yahAn apne watan men 
bhi kar. 

24 Par us ne kahA, Main tam H 
nab kahti bos, ki Koi nabi apne. wa- 

meji miwjbnl unhhj hobi. 

"> [..-km nuiin l.uin m sach kahta 
Ma, ki HiyAs kedlnon men, jab sarhe 
tin baras AsniAn band rahA, yahAn tak 
ki siri sarzamin nien imrA kAl parA, 
bahut si bewAen IsrAel moij thin; 



Ptofrtu /.i t&t /.'f changA hima. LU'Q 
26" Par IliyAa im men eg kisf ke pds 

na bheji paya, magar Saidike Saraptd 

meij ek I-"/ 6 ke j i Aa. 
27 Aur i 1 -: : nabi ke waqt Israel 

men bah u t sc korhf tho ; par un men 

n koi, Na'aajin Suriyani ke siwa, 

cliaiiRti na hud. 

2B Tab wo jo 'ibadat khdne men t.he, 

ua balon ku a uu 1.0 lii gussa se bhar 

29 Aur Uthc, aur usc shahr ke bi- 
lur nilkdlke ua pahdri ki choti uar, 
jis [Kir :iti kA shahr baua tha, lu chale, 
ici use «ir ke bbal giri iiua. 

30 Lekin wuli uu ke bich se nikalke 
r:i w Ali a h u d, 

31 AurKafamahummeg.jo Jafil kti 
ek shahr hai, iya, aur sabt ko dinon 
men unhen ta'lim diyd kiyi. 

32 Aurwe uu kl ta'lim sc dang biie: 
kvunki us kA kalam oudrat ke sath 
tha. 

33 T Aur 'ihAdatkhAna men ek 
shakhs iba, jis men sbaitan ki uApdk 
n'iii thi; wuh bari awdzsc yih kabkar 
chillaya, k i 

34 Ai l'isu' JfAsarf, chbnr de; ham- 

S kya kain? tii hamon balik 
karne iya hai; main jAntA hiiti ki tii 
kauu hai ; Khuda ki QuuUua. " 

35 Tisu' ne uwe dhamkdke kahd, 
Chup rah, aur ua men se nikal jA. Aur 
wuh shaitdrj uao bich men patuk k e us 
■e nikal gaya, aur u» ko nuu^iu na 
jnlnincb&yi. 

3ti Aur Eab nihdyat bairan hue, aur 
a pas mon kahuo lape. ki Yib kaisd 
kalAtn hai f ki wuh ikhtiyar aur qud- 
rat se ndpdk ruhon par hukm kan.d 
hai, aur we nikal jati bsin. 

37 Aur dspds ke mulk ki har jagah 
mon us ki ahuhrat phaill. 

38 % Pliirwuh 'ibadatkbAnoscuth- 
kar Shama'un ko g h a r gayA. Niiama- 
'un ki bAs ko bari tap charhi thi ; aur 
uiihon na us ko liye ua se 'arz ki, 

39 "Tab khard hoke us ki taraf 
ibukd, aur tap ko dhamkayd, to utar 
79 



A', V. MacUUon kd gol ha/h !.,,,..,',. 

fayi; aur us ne jhat nthkc un k i 
_hidmat ki. 

40 H Aur jab fciiraj diilttd thi, m 
sah, jin ke yahiiu marfa tbe, jo tarah 
tarah ki bitnariuii men gitiftdr the, uu 
ko us nas Ide; ub db un men se har 
ek liar hdth rikljkar unhen cbjuigd 
kiya. 

41 Aur bahuton men. so shaydein 
chilldkar yili kahke nikal gaya, ki Ta 
Masih Khuda k:i Be(,A hai. l'ar uh ir> 
i.lhaj|]kak:u- un ko bulno ua diyd: ki 
utibori uc ua palicliand, kiwuli Masih 
hai. 

42 Aur jab din hiiA, wuh nikalkar 
ek wirdne men gayd : aur log use 
dhundlitc hue ub pia do, aur u»e rokd, 
ki un ke piw ae na jde. 

43 Par us ne unbon kahd, Mujhc 
i-.avur hai ki aur sliahron men bhi 
Kbudd ki bddshihat ki khusb-klia- 
bari dtin; kyimki main ia hi Jiye 
bheji gayd. 

44 Aur wuh JnJil ke 'ihidatkhdtion 
mes nianddi kartd raba. 

V BA'B. 

A ISA' hild, ki jab Khudd ke kaldm 
auune ko log us par giro parto 
the, wuh Ganncsarat ki jhiJ ke kinare 
kbuni tbd, 

2 Aur ub ne jhil ke kiuare do kSsh> 
ti lagi dekhi: par machlwe un par 
se utarke apne jal dbo taha the. 

3 Ue dc un kishtion meri se ok par, 
jo Shama'un ki thi, eharhko us uc 
ilarkhwdst ki, ki kamire sg tbori bata 
le cLalo. Aur wuh baithkn logon ko 
kishti par ae ta'lim deno lagd. 

4 Aur jab kalam kar chukd, to 
Shama'un se kahd, ki Gahre men le 

bal, aur tum alukiir ke liye apne jal 
dalt>. 

5 Sharua'Gn ne jawab men ub ae 
kahd, ki Ai SAbib, ham ne adri rit 
miliiiiit ki, par kuchh na jiakru: ma- 
gar tera karue se jdl ddltd biin. 

6 Aur jab unhon nc yih kiya, tu 



Eh mvjlfy M I.U'Q 

RUbchhlkg k;i bara gol gber iyi: aisa 
ki uu ka jal plmtiu; laga. 

7 Tab uuhon n*; apne sathfon ko, 
ja diisri kiahti par the. ishara kiyd ki 
Ake un kl madad karun. We ie, aur 
donoj kisktuuj uisi bhardin,ki diibne 
labili. 

8 Shama'on Patrus ne yib dekhkar 
Yifii' ke pdnwon par girku kali d, Ai 
Kliuddwand, meru \>6& se ja; ki main 
gunakgdr hi'm. 

i) Kyiinki un rn&chhlion ko shikdr 
se, jo unhon ne pakri thin, wuh, aur 
wc aab jo uh ke sdth the, hairdn the : 

10 Aur Kahfldt ke beto Ya'qub aur 
Yuharma bhi, jo Shama'un ke eharik 
tli«, hairdn tho. Tab YimV ne Kha- 
ma'riu ko knhd, Mat dar; is dam se 
iti admtog ka Khikdr-karnewaJd bogd, 

] 1 Wc kishtion ko kanaro par 
kliineh l!te, aur wab kuchh ehhorfee 
uh ke pichbe chale. 

12 4 Aur aifia liud,ki wuh ek shahr 
rnen t h d, aur, dekko, ki ok mani ne, 
jo knrli w; bhara, thd, Yiuu' kodekha, 
aur mim h ke biiul girke us ki minnat 
karke kaha, ki Ai Khuddwand, agar 
tu cMlic, mujhe changa kar sakti hai. 

18 Uh uo bdth barhdyd, aur yih 
kabkar uae chlu'ni. Main chdhtd hun 
ki tii pak naf kiyd jde. Aur wunliiu 
us kdWh jatdrahd. 

K Aur us ne un MkM ki, ki KWi 
*p mal kali : baiki JifcW apne ta,in 
kabin ko dikbld, aur jniaa Musa ne 
faukm kiya hai, apne pak sdf houe kl 
■piriiiirii kar, ta ki un par gawdhi ho. 

15 Lekin us kd ziyada cbarchd 
phaild: aur bahut se log jam'a Inii-, 
ki us k( aunen, aur us ke hath m apui 
bimariutj n onange kiye jdwerj. 

lb f i'ar wuh liaydban uicrj alag 
jake raba, aur du'a mai.gtA tbd. 

17 Ek din ai.ia hiia, ki jah wuh 
ialLm do raba thd, kai Farisl aur 
i.liari'at. ke sikhlanewalo Jalil ki bar 
ek bftStt, aur Ynhiidiya, aur Yaniea- 
Um ae iike pd» Uilhi: ihe: aur Khu- 



A', V. nhhat fidna. 

ddwand ki ip'iwat unhen clnmga kanu 1 
ku maujud thi. 

18 U Aur, dekho, ki kai mard ek 
shakbs ko, jiso jhole ne mara thi, 
eharpai par lae : aur ohahte the ki 

o andar idke us ke dge rukhen ; 

19 Par blnr ko sabab ae andar le 
jdne ki rah na pai ; tab kothe par 
ubarh gaye, anr khaprail k;itl;n un 
cbdrpii samet bich men Yiaii' ke &ge 
latkd diya 

'ZO TJb ne nn ka imdn dekhkar iue 
kahd, ki Ai mard, lere gunah mu'al 
hde. 

21 Tab faqih aur Fanai soehne 
lage, ki yih kaun hai, jo kufr bakta 
hai ? Khudi ke siwd kaun gundhon 
ko mu'df kar aak la hai '/ 

22 Tab Yisn' ne uu ke kliiydl dar- 
ydft karke jawih men un se kaha, ki 
Tuni apue dilon meij kytt soobte ho? 

23 Kaun ziyada dsan hai, yih kah- 
nd, ki Tere guuah mu'df biie ; ya ytli 
kahni, ki Utli, aur chal? 

24 I^kin 'td ki tum jano, ki lbn i 
A'dam ko zamin |iar gundhon ke mu- 
'df karno ka iklitiyar hai, (u s ne us 
jhole ke mdre hiie ko kahd,) ruam 
tujhe kahta hiin, Utb, aur apni t:li,it- 
pai lekar apne ghar ja. 

"5 Aur wuh jbat un ke dge utha, 
jis par para tba, uso lekar K hudsi 
ki ta'rif kart'd hud apne ghar chal» 
gayi- 

26 Tab un sab he hosh jdte rahe, 
aur Khuda ki ta'rif karne la.ge, aur 
bahut ilarko bole, A'j ham ne bare 
acbambhe dekhe. 

27 ^ Aur in bdtorj ke ba'd wuli 
bdhar gayd, aur Lewi ndin ek mali- 
Miil-lciiewdle ko chanki par baithe de- 
kha : aur uso kaha, Rfure piciihe d. 

28 Wuh sab kuchh chhorke utha, 
aur U« ke plchhe chald. 

29 Aur Lewi ne apna ghar men us 
ki bar! ziyatat ki : aur walidn maii- 
Bvll-lenewdlon aur auron ki, jo ub ke 
,*dth kliaiie baithe tbe, hari bbir thi. 



Jiot.a niTakhve h'i m 



LU'QA', VI. Farition ko matdmal terna. 



KO Tab wahAij ke fiiqihon aur Fa- 
risknj ne us ke shagirdon ae takrir 
fe&rke kahi, ki Tum kyi'in niahsiil- 
Viirwiikrtj mir guaabgfiroB ke sith 
khaie pite ho? 

31 Visti' ne jawab Tnon unben kahi, 
Hhrtlu-chftugon ko hakim darfcto na- 
luri, baiki bimaron ko. 

32 Main ristbiw>2 ko taiba k<- 
Rye hulauu nahin iyi, baiki gunah- 
|p2Bg k... 

'■'•'■i H Aur uuhon tie us se kahi, ki 
Yuhanua ke «Ingini k y u n aksar roisa 
raklite aur d u 'a mangte hain, aur isi 
lainii Farisioii ke shiginl bhi; par 
Un khite pito hain? 

34 Us tie u n se kahi, Kyi tata ba- 
raiiuu ku, jab tak dnllia un ke sith 
lai, ihb rakkwi snkte ho? 

;i. r i I'ar »t din aweijsri-, ki dulhi nti 
sc judi kiyii j&og* ; nu dinun BWn, wc 
alkuia rOM rakbunge. 

36 ^ Aur us m; un se ek masai bhi 
kahi ; ki Koi purine kapre par nayo 
kapre M tukra kicke paimtod nahin 
lagita; nahiij to, wuh naye ko pharta 
hai, aur naye kapre ki paiwand pnr- 
fen H ui'i btd n.iiiiij khata. 

37 Aur nayi mai purani mashkon 
nien koi nahin bharti; nahin to, nayi 
mai maslikon ko phirke liah jaegi, aur 

Mii barliid hon^i. 

38 Italki nayi mai nayi masliki _ 
iiK'ti vakhni chahiye; ki donon bftchi 
rahetid. 

3it Aur purani .pike kof lisi dam 
nayi nahin chdhti: kyiinki kakui hai, 
ki I'uriai bihtar hai. 

VI UA'B. 

AUR dnsre bare eabt ko yiin hni, 
ki jad wuh khetun ke bicb se 
jati tha, u* ke shagiid bal<;n torkar, 
aur hathon ae malkar, khine lage. 

2 Tab baV.e Farision ne anbej ka- 
hi, Tum kyiin wah karte ho jo sabt 
ke diaorj men kami rawa nahin? 

3 Yteti' bb unhen jawab meg kahi, 
Kvd Mm ne itua nahin parhi. jo 

81 



Daiid ne kiyii, jab wuh aur us ke b&- 
thi bhiikhe the; 

4 Wuh kyiijikar Khudi ke ghar 
mert gaya, aur nnzr ki rnlian, jo ki- 
hinon ke aiwa trfcre ko k'biui fftwi 
na tha, lekai kbain, aur apnfl sithioii 
ko bhi din ? 

5 Phh U9 IH unliru kaba, ki Ihn i 
A'dam Mtat ka bhi KTm.idwaiul hai. 

6 Aur dusre sabt ko blii yi'iij htU, 
Iri «uli lbidatkWto», men jakn ta'Piui 
dene lagi : aur wahati ek ftdmi tha, 
jis ka dahinii Viath tt£h S»ya tha. 

7 Tab faqih r> Farfd us ki tak tnen 
lage, ki ahayad wnh sabt ke dln 
clianga kare, lo us par faryid karne 
ka liaijw pawen. 

8 Tar us ne im ke kbivalon ko jan- 
kar us admi se, jis ka hatii suklia tha, 
kaili, ki Uth, aur bieh men k hari lio. 
Wuh uth khari hui. 

9 Tab yisi'i' De unheij kahi, Main 
tum ae ek bit piichbialiun ; ki Sabi. 
ke din kyi kami rawa liai y hhnla 
karna, ki bttc4? jari baobaoa, ki jin 
mama ? 

10 Aur un Bab ki taraf dekhke us 
admi se kahi, Apna haid pfialla. Us 
DC aiwa kiyi: aur us ki hatii diare ki 
raonind thangi ho gayi, 

11 Tab we sab diwanagi se bbarke 
ipas meri kaiine lage, ki Ilam Yisu' 
ke sith kyi karen 'f 

\2 Aur un diiuiri men aisi hui, ki 
wuli jiabir par du'i m&ngno ko gayi, 
aur Khud'i se du'i m&EgCB mm r;it 
bitii.' 

13 T Aur jab dln bui, us ne apno 
shdginlon ko pas buhikc un men se 
barah ko chuni, aur un ki iiam rasiil 
rakhi ; 

14 Ya'no, Shama'nit, fjis ki nira 
Patrus bhi raklii,) aur ub ke bhii 
Aiuiryji.-, Ya'uub aur Yiihanni, Fail- 
bua aur Bartfcfilama, 

15 Mati Thumi, Halfi ke bcte 
YaV|iib, anr Shania'un jo Zelotcs kah- 
lata tha, 

F 



Baraku! o la'nat ka zikr. 



LU'QA', VI. 



Mamh kd lown ko 



16 Ya'qiib ke bhdi Yahud&h, aur liye harakat clmlio: jo hnoheg >a- 



Yahuddh Jskariyuti k o, jo us kd pa- 
karwanewala hiid. 



_, tiii ke liye du'd miugo. 
29 Jo tere ek gil par raare, ua ko 



17 5 Aur un ke sdth utarke maidin ! diiard blif (ibcr d.© ; aur jo koi teii 



iiicri k hari hiid; wahdn uh ke ahi- 
girdon kl jamd'at tbi, aur logon ki bari 
bhir, jo sire Yahddiya aur Yaru»a]am, 
aur Siir o Saidii kesamuudar ku kinare 
se un |*is di tlii, ki we 01 ki suuen, aur 
apnl bimdrioii se cbange bon ; 

18 Aur wo bbi, jo napdk riihon se 
duk L pate the, de ; aur cbange hiie. 

19 Aur sab log cbdhte tbe ki uso 
chliuwcn : kyunki otfwat us so nikalti, 
aur nah ko changa karti thi. 

20 T Fbir ua ne apne shagirdon par 
nazar karke kahd, ki Mubarak bo tum, 
jo garib ho: kydgki Khudd ki bid- 
ah iba t tutiiliiiri hai. 

21 Mubarak ho tum, jo ah bhfikhe 
lio: kyiinki duiida boga, Mubarak bo 
tum, jo ab rote ho : kyunki liansoge. 

22 Mubarak bo tiun, jab lbti i 
A 'dam ku liye log tum se kina rakhen, 
aur tumhen kharij kar den, aur ma- 
lam a t karen, aur tuuihdra ndin bura 
janke nikdleii. 

23 Ua din khnsh ralio, aur khushi 
se ucbblo: is liye ki, dekbo, damdn 
par tumhdrd bard badld hai : kyiinki 
uu ke bipdiiloTi ne irnbion ko sdth aisi 
h i kiyd. 

24 Magar afaoa tuui par, jo dau- 
latmaiid 00 1 kyiinki (uni npni tasalli 
pd chuke. 

25 Afson tum par, jo asini» ho! 
kyiinki bhukhe hoge. Afsoa tum par, 
jo ab hanato bo! kyuuki {jam karoge, 
aur rooge. 

2C Afsos tum par, jab sab log tum- 
ben bbald kabcn! kyunki un ke bdp- 
dade jnutho uabiuu w aisa lii suluk 
kartu the, 

27 f Par tumben jo sunteho, main 
kabtd hiin, ki Apne dushnianon ko 
piyar knro ; jo tum aa kina rakhon, uu 
k;i. l-kalii, karo; 

28 Jo tumben la'uat karen, un ke 

82 



qabd lewe, kurt-a lone se bhi mau'a na 
kar, 

30 Jo koi tujh se feuchh mdnge, 
use de; aur ua so, jo teri mal ie, pliir 
niat mang. 

31 Aur jaisd tum cbdbte bo ki log 
tutn se karen, tum blii uu se waisii iii 
karo. 

32 Aur agar tum unhrn, jo tumben 
piydr knrte hain, piydr karo, (■> tum- 
haid kyd ihsin hai? kyunki gunahgir 
bbi apne piydr- kar newdlon ko piydr 
karte hain. 

33 Aur agar tum un kd, jo tumhdrd 
bhald karen, bbald karo, to ttnnhara 
kyd Diadu hai? ki gunahgdr blii yihi 
karte hain. 

34 Aur agar tum unhen, jin bo phir 
panu ki ummed hai, qan do, to tum- 
hdrd kyd ihsdn hai V kyunki gunahgir 
bhi gimahgdron ko qare dete hain, ta 
ki u» ki badli pawen. 

35 Pas apne dusbmanon ko piydr 
karo, aur bhald karo, aur phir pane ki 
ummed ua rakhke qarz do, to tumhard 
badia bara hogd, aur tum Kbudd 
Ta'dla ke famud hoge: kyiinki wuh 
Qi-tlmkK>Q aur tshari'ron ]iar bbi 
mihrbdn hai. 

36 Paa, jaisd tuinhdrii Bdp rahim 
hai, tum rahim ho. 

37 'Aib na lagdo, to tum par bbi 
'aili lagayd na jdegd: aur mujrim ua 
thahrrio, to tum mnjrim na thahrde 
i'ioge : mu'df karo, to tuui bhi mu'df 
kiye jaoge: 

38 Do, to tumben bhi diyi jdegd; 
aebchbd uapiii dab dib, aur hild hi- 
Idko, niunh-a-muijli girld Inid bharke, 
lumhdri god meu denge. Kyunki jis 
paimdnt se tum napte ho, usi se tum- 
iiiru liye bhi ndpd jdegd. 

39 Phir us ne un se ek tamail blii 
kalii, ki Kyd aiuiha amlhe ku ruh 



tallm 'lemi. LTT'QA' 

dikha sakti lini? kyd we dotion garhe 
mori »!t girenge? 

40 Bhagird apne ustdd se bard 
nahin: baiki jab taiydr hud, apuc 
«atid Kii hogd. 

41 Aur us linke ko, Jq tere bhdi ki 
Ankh mog hai, kydn dekhtd hai, par 
ns kimli par. jo teri ankh mon hai, 
iiahiu kiiiydl karti? 

42 Ya tt'i kymjkar apne bhai ko 
kali Faktii, ki Ai bhai, ruh, yih tinka, 
j" teri ankli mon hai, main nikal diiii. 
par us kdndi ko, jo teri ankh men hai, 
n;ihiij dekhtd? Ai riyakiir, puhlu lis 
kdudi ko apui ankh men un nikal, tab 
h'l oi tiuke ko, jo tcre bhai ki ankh 
men hai, achchhi tarah dckhke nikal 
sakegd. 

43 Kyunki achchhe darakht men 
burd phal nnhin lagtd: aur na bure 
darakht men achchhi phal lagtd, 

44 Pas har ck darakht apne phal 
se pahchdnd jatd. Ih liye ki log kan- 
ton se anjir nahin torle, aur na bhat- 
kataiye se angur torte, 

45 Achchhi admi apne dil ke ach- 
chhe kha/.ane so achchhi cliizen ni- 
kaiti hai; aur bura lidini apne dil ke 
buru khazine ee buri rhmfl bahar 
iata : kyiinki jo ilil men bhard hai, so 
hi iminh par at.a hai. 

46 f Aur tum kyfig mujhe Khudd- 
wand, Khudiwand, kahte bo, aur jo 
main kahta hiin, nahin. kartu? 

47 Jo koi inero pds dtd hai, aui 
meri bdten sunkar un par 'amal kar- 
ti hai, main tumben hatdti hnn, ki 
wuh kiK ki niinind hai ; 

48 Wuh us shakhs ki manind hai, 
jin ne ghar banite lu'ie gahrd khodke 
chatdn par new ddli : jab barh ai, to 
dhir us ghar par zor se giri, par use 
hila na saki : kyunki us ki new cbatdn 
|K thi. 

49 Aur wuh, jo sunkar 'amal men 
nahin ldtd, uh shakhs ki manind hai. 
jis ne zamin par be'-new ghar baniyd ; 
aur dhir ua par zor se giri, aur wuh 

83 



VIP. Ek guhim kd sihhaf panti-. 
thal yir pari; aur us ghar ki bari 
barbadi bui. 

TTI RA'B. 

AUR jab wuli iogon ko aprn siri 
biten suni, cliuka, to Kai'ar- 
nahum men iyi. 

2 Aur ek subaddr kd gulim, jo ub 
kd bahut piydrd tbd, bimdri so ruarne 
par thd. 

'A Ua nfl Yiait* ki khabar sunke 
Yahddion ke kai ck buzurgon ku us 
pds bhejkar us ki minnat ki, ki akar 
ub ke guldm ko changd knro. 

4 Aur uuhon m Yisii' k<- pds Ake 
us ki bari iniimnt kurku kahd, ki Wuh 
is liki hai, ki tti us par yili ihsan 
kare: 

5 Kyunki wuh hamili qaum ko 
piydr kartd hai, aur hamdre iiye ek 
'ibadatkhdiia baniyd hai. 

6 Tab YisiV un ko stith chald. Aur 
jab wuh ua ke ghar se dor na thi, 
subaddr ne doston so us pd* kahli 
bheji, ki Ai Khuddwand, taklif na 
kar : kyunki main is Idiii nahin, ki td 
miTi CLWial talfl awe: 

7 Isi sabab main ne apne ta'in Ijlii 
is liiq na jand, ki tere pis Aiiti j airf 
kali de, to inera olihokrd cbangi nogd, 

8 Kyunki main bhi diisre ke ikh- 
tiydr meQ hrtrj, aur sipdhi mere hukm 
men hain : jab ek ko kahti hiin, Jd, 
wuh jati hai; aur &Un ko, A', wuh 
dti hai ; aur apne guldci ko, ki Yih 
kar, wuh kartd hai. 

9 Yisu' ne yih sunkar ta'ajjub kiyi, 
aur phirke u n logon rb, jo us ke 
pichho dte the, kab:i, Main tum se 
kahti lilin, ki Aiad bari iman Israel 
men bhi na piya. 

10 Aur we,Jo hhru'e paye the, jab 
ghar men phir de, to us bimdr gulam 
ko chaagd ))Ayd. 

11 % Aur diisre din aisd hiid, ki 
wuh Xlin ndm shabr ko rawdua hda ; 
aur ua ke bahut se «hdgird aur bari 
bliir us ke sith thi. 

[ 12 .iad wuh us skalir ke phitak kt 



J' i), h «r. n iiii. ki baiat. LU'QA 

nazdik palmiicha, to dckho, «k rminla 
k" bdhar leiate tbe, .i" apni mi k A, 
k) Injwa tbi, ikiautd bebt thd: aur 
riuhi ke bahut sc log ua ke Baih 
tllS. 

13 Aur us ko dekhke Khudawand 
ko us par rahm dyd, aur use kaha, 
Mat ro. 

14 Aur pAfi ake tdbit ko chbiid ; 
aur utMnewale tlialiar gaye. Tali us 
Ot kaiti, Ai jawau, main tujh se kahtd 
hiin, Uth. 

1"j Aur wuh miirda uth bahha, nur 
bolne lagd. Aur us uo uso KU ki mi 
ko sompa. 

16 Aur sah ilar gnyc, aur Kliniki ki 
ta'rif karke bo'le, ki liard nabi ham 
m u utkii; aur Khuda ue apne logoti 
pai Bazar ki. 

17 Aur us ki yili bal sdre Yahtidiya, 
aur tamani aspds ke nmlk nien phaili. 

IH Aur Yubaiind ke shdgirdon ue 
u.*o in sab bdton ki khabar di. 

19 ^ Aur Yi'ilmuna ne apnn sha- 
iziuhm men se do ko bulakar SW ke 
pds kabid bhcjd, ki Kya jo anewdld 
thd, ti'i hi liaiV yii ham diisrc ki rdh 
takeij 'l 

20 l.'n nuurdoB ne uh pas jake kahd, 
ki Yilbanua baptisma-deiiLwsLle ne 
ham nc tere pas kabid bheja, ki Wuh, 
jn duewdla t ha, ti'i hi hal? yd hajii 
diate ki idh taken? 

21 Us EO ufii gbari bah u ton ko 
bimdrioii, aur baldon, am' had rulujn 
.se, chiiuga kiyd; aur bahut H amilum 
ko iokhai 

22 Aur YisiV ne jawab nWD un M 
kabd, ki Jake jo tum ue dekha aur 
nini Yuhanna M kabo, ki Audbe 
dyklii.d luiiti, lamire chalte hain, korbi 
ohange hota kain, bahire sunte latin, 
murde jilae jate hain, garibon ko 
khu&hkhabari sunai jdii bai. 

23 Aur mubarak wuh bai, jo icujh 
se thnkar ua k bau. 

24 T Jab we, jinhiij Yiilmmiii CM 
bhcja tha, gaye, lab \"n>\\' Yuhauuaki 

84 



VII. Us pir Masih ki gnwahi, 

ibdhat logon so kahne lagi, ki Tum 
jaiifral mm kya dekhne gaye? Kyd 
ek aarkandd, jo hawa se biltd hai ? 

25 Phir tum kyd dekhne gayo? 
Kyd ek mard, jo rniilaiui kapre pahine 
hai? Dekho, \vo, io'umdaposhak ]>a- 
binte, aur 'aish nw;n gunrdn kartw, 
lnidshalum ke niabalion meti hain. 

20 Phir lum kyd dekhiuj ^ayc ? 
Kyd ek nabi ? Haii, Bttdjj lum a« kali- 
td hiiij. baiki nabi se bard. 

ih wiihi hai, jis ki bdbat likhd 
iLai, ki Dekh, main apnu rasul ko tere 
age bhejia hun, jo teri rdh ko tere dge 
durust karega. 

L!K KyMnki main tum so kalitd blin, 
ki Un men se jo 'auraton se paida huo, 
Yubaiind bajitiMiiianliJiicwalu ao koi 
nabi bara nabin : Ickiii jo Khudd ki 
ii;i'isii:iii:ii. m c n ehtiot^ hai, us so hara 
hai, 

2Vi Aur sah Iflgog ne Rinike, aur 
mahnuJ-lonewdloii ne Khmia ko sach 
nianko, Ytihannd se haptisma liyd. 

30 Par FarisfOD aur shun'at-sikb- 
luuewdhm 110 apni nishat Khudd ke 
irada ko ndchi'z janke us se bapiisma 
ua liyd. 

SI *[ Aur Khudawand nekahd, Pas 
is zamane ke logon ko ki< Re ui>h.it 
di'm, aur kis ki mdtiind kahun? 

li^i We im larkon ki mdnind baiQ, 
jo bazdr men baithke ek diisre ko 
pukarkur kalite, ki Ham nc t u nih si rc 
liye baijsli bajai, aur tum ria ndche ; 
aur hain ne tuvnhdre liye nidtaiu kiyd, 
par tum na roe. 

38 Kyiinki Vdliannd liaptisma-de- 
newald dyd, jo oa roti khatd, aur ua 
inai piki thd: aur tuui kahio ho, Us 
par t.-k shiiitdu hai. 

ii4 ]l»u i A'dam dyd, jo khdtd pird 
hai ; aur tum kahte ha, ki Dekho, ok 
li.irii l.hiui aur mai-khor, aur mahsiil- 
leuuwiloy aur gunahgaron kd dost 1 

36 l':u hikmat apue Bab larkon se 
taadk pdti, 

Sfi 1 l'hirek Farid m-us se'arzki, 



At<mh lec jyinwon par LU'QA' 

ki Mere sath khd. Aur wuh Farisi ku I 
ghar jdke khane baitlui. 

37 Aur, dekho, us «h alir men ekj 
'aurat, jo gunahgdr thi. jab jAiia ki! 
wiih Furi.si ke ghar khano baitki hai, 
sang i marmar ke 'itrddn dipij 'm- l:ii, 

38 Aur wuh piehhe pdnwon ke [jas 
kiwi tlii, aur ro roke ausii M us ke 
pdnw dhone lagi, aur aptie sir ke balon 
■e poochhks ua ke pdnwon ko shauq 
M ohuma, aur 'itr nmJa. 

39 Aur iiB Fariai ne, jis ne ua ki 
da'vvat ki thi, yih deklikar dil men 
kaha, ki Agar yih nabi ln.ta, to jdntd 
ki yih 'aurut, jo use chhuti hai, kaun 
alir kaisi hai : kyunki gntiahgar hai. 

40 Yisu' ne use jawdb mag kaha, ki 
Ai Shama'un, main. tujh se kuuhh 
kaha chahta h d n. Ua ne kaili, Ai 
Ustad, k a h. 

41 l".k shnkhfl ke do gandar the : 
ek pan sau diuar ka, dusra padias 

ki. 

42 Par jab un ko ada karne ka 
maudiir na thd, donon ko haklirtli diya. 
So kah, un mag ae kaun us ku ziyada 
piydr karega? 

18 Bhaaut'nn ne jawab mag kahd. 
Hari danist- meu wuh, jiseua mr/.iyada 
bakhshd. Tnb us ne use kaha, Ti ne 
titik fmsal kiya. 

44 Aur us 'aurat ki taraf mutawaj- 
jih lioku Shama'nn se kaha, Tii ia 'au- 
rat ko dekhta hai? main tere ghar 
aya, tii ne mujhe pan w dhune ko pani 
tia diya : par is ne iuere pdnw du.-wn 
sc Jhoe, aur apue air ke balon se pon- 
chhe : 

45 Tfl ne mujh ko na chumi : |iar 
ia no, jab se main aya, mere pari w 
shauq m chdmnd ua chhord : 

46 Td ne mere sir par tel na mala : 
par is ue mero panwoij par 'itr mala. 

47 Is liye main kahti hi'm, ki Us 
ke gundh jo bahu t hain, mu'af hue ; 
kyunki us ne bahut piyar kiya; par 
jis ke tlwre uiu'af hue, wuh thori pi- 
yar karta. 



, VIII. t Hr mah.'i. 

48 Aur un 'aurat se kaha, Tere 
gunih uiu'af hue. 

49 Tad we, ju us ke sath kasino 
baithe the, dil nien kalmc lage, ki Vih 
kaun hai, jo guuah bhi uiu'af karta 
hai? 

50 Par US ne 'aurat ko kahd, Tere 
iman ne tujhe bachdyd; «alamat chali 

j*- 

VIII BA'R. 

AUR us ke ha'd ynn hud, ki wuh 
shahr shahr aur gdnw gdnw jd- 
ka uianaili kaila, aur Klimia ki bid- 
skdliat ki kliushkhabari deta Uni: aur 
WB barah us ke sdtli the, 

2 Aur kitni 'auraten, jo had riilmu 
aur biriiariun se changi h di thin, Mari- 
yaui, jo Magdalini- kahlati thi, jis ee 
sat deo nikal gaye the, 

3 Aur Yuanna, Herodis ke diwan 
Ki'i/.a ki jord, aur Kiisanna, aur bahu- 
teri aur, jo apne nidl se us ki khidmat 
kaiti thin. 

4 "J Aur jab liari bhir Mi. aur bar 
shahr ke log us ke ]>as dte the, us ne 
tamsil men kahd : ki 

5 Ek kisdn bij bone gaya; aurbotfl 
waqt kuchh rdh ko kinare giri; aur 
wuh raunda gaya, aur asindn ki chiri- 
yuTj m; uML't'hug liya. 

(i Aur kuchh ehatan par giri ; aur - 
■gka siikii gaya, kyuijki use tari na 
[lahuiidii. 

-7 Aur knehh kautim nteg giru ; 
kati ton ne sith barhke use dal>d liya. 

8 Aur kuchh tchehhi Eamin mag 
gira, aur ugke sau gima phala. Yili 
kahke \ts ae pukiri, ki Jise sunne ke 
Itiiu hun, sune. 

9 Us ke shagirdon ne us se piichha, 
ki t'ih tamsil kva Hai ? 

10 Us ne kahd, ki KhudA ki Md- 
shahat kd hhcd jdnnd tunihen diyi 
gayd hai : par autou ka tamsil mag; 

;ki wedekhtehue nadekhen, aur nuote 
hoe na i-amihen. 

11 TuBunt yih hai: Mj Khuda, ki 
k aki i u hai. 



Bij-b&neitH&e kl tamsil. LCQA' 

12 Jo rdh ke kindre hain, \ve hain 
ki (iimtfi hiliri : tab Shaitan ake ia ka- 
lam ka un ke SU so nikiil la jati hai, 
t,i k i aisd na liu k i iman ldke najat 
piwao. 

13 Aur chntan pnr ke we hain, ki 
jab kaJam ko smitc hain, to kbushi H 
tjabul kar lete liain, lokio jar uahiii 
rakhta ; kuehb diu j mau ldke d/.mdisu 



ke warit phir jate. 
14 Aui ' 



Aur jo kdnton mcin giro, we 
liiiin ki santa, aur chal nikalte, aur 
fikr, aur daulat, aur zindagdui ki Wah, 
urihen dabd deti hain, aur pfaal ke 
jnkne ki naulut uhln paho&ohtf. 

lo l'sir ju achchhi zamin par gire, 
wo haiti jo achchhe aur BttH ou n 
kalam ko sunke ydd rakklc, aur sabr 
liarku phalte. 

16 i Koi chirag jaldke bartan se 
nah m oliliipatd, na paiang tale rakhtd, 
buiki abirdgdfa pai rakhta hai, ta ki 
andar lini'ivalii iirijilla dekhen, 

17 Kyiuiki kuchii poskida nahm. 
jo Bihlr na hona; aur na koi chhipd, 
Jo maldm na ooe£, mu- khul ua jdegd. 

IB Pan dekiio, ki tum kin tarah riiu- 
tehoi kyrinki jo rakhtd hai, use diyd 
jae^a ; aur jo nahin rakhta, ns se, ju 
apnidanisL men takhta hai, liydjacgd. 

19 % Tab ua ki md aur us ke bhai 
uh pas ae, aur bhir ke sal>ab us ec 
nmldrjdt na karwnkeii. 

20 Aur use khabar htSi, ki teri lari, 
aur tere bhai, bahar kharo tujh.ed.ckha 
chdhta hain. 

21 Us ne jawab mori uuhorj kaba. 
ki Hari mi, aur mere bhai, we hain, 
ki K'lmdii kd kalam sunte, aur us par 
'amal kar t e hain. 

22 ^ Aur ck din aisd hud, ki wah 
aur uh ke shagird naw par chariie, aur 
us ne uu U k;iiia. ki AV», jldl ke par 
<:h;iKn. 'IVo welechale. 

23 Par jab ndw cbali jati thi, wuh 
so gayd; aur jhil pir liari aiidhi di, 
aur naw piini se bharne lagi, aur wc 
khatre men pare. 



, VIII. Matil hi tindM ko roknd. 

24 Tab we us jjas de, aur use jagd- 
ko kahd, ki Sahih, ai sihib, ham balik 
bote. Tab us ne uthke bawa aur pan! 
ki lahron ko dhaiukaya ; to tnam 
gayirj, aur niwA hua. 

25 Aur nn se kahd, Tumhdra iman 
kahan hai '! We dar gnye, aur ta'ajjub 
karke apas men kalme lagi', ki Y ih 
kaun hai ? ki hawa aur paui par hukm 
kurta hai, aur we ua ki maute haim 

26 H Aui" we Gadarinfon ke raulk 
men, jo us par Jaitt ke samlnu? hai, 
naw chrtiako iiahunche. 

27 Aur jub wuh kiuaro par utra, to 
us shahr ka ck mard, jin par muddat 
m deo tlie, aur na kapre pahinta, aur 
na ghar men, baiki qahron ke darnu- 
yan rahta tha, use mild. 

28 Jab us nc Yisd' ko deklia, cliil- 
lake us ke panwon par gira, aur bari 
awdz se kabd, ki Ai Yisif, KbuddTa''- 
dld ke Bete, nmjli ko tujh se kva 
kdni? teri mimiaL karki. liiin, ki iuu- 
jiw dttkh uade. 

20 (Is liye ki wuh us ndpak ruh ko 
liukin kart.il thd, ki is ddmi se nikal 
jd. Kyiinki aksar uee pakan i thi, aur 
harcliand usc Mujitnii aur lierion so 
jakarke khalmrdaii karte the, parwaii 
zanjirM ko tortd thA, aur deo use ba- 
vali.iii i:ieti ilanrat.a thd.) 

30 Tab'Yisii'' ne us se piirhha, ki 
Teri kyd ndm hai? Wuh bola, Tu- 
inan : kydiiki ImliuC deo us par tlie. 

31 Unhot) ne us ki minnat ki, ki 
Iianieri athah garlie men jano ka hukm 
na kar. 

lili Wabdg sl5aroij kd bard gol rwt- 
hdr par ehartd thd: unhoi; ne oa ki 
minimi ki, ki hamen un men jaue de. 
Us ne jane diya. 

33 Aur deo us adm! pe nikalke su- 
aron par charhe : aur gol karare par se 
jhifmerLkud'kardiibgaya. ' 

34 Chardnewale ns hdl ko dekhke 
bhdgc, aur jakc shahr aur ua ki nawalii 
men khabar di. 

| 35 Tab we us hal ke dekhue ko 



fibay&C» ka tk sol nikdlnd. LT"QA', IX. 



Jdirus ki beti kojildna. 



nikle; aur Yisu' ke pis ae, aur us 
ddmi ko, jis se deo nikal gaye the, 
k&pro pahine, aur hoshydr, flrf ke 
panwori ke pil baithd pdyd, aur dar 
gaye. 

30 Tab dekhnewdlnn ne mi ko kha- 
bar di, ki wiili jis lui-ii deo the kis 
taruh changd hiid. 

37 % Aur ri:idarink>a ke ispds ke 
mulk ke sah logon ne us se darkhwast 
ki, ki haradre pas se chald jd; kyuriki 
un men bani, dar paith gaya th&; aur 
wtili niw par charhko phira. 

38 Aur us mard ne, jis par se sha- 
yatiu atar gaye the, us ki minnat ki, 
ki Mujhe apne sdtb. rahne de ; par 
Yisti* ne use rnkhsat karke kahd, ki 

39 Apne ghar ko phir, aur we bare 
kdm.joKhuda ne tere saih kiychain, 
bayan kar. Wuh gayd, aur un bare 
kamera ko, jo YistV ne us ke sdth kiye 
the, tamam nlianr men sunayd. 

40 Aur aisa hiid, ki jab Yisui 1 phira, 
logurj ne us kii istiubal kiya, kyunki 
sab us ki rdb takte m 

41 K Aur, deikko, ki Jainis ndnie 
A shakhs, JO 'ilvidfitklidue kd sardar 
thd, dyd, aur Yisu' ke qadauii'n par 
girke us ki minnat ki, ki Mere ghar 
chal: 

42 Kyunki us ki ik lauti beti, jo 
baras baYah ek ki thi, manis pu ihi. 
Aur jab wuh jaiie laga, log us par gire 

[■■: !■ ■ ., i, 

43 K Aur ek 'aurat ne, jis ku Mmb 
baras se lahu jdri thi, aur apnd sdra 
mal hakimon par kharch kira, pai* kisii 
bo changi na ho saki, 

44 Us ke pichhe dke us ki posnak 
kddaman chhiid; aur usi dam us ka 
lahu bahnd band ho gaya. 

45 Tab Yisu' ne kaha, Kis ne mu- 
jhe dibuai 1 Jab sab inkdr kame lage, 



mujhe chhnd; kyunki main jantdhun 
ki tpiwat mujb mey se nikli. 

47 Jal> us 'aurat ne dekhd, ki 
chhipti naliirj, kampti lu'ii di, aur ua 
ke panwon par girke sab logon ke 
aainhiM use Vmydn kiya, ki kis liye 
chhua, aur kls tarah se usi dam changi 
ho gayi. 

48 Tab hb no use knhd, ki Ai beti, 
khdtir-jam'a rakh, ki tero imdn ne 
i ...■!..'■■ ■ >i 

49 f Aurwuhyih kali rana thd. ki 
'ihadai.khane ke sardar ke ghar so ek 
nu akar use kahd, ki Teri beti mar 
gayi ; Ustad ko taklif na do. 

50 Yisrt' ne mmke jawab BWQ use 
kahd, ki Mat dar: sirf iman ld; wuh 
bach jdegl. 

51 Aur jab wuh us ke ghar ayd, to 
Patrus, aur Ya'qub, aur Yuhanna, aur 
01 larki ke md bdp ke siwa kisi ko 
andar jane na diyd. 

52 Aur sab us ke liye roto pitte 
the; par us ne kahd, Mat roo; wuh 
mar nahiu gayi, baiki soti hai. 

53 We us par hanso, kyunki jdnte 
the lti raar gayi hai. 

54 Magar us ne sab ko nikalke us 
kd hdth pakrd, aur pukdrke kahd, ki 
Ai larki, uth. 

55 Aur us ki nih. phir di, aur wuh 
usi dam u|hi; aur Yisu' nc hukin 
kiyd, ki Use khine ko do. 

5Q Tab us ke md bdp hairdn htie : 
par us ne unhen takid ki, ki yih jo hiid 
kisi se nd kaho, 

IX BA-B. 

U S ne apne bdrah slidgirdon ko 
ikattha karke tiuhe-n sab shai- 
tdnon par, aur litniariuTi ko dafa kamo 
ke liye, qudrat o ikhtiyar liakiishd. 

2 Aur imhen bheja, ki Khuda ki 
bidsfaihat ki matiadi karen, aur bi- 



fatrue aur us ke sdthiun ne kahd, ki maren ko changd karen. 



Ai >i\h\h, Ifig tujh |>ar gire parte liain, 
aur dabae lete, aur t,ii kahta h.ii, ki 
Kis ne mufhfl chhiid? 

46 Par Yisu' ne kaha, ki Kisu ne 



Aur un se kahd, ki Rdh ke liye 
kuchh na lo, na chharian, na jlioH, na 
roti, na rupiya; na ddmi pieblie do 
kurte. 



Itaaulon ko kampar bhrjnt'i. LU'QA' 
4 Aur jal> kisi ghar ineu dakhil lio, 

wahin raho, aur wahin Re rawiua h:>. 
R Aur jnli log tiiiiilun qabul na 

k-.ireij, to u| duUM biliar jike apne 

piijworj ki k hak un par guwilii ke liye 

jliani. 

(i We rawiua hokc liar basti nien 

giutrte, aur liar jaoah khush-khah 

sunate, aur ohnuga karie the. 

7 f Aur ehauth.il ko Mkim Hc- 
roiiis no, jo kuchh Y isii' n e kiyi thi, 
«uni: aur ghabrayi, is liye ki ba'ze 
kahte the, ki Ytihanni murdon mtin 
m ji utha hai; 

8 Aur lia'ze, ki lliyas Kahir hiiii hai; 
aur diiare, ki ek agle nabion oien 

u Lini hai. 

9 Par 1 1 1 1* "lis no kahi, ki Main iic 
Yilbanni ki sir kat (Jala : magar yih. 
jis ki bAbat. aisi liaU.ni Bunti hun, kauu 
bai? Aur cihihi ki um dek h e. 

10 Tf Aur rasiilou ae phirke jo 
kuehli kiyi tb.i uh sc bayan kiyii. 
Aur wnh un ko leke alag Bai t sa i di 
iisinie (dialir ko efc wiraiic mi'ii gSYa. 

11 Aur log jinko ub ko piekhe 
cliale: wuli un ko Khudi ki bidshi- 
hat ki biteri karne lagi, aur jo change 
hone ke uiubtij the, unben changi 
k iya. 

liJ Aurjab din ikbir hone lagi, mi 
binimu iiu iike u st' k:ihii. ki Logon ko 
rukhaat de, ki aspd» ki basti o n aur un 
ki iiawihi im-ii jika tiken, aur khauu 
ki tadlur kareu : kyriuki baui yakin 
wirdne men Lain. 

13 Ua iie un «j krdii, kl Tum hf uh 
k'.> khaui do. Unhoii ne knha, ki 
Haniaro p4s, riwi piuok roti aur do 
BMObhtl ki', kuohh u:diin bui; OMK 
hiu, ham jiko in sab logon ke liye 
kit«U[ iiinl lerj. 

14 Kyiinki we paneh hazir mard 
ke rjarib the, Tab uh ne apne sbi- 
girdon se kaha, ki TJn ko paulidu 
I ii ;..is kl p;tnt karke bit hio. 

15 Unhon neuai tarah kiyi.aur sab 
ko bitbivi." 

'88 



. IX. Sh'ijfirdt-v ki kuini ■•hal rhahiye. 

16 Tab u» ne un pin eh rotfcn aur 
do mschhlion ku Inke, aur aamin ki 
taraf ddchke, un ko barakat di, aur 
torke apue shigirduri ko d iya, ki logon 
ku Age lakhen. 

17 Aur unhon no khiyA, aur aab 
isdda hi>: aur un tukrnn ki, jo mi 
ho baeh rahe, barah tokriin. uthiin. 

18 % Aur yrin bui, ki jab ifua ni- 
rale mendua miugui thA, slid^irtl uh 
k< satli the; uo im un se puohhi, ki 
Log mujb ko kyi kahte hain, ki main 
kauu ban 3 

19 Unhon ne jawab nu-n kahi, ki 
Yiihanna baptifema-drncwiia; aur ha- 
'ze, lliyas; aur diisre, ki ek a^le ua- 
bion se phir uthi hai. 

20 Tab uh no un m kahi, Tum kyi 
kahte ho, ki main kaun luiij? Patvus 
ne jawab n iuri kahi, ki Kiiuda ki 
Masili. 

21 V.h no un so tak i d ki, aur fitr- 
miyi, ki vih kisti Be na kaho; 

22 Aur kahi, ki Zanir hai ki Tbn 
i A'dam bahut dukh Hkbe, aur buzurg- 
on aur sai-dir kabinnn aur fin|ilioii w 
radd kiyi jiio, aur mari jie, aur ti.sre 
uiii ji ulin.-. 

23 *j Aur uh no sah ne knhi, ki 
Agar koi clialie ki mere pichbe awe, 
to ftpoi iukar karu, aur apni galib liar 
[■o» ntliakt* iiii'ri [lairaui kara. 

24 Is liye jo koi chibe ki apni jin 
bnchiwc, uae kbocgi : par jo koi mere 
liye apni jin khwga, wulii We bath;i- 
wegi. 

25 Kyiinki idmi ko kyi laida,agar 
tamim dunya ha.-il kare, par apni jin 
kUo do, yi wuli barbid bowe ? 

26 Kyiinki jo luujk se aur meri 
biton se sharmiegi. Iba i A'dani bhi, 
jab apne aur apne Bip aur pik lirirth- 
ton ke jalai ke sitb awegi, ua Be 
sharmiegi, 

27 Par main tum se sauh kahtd hiin, 
ki Ba'n un nien se yahan khnre hain, 
jo na niarenge jab tak ki Khudi ki 
bfdsbUutt ua dsKoen. 



Ek buri nih ka LfQ 

28 ^ Aur in M ton ke roz a^h ek 
ba'd aisii lniii, ki wuh Pitrua aur Yii- 
hauna aur YVqiib ko sith leko pahat' 
par diri maiigno gaya. 

29 Atir ilu';i maiigte lii aksi ln'ia, ki 
uh ke eh ih re ki surat badai gayi, aur 

bak mil'ed barriiq ho gayi 

30 Aur, dekho, do mani, jo Musa 
aur Uiyas the, ua se gnftogti karte 
the; 

31 Yih jiiliil men dikhii diye, aur 
uh ke nur iio ka, jo Y arti .salam rnerj 
waqi' linu*: par thi, atftt kari* thi.'. 

32 Hanr Patrus aur u» ku sithi 
nind H bhare the: jab jige, U> ua ke 
jalai ko, aur un do niardon ko jo u& 
H Nitli klmre tim, dek ha. 

33 Aur aiaa hiia, ki jad we ns se 
jmia hoUfl UgB, Patrus ue Yisu' se 
kaha, ki Ai sihib, hamari yahan 
rahni nehchhi hai : tin dera banawen ; 
ek tere, aur ek Musi, aur ek Iliyis ke 
liye: aur nahin jin t a t ha, ki kya 
kahti hai. 

34 Wnh yih kanta hi thi, ki badai 
iya, aur un par saya k iya : aur badai 
men jdiie se we dar gaye. 

3~5 Aur badai se ek awiz nikli, ki 
YVh mori piyiri lleti hai : us ki 

BUllO. 

3fi Aur iwaz ato hi, Yisii' ko akela 
piyi. Aur we chup rahe, aur unhon 
ne, jo kucbh dekili thi, uu dinoti men 
ki.-u as ua kaha. 

37 1 Auraisa lnia, ki jabwepabar 
se utre, to dilsre diti ek hari bhir usu 
a miU. 

38 Aur, dekho, ki ck ir.ard ne bhir 
men se chillikc kaba, ki Ai ustad, 
main teri tniiuiat karta luirj, ki mere 
bete par nazar kar; ki wah meri ik- 
lan la hai : 

39 Aur, dekli, ek ruh OM pakapi 
hai, aur wuh ekiek chilliti hai; aur 
ua ko iilsiL aiuthiti, ki wuh kaf hhar 
lata hai, aur us ko kuehalke ua pai se 
niushkil se utarti hai: 

40 Aur main ue tera sbftgUdog ki 



»9 



& , IX. niHhui. 

minnat ki ki use nikilen; lukai wo 
ua sakmu 

41 Tab Yisii' as jawab men kaha, 
ki Ai be-iuian o terai pusht, main kab 
tuk tumhaie satli raliuiigi, aur Uim- 
hdri bardisht karungi'? Apne bete 
ko yahtin 11 

42 Jab wuh iti thi, dao ue use pa- 
takke aiuthaya. Par Yisii' no us napik 
nih ko dbamkayi, aur larkokueliau^.i 
kiyi, aur use us ko bap ko aompa. 

43 T Aur nah Klmda ki buzur$;i 
dekbkc liairan hue. Jab sab, un obi- 
B0Q ke sabab jo Yisii' uo kin, ta'ajjub 
karte the, ua ne apuo shagirdon se ka- 
ha, ki 

44 Tum in batorj ko apne kanon 
men rakhuj kyiinki lbn i A'dam \^,u 

lu niiili in-';; hamUa kiy.i i^eoA 

45 Par we isbat konaaanijhejiaiki 
wuh uh se chhipi thi, ki we USB dary- 
aft na karen : aur is bat ke pik'hhuu 
men us we darte llie. 

46 ^ Tiiir un ke darmiyau yih 
bnbs u(hi, ki ham men sab se bara 
kaun hai V 

47 Yisii' ne un ke dilon kd khiyal 
jiuke ek larke ko liya, aur apne pas 
khara kiyi, 

lr! A i.i r un se kaha, ki Jo is larke 
ko merc nam par o^abul kare, raujliB 
qabul karta hai; aur jo mujhe qabiil 
kare, ua ko, jis no mujhe bueja, qabiil 
karta hai ; kyunki j tiun men sah se 
ehluili hai, wuhi bari hai. 

40 T Yuhanna ne jawab men kalii, 
Ai t-iiliil), ham ne ek shakhs ko tere 
nam se deoii ko uikalte dekhd ; aur us 
ko rok raklia, kyiinki wuh hamaro 
sath pairaui uahin karta. 

.50 Yisii' no us se kaha, ki Uao rok 
na rrtkho, kyiinki jo haniare birkhilat' 
nahiii, bamari taraf hai. 

51 1 Aur aisa hiia, ki jab we din, 
ki jin men wuh lipar uthaya jae, pura 
houe jjur the, Y'ani^ilam ko jane par 
qasdan apna rukh kiya. 

02 Aur us ue apne age [«igam-dt- 



Apnl barai na chahnA. LU'QA' 

ncwalebheje: we iakefctimarioTi kiek 
basti men. ddkhil bd«, ki us ke liye 
taiyiri karen. 

53 Lekin unhon ne uh ko nabul na 
kiyd, kythjki us ka munh Yardaalaiu 
kl taraf jane ko tha. 

54 Us ke shAgird Ya'q(Sb aur Yrt- 
bnimtl M yib dikhkc kaha. ki Ai 
KiiwiawaDi!, kya tii chahui bal ki 
jaisA lliyae ne kiya, liam hukm karen 
ki tinta se ag nazil howe, aur unhen 
jalawe ? 

86 'lab ijs ne phirko unhen dham- 
kaya, aur kaha, Tum n&hin ji-nte ki 
tum kaisi rdh ke lio. 

56 Kyt'mki lbn i A'dam logon ki 
jan b&rbad ka.rnenahin, baiki bachaue 
iya. Tacl we dilari baatf ko chale. 

;>7 % Aur nlsal bM, ki jati wo rah 
mi'ij ciiali) jate the, kisu ne us-o kalia, 
Ai Khudawand , jahan t n jdtA hai, 
main tero piclihe tJj.ih'iii^A. 

58 Yisii' ne oee kubis, ki Lomrion 
ku liye iDjindt'ij bain, aur ehiriyon ke 
liye basere ; par lbn i A'dam ko Uni 
jiynh iiiibiij ki apna air rakhe. 

59 Phtr us ne diisre M kaha, Mere 
pichhechal. Uh ue kahA, Ai Ktmda- 
wand, mujhe nikhsat de,ki pahle jSke. 
apne bap ko garitn. 

60 Visu' ae oh fcnhS, Jane do, ki 
murda apne murdon ko gAfBB : pai" l-i'i 
jako Khudi ki bicUh&hftt ki khabar 
dc. 

61 Dfare ne bhi kaha, ki Ai Khn- 
ddwauri, main tero pielibe chah'miia ; 
lekin pdhle jsnijhe jiiiip dc, ki apne 
ghar ke loeog se rukhsnt bo Aiiu. 

62 Y'isu' ne uko kaha, ki Jo koi 
SpnA haik bal pai riikhfcn pkth&B 
dekhta hai, wub Kbuda ki hAd.shahut 
ke laiq nabi y. 

" X BA'n. 

U S ke ba'd Khiidawand. ne eattar 
aur inuqarrar kiye, aur apne 
samhne bar nlin.br aur ha.r jnjrah men, 
jahin a;.i jaya cbAbtA tha, utiben do do 
karko bbeja; 
90 



.', X, Satlar aur wd'iz chuntip. M, hd?. 

2 Aur un ne kaha, ki Fas! to hahut 
bai, par rnazchir thore : is liye khet ke 
m pf i k ki niinnat karc, ki mazdtir apne 
khet men. bhoje. 

3 Tum jAo; dekho, main tumben 
barron ki iniiniiid hlieriyi .'ii imin bhtjta 
hdn. 

4 Na batiU le jtio, na jbnli, na 
jutiiin : aur rah inen kisi ko salam na 
kij'yo. 

5 Aur jisgbar unmilakliil bo, pable 
kahu, ki Is pw ku ul£m. 

fi Airnr «alauiali ka beta wahan 
b'"^a, tmuharii salam us par thahr- 
e;:a : nwliin U>, tutubart tara/ phir 
awe^a. 

7 Aur usi ghar men Taho, aur jo 
kiichh m ki taraf x<; uiile, khio, pio: 
kyi'inki mnzduri mamliir ki baqq hiu. 
Gh;ii' gbar n pWra. 

H Aur jin «bJkbr men dakhil bn, aur 
m tniiilu'ii <.]nbul karen, jo kuchh 
bonoMn saiubne rakha jae, khan : 

9 Waban ke biuiaron ko chanpS. 
karo, aur un se kaho, ki Khuda ki 
Mrkbabat tiunbare nazdik di. 

10, Aur jis shahr men ki diikin! bo, 
aur we tumben oobil na karen, to ba- 
har jake wainln ki sarakon par kaho, 
ki 

1 1 Is frard tak, jo tumhare slcihr se 
ham par pari, ham tum par jhAr dete 
hain : magar yib jano, ki Khuda ki 
MdsbAhat tUTahAro tuunik ai bah 

li; Maig tum se kahti Mrj, ki Us 
din Sadiim kd hdl us nhahr ki bania- 
bftt riyida ipihil bardfcbt. ke hogi! 

13 Ai Kor&ziit, t-ujh jwr afsos ! Ai 
Baitnnida, tujli par afsoK ! kyiinki yib 
karji.ui:Ueij, jo uimliire darmiyan ili- 
khai payin, a^rar Siir o SaidA uien di- 
kbai jatin, to unbon ne tat orhke, aur 
khak mog baithke, kab ka ta'uba kiyi 
hotA. 

14 Ma^ar Riir o Saidd ke liye tum- 
hiiri oi*b»1 'adalat men bardaaht kar- 
iib, :'u-,in hoga. 

15 Aur,ai Kafarnilhtiin, tu jo&sruan 



Vn kd manndi knrke phir 



LU'QA', X. Ek shari'ahhin h'i sum'O. 



tak pahunchAyd gayA hai, dozakh men ,ki hamesha ki zindagi ki waria 



girAyA jin «A. 

16 Jo tumhAri suntA, meri suntA 
hai ; aur jo tumben haqir jantA hai, 
mujhe haqir jAuta hai: aur Jo inujhe 
haqir jAntA hai, nse jia ne mujh ko 
bhejA hai, ha<|ir jAntA hai, 

17 ^ We satUir khusJit ae phir 
Ake kahne lago, Ai Kliudawand, tere 
nani bo Bhayatln bh'i hamArc tahi' 

18 Tab lis ne nn se kahA, Main nc 
Shaitan ku bijli ki mAnind Asman H 
girte dek ha. 

19 Dckho, main ne tam ko sirap 
aur bicbehliii ke raundm; B»r, aur 
dusknian ki sari nudrat par, ikiitiyar 
diyA hai; aur koi kistf tarah tumben 
nuqsAn na pahunchawega. 

W Mugar isi pmr khu.-di na bo ki 
nihen tumhire tahi' hain ; fetaJjtd \- 
liye klmshi karo, ki tumhare iiam 
tfmtm par likhe hain. 

UI 1 Usi ghari Yiku' nc ji men 
khush hokn kahA, Ai BAp, tanin aur 
zaniin ko Kliudawand, main teri ta'rif 
kartA htm, ki tu ne in chiswn ku 
lianaon aur 'oiilniaiKlnn se chliipiiya, 

£ar bachehon par zahir kiya : han, ai 
.ip, ki yiinhi lero huzur men pasan- 
dida hi'ii. 

22 Aur mere BAp ne sab kuchb 
mujhe sorupA hai : aur koi nah i y JAntA 
ki Bela kaun hai.magar BAp; aur BAp 
kau n hai, magar Beta, aur wuh jin par 
Beti zAhir kiya cba'he. 

23 1 Aur shAginhui ki taraf rniita- 
wajjih hoku mi se nirAle men kahA, 
Mubarak we Ankheii, jo yib chJUSD 
dekhtin, ki tura dekhte ho, 

24 Kyunki iiiamtum se kabtA hun, 
ki Bahut se nabion aur badsluilmn m- 
chabA, ki jo tinn dekhte ho, dekheg, 
par na dekhi ; aur jo kuchb. sunte ho, 
HOMO, pai na sunA, 

25 Aur, dekho, ek shari'at-sikhlAne- 
wAla uthfi, aur yih kahke tu ki :i/.- 
niAish ki, ki Ai ustad, main kva karun 

91 



26 Us ne use kahA, ki Shari'at men 
kyAlikhA hai? tii hiu tarah prirhtii hai? 

27 Us no jawAb meri kahA, Tu 
Kliudawand ko, jo tera" Khuda hai, 
apne «Are dil, aur apni lari jan, aur 
apne sarezor, aur apni uari samaib se, 
piyar bar; aur jaiaA Ap ko, waiaa bi 
apne parosi ko. 

28 Us ne use kahA, Tu ne thik 
jawab diyA: yihi kar, to iiogA. 

29 Par us ne yih ehAhke ki apne 
ta,ir_ Hfetbic thahrAwu, Yisu' se kaiiA, 
ki MerA parosi kauu hai? 

30 Yisii' no jawAb men kahA, ki Ek 
ehakhs Yarusalam se IrihA ko utar 
jAtA thA, aur dAktion men jA para. ; we 
use nangA aur ghAyal ka'rke idh-mflA 

Ciuiul' i^iiye. 

3 1 lttifaqan ek kAhin us rAh se ja 
niklA : aur us ko dekhke kiuAre se 
cbalA gayA. 

32 Isi tarah ek Lewf bhi us jagah 
AyA, aur use dekhkar kinAre ne cbalA 
gayA. 

88 Par ek musAfir SAmari wah Ari 
AyA, aur us ko deklike rahm kiyA, 

34 Aur us ke pA« Ake us ke zakb- 
nion ko tel aur riai dhAlko bAnd'ha, 
aur apne jAtiwar pir' sawir karAke 
MarAe men Le gayA, aur us ki khabar- 
dAri ki. 

35 Aur dusre din jab jAne lagA, do 
diuar nikalkar libat hiyaiv ku m;. ■.. t 
kahA, ki Is ki fchabardiri kar: aur jo 
kuobh is se ziyAda kiiarch hugA, main 
phir ake tujlie ada kunilai, 

S6 Ab in tinon meo" se, us ka, jo 
dAkiion men ja parA thA, tu kis ko 
parosi jAntA hai? 

37 Us ne kahA, Us ko, jis no us par 
rahm kiyA. Tab Yisu' ue use kahA, 
Jii, tu bhJ aisA hi kar. 

38 1 Aur aba hiid, ki jab jAte the, 
wuh ek basti men paliuneliA : aur 
Martil» tiAme ek 'aurat ne use apne 
ghar men utara. 



Du'a mtbngne fcd taur. LV QA', XI. Farmon par 'aib lagiuta, 

39 Aur alariyam n;ime us ki ek uthkar uw n, i degii, mugar ua ki U- 

hahin thi, jo Yisd* ke pdrwon ptelfiay&f kesahab uthega, aur jitni dar- 



baithke uh ki kalam sunti tbi, 

40 Bar Martlid ue, bfthut khidmat 
se ghabrai bui, ua ke pas fJse kflht, ki 
Ai Khudiwand, k ya tujha [mrwa B*- 
bin ki mari batin ne niujhe akela 
khidmat iiii-ri chliora hai? «b use kali, 
ki meri madad kara, 

41 Tab Yiau' 06 jawab mon use 
kaha,Martha.aiMartha,tu bahul cMz- 
on ku wastenkrugbiibrahat meii had i 

■lli Par ok dii/. >.aiiir bai : 60 Ma- 
riyam ne wuh achcidia hissa dunia 
bai, jo ua no uber liyd ua jaoga. 
XI BA'B. 

AUR aisa bila, ki wuh pk jagah 
du'a uiangta tbi; jad mang 
chukd, ek 06 U» ki; slitigirdon. meij se 
us ko kahii, Ai Khudiwand, batu ko 
du'a mdngua siklia, jai.-a ki Viihauiia 
n+! apuc slidgiidi>9 ko sikhayi, 

2 Us ue uu s- kaha, Jab tum du'a 
mango. Do kabo, Ai haiiiare Bap, jo 
Amnin par bal, 'i'ere dahi ki taqdis bo. 
Teri bibUhahat awe. Teri nmrad jaisi 
asman par, zaniin par bhi bat awr, 

3 Hamari roz ki roti bar roz hamen 
de. 

4 Aur hainure giuiahon ko bak bah ; 
kyiinki bam bhi bar ek ko, jo hamara 
«jarzdar hai, bakludite baui. Aur haiu- 
erj azmaish mag ua dai; baiki lima 
ko burai ae chhma. 

R Ua ne un se kaha, Tura men, se 
kaun bal jia M ek dost ho, aur wuh 
adbi rdt ku us ke pas jake kabc, ki Ai 
dottj MUJhe titi reli ttdhirdo; 

G Kyiinki mera dos t saiar h lririv 
nas liyi bai, aur nn?re pas kuchh ua- 
bin ki uh ke age rakkiin ; 

7 Aur wuh andar sg jawab mej) 
k.'iiir, ki Hujhe taklif na de: ki ab 
daiwa/.a bumi hai, aur mere larke 
mere eatb btohhaune pai hiin ; main. 
uthkar tujbe do nahin sakta, 

8 Main tum we kahta hiin, Agarcbi 
wub ii sabab ki wuh ua ka dost bai, 

92 



kar hai, use deua. 

9 So main bhi tumben kabta hnn, 
Mango, to luTiiUoy diya jacgd ; dhiiu- 
dbo, to paoge ; kliatkbatao, to tum- 
barc liye k hobi jaega. 

10 Kviiiski bar uk jo BtAogtfl' bai, 
Ifla hai; aur jo dhi'mdbt.-i hai, pita 
hai; aur jo khatkhatata hai, ua ke 
Uye kholdjaega. 

11 Tuiu meu se kauu aisd bap bai, 
ki jab us k& bela roti mauge, use y&t- 
tharde? ya machhii mauge, macbbii 
k t' hadlc use aainp de ? 

12 Ya agar anda mangu, ua ko bicli- 
'■liini de? 

li Pas jab tum bure hokar apne 
larkon ko achchhi ehi'/.uii deno jante 
tto, to wuh Bap, jo asman par bal, 
kitna ziyada un ko, jo ua «e mangte 
hidu. Bab i Quds degi? 

H 1 Aur wuh ek deo ko, jo gnnga 
tba, nU.il t a iba. Aur aisa hua, ki 
jab dco ujkal gaya, wuh gungdbola; 
aur logoii oe ta'aijuh kiya. 

15 Par ba'/on ne un meij ue kahii, 
ki Wuh deiig ke nanlar Ua'al-Kabiib ki 
iiiaitaii ae di'oii ko nikdita bai. 

IB Auroii ne azmaish ke liyc us se 
ek asiuaui uishdn matigi. 

17 Par u» ne un ke kbiydlon ko 
jdnke uu kc kalid, ki Jo jo biidshabut 
apas men tnvrk tiildf holi, wirau lui jait 
hai; aur aisii. liar ok gbar jo apna 
barkbildl' bai, ujar jdtd hai, 

la Pas agUMUnto apoe w khilaf 
ho jac, m n., ki badshdhat kyunkar 
qaim rtihegi ? kyiinki tum kahte bo. 
Main dcon ko Ba'al-Babiib ki madad 

nikilta hdn. 

19 Bliald, agar main deoaj ko Tta'al- 
stabiib ki madad sc uikalta luin, to 
tuinli.'irti bete kis ki madad se nikdlte 

_f i» liye we hi tumhari Insaf 
karenye. 

20B«r agar mam Khudi ki ungli 
we deoti ko uikalta hiin, to be-yhakk 



w 



UJUV, xr. 



z&hiri UU, 



Kliudtl ki baduhahat. tumhire pin 4- 32 Xinawah ko log 'adalat merj is 



[Hkb< 

21 J ab zorawi 

pot ghar ki ehauki de, us ka 
mal b;ti'li;i rahta hai: 

22 Par agar koi uh se zoriiwar us 
par charh awe, aur uao jlto, t» wuh 
sab hat'hyar, jin par us ka bharosa 
tba, ehhin letii hai, aur us ke kir. Ih 
mal ku baut deta hai. 

23 Jo moro sath nahin, mera mu- 
kluilit" hai : aur jo nifire satu. jam'a 
ualiitj karti, so bithrata hai. 

24 ..lab milisi k ruh admi se brihar 
nikalti, tfl siikhi jagahoij rnen aram 
dhuiniliti phirti ; aur jab uahin piti, 
kahti hai, ki Main anoa ghar ko, jis 
«f uikli lidn, phir jaiingi ; 

25 Aur aku KM jhara aur lais pati 



2fi Tab jak«i aur sat ruhen, jo uh se 

W.ltar hain, apne sslih lili hai; aur 

we us meii dakhil lioku wahaii hasti 

hain: aur uh admi ka piuhhla hal 

■ bur» linta hai. 

27 Tf Aur aisa hiU, ki jab wuh yih 
bfttafl kahta vha, ok 'aurat ne bhir 
BMn ae pukarke use kaka, Mubarak 
hiti wuh pet, jis men tu raba, aur wuh 
eliliatian jo Mi ne pin. 

28 Us'iie kaha, Hta, mubarak we 
hain Jo Khuda ka kalam sunte, aur 
use mante hain. 

29 % Aur jab ban bhir hone lagi, 
us ne kahna shurii'kiya, ki Is «amani- 
ke log bure hain : we nkh&ii dhun- 
dhte hain ; par koi nishan un ko oiva 
na jaega, niaga r Ytinaa nabi ka nishan. 

30 Ky utiki jaisa Yunus Nniawah 
ke logon ke liyc nishan htia, usi tarah 
lini l Adam bhi is zamane ke logon 
ke liye hogd. 

31 'Adiilat tncrj dakkhin ki malika 
is zamami k* logon ke Raih ut.hegi,aur 
unhen gunahgar thabrawegi i kyunki 
wuh umfri ke kami re «e Sulaiman ki 
hikmat sunne ii ; aur, dekho, yahAn 
f- k La- ji> Sulaiman n& bara hai. 

i»3 



zamace ke logon ke sath nthengc, nur 
tebal halhyAr bau- ! unhen guunlig;ir thahriwengi;: kyi'mki 
unimu ne Ytinas ki mau Adi se tauba 
ki; aur, dekho, yahan Ydnas ah beri 
hai. 

33 Koi chirag jalakc chliipe makan 
men, ya paimane tale, uahin raklna, 
baiki chiragdan par, ta ki andar jane- 
wale roshni dekhun, 

84 Badan ka cliirag ankii hai : i* 
liye jab teri linkh achohhi hai, to teri 
sara badan nwhaa hai; aur jad bini 
hai, to tera badan bhi anilhera hai. 

35 Pas khabardiir, liafi na ho, ki 
wuh mi r, ju tujh men hai, ti'uiki im 
jae. 

36 So agar tera tamani badan man- 
au ho, aur kui 'azii andhera na rahe, 
to tamani tuhan hoga, Biaa ki jatM 
eidrafj apnt chamak nv tujlie roshau 
kare. 

37 f Aur jab wuh liat karta tha, 
ek Farisi no usseilarkhwastki,ki merc 
«arh khiina bhaiye ; tud wuh andar 
jiike khiine bait ha. 

38 Aur t'arisi ne yih dekhko ki us 
ne khine ke age nabin uahaya, ta'aj- 
jub kiya. 

311 Par Khudawaiiil i»; at ko kaha, 
ki Ai Farihin, tum piyala aur rikabi 
ko tifiar se »Af karte ho; par Umihdni 
andar hit. aur bunii se bhara hai. 

40 Ai n&dano, kya jis ne bahar ko 
lianaya, andar ko bhi na banftyi ? 

41 l'as jo chi/.i'ti t.uinhare via ma> 
jud hain, un men M khair.it. kvo) 
aur, dekho, eab kuchli tumhare liye 
p&k hog&. 

42 Par, ai Fari.sio, tum par afsos ! 
ki tum podinu, uur siuiali, aur har ek 
tarkari ki dahyaJri detrf ho, aur insaf 
aur Khuda ki nmhubbat ko tarah 
dete : ohahijnj tba, ki in ko karte, aur 
ud ko bM na chhone. 

43 Ai Farisfo, tum par afsos! ki 
tum 'ib.adatkhanon men wnlr japah, 
aur bazaron men salam ko chihto ho, 



Masih kd ta'lim dend, M log LU'QA 

44 Ai riyakar faqlho, aur Farisio, 
tum |ia,ra(Mis! ki tum cbliipi gang 

ki minimi ho,ki frlmf ju un parchalte 
hain nahin jaute. 

45 <j Tab Hhari'at ke ftikldanewal- 
on men 86 ek nc us ke jawab men 
kalii, ki Ai Ustad, in bAtotj ke kahno 
se tii hainen bbi malamat karta ha:. 

46 Us ne kaha, Ai shari'at ko sikh- 
lariflwalo, tum parafnoflI ki tam aise 
hojb, jin ka uthaiia niuahkil hai, nd- 
BUegm Udtaao, aur ap ok ungli se 
un bojhorj ko naluri eiduite. 

47 Tum par afsosl ki tum nabion, 
ki qabrorj ko bansf.o ho, aur t umbar? 
bipaidorj ne un ko qatl kiya. 

48 Pas tum apne bapdidon ke kam 
liar gawahi dete, aur us se rii/i ruhi. ■. 
kyiinki unhort ne un ko qatl kiya, aur 
tum un kf qabren banata bo. 

49 Is liye Klinda ki hikmat ne bhi 
kflhd hai, ki Main nabion aur rasul t m 
ko un ke ])afl bhejfiriga : we un men 
se ba'zorj ko qatl kurerjge, aur sati- 
werjge: 

50 Tft ki Bab nabion ka khi'in, jo 
duitya ke «huni' .se bahaya gaya, is 
zamani- ke logon se talab kiya jas: 

51 ITabil ke khi'in se !eke Zakariyah 
ke khuu tak, jo qurbaugah aur haikal 
ka bich men mira (jaya : harj, main 
tmii sm kali*» hrin, ki ls h/ zamana ke 
logon se tulah kiya jaega. 

52 Ai ahari'at kesikhlinewalo, tum 
par afaos i ki tum ne ma'rifat. ki kan- 
ji le li : tum ap dakhil na hue, aur 
daklii[ honewiion ko bbi nok rak ha. 

63 Jad wuh yih haten un se kari 
raha tba, fiiqib aur Fanai DBB bc-tarah 
chimatne aur chhcrne lage, ki w uli 
bahut W-ten kue : 

54 Aur ghat lagake talash men the, 
ki us ke munh Ke koi bit r>akar pawen, 
t» ki us par nallah karen. 
XII BA' U. 

ITNE men hazarnrj admi ki bhlr 
jam'a hiii ; is tarah ki ek dtlsre ' 
par giri parui tha. * us ne bab se pahle 
04 ' 



XII. rii/'ikdri st' r'f-uiko.s rahen. 
apne shagirdon se yili kahna" shurri' 
kiya, ki Farisiorj ke khaiuir so, jo riya 
hai, ehaukas nih o. 

2 Kyuuki koi chiz dhanpi nahin, 
jo khul na jae ; aur na chhipi, jo jam 
na jae. 

3 Ia liyo ki jo kuchh tum ne an- 
dhere men kaha hai, tmj41fl men su- 
naya jaega ; aur to kuchh tum ne 
ki'thrioii iih'B kanun kau kaha, koth- 
on par manadi kiya jaega. 

4 Magar main tum se, jo tnere dost 
lio» kahtti hiin, ki Un se, jo badan ko 
qatl karte hain, aur ba'd uh ke kuchh 
aur kar nahin sakte, mat dam. 

G I,ekiu inaiii tumben batata hiln, 
ki kis se dam: Uh sc daro, jia ko qatl 
karne ke ba'd ikutiyar hai ki jahan- 
uani men d;ile ; lian, maiti tumben 
kahta lu'm, ki Dai as dam. 

tj Kya do paise par paneh gauriyii 
liahio "biktiij? par kihi ko un nien se 
Kbuila bhiila nahin. 

7 Baiki tumharo sir ke sah hal bhi 
giue hain. Pas niat daro : tum bahut 
[liiuraiyi'Ti se bihtar ho. 

8 Aur main tumben kahtS hurj, ki 
Jo koi admion ke a?e inera iqrar kare, 
Ibu i A 'dam bhi Khuda ke firishtcn 
ke age us ka iijrar karega: 

9 Par jis ne admion ke age mera 
inkarkiya hai, KJnida ke firishion ke 
i'ige us ka inkar hogi. 

10 Aur jo koi Ion i A'dam ke khi- 
laf koi bit kabe, us ko mu'aT hogi : 
par jis ne Ruh i Quds ke haqq men 
kulr kaha, m ko niu'af na hogi. 

11 Aur jab we tura ko 'ibadatkhAn- 
on men, aur hakimon aur ikhtiyar- 
wilon ke pas le jaen, to Hkr na karo 
ki kaisa ya kya jawab doge, ya kya 
kahoge ; 

12'Kyiirjki Rdh i Quds usi ghari 
tumben sikhawegi, ki kya kahni clia- 
hiyc. 

13 % Aur bhir men se ek ne use 
kaha, ki Ai Ustad, mere bhai ae kah, 
k i Mujiie miras baut de. 



Ldlach aur dunyAwi ckhan LU'QA' t XII. 

14 I'ar «s TiO ubc kfchi, ki Ai admi, 
kis ne mujlio tum par qa.zi ya ban$- 
newala muijarrar k iya ? 

15 Aur ua nc un se kaha, ki Kha- 
bardir raho, aur lalach se kanam karo : 
kyiinki kisii ki zmdagi us ke mil ki 
ziy adati ae nahin. 

1G Aur U« ne un se ek tamsil kuhi, 
ki Ek daulatmand ki kheti bahul 
lagi: 

17 Wuh apne dil men sochks kah- 
ne laga, ki main kya karun, ki mere 
yaliaii jagah naliiu, jahag apna haail 
jam'a karun ? 

IH Tali ua ne kaha. Main y ih kar- 
linga; ki apiii kothian dhauiiga, aur 
ban' bana&nga; aur wahari apua ta- 
mim hasil aur mal jam'a kaninga : 

19 Aur apni jan se kabirnya, ki Ai 
jan, tere pas babu t «a mal barasuti ke 
liye jam'a hai; cbain kar, kba, jii, 
khush rah. 

20 Magar Khuda ne ua»! kahi, Ai 
nadiii, isi rit teri jan tujh se ruang- 
enge : pas jo t\i no t&iyar kiva, kis ka 
liogi ? 

21 Aisa bi wuh hai, jo apne liye 
khazana jam'a karta hai, aur Khudd 
ku liye daulat nahiri jam'a karta'. 

22 T PMr un ne apno shagirdon se 
kaha, Is liye main tum m kahta hiin, 
lii Apni jan ke wasta tikr na karo, ki 
ham, kya khawyie; aur na badan ke 
liye, ki kva pahinotjgo. 

23 Ki jan khurak se besh b 
badan posbak ae. 

24 Kauwon ko dekho, ki na bote, 
na katte hain; aur na un ka khatta, 
na kuth i hai; taU bhi Khuda uuhen 
khilata hai : tum to chiriyog se kabin 
bibtar bo ? 

25 Tum men ae kaun hai, ki fikr 
karke apni 'umr ko bath bhar barha 
sake : 

2ti Pas jab itni chhoti bat nahin 
kar sakte, to kis liye baui chizon ki 
fikr katte bo ? 

27 Soauun ko dekho, ki kis tarah 



M fikr M Ubat. 
barhti hain : wena milinat kavti, u.i 
katti hain : par main tumben kahti 
biiii, ki Sulaiman bhi apni s:iri sbftn 
shaukat mes un men so ek ki ma- 
nind paliine na tha. 

28 Jab Kliudaghasko.jo ajmaidan 
men hai, aur kal tam; r men jhouki 

, aisa pahinata, to, ai kam-i'atiqa- 
do, kitna iiyada wuh tumben pahiu-i- 
wega? 

29 Aur tum is ki dnryaft men na 
raho, ki ham kya khaenge, ya kya. 
pienge, aur na ghabrao. 

30 Kyunki in sab chizon ki talilah 
uiya ke log karte hnin : par tumhari 

Uap janta liai ki tum un ke imihtaj 
bo. 

31 1 Baiki Khuda ki Mdshahat 
dhundho; ki tumben yu sab chissoft 
bhi milengi. 

32 Aicbhutejhund,matdar; kyiin- 
ki tumhare BA p ko pasand dya ki 
badshahat tumben do, 

33 Jo kuchh tumhdrd hai becho, 
aur kbaivat karo ; apne liye batuo jo 
puranu nahin bote, aur kba/.ana jo 
uabin ghatta, auman par, jahan chnr 
nawlik nahin atA, aur kira nahin kbi- 
t-d, jam'a karo. 

34 Kyunki jahan tumbara khazana 
hai, wahin tumhiira dil bhi rabega. 

35 Clianiye ki tumbdri kamar ban- 
dhi rabe, aur tumbara diya jalta 
rahe; 

;16 Aur tum khud un (idmion ki 
maniud bo, jo apne khawitid ki rah 
dekhte hon, ki kab wuh ahadi men fo 
awe ; ta ki jab iwe, aur khatkhatawe, 
jhat us ke wiste darwaza khol den. 

37 Mubarak hain wa uaukar, jin 
ko un kA khdwind ake jagta pavre: 
main tumben s:u'!t kihin fedn, ki Wuli 
ap kamar bandhke unhen kbann ko 
bithawega, aur pas ake un ki khidmat 

k:lH/. L. 

'66 Aur agar wuh duare palrnr, yA 
tisre pahar, awe, aur aiaa |«iwe, to mu- 
biiak iiain we uaukar. 



Mwiki Hudimon LU'QA' 

39 Yih tnm ku ma'lnm hai, ki agar 
ghar k i malik janta ki ehor Ha ghari 
iwegi, t<i jajrta ralita, aur &pne ghari 
mcTj sindh m&rne na dcta. 

10 Pas tam bhi laiyar raho : ki ji« 
ghari tutn khiyal naiii'n karte, Ibn i 
A 'dam (iwcga. 

41 ^ Tali Fatrus ne nse kaha, ki 
Ai Kiiudiiwaud, tii yili tamsil tam hi 
■e kahta hai, ya Bab seV 

■!'J Kiiuduwaud ne- kaha, Kaun hai 
wuh (liyanafalar ;iur d>i»a khansnmau. 
jin ko khawnnl apne uaukaron par 
iiiu.|arr;ir kare, ki mi ke bina ki roti 
Wiqt par diya kare ? 

43 Mubarak lini wnh nauknr, Jise 
uh ka khawmd aku alga ki karte pawe. 

■J4 Main tum m nch k:il i t:i lniij, ki 
wnh UH |jn N.ire mal pir mukhi&r 
karega. 

j 5 l'ar agar wnh naukar apne (lil 
meg kaha, ki Sfara khaiviml ani; men 
di'i karta hai, aur <mliim lauiicliim ko 
mania, aur khana pilui, aur inusl houa 
slmni' kare ; 

40 To us imukar ka khawind aisc 
din, ki wuh us ki rak na take, KUT 
ai.si gbtti, ki wnh na JanO, awegit aur 
us ko do tukre karke us ka hhwa Ire- 
inninoii ke nAlIi muqanar kurega. 

-17 Par wuh uaiiktir, jin ne apne 
khawind ki outnsi jiini. pa apne l-u.in 
laiyar na raklui, aur us ki mur/i ko 
iiiiiwali'i na kiyil, bubut mar kh&tga. 

Ih l'ar jis ne na jan&, aur mar 
khane ka kain kiya, tteori mar khae,- 
Ra. So jise bahut diya gaya, us se 
bahut hisab legjni aur jise bahut 
iiiyada soinpa gaya, us se /.iyada man- 
gB&ge< 

4y 1 Main Barain par i? lasane 
ayi brirj ; aur main kya hi chahta 
lilin, ki Ug cfmki hoti ! 

00 l'ar mujhe iJc baptiuma rana 
hai : aur main kaisii tiing In'iii.jab tak 
ki pura ua ho 1 

M Kya tum guman karte ho, ki 
main /amin par mol kivrwane aya| 
W 



, xrrr. Mfl*% 

lii'in? Naluri, main tatahan k*htii 
h lili, baiki juddt. 

52 Kyiinki ab se ek ghar ke pdnch 
liilmi, tin do ke iiarkhilaf honge, aur 
do l.in k.'. 

53 Aur Wp beto so, aur bel4 bdp se, 
anr uni. lili se, aur Mi ma P", mr sa-s 
bahu se, aur bthd eJbl M bnrkhilrif 
boaC 

54 lf TJa ne lagcm «i yih bl.i kali;i, 
ki Jab turn hadli rnrh.'iiliim m; uthtt 
dekhtu ho, to jliat. kahte, ki Menh ata 
hai; aur aisa hi Imta. 

55 Aur jab tum dukhte lio l;i ila- 
kldoi u!i:ilti hai, to kabtfl ho, ki Garuii 
hogi ; aur aisa hi hoti. 

54 Ai riyakaro, tum lamin aur 
asmau ko imtiyiK karue iautuho; is 
zainane ko kyiin nalii[i iintiydz karte ? 

57 Aur tum Ap hi kyrin. tiuhin thah- 
rate, ki ivajib kya luiiV 

ii« T Aur jab tu apne mudda'i ka 
nftth hakim ke pas jiita hai, rah men 
kosiiish kar ki tu us se chlmniva \:\>- ; 
nisS. an hti, ki wuli tujlr ku hakim p&S 
kliimih lc jav, aur hakim tu'|li ko piya- 
d& k e luiiviilr kate, aur piyada tujli ku 
i|iiid men <l:Uo. 

5!J Main tujh sc kahta li i'i n , ki Jab 
tak kaiiri kauri ada na kare, ivnliuij m 

h;l obfaAtejga. 

X1JI BAB, 

U S wnqt ba'te hii/ir the, jo uw un 
Jalilion ki khulMir dete the, jin 
ka khun i'ilatus ne uu W ipiri-aiiiun 
ke siith mildya thd. 

2 Yisii' ne nnhen jawab men kaha, 
K ya tum samsjlite h<>, k i ye Jah'H >iif- 
rlaliliim ^ Kiyilda ^iinah^ar the, ki 
aisa duk h paya? 

.'! Miiiri tum se kahta hi'n>, Nahin : 
pai agar tum timba na karo, aab isi 
tatah iialak hoee. 

4 Ya wo atharab, jin par Siloam 
men hurj gira, nur dab mare, kya 
smiajtite lio, ki we Taruaalam k<' sali 
rahntwalou ne tlyada giuinligar the? 

u Main tum .-n.' kahta lnin, Nahin : 



Anjir ke tfaraJeht !,-i faimtf. LU'QA', XIII. Khanlal ke dana H tnmsil. 



par agar tauba na karo, tum sab isi 
tarah haldk hoge. 

U 1 Aur us 11« yih tamsil kahi ; ki 
Kiai ke anjur ke hdg mori ek anjir kfi 
darakht la<;d thi : us ne ake us ka 
mewa dhundhd, par na paya. 

7 Tab us ae bagbin ae kahd, Dekh, 
tin baras ae main ake is anjir ka 
phal dliuririhtd hun, par nahin pdtd: 
iisu kat rial ; kdhe ko zainin roke 
hai? 

8 Us ne jawab men use kahd, Ai 
Khudawand, is sal aur use rahue de, 
ki us ke giril thald kltotlun, aur khad 
ddli'm : 

9 Shiyad ki phale : iialsiii to, ba'd 
'.is k c kat daliyo. 

10 Aur sabt ke din wuh ek 'ibiidal- 
khdne men ta'lim deta thd. 

11 *$ Aur, dekho, ek 'aurat thi, jiM 
ko athdrah harus se kisi ruh ke ba'is 
kamzori htU, aur wuh kubri ho gayi 
thi, aur apne ta,fn inutluu, sidhi ua 
kar sakti tlii. 

12 Y isu' ne use dekhke pos buldyd, 
aur us sc kahd, Ai 'aurat, tu apni 
kamzori se chhuti. 

IS Aur ua ne apne hath uh par 
rakhe: wunhin sfdlii bo gayi, aur 
Khudd ki ta'rif karne lagi'. 

14 Tab 'ibadalkhino kii sardar, is 
liye ki YisiV ne "sabt ke din changa 
k t ya, k ha fa, hiia, aur jawab deke loguii 
ko kahne la^d, Cliiia din bam jin nun 
kain kami rawa hai : pas un meii ake 
change ho, na ki sabt ke din. 

15 Tab Khudawand ne use jawab 
men kahd, ki Ai riydkdr, kyd bar ek 
tum men se sabt ke din apne bail ain 
gadhe ko than se nahirj kholtd, aur 
pdui pildne nahin le jdtd ? 

16 Pas kyd mundsib na thi, ki yih 
jo Abirahdm ki beti hai, jis ko Shaiiaii 
ne, dekho, atharah baras se bdndh 
rakhd thd, sabt ke din us band se 
chhurai ide? 



hue: aur sari bhir \in jalil kartion se, 
jo us se hiie, khush bui. 

18 t Phir'us ne kahd, Khudd ki 
bddslidhat kis ki manind hai? main 
use kis se uisbat diin? 

19 Khardal ke ddna ki mdnind hai, 
jis ko ek idrai ne leke apne bdg men 
boyd; wuh ngd, aur baji per hnij 
aur ebiriyou ne us ki dalion par baserd 
kiyd. 

20 Aur phir us ne kahd, Mu i u 
Khudd ki bddshdhat ko kis m nisbat 
d'un? 

21 Wuh kharnirki manind hai, jjee 
ek 'aurat ne luke tin paimdna ate men 
mildya, yahdij lak ki wuh Bab kha- 
inii'd ho gayd. 

22 Aur wuli Yariisalain ko jate hiie 
shahr sindir, gauw gdnw, phirke ta'- 
lim deta tlid. 

23 Tab ek ne use kahd, Ai Khuda- 
wand, kyd thore hain, jo najat pdte? 
Us ne un se kahd, ki 

21 ^ Jan ee koshish karo, ki tum 
tang darwdza se ddkhil bo: kydnki 
main tum se kanta hi'rn, ki bohutere 
chdhenge ki ua se dakhil hon, par na 
sakengo. 

25 .lab ki gliar ke mdlik ne ut.hke 
darwdza band kiyd ho, aur tum biliar 
kliara boni, aur yih kalike daneaza 
khat.kiiatand abuto* karo, ki Ai Klni- 
ddwand, ai Klmdiiwatid, limnare liye 
khol ; wuh andar se jawab men tum 
se kahegd, ki Main tum ko nahin pah- 
chiluta, ki kah^ ke ho : 

26 Tab tum kahne lagoge, ki Ham 
ne tere huzur khaya piya hai, aur lu 
nehurodrigali kuchonnicn ta'lim di hai. 

27 Par wuh jawab degd, Maifl |l|hl 
ie kahta hiin, ki tum ko nahin pah- 
chdntd, ki kalian ke ho; ai badkaro, 
tum sab nuijh se dnr ho. 

28 Wahdn nniii aur ddnt pisnd 
hopd, jab Abirahdm, aur Iz,biq, aur 
Ya'qub, aur sab nabfun ko Khudd ki 
bdilshiihat men slnimil, aur dp ko 



17 Aur jad wuh \ ih baten kahtd 
hd, us ke sab mukiudii' sharminda bdhar nikalihud, uekht>g< 
97 



Yarumhim par 



LU'QA', XIV. 



:vha karno. 



29 Aur log piirab, pachchhim, ut- 
tur, dakkbin se dwenge, aur Khtuld ki 
bdd^hdhat aien Iwiithesga. 

30 Aur, dekho, jo pichhle hain. 
pahle horjge; aur jo pahlo hain, so 
pichhle bonge. 

31 % L'si dlo hn'ze Fnriston ne dke 
use kaba, ki Kikal ja, aur yahan se 
rawdna bn: kyinkiHerodis tnjheoatl 
kiyaclialita hal 

32 Ua ue mi so kaba, ki Jdke us 
Jomri ue kaho, ki Dekh, main shai- 
tanon kn uikiiltd huu, aur aj o kal 
cbanga kar rabi buQ, aur tisro diri 
apn:i. U:\rn pura kari'iijga. 

33 Pas ninjho zarnr liai, ki Aj o ka.1 
aur parson «air kanin : kytinki uahin 
ho Bukti, ki nabi Yarusalam ke babar 
balak b o. 

34 Ai Yarunalam, ai Yarusalam, jo 
nabioTi ko qatl karti bai, aur uti ko, jo 
lorepas bhojo jiii>'c',par,tlirfti> karti bai : 
kai Mr main ne cbaba ki tere larkon 
ko jaina karun, jis tarah niurgi apne 
bacbohoTi ko apne paron. tale jam'a 
karti hai. par timi ne na chaha ' 

d5 Di-kho, tumbara ghar tumhire 
liye ujar ehbord jata bai : aur main 
tumben sach k'abta lunj, ki Mujh ko 
na uekbogc us waqt tak ki turn ka- 
boge, Mubarak hai wub jo Khudd- 
wand ke nam par ata bai. 

XIV BA'R 

A ISA' hild, ki wuh sabi ke din 
buzurg Farisi'un mcn se ek ke 
ghar kbane gayi, aur we us ki tak 
m e n t lu-. 

2 Aur, dekho, ki ek shakhs us kn 
sambne thd, jiso jnlandhar tha. 

3 Yisii' no jawab men shari'at ke 
siklldnewdlon aur Farision sg kaha, ki 
Sabt tte din cliauga kanta rawa bai, y i 
mihrri ? 

4 We ohup rahe. Tab us nn uae 
pukarke changa kiya, aur dibor diya ; 

f> Aur jawab mon un H kihfi, ki 
Tinn men ao kami hai, ki agar us ki 
W 



gadlii ya bail kue men gire, «uh tut't 
sjiiit ke din us ko ua nikale? 

6 We us ki in bdton kd jawab na 
de pakon. 

7 1 Aur mihmaiion ko jab dekhd, 
ki we kyuykur sadr jagalien pasaud 
kartc liain, un se ek tamsil kahi, ki 

8 Jab kol tujhe sliiidi men bulawo, 
uah ee nnche mat baith; ki shdyad 
tujh se bbi kisi bare ko buldyd ho ; , 

9 Aur jis no teri aur us ki inibindiii 
ki hai, dke tujh se kahe, ki Yih uh ko 
de; aur sharminda hoke tujb ko sab 
su niche baitbnd para. 

10 Baiki "jab teri mil imani bo, sah 
ae nichi jagah baith; td ki jad wub, 
jis ne tujh ko buldya bai, awe, tujh ko 
kahe, ki Ai doflt, A, nnchi jagah batyh ; 
tab un ke aaumnc, jo tcro sitb kbaue 
baitke liaiti, teri "inzaX hogS. 

11 Kyi'mki jo koi ap ko bara thak- 
rdta hai, cbhota kiyd jaegd; aur jo 
apuo ta,ig ohhotd tliabratd bai, bara 
kiyd jdega. 

12 ^f Aur us ne apne mihmduddr 
se kaba, ki.Titb tudin kd, ydsbdm ka, 
kluiua laiyar karo, to apne dwtOfc yd. 
bhaion, yd rishtaddron, yd daulatmand 
parosioa komatbuld; tdua b" ki ws 
bh'i tujho buldvvon, aur tera badld ho 
jiii'. 

13 Baiki jab tii ^iydfat kare, to 

faribon, lanjuti, laugnm, andhon ko 
uli:" 

14 Tab tii mubarak hoga; kyiirki 
un ke pas kucbh ualiin, ki tera badld. 
den : par tujhe rAstbd/.un ki uiydmat 
ruen badld diya jdegd. 

15 Tf Aur ok ne un mcn ee, jokbdnc 
bait hw tho, yih sunko us s? kaha, 
MuMrak wub jo Kbudd ki bddshdhat 
nteji roti khdegd. 

16 Aurusneusckabd.ki Kkshakhs 
nesbam ka bara khdnd taiydr karke 
babuton ko buliyd. 

17 Aur khdnc ko waqt apue naukar 
ko bhejd, ki mihmdnon ko kahe, ki 
A'o ; ab sah kuetib taiydr bai. 



Bare Ithdnii ki tamdl. 

18 Is |>ar sablion ne milkar \t/.r 
karna ahunV kiyd. "Pahlo ne use ka- 
hd, ki Main ne ek khet kharidd hai ; 
Hrdt hai ki jake uso dckhiin; main 
teri minnut karia hiin, ki mori taraf 
Nar kur. 

19 Diisre no kahi, Main ne panch 
joribai! kharidi hain; jsitii hi'iii k i mu 
ko dzmdun; main teri minnat kartf 
hun, ki mere liye 'u/r kar. 

20 Tisre ne'kahi, Main dc bydh 
kiyd hai, is sabab se nahin a sakta. 

21 Pus uk naukar ne ake apue khu- 
ddwand ko in baton ki khabar ilf. Tab 
ghar ke milik no gussa hoko apnc 
uaukarse kaha, Jalil shahr be biziron 
aur galion meg ja, aur garibon, aur 
lunjon, aur laugron, aur amilum ko 
y aba n Id. 

22 Naukar ne kaha, ki Ai kbudd- 
wand, jaisa ti uo farmdya-, hi'ii; tau 
bhi janah hai. 

23 Khuddwand ne ub naukar pc 
kaha, ki Hahoii aur klict ke dandim ki 
taraf jd, aur jis tarah bane, logon ko 
ld, ki meri ghar bhar jdo. 

21 Kyi'mki main tum m: kahtdhrin, 
ki Koi ihakbi uu men se, jo bulat) 
gaye, mera khana na diakhegd. 

25 ^ Aur bahut loir, us ke sdth 
chale: aur us no pbirke un se kaha, 
ki 

2fi Agar koi mere pAs Awe, aur ap- 
ne biip, aur mi, aur jon'i larke, aur 
bhai bahin, baiki apni jan ki dush- 
mani na kari), merd shdgird ho nahii 
sakti. 

27 Aur jo apni salib uthdke mere 
nichhe nah i n ata, mera shdgird nahin 
lio nak i d. 

28 Kyiinki tum men kaun hai, ki 
jad ek burj banaya chahe, pahle baith- 
kc kharch ki hisab na kare, ki mam un 
se taiyar kar ■afcdngd? 

2'.> Aisd na ho, ki jad new dfi.li, 
taiyar na kar sak A, to jo log dekhen, 
ii8 par hnnsne lagen ; 

30 Aur kahen, ki Is shakh: 
99 



LU'QA', XV. Kliai hui hlier ki tamfil. 

ndna shuru' kiya, par taiyar :~:i kar 



saka. 

!l YA kami badshah dusrc Mdahah 
larai karne jae, jo baithke pahle 

salah Dakaru, ki main dan lia/.ar admi. 

ke sAtli, us se ki bis bazar ddmi leke 

mnjh par dtd hai, mmpibala kar sa- 

kungd? . 

32 Kabin to, jad wnh hanoi*; d«r 
hai, paigdm bhejke silih, ko liye min- 
nat karegA. 

33 8o Ui tarah jo koi tum men se 
apne ndremal bc kanai.i ua kua, mera 
ihdsrird nahin ko sakti. 

31 T Namak achchhd hai : lekiu 
agar namak bigar jac, to kis ebi?. bq 
mu«ddr hogd? 

35 Na zamin ko, na khad ke karn 

kd hai; baiki use bahar plieiik dete 

hain. Jia ko kin sunne ke hon, sune. 

XV BA'B. 

TAB sab maliRul-Iencwdle aur gu- 
nahgdr us ke ua^dik dte the, ki 
us ki sunitn. 

2 Aur Fanai aur faqjh kurkurake 
kaht« the, ki Yili shakhs gunabgiron 
ko qabtil karta hjii, aur liu ke sath 
kh itii lial. 

3 T 1'ab us ne un se yih tamsil 
kahi, ki 

l Tam n i'.' n u kwm hai, jis ki> pa> 
sau bher hon, agar un men se ek kho 
j;ii>. ii(i iiiiiiinawr ko bayalmn men na 
clihore, aur us khoi hui ko, jali tak oa 
pdwe, dhiindhd na karc? 

5 Aur pake khushi so apno kdnclho 
par utbi na le ?' 

C Aur ghar meg jike dostog aur 
paroslon ko buldke na kahe, ki Meru 
sith khushi karo; kyunki main ne 
apni khoi bui bh« pil? 

7 Main tum se kahtd bun, ki Is hi 
taur dsman men ek gunahgir ke 
wdsre, jo tauKa kartd hai, ninanawr> 
rfistbdzon se, jo tauba ki hijat nahin 
r.ikhtp, ziyada khushi bo^i. 

8 K Ya kaun 'aurat. hai, jis pds das 
dirham hun, agar ek kho jai;, chira^ 



Musrif befe 



LU'QA', XVI. 



k i tamsil. 



bdlke ghar ko na jhdre, aur jab tak tia 
pdwo, koshish n dhuiidha tia kare? 

9 Aur jab pawo, doston aur (liirusion 
ko bulike na k&he, ki Mere sdth 
khoshl karo; ki main ne apni khoyi 
hud dirbjua piydV 

10 Main tumhon kahti hun, ki 
Khudd ke firiehtoij ko Age ek guuali- 
gar ke liyo, jo tauba kartd hai, khushi 
hoti bai. 

11 T Fhir us m kahA, Ek shakliB 
k o .l.i bc-te tb 

12 Un men ae chhote ue bip se 
kahd, ki Ai bap, mal ki hissa, jo 
mujbe pahunchti bai, mujkc de. Ub 
no mil unhen bdnt diya. 

13 Aur tliore din ba'd chliote bot.c 
ne sah kuchh jam'a karke ek dur ku 
milik ki nalar kiyi, aur wahdn apnd 
mil bad-chili men nrayA. 

14 Aur jab sab kiiarch kar chuki, 
us mulk men bara lidi puri ; aur wuh 
muhtaj hone lagi. 

16 Tab us nmlk ke ek ra,fs ku ya- 
han i;i laga ; ub ne use apne khetun 
m e n lillar «-'harane bhejd. 

1~0 Aur uso drzn thi, ki un chhilkon 
se, jo suar kbatc hain, apni pct bhare : 
ki kol use na detd thd. 

17 Tad liosli men dke kalia, Meru 
bap ke kitne inaniluron ko bah u t roti 
hai, aur main Muikhon marta Mti ! 

lfl Main nfliko apD*.' bap pds jaiin- 
gd, aur uso kalulngd, ki Ai bap, main 
ne iUrnaii ki aur fcero hazm guroili 
kiyi hai, 

19 Aur ab htUiq nahin ki phir teri 
beta kalil&ug : mujbo apne mazdaron 
men se ek ki mdmnd bani. 

20 Tab uthke apne bdp pas chala. 
Aur wuh ablii diir thi, ki us ko ikkh- 
ke ub ko bdp ko rahm .Iya, aur daurke 
us ko gale laga HyA, aur bahut diurai. 

21 Bete n.) ua ko kalut, ki Ai bap, 
ne asman ki aur tere huziir 



gundh kiyi, aur ah i.s qabil nahin ki 
phir tera beta kahliun. 

22 Bdp ne apne naukaron ko kahd/sAradn uahin rah sakti. 
100 



ki Achchhi sc achcbhi poshdk nikdl 
Ido, aur use imhirino ; aur us ke hdth 
men augutbi, aur pari w. j m nienjuti: 

23 Aur palo Me baehhro ko lak e 
zabh karo, ki khdeu, aur khushi nia- 
nacij : 

24 Kyunki inerA yih beta nnia tha, 
ab jiyihai; khogayd thd, ab mila hai. 
Tab we khufilii karnc lugi:, 

25 Aur ur ka Iwira beta kbet oicii 
Iba : jab ghnr ke na>idik Ayd, gdne aur 
ndchne ki awdK suni. 

2G Tnb ek naiikar ko bulake pii- 
chhi, ki Yihkydhai? 

27 Us ne uae kaha, ki Teri bbdi 
Ayd hai; aur tere Mp ne pald hui 
baelihni zabh kiyd hai, is liye ki use 
bhald changd pdva. 

28 th na kbai'A holte na chdhd kt 
andar jae : tab us ko bdp ne bAhar Ake 
um: maudyd. 

29 Us ue bdp se jawAb men kalid, 
Dekb, itnc baraa se main teri khidmat 
kartd him, aur kabbi tere hukrn ko 
barkhildf na chald : par tii ne kabhu 
ck bakri kd bacbcba majhe m diyd, 
ki apne dostoii ke sdih khushi nw- 
nAiiri : 

30 Magar jab terA yih beti Ayd. jis 
ne terA uidl kasbion men uraya, tu ne 
ns ke liyo motd bachhrd zabh kiyd. 

31 Us n© us ko kahd, Ai bet«, tu 
aadd more pds hai, aur jo kuchh merA 
hai, so terd hai. 

Par khushi mandna, aur khush 
hond, liani thd ; kyunki teri yih bbdi 
mvlA thd, ho jivA hai, aur k&o gav;i 
thA, ab miU hal 

XVI BA'B. 

AUR ua ne aun.0 shagirdorj se bhi 
kahd, ki KUu daulatmand ki ek 
khAnsimin tha; jis ki togog ue ua so 
gila kiyd, ki yib UtA mal urati hai. 

2 Tab us ne us ko buldko us se 
kahd, ki Kydnkar hud, ki main tere 
haqq men yih suntdbun? Apni khdn- 
Miimdui kd hisab do ; ki ah se tu khan- 



Be-imdn naukar ki tamsil. LU'QA', 

3 Us khausaiuiiu OS upno ji HMD 
fcahd, ki Kya kariin? kyunki mera 
mdlik khan=amdui mujh ue lc letd 
Ini; main khutl nahin wikta, nur 
bhikb mdngne sc mujbe sharm ati hai. 

4 Ab jan gayi ki kya kartun, ta ki 
i«d khinsamini se chhut jiun, mujbe 
log apne gharon men rakherj. 

5 Tab fljiuo 'iqi ke sah <iarzdaron 
men ae liar ok ko pas Imlako pB,h lu so 
pikhha, ki Tu kitni mera milik ka 
dharitd hai ? 

6 Uh ne kahd, Sau paimann tel. 
Tab us ko kaba, ki Apui dastawez le, 
aur jaid baithke packis likh dc, 

7 Pbirdusrcue kahi,Tu,kitlli dhar- 
itd hai ? Uh ne kaba, San paimaua 

Selu'm. Uh k:ili;i, ki Ajini dattiwez 
■, aur assi iikb dc. 

8 Tab milik nc be-iman khansa- 
iiiau ki ta'rit' ki, is liye ki us na bosb,- 
yiri ki: kyiinki dnuya ke log apne 
waqt men nur ke (arzandon se bosh- 
yar haiii. 

9 So main tum so knhta biin, ki 
■'lu'. :iii daulat se apne liye dost pakla 
karo; ki jad tum jdtc raho, hameslia 
ke makinon men jagah den. 

10 Jo nihayat thore men imdndar 
hai, so bahut men bhi iiuandir hai ; 
aur jo nihayat thoi-o uicii berfm&n liai, 
so bahut men bhi be-irnin hai. 

11 Jab tuui jhiithi daulat mon [man- 
dar na ralie, to sachchi tuniheii kaun 
Ml|'i|]'l k;ir.-_;;i 'i 

12 Aur jab tum begine ke mil meii 
unindar na rnbe, tu kaun wuh dega 
jo tumhari bi ho? 

13 1 Koi naukar do khawimhm ki 
khidmat nahin. kur sakti: is liye ki 
ya ek ki dushmani karcgd, aur ddsru 
ki dosti ; yd ek ko tninegi, nur dusre 
ko na-chiz jinegd. Tum Khudd aur 
daulat donou ki khidmat nahin, kar 
sakte. 

U Aur Farisi, jo daulat ko piyir 
karte the, in sab hiton ko sutike tbat- 
thc incn urine lage. 
101 



XVI. Mdlddr aur La'azar ki tamsil. 

15 Tab 08 lio UU ku kaba, ki Tutu 
we ho, jo idmkm ke dge ip ko rdstbiz 
zihir karte baiu ; lekin Khudi tum- 
bire dil ki jiSnUi hai : kyunki jo ad- 
mion ki nazaroe men bara hai, Khuda 
ko dge makruh hai. 

16 Shari'iit aur ambiyd Yilhanni 
tik the; tab se Khuda ki b&Uhaoat 
ki khushkhabari di jiti bai, aur bar 
ek eor marka ua men dakliil nota hai. 

17 Para.sniauaurzaTulnki tal jana, 
shart'at ke ek nuqta ke mit jiuu sc, 
bahut dsilii bai. 

18 Jo shakhs apui jord ko chbor di^, 
aurdtisri sc byab karu, ziuii kani hai : 
aur jo koi us 'aurat ko, ki chbor di 
gayi, bydhe, zina kari , i hai. 

19 1 Ek daulatmand thi, jo lal 
aur iniliin kapro p:ibiutd, aur roz ruz 
sbiu o shaukat se 'aisb knrla tlia. 

20 Aur La'azar Uanie ek girili ddnii, 
jo nasiir se bhara thd, jise us ki dew- 
rbi }iar dil jdto the; 

21 Aur w uh drzii rakhtd thi ki un 
tukj-i.u h j" daulatmand ki roez m 
girte the, apui pot bbare : baiki kuli-.' 
ike us ko ghdo ch'atte the. 

22 Aur ni^ii hmi, ki wuli garib mar 
gayi, aur ririshton ne usc lv jdke Abira- 
him ki god mon rakbi; aur daulat- 
mand bhi miid, aur giri gayi ; 

23 Ua nc dozakh ku dai'iniyin 'azdb 
nun hokfl apui ankbi/n uthain, aur 
Abiraham ko dur se dekhd, aur us ki 
god mon La'azar ko. 

24 Aur us ne pukarke kahi, ki Ai 
bdp Ahirahdm, mujli par raiim ka 1 , 
aur La'aaai ko bhej, ki apni imgli ki 
siri pini se bhigoke meri zubau 
thandi karo; kyunki main is lau men 
tarapti h uij. 

25 Tab Abiraham dc kaba, ki Ai 
b te, yid kar ki lu apni licdaaf mag 
aohchhi chizyn le ehuki, aur La'azar 
buri chizon: so ab wub tasalil pita 
hai, aur tti taraptd hai. 

26 Aur in sah ke alwi hamdre 
tumliire darmiyiu ek bani garlid dbari 



I'mdn se iqtidar LTJ'QA'. 

gaya hai : aM ki we jo yahan se tuiu- ' 
iidre piU jaya chahen, ria ja sakeu ; 
aur na we log jo wahdn hai n, is par 
h&marfl pas a sakfce. 

27 Tab us ne kaha, Pas, ai bap, teri 
mirmat karta hiiii, ki tii use mere bap 
ke ghar bttej : 

28 Kytinki mere p&nch blidi hain; 
tf ki un pai gawalii den, aisa na lio 
ki we bhi is 'azab ki jabali mcij awen. 

29 Abinihdni ne ukc kaba, ki Un 
ke iids Musa aur ambiya hain ; chd- 
iiiye ki we uu ki suncn. 

30 L'a nu kahd, Xaliin, ai bap Abi- 
raham; par agar koi murdon m 
un ke pas jde, we tfi.uba karenge, 

31 Ua ne uso kaha, ki.lab we Musa 
aur nabion ki na warta, to agar mur- 
don rueg se koi uthe, to us ki na 
ininerige, 

XVII ItA'R 

PTITR 08 ne shdgirdon se kahd, Yih 
naliin bo sakta ki tbokar khil- 
dnew&li chizen na dwey : par afaos us 
par, jis ke ku bab aweij ! 

2 Aaar chakki kd pat us ke gale 
rucn bandhd buta, aur w uli samuudar 
men phenkd jata, to yih us ke [iye un 
se bibtar bota, ki wuh ek ko in chhot- 
oq men se thokar khikiwe, 

if ^ Khabardar raho: agar tera 
lihai tera gunah karc, use &&a{ ; agar 
taiiba kare, hbc mu'af kar. 

4 Aur agar ek dia men stit har tera 
guuah kari', aur ek <lin men sdt bar 
aku kahe, ki Tauba kartd huti ; use 
iim'Af kar. 

5 Tab rosulon n e Khudawaiid se 
kahd, Haiuara iman ziyada kar. 

6 Kbuddwand ne kaba, ki Agar 
tim men kbaruiil ko ddua ke barabar 
iradn ho, to jab tum is tiit ke darakht 
ko kaho, ki Jar se ukharke darya men 
lag ja, to turatidri manegt 

7 Aur tum meg se kauu hai, jis ka 
ik naukar bal jote, yd uharwahl kare, 
jab khet se dwe, uao kahe, ki Jald a, 
aur khdoe bakh? 

102 



XVII. jokotd. 

8 Aur we na kahe, ki Mera aham 
ka khaua taiyar kar, aur jab tak k hina 
piiin kamar bdndhke mari khidmat 
kar ; ba'd u» ke tu Ap kha pi 'i 

9 Kya wuh us naukar ka, ihsan 
manta hai, ki jo kam us ne fanude tbe, 
kiyo ? main. jantd hitn, nahig. 

10 Iai tarah tum bhi, jabsab kuchh 
jo tumhdro liyo farmaya gaya, kar 
chuke, to kaho, ki Ham niKMHTUf 
bunda fiaiii ; kyririki jo ham par karri.i 
wajib tha, wuhi kiya. 

i I \ Aur aisd tnia, ki jab Yanisa- 
lam ko jatd thd, Samariya aur Jalil ke 
bich se guzra. 

12 Ain ek basti men jite hiie daa 
korhi use mite, jo diir khare tlie : 

13 Unhon ne chilidko koha, ki Ai 
Yiad', ai sahih, ham par rahm kar. 

14 Ua ne dekhke uuberj knlid, ki 
Jake apne ta.iij kahinon ko dikhao. 
Aur aisa hua, ki we jate hue pdk sal' 
ho gaye, 

15 Aurek ne un men sejab dekhd 
ki changa hiid.bari awaz se KhuuYi ki 
ta'rif kartd hiia phird, 

16 Aurniuiih ke lihai Yi.-u'i'ke pdn- 
won pdB girke un ka shukr kiyd : aur 
wuh Samari tha. 

17 Tab Yhiu' ne jftwib men kaha, 
ki Kyd dasog pak sdf »a hiie? phir 
we nau kalian liuiu? 

18 Kyd siwa is pardesi ke koi 
na mild, ki phirke Khudd ki ta'rif 
karo? 

19 Aur use kahd, Uthke rawana 
ho : tero iman ne tujhe bachdyd. 

20 K' Aur jab Farision ne ub ee 
piloiiha, ki Khu-M ki bidahdaat kab 
awegi? ua ne jawab men un se kahd, 
ki Khuda ki batUlidhat lumuld ke adth 
nahin Ati : 

21 Aur we na kahengo, ki dekho 
yahin! yddekho wahaii hai ! kyi'mki, 
dekho, Kliud.i ki badbhahat tumhare 
diirniiyaii hai. 

22 Aur tihigirdon se kaha, We din 
jab arzii karoge, ki Ion i 



Khudd H hdihltdhid kibdhat. LU'QA', 
A'dam ke dinon uien se ek ko doklio, 
aur na dekhoge. 

23 Aur we tmn ko kabenge, ki De- 
kho yah&n, y», doklio wahdn hai : tutn 
mat niklo, aur pichhe na jdo. 

24 Kyunki jaisa bijli, jo AsmAn ki 
ek taraf se kaundhkc luari taraf cha- 
inakti hai, waisd )ii Iba i A'dain bhi 
apne din inen hoga. 

25 Lekin pahle zarur hai ki wuh 
bahut dukh ufhdwc, aur is zamane ke 
logon ao radd kiya jawe. 

2b' Aur jaisd ki Nuh ke dinon men 
hiia, isi tarah Ibu i A'darn ke dinon 
mori bhi kogd, 

27 Ki log khdte, pite, byah karte, 
bydhe jdte the, us ain tak ki Nuh 
Uabtl mag gaya, aur tdlau ue dko sab 
ko barbdd kiya. 

28 Aurjaisaki Ldt ke dinun incn 
hiid, ki log k bata, pita, aur kharid 
GWofcht karte, aur pef lagate aur ghar 
bsnata the ; 

29 Far jis din ki Lut Sadum n 
nikld, ag aur gandhak ne daruan se 
b:irn-skc sah ku barbad kiya ; 

30 So isi tarah hogd, jis din ki Ibu 
i A'dam zAbir hogd. 

31 Us din wuh jo kutim par bu. 
aur us ki asbab ghar mcn, IW ke leue 
ke waste nlche na aive ; aur jo khet 
uien lu.), waisd hi pichhe ua phiri 

■V2 Nih ki juru ko ydd karo. 

88 .1" ihfcfhi cbiihu ki apni jAn 
, use khoegd ; aur jo shakli 
apni jau khowe, use bacbdwegd. 

'H Aur main lum se kanta-' hurj, ki 
Us rat do admi ek lii miang par 
bOfigB ; ek pakra, dusra chlii'ra JAegi. 

35 Aur do 'auraten, jo ek sdth 
chakki piati hongi ; ek pakri, ddsri 
ehbori jacgi. 

36' Ain- do Admi", jo khct men honge 
ek prikni, dusra chhora jaega. 

37 Onhon no jawab men use kahA, 
ki Ai Khudawand, kalian ? TJa nc un 
IB kahd, Jahdn ki murda hai, giddli 
wabin jam'a honge. 
103 



XVIII. .Ifutatj&zi bewa ki hahaU 

XVIII BA'B. 

P HIU us ne, is liye ki un ko liamt- 
sha du'd rneg lage rahna, aur 
susti na karai zariir hai, ek tamsil 
kahi, ki 

2 Kisu shabr men ek qdz.i thd, jo 
na Khudd ae dartd, aur ua lidrui ki 
kuohh parwd rakhtd : 

3 Aur uni shahr men ek bewa thi, 
,o us ke pas ati aur use yih kahti thi, 
ki Mere dushman ke hath se uitrd 
inadf Iur. 

4 Us ne kuchh din na clidhd: lekin 
piclihe apue ji men kabd, ki Harchaud 
main na Khudd se darta, «ur na admi 
ki kuchh parwd rakhtd; 

5 Tau bhi is liye ki yih hewa mu- 
jhe bahut satati hai, us kd insaf kar- 
ungii; aitid na ho, ki wuh bahut dne sc 
akhir ko merd dimdg khrt.li karo. 

b' Khuddwand ne farmaya, ki Sunn, 
jo kuchh is be-insdf <\rt,zi no kahd. 

7 Pas kyd Khudd apne bargualda 
logon kd, jo rdt din us se farydd karti.', 
iusdf na karegd? kyd un ke waste dtr 
karegd ? 

8 Main tuui se kahtd hun, ki Wuh 
jald un kd iLsaf karegd ; magar kya 
Ibu i A'dam ake zanuu par iman 
piweg*? 

9 ^i Phir us ne un se, jo apne upar 
bharosd rakhte the ki raathaz hain, 
lekin auron ko ndchiz jaute the yih 
tamsil kahi, ki 

10 Do sbakhs hsikal mcn du'a 
nadugue gaye; ek Fami, diisrd raah- 
sul-lenowdld. 

11 Farisi alag khard hoke yiin du'a 
rudugtd tha, ki Ai Khudd, main tera 
shukr kartii, ki auron ki nianiml 
lutora, Kdlira, Kindkdr, yd jaisd yih 
raahsul-lonewAId hai, nahin lum, 

12 Main nafta rucn do bar roza 
rakhtd, aur main apne sare mAl ki 
dahyaki detd hiin- 

13 Piir uh mahstil-Iuiiewillo ne dor 
.se khard hoke itna bhi na chdlid ki 
|dsmau ki taraf dnkh uthiwe, baiki 



Ek amir ke suwdl LU'QA' 

diliati jiiltS.aur kahtA ihii, ki Ai Khu- 
d;i, rnnjli gunahgaf pan ralun kar. 

14 Main tum so kahta min, Yili 
shakhs dusre se rtbtbd/. thaharke apne 
ghar gaya: kyunki jo ap ko bard 
thahrdtd hai, cuhotd kiyri jdega; aur 
jo apne ta.in chhotd tlialiratd hai, baja 
kiya jauga. 

15 Phir we chliote In.jknn ko us ke 
pds Ua, ki un ko chhtie :'par shdgirdon 
ue dek h ke un ko ddntA. 

1G Magar Yisu' ne baclidion ko pas 
buMke katai, ki Lajkoji ko mm jias 
dne do, aur unhon mana u» kun»: 
kyiinki Khudd kl badskdhnt aisog hi 
k i hai. 

17 Main tum se sacb kahid hiin, ki 
.lu koi h'hud» Vi btdiMhat ku ohnofe 
larfcfl i;i mdnind uabul nahin kavta, us 
i'jcn kabhu dakbil na hogd. 

18 Aur ek sardar ne us Be puekha, 
Ai uek ustad, main kyd karun ki 
liameshn ki zitukiiii ka waris b.oun? 

1!) Yisu' ne us ko kahd, Tu kyihi 
uiujU ko Dek kahtd hai? koi nekj 
iialitn, magar t'k, ya'ne Khudd. 

20 Tu lmkmon kojdntd hai, kiZind; 
na kar, Qatl na kar, Ohori na kar,. 
,llii'it.ki gav&hi na de, Apne bdp aur 
Kpai nid ki 'iazat kar. 

21 Us ne kahd, Yih sab iarakpui m 
niiiiii iiuiiitd dyd. 

22 Yi*u' no yili sunkar use kahd, 
Tiiu nhi tujh ko ek chiz baqi hai : sab 
kuohfa Jo d-rd liai beoh, MB garibori ko 
bdnt do, to dsmin men tere iiye 
khazdtia hogd: aur dkar nieri pairaui 
kar. 

28 Wuh yib suaka bahut gamgin 
hiid, kyiinki bara daulatniand thd. 

24 Yifid' ne us ko bahut gamgin 
dekhkar kahd, ki Un ko, jo bahut mdl 
raklirc liain, Khudd ki bauskdbat men 
ddkliil hond kabid muahkil hai! 

2fi Kyiinki unt kd siii ke ndke meij 
no gu/ar jdnd us se dsdn hai, ki koi 
lianlatinand Khudd ki bddsbdhat men 
dakbil lio. 
104 



XVIII. kd jawab. 

liC Aur jinhon, ne yih sund, kahd. 
Pas kaun nujdt pd saktd liai? 

27 Us ne kahd, Jo insdn ko nazdik 
r i ;i - 1 1 1 ii a i j U i ii hai, Khudd ke nazdik 
lnutukin hai. 

28 Tab Patms ne kahd, Dekh, hmn 
ne sab kuchh cbhord, aur teri pairaui 
kf. 

29 Us ne un se kahd, Main tum se 
sach kahtd liun, ki Koi nahin, jis ne 
gbar, yd md bdp, yd bhdion, yd jorfi, 
ya larkoG ko, Khudd ki bddshdhat ke 
wdste chlior diya bal, 

30 Ki is zamdne men us se kabin 
ziydda na pawe, ain - uh jaluin mag 
hamesha ki /indagi, 

31 T[ Aur us ne barahoij ko sdth 
leke nu se kaha, ki Dokho, ham Yani- 
salam ko jdte kain, aur sah ,ji> imbiur, 
ki ma'rifat Ibu i A'dam ke haqq men 
liklid hai, piird hogd. 

82 Kyi'mki wojh gair-([aumwaion ke 
hawalit Iciyd jaega, aur we us ko 
thatthe men uriwenge, aur he-'izzat 
kaicnge, aur ua par thiikenge : 

33 Aur ua ko kore mdrke qatl 
kaienni aur wuh tisre diuji uthegd. 

34 Lekiu uuhon ue un men se koi 
bit na saiujhi : aur yih kaldm un par 
obbjpfi rabd, aur in baton kd matlab 
zarra un ki saumjh men na dya. 

35 % Phir aisd hud, ki jab wuh 
Yarihu ko nazdik dyd, ok andbd rdh 
par baithd bldkh mdngtd thd : 

36 Us no jdneivdlon kd shor sunke 
ptichhd, ki kyd hai? 

37 Tab unlion ne usc kahd, ki Yisu' 
Nlsari jatd hai. 

::n Us ne pukarko kahd, Ai Yisu', 
lbn i Ddi'id, mujli par t-ahm kar. 

39 Unhon ne jo age jdte the, us ko 
ddntd, ki cliup rah : par wuh aur bhi 
diiliaya, ki Ai lbn i Ddtid, inujh par 
rahiu kar. 

40 Tab Yisu' ne thaharkft farmdyd, 
ki Us ko mcro pds'ldo. Jab nazdik 
dyd, us ne ub se puehhd, 

41 Tii kyd chdbta hai, ki main tere 



m/i Znkki khiraj'ijii- 



LU'OA'. XIX. 



ke{fharjiU<r. 



i:.'in? Uh ne kahd, Ai Khu- 
. iwiiiifl, yih, ki mujl.i: d 11 klien mil.']]. 

42 V isu' ne us eo kahd, ki Phir 
iiin;i lio: tere iuidn nc tujhe changi 
kiyd. 

43 Wuli uh! dam dekhne lagi, aur 
Klunid ki tn'rif knri-d hiid ub ke 

Sichhe chala. Aur sah logon ne 
ckhkc Khudd ki ta'rif ki. 
XIX KAU. 

AUR wuh Yarihn inen hoke jdtd 
tha. 

2 Aur, dekho, Zakkf udine ek mard 
ne, jo mahsu l-l«uewdlon k& sardar aur 
daalatnuDd tha, 

3 (.'halia ki Yisu' ko dekhe, ki j dawand, tori mind 
kaun hai; lekin bhir ke eabab dekh'kin. 
na saka, kyiinki nati tha. 

4 Tab dge daurku ek gdlar ko per 
l>ar ckarh gayd, ki use d>-khe : kydnki 
wuh usi lah se jdue ko tha. 

5 Jab Yisii' ua jagah pahunchd, 
«pai 1 nigdh ki, aur use dekhke us se 
kahd, Ai Zakki, jald utar d ; kyunki 
aj mujho tere ghar rahrid zarur hai. 

6 Tab us ne jald utarke khushi se 
us ko (jabdl kiyd. 

7 Jab sabliog ne yih dekhd, kur- 
kurdke kahd, kfWuh ek guuakgdr ke 
yafidn ja utrd hai. 

8 Par Zakki no khare hoke Khudd- 
wand sa kahd, Dekh, ai Khuddwand, 
main apni adhd mdl gari'bon ko <lota 
biig, aur agar kisi ka kuchh dagabaid 
Be fiyd hai, ub ka ck&uguna detil lu'in. 

9 Tab Yisu' ne us ko kahd, ki A'j 
ib ghar mon najdt di, is liye ki yih bhi 
Abimliani ka betd hai. 

10 Kyiiiiki Ibu i A' dam dya hai, ki 
kboe hue ko dhiindhe aur bochdwo. 

11 T Aur jab w'cyiheun rahe the, 
ua ne, is liye ki Yariisalam ke nazdik 
llia, aur we khivdl karte the ki Khudd 
ki badfihdhat ablii sihir hnd clidhti 
hai, ek tamsil bhi kahi ; 

12 Aur yun kahd, ki Ek amfr dur 
ke miilk ko chald, td ki apne liye 
bddahdhi leke phir dwe, 

105 



13 Us ne apne naukaron roen se dus 
ko bulake dua niind uu ko din, aur uri 
se kahd, ki Mere phir dne tak hyohar 
karo. 

14 Lekin ub ke shahr ko ddrai us se 
dustnnani rakhte the; aur us ke 
pichhe payam bhejko kahd, ki Ham 
nahin cha'hte ki yih ham. par bdd- 
sbdhat kari:. 

15 Aur yun hi'iti, ki jad wuh bdd- 
shdhi leke phir dya, i n naukaror, ko, 
jinhen riipiya Bonipc the, bula bhcja, 
ki jane ki har ek nc kaiad byohar 
kiyd. 

Iti Tab pahle ne ake kahd, Ai klm- 
das mind paida 



Us ne uae kahd, Shdbdsh, ai 
achchhe taukar ; 'm liye ki balmt thora 
mcii t& fmdnddr nikld, ab ti'i das shai'ir 
par ikhtiyar rak h. 

18 Aur dusre ne dko kahd, Ai khu- 
ddwand, teri mind ne piiich mind 
] liiiihi kin. 

19 Us ne uso bhi kahi, Tn bhi 
pduch ahahr kd sarddr ho. 

20 Tiat» ne dk« kahd, Ai khudi- 
wand, dekh apni udna, jis ko iiuun uu 
riiindt mun bdndh rakhd hai : 

21 Kyt'mki main tujb «e dartd thi, 
ki lu sakht adu ii hai ; ki t u leta liai 
jo nahin rakhd, aur kdttd hai jo nahin 
boyd. 

22 Us ne use kahd, Ai namak-ba- 
rdm naukar, main tujb ko tere hi 
nmuh se qdil kitrta hiin. Jab tii nc 
jaiia ki main sakht admi lnin, aur jo 
nahin, rakhd, letd, aur jo nabib boyd, 
kdttd h tiii ; 

23 To mere rfipiyoc ko sairdf ki 
kothi inon kyiin ua rakhd, ki main dke 
use siid «ainct letd ? 

24 Tab us uo un se, jo us ke psa 
khare llie, kahd, ki Wuh miud us se 
lu, aur das luiudwalo ko do. 

25 (Tad uuhon no use kahd, Ai 
Khuddwand, us ke pas dua miud to 
haiii.) 



J/W/i hi nawiir JtoJce LTJ'QA', XX. Tarumlam mtn ddkhil Jioita- 

20 Is liyc main tum se kahta hiiij,jMain tutu se knhti h6n, ki Agar ye 
ki Jib ke pds bal, ue ko diyd JAagst j chup rabun, to MtthWelulUegge, 



r jis ke uahin, us se wuh blii jo us 
ke paa hai, h liyi jaega. 

Ii7 Pnr ttWt 6B1 'lnsliTujinoTi ku, 
jinhon ne na chdhd ki main mi par 
hadsh&hi karun, yaliin lao, aur nuere 
tjmfciw qntl karo. 

2* K Aur jab yih balenkah chuka, 
£ga hirlike Yanisalam ki taraf eh a la. 

29 A.ur aisd hrta, ki jab Baitfaga 
aur Bail'aniya ke ntfdfk us patuk ke 
pas, jo Zaituni kahldta hai, aya, apne 
shik'irdon men w do ko yih kahke 
bheja, ki" 

30 Sarahce ki basti nicu jao ; aur 
us men ihikliil hote hue «k gadhi ki 
baclicha liaudha paoge, jis par kabin 
kuiddmi sawarnahin rifii : use kliolke 
lao. 

31 Aur agar koi tum ao puchho, ki 
Kyi.;n kbolte ho? use yiin kahu, ki 
Yih Khudawaud ko darkar hai, 

32 Su bhcje hi'ioc nejake, jaiaa us 
ue un sci kaha, waisa hi paya. 

33 Aur jab gadhe ka baoheha khol- 
ne lage, us ke inalikoii ue un bu kaha, 
ki Is bactiche ko kyuu kholte ho? 

34 Unhon ne kaki, ki Kbudawand 
ko darkar hai. 

35 Aur wo us ko Yibu' ke pas lae : 
tiur apno kapra us bacbcbe par bi- 
ihliike YisiV ko sawar kiya, 

36 Jab jaid tha, unhon do apne 
kapre nih mvn biohiae. 

37 Aur jab wuh mudik, baiki 
Zaitun ko pabdr ki utdr par pahunehd, 
us ke sbdgirdon ki sari jama'at sab 
kardinal* m ke sabab, jo dekhi thin, 
khush hokc bulaud awaz se Khuda 
ki ta-'rif karoe lagi ; ki 

38 Mubarak hai wuh badshah, k 
Khuda wand ke ndm si.' ata hai : asman 
[Hir sulh, aur 'diam i bala men. jaldl, 

39 Aur us bhir mori se ba'/e Farisf- 
on ne use kaha, ki Ai ustad, apue shd- 
gfrdon ko dant. 

40 Um nu jawjib men ira se kaha, 

ioti 



■1 1 1 Aur jab mudik like sbahr ko 
dekha, us par roya, 

42 Aur kaha, Kash ki tii apne isi 
din men im liaton ko, jo teri salamati 
ki hain, janta 1 par ab wo teri aakhon 
ao cKhipi hain. 

43 Kyiinki we din tujh par dweTige, 
ki tere dublnuau tere gird niorcha 
lii'unllike, aur charon or gherke, tujhe 
sab taraf «e tBEts kareu-^c, 

44 Aur tujh lio, aur tere larkon ko, 
Jo tujh men hain, kliiik men miia- 
wengu ; aur we tujh mcii patthar po 
jiatthar na clihorenge ; is liye ki tu ne 
us ivaipi ko, ki tujTi par nigah thi, na 
pahcliaua. 

45 Tab haikal men jaku unben, jo 
us meg bechteHur kharidte tlic, nil;:ti 
ue laga ; 

4G Aur fin se kaha, I.iklt.-i hai, ki 
Mera gliar 'ibadat ka ghar hai ; pir 
tum ne us ko cborou kd khoh banaya. 

47 Aur wuh har roz haikal men 
ta'lim deta tha, Magar sardar kdhin, 
aur faqih, aur qaum ke aardir, chahte 
the ki us ko ii«tl kareg, 

48 Par yih karae ki koi tadbir na 
pdte the ; kyunki sab log us ki suuno 
ke liye us se lage rahe. 

X£ BA' B. 

AUK iinhin dinon men ek din, jab 
wuh haikal men logon ko 
ta'lim aur khush-khabari duta tha, 
aiaa hua, ki sardar kahiii aur faqil), 
buzurgon ko sath, us ke pas a khai'e 
huc ; 

2 Aur kuline lage, ki Uam m kah, 
tii kis ikhtiyar se yih kartd hai? aur 
kauii hai, jb no tujh ko yih ikhtiyar 
diya ? 

3 Us ne unhen jawdb men kaha, ki 
Main bin tum bo ek bdt piichhta hun ; 
mujli sekaho; 

-i Yiihannd kd baptiama aemdn se 
tha., ya lUlmion seV 
5 Uuhon nu Apas men salib ki, ki 



Tdkittdn H tamsil. LIJ'QA' 

Al'ilt ham kahen, A'srnan se ; to wnhi 
ittuveeft, l'hir timi ne uso ky&n mi 
mana 't 

'j Aur agar ham kahen, ki A'dmioa 
se; to sab lo^ ha.ni par patthrau kar- 
fflge: kyunki unheri yaijiu hai, ki 
Yuhanud nabi thd. 

7 Tab unhon ne jawdb diya, ki ham 
nahin jantu, ki kahan se thd. 

6 Yisfi' ue u» ko kaha, Main biii 
tum se nahin kahtii, ki yih kis ikhti- 
ydr se kuda lilin. 

y 5" l'hir wah logon se yib tamsil 
kabnu laga ; ki Kisi shakhs nt ek an- 
giir k» bag lagake use bdgbduon ke 
HUpurd kiyd, aur wuddat tak pardes 
men ja raba. 

10 Aur maushtt par ek nauknr ko 
baghaiion ku pas bheja, td ki we us 
angiir ke bag ka phal us ku den ; lekin 
b£gbaBQB ne ua ko pitko khali hati; 

pii,:i-d. 

11 Pkir us ne di'isrc otoku ku 
bbeji ; iinhon ne us ko bhi pitke, aur 
be-'izzat karke, khdli hdth pnerd. 

12 Kiir us ne tisre ko bhejd ; un- 
hon ue gbiiyul karke us ko bhi nikal 
diva. 

13 Tab us bdg ke mdlik ne kaha, ki 
Kya kariiij? main apno piyare bete 
ku lilujiinga: shdyad use dekhkardab 
i.i'-ij. 

14 Jab bdgbdnon ne uhc dekha, 
fcpU mq) salah ki, aur kaha, ki Vih 
waris hai : do, us ku mdr dalen, ki 
Mnv:is imuijri ho jae. 

15 Tab us ko bag ke bahar nikalke 
mdr d.ilii. Ab bag ka malik uu ko 
satu kya karegi? 

18 wuh dwega, aur un bagbanon 
ko qatl karegd, aur bag auron ko som- 
poga. Unhon ne yih sunku kahd, 
Aisd na howe. 

17 Tab ub ne un ki taraf dekhke 
kaha, Phir wuh kya hai, jo likha hai, 
ki Wuh pattltar ji»e raj^inm ne radd 
kiyd, mifci kone ka Kira hud? 

18 liar ck jo us patthar par giru, 

107 



', XX. Qai&ar ko jizyt dtme ki bibit. 
chur hoga ; aur jis par wuh gire, use 
pis dalega. 

19 ^ Tab earddr kahiuon aur faqi- 
hon ne cbdha, ki uni wnqt us par hdth 
dalcn ; par logon ee dare, kyiinki jdiid 
ki yih tamsil unhin ke liaiju. men kahi. 

20 Aur us ki tak men the, aur un- 
hon nc kai jasuson ko bhejd, ki rast- 
ba>.on ka bhes ikhtiyir karke uh ki 
koi bat pakar pdwen, wi ki us ko hakim 
ke ^abzaoikhtiyarnjeit haivalakarcn. 

21 Tab unhon ne uh se piichlia, ki 
Ai Ustad, ham jdnte hain ki tu du- 
rust kahtd aur sikhatd hai, aur zdhir 
uar nazar nahin karta, baiki sachdi se 
Khudd ki nih batara hai : 

22 Hamen Qaisar ko jizya dena 
rawa hai, ki aahin ? 

23 Par us ne un ki dagftbdzi daryaft 
karke un se kaha, ki Mujh ko kydii 
daiuato ho ? 

24 Ek dinar mujhe dikbdo. U» par 
kis ki surat aur sikka hai? Unhou 
ne us ke jawab men kahd, Qainar ka." 

25 Tab us ue uu se kaha, Pas jo 
(Jaisar kd hai, Qaisar ko do, aur jy 
iylmdd kd hai, Khudd ko. 

20 Aur we logon ke dge us ki bat 
pakar na saken : aur us ke jawab «e 
ta'ajjub karke chup ho rahe. 

27 1 Tab Sadnqiog meg se, jo qi- 
yamat kd inkdr karte, ba'eofl nc jhU 
ake us ae yih kahke piichlia, ki 

28 Ai Usidd, Miisd ne hamilre liye 
likhd hai, ki Agar kisd kd bhdijuru 
(.■hhorkc mar jde, aur wuh be-auldd 
mar jae, to \w ka bhai tu kl joni ku 
iewe, aui 1 apuo bhdi ke liye nasi qdim 
kare. 

20 Ab sdt bhai the : pahlii, joni 
karke be-auldd mar gayd. 

30 Tab dusre ne us 'aurat ko liyii, 
aur w uli l.ilii be-aulid mnd. 

31 Tisre ne us ko liyd ; isi tarah un 
sdton nc; aur sah be-auldd mue. 

Aur sab ke ba'd wuh 'aurat bhi 

33 Pas ojydinat mcti un men se 



Qii/amat ki babat. LU'QA' 

wuh kis ki jorfi kogi? kyunki w uh 
sdton ki y>vn tlii. 

34~ Y isu' uc jawlb men un se kaha, 
ki Is jahin ke log bydh karte, aur 
bydhe jitu hairi. 

35 Lekin io log ns janin ke aur 
uiyimat ku shar'tk hone ke ldiq Jhn- 
harfe, lia bydh karte hain., aur ua 
bydbo jdtc ; 

36 Phir nahin marnc ke: kyunki 
wo (irishton ki manind haijt; aur 
qiyamat ku bete lioku Khuda ke bete 
hain, 

37 Aur murdon ke ji uthne par 
Miiwa ne bbi jliari ke ahwdl ke bayan 
iii.n Lahan kiya ; chuiianchi Khudd- 
wnml ko Al'imliiiin kd Khuda, aur Iz,- 
haq kd Khuda, aur Ya'uub kd Khuda 
kalita hai. 

38 Lekin Khuda murdorj ka Khu- 
da nahin, baiki zindon kd hai : ki sab 
us ke pda zinda hain. 

30 f Tab ba'zc fiuphon ne jawab 
men use kabi, ki Ai Uetdd, tii ne 
kluili farindyd. 

40 lia'd us ko kian kd hiwdo na 
pari ki us «o kuchh piichhe, 

41 Aur uh ne un se kahd, Kis tarah 
kahte hain, ki Masih Ddiid kd Be$d 
hal '? 

4- Aur lWid Zabur ki kitdb men 
np kalita hai, ki Khudawand ne nicro 
Khudawand ae kahd, ki Mere dahiue 
lullli mi baith, 

43 Jab tak ki main tere dushmauon 
ko tere pdnwon ki cliauki karibi. 

44 Pas Ddrtd to use Khudawand 
kahtd hai, phir wuh m kd betd kia 
tarah hiid? 

45 % Jab sah log sun rahe the, ua 
ne apne ehdgirdun w kaha, ki 

4ti Faoihon se khabardar raho, jo 
lanibi posliak pabine phirnd chihte, 
aur bdziron men talam ko, aur 'ibd- 
datkhanori men aadr kursion ko, aur 
liiilunaiiiorj mon lipar ki jagahon ke 
muhhtdq hain; 

47 Webcwon ki-gharonkokhdjite, 
108 



, XXI. Oarib bewa kr. do ckhadam. 
aur dikbdnc ke liye lanibl diauri na- 
mdn karte hain ; pas unhin ko ziydda 
saza uiilegi. 

XXI BA'B. 

U S ne ankh uthake dauUtmand >ij 
ko, jo ki npni nazr liaikal ke 
khazdna men dalte tlie dekha. 

2 Aur ek kangdl bowa ko bh( do 
clihaddm ddlte dekha. 

3 Tab us ne kaha, Main tam ia 
saoh kahtii lilin, ki is kangal bewa M 
sab se ziydda dala : 

4 Kyuijki un wabkon no apne ziyd- 
da tnfi u Kliudi ki nazrog men ddld: 
]wir us ne apni garibl ki sdrf piiuji 
ddli. 

5 *{ Aur jab ha'ze liaikal ke haqq 
men kahte the, ki wuh nafi» patihai- 
on aur liadyon sc drdsla hai, us ne 
kabd, 

C We di n dwcnge, ki un merj se jo 
tura dekhte ho, patthar p:ir jiatthar uit 
chliiitegd, ki girdyd na jac. 

7 Tab unhon ue ub m pilckud, ki 
Ai TT«tad, yih kah bogd? aur ua ke 
hone kd kyd iiUlian hal V 

8 Us ne kahd, Dekbo, koi tum ko 
gumrdb na karc: kyiinki bahutere 
mere ndm par awenge, aur liaiienge, 
ki Main wuhi biin j aur ki Wacjt naz- 
dik hai : i«ir un ko pichhe na jdiyo. 

9 Am jab lardlori aur fasddon ki 
khabar suuo, tt> na ghabrdiyo: kytin- 
ki pjihle uu kd w4qF hond zarur hai ; 
par ab tak akhir ualiin. 

10 Plilr us no un se kaha, ki Q,iuin 
qaum par, aur badshihat badshdhat 
par e hari i dwcgi. 

11 Aur jagah ba jagah bare bare 
bhuncbdl dwerjge, aur kdl aur mari 
paregi : aur bhaydnak chizen aur bare 
barc ni&hdn dsman se ^aliir hongc. 

12 Lekin in sab bdton se pahle we 
mere nam ke sabab tum par hdth 
(ldlcnge, aur BatawaggSj aur 'ibadat- 
khdnon aur qaidkliduuQ mori k>gon ke 
hawdla kareDc;' , , aur hadsbdhon. aur 
liakhnon ke pas khincbeijge. 



Yarit&alam A-t garatjo hogi. LX T 'QA' 

13 Aur yih tumhare liye gawahi 
:haiiri'i;i. 

14 Pas apne iVil meg thaliri raklio, 
ki haru pahle sc likr ua karen, ki kyd 
jawab dejjge. 

15 Is liye ki main tumben aisi zubAn 
aur hikmat duiigii, ki Uinihdro sal» 
dnshnian khilaf kahne, aur adnihna 
kamc kii maqdur na rakhenge. 

16 Aur tum nid bdp, aur bhAlon, 
aur rishtaddi-orj, aur doston se bhi 
giriftiir kiye jiogo ; baiki wo lum men 
80 ba'zog ko qatl karenge. 

17 Aur mere ndm ke sabab sab log 
tum Ke kina rakhenge. 

18 Lekin tumhAre sir ki t'k bal bhi 
giraya na jiegi. 

1U Tum sabr 6e apui jin baehao 
rskho. 

20 Aur jab tum Yarusalam ko fau- 
jon se ghira dekho, to jdn lo ki us ka 
ujar bumi nazdik hai. 

)il Tab we, jn Yahiidiya men hon, 
juihanm par bhag jaen, aur we, Jo 
shahr men bon, bahar nikal jaen ; aur 
we, jo dihat mun bon, bhi tar na iweft, 

22 Kviinki we dm intiuam ke hain, 
ki Bab, ju likhd hai, pdrA hogA. 

23 Far un dlnon men iietwalion, 
aur dddh-pildnewalion par at'aos ! ky- 
tinki zainfn par hari tangi aur is qaum 
par ga^ab hogd. 

24 Aur we talwdr ki dbdr sc gir 
jaenge, aur asi r hoke sab qaumon ke 
darmiyin pahunchae jierjge, aur jab 
tak gair-qaumon ki \vaqt puri na lio, 
Kusulam gair-qaumon se raundi 
jacgi. 

25 % Aur siiraj o chdnd aur tiron 
men nishAnlAn hongi j aur zamin par 
qiunniin ki niusiliat, aur uamundar aur 
us ki lahron ke shor ke sabab ghabrd- 
h:U bwrl : 

20 Aur logon ki, dar ke roire, aur 
un chi/.on ki jo zamin par atl hain 
rali dekhne se, jin men jan na rahegi ; 
is liye ki Asmin ki miwaten hflai 
i;t<'Uirj. 

109 



XXII. Mtttth ke pftfr une ki bafxil. 

27 Aur tab log Ibn i A'dam ko badli 
men qudrat aur bare jalai ke sath ate 

deknegge, 

28 Aur jab yih ehi/.en hone lagag, 
sidhe hoko Bir lipar utbAo; is liye ki 
tum hara chhutkira nazdik hai. 

29 Aur us nc un se ek tamsil kahi ; 
ki Anjir ke darakhtaur sab darakhtou 
ko dekho ; 

30 Jab un men konpalen nikalti 
hain, tum ip hi dekh karke jAiite bo 
ki ab garmi nazdik ii. 

■'U So isi tarah tum bhi, jab in 
obizon ko hote dekho, to jano ki Khu- 

ki badsbahat nazdik Ai. 

.'■- Hain tum sc sach kalita Iiiin, 
ki Jab tak yih sab lio na luwe, yih 
pusht hargiz na gtizregi. 

33 A 'aman o zamin bal jienge : par 
meri baten kabhi na talungi. 

34 1 Apne se khabardar raho, aisi 
na howo ki tumhara dil babut khdne, 
nurmatwdld h'.me, aur Kindagi ki iiknuj 
Ke bhdri ]u\ aur wuh diu tuin par aclia- 
nak a pare. 

35 Ia liye ki wub, jal ki tarah, za- 
min ke sah rahiiewalon ko glier legd. 

3C l'ae jdgte raho, aur har waqt 
du'i mdngo, tA ki tum in sab chizon 
sc, jo honewili bain, bach jane ke aur 
Ilm i A'dam ke simhne khoro hone ke 
iaiq tiialiro. 

37 Aur wuh, din ko, haikal men 
ta'lim doti, aur rit ko, biliar jAko 
Zaitilni ndme pabir par rabti tbi. 

38 Aur subh ko sab log us ki bAten 
sunae ko haikal mon Ate the. 

XX IT BAU 

A B 'Sd i fatir, jia ko 'id i fasab kahte 
hain, nazdik Ai. 
2 Aur sardar kAhin aur faqih tadbir 
meo tbo ki us ko kis tarah mir dAlen ; 
kytinki logon se darte the. 

;t ^f Tab SbaitAn YahudAh men, jo 
Iwkariyiiti kahlAlA, aur barahou ki 
ginii men tbd, aamdyd. 

4 Us uo jAkc sardar kihinon aur 



A'khiH *id ifamh LU'QA' 

sipdhiorj ke wnnlar se saldh ki, ki us ko 
kia tarah un ke bawila kaie. 

5 Wo khush hiie, aur uae rupiya 
den o ki iqrar kiyd. 

G Usaemtin liyA^ :mr n.i>>i'i (ltnindh- 
ta thd ]tl bagair hangama ke use un 
ko hawdla kare. 

7 \ Tab fatfr ka din, jis metj Tasah 
Babi kanta fitri! tbd, iya. 

■i Yisti' ne Patrus aur Yukannd ko 
yih kaitke bhcjd, ki Tum lio, bamire 
liye (asah taiy&r kato, td ki klideis. 

9 Unhon ne ubc kabd, Tu kabin 
chdhtd hai ki baui taiydr karen? 

10 Ua uo un Be kabd, Dekho, jab 
shahr ntim dakhil hoge, ek ddmi pdnl 
ka. ghard liye tumhi'n roib^a ; jis <:har 
trterj wiih jde ot ke piclthe cbaie jao. 

11 Aur ghar ko milik ne kaho, ki 
Ustid bahti hai, ki Wuh roihmin- 
khana kanan bai, jis meu main apne 
shairinltm ke sdth fasali kodim? 

12 Wuli tumben ek bani i>dhikhd- 
na farab bichha dikhdwegd : wahln 
taiydr karo. 

13 Unhon ne jdke,jatsd us ne un 
ne kaha thd, pdyd, aur fasah taiydr 
kiyd. 

14 Aur jab waqt dyd, wuh anu 
barah rasulon ko sdth' khdne baithd. 

15 Aur un se kaki, llujbc ban 
khwdhish thi, ki duk h e ah n e ke dge 
yib (asali tumhftre sath khdiin : 

W Kytirjki main tam nokahtdhtiri, 
ki Use phir kabhtS na khdilngd, jab 
tak Kbudd ki badshdnat menteri na 
ho. 

17 Aurpiydla ko leke abnkr kiyd, 
nur kaha, ki U ko k>ko lipan men birit 
lo: 

18 Kyunkimain tum sekahfdhun, 
ki Angur kd ras pbir na piuggd,jab 
tak Ktiuni ki Mdshihat na km, 

19* t Phir roti li, aur shukr karke 
teri, aur yih kaiike un ko di, ki Yih 
iricrd badan bai, io tambar* wdste 
diya jdtd hai: yib meri yddgdri ke 
waste kiyd karo. 
110 



XXII. H babat, 

20 Aur isi tani) kh&Le ke ba'd us 
piyala ko lekar kabd, ki Yib piyala 
tuero labu se, jo tiimhire waste bahaya 
jatd hai, ek naya 'abd bai. 

21 1 Par, «Ykho, us kd hdth, jo 
mujbe ghiftir karwiti bal, awet anti 
tuez par hai. 

22 Bo rbn i A'dam to, jaiad ub ke- 
Aste muqarrar hai, jdtd bai : magar 
s Bbakhs parafso\jo nsegirifiAr kar- 

wdtA bai I 

23 Tab we Apa* nmii puchbnfl lage, 
bt ham men m wuh kauu hai, jo yib 
karogd ? 

24 ^J Aur un iimn takrir tbi, ki 
ha.m men so kauu nal» se bara tbahre. 

2.'i 0a ne un se kaha, ki Qaiunon 
ke bddsbdh un ]jar bukiimat karb:; 
bain ; aur jo log un par ikhtiyar rakh- 
te hain, kluulriwaud i ui'amat kahlitt. 

26 Tar tum aise na ho; baiki jo 
tum men bard itai, cbhote ki, aur 
koiwind khidiuat-karocwdlc ki iitit- 
niud ho. 

27 Kyiinki kauu bara bai, wuh jo 
khdne bailTid, yd wuh jo khidmat kar- 
td bai? kya w n b nabin, io khane 
liaithdhai? lekin main tumhdre dar- 
miydn kiiuluiat-karnewdle ki miiiind 
hun. 

28 Tum wc bi ho, jo meri dzma- 
isbon men sadd mere siitb rahe. 

29 Aur jaisd mere Bdp ne mere liye 
ek bidah dbai muqaxrar ki, main l»hi 
tumbin liye rjauqarxar karti hun ; 

30 TA ki meri bidsbdbat men me- 
ri mes par khao, pio, aur takhton jtar 
baithkar Isrdcl ke bdraii gharinon ki 
'adilat karo. 

31 t Phir Khudawond ne kahd, 
Sbama'dn, ai Snarria'iiii, dekh, Sbai- 
tdn ne cbdhA ki tumhen gehi';n ki 
taralt pbatke ; 

32 Lt-k'in main ne tere liy.! du'i 
mdngi, ki terd imdn jdtd na raba i aur 
jab tii phire, to apne bhatag ko maa- 
b6t kar. 

33 Tab us ne use kabd, ki Ai Khu- 



Patrvs H bdbat peshingoi. LU'QA' 
ddwand, main tere sath qaid hoiie, 
baiki tnarne ko taiyAr lirin. 

34 Tad ub ne kabd, Ai Patrus, 

main tujh se kahtA hun, ki dj murg 

i dega, jab tak tu tin martaba 

mera inkar na kare, ki main use na- 

hiri jAntd. 

SG Aur 110 ne un sc kaha, ki Jnb 
main ne tmnhcn bc batuc, aur be 
jholi, aur be ivition ke bhejd, k y A tum 
ko kisti ebi/ ki hajsit Mi ? Unbon ne 
kahA, Kisu ki nahiii. 

36 TJs ne unhen kaha, Par nb jis 
ke pas hat.i'i A bo, lewe, aur isi tarah 
jboli bhi; aur jin pAs nahiy, ai>ue 
kajiru beckke talwar kharide. 

'■'■'• K > i'i ijU i main tum se kabtd hun, 
ki yih nawishta, ki Wuh bedug n "'L! 
ginA gaya, sarur liai ki mere haqq 
mtn uiirA ho : is liye ki yib baten, jo 
mori babat hain.anjdm taknahuLchtiii. 

38 Unhon ne kaliA, ki Dekb, ai 
Kb.ud.wami, yakin do talwAr haig. 
UH nn un se kaha, Bahut hai. 

39 *{ Aur wuh nikalko apne das- 
tur |»r Zaitiin ke pabdr ki taraf cha- 
Id : aur tis ke shAgird us ke pichhi! bo 
Uye. 

40 Aur ua jagak pahunehke ua nc 
un se kahA, Du'a mangu, tA ki A/.md- 
iah men na paro. 

41 Aur us ne un se tir ke ek jpppe 
par barbke ghutne tekkar du'A nian- 
gi, aur kaha, ki 

42 Ai Bdp, agar tu cbdhe, to yih 
piyala mnjli sc dur kari: ; lckin nafiri 
onani turbin, baiki teri niarzi ke mu- 
wdfiq ho. 

43 Aur dsmdu se ek firishta us ko 
dikliAi di ya. jo usu quwat detA thA. 

44 Aur wuh jdukani men phan*fc6 
bahut girgirdke du'd mdngtd thA; aur 
us kA paai'na lahu ki biind ko mAnind 
liukiir /.amin par gind thA. 

45 Aur du'A se uthkar apne shd- 
girdon ke pda dyd, aur unhen yam s* 
Bote pdyd, 

4(i Aur «n se kabd, ki Tum kyun 
111 



', XXII. Masih foi giri/tar ftoRti 

sote ho? uthkar du'd mSngo, tA ki 
AzmAJah men ua paro. 

47 1f Wuh yih kah rahA tha, ki dc- 
klm, ek bhir dikkiii di, aur ek uu ba- 
rahon men se, jo Yahudah kahlutd 
tba, uu ke Age Age Lukar Yiku' pit 
d ya, ki us ko cliunte. 

48 Tab Yisti' ne use kaha, k i Ai 
Yahudah, kya tu Ibn i A'dam ko bau 
se pakarwdta hai 'i 

49 Jab unhon ne, jo us ke ird gird 
the, wuh lidi ju houewdld thd dek ha. 
to use kabd, Ai Khuddwand, kya bam 
talwar chaldwon ? 

50 1 UB men se ek ne sarddr ka- 
bin ke naukar ko lagai, aur u ka 
dahind kdn urd diyA. 

51 Tab Yisti' ne jawdb men kaha, 
Itne hi par rahno do. Aur DJ ke kdn 
ko chhukar us ko changd kiyd. 

"i2 Phir Tisii' ne sarddr kAbiimii. 

haikal ke Hardaruii, aur btunrgOfl 

jo ns par charh Ae the, kuini, ki 

Tum jaise chor iwktirae ko taiwarei. 

aur ldthiAn tekar nikh' ho? 

63 Main hai n» haikal men tum- 
bdre sd<h thd, aur tum ne mujli ptt 
hdtb na ddlA ; lekin yih tundiaii 
ghftrf, aur zulmat ka ikhtiyar IilU. 

54 T Tab we use jiakarke le chale, 
aur aarddr kdhin ke ghar men le gaye. 
Aur l'atnis diir dur us ku pohhe 
elialA jata tha. 

55 Aur jab unbon nc ddldn ke bieh 
men dg jaldf, aur uiilkar Itiuthe the, 
Fatrus un ke bieh men baitha. 

5(3 Ek laundi ne uae Ag ke ji.is hni- 
thA dekhkar us par kbiib ni«Ab knv- 
b babi, Yib bhi us ko sAth thd. 

57 Par us ne us kd inkdr karke ka- 
bd, Ai 'aurat, main use nahin jdnta. 

68 Thori der ba'd kisi aur ne use 
dekhkar kabd, ki Tu bhi un men ae 
hai. Fatrus ne kahA, ki Ai Adrai. 
main naliirj linu. 

59 Ghauje ek ba'd aur kisi'i ne td- 
kid sc kah A, ki Yih ddmi be-shakk us 
ke sdth thd: kyunki Jalili hai. 



Yahiidi ug par fatwa dete. 

60 Pfttrua ne kaha, Ai shakhw, 
main uahin aamajhtd ki lu k ya tah- 
ta hai. Yih knh hi rahd tbd, ki jhat 
niurg ne bau g di. 

61 Tab Khuddwnnd ne phirke 
Patras par tti^rih ki. Aur l'atrus ko 
Khnddwand ki bat jo usc kahi, ki 
uurg ki bdng dene ite dge tii incrd 
titi bar inkar karena, ydd ai. 

62 Aur Patnu bahar jdke zor zar 
voya. 

63 T Aur we mard, jin ke baw&le 
Yiaii' tha, lis ko that.the incn urane 
aur marmi lago. 

64 Aur us ki dnkh mdndke 
rminb. par taraslnchn mAre, aur us ne 
yih kahke pnchhd, ki Nubtiwat M 
kali, ki kis ne tnjh ko mara? 

ti."j Aur «s ke ha.qq mcn aur bhi 
bahu t kufr bake. 

06 ^ Aur jab din hiia, logon ke 
lni/.ur'ioij, aur sardAr kdhinon, aur 
faqihon ki jama'it lagi, aur we use 
;t.pni 'adalatgah msn laV, aur kaha, 

67 Agar tvi Maxih hai, to ham se 
kah. (Jh ne un «e kaha, Agar ranin 
t.tim ae kanun, to tum yaqin na kar- 
ogo: 

68 Aur agar puchhtin bhi, to mujhe 
jawab na doge. aur na chhoroge. 

68 Ab se Ibn i A'dam 'Kbuda ki 
qurtrat ke dahiuu hati) baitM rahegd. 

70 Tab sabhon ne kahi, Pm kva 
trf Khnda ka Beta hai ? Us ne un se 
tahi, Jo tum kahto ho wuh hi main 
hdn. 

71 Tab unhon ne kaba, Ab namun 
aur gawdbi kya darkar '< kyugki hai?} 
ne us hi ke niunb se sirna. 

XXIII BA'B. 

AUR sari jama'at uthke ubo Pildtus 
pas le gayi. 
2 Aur ua par nalish karni sburiV 
ki, ki ise bain ue qaum ko bahkatc, 
aur Qaisar ko malmil dene ae man'a 
tuirto, aur apne ta,iu Masih bidahah 
kahte paya. 



Tab l'ilatus ne 
112 



LU'QA', XXIII. Vs ko Pi?ri(«sjKi« Ujand. 
Kyd tii Yahudion ka Badsbdh hai ? 
Ha ne us ke jawab men kaha, WuM 
hai jo td kahti. 

i Tab l'ilatus ne sardar Vahinorj 
aur logon m kahd, ki Main is shakhs 
ka kuchh qusiir nahin pata. 

5 Par unhon nc aur bhi tundi se 
kaha, ki Yih Jatil sn lokar nara Ya- 
hiidiya men, yahiin tak, ta'lim de de 
lo^ron ko ubharia hai. 

(j Hilatus ne .lalil ka nam sunkar ' 
piichhd, ki kyd yih admi Jalili hai ? 

7 Jad jaili- ki Hcrodis ke 'amal ka 
hai, ase Herodi» ]<&», jo un diuoii Ya- 
nisftlam men thd, bhejA. 

H ^ Aur Herodis \i-\C ko dokhke 
bahut khush hua: kyunld muddat se 
chahta tha ki usc dekhe, is Iiye ki 
us ki babat bahut, kuchh auna tha, 
aur ua ki koi karamat tlekhnc ki uni- 
1 1 K' d thi. 

U Aur ua no us sc bahu teri bdtcn 
puchhin ; par us ne uae kuchh jawab 
na diya. 

10 Aur sardar kahinon aur faqihon 
ne khare boke ua par siiMdat so ni£ 
lis h ki. 

11 Tab Herodis ne apni fauj garnet 
use nacbin thahrdya, aur usc chatn- 

:hamatf poshtik pahiniiku us ka ta- 
n.iskhur kiyd, aur phir Piliitus kane 
bheji. 

12 U Aur uni din Pildtus aur Her- 
ndis dpas rnen dost hn gaye; kyunki 
dge un men dnshmani thi. 

13 ^ Aur Pilatus ne aarddr kahin- 
on, aur sardaron, aur logon ko pas 
buliks un se kab.'i, ki 

14 Tum is shakliH ko mcre pds yih 
kahte Ide, ki Yih logon ko bahliata 
hai : dekho, main no tumhdrc dg(i 
taht]iq ki, par un (]usi'irori men se, jin 
ko tum us par thahrdte ho, main ne 

shakhs mcn kuchh na paya : 

15 Aur na llerodis ne : kydijki mairi 
m tmtihi.-n us ke pds bhejn, ; aur, de- 

Ikho, us kd koi nisi'i l.dm na thahrd. 



piichha, jo (jati ke hii'i ho. 



feo ,-hhor <J«,><i. LWQA', XXIII. 

Ifi Tb liyo u» ko tarnbih kfcrfc 
thhor ddy.ga. 

17' (U«e har 'M nieij znrur thA : 
kisd ko uu ko wdste chhor de.) 



.Wf.-iJi io «titt demi, 

31 Kyiinki jab hare darakht ke 
sdth aisd karte hain, to sukhe ke sdth 

i ' k yd uh k iya jdegd ',• 

32 Aur we do nur Admion ko, jo 



18 Tab sab milke chilUe, ki Use badkAr the, le chale, ki us ke sdth 
le jd, aur Barabbds ko hamdro liyo mdrejAeij. 
chhor. 33 Aur jab we us jagah par jise 



10 ('W uh kisd faaad, ]o sb.abr m 05 
hua tha, aurkhi'm ko siibab, qaid tha.) 

20 Pildtusne yih didhko ki Yisi'i' 
ko chhor de, phir unhen samjhdyA. 

21 Par unhon ne ohillako kaha-, ki 
Us ko salib de, salib do, 

22 ftarf bar usnc 1111 so kahA, Kyd[i? 
uh uc kyd badi ki hai? main uo us 
roen qatl ke latcj koi qusur na paya: 
i» Hyc main use tambih karke chhor 
dungd, 

23 Par unhon ne shor machdke use 
tang kiya, aur chaba ki use salib ilf 

i'le. Aur un ki, aitr fsard&r kahinon 
:l jiwa/.en galib lu'iiu, 

24 Tab Pildtus ne hukm kiya, ki 
«n ki khwAhish ke muwAfiq ho. 

25 Aur un ke waste us fchftkhl ko, 
jo faaad aur kbun ke sabab qaid tha, 
jise unhon ne cblha tha, chhor diya ; 
aur Yisii' ko un ki marzi par hawai» 
kiyd. 

26 Aur jab us ko le jate the, Sha- 
ma'i'm nam Qurcni ko, jo dlbdt se At-A 
tha, pakarko salib us ]>ar rak h di, ki 
Yisu ke pichhe pichhe le cliale. 

27 % Aur logon ki ban hhir, aur 
'auraten, jo uh ke waate chhdti pitti 
aur ro rahi thin, us ke picblie pfchhi 
chalin. 

28 Virtii* ne phirke un se kahA, ki 
Ai Yard salam ki betio, mujh par 
roo, baiki Ap jwir aur apne larkoii ]>ar 
roo. 

29 Kyiinki, dekho, we din tite hain. 
jin men kahenge, Mubarak hain ban- 
jlicn, aur wuh pet jo na jnne, aur we 
chhdtidn jinhon ue diidh im pilAyd. 

30 Tab paharon se kahna ahurii' 
karerjge, ki Hain jiar gir paro 
pahdrion se, ki Hamen chhipAo. 

' m 



Kalvari nam mkhle, n&hunche, to wu- 
han use salib di, aur badkdron ko bhi, 
ek dahine aur diisra bani. 

34 1 Aur Yisu'nckaha.ki Ai BAp, 
un ko mu'df kar; kyfinki we nahin 
jdnte ki kyd karte hain. Aur unhon 

chitthi ilAlke us ki |«»shdk birit li. 

35 Aur log khare dekh valie the. 
Aur sardar un ke »Ath tliaitba kacke 
kahte the, ki Auron ko baehayd ; agar 
yih Masih Khudd kd barjjuzida lini, 
to Ap ko bachawe. 

3ti Aur sipdliion nebhi usparhan-i 
ki, nur pas jdkar aur use i-irka dekur 
kahd, 

37 Agar td Yahudion kd MiUltil 
.i, to apne ta,in baehd. 

38 Aur us ke i'ijiar YiVndni, Rnmi, 
r Ibrani m'en yih nawishta likhd 
4, ki YIH YAIIU'Dl'OK KA' 

HA'DSHA'H HAL 

3',) T Aur ek un badk:i:urj meg se, 
jo salib par latkfte gaye the, use ta'na 
nidrke kahta tha, ki Agar td Ha*ih 
hai, to Ap ko aur hatn ko bachd, 

40 Ddsro ne uso maldiuat karke 
jawdh diyA, Kyd td bhi Kb.idd se na- 
hiri dartA, jis hdl bi is lii asi ihcii 
giriftdr hai* 

41 Aur bam to wajibi, kyiinki apne 
kdmon kd hadld pdte hain : par us n e 
to koi bejd kdiu uahln kiyd. 

42 Aur ua ne Yisd' se kaha, Ai 
Khuddwand, jab t& apni tAdahahat 
nien Awe, niujhe yad kijiyo. 

43 YisiV ne ueo kahA, Main tujh se 
sach kahta bdji, ki A'j ti'i mere sAth 
bibisht mon hogd. 

44 Aur chhatliwcTi ghante ke q»rib 
thd, ki i<ari zamiu par anaheri chhd 
gayd, aur nauwen ghante tak rahA ; 



Masih ji utftke «/> ko LU'QA", 

45 Aur Kilraj tarik ho gaya, aur hai- 
kal kaparda bich se phat gaya. 

46 1 Aur Yisu' uc bari iwaa ne 
pukarke kalut, ki Ai BAp, uiahj "I" 1 ' 
nih tere hilhon ruen aoniptaluin: yih 
knhke dam chhor diyi. 

47 Aur sii badar ae yih hal dekhkc 
Khu.ia ki ta'rif ki, aur kalia, Be-sliakk, 
vili admi ra«tbdK tha. 

48 Aur eab log, jo yih taruaHha 
dekhno ae the, jad yih wiqi'at dekhin, 
dihili pitte phire. 

41) Aur U8 ko aab janpahdiin, aur 
ttl 'aurateii, jo Jalil ae ua ke aath ai 
tliin, diir kbari hoke yih hal dek h rabi 
thin.. 

60 T Aur, dekho, ek nhakhs Yusuf 
oame uiut>hir, j*» nek aur rastbaz tha ; 

51 Aur wuh un ki salah aur kim 
uieti «harik na bila: yih Yahud ion ke 
shahr Aramntiya ki tha; aur w uh 
khud Khuda ki badalutliat ka intissir 
Urti th:i: 

5'2 Ua hb Pilatua ke pas jake liati' 
ki lish luan^i, 

53 Aur ua ko utarke kattin men 
lapets, aur ek q»br men, p pntthar 
uiiu kliudi thi,jah:Ln koi kabhu rakhd 
na gaya tha, rak ha. 

54 Aur wuh iaiyiri ka diu tha, aur 
sabt ke diu ki ]«u phatnc lagi, 

55 Aur we 'auraten. libi, jo ua ke 
sulii JaUl ae ai thin, pichlie pichbe 
clialiy,, aur qabr ko aur us ki Uah ko, 
kl ku tarah rakhi yayi, deSfcti thin. 

56 Aur phirke kiiushbuiin, aur 
murr taiyir kiyi; lekin ahar'a ke 
muwafln Bati ki> din aiilui kiya. 

XXIV BA'B. 

AUR we hafte ke pahle diu bon 
tarke, un khu&hbuiog ko jo tai- 
yir ki thia, leke qabr par ain, aur un 
ke sath kai aur bhi thin. 

2 Aur unhon ne pattliar ko qabr 
par ae dhalkaya luia paya. 

3 Aur amlar jake Khudawand Yisu' 
ki lasli ua pai. 

4 Aur aiaa htia, ki jad we u» bit se 

114 



XXIV. thagirdon par z&hir kartA. 
bairan thin, dekho, do shakha cham- 
chainiti posli&k pahine u n ke pas kbare 
the: 

o Jab we darti, aur apue sir zamiu 
par jhukati thin, unhon U un ae kaha. 
Timi kyviii /.imia ko niurdun men 
dliuudhtiiUi bo? 

6 Wuh yahan nahin hai, baiki ntha 
hai ; yad karo, ki han<>% jab Jalil men 
tha, tum bo kyi kahd tha, ki 

7 Zarur hai ki Ibn i A'dam gunah- 
^.ivin kl hiith men hawala kiya jae, 
aur salib diya jae, aur tiaro diri utlic. 

8 Tab us ki hiten unhen yad ain. 

9 Aur qabr par sc pbirke uu gya- 
rahon, aur sab baqi logon ko, in sab 
bat. m ki khal>ar di. 

10 Aui'Miii'iyani Mandul ini, aur Yli- 
anni, aur Mai-iyain, Ya'uiSb ki ma, aur 
duari 'auraten, jo aath thin, inhun tie 
rasiilcm ae yih baten kahin. 

11 f'ar iu ki l>iten unhen kahdni 
si samajh patin, aur uu kA i'atibar ua 
kiya. 

ia Tab Patrua uthke qabr ki taraf 
daura; aur jhukkar dekha ki eirt' 
kafan pari hai, aur is majare ae ta- 
'ajjub karta ht'ta apue ghar cliali gaya. 

13 T Aur, dekho, usi din un meij 
ae du admi us kasti ki tftraf, jis ka 
nim Ainmius, aur Yarusalam se pamit 
char kos ke faaila par h»i, jate the : 

14 Aur we uu aab batnn ki babat, 
jo waqi' h m thin, apaa men bit-chit 
kart« tbe. 

15 Aur aiaa bi'ia, ki jab we bitehit 
aur pi'ichh-pachh kar raho the, Yisu' 
Ap nimiik ike un ke aath chala; 

16 [,1'kin un ki dnkli<n band ho 
gayi thin, ki ua ko na pahcliftni. 

17 Us na un so kaha, Yih kya bdtcn 
hain, jo tuTii nih mon ipjiB mtn karto 
jati.' lio, aur udashote? 

18 Tab ek ne jis ki nim (Jliunas 
thi, jiiwdb mon u-se kahi, ki Kyi 
akeli tii hi Yarusalam men pafdeaf 
bal, ki jo Icaahh Lu dinog ua men Ma 
Iiai, naliiri jauta? 



Mtt& ji i/fhke dp ko LU'QA', 

19 Us ne un ne katili, Ky* ? Unhon 
ne usc kaili, Yisu' Kasari ke majare, 
jo nabi tha, aur Khuda aur sdri qaum 
ke sanihne karn aur kalam men qud- 
ratwald : 

20 Aur kyunkar sardar kabin aur 
harmire saidiron ne ub ko rjatl ke hukm 
he liye hawdla kiya, aur salib di. 

21 Par ham ummed rakhte the, ki 
yihi Israel ko makhlasf deno ko tha: 
aur iri si-b ke niwi, ;ij i isra roz hai ki 
yih wdqi'dr. huin. 

22 Aur haru meii nc kai'auratim ne 
bhi ham ko gliabra rakha hai, ki tarku 
U3 ki qabr par gayin, ; 

23 Aur uh ki lisk ko na piikar ain, 
aur bolin, ki Ham ne firishton ki royat 
di;khi, jiuhun ue kahd, ki W uh ziuda 
hai. 

24 Aur lia'/cj nc harnarc sathion 
men se qabr par jake, jaisa ki un 'aur- 
ftton m kaha, pava; par us ko aa 
dekil 

25 Tab un nc un se Italia, ki Ai na- 
dano, aur nabion k i Bari lidton ke 
mdnue inen sust-mizajo; 

26 Kya zari'ir na tha, l;i Masih yih 
dnkh uthawe, aur apne jaldl men dd- 
khil ho'? 

27 Aur Miisd ae, aur eab rabion se, 
ahurtf karke w uh baten, jo sab kitabuii 

e h: t .iq ineii hnin, un ke liye 
tafsir kiri. 

28 Aur we us baati ko, jahdn jate 
the, nam.Uk pahimcbe: aur ain ma- 
'iuni pari, ki wuh age barha cfaahta 
hai. 

29 Tab mihon ne use yih kahke 
rok a, ki Ilarnare satli rab : kyiinki 
Hharn htia chahti hai, aur din diiuld. 
Tab wuh bhitar jdke un ke sath rahd. 

30 Aur ai.ia bila, ki jab wuh nn ke. 
sdrh khiine baitha thi, roti Sekar OH 
imitabarrak kiya, aur torkn un ko ni. 

31 Tab un ki ankhen khul gayin, 
aur us ko pahehana; aur wuh un ke 
pas se gaib lio gayd. 

32 Tab imhon ne Apu s men kahii, 

115 



XXIV. sha-girdon par zdklr karld. 
Jab rak. men ham so b&'en kartd, aur 
hamare liye ki tabun ka bbed kholtd 
tha, to kya ham logon ke dil men josh 
na hila ? 

33 Aur usi ghari uthkar we Vani- 
salum ko pliire ; aur gyarahun aur un 
ke sathion ko ikatrue paya, 

34 Jo kahte tuu, ki Kbndawand 
h.-ic1i nnicli u tha, aur Shama'iin ko 
dikhai divi hai. 

36 Tad unhon ne nih ka bal bayan 
kiya, aur yih ki kyunkar unhon ne 
us ke roti torne men use pabulidml. 

36 1 Aur we yili bilten kar raiie 
the, ki Yiafi' dp un ke bich nan 
khard hiia, aur un se kaha, Tumhcn 
salai n. 

37 Par uuhou ue ghahrike aur dar- 
ke khiydl kiya, ki kisi nih ko dek'hte 
liain. 

38 Magar us ne un se kaha, ki Tum 
kyun ghabrdhat meii lu>? aur kain- 
ku tumhare dilurj men andeshe paida 
bote? 

39 Mere hath pdnwraj ko dekho, ki 
inaiii hi hfiii, aur inujiu: ehhiio, aur 
dekho; kyiinki nih koMsni nur haddi 
nahtn, jaisa nnijlt men ilekhtc ho. 

#0 Auryib kalike uuheg apne li&th 
aur ] Jiiuw dikhde. 

41 Aur jali we ni:irc kliuuhi ke 
i'atibar na karte, aur muta'ajjib the, 
us nu un so kaha, ki .Kya yahaij tum- 
hiire pis kuulih khane ko hai 'r 

42 Tab unhog. ne bhiini hril maohh- 
U ki't ek l.ukra, aur shabd ka ek ehbat- 
td us ko diyi. 

43 Ua ne leke un ke sauihne khaya. 
i4 Aur un Be kaha, ki Yih we hi 

biten hain, jinhra main no jab ki 
jtiinihdrts ^;ltii tha, tum se kahd, ki 
Zarur hai ki Kab kuchh jo Mfisa ki 
tauret, aur nabion ke nawishttjn, aur 
za buron, men, tneri babat likhtl hai, 
pura ho. 

45 Tab un ke rihnon ko kholi, ki 
kitdbon ko namjlieii ; 

46 Aur un m kalia, ki Yiin likha 



SaiAn YU'HANNA', I. mujassam hud. 

hai, aur yiin M zarnr thd, ki Masih I »0 Tf Tab wuli uuhen wahan se ba- 
dukh ut.hiwc, aur tlsre din murdun har lkit'aniya tak lo gaya; aur apne 
m,.!, n,. i'j ntlu-: hdtb. uthdke uulu.n harakat di. 

!~7 Aur 'Yantealam «o leke sari 51 Aur aisi bui, ki jak> wuh unhpr 
qamnim men tauba aur guuihog ki.barakat do rana thd, un se judi hii;i, 
nm'all ki nianadi ub ke u;iiu se ki jae. I aur aHmdn par uthaya gaya. 

18 Aur tum in bdton. ke gawih bo. 52 Aur unhon no ub ko uijda kiya, 
■19 5 Aur, dekli», main apne Uap 'aur ban khushi so Yaruealam ko 
ke uh mau'fid ko tum par bhejtd iu'in : phire : 

lekin ram, jab tak 'diam i haid ki| 68 Aur haiuesha haikal mcij Khu- 
(jiiwat bu nwhbbas na ho, Yanisalam dft ki ta'rif aur shukr karto ralie 
shahr men thahru. I A'iuin. 



YU'HANNA' KI INJIL. 



I BAU 

IBT1DA' men Kalam thd, aur Ka- 
limKhudake sdtli tha, aur Ka- 
)im Khmfi thd. 

2 Yilii ibtuli men Khudd ke sith 
tha. 

3 Sah cliizen iib se maujud hiiiij ; 
-iur koi chia maujud na thi jo hagair 
iib ke h lii. 

■1 Zuidagi ua raerj thi ; aur wuli 
rimja«l insan kii niir ihi. 

5 Aur aur tariki men chamakta 
hai : aur tariki u« uae dnrvaft aa 
kiya. 

Bf Elt shakhs Khiidd ki taraf se 
hheja giivii tiiri, jin kii nam Ytihannd 
thd. 

T Yih gawdhi ke iiyo ayd, ki Nur 
par gawdbi de, ta ki sab (ia ke ba'is 
H iman lawen. 

)< Wuh Niir na tha, par Nur par 
gawdhi denc ko dya tha. 

H Haqiqi Niir wuli thi, jo dunya 
nvin dke har ok admi ko roshan kartd 



10 Wuh jahil] i 
lUi 



i thi, aur jahau 



u» bi se maujud hiid, aur ja&an ra 

use na jana. 

11 Wuh apnon pds iya, aur apnon 
no use qabul na kiya. 

12 Lekin jitnon no use qabul kiya, 
us uc unhi'iL i'|Lidar bikliHlii, ki Khu- 
di ko farzand bon, ya'ne, unhen jo ns 
ku narn par iman lite Lain. 

113 Wo na lalui ae, na jiam kikhwa- 
Iiiaii se, na mard ki khwihiah ae, 
magW Kbudi k« paidi hue liain. 

li Aur Kalam mujassam hui, aur 
wuli fazl aur ristt se bbarpdr hoke 
ham&rv diirniiyaii rnlii, aur baui m- 
US ki aixi jaliil dekha, jaisi Bip ke 
eklaute ki jalil. 

15 H Yuhanna ne us ki bdbat 
gawibi di, aur pukdrke kabi, Yili 
wubj hai jis ki zikr main kartd tM, 
ki wuh jo mere pichhe di 
mujh se muqaddam hai ; k 
mujh se palilo thd. 

lfi Aur us ki bharpuri i 
aa piyd, baiki fazi par fwd. 

17 Kyunki shan'at M (Isi ki raa'- 
rifat sg di g.vyi, niagar fazl aur sachai 
Yisd* Ma.-ili so pahunehi. 



wili hai 

n k i wuh 



i huni w! b 



Mitiih ki babat Yultaana 



18 Khuda ko kisi ne kabhi na de- 
kliil ; eklautd Betd, jo Mp ki gud. 
uien hiu, usi ne batla diva. 

fa f Aur Yrihauud kS gawdhi yih 
thi, j«b ki Yahiidion ne Yaniaalam se 
kdhinoij aur Ldwion ko bbcju, ki oa 
se puchhen, ki Til kaun hai 't 

20 Aur w ne iqrdr kiyd, aur inkdr 
BN kiya; baiki iqrir kiy;i, ki Kain 
Masih nahin hi'm. 

21 Tab unhim ne us se ptichha, To 
aur kauo? Kya t (i Hiyds hai? TJs 
m; kahd, Mairj naluri Iniii, Paa, dyd 
tu wuh nabi hai ? Ua ne jawab diya, 
Naluri. 

22 Tab unhon ne us se kaba, ki 
Tu kanu hai 'f td ki haui unhon, jin- 
hnii \i<- huni ko bhejd, koi jawab den. 
Tu apac haqq mcii kya kahtA liai ? 

23 Usnekaha.ki Mairj.jaisd Vas'- 
aiydh nabi ne kahd, Baydbdn iniii eh 
piik;ini<'walu ki dwd/, lilin, ki Turn 
Khudawand ki rdh ko dumst karo. 

24 Magar ye Faritdori ki taraf se 
biicje gaye the. 

25 Aur iinhori ne us se isuw.il kiyd, 
aur kahd, ki Agar tu na Masih liai, 
ua liiyas, aur na wuh nabi, paa kyiirj 
baptismu deU hai V 

26 Yuhanni ue jawab moa unhon 
knhd, ki Main pdni se baptisma detd 
lilin : par tmuhare darmiyan ek khard 
hai, jise tam nahin jdnte ; 

27 Vib wuhi hai, jo mero pichhe 
anewala t ha. aur rnujh se muqaddain 
tiid, jis ki juti kd tasma main kholne 
ke ldiq nahin htin. 

28 Yih bdten Bait-'abdra moii Yar- 
ilau ke pdr, jahaij Yiihannd baptisma 
detd thd, wdid' huin. 

2i* % Pusri: diii Yiihannd ne Yisii' 
ko apne pds dte dekbd, aur kahd, De- 
kho, Klrudd kd Earra, jo jahdn kd 
-unali ut ha le jdtd bai. 

30 Yih wuhi hai, jin ke haqq inen 
main ne kahd, ki Ek mard mere pi- 
rhhe dta hai, jo mujh se muqaddam 
■ :::\, kviinki wuh mujh st' pahlc thd. 
117 



YU'IIAXNA', I. ki gawahijo us nt di. 

31 Aur rnaig to uae na jdntithft: 



par b liyo main pdni au baptiama 
detd dya, ta ki wuh Isrdel par rfhii 
ho. 

32 Aur Yiihaund ne yih kahkc 
gawdhi di, ki Main ns Rrih ko kabu- 
tar ki tarah aamdn se ittarle dekhd, 
aur wuh ua par titah ri. 

33 Aur main 'u»e najdntdtlni : pv 
jis no mujhe bheja, ki ]iani w buptia- 
ma duu. ua ne mujhe kahd, ki Jis par 
tu Ruh ko utarte aiur thabarte deklie, 
wuhi bai jo Kiih i Quds ae baptisma 
detd hai. 

dekhd, aur gawdhi 
di, ki yibi Kbudd kd Beta hai. 

35 ^ Phir diisre din Yiihannd aur 
do us ke Mhdgirdon ineti se khnro the i 

36 Tab Yi'ihannd ne Yiafi' ko chal- 
to dekhkar kahd, Pekho, Khudd kd 
Barra! 

37 Aur un do shdgirdon ne us ku 
kalam karte suni, aur Yhui' ko ptohhe 
ho Hye, 

38 Tab YiHii 1 ne munh pherke, aur 
miliki pichbe dte dekhkar, un ko ka- 
hd, T um kyd dhitndlite ho? Unhon 
ne us bc kahd,'Ai Rabbi, Qia k;i tnr- 
juma yih hni, ai Ustdd,) tu kahdn 
rnhtd hai ? 

39 Ub ne unhen kahd, Chalo, do- 
kha. Pas wc do, aur jahdn wuh rahta 
tlta dekhd, aur us roz us ke nSth rabfl ; 
aur yih daswig sd'at ke qarib thd. 

40 Ek un donon nien Bejinhog m 
Yuhannd ki suni, aur ua ke pichhe ho 
liyo, Shama'dn Patrua kd bhdi Audryls 
thd. 

41 Us ne pahle apno bhdi Shatna'un 
ku fidyd ; aur us se kahd, ki Haru ne 
Masih ko, jis kd tarjuma Kristus hai, 
pdyd. 

42 Tab wuh use Y'isu' pis Idya : aur 
Yiaii' no ua par nigdh karke kahd, ki 
Tii Yuuas kd lietd Shama'un hai : tu 
Kefda kahldwcgd, jia kd tarjuniu I'ai ms 
hai. 

43 1" Dusro din Yiau' ne chdha ki 



.tfatti'i Qdnd men pdni h.' YU'IIAN 
Jalil men jdwe, aur Failhus ko pdke 
kahd, Mcre pichhii dml. 

44 Aur Failluis Baitsaida kii, jo 
AndryAs aur Patrus ka ahahr hai, 
biahinda thA. 

45 Failbiia ne Nathanad ko paya, 
aur uso kahd, ki Jis ka zikr Musi oc 
tauret nu-ij nur nabi<nj H kiyd hai, 
liom ne use payA,- wah Vtinnf ka beta 
tisu' NAsari hai. 

46 Nathanai-1 ne ub si) kaha, K ya 
Ninarat se kof achchhi cbl/- DwaJ 
sakti hai? Failbus no kaha, A' aur 
dekh, 

47 Yisii' ne Nathanael koapui 1:vr:if 
ato dekhkar us ke bttN toBO knbi. 
Dokho ok&achcbaiaraeli,jisnien raakr 
iiahirj hai ! 

iH Nathanael ne us k kaha, Tu 
■mujhe kahau se jauhi hai ? V isu' ne 
jawab diyd, aur uae kahd, Us se pahle 
ki Failbiis ne tujhe buldyi, jab tii 
n lir ke darakht tale thd, main ne 
uijhe dekhd. 

49 Nathanael ne jawib men ns se 
kahd, Ai Kabbi, tu Klm.li ki Beta, tu 
Isrdt'l kd bddslidh hai. 

50 Yisu' ne jawdb diyd, aur us «e 
kahd, Kyd tii is Hye iman lAtd hai ki 
main ne tuju ae kalid ( ki Main cis tujh 
ko anjir kedarakht tale dukhd? fcti in 
se btiffl majare dekhegd. 

51 Phir vis oo kahd, Main tum ae 
sach sach kuhtA hiin, ki Ab se turo 
Asman ko klniU^inir Khiidakn (irisi i ton 
ko upar jdte aur Ibn i A'dam par utarte 
dekhoge. 

II BA'B. 
4 UR tisrf: diri Qdna e Jali] mrii kisi 
A ka bydh hi'td; aur Yisii' ki mi 
vvahdn tlii : 

2 Aur Yisu 1 aur us ke shdgirdon ki 
bbi us bydh. men riVwut thf. 

3 Aur jab mai ghat gayi, YisiV ki 
md ne us ae kahd, ki D n ke pds mai 
na rahi. 

4 Yisii' no us se kahd, ki Ai 'aurat, 

118 



XA', IL mailandtd. 

mujhe tujh bg kyd kdm? meri waqt 
hanon iNiliin dyi. 

5 Ua ki ina ne khddirnon ko kahd, 
Jo kuchh wuh tumben kahe, m karo. 

6 Aur wahdn. |>atthar ke chha 
matke talnimt ko liye Yahddiori ke 
diis* i'ir ke muwifiu dharc the, aur har 
ck men do yd tin isian lu sauidi thi. 

7 Yisu'ne Hiin.cn kaili, M.-ttkon men 
Dani bharo. So unhon ne un ko lab A 
ab hhara. 

8 Phir us ne unhen kaha, ki Ab 
nikdlo, aur majlia ke aardAr pds le jao. 
Aur we le fraye. 

'J Jab niir i majlia ne wuh pdni, jo 
mai ban gaya thd, cbakhd, aur uahin 
jdna ki yih kahaij se thi, magar 
l liakur, ki jinhotj ue wuh pdni nikdli 
thd, jdnte the, to m i r i majlia ne dulho 
ko buldyd, 

10 Aur usc kahd, ki Har ahakh.3 

pahle achchhi mai kharch kand hai, 

aur ndqhs ua waqt ki jab piko chhak 

nye : par tti no achchhi mai ab tak 

.k f. i clihorf hai. 

U Yih' pahld mu'ajiza Yisii' M 
QAna e Jalil men dikhdyd, aur apni 
jaldl zAhir kiya, aur us ke ehdgird ua 
par iindn Ide. 

12 1 Ba'd ua ke, wuh, aur us ki 
in'i, nur ua ke bhdi, aur shagird, 
Kafanidhum men gaye ; par unhon ne 
wahan balmt dinoij tak luaudni ua 
kiya. 

13 t Tab Yabiidion ki 'id i fasah 
nawiik thi, aur Yisfi' Yarusalam ko 
gayi. 

14 Aur haikal men, bail, aur bher, 
aur kabiitar-faroshon ko, aur sarraibn 
ko baithfl lido, pdyi: 

15 1*ab ub ne rasai kd kord bandke 
un aab ko, bheron aur bailon samet, 
hatkal ae nikdl diyd, aur sarrifon ke 
take bikhrd diye, aur tak hte ulat diye ; 

16 Aur kabiitar-iaroahon ko kahd, 
In chisorj ko yahirj »c 1g jd : mere 
Bip ke ghar ko byopar ki ghar mat 
bando. 



Masih K nasihat jo u$ ne YU'HAN! 

17 Aur u&kctradgirdon ko yid dyd, 
ki yun likhi hai.ki Terc ghar kigairat 
raujhe kha gayi. 

18 f T» b Yahridion ne jawab men. 
use kahd, K ya idahan tu hamey 
dikhliti hai, jo yih kira kartd hai ? ' 

19 Yisti' ne jawdb dekar uuhcn 
kahd, ki Ia liaikal ko dha do, aui 
main uso tin din meu khard karunei. 

20 Tab Yahudlon ne kahd, Cbhiya- 
lis baras bc yih baikal ban rahi hai, 
aur tfi use tin din inep. khard karegdV 

21 l'ar us ne apne badan ki haikal 
ki babat kahd i hi. 

22 lu liye, jab wuh murdon 
ji uthd, to u» ke aliagirdon ko yad dyd, 
ki us ne yih mi si- kahd thi: aur «t 
kitdb aur Yisii' ke kalam par iradn 
lie. 

23 Tf Aur jab ki wuh Yanisalam ke 
hich 'id i fasah men thi, to bahutere 
u n mu'ajiKon, ko jo us ne dikhde 
dekhke us ke nira ]>ar iradn Ide. 

24 Lokin YisiV ne apne ta,in un 
par na chhori, ia liye ki wuh nb ko 
jinta thi, 

25 Aur muhtdj na thd ki kol insan 
ke \v.v\q men. gawdhi de: kyttnki 
wuh d[>. jo kue h h ki iii^dn men thi, 
jdtitd thd, 

UI BA'IJ. 

FARI'SI'ON u.en se ek slmkhs 
NiqudemusnimYahiidion kiek 
sarddr thd: 

2 Us ne rdt ko Yisu* pds akar us se 
kahd, ki Ai Habbi, bara jdnte hain ki 
i.ii Klnidi ki taraf ne ustad hoke dyd : 
kydnki koi ye mu'ajize jo tu dikbdtd 
hai, jab tak ki Khudi us ke s&th na ho, 
nah i n iiikhd sakti. 

H M ne jawi b dekar us hg kahd, 
Main bujh se sach sach kahtd hiln, 
Agar koi uar inau paidd na lio, towtih 
Klmda ki hidshdhat ko dekh nahin 
■akta. 

4 Niqudemua ne us se kahd, A'dmi 
jab bt'irha Ini paya, to kyiinkar paidd 
ho saktd hai? kyi us men yih taut 

ny 



NA', III. Niyitdtmm ne ki thi. 

hai, ki do-b&n apni mi ke pet nieti 
dar de, aur paidd howe ? 

5 Yinn' no jawdb diya, ki Main 
tujhe sach aach kahtd hiin, Agar idmi 
pdni aur B6h se paidi na howo, to wuh 
Jthudiki bidsbdhal imai dikhil ho 
nahin sakti. 

6 Jo jisra se paidd h fiil bai, jinm 
hai ; aur jo Ruh se paidd bui hai, nih 
hai. 

I Ta'ajjub na kar ki main. i- tujhe 
kahd, ki Tumhen sar i Dau paidil honi 
Mftir hai. 

8 Hawdjidhar chdhti bai chalti hai, 
aur tu us ki iwd?, suntd hai, par lialini 
jdntd ki wuh kalian ae iti, aur kabin 
ko jiti hai : bar ek jo Riili se paidd 
luiii nisi hi hai. 

t* Nhjudeinus ne jawdb men US M 
kaiia, Vih biten kyiinkar ho sakti 
hain? 

10 Yisii' ne jawdb diya, aur us se 
kaki, K ya tii bani Isrdel ki ustdd bai, 
aur yih bdtcn uahiii Santa? 

II Main tujhe sach sach kahtd hiin, 
ki Jo hara jdnte hairj, kahte haiji, aur 
jis« bnm ne dekhd hai, us par gawibJ 
dete hain : aur tum hamdii gBWihj 
ijabiil nahin karte. 

12 Jab main ne tumben zarain ki 
b.iteii knhin, aur tum yaqin uahiii 
karte, phir a^ar main tataheg famili 
ki bdtcn kahdn, to tum kyiinkar yacun 
karoge V 

13 Aur kol ismdn par nahin gayd, 
siwd us shakhs ke jo dsmiin par s.' 
utrd, ya'ne, Ibu i A'dam jo damin par 
hai. 

14 \ Aur jis tarah Musi ne sirap 
ko baydl>du men bulaudi par rakhii, 
usi tarah »e Karfir hai, ki Ibn i AViam 
bbi nthiyijie; 

15 Ti ki jo koi us par imdn liwe. 
halik n« liowe, baiki hamosha ki 

'udagi [liwe. 

16 % Kynnki Ehudi ne jahan ko 
aisd piydr kiyd hai, ki us ne apnd 
iklauti Buti bakhsha, ta ki jo koi \\n 



Fman aur b<.-imdni YL'HANNA', IV. 

par iman l:iwc, balak na, howe, baiki 
liiuiieslia ki ziudagi pdwe. 

17 KyLiijki Khudd De apne Bete ko 
■ahAn Btorj is liye nahin bbeja, 
jaban par VU& k A bukm kate, baik 
liye, ki janin ns ke sabub uajdt pdwe. 

18 1T Jt> us par irudn latd hai, us ke 
liye Rttd kii bukm nahiij : lekin jo us 
[tar imdn nahin lata bai, us ke wdste 
pa/.a led bukni ho eliukil ; kyiinki wuh 
Khudd ke iklaute Bete ke nain par 
imdn na Uiyi. 

19 Aur s:izd ke liukiu ka sabah yib 
bai, ki nur jahan inen, ayd, aiu* iusdn 
ne lariki ka iii'ir se ziyada piydr kiyd ; 
kyiinki un ke kam lmre tbe. 

20 Kyiiiiki Jo koi burai kartd liai, 
wuh uiir .se duabinani rakhta hai, aur 
mir ke \t&$ nahin dtd, ta aib» na ho ki 
us ke kitin fisb bo jdwen. 

21 Pai 1 wub jo haqq karta hai, nur 
ke pds dtd bai, td ki uw ke kiiiu zahir 
howen. ki wo Khudd ki mani se bain. 

22 t Ba'd liu Mtoii ke Yisu' aur 
ua ke shagird Yahudiya ki sarzanrin 
uien do ; aur wub wahdu un ku sdth 
rahd kartu, aur bapfciama detd tbd. 

23 f Aur Yuhannd bbi 8iliin ke 
garfb 'Ainon men baptisuia detd thd, 
kyi'mki wahdri pdni bubut thd; aur log 
de, aur baptisma pdyd. 

24 Ki Yubaniid lumoz qaidkhdno 
raerj ddld tia gaya tlid. 

2"> ^T Tab Yuhannd ke aMgirdon 
aur Yabiidif)Tj ko darmiydn, twlidrat ki 
babat, bahs bui. 

2(i Aur wo Yuhannd pds de, aur us 
se kahi, ki Ai Rabbi, wub jo Yardan 
ke |nir tere sdth thd, jis par tii ne ga- 
wdhi di, dokb, ki wub baptiaiua detd 
hai, aur sab uh ke pdw alu Lain. 

27 Yiihannd ne jawab diyd, aur 
kahd, ki Koi insan kisi cliiz ko, magar 
jis bdl ki wuli usb dsmdu »e di jdwe, 
pa* D&hfrj sakta. 



29 Jis ki dulhin hai, wub dulhi 
bai ; par dulho kd dost jo khara bai, 
aur us ki suutd bai, dulho ki d'wdz sc 
babut ktiush botd bai ; pas meri yib 
khuani puri btii. 

30 Zariir bai ki wub barho, par 
main ghatiin, 

31 Wu'h jo lipar se dtd hai, sab ke 
lipar hai : wuh jo zamin se hai, zaiuini 
bai, aur zamiu ki kahtd hai : wuh jo 
dsman so dtd bai, sab ke lipar hai. 

32 Aur jo kucbh us ne dek h a aur 
sund hai, us ki gawdbi detd bai, aur 
koi shukhs us ki gawdbi qabtU nahin 
karta. 

33 Jis iio us ki gawdhi qabtil ki 
hai, mulir ki bai ki Kbudd Mdh6bJ 
hai. 

34 Ivyiinki jise Khudd no bbejd bai, 
wuh Kbuda ki batoii kahtd hai ; kyiiij- 
td K'ini.iii p;aLi];'usb karko Ruh uahnj 
dotd. 

86 IldpBeto ko piydr kartd hai, 
aur sab chi/en us ko liath men di bain. 

36 Jo ki Bule par imdn Idtd bai, 
hamcsha ki zindagi us ki bai : aur io 
Boto i»r imdu naliirj Idtd, haydt koua 
dckhegd, baiki Khudd kd qahr us par 
t'iiiil X bab 

IV BA'B. 

AUR jab Khudiwnnd nc jand, ki 
Fariaiojj ne euna, ki YienV Yii- 
hannd se Eiyada shagb-d kartd hai, aur 
baptiama deU hai, 

2 (Hdlanki Tiaii' dp naliirj, baiki us 
e shdgird baptisma dete tbo,) 

3 Tab wuh Yahudiya ko chhorke 
Jalil ko phir gayd. 

4 Aur zariir ibd ki wuh Samariya 
hoke Jiwe. 

5 Tab wub Sdmariya ke ek shabr 
uien, jo Siikdr kahldtd hai, us milkiyat 
ko liazdik jo Ya'qub no apne bete 
Yunuf kodi thi, dyd. 

" Aur Ya'quh ka kila wabin tba. 



28 luiu kbud meru «aw&h bo, ki.Chunauchi Yiau' safar se indndahokb 
ajain ne kahd, ki Maig Masih nabinJus kue par yiin hi baitbd Yib 
magar ua se dge bbejd gaya hiin. [cbliatbi ghari ke qarib thd. ' 



Masih 'k Samari 'aurat se YUHANNA', IV. guftogu, kartu. 

T Tab Samanya ki ek 'aurat pduijddwaud, inujhe ma'ldinliotahai, ki ap 
i :ii, Yisii' nousse kaha,Mujhc pabi haiu. 



jtm ko de. 



20 Hainire bdpdadoi 



B Kyunki us ke shagird shahr men par parastish ki ; aur tum kulit* lio, ki 
gaye tlie, "ki kuchh khane ko mol len. \ w uh jagab jaban narasilah karni cha- 
9 Samariya ki us 'aurat nc use hiye, Yardsalain men hai. 

21 Yiaii* ne us se kahd, ki Ai 'aurat, 
Bwri hdt ko yauin rak h, ki wuh ghan 
iiti hai, ki jin m«n tum na tu is pahir 
par, aur na Yanisalam uien, JJap ki 
parastish karogo. 

22 Tum ua ki, jise iiahiij jante ho, 
paiastiali kartu lio: baui uh ki.jise 
jante liiiin, parutlah kartu haiu : kyun- 
ki uajat Yahudion men se hai. 

23 Par wuh ghari dti hai, baiki ab 
hi hai, ki jia mim saehche parau tar riili 
aur rasti su Bap ki parastish kareiige ; 
kyunki Bdp bhi apue pirastarou ko 
oliabta hai ki aisc howen. 

24 Khuda Kuh hai, aur us ke paras - 
taron ko f&r/. bai ki nih aur rasti se 
p.irastish karen. 

25 'Aurat ne ua se kahii, Main janti 
hun ki Masih (jia ki tarjuma Kristus 
hai,) ara hai ; jab wuh awega, to bam- 
oq sab bdton ki khabar duga. 

26 Yisti' !!<■ u,; :■,■ kaha, Main, jo 
tujh se hilttt inin, WnU luiii. 

27 1 Itno men us ke shagird ae, 
aur ta'ajjub kiya ki wuh 'aurat ae 
liaten karta iba ; par kisi ne na kaha, 
ki T u k ya ehabta hai? ya, Us sc kis 
Iiye bdten karta hai 't 

28 Tab 'aurat nc apna ghara chhora, 
aur shahr men jake lo^on se kaba, 

20 A'o, ek mard ko dekko, jis nc 
sab kain jo main ne kiyc niiijhe kahe : 
kya yih Masih nabin. 'j' 

30 Tab we shahr bo niklo, aur ua 
pas de. 

31 \ Is 'arse men us ke shdgirdon 
ne us se darkhwast karke kaha, ki Ai 
Habbi, kuchh kbaiye. 

32 Lekin us ne unhen kali d, Mere 
pas khane ke liye khurak hai jiae tum 
nahiii jante. 

33 la liye shagirdon ne apas men 



kaba, ki Kydtikar tu, jo Yahudi hai, 
mujh se, jo Samariya ki 'aurat bun, 
pani piae ko maugta hai"? kydnki 
Yahudi Saiuarion se subbat nabin 
rakhte hain. 

10 Yisu' ue jawab men, us se kahd, 
Agar tu Khuda ki bakhhhiflh ko, aur 
us' ko jo'tujh se kaljta liai, Mujhe 
pine ko do, pabcbanti, ki wuh kaun 
hai, to tu us so niaugti, aur wuh tujhe 
jitd pani duta. 

11 'Aurat uo us se kaba, Ai Khuda- 
wand, tujh pas jiani khinchne ko 
kucli li naliin, aur ki'ia gahra hai: phir 
ta ne wuh jita pani kanan au piyi? 

12 Kya tu hamdre bap Ya'qub se, 
jia ne ham ko yih kua diyi, aur kbud 

1 m:, aor us ke beton n e, aur us ke 
charpayon ne us se piya, bara bai ? 

13 Yisu' na jawab diya, aur us se 
kahd, Jo koi yili pani piu, phir piy*asa 
boga: 

li Pur jo koi wuh pani, jo main 
use diingA, pie, wuli abatl tak jiiyasa 
na boga ; baiki jo pani main use deia 
bun, us men pani ka sota ho jaega, jo 
hamesba ki ziudagi tak jari raiiuga. 

15 'Aurat ne us sc kaha, Ai Klui- 
diiwand, yih pani mujh ko de, ki main 
piyasi na hourj, aur na bharne ko ya- 
ban diin, 

16 YislV ne us sc kaba, Jake apne 
shauhar ko huld, aur yahdn d, 

17 'Aurat ne jawab diya, aur kahd, 
ki Main be-shauhar biin. Yisu' ne us 
se kaba, ki Tu ne durust kahd, ki 
main bu-shauhar bun : 

ltt Kyunki tu fSaoh khaham kar 
chukf hai, aur wuh jo ab tu rahhti hai 
tcrd kliasam nabin; tu ne yih sach 
kahd.' 

l'J 'Amat ne us se kaba, Ai Khu- 
121 



Masik -;A- Samari \ 



YU'IIAKSA' 
liye khini 



kahd, kj Kyd ];■>! 
IdyA hai ? 

34 YiBiV ne unhen kahA, IferA 
khdni yib hai, ki anne briHJnowAU? ki 
marzi baji lAun, aur ns k;i kain pura 
karun. 

35 Kyd tum nahin kabte, ki Abhi 



!/'■/'<':'■' '•"'■b''. 

46 Aur Yisu' phir QAnao Ja'i) man, 
jahin us lio paui ko mai bandya thA, 
AyA. Aur badshdh kd ek iimlAzim 
thA, jis kd betd Kal'arudhuiu raen. bi- 
uiAr thd. 

47 Jab suna, ki Yisii' Yahudiya se 
JalH men AyA, us pds gayA, nur ub ki 



chAr mahine bani haig., lab faal Awi-gi ? minnat ki, ki dwc, aur us ke bete ko 
dekbf, niaig tum se kahtd hrin, Apni ebangA kare : kyunki wuh marne par 



ankhen uthdo, aur kheton ko dekni 
ki wc kdtne ku ttye pak chuke hairi. 

36 Aur katnewdld mazduri pAtA 
hai, aur hamesha ki zindagi ke Iiyc 
mm jam'* kartd hai, ta ki wuh jo 
botd liat, aur wuh jo kdttA bai, donorj 
bdbam kliush howen. 

37 Aur ub liar yili masai tilik dti 
bai, ki Ek botd hai, aur drisra kdttd 
hai. 

38 Main ne tumhen bhcja hai, tik: 
use, jis men tum ne inihnat nahin ki, 
kdto : gair logon ue miunat ki, aur tam 
mi k i' milmat men sbatnil titi u. 

39 K Aur us shahr ke babut se 
Samari us 'aurat ke kahne 
gawdhi di, ki Us nu Bfcb kuchh jo 
main ne kiya liai mujkc kahA, us 
iman lae. 

40 Aur un Hdmarion ne us pds Ake 
us ki minnat ki, ki hamare satii nh : 
chunAnchi wuh do roz walidn rahd, 

41 Aur unke siuri ani babuture uwi 
ke kalAm ko sabab f mau Jat'j 

42 Aur us 'mirat ko kahA, Ab bani 
lai|at tere kuhne ko iman naluri ]:ile; 
kyiinki hain ne khud mi ria, aur jante 
hain, ki yib filhain'riat juhdn kd NajAt- 
denewAld Masih bab 

43 K Aur wuh do KM ba'd waliAn 
Be rawdua bokar Jalil ko jtayA, 



44 Kyiinki Yisii' ne khud gawdhi : iisdre hain. 



thd. 

48 Tab Yisii' ne use kahd, Agar tum 
iiisliiiiian aur kardmaten na dokhogo, 
to iman na laoge. 

4'J Bidtthi.li ko mu lazim ne us H 
kahd, Ai Khudawaml, ptahtal us se ki 
mera larki mar jawi.-, ular a. 

50 Yisu' nc use kabd, JA, terd betd 
jitdhai. Aurusmard ne us bdt kd, jo 
Yisii' ne uwe kabi, i'atiqad kiyd, aur 
cluiia mi 

51 Aur wuh rdh hi men thd, ki 
uh ke naukar use milc, aur khabar 
|>ahunchdi, ki Terd betd jitd hai. 

52 Tab us ne un se rmeliha, ki Use 
kis waqt se drdm hone laga? Unhtin 
ne kahd, ki Kal satwin j;hari us ki tap 
jdti rahi. 

53 Tab bdp nc jdna, ki wubi gbari 
tbi, jab Yisd ne ub se kahA ihA, ki 
Terd beta jitd bai, Aur wuh khud 
aur us kd sArA ghar, imin l.iyi. 

54 Yib dusrA ma'njiM hai, jo Yisu' 
Yahudiya M Jalil nu-tt dke dikJi- 

idyd, 

Y BA'B. 

BA"I> us ke Yuluidiou ki ek 'id thi, 
aur Yisii' Yanisalain ku gayd. 
2 Aur Ytininalain men bher-darwazu 
ke p4a ek hauz hai, jo TbrAni dmb 
Bait-IIasda kabldtA hai; us ke pdnch 



di, ki nabi apne watan men 'izzat 
nahin pAtA. 

45 Aur jab wuh Jalil men AyA, to 
.Talilion ne us ki khAtirddvi ki, ki 
aab kAmon k<>, jo us ne Y:in'isalain ke 
bich 'id men kiyo the, dekha thd ; 
kyiinki we bbi 'id men gaya the. 
122 



3 Un men nA-tawdnon,aur andhon, 
aur ianttron, aur pazhmurdon ki ek 
bar! bhir jiari thi, jo jjdiii ke hilne ki 
niiHita/ir tbi. 

4 Kyuuki ek lirislua ba'ze waqt. us 
bom mag utnrke jjAhi ku hildtd thd, 
aur paui ko hilne ke ba'd jo koi ki 



\ ek bimar admi ko YU'HANNA', V. changii ftttrft. 

i~ S Lekin Yisii' ne unben jawab 

diyi, ki Meri BAp ab tak kdm kiya 

karti hai, aur main bhi kini kiyii 

18 Tab Yahutlfon iie aur bhi ziyada 
us ku (jiiil karne chdhi ; kyunki u» 
na n& ftioal sabt hi ko &a mana, baiki 
Khudd ko apni Bap kali k t apne ta,in 
Khuda ke harabar kiya. 

19 Tab Yiail' ne jawab diyd, aur nn 
se kahi. Main tnm ae sach Nu kaliUi 
bar,, ki Beta Ap se kuehh nabin kar 
sakti, magar wuh jo Uap ko kartu 
dekhe ; kyunki jo kuchh ki wuh 
kartd hai, lio t i bhi uni tarah se kartd 
hai, 

20 I» liye ki Bap Bete ko piydr 
karta hai, aur wah kuchh ki k had 
karti bui, use dikhdti hai : aur wuh 
un se bare katn usc dikhiega, ki tam 
ta'ajjub karoge. 

21 Is liye ki jis tarah Bdp murdon 
ko uthdta hai, aur jildtd hai, Beta bhi 
jinhuu chahta hai jildti liai. 

22 Kyunki Bap kisi shakhs ki 
'addlat nahig karta, baiki us 'ne sari 
'nddlat Bete ko somp di hai : 

23 Td ki nah Bete ki 'ir.zat karen, 
jis tarah se ki Bap ki HtzsA kafte iinirj. 
Jo Bete £i 'izzat nahirj karta, Bip 
ki, jis ne use bhtjd hai, tsaat nahin 
karta. 

24 Main tum se aneh s.ich kahti 
hiiu, Wuh jo mori kalam siinta hai, 
aur ua par, jie ne mujhe bhoja hai, 
latin latd liai, liamesha ki zinda^i us 
ki bi.i, aur us par saza ka hukm nahin, 
baiki maut mo guzarke wuh zindugi 
uien pahuneba hai. 

86 Miun tum «e Rach sach kahti 
hi'iTi, ki Wuh ghsrt iti hai, aur ab 
hai, ki jis men murtlo KhudA ke Bete 
kl Awdz Bunerige, aur wo tuinke jienge. 
28 Kyiinki jis tarah BAp Ap men 
/.indagi Takhta hai, usi tarah ue ne 
Bet.e ko bhi diya bai, ki apne mon 
ne yih kdm sabt ke.zindagi rakhe ; 

| 27 Baiki OM ikhtiyir bhi diyi bai, 



pahle uf mi'n utarta, kaisi hi bimiri 
nion giriftar bui ho, ub se chanai ho 

Aur waban ek sbakhs thi, jo 
«ttitis baras se iia-tawini meti giriftar 
ho rabi thi. 

fi Yisii' ne jab use pare lirto dekbi, 
aur jini ki wuh hari muddat m us 
hilat merj hai, to us ue kuna, ki Kya 
tu chihti hai ki cbangi ho jie? 

7 Us ni-tawin ne use jawab diyd, 
ki Ai Khudiwand, mujh pas Admi 
nahiji, ki jab yili pilui hilayi jae,"to 
mujhe haius men ddl do : aur jab tak 
main ip se Aun, dt'isri mu j h se |iahlo 
utar ra \;Ui hai. 

8 Viau' no use kahA, Uth, aur npnd 
khatoliuthikarehaliji. ' 

Wonhi wuh Bhakhs changi ho 
sayi, aur apnd kliatoii utha liyi, aur 
chala uyi : aur wuh nbl kd din thi. 

10 ^[ Ia liye Yahudi on ne use, jo 
dtt&gi lnia iba. kulii, ki'Yih sabt kd 
roa hai; tujhe rawa nahin ki kliatolu 
ko uthi le jiwe. 

11 Us ne unben jawdb diyi, ki Jis 
ne mujhe ehangd kiyi, ai nfl mujiic 
farmiya, ki Apud kijuloli uthdkc 
chali i&, 

12 Tab uahon. ne us ne piichhi, ki 
Wuh kaun shajjihs hai jia no cujbe 
l;ahi, Apni kbatoli uthdke chali ji 'r 

13 Ua no, jo changi htfi tba, na jd- 
nA ki wuh kaun hai, is liyo ki Yisu' 
wahaii se tnl gayA thi, kyfiiiki us 
jagah men bhil thi. 

14 Ba'd u» ke Yisn' ne use haikal 
men pdyd, aur iia se knhi, ki t)okh, tti 
obangd ho gayd, phk gundh na kami, 
H howo ki td us se badtar balA men 
pare. 

15 Wah ahakh» rawina hui, aur 
Yahiidion ko ittild' di, ki jie ne mujhe 
duuigd kivi, Yisu' haL 

10 Ia liyo Yahiidion ne Yisu' ko 
■satiyi, aur us ke qatl" ki ghit men 
laga: kyunki 
roz kivd thi. 
123 



Maxik hl apne Bap kiyawdM, YL"HAN'\A' J VI. 
ki 'addlat kure, is liye ki wuh ]lm 
A'dara hai. 

28 Ia se ta'ajjub na karo, kyunki 
wuh «hari dti hai, ki jis mefl wu sab, 
jo qabron mon b.nig, uh ki dwdz 
sutienge, 

29 Aurniklenge ; jinhon nc neki ki 
■.'i. /i tulari ki i.jiyam.at. l;o wdstc, aur 
Jlnhflj) ae bodi ki hai, snzd ki qlytonat 
ke liye. 

30 Main dp sc kuchh kar naluri 
sakta: jaiKa main sunta hun, hukm 
kartd liiin : aur nicri 'addlat duruttt 
hai ; kyiinki apni' marzi ko nahin, par 
Bap ki marzi ko, jin ne inujke bhejd, 
chdutd hun. 

31 Agar main apne par gawdhi dtin, 
to meri gawdhi haqq nahin. 

32 T Diisrd hai, jo nmjh par ga- 
wdhi dctd hai; aur inaij_i jdutd luiii ki 
wuh gawdhi, Jo uiujlj p: u- ditla hai, 
haqq liai. 

33 'I'uiu ne Yrihaund ke pas paydin 
bkeja, nur us ne haqq par gaivalri di. 

34 Lekin main insan ki giiwahl 
nahin chahtd; par main yih bdten 
kabid hun, ta ki tum najdt pdo. 

35 Wuh jaltd aur chamakta chirdg 
tlia ; aur tum chdhte thc ki lhori der 
lak us ki roslini se khush ruh u. 

• W Lekiu tnujh pas Yukannd ki ga- 
wdhi se ek hari gawdhi hai : ia liye ki 
ye kdm jo Ddp ne inujhe sompe haiij, 
id ki pure karun, ya'ne, ye kau» jo 
main kartd nun, uiujh par gawdiii 
dtite haiii, ki Ddp lio ruujho bhejd hai. 

37 AurBapJis do niujhe blieja hai, 
U3 nc ipinujh par gawdhi di hai. Tum 
lio kublii us ki dwdu nahin suni, aur 
na us ki .surat dekhi. 

38 Aur tum uh kd kalam apne dilon 
mon nahin rakhte ; kynrjki tuin us par, 
jise us ne blieja, imdn nahin Mte. 

3fl ^ Tum nawisliUm mondkundh- 
teho: kyunki tum gumAn karteho 



ur l'iiJiantui ki,pah lund. 

40 Aur tum nahin chdhte ki mujh 
pas do, la ki ziudagi pao. 

41 Main uh 'izzat ko, jo insan ki 
taraf se hoti, manzfir nahin kartd. 

42 Main tumben jantd hi'in. ki tum 
meri Khucid ki muhabhat. nahin. 

43 Main apue Bap ke ndua sg dyii 
hun, aur tum mujhc cpibfil nahin 
karte; agar koi dusni apne nam se 
dwe, to tum use qamil karoge. 

44 Tum jo djas mon ek duare ki 
'izzat chdhte BO, aur wuh 'izzat, je 
akule Khudd se hai, naliin dhuncllite, 
kyiinkar fmdn la nkte bo9 

4o Gumdn mat karo, ki main Bdp 
ke pds tumhdri farydd kMtduttt ek to 
hai tumlidri farydd kanioivald, ya'ue, 
Mn.sa, jis jwir tumhard hlmrosd hai. 

4d Kyunki agar tum Miisd par 
iman lace, to nuijli par bhi imdii late. 
is liye ki us ne mero haqq miin likhd 

47 Lekinjis hdl ki tum u» ke na- 
wi.shtun ku yaqiu na karoge, to mert 
bdton ko kyiinkar yaain karoge? 
VI BA'B. 

Y ISU" un bdton ke ba'd Jalil ke 
daryd ke pdr, jo daryd e Tibari- 
yds hai, g&yd. 

2 Aur ek bari bhir us ko pichhe h o 
li, kyiinki unhon ne us ke mu'ajize, jo 
us m' l.imaron par dikhde, dekhe tiic. 

3 l'iiir YisiV pahdr par gaya, aur 
wahdn apue shagirdori lie «ath baitha. 

4 Aur Yahiidion ki "id i faaah 
nazdik tlii. 

5 ^ Pas jab Yisii' ne dnkhen uth- 
j, aur ueklui ki hari bhir mere pas 

dti hai, to FailbuB se kaha, ki Ham 
kahan se in ke khdne kfl liye rotidri 
khariden 'i 

(i Par us ne yih imtihdn ki rdh ee 
kahd tlid, kyunki wuh dp jantd thd jo 
kiya uliahtfi tha. 

Failbiis ne use jawab diyd, ki Do 



ki un men tuinhdre liye hamesha ki Isau diuar ki rutidn un ke liye bas na 
ziudagi hai; aur yih we hi bain, joj hoijgi, ki un mes se liar ek thord sd 
uiujh par gawdhi deto hain. pdwo. 

124 



Masih panch iiazdr admimt ku YU'UANXA', VI. 



8 Ek ne us k*? sbdgirdon men 
Shama'un Patrus kd- bhdi Andriyds 

■ kahd, 

9 Yalian L'k clihokra hai, jis ko pas 
jau ki panch rotidn, aur do ehhoti 
madihlian, hain ; par yili -itno logon 
men kya hain ? 

10 Tab Yisri' ne kahd, ki Logcrj ko 
bithdo. Aur us jagah bah u t ghau thi. 
So ginii men takhminan panch hazdr 
niard baithe. 

11 Aur YiaiV ne rotidn utha lin, 
aur shukr karke shdgirdon ko din, aur 
shagmlon lio unhen, jo baithe tlie 
i'iniiM | aur isi tarah machlilion 
■S, jid qadr ki we ch&lite the. 

1^ Aur jab we eer ho chuko, to us 
ne apnc shagirdon so kahd, ki Un 
tukfog ku jo lxtch raha hain jatu'a 
kii'u, La ki kuohli khmab lia howo. 

18 Cliunanehi unhon ne jain'a kiye, 
aur jau ki pdueli rocioti ke tukron se, 
jo un khanowaloB se bach raiie thc, 
barah tokrian lihnriij, 

14 Tab un logon ne yih mu'ajiza, 
jo Yifiu' ne dikhdyn, dckhkar k;ilia, 
PUhaqiqat wuh nabi jo jahdn ineu 
dnewdla tha yihi hai. 

15 T Pas Yiaii' mg ma'Iiim karke 
ki we chiihte hain ki dwejj, aur use 
zabardasti [.«karke bddshdh karen, dp 
akcli pahar ku jiliir gayd. 

lu' Aur jab ahdin hdi, to uh ke 
shagird dnryd ku kinare gaye; 

17 Aur kishti par charhku darya 
par Kid'arnahum ko chale. Us watjt 
andherii ho chala tha, aur YisiV un pas 
*i.i ava llui. 

ly Aur ajidlu ke sabab darya lab- 
ranc laga. 

19 Aurjabwcqarib puehisya tis K r 
partdb ke kheo ohuko thc, unhon ne 
Yiaii' ko darya par chaite, aur kishti 
ku qarib ite dek ha, aur dur gaye. 

20 Tab us ne unhen, kaha, ki Main 
"■'" daro inat. 



kgttt) par, jihdii we jate the, jd pa- 
huuchi. 

2'J ^ D&sre din, jab bhir ne, jo 
darya ke us pdr kbarf tbi, yih deklut, 
kl wahdg siwa us ek ke, jis par us ke 
shdgird charh baitho the, toi dusri 
kishti na thi, aur yih ki Yisu' apne 
shagirdon ke sdth us kishti par na 
gayd tnd, baiki sirf us ke shagird gaya 
the; 

23 (Par aur kiahtidn Tibariyas su 
us jagah ke nazdik, jahdn Uflhotj ne 
Khudawand ke shukr ke ba'd roti khai 
thi, ain :) 

24 Pas kb m hhi r nc yih dekha 
hai, ki wahan na Yisii' aur na, us ke 
Nhagird buiii, to we bhi kishtion par 
oharhe, aur Yisii' ki talash men Kal'ar- 
nahuiu ko i'n'. 

2i"i Aur unhon nc use rtaryd par pd- 
ke us uh kahd, ki Ai Rabbi, td yahdn 
kab dya ? 

2ii Yisd' nc unhon jawdb djytt, nur 
kiiha, ki Main tum se snch sach" kahtfi 

'_. ki Tum inujhe dhi'indhto ho, fa 
liye ki tum ne mu'ajize dekhe, so 
nahiri, baiki is liye ki tum rotidn 
khdke ser hde. 

Fdni khurdk ke liye nahig, halki 
u b khdno ke liyo naihimt kam jo 
hamesha ki zindiif;! tak thaharra hai, 
ki Ibu i A'dam wuh tumhen dogd; 
kyiinki Bdp ne, jo Khudi hai, u par 
iniihr kar di hai. 

'OH Tab unhon no us so kahd, ki 
Hain kyd kareg.'td ki Khuda ke kdm 
hajd ldwen 1 

li9 Yiau' ne jawdb men utthen kaha, 
Khuda kd kdm yih hai, ki tum us par, 
jise us ne bheja, imdn ldo. 

30 Tab mihon ne na se kahd. Pas 
tii kauu sa niwliau dikhdtd hai, td ki 
bani dekhke tujh par iman ldwen? tu 
kya kartd hai? 

31 Hamdre bdpdddou ne baydbdn 
eg mann khdyd; ehundnchi likhd 

liL Pliir unhon ne khitah! se usc hai, ki Ua ne unhen asmdn se ro$ 
kishti pir le liyij aur kishti filfaiir iis|khinc kodi. 



Masih dp ko zindagi 



YL"HANNA', VT. 



fct roti thahr&ta. 



32 Tali Yisft' oo unhen kahd, Main 
t uni ae sach sauh kanta, hun, ki Musa 
110 tumben asuidui roti naliiu di, baiki 
merd Bdp tumben nobohl dsmani roti 
detd hai. 

88 ls liye U Kliudii k! r.>ti wuh 
hai, jo daman so ntnrti, aur jah&n ko 
zindagi tiak hslili bai. 

34 Tab unlion ne us w kaha-, Ai 
Khuddwand, ham ko haniesha yih 
roti diyd kar. 

35 \ i' isu' ne imken kaha, Main 
zindagi ki roti liiin: jo mujh pas ata 
hai, nargiK bhukhd na hogd: aur Jo 
mujh par iman lata hai, kabhf piydsa 
n a hogd. 

3li Lekin main ne tumhen kaha 
hai, ki Tum ne to mujhc dekhd, par 
im&n nabi n Ide. 

37 Harck,jiBC R;tp ne mujhe diyd 
hai, mujh pas dwega ; aur use jo mujh 
pas ata hai main hargiz n ikal na 
dungd. 

3H Kyunki main asmdn par no is 
liye nahin utri, ki apni marzi par, 
baiki na ki marzi i>ar chaluii, jis ue 
mujhc hhejd hai. 

39 Aur Bap, jis ne mujhe bhejd hai, 
yih chahta hai, ki main uu an s* 1 j<i 
us no mujhe diyu hain kisi ko na 
khoiin, baiki use akhiri din phir 
uthdun. 

40 Aur jis no mujhe bhrja bui, ns 
ki marzi yih hai, ki har ek jo liete ko 
dekbe, aur uh naf iman Idwc, hamesha 
ki zindagi pawe; aur ki main use 
akhiri din meri uthatin. 

41 Tali Yahudi us par kurkurae, is 
liye ki uh ne kaha, Wuh roli, jo as- 
man se utri, main hun. 

42 Aur unhon ne kaha, Kyd yih 
Hati' Yi'iHtif ka h«t£ nahin, jis ke bdp 
aur mi ko ham jiiiite hain ? phir wuh 
kyuiikar kalita hai, ki Main asmau M 
utra hiin 1 

43 Tab Yiati' ne jawdb men un ko 
kaha, ki A'pas men niat ktirkurao. 

44 K.oi shakhs mujh pas a nahin 

126 



sakta, magar jia ha! ki Bap, jis ne 
mujhe bheja hai, use khinch lawe ; aur 
main use akhiri din nirn ullidlinga. 

45 Nabiorj ne yih likhd hai, ki We 
sah Khuda ke sikhldc hi'ie Imrige. B 
liye har eh soak h s, jis ue Bap se auua 
aur sikliti hai, mujh pas ata hai. 

4(i Yih imhiri hai ki kisi shakbs ue 
Bap ko dekbd hai, magar wuh jo Khu- 
da ki taraf so hai, usl ne Bap ko dckkd 
bai. 

47 Main tum ae sach saeh kahta 
hun, Jo mujh par iman lata hai, 
hamesha ki zindagi usi ki hai. 

48 Zindagi ki roti main hi hun. 

49 Tumhdro bapdddon ne bayaban 
men manu khdyd, aur mar gaye. 

50 Roti jo asmau se utani hai wuh 
hal, ki koi ddmi use khako na mare. 

51 Main hiiii wuh jiti roti, jo dsman 
se utri ; agar koi shakhs is roti ko 
lehae, to abad tak jitd rahegd; aur 
roti jo main dnnga, mera gosht hai, ju 
main jcdi&n ki /.imlagi ko liye diinga. 

52 Tab Yahudi yih kahke apas men 
bahs karne lage, ki Yih mard apnd 
gosht kyi'mkar hamon do sakta hai, 
ki khdon? 

53 Tab Yiau' ne unhen kahd, Main 

i M :-iieh sach kanta hun, Agar tum 

Ibn i A'dam kd gO«bt na khao, aur m 
kd lahtl na pio, to tum men zindagi 
nahin. 

54 Jo koi meri gosht kbdtd hai, 
aur merd labu pita hai, hamesha ki 
zindagi usi ki hai ; aur main use akhiri 
diri lilhaiinga. 

55 Kyfinki mera gosht nlhaqiqat 
khdne, aur merd lahil iilhaqiu i at piue 
ki chii hai 

56 W'ili jn niM-ii gosht khatd, aur 
nmrd labu pitd bai, uni j h men rahta 
bai, aur Tilam us \m:\i. 

57 Jis tarah sc ki zinda Bdp ne 
ninihi' l'liijd, aur main Bap ae zinda 
lii'.ij ; isi tarah wuh bhl jo mujhe 
kbiild bai mujh se zinda hoga. 

68 Wuh ruti jo ieaata fe ntri, yib 



MadL ke biid'O 



hai ; ri» jaisA ki tumhAi 
mana khake mar gayc; wuh jo vili 
roti khavA hai, abad tak jitA rahegA. 
59 Us ne K: i fam ih u m men ta'Hm 



YUTIANNA', VII. 

hApdAde 



ux se tukar karvd. 
VII BA' B. 
ke Yisu" Jalil nicrj sair 



B. 
karta raha, ki Yahudiya nu:n 
Mb kami na chAhA, ia liyo ki Yahudi 
deto hi'io 'ibadatkhane men yih baten ii» ke qatl ki fikr men the. 
kabin. 2 Aur Y&Mdion kT 'id i khfma naz- 



I Tab uh ko ahAgirdon uierj 

bahuton uc sunke kahA, ki Yih sakht 

kalam bal ; use kaun sun saktA bal ? 

61 Yisu' iio az khud jdukar ki us k*; 
shAgird A|>as men ia bat par kurkurate 
hain, unhen ksM, KyA yih tum ko 
thokar ka bA'is bal ? 

62 Pas agar tum Ibu i k'3taa k.. 
A par jAte, juhan wuh Age tha, dekbogft, 
t n kya hogA? 

63 "T: ii"!* hai wiiii, Jo jihiti hai; jisin 
8C kmhh iaiiia nahin; yih baten jo 
main tumben kahti hiin, ruh Lain, aur 
zindagi hai n. 

64 ?ar tum men ba'/.e hain, jo iman 
nahin late. KyiSyki Yiail' ibtida se 
jAnti tlia, ki wejo iman nahin liit-e, 
kaun hain, aur kaun uao nakarwaegA. 

65 Phir ua ne kaha, la liye main nc 
tumben kaha, ki kui shakhs, siwa us 
ke jiso men BAp ki taraf se 'inAyat 
huA, mujh pas nahin A saktA. 

66 T "Us waqt se us ke shA^rdon 
men se bahutere ulte phir gaye, aur 
ba'd us ke ua ke *Ath na obalo. 

67 Tab Yiaii' ne bArah'.m ki> kalut, 
KyA Unn bui chdhte ho ki cbale 
jao? 

68 Shama'iin Patms ne BM jawAb 
diyA, Ai Khudawand, ham kia ke pas 
jaen ? basMataa ki zindagi ki bdteii to 
tere pAs hain. 

69 Aur ham to iman lAc hain, aur 
jAn ji,aye hain, ki tti zinda-KhudA kA 
Beta Masih hi 

70 YisA' nc unliefi jawab diyA, KyA 
main ne tum bAralion ko nahin chuna, 
aur ok tum men sc shaitan hai ? 

71 Us nc Shama'tin ko bete YAhii- 
dih Isbariynti ki bAbat kahA : kyiinki 
wuhi us ko pakarwaue chAlitA, aur un 
bArahon mim «o tliA. 

ia? ~ 



dik Ai. 

Tab us ke bh*io£ ne us se kahA, 
YahAn ee rawAna ho, aur Yahudiya 
m. n ja, IA ki un kamon ko, jo tii karta 
hai, tere shAgird bhi dekhen. 

4 Kyunki aisA kol nahin jo kuchh 
kAm chhipke kare, aur chAhe ki ap 
niashliiir hio. Agar tu ye kfim karta 
hiii, to apne ta,in jahAn ko dikhA. 

5 Kyiinki us ke bhAi bhi us par 
iman na lAe. 

(i Tab Yisu' ae unhcii i'urmAyA, ki 
MerA waqt hauuz iiahin aya : par tum- 
hara waqt har dam banA hai. 

7 DunyA tum se 'adAwat nalrin. rakh 
sakti ; par mujh sc 'adAwat rakbti, 
kyiinki main us par gawAhi dctA hiin. 
ki us ke kAm bure hairj. 

Tum is 'id men jAo ! main abhi 
h 'i'i men naliiij jani, ki mci» w;iqt 
banoz pdrA naliiii hsiA. 

9 So wuh yih biitorj unhen kahke 
Jalil men ralia. 

10 T Lokin jab ns ke bhAi rawan» 
hue the, wuh bhi 'id men gaya, zAhira 
nahin, baiki chhipke. 

lfTab Yahudi 'id men use dhun- 
dhne lage, aur kahA, ki Wuh tahan 
hai? 

VI Aur logon irn-n us ki babat bari 
takrar thi: ba'zc kahto tbe, ki Wuli 
nek Admi hai : aur kitno kahte the, ki 
Nahin, baiki wuh Jogon ko gumiAh 
ku r t A. 

18 Lokin Yahi'idion ko dar se koi 
shakhs zibirA us ki bAbat ua kalita 
thA.' 

14 % Aur jab 'id Adhi guzar gayi, 
Yisii' ne liaikal men jake ta'lim di. 

15 Tab Yahudi ta'ajjub so bole, ki 
Ismardko bagairparlui kvtitikar kitAb- 
t» kd'iltu bat f ' 



MuMtah/rae YD'HANNA', VTI. Masih U Vd,.'(. 

16 Tisfi' nn unhen jawabnir-n kah,i, chAnte, nur jilnte ho ki main kaitan 
ki Meri ta'Iim meri nabi n, baiki us ki kd hun : nur main an m nnhin ayli 
hai, jis ne mujhe bhejd. 'lain : magai mori bhe.jnew&14 sachchA 

17 Wuh tthakhs, jo us ki marzi par | hai, jis se tum watp'f nahin ho. 
chald cbAbe, jAnegd, ki yih ta'Iim ' 29 Main use jAntd hun ; ia liye ki 
Kiiuda ki hai, ya ki main Ap se detAjmain us ki taraf so hiin, aur 01 M 



hun. 



mujlio bheja bui. 
30 Tab unhun ne chalid ki aso pa- 



13 Wuh jo apni taraf se kucbh| 
kahtA hni, apni Dtunugf chahtA riai:.kar len: par is liyo ki us kd waqt 
hanoz na pahuncha" tha, kisi ne us par 
hdth na cbUA. 

31 Aur bhir mpn sp bahutere us par 
iman Ide, aur bnle.ki Jab Masih dwegd, 
to k ya m ae, jo ia ne dikhde hain, 
ziyada mn'ajize dikhdwogd ? 

32 1 Farisiog no jamd'at ki takrar, 
jo us ki babat ho rahi t.bi, suni; tab 
Faritiion aur sarddr kali i mm no jiiyade 
lilicjo, ki use pakar leg. 

33 U.i waqt Yiau' no unhen kahA, 
Ab lu tbori der tak main tmnhare 
sAth lniij. aur us pas, jis no majhe 
liliri:!, jiita hun. 

34 Tum mujhe dhiiTtdhoge, aur na 
pdoge, aur jahan main hun, tum a na 



iekin wuh la us ki bosom chAhta hai, 

jis ne use bheja, so wuhi sachchA hni, 
aur us men ndrdati nahin. 

19 K ya Musa ne uimhen shari'at na 
di, lckin koi tum men ne shari'at par 
'amal nahin karta ? Tum kyt'm ID8M 
qatl ki fikr men ho? 

20 Lo'ji'ij ne jawab diya, aur kaha, 
Tujh pAs ek deo hai ; katm tujhe qatl 
kiya chdhtd ? 

21 Yisu' no jawab men unbeQ kaha, 
Main ne ck kaiti kiya, aur tum sab us 
ko ba*is ta'ajjub kartc ho. 

22 HiUA nc tumben khatna ka 
hukin diya, lialarjki w uli Musa se na- 
liiij, baiki bdpdddon so hai ; bo tum 
salii, ko diu admi ka khatna karto 
ho. 

23 Pas agar nabt ke roz Admi ka 
khatna kiya jdtd hai, tA ki MiisA ke 
shar'a se 'udiil na bo, to k y. 'l tum is 
liyo mujh par gussa ho, ki main ne 
sabt ke din ek inard ko hilkull changd 
kiy4? 

24 Zahir ko muwAiiq 'adAlat na 
kain, baiki wajibi 'adAlat kara 

25 Tab ba'ze Yarusalamfon ne kaha, 
Kya yih wuh nahin, ki jise qatl kiya 
cbahte haiji? 

2(! Lekin,dckho, wuh to be-dharak 
boltA hai, aur we use kuchh nahin 
kahtu ; pas kya sardAron no bhi yaqin 
kiya, ki filhaqiqat yihi Masih hai? 

27 Lckin hauien ma'lum hai.ki yih 
kahdn ki hai; par Masih jab awega, 
to koi na jAnogd ki wuh kahdn ki 
bai. 

28 Tab Yisu' haikal men ta'Iim deta 
hiie yun pukArA, ki Tum mujhe pah- 

1L J 8 



35 Us waqt Yahi'uiinn ne dpas mon 
k ah d, ki Wuh kahdn j4eg4, jo use baru 
na pawenge? ky4 wuh un logon ke 
pas, jo Yunanion men paraganda hiie, 
j4eg;4, aur Yiin4nion ko ta'Iim do°4? 
86 Yih ky.'i hit hai, Jo M ne kabi, 
Tum mujhi dbi'mdhoge, aur na 
pdoge: aur jahan main lilin, tum u a 
sakoge ? 

37 Phir 'id ke pichhle din, jo bara 
n hai, Yisu' kliara hni, aur pukdrke 
.ha, Agar koi ]>iydsd ho, mujh pas 
4we, aur pie. 

3H Jo mujh par imdn lata hai, us 
ke badan se, jaisd kitdb kahti hai, jite 
pAni ki nadian jdri hongi. 

39 Us ae yi'h Kiih"ki bdbat kabi, 
jise we, jo us par imdn Idu, pAnc par 
the; kyuaki Biih i Quds ab tak na 
utri tlii, is Uye ki Y'isn' hanoz apee 
jali! ko na pahtmeha tha. 

40 "J Tab un logon men se bahitte- 



Vi-IIANNA', VIII, 



Ziudkdr 'aurat 

ton ne yih eunkac kaha, FiLhattitja.t, 

yilii wuh Nabi hai. 

41 Auron ne kaha. Yih Masih hai. 
Pai- ba'/.on uu kaha, Kya Masih Jalil 
se ata hai 'i 

4'.i Kya, kitalwu 111«» yih bit nahin, 
ki Masih Daiid ki nasi se, aur Bait- 
laham ki basli so, jabari Daud tha, atd 
hai? 

43 So logon men us ki babat ikhti- 
laf hua. 

44 Aur ha'zon ne chaha tha, ki use 
Bakar ]<ti i par kisi ne UU par hiiih ua 
«lale. 

45 1 Tab piyade sardar kahinon 
aur Farisiort ke pas ae; aur unhoy, ne 
ua ne kaha, Tum use kyiin na lae P 

H! Piyadon ne jawab diya, ki Ilar- 
giz kisi s'naklus iic is adiiii ki maulud 
kalam nahin kiya, 

47 Tab Karision ne unhen jawab 
diya, Kya turn bhi guiurah kiyo gaye 
ho? 

48 Ky& koi enrdaron ya Farision 
men se us par iman laya ? 

4~9 Par yo log, jo sbari'at se waqif 
Ilahin, la'nati hain. 

50 Nhiudemus ne, jo rit ko Yisu' 
pin aya tha, aur un men se ek tiui, 
unhen kahi, 

51 Kya hamarf shari'at kisi ko, 
piislitar us se ki us ki aune, aur jane 
ki wuh kyi kami hai, guiiahgar thab- 
rati hai ? 

5 U Unhon ne us ku j» w ah men kahi, 
Kya tu biii Jalilse hai? Dhi'iiidli.aur 
d»kh : ki Jalil men se koi nabi barpa 
nahin hai. 

53 Phir har ck apne ghar ko gaya. 
V IH BA'B. 

PAR Yisii' koh i Zaitun Oto gaya. 
2 Aur aubh sawere haikal men 
pbir dikiiil bila, aur Bah log u» ke pas 
ia ; aur us uo baitbkur unhen ta'liin 
di. 

3 Tab faqih aur Farisi ok 'aurat ko, 
W' zina men pnkri gayi thi, ua pas lae, 
aor ueo bicii men khara karku 
129 



M ktibttL 
4 Us se kahi, ki Ai Ust.au, yih 

'aurat zina men 'ain fi'al ke waqt pakri 

Rayi 

o Mdsa ne to Taurat men bam ko 

hukm diya hai, ki aision ko sangsar 

karun; par tu kya kahta, hai? 

U Uiihon ne azmaish ke liya yih 

kaha, ta ki ua par nalish ki wajh pa- 

weri. Par Yisii'jhukku ungli se samin 

par likhne laga, 

7 Aur jab w e as se Buvtal karte ga- 
ye, to un ne sidhc hokur unhen kaha, 
JO ki tum men be-gunah hai, pahle 
wuhi uso patthar mare. 

8 Aur phir jhukkezamin [«r likha. 
i) Aur we yili sunkar dil hi uil men 

ap ko gunahgar samajhke barun ku 
loke chhoton tak ek ek karke chalo 
gaye : aur Yisti' akela rah gaya, aur 
'aurat bich uieij khari rabi, 

10 Tab Yisu' ne sidue hokar 'aurat 
ku siwa kisi ko na dckha, aur u.s M 
kaha, Ai 'aurat, we U;ri> nalish-kanie- 
wale kalian Kain 'i kya kiai nts tujh par 
hukm na kiva? 

11 Wuhboli, Ai Khurliwand, kisi 
IM nahin. Yiaii' ne us ae kaha, Main 
bin tujh jiar hukm nahin karti; ja, 
aur phir gunah na kar. 

12 % 'i'ab Yisti' ne phir un ne khi- 
tah karke kaha, Jahan ka nur main 
hun; jo meri pairaui karti andhere 
men na chalega, baiki zindagi ka nur 
pawega. 

1J 'i'ab Farision ne us se kaba, Tu 
apne haqq men gawihi duta hai ; teri 
gawahi saeh nabin. 

14 Yisii' ne jawab diyA, aur unhen 
kaha, Agarchi main apni babat ga- 
w:iiii dct;i hiin, btu bhi meri gawahi 
sachhai: kyiinki m&in jauta hiin, ki 
iiiuiij kalian so aya hiin, aur main 
kahaii ko jati lirtn ; par tum nahin 
jaute, ki main kabag se aya bufi, aur 
kahan ko j&ta hdn. 

15 Tum jism ke mutabiq hukm 
karir hu; main kisi par liuk m nahig 



Apui ta'Hm ko haq<i thohr&ke YtT'HANNA', TITI. Tahttditm kofiwdhd-v. 

16 Aur agar main luikm karun, to 
mara hukm haqq hai; kyunki main, 
ftkeU nahin, par main aur Bap jin ne 
nnijho bheja. 

17 Tumhari fihnri'iU meg yih bhi 



likliit hai,ki doadmion ki gawahi sacl 
hai. 

18 Kk to main hiin, jo apni babat 
gawahi deta bi'm, aur llip bhi, jis 
niujba bheja hai, mere liye gaw&bi 
dcta hai. 

lit Tab urihon ne ub ue kaha, Tera 
Dap kalian hai? YimV ne jawab diya, 
Tum na ruujhe janfce, aur na mere Wp 
k" ; ini tam mujhe jati w, to mere Bap 
ko blil jante. 

20 * inti' no yih batcri haikal ko an- 
dar bait ul mal men ta'Iun dete hiie 
kabi]) ; aur kisi ne lis par hath na dale, 
ki uh ka waqt lianoz na a y a tha. 

21 Tab Yvb6' ne phir unhen kaha. 
Siam jata hiin, aur tum miijlio dhiin- 
dhoge, itu apne gun&h men maroge ; 
j/iJuiTi iiiiiin jala hiln, tum a nahin 
nkte ho. 

22 Tab Yabudion no. kaha, Kyii wuh 
apne ta,in mar dalega'r jo kabta hai, 
Jabari main jaia lilin, tum a nahin 
sak i u h o. 

23 Uh tie imken kaha, Tum niche »e 
bu; main lipar kg Inig: tum ia ja.liau 
ke ho; main 'u jahan k:i nahin Imii. 

21 Isliye iuaiq ne tumben kaha7 ki 
tum apne gunahon men maroge ; kyun- 
ki agar tum iman nablg Hio, ki main 
hi bun, to tum apne guTtahmj moij 
maroge, 

25 Tab unhon ne us se kaha, T'u 
kauubaiV Yisu'ncunbcn kaha, Wnlu 
jo main ne tumben akuru' hi u kaha. 

2fi Miij h pas bakat batcn kain, ki 
tutnliare haqq men kahiin, ~anr hukm 
karun: par jis ne mujho bheja hai, 
Bacheiia hai : aur ruam bhi, wulii bat- 
en, jo main ne tu » aunl hain, jahan 
ko kabta fidn, 

27 VVe na Hamjbe, ki wuh un m 
Sapki babat kakui 04, 
130 



2S Phir Yiaii' ue uuheu kaki, Jab 
tum lbni AMaui ko i'mchc par charh- 
aogo, tab tum Jaaoge ki main liiiri, aur 
main ap ne kucbh nahin kaita ; magar 
jo mere Bap ne mujho sikhiaya, mairj 
wuh liaten kabtd hiin. 

2i) Aur jis mu mujhe bheja Jiai, mere 
wath hai: Bap ne mujhe akela uahin 
chhura, kyiinki main hamesha uiw 
kam karta hiin.jo nnekhuBh atc hain. 

30 Jab wuh ye batcn kabta tha, to 
bahutere ns par imdn lae. 

31 TabYiKii' ne im Yahridion ko, jo 
na paj iman lati the, kaha, Agar tum 
mi'ri liat par sabit rahoge, to tum 
t&kqlq mere BnArfrd hoge j 

32 Aur aachai ko janoge, aur sach- 
(ii tum ku a-^ad karegi. 

33 1 Unhog ne uao jawab diyd. 
Ilam Abirahiim ki nasi hain, aur kisi 
ke (mlam kabhfi na the; tii kyimkar 
kabta hai, ki Tum azad kiye jaoge? 

34 Yisii'ne unhen jawab diya, Main 
tum »e sat'h aach kabta lain, ki Jo 
koi gumih karta hai, gunab ka gulam 
hai. 

35 Aur gulam abnd tak ghar men 
nalilij raiita ; Beta abad tak rahta hai. 

3tJ Pas agar Beta tum ko azad kar- 
egd.to mm tahqiq faad hoge. 

37 Main janta Ini n, ki tum Abira- 
hiim ki naisi ho ; lekio tum mere qatl 
ki fikr men ho, kyriuki tum men mere 
kalam ki jagat naliin. 

38 Maig ne jo kuchh apne Bap ke 
pas dekha hai, wuht kabtd hiin : aur 
tam wuh. jr.. tum ne Wpae liap ke pis 
dekbi hai, karto lio. 

39 l.'iiiniii no jawab meiius so kaha, 
IlamdrA bap Abiraham hai. Yisii' ne 
r.nli.n kaha, Agu tum AVjiraham ko 
faraand hote, to tum Abiraham ke se 
kam karto. 

40 Par tum mujhe qatl kiyachabto 
ho, jo aisa ahakliw hai, ki hftqq bit, jo 
main ne Khiiita w suni, turnhen kahi ; 

ib A bual lilin ne naliin kiya. 
i ^1 tata apue bap ke kam karteho. 



TaUdioz U YU'IIASNA', !X. ft tflfr rfWMl Jml&m. 

Tab unhon ne us sekaM, Hain haram J mIhi k J i a morc kalani par 'amal* kare, 
se paida nahin htie ; hamard Bap ck U) ahad tak maut ka imun ua cha- 



hai, ya'ue, Khuda. 

42 Yisa'ne uohenkaha, Agiir Khu- 
da tumhard Mp hota, to tum mujhe 
'aziz jante; kyi'irjki main Khuda sc 
tiikla. aur dy& haji; kyunki main Ap 
sc nahin aya, par uh ne mujhe bheja. 

43 Timi mori 'ibarat kyi'm naliin 
samojhtc ? is liye ki incrd kaldm sun 
lialiin s:ikk\ 

44 Tum apne bapSliaitansebo, aur 
chahto lio ki apne Mp ki khwalibdi 
ke muwifiq tua. Wuh to shunV u 
f|atil thd, aur sachfti par sAl)it M raha; 
kyunki us men sachdi nahin. Jab 
wuli jhutb, kahtd hai, to apne lii se 
kahta hai; kyunki wuh jluUtia bal, 
aur jhuth ka bani bai. 

45 Par tum is «abah se ki main 
sach kahtd hiin, mujh par iman naliin 
bite. 

4*1 Eann tum men sc mujh par 
«misili sabit karta hal? Agar main 
Hicfa kahti hiin, tum mnjh par iman 
kyun nahjn Idte? 

47~ Jo Khuda ka hai, Khuda ki 
b6tes sunia hai : tum h liye nabii) 
suutu ho, ki tutn Khuda ke nahin lio. 

4a lab Yahudion ne jawab men u* 
sc kuini, Kya ham aehdihd nahin 
kahte, ki tu .Samari hai, aur tere satu 
ek deo hai J 

49 Tisu' no jawab diya, Mere sath 
doo nahin ; par main apne Bap ki 'i /.zat 
kami hiin, aur titni meri be-'izzati 
karte ho. 

50 Aur main apni buzurgi nahir 
dbundhrd; ek hai, jo dliutidlita hai 
aur hukm karta hai. 

51 Main tum ne sach sach kahta 
liv'iii, Agar koi abakus mere kalam par 
'amal kare, to wuh abad tak maut ko 
banzia na dekhoga. 

52 Tab Yahudion ne us se kaba. 
Ab ham ne jdnd, ki tujh pas ek doc 
bai. AHr&hiim bub gaya, nur am- 
bivil bin. aur tu kahta hai, Agar koi 

131 



khega. 

5S Kya tu hnraare bap Abirahdin 

buzurgtar hai, aur wuh mar gaya ? 
atnbiya l>hi tnur gaya; tu apue ta,in 
kya tbahrdta hai? 

54 Y isu' ne jawab diya, Agar main 
apni buzTirgi kaiti hiin, to meri bu- 
zurgi kuchb nahin : par mera Bap bai, 
jise tum kahtc ho, ki hamara Khuda 
hai, wuh meri buzurgi karta liai. 

y i"i Tum ne use nahin j&nd ; lekin 
main use jdntd hiin; aur ani maig 
kahiin, ki main use nahin jari t a, (o 
main tuinhari tarah jlniljui bunga : 
«r uiain use jdntd lilin, aur, U ke 
alam rai 'amal karta hiin. 

50 lumharu bap Abiraham bubut 
ruishtaii thd ki men diu dekhe : 
chuudDcbi us ne dcklui, aur khush 
hud. 

57 Tab Yahudion ne ub se kahd, 
Teri W to pachas harus ki n.ibin, 
aur kya til 00 Abirahaui ko dekhi 
hai? 

f>B Yi&ii' no mihi'n kaba, Main tum 
m each sach kahtd luiii, Paahtar us w> 
ki Ahiraham ho, main ln'nj. 

69 Tab unhon ne patthar uthiie, ki 
use mdron ; par Yiau' no apne ta.iu 
ponhida kiyd, aur «n ke bich se gu- 
/.arkar haikal se nikl.i, aur yun cbald 



<;:iy:i 



IX BAU 



PHIIl us ne Ute biie ek sbaklis ko, 
jo janam ka audhd tlid, dekha. 

•1 Aur us ke shagirdori ne us se 
puchha, ki Ai Kablii, gunali kis ne 
kiyd, is sbakhs no, ya us ke iiil'l l>ap 
no, ki yib umllia pabla hua? 

3 Yisd' uu jawdb diyd, Na to is 
slmklis at iiuinib kiyii, na us ]n: toi 
bap ne; lekiu yiin lnia, i:i. ki Khuda 
ke kain tti men sAhil howttm 

i /in'irhai ki jls ne uiujho blieja, 
main us ke kamort ko, jab tak ki dui 



M atidht ka, dnkh pana. YU'HANNA', IX. Faritivn teii be-imaU i 



hai, kurdi; ; rst &t\ hai, aur koi us 
waqt kain uahin kar sakti. 

6 Jab tak main janin mcn huiJ, 
jahdn ka m'ir hm_i. 

6 Yih kahko us ne zamiu par thukd, 
nur thiik se mitti gdndhi, aur wuii 
mitti uh audhe k{ aiiklunj par lop ki, 

7' Aur usta kahd, Ja, aur Bilodtn ke 
batu mag, Qi> ka tarjuma, UhejA lni:i 
Ini), uahA. Tab w uh jAke uihAyA, 
aur bina hofce AyA. 

8 ^ Tab lmmaayojj ne, aur jinhon 
ne age ow andhd dekui thA, kahd, 
«vi'yili wuh nahin, jo baithA luiii 
bliikh miogU thA? 

fl lla'zon ne kahA, Yih wuhi hai l 
aurun ijo kahd, Y1I1 uh ki manind hai; 
uh ne kahA, Main wuhi hun. 

LO l'liir unhon M us so kahA, Teri 
ankhen kyrinkar khul tfayiij ? 

11 f" s lio "jawab diyA, aur kahA, ki 
Uk rnard M, jib ka ndm Y isu' hai, 
mitti guiidhi, aur racri daklioti par 
lag'a'i, aur mujhe kahi, ki SiloAm ke 
haus DUS j*\ * ar 'i»h4, So main jdko 
nahdyd, aur binA liuA. 

12 "lab unhon ne us ra kali S. ki 
Wuh kahdn hai"V Us ne kahA, Main 
nahin jdiuA. 

lfT*j[ We use, 30 pahle andhd thA, 
Farision pia lc ff»re, 

14 Aur jab ki Yisti' 110 mitti gtindh- 
ke us ki Ankhcn khuli thiij, Wlt k** 
«liu ilid. 

15 Pl'ir Fariaion ne bhi us ne pd- 
chlla, ki T6 ne apni Ankhcn kyunkar 
pAiti ¥ Uh ne nnhcn kahd, ki Di 
mari Anklmij pai gin mitti lagdi, aur 
main nahdyA, aur binA hiia. 

Ui Tah Farwioij men se batara ne 
kahd, Vib mard KhudA ki taraf so 
r.ahfn, kyiinki sabt ku din ko nahin 
HidutA. Aurorj ue kahA, Kyutjkai ho 
aaktA hai, i;i franahgAr insdu ais<: tuu- 
'njJHO dikbAor' So uu men ikhtilaf 
thA. 

17 Unhon ne uh andhe shakbs ko 
phir kahi, fii us ke bac|q ibsq, jis na 
182 



ieri Aukhen kholin, kya kahtA hai V 
Wuh bott, ki Wuh afc nabi hai. 

IH I'ar Yahfidiori ne yih bat yaqin 
naki, ki wuh andha thA, aurbiua hiil, 
jab tak ki unhvij ne us ahakhs k« mA 
bap ko, jo binA hiiA thA, bulaya. 

19 Aur un so yih kuliku pudiha, ki 
Kyd yih tuinliAra betA hai, jise tam 
kahte ho, andhd paidd hiia? phir wuh 
afa kyiiijluir dakuti hai? 

20 Uh ke ind bdp iie jawAb meij 
uiilion kahd. Hara jaute hain ki yih 
hamdra lieti hai, aur yih, ki wuh 
andhd paidd luhi ; 

'Jl Lekia yih ham naliin jAiite, ki 
wuh ab kyiinkar deklitd hai; yA kia 
ne us ki Ankliert klioli hain, liam na- 
hin jAnto ; wuh balig hai ; ua t» pii- 
chlio; to wuh apnf Ap kabesa. 

T2 Us ke md bAp Yahudion «e dar- 
1.1! lho, aur is liye unhcm no yih kahd: 
kyt'mki Yahudion nt' «k A kiya ilid. ki 
agar koi iqrdr kare ki wuh Masih hai, 
to Ibidatkhino se kharij kiyd jAwe. 

23 Ih wd.ste us ke md Iwlp nc kahd, 
ki Wuh bAlig hai ; ua sc puchho. 

24 Tah unhuri ne us sliakha ko, jo 
andhA thA, phir buldkar uh ae kahA, 
ki IjhudA ki liuz.urgi kar ; hara jdute 
hain ki yih mani gooahgat hai. 

25 U» ne jawdb diyA, aur kahd, ki 
Main nabin jdutd ki wuh Kunah<.-dr 
hai, ki nah i» : main ek bat janlA hun, 
ki main andhA thA, ab binA min. 

2(i Tab unhon ne ria so phir puchhd, 
ki Us no tujli ae kya kiya¥ kyi'mkar 

1 no teri dnkhi-u kholirj 'i 

27 Ub ne unhen jawdb diyd, Main 
ue to turnhoii abhi kahA, aur tum no 
na annd: kyd tura phir suna chahUs 
hu? kya tuinbhf ua ko ahduird bom} 

2H Tab unhon no nas malAmat ki, 

s kahA, Ttl us kA ibigird hai ; laun 
MdWi k« shairird hain. 

29 Huni jdute hain ki Ivhudi ne 
Musd ke sAth kaldm kiya; par ham 
naiin jaote ki yili kalian ka hai. 

30 Us shakhs ue jawab 111011 iinhon 



ndmi ko kharij karrni. YU'HANNA', X. Manh ne.k ch-tuptin hai. 



kahi. Ia men ta'aijub hai, ki tum i 
hin jAnte ki yih kahin ki hai, aur 
ne meri iukhen kholi hain. 

31 Hain jinto haig ki Khuda 
;rui>;ilit;aroii ki nahin Kimia; par agar 
koi Khuda- paraui ho, aur us ki rnam 
j*r chale, lu as ki wuh sua t a hai. 

32 Dunyi ke Bhuxu' ro suunc men 
nak i n iyi, ki kiai ne janarn ke andhe 
ki inkhen kholi bon. 

33 Agar yih. mard Khudi kl taraf 
se tia h.it si., to kuchh na kar sakti. 

34 Unhon ne jawab men us so ka- 
hi, Tii lo bilkuli gunihon nien paiihi 
Inii, aur kyi ham ko sikhlrit;i hai V 
Tab unhon ne use kliirij kar diya, 

35 Yisii' ne «uni ki unhon 11« tua 
kharij kar diya ; tau us ne A» pakar 
ub so kahi, Kya tii Khudi ke IJete 
par iman lata hai? 

3ti Usne jawab men kaha, Ai Khu- 
diwand, wtih kaun hai, ki main uh par 
iman laun ? 

37 Yisti' ne us se kaha, Tu ne to 
use dcklia hai, aur jo tujli se boiti hai, 
wulii hai. 

38 Ufl ne "kahi, Ai Khudiwand, 
main iumn liti hdn. Aur ub ne use 
s<ijda kiva. 

3!l % Tah Yisu' ne kahi, ki Main 
'adilat ke liye is dunyi men iyi htin, 
ti ki wo jo nahin dekhte hain, dekhcn, 
aur jo dekhte ham, andhe ha jiwen. 

40 Aur Farision ne, jo us ke sith 
the, yih biten sunke us se kaili, Kya 
ham bin andhe hain? 

41 Yisii' ne unhen kahi, Agar tum 
andhe hote, to giinahgir 11.1 hote: par 
ab tum to kahte lio, ki Ham dekhte 
h:iiij ; is liye tumhiri guiiak raliti 
hai. 

X BA'B. 

MA1N| tum ae sach aach kali tahun, 
Jo ki darwiy-e se hherkhine 
men dikhil nahin hota, baiki aur taraf 
se ipar charhti hai, wuh chor aur 
■.ifii.ir hai. 
' 133 



2 Lekin wuh jo darwiM ne dikhil 
hoti hai, bheron ki unrariyi hai. 

3 Us ke liye (Urban khulti hai; 
aur bheren uski iwiz sunti hain j aur 
wuh apui bhemn ko mim loko hulitd 
.hai, aur unheu bahar te jati hai. 

4 Aur jab wuh apni bheroii ko bi- 
har nikilti hai, to nn ko ige (m 
chalti hai, aur bheren ai ke pichhe 
ho leti hain ; kyinki we us ki iwiz 
pahehinti hain. 

fi Aur we begtafl ke pichhe nahin 
latin, baiki us se bhagt.i hai n ; is liye 
ki beginon ki iwiz nahin pahehintin. 

6 Yiftu' ne yih tamsil unhen kahi ; 
lakin we na samjhc ki yih kyi biteii 
thin, jo wuh un se kahta tlii. 

7 Tab Yi«u' ne nnlion piir kahi. 
Main tum se sach sach kaliti htin, ki 
bheron ki darwiza main hun. 

8 8ab jitne mujh se ic;e ae, chor aur 
batmir hain : par bheron ne un ki ua 
suni. 

Darwi/a main hun : agar kol 
shakhs mujh so dikhil ho, to najat 
liiwegi, aur andar biliar iyi jiega, 
r charigih pi«ga. 

10 Chor nahin ita, magnr churine, 
aur qail kanie, aur halik kame ko : 
main iyi hun, ti ki wezindagi pawen, 
aur /.iyida hisil karun. 

11 Achchha garariyi main hun : 
achchhi garariyi bheroii ke liye apni 
jin deti hai. 

12 Par mazdur, aur wuh jogarariyi 
nahin, aur bheron ki milik nahin, 

.iya ite dekhkv bheroii ko ehhor 
deti hai, aur bhi» jiti hai ; aur biie- 
riyi nnhen phirti hai, aur bheron ko 
parigniida k arti hai. 

18 Mazdiir bhiyti hai, kyCinki wuh 
mazdur hai, aur bheron ku liye likr 
nahin karti. 

14 Aolichbi gararivi main hun, aur 
apniou ko pahehinti hun, aur meri 
niujhu |«ihchinti hain. 

15 Jia tarah so Hip mujhe jdnti 
hai, us tarah main Liap ko jinti hiin : 



M'.tsih aur Bup k\i 



YU'HANNA', X. 



e k thuharna. 



aur main bhernn ke liye apni jari detd 
b 'i n, 

III Aur meri aur bhi bheren hain, 
]d is bherkhdne ki nahin ; zan'tr hai 
ki ruairj cmherr bhi ha'nj, nur we meri 
awaz aunengi ; aur ek hi gali», aur ek 
hi garariyi hoga. 

17 Bdp mujhe is liye piyar karta 
hai, ki main apni jati detd liuti, td ki 
main uae phir liiu. 

18 Koi shakhs uso mujh se nahiij 
leti, pnr main use ap hu detd liiiij; 
atari ikhtiyar hai ki usu duri, aur 
meri ikhtiyir hai ki usc phir liin. 
Yih hukm main :ie ajjno Bdp «e paya. 

19 1 Tah Yahiidion k«bicli,m bit 
03 ke afttab, pl.ir ikhtilaf bui. 

20 Aur bahu ton ue un rutin se ka- 
ha, ki Us ko sdth sk doo hai. aur wuh 
siri hai; tur» us ki kyrin sutitc ho 

21 Auron ne kahi, Yih baton 1 

ki nahin, jin men dsa hai. K ya deo 
andhe ki ankhcii khol sakti hai ? 

22 II JaruBofam msrj tajdid ki 'id 
hiu, aur jaro kii rnaiisiiN tJui. 

23 Aur VisiV haikal kuandar JSulai 
mani usd-re nicrj phirta tha. 

24 Tah Yahiidkm 110 use i gheri, 
aur us si k:ili:i, ki T d kab tak hamdre 
dil ko adhar meii rakhogi? Agar tu 
Ujufh hai, lo liain ko naf kah de. 

25 Yisi'i' M unhen jawab diyd, ki 
Main M bo Uniiiinj kalui, uar linu ue 
y., jin ua kiya : jo kira main apnu 
Bap ke nim se karta lnin, yih niere 
gawdh hain. 

24 Lekiu tnm iinau naMrj lain, 
kyiiiiki jala* main u tumben kafaa, 
ium mori bhcron nien se nahin. 

27 Meri bheren meri dwi/. sunt! 
hain, aur main uiilieij jiutd hit n, aur 
we mere piehhe ohalti hain. 

28 Aur main nuhen hamesha ki 
zindagi baklislui hun . aur we kabhi 
balik na lioiigi, aur koi iirihcii mere 
hdth se chhin na lega. 

2!l Meri Bap, jis 06 unhen ruujhe 
diyd hai. nah se hara hai ; aur koi 
134 



unhen incre Bap ke bith ho chhin 
nahin le sak ia. 

30 Main aur Bap ok hain. 

31 Tah Yahiidion ne phir patthnr 
nfliaV, lii us par paUhrau karun. 

32 Yimi* ne unhen jawab riiya, ki 
Main ue gpne Biip ki] bnliut H 
aelielihe krim tuiuhen dikhae hain ; 
un iiicti su k i s kain ke liyu luui 
mujbe pattlirao karte bo ? 

3J YiiMdion ne uue jawab diyd, 
aur kalid, ki II ain tujiiu aclichhe kdm 
ko liye nahiij, baiki is liye tujhe 
Dfttthrio karto inim, ki td kttfr kahtd 
h;ii. nur 'mn&u boko apue ta.ij» Kbuda 
baudtd hai. 

84 Viwu' ue unhen jawab diyii, Kya 
tuiulian shari'iit rnen yih nahin liklid 
hai, ki Main ne kaha, Tum kbudi 

ho y 

35 Jah ki ua no unhen, jin ke pas 
Ktuda k,i kalam dya, khuda kaiio, 
m r niuuikin naliin ki kitdb bdtil bo ; 

86 Tnm BM,iiM Khudii. ne luakli- 
stis kiya, aur jahil) men blteja, kahte 
ho, ki Tu kul'r baklii hai; ki main ne 
kaha, Main Khuda kd llw.a hun. 

87 Agar main apu e Baji ke kdm 
nahin kuna, to mujh pai' intan niat 
lio. " 

38 Lekin agar main karta luin, to 
agarehi mujh pir iman na Ido, tau bhi 
kini o n par imau liio, ta ki tum jiino, 
aur yaipu koio, ki Dap mujh men hai, 
aur maiii un uicn Lu.11. 

39 Tahunlinn no phir ofaihi ki uae 
pakar len ; par wuh un ke itdthog se 
tiika.1 gayij 

40 Aur Yardau ke pir, m jogoh, 
jaliatj Vubanni pahle baptisma diyd 
kai li tha, phir gaya ; aur wahin raha, 

■11 Aur Imhulun ne us pd» jako 
kaha, ki Ydhannd no to kol mu'ajUa 
nahin dikhdya ; par eab bdten jo Yii- 
hoafii ue 19 ke haqq men kabin sach- 
chi thin. 

42 Aur wahin bahut sc us par imdn 

lio. 



A 



ka, 

XI BA'R 
UR La'nzar Ddme ek 

Bait'aniyd kd rahnewala, 



YU'JIANNA', XI. marjami. 

14 Tali Yiflo' ne unhen saf kaba, ki 
shakhs, La'aienr m»r gaya. 

15 Aur main Uunhdre liyi- is par 



Mariyam M» us ki bahiti Mart.hd ke. klmsh hi'.ij, ki main. wahaii ua tlid, td 



gayw kd tha, biiudr Ihd. 
(Wuhi Mariyam, jia 



ki tum Iman Jao; par do, bam us pa.-j 
Khudd- j den.. 



wand ko 'itr maid, nur apne balon w 16 Tab Thumd 
us ke pdnwon ko poaohha tha, uai ka 
bhrii La'a/.ar bimar tha.) 

3 So us ki bahiuon. ne us ko yih 
kabid bhejd, ki Ai Kbudawand, dekh, 
jisu tu piyar karta hai, bimar hai. 

4 Yisii" no sunkc kaha, ki Yiii 
maut ki bimar! nahiy., lekin Khrnid 
ki buzurgi ke liye hal, td ki ua ke 
nahab kg Khudd ke Bete ki buzurgi 
ki jawe. 

6 Aur Yisti' Martha ko, aur us ki 
bahin, aur La'asar ko, piyar karta 
tha. 

U Bo jab us ne aund ki wuh bimar 
hai, aur do roz us jagah, jahdn wuh 
tha, rahd. * 

7 Tab ba'd us ke shdgirdon N kalia, 
A'o, ham phir Yahiidiya meij jaeu. 

H Shagirdon ne us se kaha, Ai 
Kabbi, abhi Yahudion. ua chahd tha 
ki tujhe patthrdo karen,; aur tii wahdn 
phir jritA hai? 

9 Yisii' ne jawab diyd, ki Kyd din 
ke bdrah ghante liahm? Agar koi 
din ke waqt chale, t*> wuh thokar 
nahin khdtd; kyiinki wuh ia jahdn ki 
roshni ik'khla hai. 

10 Par agar koi rdt ke waqt chale, 
to «nih thokar khdtd hai, kyi'iriki us 
nua rotan! uahin. 

11 Usneyih bdicn kabin; aur ba'd 
us ke uu bo kahii, ki Hatnara dost 
T.a'azsr so gaya liai ; par main jatd 
liun ki usc jagalin. 

12 Tab us ko shagirdoii nc kaba, Ai 
Khuddwand, agar wuh sota hai, to 
ohanga ho jdegd. 

13 Yisii' ne to us ki maut ki bdhat 
kaha ; par unhon ne khiyal kiya ki 
wuh oiud ki: ar&iu ki babat farindtd 
tha. 

135 



i Didiraiuit 

kahtc haig, apne hani-pairaunn «o 
kahd, A'o, ham bhi cbalen, td ki us ke 
-alh i: .uvri. 

17 Pas Yisu' ne dke darydft kiya 
ki chdrdin hficki use qabr ineij rak b d. 

18 Aur Bait'aniyd Yarusakm se 
nawHk. takhminan ek pakku k(M ke 
qarib tha. 

19 Aur bahut sc Yahudi Marthi 
aur Mariyam ke pas de the, ki un ke 
bhdi ki bdbat uu ae mdtam-pnrsi 
karen. 

2U So Mart.hd ne, jojj sund ki Yisu' 
dtd hai, us kd istiubdl kiya; par 
Mariyam ghar mei) baithi raki. 

21 Tab Martha ne Yisu' ko kahd, 
Ai Kbudawand, agar tu yiilidn hotd, to 
merd bhdi ua marla. 

22 Lckin maiij juiiti hdfl kt ah bhi 
jo kuchii tu Khudd se nidnge, Khtjdd 
tujhe degd. 

■12 Yisu' ne us se kaha, Teri bhdi 
phir jl utlicgd. 

21 Martha ne us se kahd, Main 
jdnti liun ki qiydinat nien picl.iih- <iin 
phir ji uthegd. 

2f> YiKd' ne us se kahd, (jiydmat 
aur /.indagi main bi hdfl ; jo inujh par 
irndn Idwe, agarchi wuh mar gaya ho, 
tau bhi jiegd : 

26 Aur jo koi jitd hai, aur mujli par 
imdn lata hai, kabbJ 01 uiarega. Kyd 
tu yih yaqin rakliti hai V 

27 Ua ne us se kahd, Ildn, ai Kbu- 
dawand, mujlie yaqin hai ki Khudd 
kd Bctd Masih, jo dunyd mtm auewala 
thd, tii h/ Ini. 

28 Wuh yih kahke chali s;ayi, aur 
chu]ike apni bahin Mariyam ko buldke 
kahii, ki Ustad dyd hai, aur tujliu 
bu lata hai. 



Matihh&uiM YU'HANNA', XT. ijabr par 

29 Wuh yih bit sunte UI jald uthi, flspis khare ham, main m yili kadi 



aur us pas ii. 

30 Aur Yisii' banoa basti men na 
pahuncka tbd, baiki «isi jagah thi, 
jaliirj Martini UH mili thi. 

31 Tab Yahudi jo ua ke nith ghar 
men the, aur use tasalli dete tho, yili 
d'klike ki Mariyam jald uthi, aur 
binar gayi, yun feahte hu« us ke pi- 
chhe ho liye, ki Wuh qabr par roiie 
jati liai. 

32 Aur jab Marivam wahin jahirj 
Yisu' tha Ai, aur use dekha, to us ke 
fladamorj par girke uh se kahi, Ai 
Khudawand, agar t. u yabau hoti, to 
nicra bhai umr na jati. 

88 Jab Vinil' lio IH k» dekhi ki roti 
hai, aur Yahudion ko bhi, j" ua ke sath 
ae the, ki rute hai n, to dil sc ah mari, 
aur initam kiya, 

84 Aur kaiia, Tum ne uae kahdn 
rakhi? Unhon ue kalii, Ai Kbudi- 
wand, i, aur dekh. 

86 YM' roya. 

3C Tab Yahudi boTe, ki Dekho, uw 
kilua jiivilr karti thi I 

37 lia'aim ne un mim se kahi, KyA 
yih mard, ji» ne andbe ki inkhen 
kiiolin, na kar taki ki yih shakhs bhi 
ua niarta'? 

38 Tab Yisd' apno dil sc phir ih 
karti hui gabr par iya. Wuh ck gir 
thi. aur us par ek patiyi d hari thi. 

39 Yibu' farmiii hai, ki Patiyi 
uthao. Ub raurda ki bahin Marthi 
ua M ];aliti hai, Ai KhuriAwand, us ne 
to ah badbu iti hai, kyiinki use chir 
diti ln'ie. 

40 Yisii' uu w kahti hai, KyA main 
ne tujhe nahin kahi, ki Agar tu imin 
liwe, lo KhudA kA jalai dekhegi ? 

41 Tab unhog ne patiye ko wahan 
«c, jahin wuh murda gari thi, uthiyi. 
I'hir Yinu' ne apni ia klen uthiiti, 
aur kahi, Ai Uap, main teri shukr 
karti hi'm ki tu ne meri suni hai. 

!'J Aur main ue jani ki tu mori nit 
imnti hai : p.i; in lugun ke bi'is, jo 
136 



ti ki we imiu liweii ki tu ue mujhe 
bheji hai. 

+3 Aur yih kalike buland Awiz se 
chillAyi, ki Ai La'asw, bihar nikal i. 

44 Tab wuh jo mar gaya* tha, ka- 
fan se hith o pinw bandhe hiic nikal 
iyi: aur ua ki chihra cinin^iiil 
niniAl se Lipat A hi'ii thA. Yisii' ne 
unlvrj kahi, V m khul do, aur jine do. 

4-5 Tab Yahudion inerj se bahutore 
jo Hilirmu kane Ae the, aur ye kim 
jo Yisu' ue kiye dekhe the, us par imin 
tie. 

4G Par un men se baV.on ne Farinion 
ke pas jike we kim, jo Yisii' ne kiyo 
the, bayan kiye. 

47 1 Tab sardir kihinon aur Fari- 
sion ne Sadr majlis jatn'aki.aur kahi, 
ki Ham kyi karte liain ? ki yih mani 
bahut mu'ajize dikhati hai. 

48 Agar ham usc yiinhi chhoren, to 
sab ua par imin liwerige; aur Kiiuii 
ikc hauiira inulk aur inuuuiyat ko bhi 
lu lenge. 

4H Aur un men se ek ne, Qayifa 
nam, jo us sil sardir kahin thi, un se 
kahi, Tum kuuhh nahin jinte, 

50 Aur na andesha karte hn ki 
hamire liye yih Uh tar hai, ki ek idmi 
qaum ke badle mare, aur na ki «liri 
cuuim lialik howe. 

51 Par us no yih apni taraf sc na 
kahi ; lekin uh sabab so ki us baras 
sardir kihiu thi, peshkhabari ki ki 
Yiai'i' us qaum ko wAntw marcfji ; 

b'i Aur na sirf us qaum ke wiste, 
hal k i is winte bhi, ki wuh Khudi ko 
farzandon ko, jo pariganda htie, baham 
jam'a kare. 

53 flo weusi mz se ipaa men mash- 
warat karne lage, ki ua ko jin bo 
miron. 

54 la liye Yisu' Yahudion men ige 
ko zihiri na phirA, baiki wahAu se 
bayibin ki nawihi ki; ririim nim ek 
shahr men fjayA, aur apue ahigirdon 
ko -sath wabiji guzrAn karue lagi. 



Masih l-o YU'TTANNA', XTT. 

65 f Aur Yahfldion ki' IA i tanah ki Ija'azar ko, j 
rnzdik Ihi; aur babutere 'id ke nahleidekheri. 
us nawAhi su Yariisalam ko gaye, tA 
ki apne ta.in pak kareti. 



5t> Tab unhon ne YisiV ki tulilah ki, ruAren : 



TToak'anva bahtid. 
t ub Le jilayd thA, 



10 T Tal> sardSr kahinon ne maish- 
warat ki, ki La'azar ko bhi jan se 



»ur haikal nien khure hoke Apas men 
tlhl. ki Tum kyA guniAn karte ho, ki 
wuh 'id men ua awega? 

57 Aur sariiar kahin.>n aur Farision 
no bhi hukm diyA thA, ki Agar koi 
iiinta ho ki wuh kabin hai, to dikh- 
iawe, ta ki use pakar len. 

XII BA'B. 

PHIR Tisu' fasah ae cblia iro: Age 
Bait'aniyA men, jahan I-a'iv/.nr 
tha, jo miiA tha, aur ji«c us ne murduu 
TLiL-n h iitliiiya tha, iya. 

2 Wfthftn unhon ne M ke liyo ziyA- 
fnt ki ; aur Martili" khidmat karti thi ; 
]wir l.a'azar ek UB men St) tha jo ua ke 
sath khAne baithe'the. 

3 Tab Mariyam ne Adh aer khAlis 
Alir qimati jatamAsi ka 'itr lekar V 
ke pAnwon |>ar mala, aur apu e balon 
ko ua ko i>Anw ponehhe ; aur ghi 
ki bii «e bhar Raya thA. 

4 Tab Yuluidali Iskariyiiti i" 
Shama'un ka beta, aur us ke shAgirdon 
men se ek tha, jo uso pakarwAyA 
chAhtA tha, kahA, ki 

5 Yih 'itr tiu aau dinAr ko kyun na 
becha gaya, aur muhtajou ko na diyA 
gaya? 

(i Us neyih naia liyokabA.ki muh- 
t/ijon ki kuchh likr kartft tha, p:ir U 
liye ki wuh obor tha, aur thailA sath 
rakhta tha, aur jo kuchh us men parta 
tha, utha letA tha. 

7 Tab Visi'i 1 u kahA, ki Use chhi _ 
de, ki us ne yih mere kafan dafan ke 
din ke liye rak ha tha. 

8 Kynnki muhtaj bamesha tum- 
hare «alh rahte; par main hamesha 
i umbari' sal h 

9 Aur Yahuuion ke bahut log jan 
gaye ki wuh wahAn hai, aur we Ae, na 
siri' YwiV ke sabab, baiki is liye bhi 

1ST 



11 Kyurjki ua ke sabab ae bahut 
Yahudi phir jAte, aur Yisi'i' par Emfia 
lAto the. 

12 1 IWsre roz bahut log, jo 'id 
men ae the, yih suuke ki Yisu' Yard- 
aalam men Ati hai, 

13 Khajur ke darakhton ki ddlidn 
lifl, aur ua ke istiqbft'l ko niklc, aur 

ikAre, Ilosh'anna: MubArok wuh jo 
Kjtudftmod ke nAm sc AtA hai, L-rAid 
ka llft-ishAh. 

14 Aur Yisii' ek sadhi ki bachcha 
pAkar ub par aawAr liiid; jaisA ki li- 
klui hai, 

15 Ai Saihtiii ki Iieti, mat dar ; 
dckh, ut» Btojb&h gadhi ke bachche 
par aawAr hokc AtA hai. 

1(1 Ub ke shAgird pahle ye bAten na 
samjhe ; lekin jab YisiV apnejalaTkn 
pahunchA, tab unhon ne yAd kiyii ki 
ye bAten us ke ha.|q men likhi thin, aur 
yih, ki unhon ne tisi su yiii suluk kiyi. 

17 Tab un logon ne jo us ku sath 
the, jia waqt us ub La'aaar ko rjabr se 
bahar bulAyA aur murdi>Q rncn se 
uthAyA tha, gawAhi di. 

18 la bA'is wuh bhir ua ke isttnliAl 
ko nikli, kyi'mki unlion ne buiiA ki us 
ne yih nni'ajka dikhlayA. 

IH Tab l''arisiori no A]>aa int--n kaha, 
Tum dckhte ho ki tum Be kuchh ban 
uahin partA? Dekho, ki ek 'Alam us 
ka pairau ho chalA. 

20 1 Aur un ke darmiyAn, jo 'id 
men parastish kanie Ae the, bi'/.c 
Yi'uiAiit the. 

21 Wc FailbuB ke pa>, jo BaitsaidA 
e Jaili kA tbA, Ae, aur us se 'arz ki, aur 
kahA, ki Ai sAhib, ham chAhte hajn, ki 
Yiail' ko dekliun. 

22 Failbna ne Ake AndryAs se kaha : 
aur phir Andryaa aur Failbda ne Ywii' 
ko khnbar di. 



ifasih ki nhikdi/ut 

23 % Yisfi' ne unhcn jawab d iya, 
aur kahA, ki Wacit Ayd ki Ibu i A'dam 
jalai pAwe, 

21 Main tum se wieh sach kahtA 
Iii'lii, ki Gehuii ka dana, agar zamiu 
men girkc mar n» jAwe, to akela rahta 
hai ; par agar wuh mare, to bahutsd 
phaJ lata hai. 

25 Jo aimi jan kfl "ada rakhtd hai, 
use khoegA; aur wvili, jo i.-* jahdu men 
apni jjiu se 'adawat rakhta bal, DM 
hamesha ki ziudagi ke liye mahfuz 
rakhega. 

26 Agar koi meri khidmat kare, to 
cliahiyu ki wuh meri patrauf kare j aur 
jibjagah main hiin, meri khddim bhi 
wuliin hogd: agar koi meri khidmat 
kare, to liiiji uh ki 'izzat karogd. 

27 Ab meri jati ghtibrdti hai; aur 
main kya kahon ? ki Ai Kap, mujhe 
is ghari «e bacha? lekio main to Lsf 
ghari ke liye aya hog. 

28 Ai Bap, apne nam ko jalai 
bakhsh. Wuijhiii asmdn «u awiiz ai, ki 
Main ne jalai bakhahA hai, aur phir 
jalai bakhshdgga. 

29 Tab logoti ne, jo khare the, yili 
suuke kaha, ki Uada'l garjt : auron ne 
kaha, ki Kirislita us ae bola, 

uO Yisii' ue jawab diya, aur kaha, 
ki Yih away, mere waste uahiij, baiki 
tumhare liye ai. 

:'l Ab U dnnyd par hukm hotA 
hai : ab ih duuya ka sardar nikal dfyA 
jaega. 

32 Aur main jo liilij, agar zamin se 
lipar uthdya jalin, Lo Bab ko apne pas 
kliinchiingi. 

33 Vs" uo yih kahke pati iliya, ki 
wuh Via maut so marue par hai. 



YU'IIAXNA', XII. b' log iman nahiv hit* fli 
■ai. Jab tak ki n i'; r tumhare pas hai, 
:halo, na ho ki tariki tumben jA pak re ; 
aur wuh jo andhere men ehaliA hai, 
naliiy jan'la ki kUliar jati hal, 

36 Jab tak nur tatahan paa lini. 
nur par iniAn liio, ta ki tuiu nur ke 
fanand ho. Yisu 1 ne yih liAtim kah- 

,aur jake apue la.in un se eliliip:i> :i. 

37 ^ Aur agarchi us ne un ke ni 
ba rii itne mu'ajize dikhac, par wc tik 
par iman na Ide : 

38 Ta- ki Yas'aiydh nabi U kalam, 
jo us ne kaba, pura howe, ki Ai Khu- 
diwand, hamArc paigain ko kis ne 
y»qin kiya hai? aur Khudawand ka 
bau kis pai zAhir hua hai? 

89 ls liye we imdn na la saken, ki 
Yas'aivah m; phir kaha, 

40 Ub ne un ki ankheg andhi km, 
aur un ke dil sakht kiye hain, ta ua 
ho ki wc ankhon ee dekhen, aur dil «t 
ttatnjiieii, aur rujiV lAwen, aur main 
unhcn changA karun. 

41 Yas'aiyah nc yih farmayd ihA, 
jab us ke jalAl ko dekha, aiu- uh ki ba- 
bat biton kiii. 

42 ^ Hawujiid us ke sardAron meri 
so bhi bahut us par imdn Ide; magar 
Kaiisiuii kr 1>:l'ls niilmit iur iijrar ua 
kiyA, na ho ki 'ibadatkhane sk khAiij 
kiye jAerj. 

43 Kycnki we us buKurgi ko, jo 
insan se bot:, us buzurgi se, jo Khiuiii 

toraf se huti, ziydda 'aziz janre 



34 Logon ne us sejawab mon kahd,' mere bhej ii«wdl« ko dokhld hai. 



Ham ne shari'at se suni hai ki Masih 
alwd tak rahegd : phir tii kynnkar 
k ihta hai, ki Zarui hai ki Ibn i A'dam 
uthAya jieV yih Ibu i A'dam kaun 
hai? 

36 Tab VihiVuoiuiheij kaha,kiNiir 
tlmri aur dcr tak tumhare darniiydn 
' 138 



the. 

44 % Yisii' ne pukArkc kabd, Wuh 
jo itiujii pai iman lata hai. tnujh par 
nahiii, baiki us par jisne mujhe bheja, 
iuiAn lata hai. 

46 Aur wuh jo niujli? dekhtl hai, 



46 Main jahAn men bui hoke dyd 
hiin, tA ki jo koi mujh par iman lawe, 
ainllnT« men na rahe. 

47 Aur ai;ar koi shakhs meri bateij 
,-iuiL', aur iman ua ldwe, to main us 
par hukm naliin kartd; kyfnjki trtalg 
is liye nahiii Ayd, ki jahdn par hukm 



.Vmili msilan ke sikhlata. YITHAN'STA', XIII. 

karun, baiki ib liye ki jahan ko back- 



ki wf'irotani hiren. 
9 Shama'i'm l'atrus no us se kahd, 
ki Ai Khudawand, sirf mere pinw na- 
radd kar detd.jhin, baiki hath aur sir h\\\. 

' 10 Yisri" ne u» 30 kaha, W uh Jo 



kuna, 



4ti Wuh jo mujh 
aur men bdtug ko quiml mili 

«w ko liye ek liukiu karnewala hai : nuhl.iya gayahai, siwa panwdhoneke 
j ih'un, jo main ne kaha hai, wuhi us'muhtaj tubin, baiki sarasar pak hai: 



ko pichhle din gunahgdr thabriegi. 

4y Kyiiyki main nc to iip se nahir. 
kaki, bailkr Bdp ne jis ne mujhe bheja 
mujhe fanmln diyd, ki main kya bol- 
i.n, aur main kya kalu'm. 

60 Aur mam jinta hun ki us ka 
fitnnan hamesiia ki ziudairi hai: pas 
fa kuchh ki main kahta hiin, jis tarah 
Bdp ne mujhe kaha, usi tarah kahta 
nun. 

XIII BA'B, 
J T'D i fasah se pahlc, jab ki Yisu' ne 
J_ jiiia ki mera waqt a pakumoU 
hai, kl is jahan se Bap pas jdun, 
jaisa wuh ags apnon ku jo dunyi men 
the piyar knrta iba, waisa hi akhir tak 
piyar karta rahd. 

H Aur jab ijbiim ka khani chund 
gaya thd, ie liye ki Skutati ne Shama- 
lin ke beto Yahiidab I.-kariyiiti ke dil 
men dald th.i. k i om pakafwac 

3 Tisu' yib jankar ki Uap H sah 
ebi zen mere hatkoti men din, aur main 
Khudd ke pas se aya, aur Khuda ke 
pas jati hiin, 

4 Klian*.' M ufha, aur apne kapn 
Uar rakh», aur rumal h: k w apnl kamar 
men bandha, 

5 Ba'd us ke ek bdsan men pani 

iv shdgirdon ke pdnw dhoni\ 
aur 08 rumal se jo kamar men bandha 
tha, ponchhne lagi. 

i: l'iiir wuh Slumia'un Fatrus tak 
aya : tab us u iu se kaha, Ai Khuda- 
wand, tu mere panw dhotd hal ( 

7 Yisu' nu jawab men us se kaha, 
Jd ki mam karta hiiii, ab tti nahin 
janta, par ba'd us ke jdnegd. 

8 Patri is ne us se kaha, ki A'prnere 
paijw kabhi na dhowen. Timi' 
jawab diya, Aiiar iii:inj tujhe oa i 
to mew tath tura hissa na liogi 

139 



tum pak ha, lekin aab naliii_ 
1L Kyiinki wuh to apnc pakar wane- 

wale k« jauta tha, is liyu us ne kaha, 

Tum sah pak nahin ko. 

" ' Jab wuh un ko panw dho chuka 

thd, aur apne kapre liye. the, plii: 

hait.likar uulu-n tim, A'ya tum jante 

ho ki main ne tum se kyd kiya '! 

mujhe Uetid, aur Khiuhi- 

wand, kaha karte bo : tum khub kahte 

ho, kyiinki main hiin. 

14 l'asjabki uuijh Khndawund aur 
Ustid ne tumhdris panw dhoo, to tiiui- 
hen bhi lazim hai ki ek dte< ku 
panw dboo. 

15 Is liye main no tumben ek na- 
muna diyd hai, ta ki jaisa main ne 
tum se kiya, tum bhi karo. 

1G Main tum se sach sach kahtd 
hun, ki Naukar apne li.pi so bar.i na- 
hin, aur ua wuh jo hhcja gaya" hai, apne 
hhejnoivale ^'. 

17 Agar tum yih haten samajbte, 
aur un [«r 'amal karte ho, to mubarak 
ho. 

18 \ Main tum sah ki babat nabin 
kahta ; main jauta hiin jiaiwjj niain 
ne chund hai : lekin yih nota ta ki 
nawishta pura howe, Us no jo mere 
Nath roti khati hai, mujh par latutbii 
hai. 

19 Ab main tum se is ke waipi' hone 
sopahle kahta hi'iu, ki jah wuh wuqu' 
mi.ii awi', to tum iman lao ki main hi 
hiin. 

'10 Main tum se aach sach kahta 
lniij, Wuk jo us ko jise main bhejta 
hiin etftbdl karti hai, mujhe qabul 
karr.i liai ; aur wuh jo mujhe qabul 
iisu karta liai, UB«, jis ne mujhe bheja, 
i, ijabul kartd hai. 
| 21 Yisu'yun kahks dil men ghab- 



Mntih khtibnr (fafii 
raya, aur gawati! dcke bola. Main tum 
m sach sach kahta lilin, ki Bk ttOO 
uien se mujhe pakurwnoga. 

22 Tali shagird sini b h a mnj hoke 
ki us ne kiw ki babat kaha, ek dusre ko 
dekhne lnjr.e. 

23 Aur uh ke shafiirdon merj se ek, 
jiso Yisu' piyar karri tha, Yisu' ki 
<lihii1i ki taraf jliukii hua kliau.* iiiru 
ahatuil t liii. 

24 Tab Shama'un Pafcrua ne use 
ishara kiya, ki daryaft kare ki wuh, 
jia ki babat uh ne kaha, kami hai. 

25 'Jab us ne Yisu' ke simi ki turi 
ziyada jhukke m se kaha, Ai KhmhL- 
waiid, wuh feaun hai V 

2ti Yisii 1 ue jawab diya, Jise main 
niwdlc ko tar karke deta hfin, wuhi 
hai. P)iir us ne niwala tar karke 
Hbaina'iin ke bete Yahiidah Iskariyut.i 
ko diya. 

27 Aur ba'd us niwala ke Shaitan 
uh men samaya. Tab Yisu' ne une 
kaha, Jo kuchh ki tii karta hai, jald 
kar. 

28 Par un men hc, jo khane baithe 
the, kisi m na jana ki yih ua no use 
kis liye kaha. 

20 Kyfinki bnV.nn ne guman kiya, 
ki is liye ki Yahfidah ke pas thaili 
ilii, ki Yisu' use yih kahta tha, ki Jo 
ham ku 'id ke liye darkar hai, mol 
le; ya yih, ki muhtajon kokuohh do. 

30 Pas wuh niwaLa lekar tilfaiir 
nikla; aur riit tlii. 

31 1 Jab wuh ehala gaya, Yibu' 
ne kaha, ki Ab Ibn i A 'dam ne jalai 
paya, aur Khuda M uh ke ba'is jalai 
paya. 

32 Agar Khuda ne uh se jalai paya 
ho, tu Khuda use bbi apno se jalai 
dega, aur use filfnur jalai desa. 

33 Ai bachcho, main thori dor tak 
tumharesath hun. Tum niujln' iUiuu- 
dhogo, aur joisa Iti main ne Yalnidimi 
se kaha, ki Jalian main jiit.a hun, tuvn 
nahin a sakte, waisa ab main tumben 
bbi kahta hrin. 

140 



YI.'llANNA', XIV. H ia»i 



use paharw&tgA, 

31 Main turuhen ek naya huktn deta 
h (S n, ki Tum ek diisre «e rauhabfaal 
rakho; jaisa main ne tiira ae nnbabtat 
rakiii, aiso bi tura bhi ek dusre se 
muhabbat rakho. 

35 la se Bab janerjgo ki tum mere 
ibigird ]i",:i.:;ir Lumapasmen muhab- 
bat rakho. 

36 % ShnmaMn Patrua no us se 
kaha, Ai Khiidawand, tii kahan jata 
hai ? Yisu' ne use jawab diya, Jahan 
main jata Imn, tii ab meru piehbe a 
nahin sakti ; par agc ko mere piehbe 
awega, 

37 PatruB ne use kaha, Ai Kfiuda- 
wand, main tere piehbe kyi'm ab nahin 
' aakla ? main tere liye apni jan diiuga. 

38 Yisii' ne use jawab diya, K ya tfi 
mere liye apni jan degi? Main tum se 
sach sach krahtt buri. ki Murg bang na 
depa, jab tak ki td tin martaba intrii 
inkar na kare. 

XIV BA'B. 

TUMHA'RA'dil na ghabrawc: tum 
Kbuda par fmaii late ho, mujh 
par bhi imanlao. 

2 Mere Hap ko ghar men bahut 
makan hain: nahin to, mnin tumhen 
kahta. Main jata hun, ta ki tumharo 
liye jagali taiyar kariin, 

3 Aur jia hal ki main jata, aur 
tumeare liyo jagAh taiyar karta, to 
phir aiinga, aur tumheg apno tath 
liinga, tji ki jalniij main ht'in, tum bbi 
h oo. 

4 Aur jahan main jati hiin, tum 
jante ho, aur rah bhi jdnte ho. 

5 Thnma ne use kaha, Ai KhmU- 
wand, ham nahin jante ki trt kahan 
jata hai ; aur hari kyi'mkar us rah ko 
jan sikon? 

(i Yisu 1 ne U»e kaha, Eah, aur hai]q, 
aur Kindagi main hiin ; koi bagair 
men wasile Dap ke pa» a nahin aakta 
bot 

7 Agar tum mujhe jante, to mere 
litip ko bhi jante ; aur ab se tum uau 
jrintt! ho, aur use dekhahai. 



iTaa&t. Jltih ke 



YU'HANNA', XIV. bhejne U wa'da karta. 



8 Pftilbi'w ne asa kaili, Ai Khuda- 
wand, Uap ko hamen dtkhla, ki hainen 

kafi 1,:U. 

y YisiV ne ufc kabA, Ai Failbus, 
main itnl muddat se tumhare sAth 
hiin, aur tu ne mujhe na janaV fi( ne 
mujhe dekhA hai, «ia no BAp ko deklia 
hai ; aur tu kynnkar kahta hai, ki BAp 
ko ham e n dikhlA? 

lO K ya tu yaqiu Dan i n kartl ki 
mairi Uap men hun, aur Bap mujh men 
hai ? yib bAten jo main tumben kahta 
);iin, main Ap Ke nahiri kahta; lckin 
I'pl'lii, jo iiuijh men rahta liai, wah yo 
kiitn harta hai. 

] I Mari bat yaqin karo, ki main 
Uap men hun, aur Ban mujh men hai; 
uuniahiii u>, in kiiuiuii ke suilab mujh 
par iman lio. 

12 Main timi m sach aach kahta 
hun, ki jo mujh par iman lAtA hai, ye 
kain, jo main kartU hun, wuh bhi 
karegi, aur to se bhi bare kain karena ; 
V. v iijki main apne Bap paa jati 
hnn. 

I :t Aur jo kuchh tum mere nAm sc 
BUEngpge, main wuhi kartinga, ta ki 
liap Bete men jalai pAwe. 

1 4 Agar tum roera nant se kuchh 
maugo^e, to main wulii karun ga. 

15 % Agar tum tUBJhe piyar karte 
ho, to mere hukmon, par 'amal karo. 

16 Aur main npue liap si: darkhwast 
kaningA, aur wuh tunihen diisra Ta- 
salli-denuwAla bakhnhega, ki hame- 
sha tumhare mlI.Ii rain: ; 

17 Ya'ue, Kiih i Haqq> jise dunya 
hasil nahiji kar saku', kyiiuki use na 
dekhti hai, aur na use jAnti hai ; lckin 
nun uscjantohu, kyi'iiiki wuh tumhare 
tath nihti hai, aur tum ineti huwegi. 

18 Main tumben yatim na chhor- 
iijitta: main ttmiiniro |i;U Alingi. 

19 Ab tliorider hai ki dnnyi mujhe 
phir nadekhegi; par tuuituiijiu-dflilito 
ho, nur is liye ki uuiii jitA hun, tum 
Lhi jioge. 

20 u« «'z tum jAnogo k main Bap 

m 



men, aur tum mujh men, aur main tum 
wm htm. 

21 Jis pas mere alikim hain, aur 
wuh un par 'amal karta hai, wuhi 
mujh se ninliabbat rakhti hai; aur 
wuh jo mujh se niuhabbat rakhti hai, 
mere Bap kA piyArA boga, aur main 
use piyar karuugA, aur apno ta,in m 
par zaJiir karunia. 

83 YaluidAli ne, na wuli jo Iska- 
riyutf thA, use kabA, Ai KhudAwand, 
yib kytinkar hai, ki tu Ap ko ham par 
zihir kiyA chAiita, aur dunyA par na- 
bi ij ? 

23 Yibu' im jawAb mim use kaha, 
Agar koi mujhe piyar karta hai, wuh 
mere kalAui par 'amal karegA, aur 
mera Baip uae piyar karuga, aur ham 

; pAs awenge, aur UI keutb rali:ngi-. 

'M Jo mujhe piyar nahin karta, nmre 
kalAm par 'amal nabin karta; aur yih 
kalam, jo tum suute ho, merA Dahin, 
baiki BAp kA hai, jia tie mujhe bhejA 
hai. 

25 Main. no yih battn, tumhare sAth 
hote biie, tum bg kabin. 

26 Lekin wuh Taaaili-dmawfSi, jo 
Riih i Quda hai, jise BAp meru mim. be 
bbejegi, wuhi tumhen sab chineti sikb- 
lAwegA, aur «ah bAten, jo kuchh kl 

ne tutnhetj kuhi hain, tumben. 
j$i dilAwega. 

17 SalAoi tum logog ke liye chbor- 
ke jita lnin ; apiti saiamati main tum- 
ben dota hiin ; na jis tarah so ki dunyA 
deti hai, maifl tuothen deta htin. 
TumhiirA dil na ghabrae, aur na dam. 

28 Timi sua chuke ho ki main ne 
tum ko kahA, ki Main jdtd hun, uur 
tum pAa phir Ata htin. Agar tum 
nuijhe piyAr karto, to tum mere is 
kahne se, ki Main BAp pAs jAta bdn, 
klmah hoto; kyiinki mera Bap mujh 
so bani hai. 

i'» Aur ah main ne tumben U8 ko 
wiqi' hone ho peshtar kaba, ta ki jab 
wuh wnqA' men Awe, to tum imAn lau. 

30 Ba'd ia ke main tuai 6e bahut 



Shaijirdon ko Metrik mrn YU'HAN 

kalfuri im karringd; is liye ki is jahdn 
kd sarddr dtd hai, nur mujh meri iis ki 
kol ebiz nahin. 

31 Lekin is UhAK se ki dunyd jdne 
ki main Bdp se muhamiat rakhtd lilin, 
jis tarah BAp ne mujhe farnid diyd, 
main waisd hi karUi hun. Utho, 
vahdn sechaleri. 

XV BA'B. 

MAIN eachche Wg&t kd darakht. 
ht'nj. aur im-rd l'>dp brtgbdn bui. 

2 Jo da.li mujh nien mewa nahin 
ldti, wuh' uae obbdnt ddltd hii: nur 
bar ek jo mewa lali, wuh un (if kar- 
td hai, td ki wuh siiydda mewa lawe. 

3 Ab tum ua kaldm k« wabah, jo 
main ne tumben kahd, pak Inie. 

i Mujh men qdiin DO, aur main 
tum men. Jin tarah ki ddli Ap au 
mewa nahin Id Bakti, magar jab ki 
wuh angtir ke darakht men ipiiin ho, 
usi tarah lum bhi nuhiij, inagar jab ki 
mujh men qdim ho. 

5 Angur kd darakht main Ini n, tum 
dAlidn ho: wuh jo mujh rnen tjiim 
hotd hai, aur main ua men, wuhi ba- 
hut mewa Idtd hai; kyi'mki mujh n 
juda tum kuchh nahin kar aakte. 

6 Agar koi mujh mag qdim na ho, 
to wuh" ddli ki tarah phenk diyd jdta, 
aur siikh jdtd hai, aur log unherj ba- 
turte hain, aur Ag raeg jlmukie kain, 
aur »8 jal jati hain. 

7 Agar tum. mujh men qdim, aur 
meri hdten tum men qaim howen, to 
jo chdhoge, mdngoge, aur tumhdre liye 
wuhi hogA. 

8 Kere Bdp kd jahil isi se hai, ki 
tum bahut mewa lio, m tum mere 
shajjird boge. 

9 Jftisd Bdp ne mujhe piyiir kiyd, 
waisd bi mitiij m- tumben piy&l h Ij i ; 
tum meri muhnbbat men adbit raho. 

10 Agar tum mere hukmon jiar 
'amal karo, to tum meri Bttuhabbat 
men qdim hoge, jaisd ki main ne apne 
Bip K« bukumu par 'amal kiyd, am- 
is ki muhabbat men q4im lnm. 

142 



NA', XV. Blidmil hotie h vnk anjam. 

11 Main ne yih bdten tumben ka- 
hin, td ki meri kbushi tum men haul 
rahe, aur tumhdri khushi kdmil ho. 

12 Merd hukm yih hai, ki Jalai 
main no tumhen piydr kiyd hai, tum 
bhi ek Uilere ko piydr karo. 

13 Kol ehakhs us se ziydda mu- 
halilmt nabi n kartd, ki apui jdn apne 
doston ke liye de. 

14 Jo kuchh ki main ne tumben 
farmdyd, agar tum karo, to mere dost 
ho. 

lf> Ba'd is ke main tumhen khadim 
uh kab'iiigA, kyitnki kbdditu nahin 
jatitA ki u» kd kbudawand kyi kartA 
hai : baiki main ne tumhen doat kahd 
hai, ki Bab bdten, jo main ne apne Bdp 
se suni hain, main ne tumben batldiii. 

16 Tum no mujhe nahin cbund hai, 
baiki main ne tumben <;himi hai, aur 
tumheij muqarrar kiyd hai, ki tum jdo, 
aur DMWB lao, aur tuiulidia mewa bdqi 
rahe ; td ki tum merd mim leke jo 
kiiehh Bdp se mdngo, wuh tumhen 
dewe. 

17 Main r.umben yih hdten, farmdta 
luin, ki Tum ek iliisru ko piydr karo. 

18 Agar dunyd tum bc du^hmani 
kartl hai, to tum jdnto ho ki ub no 
tum se age mujh M duHhmuni kl. 

Y.) Agar tum dunyd ke hote, to 
dnuyd unog ko piydr karli: leklo 
is liye ki tum dunyd ke nahin, baiki 
main ne tumhen dunyd ee chunke juda 
kiyd bai, is wdMto dimyd tum 60 dusb- 
mani k u r t i hai. 

20 Uh bit ko jo main ne tum se 
kahi, yrtd karo, ki Naukar apne kbd- 
wind M bari imbiij. Jab unhon ne 
mujhe satdya, tn m tumberi bhi «atd- 
vMmm ; agaf unhon ne mere k:iLuu 
ko mand hai, to wo tumhdrd bhi md- 
neage. 

'41 Lekin yih sih knehb mere ndm 
ke sahab tum se karenge, kynuki we 
uae, jiK uo mujlie bbi-ja bai, ualiiu 
jan t e. 

'S2 Agar main na aya hotd, aur uu- 



Ut tiis-tUi ki babat jo Ruhse YU'HANJTA', XVI. Masili m honewali (M. 
hen nakahta.toun kagunah nahula: jf&lda hai: kyiiiiki a^ar main najAi'ir, 
lek~i» ab uii pas ua ku gunah ka 'uzr to Tasalli-denewala mm pas na awega ; 
nahin. par agar main jiiuo, U> main use tum 



2<fWuh jo mujh bo 'adawat karta 
hai, mere Uap m bhi 'adiiwat karta 
hai. 

r main un ke bich men ye 
kain, Jl- kisi iltisru M nahin kiyr, na 
kiye hota, 10 un ka gunah na nota; 
par ab to utihon ne riekha, aur mujh 
seaur inere Jiap po dushmaui ki. 

26 l:''kin yih hiia, tak i wuh kalam 
j.i mi ki sh:ii-i\il iiii'n likha hai, ki 
IJulion ne mujh au be-sabab dushmani 
ki, pura lio. 

26 Par jabki wuh'l'asalli denewala, 
jisc main tumhare liye Dap ki taraf 
sebhi'jun^A.ya'ue, lluh i Kami, j" Map 
Mi nikalli" hai, iwe, to wuh mere liyo 
gawihi degfc- 

27 Aur'tmn bW gftWfhl dofO, ky- 
uiiki timi Kburii' se mere si ih ho. 

XVI BA'B. 

MAIN ne ye baten tumben kabin. 
ta ki tum thokar na khao. 

2 We tum k o 'ibatiatkhar.uri ne ni- 
kal dejge; baiki wuh ghari ati hai, 
ki jo koi tumhen qatl karc, gumau 
kari'^a ki main Khudd ki bundagi 
baji lata hun. 

3 Aur luin se aisa suluk is liyo kar- 
ou^f.-, ki uuhon ne na. Bdp ko jaua, na 
iiiujbo. 

4 Aur main ne yih batinj lum 
kabin, ta ki jab wuh waqt awe, to tum 
yad k*ro ki main ne turn H kabin : 
aur main ne shun'i' iiimj ye baten tum- 
ben na kabin, kyiinki main tumhdre 
sath i ha. 

5 Lekin ab main uh pas, 
mujhu bheja, jata hun ; aur tum men 
U k"i mujh se nahin puchhta, ki Tu 
kabag jiita hai? 

G Baiki ia liye ki main ne ye baten 
! iliin, tum hara ilil gamsebhar 



pas bhej diinga, 

a Aur wuh takar dunyi ko gundh 
Ke, aur t&ttf «c, aur 'adiilat se, taqsirwar 
tliahraoga: 

Gundh ao, ia liye ki we mujh par 
iman nahin, Ide; 

10 Basti se, is liyo ki main apne 
Bap pas jata hun, aur tum mujhe phir 
na dekhoge; 

1 [ Ailalat m\ ia liye ki is jahan ke 
nrdil par hukm kiyilgaya hai. 

""eri aur bahut mi baten hain, ki 
main tumben kaln'ai, par ab tum uu 
ki bardashl itahin kar sakte. 

L8 Uikin jab wuh, ya'ue, Riih i 
Haqq awe, to wuh tum ko siri sachai 
ki rali batawegi; is liye ki wuh apnl 

kahegi ; lekin jo kuehh wuh sunegi, 
ao kahegi ; aur tuinhen ayaude ki kha- 
baren d>-gi. 

14 Wuh ineri buzurgi karegi ; is liye 
ki wuh mori chizon men »c pawegi, 
aur tumhen dikluiwf^i. 

15 8ab cbizeri, jo Bap ki hain, meri 
hain : ia liye main ne kaha, ki wuh 
mori chiitot) men se legi, aur tumhen 
dikhiwegi. 

lli Thori der, aur miijbo na de- 
khoge ; aur phir thori dor, aur niujhe 
dekhoge: kytinkt main Bap ke pai 1 
jata hiirj. 

17 Tab us ke ba'ze shdgirdorj ne 
Apai men kab:i, Yih kya hai, jo wuh 
li:iiiii'i_i kabiu hai, ki Thori der, aur 
tum mujhe na dekhoge; aur phir tborl 
der, aur tum inujhc dekhoge j aur yih, 
Ih liye ki main Bap pas jata hun V 

IS Phir unlion u kaha, Yih kya 
hai, jo wuh kahta hai: ki Thori der V 
haui nahin jaute, ki wuh kya kahiii 
hai. 

19 So Yisu* ne jaua ki we cbahte 



hain ki mujh se suwal karen, 
Lekin main tumhen soeh kahta ,unhcn kalid, Tum apns men UB ki 
i, ki Tumhiire livu paeri jaua hi j babat piiohbto ho, jo main ne kaha, 
UB 



Masih H akhiri 7iusihat. YU'IUNN.V, XVII. U» ki du'a ranalon k* Vye. 



ki Thori der, siur tiim mujtie- na de~ 
khoge, aur phir thori iler, aur tum 

mujhe dekhogeS 

20 Main tum ne sach fiai-h kahta 
litin, ki Tum rooge, aur uala karoge, 
par dunyd kiiualt hoffi ; aur tum gaui- 
gin hoge, lekiu tumhari gam khushi 
bo jiegd. 

21 Jati 'aurat janno lagi i liiii, ti. 

f*mgia hnti hai, is liyo ki us ki gin . 
paEuncbi : lekin jali larkajani, to is 
kSushl we ki duiiyi nien. ek ddmj 
juiiiia liiia, uh dard ko phir ydd nah i j 
karti. 

22 Pas tuni ab eamgin lio ; par main 
tumben phir «lckfi UEga, aur tum hara 
dil khush boga, aur tuinhari khusbi 
kui tura se i-'jtiiin ua legd. 

23 Aur tum us din uiujh sc kucbh 
suwdl ua karuge. Main tam se eacli 
Mfih kahta hu», Jo kucbii tum nierd 
iiu.ni leke Bdp ae mangogo, wub tum 
to degd. 

24 Ab tak tum ne merc ndm 
kuchh nuhiu mau «a ; mangi>, ki t 
paoge, La. ki tuinhari khushi kamil 

25 Main no je bdterj tanisilon men 
tumben kabin ; par wuh w»qt dt~a bai, 
ki mairj tumben, tanisilon men phir na 
kuluiravi, baiki Bdp ki adi' khabar tum- 
ben d ungsi, 

26 TJs din tum merc mim se mang- 
oge, aur main tumben uahin kahtd ki 
main Udp so tumhdre Jiye darkliwasi 
karungd ; 

27 Is liye ki Bdp tn dp hi tumben 
}Ay&r kartd hai, kyiinki tum ue mujbe 
piyar kiyd, aur imdn Ide bo ki main 
Knudd im n i k la Ini n. 

2n Main Uap se nikld, aur dunyd 
men dya rum : phir dunyi ae rukbeat 
hota, aur Bap pas Jdti lnin. 

29 Un kti nhdgirdon nc use kahd, 
Dekil, ab tii Hal' kalitd hai, aur tamsil 
nitii nakiii kahta. 

30 Ab haiu jdnte hain ki tfi aab 
kuelili janta hai. aur niuhtaj naluri kil 

114 



koi tujh aesuwdlkarn; la 80 baui iiuiiu 
la. 1 ki tu Klmdd se nikld hai, 

SI Yisti' ne unhcn jawab diyd, Kyd 
ab tum imdu Ide hoV 

32 Dekku, gliari iti bai, baiki d 
□hulu, ki tum men se har ek paia- 
ganda boke apni rdh legd, aur tum 
mujhe akdd chhor doge; tan blij 
main akeld uahin, kyunki Bdp meru 
nal I i hai. 

Uli Main ne tumben ye bdtenkahln, 
tdki tuminnjli un-n itminan pdo. Tum 
dunyd men miisibat ufbaugfi ; li kirt 
kliatir-jani'a rakbo, ki main ne duiiya 
ko jita hai. 

XVII BA'B. 

Y ISU" ne ye biten farmdin, aur 
apui diikhen dsman ki Uraf 
uthdin, aur kahd, Ai Bdp, ghari d 
piiliuuchi liai; apne Bete ko jaUL 
Ifiikbsh, td ki tera Butd bbi tujhe jalai 
baklisbe : 

2 Cliundnelii tii ne use aab jismon 
ptr iklniyar diyd bai, td ki wub un 
aab ko, iiuherj tu nt> use bakhsha, 
hamesha ki zindagi duwe. 

3 Aur haiiu'sba ki /.indagi yih hai, 
ki wc tuju ko akeld sauhelid Kbuda, 
aur Yitid' Masih ku jise tii ue bheja 
liai, jdnen. 

4 Main ne zaiuin par teri jaldl 
zalirr kiyd )iaj : main u.s kdm ko, jo tii 
ne mujhe kanie ko diyd hai, tamdm 
kar cbuka. 

5 Aur, ai Bdp, ab tii mujhe apne 
siitli tu jalai se, jo main dunyi ki 
paiddisb se peslitar ten .-atb rakbtd 
tba, lni/uj-gi de. 

(1 Mniii netere ndni ko un ddmion 
par, jinben tii ne dunyd men se mujhe 
diyd, zabir kiyd bai : we tere the, aur 
td ne unhen mujbe diyd bai, aur un- 
hnn ne tere kaldui par 'amal kiyd hai. 

7 Ab uuborj ne jAna- bai ki sab 
v.\\v/a:u jo tu ne mujbe din teri taraf we 
bai n. 

8 Is liye k i main ne we lidten, jo tii 
ne luujhu bata diii, unben bati di 



Masih ki du'd YUTHASS 

hain ; aur unhon Be unhen qahi'tl Iciji, 
aur yaqin jana ki main tujh se nikld 
iinri, aur we imAn Ide hain ki tu ne 
mujlii' bhijA hai. 

I) M.Vin un ku liyo darkhwdst kartA 
hun, main dnnvd ke liyo nalntj. tOttaf 
un ke liye, jinlicn tii ne mujhe diyd 
hni, darkhwdst karti hiin, ki we tere 
kain. 

10 Aur Bab mere tere hain, aur tere 
raere hain ; aur main un sc buzurgi 
ftJbt in'iij. 

11 Main dunyA men dgc na rahun- 
ga, par ye dunya nwn hain, aur main 
tujh pAs Atd 'hun. Ai quddus BAp, 
kpm lii iiAtu ko unhen, jinhen tt'i ne 
mujhe bakhslid, hifawit se rakh, tiki 
we batuan tarah ek ho jdwen. 

12 Jab tak ki main un ke Bflth 
dunya mert thd, tab tak main ne tm 
nam ye un ki hifdzat ki, baiki jin ko 
tri ne mujhe diyd hai, main nc un M 
nigahbani ki: aur kol nn men se, 
kiwA haldkat ke farzand ko, balak 
nahiii hua, td ki nawislna pfird ho. 

13 Aur ab main tujh pas Ata ban. ; 
aur main yili bahti dunya men kahta 
hun, td ki meri kbosbf nn men kamil 
ho rahe. 

14 Maitj ne teri kalam unhen diyd, 
aur dunyA ne un se dttshmanf ki, ii 
iiye ki jiii^i main dunyA kA nahin htin, 
we bhi dunya ke nnhin hain. 

1 j Main vih darkhwdst nahin kartd. 
ki tu uniierj dunyA men sc uthA le 
par yih, ki tii unhen 08 sharfr bo ha- 
chae. 

16 JaisA ki main dunvA M niihin 
lilin, wc lihi dunya ke nahin hain. 

17 Unlniti apni sachdi bc pdk kar 
teni kalAm sachdi hai. 

18 Jis tarah tfi ne mujhe dunyA 
men hhejA, main uo bhi unhen dunyA 
men hhejA hai. 

IH Aur un ke wiate main apni taq- 
(Hl kartd hun, td ki we bhi aachAi «t 
njuqaddas hun. 

20 -Main nirf unhin ke liye nahin, 
146 



A', XVIII, raaulon ke liyr. 

baiki un ke liye bhi, jo un ke kalAm 
H miLJli par imdii ldwenge, darkhwdst 
kartA hun ; 

21 Tiki we sab ek howerj, jaisdki 
tii, ai Kap, mujh metj, nur main tulh 
men, ki we bhi ham men ek bon ; td 
ki dunyA imdii !Awe ki lu ne mujhe 
bhcjd hai. 

22 Aur wuh jahil jo tii ne mujhe 
diyii hai, main ne unhen diyd hai ; td 
ki we ek hon, jis tarah so ki ham ek 
hain. 

23 Main un uien, aurtti mujh men, 
td ki we ek hoko kamil howen ; aur ki 
dunyA jAue ki tu ne mujhe bhejd h:ii, 
aur jis tatah ki trt no mujhe piyar 
kiyA, tii ne unhen bhi piyftr kiyA hai. 

24 Ai Bdp, main eh ah t A hi'm ki we 
bhi, jinhen tu ne mujhe bakhshA hai, 
jatian mabj) hiin, more sdth howen : tA 
ki we mere jaldl ko, jo tii ne mujhe 
bakhshd hal, dekhon : kyiinki tii ne 
mujhe dunyA ki paidaish «e Ago piyar 
kiyA hai. 

Sg Ai 'Adil BAp, dunyd ne tnjho 
uhfrj jiuiH, magar main ne tujhe jAcA 
hai, aur inhon ne jana hai U ta U 
mujho bhojA. 

20 Aur main ne terA ndra nn par 
zahir kiyA, aur zAhir karungd: ta ki 
wuh piydr, jis bo tri no mujhe piydr 
kivd hai, un men ho, aur main un merj 
htin. 

XVIII BAU 

Y ISU" yih biterj knhke apne shd- 
L'inii'ij ko sdth Qidriin ke ndle 
ke. piir piya, jabdn ek bA.gcha thd; ua 
men wnli aur oa ke shAgird ddkhil 
hde: 

2 Aur Tahudah bhi, ji« ne use pa- 
ka.rwa diyd, wuh jagab jAntA tha. ki 
Yisu' aksar apne ehAgirdon ke sdth 
walidn idyd kartd tha. 

3 fabYahiiddh mpihion kA ek gol, 
aur snrdAr kdliinon aur Farision bo 
piydda leke, mash'alon aur chiragon 
aur halliyaton ke sath, waluin dyd. 

4 Aur Yiisii' ne sab kuchh, jo u^ par 



JftW kd 2'ahra jand. YU'HAXNA', XVIII, Patiiia m se in&dr kartu. 
honewAla tha, jAnke Ago barha, aurlju sardar kahiu se kuclili jin-pahchAn 
> kalisi, ki Tum klise dhiindhte rakhta tha, babar niklA, aur us se jo 



ln.y 



!i Unhon ne use jawab diya, YihCi' 
Kasari ke, Yisu' ne uuhen kftlid, ki 
Main hiin. L's traqt YahiUiah bhi, 
];■• 110 use pakarwAya, un ke sath 
khara thi 

(> Aur jonhin Qa ne uiihcn kahA, ki 
Main hun, wu pichh.fi hate, aur zamin 
par gir pare. 

7 Tab us nc uii se ph i r puchhA, ki 
Tum kiso dhundhte lioV We bule, 
Yisu'NAsari'ko. ' 

8 Yisu' iio jawab diya, Main ne 
tumben kahii, ki Main hun: pas agar 
tum mujhe dhiindhte ho, to inheu jAne 
do. 

9 Yih ia liye hiiA, td ki wuh kalam, 
jo ua ne kahA, parA ho, ki Jinhen tu 
■ l- ■ niiijiie diya, main ne un men 
ko bhi nun ua kiya. 

10 Tib Sliauia'un Patrus ne talwAr, 
[o us pas ihi, khinchi, aur sardar 
k:ifii.n ke naukar par chalai, aur ua k A 
dahinA kau urA diya. Ua naukar ka 
jiam Malkus tha. 

11 Tab Yisii' ne Patrus sc kaha, 
A pni talwAr miyan men kar ; kya wub 
l-iyiila jo mere BAp ne mujh ko diya, 
main m pilin ? 

12 Tab sipAhi, aur Bubadar, aur 
Yahudioa ke piyAdon ne milku Yisu' 
ko psikrn, aur use Ijandha, 

18 Aurpahle uso Animspaslugnye; 
kyi'mki wuh Qayafa ndm us baras ke 
nardar kabin ka ftaaura tha, 

14 Yih wuhi Qayai'A tha, jia ne 
Yahtidion ko salah di, ki umm.it t ke 
badle ek kii marnA bihtar hai. 

15 K Par Hhama'un Patrus aur 
ddfrf slwiird YistV ke ptoUtt bo liye ; 
kydnki ua shAgird aur harddr kAbin 
men kuchh jAn-pahchAn thi, aur wuh 
Yisu' ke ssath sardAr kabin ke dAlAn 
men gaya. 

Ifi Lekin Patrus ctarwAze par hiihar 
kharA rahA. Tab wuh diiwrA shAgird, 

' Hb' 






tlarbani karti thi kahke Patrus ko 
andar le ay£. 

17 Tab u» chhokri ne jo darbAn thi 
Patrus w kaha, KyA tii bhi ia sbnkhs 
ke s-liauhdon men se nahiii? W' uh 
bolA, ki Main nnbin lilin. 

IH Par naukar aur piyAda koelon 
ki Ag sulgakar jAro ke Mbtb H kharc 
hiie tApte tlio ; aur I'atrus un ke sath 
klmni tap rahA thd. 

l'J \ Tab sardAr kabin ne Yisd' se 
us ke abA^irdon aur us ki lalim ki 
bAbat suwAl kiyA. 

20 Yisd' ne u»g jawab diya, ki 
Main ne ashkara 'alam ae baten kin ; 
main no hamesha 'ibAdat-kiiiiin-, .nu 
haikal men, jahin Yahudi har waqt 
jam'a hote iiain, ta'liui di, aur poshiila 

.1, kiidliti naluri kahA. 

21 Tii mujli se kyi'm puelihtA hai? 
un ms piichh, jinhon ne umjh se auna, 
ki main ne unhen kya kahA ; dekh, ki 
we jAnte hain, jo main IM kahA. 

22 Jab us ne yih bAten kabin, tab 
piyAdon men se ek ne, jo pas klnu'a 
tha, Yisii' ko taniAncha niArke kahA, 
Kyiin tu sardir kabin ko :ii J a jawab 
detA hai ? 

23 Yisii' ne use jawab diyA, Agar 
main ne bura kaha, to lnmti ki gp,wuil 
de; par agar acliehhi kahA, to tu 
mujlie kyuri unirta hai '? 

21 \\a- Aiimis ne use bandbA bui 
Qaydia sardAr kAhin ke pAs bbejA. 

25 AurShama'un Patrus kliara ini/i 

iAp rahA. Sounhon ne use kahA,Kya 

tii bhi us ke shAgirdon men n naliiii 

Ub ne inkAr kiya, aur kahA, ki 

Main mihiii hiin. 

16 l'lur MHfw kabin ke naukaron 
mon se ek ne, jo us shakhs k A, ki jis 
kii krin PatrtM tw kar d;ila tha, ri^lir.i- 
dAr thA, kahA, KyA main ne tujhe us 

sAth baKehe mefl nabin dekha? 

?7 T;ib P.itnis ne phir inkAr kiya ; 
aur wunhin morg ons bang di. 



Pildtus kd suwdl. YTJUANNA', XIX. * 

28 1" Tata Yisii' kO Qaydt"A pas se 

diivdn-khdne men lao, aur yih subh 
ki waqt thd, aur we khud diwdu- 
khdne meij na gayo, ta ki napak na 
howcn, baiki fasah khawen. 

29 Tab Pilatus un pAs niknl dyd, 
aur kahd, Tum ismard parkydfaryad 
karte 1 1' ■ '.' 

30 Unhurj ae jawab mon uh hc 
kaba, ki Ajjar yih badkirdir na hoti, 
to ham uso tero hawdla na karte. 

31 Tab Pildtus ne uuhen kaba, Tnm 
use le jdo, aur apni shari'at ke mutd- 
biq us ki "adalat karo. Yahudi'on ne 
tO use kahd, Ham ko rawii uabin ki 
kisi ko ]dn se mareri. 

32 Yib is liye hfia, ta ki Yisd'ki 
bat, jo us ne apni maut ki tarah se 
lahan karko kahi thi, puri howe. 

33 Tab Pildtus pidr diwdn-khane 
men dakhil hua, aur Yisd' ko bulake 
uh se kahd, liyd td Yaluidion kd BA<1- 
ahah hai ? 

34 Yiad' ne use jawab diyd, Tu yili 
bat dp ao kabta hai, ya ki auron ne 
mere haqq men tujh so kahd hai i 

35 Pildtus ne jawdb diyd, Kyd 
main Yahudi hdn 'i Teri hi qaum oe 
aur sanlar kdhinon ne tujh ko mere 
hawai» kiyd ; td ne kyd kiyd hj 



Ma&ih ftc kor? m&rna, 

39 8o tumhdrd dastdr hai, ki mam 
fasah men t umbara liye ok ko chbor 
duti ; kyd tum chdhte ho, ki main 
tumbarc liye Yaluidion ko Bddshdh 
ko ohhor ddn ? 

40 Tab un sabhon ne phir ohlllake 
kahd, ki Is ko nah m, baiki Barabbas 
ko, Par Barabbds bal.indr (ha. 

XIX BAit. 

TAB Pildtus ne Yisd' ko pakarke 
kore mdre. 

2 Aur sipdhion ne kdnton kd tAj 
sajkc us ke eir par rakhd, aur use 
argawdni ptwhdk pahindi, 

3 Aur kahd, Ai Yahddion ke BAd- 
shdh, Salam! aur uulion ne uw laui- 
auuhe mi re. 

i Tab Pilatus ne phir bahar jikis 
nnlirii fcaha, ki Dekho, main use tum 
pas bahar 1« dyd bdn, td ki Uun jano 
ki main us kd kuehh BuHk nahin 
pdtd. 

5 Tab Yisu' kdnton kd tdj rakhe, 
aurargawdni pushak pahinehue bahar 
dyd. Aur Pilatus ne uu se kahd, 
Dekho yih ddiui ! 

(i So jab sardar kabin aur piyddnn 
ne use dekhd, to ehillaka kaha, ki 
Salib dc, Salib de. Pilatus ne unheg 
kahd, Tunihin use lo, aur salib do, 



3(i Yisii' ne jawdb diya, ki Meri kydnki main us tni'n kuehh ipisiir 
— naliiti pdtd. 

7 Yahddion ne use jawab diyd, ki 
Ham shari'atwdle bain, aiur hamari 
sbnvi'ar ke nmtabiq wan .|atl ke tftkj 
hai, is liye ki us ne »poe t*4fl Khudi 
kd Unta thahravd. 

8 % Jab Pilatus ne yih bat suni, to 
ziydda dard ; 

y Aur diiviiti-khdne men phir an- 
dar jakv Yisii' se'kahd, Tu kahar, ka 
hai? Par Yisd' ne use kuehh jawab 
na diya. 

10 Tab Pildtus n use kaba, kl Td 
nmjh se nabin. boltd? kj-d tu naMg 
jin t a, ki mujhe ikhtiyar Imi, cliahi'm, 
to tujbc salib dus'' aur uhiihr.ii, to 
tujlii! L'lihor ddn ? 



hadshahat la jahdn ki nahiri : agar 
nieri bddsbahat ia jahdn ki hoti, to 
mere uaukar larai karte, td ki matg 
Yahudion ko hawdla na kiyd j;ii;i ; pai 
ab tiiuri bddshdhat yahdn ki nahin 
hai. 

:17 Tab Pilatus ne use kahd, So 
kyd tu bddshdb hai ? Yisd' ne jawdb 
diyd, ki Jaisd dp larmdte, main bdd- 
shdb lnin. Main is liye paidd hud, 
aur is wdste dunyd men dyd, ki haqq 
pu gawdhi ddn. So jo koi, ki haqq 
se hai, meri dwdz suntd hai. 

38 Pildtus ne use kaba, ki Haqq 
kydhai? Yih kabke pita Tnluimon 
pU Itdliar raya, aur iniheii kaba, Main 
us kd kuehh nusdr nabi» pdtd. 
147 



Mtuth ke Imrt» par 



YTJ'HANNA', XIX. 



U Yisii' ue jawab diya, ki Agar Bdduhah niat lildi, luilki yih likh, ki 
yih tujbe dparse diydmi, jiitd, tomujh U* M kahd, ki Main Yabudion k:i 



par turi kuchh ikhtiyar na hotd 
jis ne niujke tere hawiila kiyd, ua ka 
gunab tlyida hai. 

12 tls wwjt se PiUtUS no cluihi'v ki 
• isi! clihur de; pas Yahud ion no chil- 
! iki-r kulii, ki Ac;iir tii is mard kodihor 
detd hai, t» tii Qaisur ka khuir-kliu-iih 
iiiihin ; jo koi anno ta.in biidshdh 
tfaahrati hai, wuli Qaisar ka mukhdlif 
Loke boltd hai. 

13 f Pildtus yih bat sunkar Y isu' 
k o bahar lavfl, aur uh inaqdm mwj 'y 
Chabdtura, aur Mbrdni mag Gabbritha 
kablaia hai, uiasnad par bait ha. 

14 Aur fasah ki taiydri ka din tua. 



[ladshdh liur}. 

22 Pildtus ne jawdb diyd, ki Main 
ne jo likhd, m likhd. 

23 1" Pliir sipahion no, jab Yira' 
ko salib pai khinch chllke, U> us ku 
kaprori ko liya, aur chdr blan ki\v, 
iiar sipalii ke liye ek hissa ; aur «s ke 
kurto ko lihi liya: aur knrtd bin siya 
sardsar bind hiid thd. 

24 Tri liye unhon ue ajian men kahd, 
ki Ham use ua phdren, baiki uh juir 
chitrlii ddleg, ki yih ki» ka boga : yih 
i« liye Md, ki nawishta Jo kabid hai, 
ki Uuborj ue mori poshdk baut \i, aur 
mero kurte ku liye ehitthidn daliri, 



uhhathu ghmito ke qarib thd. jpnra howe. So Bipdliio& ue aisa hi 
rhir ua iie Yahdaiorj ko kahd, ki kiyd. 



ilvklMi iLjmi Badshiih! 



25 f Tab Yisii' kt salib jm» 



15 Tab wo chiltae, ki Lo jd, le jd^md, aur us ki rad ki baliin, Harbam 
iiae salib de, Pildtus no cmheg kasa, nUfapaa kl joni, aur Mariyam Mag- 



Kyii uiain tumhare B&tahjh ko salib 
dan i Santai kahinon ue jawab diyd, 
ki Qalsat fcealwa hanidr,ikoi birtatih 
nahiu hai 

10 Tab ua ne use u n ke hawdla 
kiyd, ki OM salib di jdwc. Aur we 
Ylsd' ko pakarke lc gaye. 

17 So wuh apni salib uthde hua us 
Engab ko, jo khopri ka maaaro kablata 
hai, jis ka tnrjiiiua 'Ibrani men Gdl- 
gdid hai, nikal jjayd: 

18 W anda unimu ne use aur ue ke 
sath do aur ko salib par khinehd, tar- 
fein men ck ek,aur liafi* ku atcfa mag, 

19 % Aur Pildtus no ok kitaba 
likha, aur salib [iar laga diya. Wuh 
likhd vili thd, ki YISTJ" NA'SAIII' 
TAHUTU'OS KA' IIA'DSHA'JI. 

KO Da kitdbo ko bahut m Yahu- 
diori ne parhd, ia liye ki wuh maqdm, 
jahil) Yisii' salib par khiijchd gayd 
thd,~shabr ke niudik thd; aur wuh 
'Ibiani, aur Mnani, aur Latiui men 
likha thd. 

21 Tab Yahudiunkesarddr kdhinor 
no Pildtus ko kahd, ki Yahudion ka 
14» 



dalini, kiiari ihin. 

'M Yisd' no apni md ko, aur ua 
«bdgird ko, jise wuli piydr kartd thd, 
nas khare litio dokhkar apni md ko 
kahd, ki Ai 'aurat, dekh, yih tera betd! 

27 Plur us ne us shagird ko kahd, 
Dekh, yih teri md! Aur usi gbari se 
wuh ahdgird use apno ghar le gaya. 

88 "J UaM us ke Vis;'i' ne jdnke 
ki ab sab bdteu puri ho cbukin, yih 
knbd, td ki Dawbhtt pura hewe, ki 
Hai u pljaaa hun. 

'J'] Wiihan ek 1>artan airke se bhard 
hiid dhard tba: uniion ne isfanj ko 
sirke nun tar karke.aur Kiilaki liautlii 
par rakhko, us ko munb men diyd. 

30 Pliir Yisii' ue, jab sirkd ehnkhd, 
to kahd, Pt'ird hdd; aur nir jhukdke 
jin di. 

31 Pliir Yahddiun M is libas se ki 
tatdug nbt ke din saiilion DKr na rah 
jawen, kydnki wuh din taiydri kd thd, 
baiki bara hi isabt thd, I'ildtiiH m 
diirkhwds'r ki.ki un ki hinp'ii tef^aur 
Idsh'eu utdri jaen. 

32 "Tab aipdhion ne akc pahle aur 



Masih ki maut o dafar, 

duaro ki tdngeg, jo ua ke sdth salib par 

khinehe gaye the, tong. 

33 I .«-kin jab unhog ne Yisu' kl 
taraf rike dckha ki wuh mar chuka 
hai. t.i ns ki tangen natorig : 

34 Par sipihion men ao ck ne bhd- 
le m us ki puli chhedl, aur filfaur uh 
Be labu aur pdiii nikld. 

33 Aur jis ne yih dckhd, gawaht di, 
nur us ki gawibi fiaehehi hai, aur wuh 
jdiita bai ki sach kahtd bai, ta ki timi 
[mau Ido. 

36 Kyfinki yih bdten huin, ki na- 
wishta pura howe, ki Us ki koi haddi 
tori ua jdegi. 

37 Aur phir di'mri nawiakta is maz- 
niun kd liai, ki Wfl ua par, jiac. unhog 
ne chhedi, nazar karcnge. 

38 1 Aur lia'd ua ke Yusuf Ara- 
niatiya ne, jo Yisu' kd shdgird thil, 
lekin Yahudi. m ke dar Be posbida mag, 
l'ildtus Be ijazat chahi ki YibiV ki lash 
ku h Uwft; aur Pildtus ua ijdwit di. 
So wuh ake Yisu' ki ldsh le gaya. 

39 Aur Niuudemus bbi, jo pahle 
Yiau' pds rit ko gaya tha, iy&, aur 
pwhu iffl ki atkal murr aur 'fid 
miidke laya, 

40 I'hir unhog ne YisiV ki ldsh leke 
use sufi kMM meij khuahbuiorj ke 
sdth, jis taiu se ki dafan karne mefl 
YaMdion kd dastiir hai, kaniaya. 

41 Aur wah jin, jis jagab ki use sulih 
di gayi thi, ek bag tha, aur us brtj^ 
nieij ck uayi qabr thi, jis Eien knbhii 
koi ua dhari gaya 1 1ni. 

42 8o unhun nc Yisu' ko Yahud i<>n 
ki taiydri ke dTn ke bi'ia wahin rakbi, 
kvunki yih nabr iiaadik thi. 

XX BAT5. 

H A FT E ke pihlu din Mariyani 
Magdalini tarke, aisd ki hanoz 
andhcra tha, uabr ]>ar di, aur pattliar 
ko <jabr sii tdia hdd dckhd. 

2 Tab wuh, Shama'iin Patnn 
ub dusre shdszird pas, jise Siri' piyar 
kartd thi, dauri di, aur unhcn kahi, 
ki Khudawaud ko qabr se nikal le 

' ua 



YU'HANNA', XX. Uskajiu{hna. 

iy«, nur ham uahin jante ki unhog 
i use kalian mkha. 

3 Phir Patrus aur wuh diisra shd- 
gird nikle, aur gabr ki taraf gaye. 

4 ChunancM we donorj ik:» tt ' Jl - 
daure, par dtisri Hhdgird Patroi M 
barh gaya, aur qabr por pahlfi pt> 
hunclia. 

5 Us ne jhukke sdti kiii.ru pare 
dekho; par wuh andar na gayd. 

6 Tab Shama'iin Pat.rus ua ke 
pichlie pahunchd, aur qabr ke andar 
gaya, aur si'iii kftpifl pare \\w dekhe. 

7 Aur wuh rumdl, jis m urt ki *ir 
bandha th.i, un suti kaprorj ko tiiHh 
uahin, par judi lapeta hud ek Jagab 
para, dekha. 

'b Tab diisrd abigtrd bhl, jo qabr 
juir pahle iya tbd, andar gaya, aur 
dukhke yaqin kiyd. 

9 Kydnki we hauoz ua nawisate ko 
na jdnte the, ki murdon uien, ae us kd 
ji uthnft zarur bai. 

10 Tab wc shdgird apne apoe gliar 
uien pbir gaye. 

l"l % Latin Mariynm bahu oatr 

r roli khari tahi, aur rota hAejab 

omhf lucu jhukke nazar ki, 

12 To do firiahte auffld jHMihdk men, 

ek ko sirhane, aur dtisre ke piindm-, 

jahdn Yisu' ki Idah rakhi thi, baith.' 

dekVio ; 

18 Jinliog ne use kahd, Ai 'aurat, 
tii kyfin roti hai ? Us ne unhen kahd, 
ia Byu ki we mere Khudiwand ko le 
gaye, aur main uahin janti ki unhun 
ne us» kahdn rakhi. 

14 Jab wuh yun kab chuki to 
[liclibc phiri, aur Yisu' ko khare dekha, 
aur na pahckand ki wuh Yisu' hai. 

lu Yisu' ne use halia, ki Ai 'aurat, 
tfi kyi'uj roti hai? kis ko dhtindhti 
hai V Us nc ua ko bdgbdu jdnke ub rc 
kaiid, ki Ai sihib, agar us ko yahdu 
se utliiya bo, to mujh se kah, ki use 
kabin rakhi bai, ki main oh le 
jdungi. 

1(> Yiad' ne use kahi, Al Mariyum. 



Mati h kd n6Mr )«ma. 
Wuh mutewsjjft ln'ii, i 



YU'HANNA' 
■ uso kaha, 
Itabbiinf ; ya'ne, Ai TJatad. 

17 YisiV ne ub se kaha, Mujh ko 
mu t chliti ; kyiiiiki main mUtOE i'ipar 
apne Bap ko pas nahin, gaya: par 
mete Wiftion pd» T a, aur ujlhen kah, 
ki Main ujmr apne Uap aur tunihdre 
i'.n|i pin, aur iipiii' KlnuUaur tumhare 
Khoda pas, jati him. 

J8 Mariyam Maydaliui ai, aur sha- 
sirtUn w kaha, ki Main ne Khuddwand 
ko dekhd, aur ua ne mujli sc yih bAtisn 
kabin. 

]!l 1 I'hir «si dmjohaftekiipakld 
(Hnth*,flham ko waq t, jab wahdn ke 
dnrwiize, jabari shagird jam'a htie tbc, 
Vitljutlion ko'ditr U bara the, Yiufi' 
Ayi, aur" bioh men khara haa, aur 
imhen kaha, Tuni par salam. 

20 Aur yun kahke apne hatimu 
aur pasif ko unhen dikhava. Tab 
shagird Khudawand KO dekhke klmsh. 
hiie." 

21 Aur Yisu' ne pliir imhen kaha, 
Tam wur taJam; Jli tarah Kap ne 

Tiiujhe bbeja lini, main bhi uaf tarah 

ntnili ti bhejtf nun. 

22 Aur yih kabke us ne un pnr 
phi'inka, aur mi se kaha, ki Tum RiV 
i Oudi leo : 

23 Jin ke gunahon ko (uni luikh- 
sho, un ke gunab hiikhsho jate hain ; 
jiriben tum ua bakhabogc, na bakhsbe 
"ia,, n 20. 

L'-l «J Par Tliiimfl un barahon raen 
s,: ek, jis k;i la*|ab DidumiiR tha, Yiru' 
ke 6Xe want un ke with na tha. 

25 Tab aur shdgirdon ne nwo kabd, 
ki Bam ne Khuddwand ko dckhd hal, 
Par ua ue unhon kaha, Jab tak ki 
main ub ko bathon mp Q biluu lit; ' 
DIBOM na dekblin, aur kilon ke nish- 
auon men apni unglf na dalun, 
apne hath ko ub ke pahM mes, dakhil 
■1 1 karfln, ksfeha yaqta na karangi. 

20 1 A'throz kebaM, iabiiBkesba- 
(rird pbir andar the, aur tlnima un ke 
*ath tha, to darwaze band hote hiie 
150 



XXI. Thi'rmd H he-i'vtiqadi. 
Yiwu' aya, aur bich men khara hoke 
bola, Tum par salam. 

27 Pbir ua ne Tbiuna ko kaha, ki 
Apni ungu* pas la, aurmere hathon ko 
dekh, aur apnd hdth pas la, aur use 
inero pahlii men dai ; aur be-hndn mat 
ho, baiki iman la. 

28 Aur 'J'luirad ne jawab men use 
knhd, Ai mero Khuddwand, aur ai 
mere Rhndi, 

29 Yisti' ne usc kaha, Ai Thiima, ls 
liyo ki tti ne mujho dekhd, tu iman 
layd hai: mubarak WO baiu, |inborj 

i nahin dekha, taubhi iman lae. 

30 T Aur babutsc aur mu'ajize, jo 
is kitab nietj likhe nahhj gaye, Yisi'i' 
ne apne shagirdon ke satuline dikhae : 

31 Lekin ye lfkhe gayc, ta ki tum 
in,:in lAo ki Visii" M:Lsih hai, Khuda 
ka Heta, aur ta ki timi iniAn ttke Bfl 
ko nam t*e zindagi pao. 

XXI HA'B. 

A Uli ba'd na k« YisiV ne phir apne 
t;»,iij daryde'I'ilwriyns ke kindro 
par shdgirdon ku dikhayii, atu' h tarah 
zdhir bua, k i 

2 Shaina'i'm Tatnin, aur Thuma, ju 
Diduinuft kablata hai, aur Nathanael, 
jo Qiind e Jali! kd hai, aur Zahadi ke 
bcto, aur us ke shdgirdon men se aur 
do ikalthe the. 

3 Shama'vin Patru» ne unhen kn)i:i, 
ki Main macbbli ke sbikiir ko juta 
biin. Unkofl ne ua w kaM, llau, lln 
irro sdtb chaTengc ; aur nikalke filfaur 
kisliti |iar rliarbe ; par us rat, ko kuchh 
na pakra. 

4 Alir jab taVh 1 1 11 i, to V itfS 1 kiudre 
par khara thd; lekin shilgirdoii Ofl U 
jdnd ki wtth Yisti' hai. 

5 Tab Yiau' ne unhen kabd, Ai 
larko, kvd tumhare pds kucbh khanc 
ko )iai? Unlioij ne jawab diya, ki 
Nahin. 

G l'ar ua ne un se kabd, Kisbti ki 
dubni taraf jal ddlo, to tutii pdoge. 
Pas unhon ne dala, tab maohhlion ki 
bahutayat B0 usc kliinth na saken. 



Tihri takidjo Masih n> 

7 U live us shdgird DO, jise Yisii' 
piydr kartU thd, Patetis se kahA, ki 
Yih Khuddwand hai. So Shama'iin 
Patrus ne sutike ki wuh Khuddwand 
hai, chddar kamar «t bAndhi, kyrinki 
wuh nangA lliit, aur apne ta,in daryA 
men dAl diyA. 

8" Aur baqi shagird' mrietililion ka 
jiU kbinchte Wkishti parae; kytinki 
WB kindre se diir iia the, mftgU do MU 
hdth ki atka.l. 

9 Jon kio&re par Ae, wahan HBbO| 
ne koelon ki Ag, aur us par niachhli 
rakhi hiii, aur roti dekhi. 

.1.0 Yisi'i' ne unhen kahd, Un machh- 
lion men se, fa turo. ne pakrin, lio. 

11 Shama'iin Patrus ne charhke jAl 
ko ck sau tirpan bari niachlilion se. 
bharehiie kliinchd: aurngarchimachh- 
KAn us bahutdyat sc thin, par jAl np 
phatA. 

12 Tisu' BA unhen kahA, A'o, kliana 
khAo. Aur shagirdtm men *Q kiBi ko 
jur,at na hai ki us ne piichhe, ki Tu 
kaun hai ? kyunki We jantc the ki wuh 
Khuddwand hai. 

13 Tab Yisti' ne dke roti lt, nur un- 
hen di, aur visi tarah Ke machhlt di. 

14 Yih tiara martaba thd, ki Yisrr 
n<!, niurdon men so ji utlroe ke ba'd, 
apne ta'in shAgirdonko dikhldyA. 

18 1" Aur jali wokbanA khachuke, 
tM Yisii' ne ShamaVm Patrus ko kaha, 
Ai Shama'iin, Ytinas ke bata kya tu 
mujhe in se ziyada piydr kara hai V 
Ub ne nse kali A, Han, ai Khudawaud; 
tu khud jAntd hai ki main tnjbe piyaf 
karid hug. Us ne use kali i, ki Mere 
barre charA, 

16 Us no do bAra nac phir kaha, ki 
Ai Snama'un, Yunas ke beta, Ayd tu 
iiinjir- piydr kartA hai? Wuh bola, 
ki Hio, 'ai KlmdAwand, tii to jdutA 
hai ki main tujh ko piyAr kartu 
bnn. Us ne nne kaha, ki Merf bhcreri 
eh ii r 4. 

17 TJs nc use tisre martaba kahd, ki 
Ai Shama'iin, Yiinas ke bete, dyA to 

151 



YU'HANNA', XXI. Potnts ko ki. 

mujhe piyar kartA hai V Tab Patrus, 
is Liye ki us uc tisri bdr us se kahA, ki 
A'yd tu mujhe pivdr kartA bai, dilgir 
Inid, aur use kahd, Ai Khudawand, tii 
to sah kuekh jdntd hai; haiki tujhe 
ma'Uiin hai, ki main tujhe piyAr kartA 
hlin. Yiail' ne use kaha, Men bheren 
charA. 

IH Main tujh se sach sach kahtd 
hit n, ki Jah tak ki tii jawAn thd, td Ap 
apul kamar bdndhtA thA, aur jahdu 
kahiij chahta thA, chaltA phirtd thA: 
par ja'b ti'^biirhd hojA, to apne hdthon 
ko phailaeRai aur dusrd teri kamar 
bSdttbflgi, aur wah*n jahAn tii na 
ehAhc, tujhe le jdegd. 

19 Ub ae in bAton sc pa1A diyd, ki 
wuh kaun si maut sc Khudd kA jalai 
7,Aliir karegA; aur yih k'ahke use phir 
kahd,kl Mere picbhe lio le. 

20 Tab Patrus ne phirkc us goigtrcl 



ko, jisH Yisu' piyAr kartA thA, aur jis 
sliAm ke khAne men un ke riBfl Dftl 
jhukke piichhA, ki Ai KhudAwand, 
wuh jo tujhe iwkarwali hai, kaun hai 'i 
pichho Ate dekhd. 

21 Patrus ne use dekhke Yisii' ko 
kahA, Ai Kbuddwand, ia shakhs kd 

22 Yisii' ne use kahd, Agar main 
1,'haln'm ki jali tak main dnu, wuh 
yahin thuhre, to tujh ko kyA ? tii mere 
picbhe ho le. 

23 Tab bhdion rnen yih bAt raash- 
hiir hiii, ki wuh ahigird na marecaj 
lekin Yisu'ne use nahinkahd, ki Wuh 
na maregd, ma«ar yih kahA, ki Agar 
main ehAbiin ki mere Aue tak tbahre, 
to tujh ko kyA? 

24 Yib wuh BhAgird hai jis ne in 
kimon ki gawdhi d(, aur in liAton ko 
liklid ; aur ham. ko yaqin hai ki ub ki 
gawahi saob hai. 

25 Tar aur bhi bahut se kdm hain, 
jo Yis6' no kiye, aur agar wo judA 
judA likhe jAtfl, to rnain guman kartA 
inin ki kitdben jo liklii jalin dunyA 
men na sanid saktin, A'min, 



ACTS 

RASU'LON KE A'AMA'L. 



I BA'B. 

Al Theofilus, wub pahli kaifiyat 
main na tssnif ki, un sah baion 
ki, Jo ki Yittu' shuru' M kurtd, aur 
sikbata rabi, 

^ Ua din tak ki wuli apne rasuloii 
ko, jinlicii UB ne chu.ua thd, Rub i 
Quds ee hukru dokar, upar ulkdyd 



3 Un par ub ne iftu dukfa othfa 

ke pichho dp ko bahut si MU» ui- 
ahdufon so zinda zdhir feiyd, ki wub 
eh Alis diu tak unhen. nanar dtd, 
Khudd ki badahdiat ki bdtey kahti 
raba; 

4 Aur un ke satb ekjd hoku hukm 
diya, ki Yarusalam ac bdhar ua j:io, 
baiki Bdp ko us wa'de ki, jis kd zikr 
1 1 i i ■. i maja se mu chuke hv, rdh dekho. 

Kyiiijki YlUiatuid M tO pdiii M 
K'ijiftMK.-i djyd; par turu thore dlaaij 
ka la'd Hiili iQ.udsso baptismu pdogu. 

6 Tab unhog ne, jo ikatthe tbe, ua 
ae pikhhd, aur kaha, ki A\ Khudd- 
wand, kyd tti ini Wtqt Israel ki bad- 
abaliat ko pbir buiial kiya cbilita 
hai? 

7 Par ua nt unheii kaha, Tumlidrd 
kdm naliiii ki un wao,tun aur mau- 
siinoii ko, jinhcn Bdp ne apue bi 
ikhtiydr uien rukbd bai, jano ; 

6 Lekin jab Ki'ili i Quds iiuu par 
dwe^i, Uiui qjiwat pdog<0| aur Yaniau- 
lani, aur adre Yahiidiya, u Samanya 
men, baiki samin ki Ladd tak, meru 
gawah boga. 

i' Aur ivuh yiu kahke, un ke dekh- 
t« biie, tipar u{hdyd gayd ; bui badll 
ne uee un ki tuturan aachhlpd livA. 
152 



10 Aur ua ke jdte hiie, jab wc dsmdn 
ki taraf tak rabe tbe, dekho, do mard 
siifod j-oahak pahiue uu ke pis kbare 
the ; 

11 Aur kabne lage, Ai Ja.iJi DWdo, 
tum kyurj kliare dsiunn ki taraf dekhie 
ho? yibi Yisii', jo tumhdra pda so 
damdu par uthaya gayd bai, asi tarah, 
\h taruh tum tiu use damdu ko jati* 
dekbd, pbir dwogd. 

12 Tabweua pahdr se, juZaitiiij ];■! 
kalihitri, Jo Ya ni -ia la r n na nazdik, baiki 
faqat ek sabi, ki niauzil dur bai, Yan':- 
sajam ko phiro. 

13 Aur jab dikail hue, to ek bdld- 
khdue par gaye ; wahdu Patrus aur 
Ya'iidb, aur Yulianni aur AndrydM, 
fTulnia aur Thumd, Rirtbulamd'aur 
Mati, iialfa kd beta Yu'qiih, aur Sba- 
in&'un Zcdotea, aur Ya'qilb kri Iduii 
Vafuklab, tahta tbe. 

li Yo sab, 'auraton, aur Yiaii' ki 
md Mariyom, aur ua ko bhdion ke 
sdth, ek-dil hoko du'a aur nuuuat kar 
ralm tbe. 

15 T Uultin diuoQ, Patrus abdgird- 
in ke darruiyda, (un sab ke udm 

ruitke ek sau bis ke qarib the,) kbard 
bokc bold, 

16 -Ai \)hiio, zariir thd ki wub 
nawishta, jo lliih i Quds ne, DdAd bi 
/.ubdui, Yiilu'idab kobaci'i meij, jo Yiad* 
ke pakarncwdlon kd ralmuma tbd, dgt' 
ae farmayd, pi'ird liowe, 

17 Kyiiiiki wub hain men giud 
gayd, aur uu ue ia khidmat mcii liiasa 
payd thd, 

18 So uh ne apni kadi ki m&zduri se 
ek kbet mol liyi, aur aundbe luurib 



fanteWit ke dia men A'AMA'L, II. 

gira, aur uh ka pet phat gaya, aur uh 
ki tamaiu antrian nikal parin. 

19 Aur yih Yariisalaui ku sab rah- 
ncwahm ko uia'lum hiia; yahan tak 
ki tU kliet ka ndtii unhin ki /.uban 
inen Htinal-daiaa hiia, ya'ue klu'm ki 

Zauiill. 

20 Kyunki Zabur kl kitab men 
Ukba hai, ki Ua ka tuakan ujar jae, 
aur us mcri koi basnowaia narahe,aur 
us ki ta'inati ka 'uhda dtiara ' 

21 Pas cbahiye ki iu tnardon mon 
se, jo liar waut hanuire sath raho, jab 
Khudawand M' huni mun aya jaya 
ku ria t Ini, 

22 Yuhanna ku baplisma se li.-ko us 
din tak ki wuli hamare pas se upar 
utkaya gaya, iu inen bc ek hainsire 
sath us ke ji utbnu ka gawah howe, 

28 Tabunhon ne do kokhnra kiya, 
ek Yusuf jo Barsabas ka'ulata, jis ke 
laaab JukIus tha, aur diisra Mat- 
tliiyas. 

24 Aur yih kabke du'a maugi, kiAi 
Kimdawaud, sab ku dilog ke jaunu- 
walo, dikha ki in donon luun su ui nu 
kia ko cbund bai, ki 

25 Wub itt khidmat o risAJat inen 
hissa le, jis se Yabiiddh k h ari j hokc 
apni kias» jag&h ko gaya. 

26 Aur unhog ne un pai ebittnian. 
dalin; aur chitthi Matthiyas ku naui 
par uikli; tab wuh gyarah rasulon 
men ttbumar kiva gaya. 

II BA'B. 

AUR jab Pantekust ka din aya tha, 
we sab ek dil hoke ikalthe OJ&e. 
2 Aur akhftrgf asinan suuk Awaz Ai, 
jaiso buri aiidhi uhale, aur us se sara 



Patrui ka w'az kun 



ghar, janin we bai the the, bhar gaya. 

3 Aur unhon judi judi Ag ki si 
zubaneg dikMi din, aur un men se 
barek par bailbin. 

4 Tab we sab liiih i Quds se bhar 
gaye, aur gair zubanen, jaiwo Ruh ne 
i.:il i- n bolnc ki qudrat bukbshi, bolne 
lage. 

Aur Khuda-tars Yahudi bar ek 
153 



ipuim men se, jo AsmAn ko tale bai, 
Yarusalaiu mon a rahe the. 

b' So jab yih awaz di, to bhir lag 
gayi, aur sabdang In'it!, kyunki bar ek 
ne tuihen apni ajjui boli bolte suni. 

7 Aur sab hsirau hoke, aur ta'ajjub 
karko, apas men kahne lagu, Dekho, 
kya yih sab jo bolte kain, Jalili 
nahin ? 

8 Pan kyugknr har ek ham men m 
apu* apne watan ki boli s u a t a hai? 

i) Partbi, aur Modi, aur 'Elami, aur 
rahnewAle STa*uputdmiya r Y'ahi'nliya 
aur Qapj)adui[iya, Pun tua atu* Asia ke, 

10 Prugivi aur Pamtuliya, Misr, 
anr Libya ke us biasa ko jo Qureno 
ke 'ilaoa meri liai, aur Ruini musatir, 
Yahddiaur Y'abt'idi murid, 

11 Kreti, aur 'Arab boke ham apni 
apni zubanim ineii unben Khudi ki 
bari baten bolt.c suiuu li.iin, 

12 Aur sab bairau bfif, aur gbab- 
rdke ck ddare se kahne laga, ki Yih 
kya hiia chahtd hai ? 

13 Auron no tbattlio se kaha, ki Ye 
nayi mai ko naslie Jiien hain. 

14 1 Tab Patrus no un gyarahon 
ko sath kharc hoke apni awaz buland 
ki, aur un ho kaha, Ai Yalnidi maidu 
■ ' Y:Lr,'i.-iilam ke sab rahnewalo, yih 
janu, aur kAu lagaku rueri baten suno : 

15 K.i ye, jaisi tuin suinajhte ho, 
riashu men nahin, kyunki abhi pakar 
din ayit bai. 

lb' Baiki yih wuh hai, jo Y'uel nabi 
ki lna'rilat farmaya gayd : ki 

17 Khuda kabta bai, ki Akhiri 
ilinon. mag aisa boga, ki main apni 
liiih mun so sah adinion par dbaidngd : 
aur tuiuliaru Lete, aur tuiuhari beti&n, 
nubiiwat karungi, ain- tnmhare ja'wari 
roya dokhenge, aur tunilidre buddhe 
khwab: 

18 Aur main un ditmu tam apne 
bandon aur bindion par apni Rih 
meg se dhilunga: aur we nubuwat 
karenge. 

ly Aur main opar asman men 



Bahut lof/on ka A' AMAT*, TT. murid h-mii. 

achamMia, aur nichc ndl par ai- j ke ji uthne ki ttkf feJyai, W us ki jan 



shaniarj, lalui, aur Ag, 
hidui, dikhAiingA: 

20 Surai andhera, aur cbdnd lahii ho 
jaegA, peshtar uh k<' ki Khuddwand kd 
DUEtUg aur nadir din dwe ; 

'J L Aur yiin hogd, ki harek jo Khu- 
ddwand kA ndm legi, najAt pawegA. 

£2 Ai IsrAcli mardn, yu bAton suno, 
ki YisiV N asari ek mard thd, jis kd 
Khuda kl taraf se honA t.um par sdbit 
h'rVA, »11 rau'aji/.uri nur achambhori aur 
nishdnion se, jo Khuda M uh ki nia'- 
rifat tumbAre hu'li men dikhdin, jaisA 
tum Ap hhi jAnte bo : 

23 Usi ko, jab KhudA ke thahrAe 
hiie irade aur 'ilm i azali se sompA 
guyd, tum ne pakrA, aur be-dinon ke 
hatb se kilo garwAke q.itl kiyA : 

24 Usi ko KhudA ne, rumit ke 
band kholkr, uthayd : kyiinki rmim- 
kin m Iba ki wuh uh ke qabze men 
rahe. • 

25 Ts liye ki Daud iw ke haqq men 
kahtd hai, ki Main ne Khuddwand 
pnr, j» sadA mere sAmhne hai, Age se 
nazar ki, ki wuh meridahni taraf hai, 
■:> ki main na hatur» : 

2(» Im wibali m'erA dil khush hai, aur 
meri zubdn nihal hai ; baiki merA badan 
bhi ummed men chain karagA: 

27 Is liye ki t(t meri jAn KO 'Akan i 
gaib mi'ij na chhoregd, naapnequdduB 
ko sarne degA, 

28 Tu ne mujhe /.indagi ki rdhen 
batdin ; tu ne mujhe apne didAr ke 
bAHl kluishi se bhar diya. 

2!) Ai lihdhi, mujhe uanm ke ra.is 
DAi'id ko haqq men be-aharak kahne 
do, ki wuh moa, aur tiapi Ma gaya. am- 
al tak iis ki qabr hamdre danniyan 
maujud hai. 

30 So is sabab sc ki nabi tha, aur 
jantd tbA ki KhudA ue us se qamm 
khAi hai, ki main teri nasi se Masih ko 
jism ke n'i h sahi* karnggi, ki tere 
takht par baithe ; 

31 Ue ne vih rahle se idnkar Masih 

154 



dhfiTjweri kA 'Alam i gaib men chhori na gayi, : 
ke badan ne sarno paya. 

88 I 'b) Yiftii' ko KhudA ne uthdyd ; 
ua ke ham sab gawdh hain. 

33 Pas KhudA ke dahine hath bu- 
land hoke, aur BAp se Ruh i Quds kA 
wa'da pdko, u» ne yib, jo tum ab 
dekhte aur suiite hn, dhdld. 

34 Kyrinki Daud Asmdn par na 
gaya; lekin wuh khud kahtA hai, ki 
Khuddwand ne mere Kliudawaud H 
kahd, ki Mere dahine baitb, 

16 Jab tak ki main teredushmanon 
k. . ten pdnwim ki ciiauki na karun. 

30 Pas TsrAel kA sArd gharaud ya- 
, nan jAne, ki KhudA ue usi Tisu* ko, 
jise tum ne salib d!, Khuddwand aur 
Masih bhl kiyA. 

37 ^ Jab utihon ne yih sunA, torm 
ke dil clibid gaya, aur Patrus aur baqi 
rasrtlon se kahA, ki Ai bhAiu, baui kya 
karen V 

:ih r Tab I'atrus ne un se kahA, Tauba 
karo. aur tum men se bar ek, gunahon 
ki mu'AH ke liy, Tisli' Masih kenaiii 
par baptiama lc, to liuh i Quds kd in- 
'dm pdoge. 

39 Ib liye ki yih wa'da tum se aur 
tuiiihdre larkou se lini, aur un sah se, 
jo ddr hain! jitiiori kw hamAi'd KhudA- 
wand KhudA buldwe. 

40 Aur wuh bahut aur bdtorj kt 
gawahidn layA, aur yih kahkc nasihat 
ki.ki Apie ko is f erhi qaum se bacbAo. 

41 % H" jinhon neuski bat khuahi 
se qubdl ki, bapfiftna paya: aur usi 
roz tin haair Admi ke qarib shdmil 
iirte. 

42 Aur msulon se ta'Um pAne, aur 
subbat rakhnc, aur n>ti torne, aurdu'A 
inAngnemeri liga rahe. 

43 Anrliar ek jAu ko khanf Ml 
aur Iwibut Ke acliambhe aui 
rasdloo se Kdbir bi'iin. 

14 Aur sab jo iman Ide the, ikat- 
Mic raba, aur Bttl obiBOfl nieii sliarik 



Ihe: 



Ek Itttigre ko 



A'AYA'L, ITT. 



chuiKjd kan> d. 



milkiyat aur asb&b | chai\*rd hiid tha, Patrus aur Yiihanui 
l>echke, harek ki wuiU.it ku muw«flq, ko liptd jdta Uii, sab ]>% nihuvui, hai- 



sab ko baut detfl Uufc 

4G Aur bar roz ek-dil hoke Laik;).] SnJaiman kd kahldtd liat, 
mon rabe, aur giur ghar rotidn torke daure ae. 



rdn hoke uh baratnada ki taraf jo 
k o pan 



kbusbi aur sidhe dil se khana khdte 
ibe, 



12 T| Tar Patrus ne yih dekbkar 
loj*on n kaba, ki Ai leraeli uiardo, is 



47 Aur Khudd ki ta'rif karto the, par tum kynn ta'ajjub karto? 
aur sab lojjori ke na/dik 'azi/. tho. kyiin liamen aisa dekli nhe ho, ki 



Aur Khuddwand bar ros im ko, 

n u nftj&l pai, faUWyfl mm mil:U:'t h 



tha. 

III BA'B. 

PAS Patrus aur Yiihannd^k siil.li 
du'd ke waqt tisre pahftr Imikal 
ko chale. 

2 Aur log janam kd ok langrd liyo 
jdte tue, jise har roz Idke haikal ke us 
darwaze par, jo Khubsumt kahldtd 
hai, bithdte the, ki haikal ke jdnewdlon 
so bhikh mAnfir ; 

3 Jabus uePatru* BUI Yiilianiiri ko 
haikal mi;n jate dekhd, un se bhikh 
mangi : 

4 Par Patnis ne Yuhanna ke sdth 
un par nazar karke kaha, ki Hamari 
taraf dekli. 

5 Wuh lo is ommed par, ki uu ae 
kuchh pawe, uti ko tak raha. 

6 Tab Patrus ae kaha, Rupa aur 
soua niere pds nahiii ; par jo niere pds 
hai, tajin detil lilin; Y\s&' Masih 
N asari ke iiiim «e ut.h, aur chal. 

7 Aur us kd dah'ini hath pakarku 
minya; usi dam us ke paijw aur 
taklme mazbiit ho gayc. 

H Aur wuh ki'uike k hara hud, aur 
chalnc laga, aur kiidtd phdndta, aur 
Khudd ki ta'rif kartd, un ko sdth 
haikal meij gaji. 

9 Aur sab logon ne use chalte phirte 
aur Khudd ki ta'rif karto dekhd: 

10 Aur unkopahchaua.kiyih wuhi 
hai jo haikal ko Khubsurst dlrwto 

bhikh nidngno bait ha tha: aur 



iya bani un apni qudrat ya ilimlari 

us shakhs ko chalnc- ki taqat di ? 

18 Abirahauiaur Iz.h&M aur Ya'qul> 
ke Khudd ue, hainare bapdddou ke 
Khudd ne, apne Bet.e Yisu' ku jaldl 
liiyd, jise turn ne hawdla kiyd, aur 
Pilatiis ke huziir, jab us nechhordcnd 
insdf j&na, inkdr kiya. 

14 Han, tum ne us Quddiis aur 
Tldstkdr kd inkdr kiyd, aur ohdhd ki 
ek khuni tumhdre liye chhord jde : 

18 Flii rindag) ko Malik ko qatl 
iyd, jise Khudd ne murdon. men ae 
uthdyd ; aur haru usko gawdh hain. 

lf) lisi ke ndm ne, us iman ke 
maflfl j" aa ke bAxb par hai, is absklu 
ko, jise tum dekhteaur jaut.e ho, ma» 
but kiyd; tidri, usi iman ae, Jo 08 ki 
tvkf ae hid, yili kaniil t.auduruKti tum 
sab ke sauihne uaedi. 

17 Aur ab, ai bhdio, main jdntd 
hnn ki tum ne yih ndddni kg kiyd, 
jaisi! liimhirc sardaruti ne bhi. 

iw l'ar jin baton ki Khudd ne ap- 
ne sab nabiun ki zubani dg« sc kha- 
bar di tlii, ki Masih dukh uthawegd, 
BO puri kiri. 

1^ ^( Pas taulwi karo, aur pbiro, ki 
tumhdre gunah mit.de jden, td Ki Khu- 
dawand ke huaur se tdzagi-ljakhsh 
rtiyaui :v.v>u : 

20 Aur wuh YisiV Masih ko phir 
bhejc, jis ki manddi tum logog ke 
dsrmiydu dge so h(ii. 

21 Zan'ir hai ki asmdn use liye 
rahe, uu ^amdnon tak ki sab eldzen, 



niajarc se, jo u*i par gtizrd thd, dangljin kd zikr Khudd i 



aivr hairdn hue. 
11 Aur jis waqt wuh lai 
155 



aab pak 



nabion ki zubdni dunya ke skuni' ae 
;ra, jo [kiya, apni hdlat pnr dwen. 



I'atrtts aur Yuhannd A'AMA 

22 Kyunki Musi ne to bapdidon 
so kiikA, ki Klmiliiwiiud, fa tumhari 
Khudi hai, tunihire bkaiog men se 
tumhdre liyu ok nabi inori milnind 
barpd kaivgA; jt> kuchh wuh tumben, 
kahe, us k i sah suno. 

23 Aur nii.ii hogA, ki bar nafs jo 
us nabi ki na suno, wuh qaum men 
se nest kiyA jdegA. 

21 Baiki nab nabion ne, Sarauel se 
loke pichhluii lak, jitnon no kalam 
kiya, in dinon ki khabar di hai. 

25 Tum nabion. ki nulad, aur us 
'ahd ki ho, jo Khudi ne hamAro KAp- 
iliid.iij ■■■■•- b&ntibA tuu, jab AMrahun 
se kaki, Baiki teri aulad se diuiyi ke 
sire ghardne harakat pawenge. 

26 TumhAre pas KhudA ne apne 
Beto Yisii' ko utkike pahlo bhejA, ki 
tum men se bar ek ko us ki badion se 
phorko harakat dc. 

IV BA' II. 

JAB wo logou se yih kah rahe the, 
kabin, aur haikal ki «ardir, aur 
Sadikp, un par charh ie ; 

2 Kyunki naraz htie ki we logog 
lin sikhiim tho, aur Yisii' ke sabah $ti 
murdon ke ji utbne ki khabar dete 
tho. 

3 Aur utilion nc un par hAth dalu, 
aiu - diisre din tak paure men inklii: 
kydiiki sbim ho gayi thi. 

4 Par kakutero un nion so, jinborj 
ne kalii.ii] suni, iman lie ; aur un 
logon ki ginti jidnek hazAr ke qarib 
thi. 

5 % Aur diisre diu yun ki'iA, ki un 
ko sardiir, aur buzurg, aur faejih, 

6 Aur sarddr kdhin Annds, u Qayi- 
fi, aur YnhannA, aur Iskandar, aur 
jitne audit kabin ke ghariue ke tlie, 
YaniKalam men jam'i lu'ie. 

7 Aur mi ko ldcb men kliarikarke 
pdchha, ki Tum ne kis hjtiddr aur kis 
nain se yih kivA ? 

8 Tah Patrus no Ruh i Quds 
ma'mfir koke un se kahA, Ai qaum ke 
sardar». aur ai IsrAal ke buzur; 

156 



L, IV. Sadr Majlis ke dge lidzir hote. 

U Agaf sij ham ne is ihsan ki liA- 
bat, jo is za'if ndmi par hai, ptichhd 
jata hai, k i wuh kyuiikar changd 
hda; 

10 To tum sab, aur Iuraiil ki siiri 
qaum ko, rna'ldni ho, ki Y isu' Masih 
NAaari ko nam se, jis ko tum no salib 
di, aurjise Khuda ne munhm ineij H 
phir utkiyi, usi se yih mard tumhare 
sduihno bhala changA k bara hai. 

1 I Vili wuhi patthar hai, jise tum 
mi'amaron no nachiz jinA, jo koue ka 
sira ho gaya. 

12 Aur kisi diisre se najit nahirj : 
kyunki Asinan ko tale admiog ko koi 
dilari nim nahin baklmhii gayi, jis se 
ham najit pd saken. 

13 1 Jab unhon ne Patrus aur 
Yuhanna ki dileri dokbi, aur daryiil't 
kiyi ki we l>e-'ikn aur 'awAmm men 
se Jiaiii, to ta'ajjub kiyi : phir ma'liiin 
kiyi, ki we Yisi'i' ke satli the. 

14 Aur us shakhs ko, jo changi 
hrt;i thi, itu ko sath kliare dekhke 
kuchh khlldf na kab saken. 

15 Par uubeii bnkiii karke ki maj- 
lis se babar jao, ipas men saldb karne 
lago, 

1G Yih kahke, ki Ham in ddmitm 
sckydkaren? kyi'njki ok wirih mu'- 
ajisy» mdiMn ne dikhlaya, jo Yardbalnm 
ke aab rahnewalon ]iar zaliir bai ; aur 
ham is ki inkdr nalu'n kar sakte, 

17 Lekin td ki yih logou mon 
ziydda maslihur na ho, ham unhen 
khnb dbamkdwerj, ki phir is ndm se 
kina iidiiii ko na bolen. 

IH Tab unhen bid'ake tikid ki, ki 
Yisu' ke ndm par hargiz na bolen, aur 
ta'iiin na derj. 

19 Par Patrus aur Yuliannd ne ja- 
wab men unhen kahi, Tum hi insdf 
karo, ki Khudi ke nazdik yih durust 
bai, ki kara Khudi ki bit ae tumbari 
bit ziyAila suii«i. 

20 Kyiinki mumkiu nuliin, ki ji> 
ham nc dekhi, aur suni hai, so na 
kabem 



Rihdi par unfai nhnhr !:ar>,d. A 'AMAT,. 

21 Tab unhog ne un k» aur dham- 
kdke olifaor dlyd, kyiinki logon ke 
tabitb un ki sazd deue ki koi rih na 
; ;ii, i- Hya ki nah log, BI mijare ke 
bd'is, Khudd ki tarif karte the ; 

i'ii Ki wuh (bakhs, jis ko changd 
karne se yih rmi'aji«a zdhir hiid, cha- 
Ufi baru ke iip.tr thd. 

23 % Ph r w chhiilko apno logon ke 
pis gaya, aur jo kuchli sardar kdhinon 
aur buzurgon ne un se kabd tha, ba- 
yan kiyi. 

24 Jab unhon ne yili sund, tu ck- 
dil hoke Khudd ki taraf dwdz buland 
[L nir kulisi, ki Ai Rabi), til wuh 
Kliuda hai, jis ne dsman, aur /amin, 
aur samundar, aur sab kuchh jo un 
men. hai, paidi kiyd ; 

25 Tu no kpne hande Didd ki zu- 
hani knha, ki Uair-qaitmon ne kyiin 
dhiim niachai, aur logon ne batil 
khiyal kiye? 

26 Klmdawatid aur us ke Masih ke 
barkhiiaf hoke zamin ke hadshih 
uf.hu, aur sarddr hdhum jam'a hde. 

27 Sach, ki tere quddiis Hetc YirnV 
ke, jise tii no Masih kiyd, barkhiiaf 
lioku BmmUi aur Puntius Pilitus 
^lir-o^unuon aur Israel! logon ke s&th 
jam'a luii:, 

28 Ta ki jis ki honii tere liith 
tere iradc ne ige ae t h ah r A rak h a 
'amal men lawcti. 

29 Ab, ai Khuddwand, un ki dliain- 
kion ko dckh : aur apno bandon ko 
yih bakhnh, ki «e kamal dileri m terd 
kalam «imdwen, 

30 Jab ki tii apnd hdth changi 
karne ko phaild de ; aur tere qiuldus 
Ttitu Yisi't' ko i ia tn se nishdnian aur 
achainbhe zdhir DOB> 

31 T| Aur jab we du'A mdng chu- 
ke, wuh makin, jaluiu we jam'a tlic, 
hildyi gaya : aur sab Rdh i Quds ne 
bh&f gaye, aur Khudd kd kaldm iileri 
te maiae lage. 

3L! Aur imdnddron ki jamd'at ek-dil 
aur ek-jdn luii : aur kisi ne apno mil 
157 



T, Handntydh n S'i/ira kdjhuih. 

i apnd na kalia, baiki sdri uhizon 

s'N sharik the. 

3*3 Aur rasiilon ne bara iqtiddr m 
Khuddwand Siri' ke ji utune par 
gawdhi di : aur un sab par bara lasi 

m: 

34 Kyugki k"i un inen muhtdj na 
tliiL: is liye ki jo log zamin o makdn 
ko mdlik the, un ko lieehke un ki 
qimat lite, 

35 Aur rasiikm ko ptffwog par 
rakhte the: aur liar ek ku, us ki zaru- 
rat ko muwdfi'i, baut diyd jdtd thd. 

30 .Aur Yriscs, jis kd rasfilon ne 
Rarnabds (ya'ne, Nasihat kd betd,) 
ndm rakhd, jo qaum kd Ldwi aur 
paiddiiih so Kunrusi thd, 

37 Ek khotrakhtd thd, uso Wchke, 
aur us ki qimat lake, rasulon ke pdn- 
par rakhi. 

V BA'B. 

ATTR Hananiydh ndme ek niard aur 
us ki joni Safird ne apni milki- 
yat btehi, 

2 Aur qimat men se kuchh rakh 
chhont; bo us ki joni lihi jani.i thi ; 

kuchh ldke ra.au Ion ke pdnwon 
par rakh». 

3 Tab Patrus ne kahd, Ai Hana- 
niydh, kyun Shaitan tero dil men 
samdyd, ki "tii Hiili i Quds se jhuth 
boU-, aur namin ki qimat men se kuchh 
rakb ehbore? 

4 Kyd jab tak tere pds thi, teri na 
thi? aur jab bechi gayi, tere ikhtiydr 
men na rahi? tii ne kyfiri is bit ko 
apne 'dil men jagah di i tii ailinion se 
nahin, baiki Khudii ne. jlnith bo!i, 

5 Yih bdten BUUte hl HaiidniyAh 
gir para, aur us ka dam nikal gaya : 
aur sab ko jinhon ne yih sund liari 
khauf dya. 

6 Aur jawdnon no uthko uso kaf- 
naya, aur bdbar le jake gara. 

7 Jab ghante tin ek g'uzro, us ki 
joni is inijaro so be-khabar hoke bhi- 
tar di. 

8 Patruri ne OM kahd, Mujh se kah, 



Busaiun hi,q<nd tsechltttf jchia. A'AMA'I 
Kyi zamiu itne lit par bechi? Ub!^ 
nc k ^ Ini, Hiu, itne par. 

i* Fhir Piitrus ne use kaha. Tum 
DC kyvhj ekd kiya, ki Khudawand ki 
K'ih ko izmdo? del;h, tere shauhar 
ke gdrnewalou ku pdnw darwaze par 
halo, aur tujlie bhi bahar lu jAuiiye. 

10 Tab wuiiliin ua ke parnmij pas 
girke uh ka dam nikal gaya; aur ja- 
wdnon ne bhitar Ake uae murda paya, 
aur bahar le jike us ke sbauhar pas 
gdra. 

• 11 Aur taradm kalisiyd, aur aab, 
jiiiImuj ue yib suna, bahut dar gaye. 

12 If Aur ruBiilon ke hathon se 
balmt si ninhinlan aur mu'ajizc logon 
ke danniydn ziihir kiye gaye; (nur 
we sab ek-dil huke Sulaiman ke bard- 
made men ikatthe the. 

13 Par auro'n meii nc kisi kd hiwdo 
ua para, ki un meQ ja mile : magar log 
uri ki tu'rif karte the. 

14 Aur aur bhi ziydda mard aur 
'auratey, baiki guroh ki guroh, Khudd- 
waod pai iman lake un men, slidmil 
kote the.) 

15 Yahin tak ki log liimAroii ko 
sarakun par kike charpakm aur kha- 
tol&n par rakhte the, Ia ki jab l'atrus 
awi!, uh kd sdya hi un men so kisii juir 
H| jaw.'. 

ib' Aur chdron taraf ke shakron ke 
log bimdrort ko, aur un ko ju napdk 
nih'j'j tas satdo the, lake Yarusalam 
men jaru'a hue; so sab change kiye 
gaye. 

1T ^f Tab nardiir kabin aur us ke sab 
sdtbi, (jo Saddqi ke firqe ku tlu.i dijh 
H bliarko u the, 

18 Aur raHiloii pai LaLh dai t, aur 
nnbt'u i^aidkhduu i 'amin nun band 
kiyd. 

19 Par KlmdawiWid ke A firinhte 
M nil koqaidkkdne ku darwaze kkole, 
nur uiilic'Tj liaiiar lu aku kahd, 

20 Jao, aur haikiil men khare bnke 
la zitidagi ki sab bdten logon s* 1 kano. 

21 We yih sunke l:nki- haikal men 

158 



Un ka, 'uzr 
iikhlinu [gas, Par sardar 
kabin aur us ke eathion nc dke Sadr 
Majlis ko aur lm.nl Israel ke buzurgflg 
kijama'atko ikatl.be kiyi, aur qaid- 
kliani! men kahla blu'ji, ki unh™ 
laweg. 

22 Magar piyddoy ne r«ihi:uchke 
imhrn qalokh£ae iiiru n:i paya, aur 
phir dke khabar di, 

23 Aur kalia, ki Haui ne to qaid- 
kbane ko ban khabardari se band, aur 
chaukiilAron ko bahar darwazon par 
khara paya : par jab khola, to kn6 ko 
andar na pAya. 

21 Jonhin sardar kabin, aur huikat 
l;r wneOt, aur sardar kahmon ue yili 
bdt suni, un ki babat ghabrf gayo, ki 
kya horf. 

25 Tab ki^iu nc ake unlicrj khabar 
di, ki l>ekho, wo mard, jinben trum nc 
aaiukhane roen dtila tha, haikal mau 
fehare logon ko sikhliite bain. 

26 7»b haikal ka sardir piyadon 
ke sdth jftke unhen laya, lekin zalar- 
dast.i M naliin : kyaiiki Ujm se darto 
tbo.ki alaS nn ho ki ham parpattbrao 
karen. 

27 Aur unhen lake Majlis ke bicli 
rnen khara kiyii : tab sardar kabin ne 
tiu H yili kanta jn'n'hha, 

28 Kyi ham nc tura tw bari takid 
na ki, ki is nain par ta'lim na denaV 
par, di'kbo, tum ne Yan'tsalam ko 
apni ta'lim se bhar diya, aur i» «haklu 
ka kitin ham par l:lya chaht« ho. 

2il T Tab Patrtw aur rasulon ne 
jawab men kahd, Ham ko Kkudd ki 
buku aVmiion ke. tiukm £ti ziydda 
liiaiina farz hai. 

30 Hanidre bd|idddou ke Khuda ne 
Yisii' ko uthAyd.jise tum ne kdth par 
laik Ake mar daki. 

81 U'al ko Khudi ne Milik aur 
NajAt-denewdta ihahrako npne dabinc 
lidth par buland kiyd, tdki Israel ko 
lauba aur gtmahon ki niuail bakbehe. 

32 Aur ham in baton par us ke 
^awali hain; aur liiili i Q.uds bhi, jiae 



Haj i i* kr. sdmhne. A'AMA 

Kliuda ne unimu, jo us ki tabi'-dari 
kartu naifi, bakhshd bai. 

33 ^ Wh yib aunkc kat gaye, aur 
s4du.li ki ki unlit'ii qatl karcu. 

34 Tab Garnaliel iidmock larisi ne, 
jo ariari'at k% inu'altim, aur anu iogon 
nien 'uwtdar thd, UljjUa men utukt 
bukm diya, ki rasuki n ko mrra bahar 
lojao; 

35 Aur unhen. kabti, ki Ai Isrieli 
mardo, ap ae khabardar lio, ki tum in 
admiorj ko s&th k.vi kiya cbabte bo; 

3o fvyiinki indinon ku dge Theudds 
a« uthke kaha, ki Main kuclih lilin 
aur takbftiinan cbar sau mani u» w 
mil gaye ; wuh mara gayit, aur sab 

t"ine uh ke tdbi' tbc, pareshan o tabib 
de. 

37 Ba"d us ke YaliudAh Jalili i*m- 
cawlsi ke dirion men utha, aur baliut 

■ .-;ipii'/ i'ifhha khinchi: wuh 
bbt balak hua,aur sab,jitnuuaket4bi' 
tbe, cbliitar bitar bo gayc. 

38 Aur ab main tumben kabtil 
hun, ki Iti admiog su kinfira karo, 
un ko jane do : kyfmki agar yib tadbir 
yd kaui insan se hai, to zdi' hogi : 

iti) I'ar agar Khuda se liai, to tum 
BflB zdi' nabi n kar aakte ; aiad ua bo 
kitum Khudd se bbi larncwalc tliabro. 

40 Unhorj riH ua ki mani : aur ra- 
sdlon ko pii» bulake koj-e marc, aur 
Imkin kiya, ky Yisu' ka uam par bal 
na karna ; tab unhen cahor diya. 

il K Pas we Majlia ke huzur ae 
chalegaye, aur khush biie, ki baru [a 
Uiu to tlmhro k'i un ke nim ke liye 
be-burmat howen. 

41i Aur we hai 1 Kffl liaikal men, aur 
«bar gitar sikhlane,aur Yili 1 Mtrifa ki 
k Mistik babari dana K bir, ua rake. 

VI BA'B. 
N umur; un Jafe shagird bahut 
hote the, Yunani-iua.il Yahudi 
'Ibr&nicn ss kurkurauo lagc, kyunki un 
ki bawaon ke tOB ki khnbargiri iniin 
eafiat hnti taf. 
159 



C 



'L, VI. &U admi cftune jdie. 

U Tab un barahon ne sbagirdon ki'. 
gol ko bdham bulake kahd, AchehM 
nahifl lagti ki ham Khuda ke kalini 
ko ubborko ruezori ki'kbidmat karey. 

3 Pataj ai bhaio, apne nion te i» 
mii'atabat abakhs ko, jo Kdb i Quda 
aur danai se bharc horj, ubuno, ki baiu 
un ko U kam par munarrar karerj. 

«i Aur bain dp dud aur kalam ki 
khidnmt nit'n niaahgill rahengt. 

5 ^ Aur yib bac sari jaruii'at ko 
pasand di : aur unbon ne Btafknils 
nirae ek mard ko, jo iman aur Hiih i 
Quda se bbard thd, aur FailbdB, aur 
Prukhtwus, »nr Kiqduur, aur Tiumu, 
aur Pdrruauds, aur Niqulas Antaki ek 
Yalnidi murid ko, c huni : 

U Inuen rasiikm koage khara kiyd ; 
aur unboii ne du'a maugke tipm.' liiilb 
UD BU raklu'. 

7 Aur KJiudaka kalam plwil gayi ; 
aur Yatusalarii mun shagirdon, !id 
ahumar habut bi barb gaya : aur 
kaliiuoii ki bari gurob iman ke tdbi' 
hul 

8 Aur Stafauus iman aur ijuwat se 
ma'tnur hoko bare baru mu'aSse aur 
iiisbdiiian logon ku bicb ndbir karta 
rahd. 

9 f Tab us 'iMdatkbane se, jo 
Liljarlinon ki 'ibadat.k'jdi)a kaiMti 
hai, aur Qurenum. aur lakandarioii, 
aur uu a\en ac jo Qiliv\iya aur Asia ae 
an, ba'zc nthkii Hiaianus se btibs karno 
lage. 

10 fttrwe M dduat aur n'ih ka, jin no 
»mli kalam karta thri, sdmbni ua kar 
nfc«B< 

i; Thb ualion no ha*x0 mardon ko 
;anthd, ki kaborj, ki Hant no us ko 
diisi aur Kbudd ki ni.sl«; kui'r hiktu 
aund. 

i Tab unborj ne logon, aur hu- 
«urgou, aur £aqihorj ko ubhS.r4, aur us 
pai' cbiiru ae, aur pakarku Siidr Majlia 
men \n gaye, 

13 Aur jbuthe gnwabon ko khara 
k yii ; unhoii no kaha, ki *ii «iiakni 



Sttywntu apm hichno 

is jidk ninkdn aur slmri'at k( nisbat 

kuf'r baknp H biK naliiij dtd : 

14 Kyunki liam ne use yih kahte 
sirna, ki'WuM Yisfl' Naaarf ifl makan 
];'■ diiaegd, nur un rasnmn ko>jo Musa 
ki ma*rSkt hamen pahunchig, bada! 
dilegA. 

15 Tab sabhnn ne, jo majlis men 
baitao tho, us par gaur se nazar ki ; 
unherj us ka ehihra firislitu ka sa 
ehihra, nazar dyd. 

VIT BA'R. 

TAB sarddr kdhin no kaha, Kyd yc 
hdr.en y&nhia hain? 

2 Wnli hobi, Ai bbaio, aur ai (Iba, 
stmo ; ki KhudA c zn-1-jald) hamirfl 
bdp Abirahdra par, jis waqt wul 
MasuputArniya mcn tha, peshtar us ke 
ki wun H amin meu $4 bui, zabir lnia, 

3 Aur use kaili, ki Apne mulk aur 
apnckhanddn meu u nikul ja, aur us 
mulk mcn jise main tujhe dikhdnngd 
chalii jd. 

■1 Tafc KhaHion ke mulk so bahar 
jdkc liarrin mcn ja raha : aur wahdn 
se,ua kcbdpko nmrne ke ba'd,Khudd 
n« us ko is mulk mon.jia men tum ab 
rahte ho, pahimchdyd. 

5 Aur us ko kuchh miras, baiki 
cradam rakhiur ki jagah, «s nien na di : 
par wa'da kiya, ki Main yib Basahi 
tujhe, aur tere ba'd teri nasi ko, iluij^i, 
ki terf milkiy.Jt ho jdo, ftgarobl us ka 
kol larkd na thd. 

6 Aur Kbudd ne yiin farmaya, ki 
Teri nasi begano mulk incn ja rahcgi ; 
aur we im ko gulana *nen rskbonin, 
aur cbar sau haras tak bad-suluki 
karengEO. 

7 Phir Khndd ne kalii, ki Main us 
tpHim ki. p ki gulami roerj wo ra- 
henge, 'adJJat karunia : aur ba'd us ke 
m biliar awem;", aur isi jagah. mori 
bandagi bazenge. 

y Aur ub no us ec khatne ki 'atid 
kira ; so us so iz,Mq paki» bdd, aur 
dthwen din na ka klmtna kivd; aur 
"100 



A'AMA'L, VII. 'uzrkarta. 

Iz,hdq se Ya'qob, aur Ta'qdb se bdrah 
gbnrdno» ku bani paidd hi'ie. 

9 Aur ntd&roQ no riah so YucuF ko 
bechd, ki Miwr rneu le jden. : par Kbudd 
ua ko sath tha, 

10 Aur use us ki sab musibaton so 
nikala, aur use Misr ke badshau Fira'- 
fin ko buKur maqbdttyat aur hikmat 
liakbshi : aur us ne use Misr aur apiio 
Ndie ghar ka mukhtar kiya. 

U Ab Miur ke saro mulk aur Kan- 
":lii men k:i.i i>ara, aur bari muciibat di : 
aur hamarc bdpdddon ku kbdud mu- 
yausar nahin Ata tha. 

12 I.fkin Ya J q«b ne sunko ki Misr 
men andj hai, hamdre bapdddon ko 
pahli bdr bheja. 

13 A ur duri bar Yilsiif npne bhdion 
par zdbir Im gaya ; aur Yusuf ka 
ghariuj Flra'fo no nia'lum hua. 

14 Tab Yrisuf ne apne bdp Ya'rjiib 
aur uh ke sare kunbc ko, jo pacliliattar 
ibakha the, buld bheii. 

15 Aur Ya'nub Misr men gayd; 
wahan wuli aur hiimare bdptladtt mar 



lfi Aur wo ua ko Sikm mcn lo 
gaye, aur us mautmre men, jia ko 
AbirabAtn no bani Hai nur Sikm ko 
bdp so rfipiya deke mol liyd tbd, s*!^- 

17 Pas j'ih us wa'da kd waqt, jis 
k( Kbudd ne AbirahAm i«oqasftin khdi 
thi, nazdik dyd, lu^ Misr men barline 
aur bahiit bone lage, 

18 Us waqt tak ki dusrd U&Bh£h 
nthd, jo Y6suf ko na jdntd thd. 

19 Us ne hamdri qaum se fitrat 
karke hamaro bapdadim se bad-suluki 
ki, yahdrj tak ki us ne un ko chhote 
larkon ko phenkwd diya, td ki wo jiie 
na ralicn. 

20 Us waqt Miisi paidd hud, jo 
nilidyat khubsurat tbd ; us ne tin 
iTialiiuo tak apne bdp ke ghar men 
panvarish pii : 

21 M agar jab ki wuh phenkd gaya. 
FiraYm ki beti m use u tha liyA, aur 
us ko apnd betd karke ]>dl(L 



$t<zfanus apne bachao ineii A'AMA' 

22 Aur Miisa ne Mi^riun ki tamani I 
hikmat inun tarbiyat pai, aur kalam 
n kain men wihtb i iijtidir t lift. 

23 Aur jab wuh piire ctiilis baras 
ki hiia, us ke ji men Ayi, ki jakc apne 
lihai baui Israel ki khabar h. 

24 Tab t-k ko zulm uthate dekhkar 
us ki himayat ki, aur Miari kojinse 
marke us ka, ji» par zulni hu.i t ha, 
badla liya : 

25 KyTiiiki us ne khiyal k iya, ki 
mere bhai nsajbegae ki Khmta BMN 
liith so uuheri chutkari degi : l>ar we 
na namjhe. 

2fl Phir dusro din, jab we larte tho. 
unhen dikhii diya, aur un lio yuQ 
kahke mila dene ehihi, ki Ai inardu, 
tum to bhai bo; kyiin «k dusre par 
zulm kartc taf 

27 Ltkin us ne, jo apne paraui par 
buIiu karfa tha, use yih kahke batara, 
ki Kib ne tujhe ham par hakim aur 
<pizi thahriyi hai? 

2ti Kya jis tarah kai us Misri |C0 
(jati kiya, tu mujho oatl kiya chahta 

bal? 

2'J Musi to is bit par bhagi, aur 
Midyan ko mulk men ji raha; wahaii 
us ke do belo paida hfic. 

30 Aur jab chalis baris pure huc, 
tab Khudawand ka Srishta, Sini ke 
;>;ili ir k>- kiyabiii men, ;il' k i lau men, 
jhari'kc Viich, mu dikhai diya. 

31 Musa ne yih royat dekhke 
ta'ajjub kiya: aur jab daryaft kar- 
ne ko uazdik cbala, Khudawand ki 
awaz use pahunchi, 

32 Ki Main t-ere bapdadoB ka 
Kbiuhi, Abirahain ka Khuda, aur 
Iz,haq ka Khuda, aur Ya'qub ka Khu- 
da hun, Tah Musa kamp gaya, aur 
use daryaft kanio ki jur,at na bui. 

33 lab Khudawand ne use kah&, 
ki Jiiti apno parjwoji se utar: kytinki 
yib jagab, jaiiAn tu khari hai, pAk 
zamin hai. 

31 Main nigih karke apne logon 
ki, jo Miar men hain, munibat dekh 
161 



T,, VII. W harta. 

raha hun, aur main ne un ki ah mami 
suni, aur unhen, chhuraue utn't linu. 
Aur ab a, maiti tujhc M iur luey bhe- 

35 TJsi Musa ko, jis se unhon ne 
ink&r karke kahi, ki Kis ne lujLe 
hakim aur ejazi bauiya ? usi ko KhudA 
no, us iirishte ki ina'rifat jo use jhari 
mi : u nazar ayi, bhejA, ki hakim aur 
ohliutkarA-deuewAlA ho. 

36 W ubi uuheri m'kil liyA, aur 
ffin ke miilk, aur i,al Marnuudur, aur 
chalis bnras bayabdn men, mu'ajize 
aur nishaniac dikhata raha. 

37 1f Yih wuhi Miisa hai, jis nc 
bani Israel m kaha, ki Khudawami, 
jo tumhara Khuda hai, tuniharu 
l>KiJ!n!j men se, tumhare liye, mujb 
sa ek nabi zahir karega; u.-» ki suno. 

38 Yih wuhi h;ii, jo bayaban raen 
majiis ke dariniyan, us uriahte ke, jo 
us bc Sini ke pahir par bola, aur 
hamare bapihUlon ke, satu (ha: usi ko 
zindagj ki kalam mili, ki linu lu 
pilmncha de: 

3fl Par hamai'e Iwipdadon nc us ki 
tabi'dar boni na eliihii, laiki us ko 
radd kiyi, aur un ke dil Mjw ki tami' 
phire: 

40 Aur Hirun se kahi, ki Hamire 
liye aise ma'bt'td barui, jo hamire a^ e 
ige chaleg: kyiinki yih Musi jo 
hamen Misr ku mulk w; nikal laya, 
ham nahin janle ki use kyi hui. 

41 Aur un dinog unhon ne ek 
bachhri ban iya, aur u» but ko tpnbiiii 
charhii, baiki apne hithon k.- i;:lm 
par khushi manik 

42* Tab KhuiU ne phirks unhen 
chhor diyi, ki ismdn ki fauj ko pujen ; 
jaisi ki nabion ki kitab men likhi 
hai, ki Ai briw ke gharanu, kyi Uuu 
ne mujh ku bayabin men ehalin baraa 
zabihe aur nazren cbarbiin? 

43 Tum ne Malik ke khaiuie aur 
apne ma'bud Bamfau ke tire ko, 
ya'ue, im surat»» ko jinheii tum ne 
sijda karne ko baniyi, utui liya -, pas 



main tumben nikalke llabul ke pari 
bauaiingi. 

44 Shahadat ka kiaimu, jaisA Miia& 
se baten-karnenalo ne fanu;iy;i. th;i, ki 
Ua namune ke niuwAfii], jo tfi ne dekh£ 
thi, bani, bayiibati men hamire bip- 
didon ke darniiyan thit. 

45 Usc hamire bapdadc aglon se 
[wko, Yasku' ko aath, un oiiamog ki 
miras leto waqt, jin. ko rjhuda no 
hamarc bapdadon ke wimhne ."e nikal 
diya. Ide; yih hal D&iid ke dinon tak 
raha; 

40 Jib par Khuda ko huzur so fazl 
hi'ia, aur us ne ijazat mangi, ki Ya'qiib 
ku Khudi ko wasto maakan ka thikina. 
dhundho, 

47 Tar Sulaiman nc us ke liye 
makan ban&ya, 

48 Lckin Khuiii Ta'Ala un haikalnn 
men, jo hath se ban e hain, nahin 
ralifca ; chuminebi nabi kabfci hai, ki 

40 Khudawand farnititi. hai, A's- 
min mera takht, aur zamin men pSnw 
ki cbauki hai; tura mere liye kaunsa 
gliar hanaogo? yi kaunsi jagah mere 
aram k i hai ? 

M) Kya more hath ne yo sab diran 
nahin ban&in ? 

51 % Ai aarkasho, aur AU aur kau 
ke iiA-makhtiiuo, tiini har waqt Ki'ih 
i Qudt* ki «a m lini karte b.01 jaiac 
tumhare bdpdade the, waise hi tum 
bhi ho. 

52 Nabion men se kin ko tumhare 
biipdidon no na sataya? ban, unhorj 
ne Ua Ristbaz ke Ane ke khabar-denc- 
waloij ko qatl kiya; jis ke ab tum 
pakarnewale aur khfini huc: 

53 Tum. ne firinhton ke waaile ao 
shari'at pai, par 'amal men na lic. 

54 % We ye baUm sunte hi apne ji 
men kat gaye, aur us par dant ptnifl 
lage. 

r>5 Par wuh Kuli i Quds se ma'mur 
bokcAainaH ki taraf dek h rahi tha>aur 
Khudi ki jalai, aur Yisu' ko Khudi 
ke dahine hath kkara bua dukba, 
162 



A'AMA'L, V 1 1 F. paUhrm karn-d. 

5fi Aur kahi. Deklio, main asmin 
ko khula, aur lhn i A'daru ko Khudi 
ke dahine hath khare dokhti hiin. 

57 Tab unhon no bnre sor so chil- 
lako apne kAn hand kiye, aur ck dil 
boke us par lapke, 

58 Aur (dialir ke hihar nikalko, us 
par patthrAn ktya: aur gawabon M 
apne kapre Si'ilus name ck jaiv.-in fcfl 
panwnn pil rakh diye, 

59 So unhon no Htafanus par 
patthran kiya, jo yih kabko du'a 
mingta tha, ki Ai klmdawand Yisii', 
nieri riib ko «jabal kar. 

60 Fhip wuh gbntnc tekkar 7/.-r m 
pukara, ki Ai Klmda'wand, yih gunab 
un ko hisab men niat rakh. Aur yih 
kahke so gayA. 

VIII BA'U. 

A Uli Sulua us ke qatl par mattsSq 
hiia. Aur ua waqt kalisiyo nar, 
jo Ya rtlsalain men thi, bara zulmhiia; 
aur raadlon ko chhorkar baqi aab 
Yahfidiya aur Saiuariya ki har jagah 
men Ular bitar ho gaye. 

2 Aur dindar mardon nc Stafanue 
ka dafan kiyA, aur ua par bara raatam 
kiya. 

3 Aur Siilus kaiiaiyc ko tabdh karta 
iba, ki ghar ghar ghuske aur mardun 
aur 'auraton ko ghasitkar fjaid meg 
dalta tbi. 

4 Pas ive, jo titar bitar huo the, 
har jagah jake kalim ki khiislikhabori 
dete tbe, 

5 Aur Failbiis Samariya ke ek shabr 
men jako un ke fige Masih ki maniidi 
kartA tbA. 

6 Aur lopirj re un mu'ajiaouko, jii 
Failbua karta t)ia, sunku aur dekhkc, 
ek-dil hokar us ki baton pai ji lagay.-i. 

7 Kytfnki nipik riihen bahuton sc, 
jin par charhi thitj, hari awAz so chil- 
like utar gayirj ; aur bahut matiiij, aur 
langre, cliange kiye gaye. 

S Aur ua sbahr men bari kbuthi 
ML 

9 Ua ke j>able ua shabr meg roha- 



A'AMA'L, V UI, 



Shama'un jadugar H 
ina'un ndmeek shakhs jadugari kari:!, 
nur Samanya ko logoij lt* - « s l«. r i - ; r uk h t. ; i , 
aur yih kahta iba, ki Main kuchli 
hun : 

l'J Aur chboto se l>are tak sab 
ki taraf ruju' lake kahte the, ki Yih 
Klmdd ki haH rmdrat liai. 

11 So w sabab uh k i' taraf rujii' Ide, 
ki uh ne ek muddat *e apui jadisan 
ke waeile se unhen dang kar rakha 
tha. 

12 Par jab wc Failbiis i»r, jo Khn- 
dd ki bdd&hdhat aur Yisa' Masih ke 
iiiiLii l,i khiL^li-kbuhiiri deta tha, yaqin 
Ide, to kya 'aurat, kya mard, sabkon 
ne baplisma liya. 

13 Tab Shama'iin bhi khud iman 
lava : aur baptisma pake Failbus ke 
sath rabi, aur mu'ajize aur bar! ban 
nishanidrj jo Kabir boti thfri dekhke 

dttaa I fia, 

14 Jab rasulon ne jo Yanlsalam 
men the suni, ki Mamariun ne Khuda 
ka kalam qabul kiyii hai, tab tinhon 
ne l'atrus aur Y ilhami a ko un ke pas 
Mir-ja: 

15 Unhon ne jdke un ke liye dn'l 
inangi, ki Ruh i Quds pawen : 

16 (Kyuriki ab tak wuh un men m 
kisfi par nazil ua lini tlii : unhon ne 
rirf Khiidawan.! Yisil' ke ndrn""par 
baptit,ma paya tha.) 

17 Tab unhon ne un par bdth raklic, 
aur unhon ne Ruh i Qnds pai. 

18 Jab Shama'un ne dekhd ki ra- 
.«ulon ke hath rakhne Be Ruh i Quds 
<li jdti hai, to un ke pas naqdi lake, 

19 Kaha, ki Yih ikhtiyar mujhe 
bhi do, ki jia par main hath rakbun 
wuh Ruh i QudB pawe. 

20 Par PatruB ne use kaha, Tere rf- 
piyo ton sath barbad hon, ia liye ki 
tti ne khiydl kiyd, ki Kbuda ki bakh- 
shish rfjpiyun H hftflU hoti hai. 

21 Tera is bat men na bissa hai, na 
hakhra: kyunki terd dd Khuda ke 
dge sidhi nahin. 

22 Pas apni is shardrat se tauba kar, 

163 



bsjd darkliwcUf. 
aur Kbuda ne minnat kar, ki aWyad 
tere dil ka yih kbiyal tujbe um'af h,.. 
L'.'I lu liye ki main dokbta hi'm, ki 
Tu pit ki karwakat, aur badi ke band 
mim giriftdr hai. 

24 Tab Shama'iin ne jawab men 
kakfi, Tum mere liye Khudawand se 
du'd raango, ki jo cdtcn'tum nekahh, 
un men se KOf mujli par na awe 

25 l'liir we gawati! deke, nur Khu- 
ddwand ka kalam sunake, tarfLaalaHi 
ko nkire, aur Sdinarion k( liohut si 
bastion men khuwlikliabari dete gaye. 

2f> Tab Kbudawand ko flrfahte ne 
Failbiis so "kaldm kiyd, aur kaiti, ki 
Uth, aur dakhin taraf us rdh Dftr ia, |o 
Yariisalam bo 'Azah ko, jo bayiban 
men hai, jdti. 

27 Wuh uthke rawaua Li'ia: aur, 
dekho, ek BaMhi khoja, Ilalishic.n ki 
malika Qandaqe ki waalr, jo ub ke 
sare khazane ka mukbtdr tlid, aur 
Y'an'iMalain nwtrj ba.ndagi kanie ko aya 
thd, 

28 Phiriijdtd thd, aur apni rath par 
baithd Yaa'aiydb nabi ki kitab ku 
(liirii rahd thd. 

W Tab Riih ne Failbiis Ba kah;i. 
Nazdft j», aur its rath ke nath ho k'. 

.'50 Pas Failbiis no ustar.n 
use Yas'aiyah nabiki Maajparhtesuni, 
aur kahd, A'yd jo kuchh t"ii pafhtf 
hai samajhtd hai V 

31 Us ne kahd, Yih kis tarah ho 
sake, jab tak kol meri hidayat na kara? 
Tab us ne Failbus Be darkliwast ki, 
ki Une sath lawir ho baithiye. 

32 Uk kitab ki 'ibarat, jo wuli 
parhtd, tha, yih tlii, ki Wuh jaiee bher, 
jise zabh karno ko lc jate hairj, au'r 
jaiso barra, jo apno bdl-kataniowale 
ko Banihne be-zuban hai, usi tarah 
wuh apnd munh nahin kholtd : 

33 Ub ki 'ajis! moa unhon nc ua ne 
insdf uthfi, liyd : aur kami uh ki pusbt 
kd bayan karegd? kyunki zamiu par 
bo us ki jdn uthdi jdti hai. 

34 Khojc n'e Failbus ke jawab men 



6'rtftw rahmat ihihi s« A'AMA' 

kaha, ki M:uii teri miiinat kartA hiin 
k i nabi kis ke haqq men, yih kahid 
hai ¥ kyA apnc, yA kisi dusr» ke haqq 
men ? 

85 Tab Failbi'm nc apni zuban 
kholko uaf nawishie h shurti' kiya, 
aur Yisii' ki kliuslikliauari use <ii. 

36 Aur jAto jAte, rah ke darrniyAn, 
ok pan! par piuiunche : tab khnjo ne 
kahA, ki Dekfi, pdni.ab nmjhe baptis- 
mu pAne m kawi chu rokti Jiai ¥ 

37 Failbiis ne kahA, Agar tii apne 
taindru dil ku imAn Idtd hai, to rawi 
hai, Ub ne jawAb men kalni, Maig 
imAn lAtA luiu, ki Yhtn' Masih KhudA 
kA Beta hai. 

3H Tali us Ee lnikm kiyd, ki raih 
khari karon : aur Failbiis aur khojd 
donon panf men utre : aur us ne us ko 
baptUma diyA. 

39 Jal) wc pani se nikalkc (ipar Ao, 
KhudAwand ki Ruh Failbiis lio le 
gayi, aur klioje ne un ku phir na dekhA, 
aur khusbi se apni rAb ]f. 

40 Tar Failbiis Azotus men mild: 
aur gnzarte hiie sah shahron ntan tab 
tak Qaisariya men nu Aya, khushkhsi- 
bari uetd rah A. 

IX BA'B. 

A UU hanoz Siilus, KhudAwand ke 
shAgirdon kedhamkAneaur qatl 
kurae nit-n dam mArtA Ju'iA, sardar 
kahin ke yabdn gayA, 

2 Aur us M Dimalui ke 'ibAdat- 
khAnon ke liye is rnazrndii ke khatt 
mdnge, ki agar main kisi ko U tariq 

S r pAiin, kyA mard kyA 'aurat use 
ndlike YaruMilaiii men laiin. 

3 Aur jate jAte aisA hiiA, ki jab 
IliinistKj ku nudfk pahunchA, to ek 
bargi Asmdn se ck nur us ke chaugird 
chamka : 

4 Aur wuh 7-amin par gir parA, aur 
uh ne ek fcwi* BUni, JO UM kahti thi, 
Ai Sdlus, Ai Huius, to nmjhe kyi'm 
eatAtd hai 'i 

5 Tab u» ne piichha, Ai KhudA- 
wand, tii kauu hai? KhudAwand ne 

164 



T,, IX. taibhojdtd. 

kuini. Main Yisif htin.jise tii sataUt 
liai ! paiae ki kil par IA t uiainA tere 
liye muBhkil hai. 

6 Ua ne kdmpke aur hairAn liokar 
kahA, Ai KhudAwand, tu kyA ehAhtd 
hai ki main koruii? KhudAwand ne 
use kaliA, U$h, aur shahr men jA, aur 
jo tujhe kornd zarur hai, tujh ae kahA 
jAegA. 

7 Aur weninrd jo uskehamrAh lho 
hairAn khare rah gaye, ki AwAz to 
.siinti', par kisu ko na dekhta the. 

H Aur Sulus zaniin par se nthd; 
aur Ankh kholke kisii ko na <k'kha: 
tab we uu kA hdlh pakarke Dimishfj 

il Aur wuh tin din tak dckh w. 
saka, aur na khdta na pita thd. 

10 U iH ur PimWm TnfinHwHlnljTih 
ndrne ck uhagird thd, aur KhucUwnnd 
ne royA men us se kahA, Ai HanAni- 
yAh. Wuh bolA, Ai Kbudawaml, 
ik'];h, niuiij ba/:ir hiin. 

11 Tab KhudAwand ne use kahA, 
Utu, aur us nnk par, jo Sidbi kalilati 
hai, jd, aur YahudAh ko ghar meg 
•Siilus ndme Tarsijsi ko dhiindh: ki 
dekh, wuh du'A mAugta hai, 

12 Aur us do rnyA men Handniyah 
udine ek mard ko dekhA, jis ne andar 
dke us par hAth rakba, tA ki wuh pblr 
dek b n e lage. 

13 Par HauamyAh no jawdb diyA, 
ki Ai KhudAwand, mairi ne balmion 
hb ifl sliakiis ke iiaq(| nmij sund, ki ns 
ne Yariisalam inon tere rauqaddason 
ke sat.li kaisi badi ki ha : : 

14 Aur yahdrj bhi ua ne sarddr 
kdhinon ki taraf se iklitiydr pAyA, ki 
sab ko jo rerA nAm lete hain, bAndhe. 

15 Par KhudAwand ne use kaha, 
Tu jA : kyunki wuli qautnon, aur had- 
Khdhon, aur bani IsrAel ke &%n mera 
nAm zdbir karno kd ek chund hfid 
wnhihi lini : 

lti Ki main use <likhdunga ki &at 
niere nAm ke liye kalau didih uthina 
aarur hai. 



liu 



Aineas ka AAMA 

17 Tab Handniydh gayd, aur us 
gbar m«Q dakhil hud; aur apne hdth 
tu pm rakhkar fcaua, Ai bhdi Bdhu, 
Khuddwand, ya'ne Yisii' ne, jo tujb 

W ls rda menjis se tii aya, zahir 
la, mujho bnefc hai ki ui phir bina 
pac, aur Ruh i Quds ne bbar jde. 

18 Aur wunhin. misi chhilke ke 
kuchb us ki ankhon sc ^ir para: aur 
wuh usi dam dekhuo laga, aur uthke 
baptisma paya. 

19 Phir kuchh khdke taqat hasil 
ki. Aur Srtlus kai dia I>imishq_Tnen 
Bhagirdog. ko Bath rabd. 

20 Aur fauran 'ibddatkhanon nien 
Masih ki inanadi karne laga, ki wuh 
Khudd kd BetA hai. 

21 Aurwibhuumiwdludang hogayo, 
aur bolo, Kyd yih wuh nabiij hai, jo 
Yarusalam men 'm ndni ke lenuivalon 
ko tabdh kartd - thd, aur yahdri bhi 
irddo par dyd ki un ko bdudhke t 
ddr kahimm ke pas lo jde ? 

22 Lekin Siilua ne aur bhi mazbut 
hoko aur dalilon se sdbit karke ki 
Masih yih hi hai, Yahiidlon ko, jo 
Dimisht] men rahte tho, ghabrd diyd, 

23 ^ Atir jab bahut diu guzre, Ya 
htidton ue us ke qatl ki salah ki: 

24 Aur un ki ghdt Srilua ko ma'lum 
ho gayi. Aur we rdt diu pbdtakon 
par nn raho, ki uao mdr daleii. 

23 Tab shdgirdon ne rdt ko use 
lekar aur ek tokri nien bithdkar di- 
ivdr par se tale'latkd diyd. 

26 Aur Sulus ne Yarusalam men 
[Mlmiirhke koshish ki ki Hha^inhm 
menmiijde: pursabus se rlarte the, k} - 
unkiyaqinna kiydki wuh shagird hai. 
"*27 Magar Barnabds use apuo adth 
rasnlon ke pas le gayd, aur un se 
baydn'kiyd, ki U6 ne" kis tarah roh 
meg Khuddwand ko dukhd, aur ki U: 
no ub se bdten kiri, aur kylinkar wuh 
I)imishq men be-dliarak Yisii' ke ndm 
par kaldm kartd t.hd. 

28 So wuh Yarusalam men un ke 
satli dyd jaya kartd thd ; 



IX. changd hona. 

25) Aur Yisii' ke ndm par dileri se 
kalam kartd thd ; aur Yundiii-md.il 
Yahiidion ke siltli guftogd aur bahs 
bhi kartd thd: aur we U8 ke rffar 
ddlne kedarpai the. 

30 Tab oh di yili malam karke 
use Qaisariya men lo gnye, aur Tareus 
ki taraf us ko rawdua kiyd. 

31 Tab sdre Yahiidiya, aur Jalil, 
aur Samanya ki kalisiyaon 00 dr&iu 
pdya, aur mi ki taraqqi ki gayi, aur 
khuddwand ke khauf metj chalii bui 
lirih i Quds ki tasalli se haj h a i gayin. 

32 f Auraisd hud, ki jab Patrus bar 
kabin phlrta thd, un muaadaason ke 
pds bhi, jo Luddd men rahte the, pa- 
hunehd. 

33 Aur wahdg Aineda ndmo ek 
iliakhs ko pdyd, jo jholo ka mara dth 
baras se chdrpil pai para thd. 

M Patroi ne use kahi, Ai Aiueds, 
Yisii' Masih tujbe cliangd kartd hai ; 
utli, aur apnd bichhaund sajd. "Wuh 
i.i.si dani u t ha. 

35 Tab Luddd aur Sarnu ke sah 
mhnewdle use dokhkar Khuddwand 
ki taraf phire. 

86 1 Aur Ydld men ek sbdgird Td- 
bitbd oatD thi, jis ka tarjuma Harui 
hai; wuh nek kiimon Be aur ktmi nil- 
on se, jo wuh karti thi, mdlamdl thi. 

37 Aur aisd hiia, ki un dinon wuh 
bimdr boke mar gayi, aur unhori ne 
use nahlakar bdlakhaue par rakhd. 

38 Aur is liye'ki Luddd Ydfa ke 
nazdik thd, jab shagirdon ne suni 
ki PatniH wahin hai, us pas do mard 
bhejke darkhwast ki, ki hamdre pas 
dne mtn der ua kar. 

39 Tab PatntH uthke un ke sdth 
obatt. Jab pahunehd, usa bdldkhane 

|par le gaye : aur aab bewden roti liui 
us ke pas d khari hiiln, aur kurte, aur 
kaprc, ju Harui ne, jab tm ke hdth thi, 

Ibanae the, dikhdti thiij. 

' 40 Tab Patrus ne"sab ko bahar 
karke nur ghutnt- tekku du'd mdngi ; 
phir Idsh ki t'aruf mutawajjih hoko 



QttrntUm ka 

kadi, Ai Tabithi, u{b. 

in khen khol din : aur Patrus ko dekb 

ke uth baithi. 

41* Tali us ne hAth barliako use uth- 
Aya, aur rouciftddason aur bewog ko 
buUke uso zinda un ke uupurd kiya, 

4'J Yih sAro Yafa men inashhur ho 
gayi: ME btbutere Khmlawaud par 
i man lae. 

43 Aur yi'in hia, ki wuh kai dia 
tak YAfA men "Skama'iiu n a m dabbdg 
ke yakin rabi. 

X BA'R 
AiSARPYA meri QuraeHi 

me ek mard tbi, jo us paltan 
ki Iti'ilianS knblati thi, siiliadar 



A'AMA'L, X. Patrus ko bulana. 

Tab us nejpahuuclie, Patrus do pabar ke ijarib 



9 



2 Wuh npne s*ro gharine samct 
diudar aur Kkuda-lars tha, aur logoii 
ko babut kkairAt detA, aur nit KkudA 
se du'a mangtA tha. 

3 Us tie c-k ro« lisrc pakar kt: aartb 
rnya m<m wif dokha ki Kkuda ke 
6rishle ne us ke pas andar Ake u» 
kalid. Ai Qurnulius. 

4 TJb no us ko gaur se dekili, aur 
darkc kaba, kl Ai Kliudawiind. kyA 
riai? TJb ne uae kuli A, Teri du'aeri 
aur teri kbair&t yAdgiri ke liye Kkuda 
k» buzik piikunekiii. 

V, Ab YAi'a mrii ddmi bbej ki 
Skama'rin ko, jo PatriM kahlita lini, 
bula lAwcn : 

(j Wuh Shania'un naini; ck dabbag 
ke yakin, jiw ka ghar sauiundar ke 
kinare lini, mihmin hai ; jo kuchk 
karsa tujh par wajib hai, wuh tujk 
ko hiiliega. 

7 Aur iab firislita, jia ne Qurnclius 
sa baten kiri, chala gaya, us ne apne 
naakarog men su do ko, aur un men 
se, \o IH ke yaharj liar waqt ha/ir 
ralikt the, ek diudar sipihi ko bulake, 

3 Aur sab bdten un w bayan kar- 
ke, uririnn Yafa mcri bhejs. 

A 1 Diisre din, jab we rak men 
i kak [&ta the, aur sliakr ke uazdik 
169 



kotke ke upar du'a mau gue gaya: 

10 Aur use bkiikh layi, aur ckihi 
ki kuchh khie : par jab we taiyar 
karte tke, wuh bo-klmdi men pari, 

11 Aur dekha ki Asmiu khul gaya\, 
aur ck ckiz ban ekadar ki minimi, 
jis ke ekaron kone bandhe the, zatmu 
ki taraf lutkai hiii us ke pas utri : 

12 Us men samin ke sab qism ke 
cliirp&ya, aur jangli jAnwar, aur kire 
roakure, aur hawA ke parinde tke. 

13 Aur use ek awii/, ai, ki Ai Pnt- 
nis, uth ; zabh k«r, aur k ha ji. 

14 Patrus ne kaba, Ai Kkuuawand 
bargiz nahin; kyi'inki uiaiii nekabbJ 
kol haram yi napak eh i/, uakiu khdi. 

16 Diisri bar phir use awas; ai, ki 
jis ko Kluida ne pak kiyii hai, tii 
haram ruat kah. 

10 Yib tiu bir kiid ; phir wuh chiz 
asrnan par kkinehi gayf. 

17 Jab Patrus apue dil men kairdn 
tha, ki yih royft, jo main ne dekhi, 
kya hai, to dekho, we mard, jiuheii 
Qurnelius ne bhejd tha, Shama'iin ka 
ghar daryaTt kiyd tlid, aur darwaza 
par dke kkare hde, 

18 Aur pukarke puchhte the, ki 
Sharna'un, jo Patrua kahlatd, yahin 
iniliman hai? 

19 \ Jab Patrus ua roya ke khiydJ 
men thi, Rt5]i ae use kaha, Dekb, thi 
mard tujhe dliiunlhtc hain. 

20 Pas uthke niche ji, aur be- 
kkalke un ke aatli rawdua ho : kyun- 
ki main ne un ko bheja hai. 

21 Tab Patrus ne utarke un mard- 
oq se, jin ko Qurnelius ne us pas 
bhejd thd, kabi, Dekho, jis ko tum 
dliundhte ho, main hi hiin : tum U| 
liye dli lio ? 

22 Unhon ne kabA, Qiu*nelius sft- 
badar ne, jo ristbiz aur Khuditars 
aur YahiiilioTj ki sdri qaum men nek- 
aim hai, pdk Srishte se htikm piya, 
ki tujlio apne ghar bulawe, aur tujh 
sc baten sunc. 



Quntdiu*kd A'AMA'L, X 

23 Tab na no unlie» bliitar buldke 
ira ki mihmani ki. Aur diisri; iin 
Patrus un ku s&th chald, aur kai Vjbai 
Yifa se ua ke, adth ho liye. 

24 Aur dusre roz wo Qaisariya men 
ddkhil hue. Aur Qurnelius apoe 
rishtaddron aur dili doston ko ikat- 
the karke un k( rdh dekhta tha. 

25 Aur aisd bud, ki jab Patrus dd- 
khil kone iaga, Qurnclius us se jd 
i'nild, aur u» ko qadamon par trirke 
sijda kiyd. 

26 Lukin Patrus ne use uthdke ka- 
hd, Khard ho; main bhi b) insan 
b li n. 

27 Aur us bo bdteri kartd andar 
gayd, aur bahuton ko ikatthe pdyd. 

28 Tab us ne un se kahd, Tum jiin- 
m bo ki kyiinkar kisi Yahudi ko be- 
edju n suhbat rakhnS, yd us ke ya- 
han jan.i, rawi nahin ; rnagar Khudd 
ne'mujh par Bibir kiyd, ki main kini 
ddmi ko kannna ya ndpdk na kaln'm. 

29 Ia liye main tumbdrc bulane 
par be-W chald dyd : ab main puchh- 
ta hi'in, ki imijho kis bdt ke liye 
bulaya '/ 

30 Tab Qinnelius ne kabi, Char 
roz b£e ki main no is ghari tak roza 
rakhd : aur tisre pahar ko apne ghar 
men du'd Trjdngtd Lhd, a»r kyd dekh- 
td Tnin, ki ok mard liarrdq posbdk 
pahtne mere sdmhne khard bai. 

31 Tab ua ne kahd, Ai tjurnelius, 
teri du'd Buni gayi, aur teri khairdt 
Khudd ke hiwur yad hi'ii. 
' 32 Ab kisi ko'Ydft men bhej, aur 

SliainaYm ko, jo Patrus kauldtd hai, 
yahdn buld ; wuh Shama'un liubbdg 
ke yahdn, jis kd ghar sainundnr ke 
kindrc hai, rnihnidn hai : wuh dke 
tujh se kalam karegd. 

;;:; Is liye u*i dam main no tere _ 
bheji; tii iic khiib kiyd, jo dyi. Ab 
ham nb Khudd ke age basir hain, td 
ki jo kuchh. Khudd ne tujhe farnidya 
bai, suuerj. 

34 ■. Tab Putrus no zuban kholkc|bakh5msh jari nol 
167 ' 



Fatnis ko b'ihi bhrj'ia, 
kabi, Ab mujhe yaqin hua ki Khuda 
zahir par nazar nabiu kartd : 

35 Baiki bar quun HM&, jo na se 
dnrtd, aur rdstbdzi kartd, uh ko pasand 
dtd hai. 

36 Yih wuh! kalam hai, jo us ne 
bani Israel ke pds bheja, jab Yisii' 
Masih ki ma'rifat, (jo sabliuti kdKhu- 
ddwand hai.) sulh ki khuslikhabari 
detd thd. 

37 Tum is kalam ko jauto bn, Jo 
ba'd us ke ki Ynhannd ne bsptiama 
ki manddi ki thi, tamam Yahiidiya 
meg, Jali l «« shuui' karke, isbtihdr 
kiyd gayd ; 

38 Ki kis tarah Kbuda ne Yisii' 
Ndsari ko Ruh i Qu'"Ih aur ijudi-at sa 
maniRuh kiyd; wub neki kartd, aur 

sab ko, jo Shailan ki^ liatli ^o aulm 
utbiito tliu, ohangi kartd phird ; kyiin- 
ki Khudd us ke sdth thd. 

Aur ham uu sab kdtnon ke, jo us 
ne Ythudion ke mulk Yartisalam mon 
kiye, gawdii hain; us ko unbon ne 
kdth par latkake mdr (Idld : 

40 TJs ko Khudd ne tisre din iit.hdyi, 
aur use zdhir hono diyd ; 

41 Sdri qaum p;ir iiiiliin, baiki un 
gawdliim par, ki dge se Khudd ke 
chune huethe, ya'ne, ham par, jiahoj) 
ne, TU ku murdon men wt jt utbno ke 
ba'd, us ke sdtli khdya aur piyA. 

42 Aur uh uo hameii hukm diyd,ki 
logon men manddi karo, aur gawdhi 
do ki yih wubi hai, jo Khuda ki taraf 
se muqarrar bna, ki ssindofi aur mur- 
don kd insaf karriewdld ho, 

43 Sab nabi ua par gawdhi dete 
hain, ki jo koi us par imdn ldwe, un 
ko ndm se apne gnndbon ki mu'ati 
pdwe. 

44 T Patrus yo bdten kali ralid 
thd, ki Ri'ih i Quds un sab par jo kalam 
mute the. mi/j) bui. 

45 Aur makhttin imanddr, jitne 
Patrus ko sdth'dc the, hairdn hiie ki 
gair-qauniOT} par bhi U uh i Qud3 ki 



I'atrus kd A'^ 

4(3 Kyunki unhen tarah tarah ki 
inili huile, aur Klmdd ki bardi karte 
suhu. Tab l'atnia ne phir kahd, 

■17 Kyd koi pani ko rok saktd ha 
ki ye, jinhon ne harnaii tarah Ruh 
Qmis pai, baptisma oa jidwen ? 

■H Tab us ne hukm diya, ki we 

Kiniduwund ke n ani jwir baptisma 

pdwen. Tuli unbon ne us Be dar- 

kliwast ki, ki kuclih din wahau ruko. 

XI J UU. 

AU K raaulon .iur bhdion ne jo Ya- 
bidiya mim the, aumi ki 
gKitvffitamofl ue bhi Khudii kd kalam 
qubul k iya. 

2 Aur jab Patruu Yanisalam men 
dyd, to inakhtun us so bahs karut; 
lage, 

3 Aur kahd, ki Tti nd-raakhtiinoii 
ke pas j^aya, aur un ke sdth khaya. 

■1 Tab Patrus ne «huni' se «Usus ke 
sitli uti *u bayan kiyi, aur kaha, ki 

o Jab main Yafd kesliuhr men du'd 
mang raba tba, ho-khudi men ake ek 
rovd deklii, ki «k chiK jaiae hari cha- 
dor, jU ke diaron kono dsmdn se latkde 
luio tho, utarke mujh tak di. 

G Jab main ne khub dekhke gnur 
kiya, i;ib /uiiiiu ko chdrpdye, aur 
jiingli janwar, aur kire makore, aur 
hawa ke parinde, ub men dekhe. 

7 Aur main ue ek iiwa/. .suni, ki 
tnujhi- kahti hai.Ai Patru», uth ; zabh 
ku, aur kha. 

y Tab main bola, Ai Khuddwand, 
bargiz naluri ; kyunki kabid kol haram 
ya mipiik ehiz mere uiuijh men u 
gayi. 

1) Tab jawab men di'wi bdr dsmau 
se mujhe awai di, ki Jiwe Khudd n(> 
pak kiyd, tii haram niat kab. 

10 Yih tin bdr hiiu : phir sab kuchh 
asinin ki taraf khincha gaya. 

1L Aur, dekho, usi dam iiu adnii, jo 
Oaisariym bu mere pas bheje gaye, us 
afaai ke pilu, jis rnen main tba, khare 
the. 

12 Aur Ruh ne mujh ae kaha, ki 
168 



'L, XT. 'tur iurwi. 

Tii be-kliatke ua ke B.ith ja. Chuniiu- 
chi ye chha bhai mere sath chide, aur 
ham us shakhs ku gliar men dakliii 
htie: 

13 Aur ua ne ham ae bayan kiya. 
ki kis taruh tk tirishte ko apno o;3 1 n i 
men khara dckhtl, jis ne tae kaha, ki 
Yafa metj ddmi bhej, aur Shama'un 
ko, jiB kd Iaimb Patrus hai, bulwa ; 

14 W u h tujhe we bdton kabega, jin 
ae td aur tera «drd ghar najat pnrega, 

15 Jah maiij kalam kurne laga, 
llub i Quds un par u:'wil lu'ii, JaiH 
pahlo ham par. 

18 Tab inujriu Khu^awaml ki bal 
yad di, jo ua ne kabi, Yiihaiina tM to 
pani ae baptisma rliya, par t uni rttili i 
Quds se baptisma pdogo. 

17 Pasjabki Khudane uii ko waisi 
ni'amat di.jaifi ham ka Jo Kliuddwand 
Yisii' Masih par iman Ide, to main 
kaun tlid ki Kbuda ko rok saktd ? 

18 We yih tmnkar uhup rahe, t\m 
Khudd ki ta'rifkarke kahd, Beslmkk 
Khudii ne gair-qaumon ko bhi zmdat;i 
ke liye tauba bakhshi hai. 

10 t Pm w «i W ns jaur o jafd se ju 
ki Stelamu ke Mttab mt$6 hui thi'n, 
clilutar bitar lio gaye lho, pblrte jiliirii 
Fiafiu Kupi-ua o Antakiy.i. men pa- 
hunche, magar Yahiidion ku aiwa kisi 
ku kalam na sundte the. 

) Aur un men se kai ek Euprusi 
Qureni the, jinhon no Antdkiya 
men ake Yuiidin-nia.il Yahudion «e 
biii biileii kiri, aur Klmdawand YisiV 
ki khushkbabari aundi, 

1 Aur Kbuddwaiid ka hdtli un ko 
saLli tba ; aur bahu t se log jo iman Ide 
Khuddwand ki taraf plure. 

22 \ Tab un logon ki khabar Ya- 
rusalam ki kalisiyo ke kau meo 
pahunchi; aur unhoij ue Barnabaa ko 
bhejd, ki Antdkiyd tak jde. 

'j;i VVuh pahunidike, aur Khudd ka 
fazl dekhke, khusb hud, aur un sab ko 

;iliat, ki, ki Dil ki ma/.buti ke sdth 
Kliuddwam.l .se Uigo raho. 



Aut^kii/i. m- n Injil suudnd. A'AMA' 

2-i Kyugki wuh nek rnard tha, aur' 

Itiih t Quds aur Unta n bhari i ftorek 

bari guruh Khudawand ki taraf rujii' 

m. 

25 Tab Baraabaa StUtis ki talash 
men Tarsus ko chala : 

2<> Aur «e pake Antikiyi men 
laya. Alir aisa hfia, ki we sil bhar 
kalisiye mag sbamil lini karte, aur 
bahut loffog ko sikhiya karte the. 
Aur pahle Aotikiya" nieri shigird 
Kristian kuhlao. 

27 1 Uuhin dinon kai ck nabi Ya- 
rusalani se Antikiya uien ae. 

28 Aur iitiincij Hc,ek ne.jia kandm 
Agabus tha, k hara hoke lltih ki hida- 
yat ae zahir kiyil, ki tamani niamlnkiil. 
umii bara kal paroga-, jo Qhudiua Qaiaar 
ke waqt men waqi' hiii. 

29 Tuh shigiraon mes se har ck ne 
thanfi ki apiie rnaqdur ke inuwalii) uu 
bbaion k i' khidmat men, jo Yahtidiya 
nien rahte the, kuehh bhejft 

30 So utiliun ne yih kiya, aur B&r> 
nabas aur Hulus ku hith buzurgon ke 
p&B biu'ja. 

XII BA'B. 

AURun dinon Herodls badsbah ne 
kaliaiye men so ba'zon jiar hith 
rtilu, ki unlien aatiwe. 

2 Aur Yiihiuinako bhai Ya'ipib ko 
tatwar se mir d Al A. 

3 Aur jub lickhi ki Yahiidion ko 
yih puma ay.-i, to aur bhi ziyoduli ki, 
ki Patrus ko bhi pakar HyA. (Yih be- 
khamiri roti ke dinon meg hui.) 

4 Aur us ko pakarke qaid-kliain i 
men dalA, aur char cb'ar sipabioa ke 

tilire men sompa, ki us ki nigahbaiu 
aren, aur chilii ki Fa&ah ke ba'd 
use logon ke satnhne le jie. 

5 Pas (pii ' ' ' 
:iigahbiirii hoti'tlii 



tar kalisiya us ke 



5 Pas qaiil-kliaiiu incii Patrus ki 
: jiar i 
Uy<3 uit Khuda uu du'A mungil karti 
thi. 

U Aur jab Herodis ne use hAzir 
karne chaha, ari rit, Patrus, do /.aii- 
:■•■] .-- Ii.iiulliii, do sipahion ke bich 
169 



'L, XII. Tlerutlis 'J'sdion ko sat<ifti. 
mcu soli tha; aur chankiwAlo darwAze 
par qaid-khAne ki cluuiki kar ralio 
the. 

7 Aur, dekho, Khudawand ki ek 
firishta A khara hua, aur as makan 
men mlr chnmka, aur us uc Patrus ki 
pasli par marke jagiyA, aur kahA, ki 
Jald uth. Tab zanjiren us ko hathon 
se gir gayin, 

H Aur us tirishee ne uee kalni, ki 
Kiimar bandl), mr apni jiiti pahin. Os 
ue yimhin kiya. l'liir uaneuac kaha, 
Apna kurhi pahin, aur mere pielihe 
lu» lc. 

9 Wuh nikalkc us ke pichho lio 
liya; par na jarni ki yih, jo firilhta m" 
hi'iii, BBOrj hai; baiki tfamjhd ki roya 
il.-liiilii hl'ih. 

10 Tab we pahle aur dilsro pahra 
men se nikalko luiie ke phatak tak, Jo 
shabr ki taraf hai, pahunehe ; wuh ip 
se iip un ko liyo khul [jaya; so wa 
nikalko ek gali se guzar gaye; aur usi 
dani firiahta uh ke pas so chalA gaya. 

11 Tab Patrus ne hosh men Ako 
kahd, Ab main ue sach jana ki Kbu- 
diwand ne apnd firiahta bhejd, nur 
mtijhe Herodia ke hatii, aur Yahudi 
ipiura ki siiri tak se, baciia liya. 

12 Aur tab yih sanijhii tha, tab Yil- 
linuna, jis ka laqab M»rqns hai, us ki 
ma Mariyam ke ghar aya ; wahan 
bahut log jaiu'a hiie, aur dii'ti maug 
nilu' the. 

13 Jab Patrus phatak ki kliirki 
khatkhutata Lhd, Rotlu namo ekchhok- 
ti ai, ki chupke sune. 

14 Aur Pulrus ki iiw;i/. nfcoh&ake 
maro khttflbi ku phatak im khola, par 
daurke aodar khabar di, ki Patrus 
phatak par kburi hai. 

16 Tab unlion ne use kaha, Tii 
diwAni hai, Par wuh apni bit par 
(piini riilii, ki yiin hi hai. Tab unlion 
ue kahi, Us ki firiahta hoga. 

Hi Magur I'atnis khiilkiialiiti rabi: 
j tab uuiiou no darwa/.a kholke UB ko 
[dekhi, aur dang ho gayet 



Pilus o Bantalan ka A' AM A' 

17 Us iif unheg hdth se. ishara 
kiyd, ki chup raben, aur un se bayan 
kiyd, ki Khuddwand kis tarah lis ko 
.|a"id-khane ae bahar !dyd. Phir kaba, 
ki Ya'qub aur bhdlon ko is bdt ki 
khabar do. Aur wuh a? bahar jake 
.h'isri jagah clia.a gayd. 

ia Jab sul)h bdi, nipah! babut 
ghabrde, ki l'atrus kyd Ima. 

19 Jab Ilcrodis ne ua ki talasb 
karke ua paya, to chaukidaron ki 
tahqiqdt kf, aur hukrn kiyd, ki lc jake 
unhe.ii jin so maro. Aur dp Yahudiya 
M riiwaua hoke Qaisariya men jd 
rahd. 

20 T -Aur Herodis Sfir o Saidd ke 
logorj kc nibdyat nd-klmsh tha: tab 
we ck-dil hoke ua ke pas ae, aur 
Blastus ko,io badshdh ki khwdbgdli 
kd nazir tha, mildke sulh chdhi; 
kyiirjki un ke mulk ko bddahdh ko 
miilk se asbab i ma'aah muyassar ate 
the. 

21 Tab Herodis ek din thahrdke 
aur bddsliahi poshak pahinke takht 
par baitlia, aur un se kaldin karnc 
lagd. 

22 Tab log chillane lage, ki Yih 
Khuda ki dwdz hai, insan ki nahin. 
' 23 Ubi dam Khudi ke. fnishte ne 

use mdi'i, kyuijki us ae Khudd ki 
Luzurgi ua ki; aur wuh kire parke 
iuar gaya. 
"\ 1 Pa 



24 J Par Khudi ka kalam barhd, 
ai» phaili. 

25 Aur Barnahas aur Stflua apni 
khidmat puri karke, aur Yiihaund ko, 
jis ki laqab Marqus hai, fcit.li Lekfl, 
Yarusalam se phire. 

XIII BA'B. 

AUR Antakiya ki kalisiye men kai 
nabi aur muallim the; ya'ne, 
Barnabda, aur Sharaa'lia, jo Nigar 
kahldtd hai, aur Ltyioa Qureni, aur 
Mauden, jo chauthdi ke hdkiin Herodis 
ke sdth pald thi, aur Sdlus. 

2 Jab we Khuddwand ki bandagi 
170 



L, XIII. agya.r pa* jami. 

karte, aur roaa rakhte the, Biih i 
Quds ne kaha, Merc liye Bamabas aur 
Siilus ko akg karo, us kini ke liye 
jia ke wdsto main ne unhen buldyd. 

3 Tab unhon^ne rona rakhke, aur 
du'd mdn.gke, un ]xir hdth raklic, aur 
unhen nikhsar. kiya. 

i f Pas wo ltiih i Quds ke bheje 
hfle Sildkiyd ko gaye; aur wabiu se 
juhaz par Kuprus ko chale. 

5 Aur uuhrn ne, jab ki Snlamis 
men the, Yahndioii ke 'ibddat-khdnon 
men Khudd kd kalam suudyd; aur 
Ytihannd un kd khddim tiid. 

6 Aur ua tainiin tapu inen Pdfus 
tak sair karke unhorj ne ok Yahi'idi 
jddugar aur jhdthe nabi ko, jis kd udm 
Bar-Yisu' thi, p'iyd : 

7 Wuh Sri ha ko Snrjius Pulus ke 
sdth tha, jo saMb i tamiz thd; us ne 
BttBabJB aur Siilus ko buldke chdhd 
ki Kliuda kd kaldm sune: 

8* Par Windu jddugar ne, (ki yibi 
ua ke nam ka tarjuma hai,) un ki 
barkhildfi ki, aur chdhd ki Sdba ko 
[mu Be phor de. 

Tab fidius, ya'ne, Pulus ne Pub 
i Quds se bhar jdkc use ghurakke 

10 Kahd, Ai Shaitdn ke l'arz.and, 
hi j., tamani nmkkdri aur 'aiydri H 
bliara, aur B*b Uirah ki rasti kd dusb- 
man hai, kyd Khuddwaud ki sidhi 
rihog ko terhi karna na chhoregd? 

lf Ab,'d'ekh, Kliuddwand kd hath 
tfljjh par h*L aur'td n.ndhd ho jd<'ga, 
aur muddat tak sdmj ko na dekbega. 
Wunhiij dhundhldpan aur andherd us 
iiar chhd gayd; aur dhiiiidlud phira, 
ki koi us kd hath pakarke 16 chale. 

12 Tab Siiba yih rudjard dekhkfl 
Khudawand kl ta'lim se dang hokar 
i mau Idyi. 

13 Ah Ptllus aur ub ke sdihi Pafus 
se jaha« kholke Pamfiiliya ke Pargi 
men ae : aur Ynhaiind un se judi 
hokar Yanisalam ko phird. 

H t Aur we Pargd se guzarke 
l'isidiya ke Antdkiyd men pahunehe, 



Putus Pmdiya ke Antakiya A'AMAX, XIII. 
nur sabt ke di» 'ibddat-kbdne men ja 
haitho. 

15 Aur tauret aur iiabiim ki kitab 
ke parhne ke ba'd 'iMdat-khdne ke 
sardaruii ne unhen, kahlA bhejA, ki Ai 
bhiio, agar kuchh nasihat ki bit logon 
ko liye rakhtu ho, to bayan k&ro. 

16 Tab PultM khara hiia, aur hdth 
se ishAra karke kahA* Ai Israelio, aur 
ai Khuda-tarso, u u mi, 

1*7 Ih qaurn i Israel ke Khudd ne 
liamare bdpdadon ko chund, aur is 
qaum ko, jab Miar ke mulk men 
pardesi thi, barhdyi, aur /.abnrdast 
hdth se mihen wahdn se nikdl IdyA. 

18 Aur baras cballs ok wuli ba- 
yAbdn men uii ko dai ki tarah liye 
phirA, 

19 Aur Kau'an ki saraamtn men 
■fU aanmofl ko haldk kiyd, aur un ka 
mulk qur'a se unhen baut diyd. 

20 Aur ba'd ub ke, adrhe onar sau 
buru ke qarib, Sami'iel iiabi tak, uu 
men q&rf in.uqa.rnar kiye. 

21 Ub WM}t se unhon lio badsh&h 
chaha: tab Khudd ne ek mani, 
Hinyamm ku ghardne se, Qis ke bete 
Sdiil ko, obalis baras tak uu 
muqarrar kiya, 

22 Phir uae utdrke Daiid ko kb 
kiya, ki «n ka bddskdh ho : aur ub 
jawabi men. kaha, ki Main ne ek 
roard Yassi ke bet* Daud ko apue dil 
ke mnwAfiq pAyA; wuhi merf 
khwahisheij puri karega. 

23 Uai ki nasi se Khuda no, apne 
wa'de ke muw4flq, Israel ke liye Najdt- 
denewale Yiai'i' ko uthaya : 

24 Jis ke Auo so Age Yuhannd M 
total ki tamam qaum ke darmiyan 
tauba ke baptisma ki man&di ki, 

25 Aur jab Yubannd apna danra 
piird karno par thd, uh ne kahA, Tuin 
mujhe kaun samajhte ho V Main wuh 
nuliin hiin; baiki, dekho, wuh 
ba'd ala bai, jis ko panwon. ki jiiti 
main kholuo ke laiq nahin hiin, 

26 Ai bhiio, Abirahdra ko khandAn 



men Injil sutiata. 



171 



ke farzando, aur timi meg se jit-ne 
Khuda so darte ho, tuiuhare liye ia 
najdt kd kalam bheja gaya. 

27 Kyilnki Yar&aalam ke bAshind- 
on aur un ke Barddrnn ne, nso, aur 
nabion ki bdterj, jo iiar sabt ko parhi 
jati hain, na jAnke ua par fatwa dene 
se un ko piird kiya. 

Agarchi ua ke qatl ki koi wajh 
i, tau bhi Pildtus se darkhwast 
ki ki use mAr dAIe. 

29 Aur jab sab kuchh, jo us ko 
hai)'] un ij liklid tliA, piird kar chuke, 
t o use kath par se utdrke uabr men 
rak h d. 

30 Lekiu Kliuda ne uae murdon 
men se u^hAyA : 

31 Aur wuh bahut din un ko, jo 
ub ke sath Jalil se Yarusalnm men ie 
the, dikbai diya ; we M logon ke age 
us ke gaw&h haiu. 

32 Aur ham tum ko khuslikhabari 
dete hain, ki un wa'de ko, jo bapdadori 
se kiyd gayd tba, 

33 Khuda ne hainaro liye, jo un ki 
auldd hain, bilkull piird kiyd, ki Yisii' 
ko phir jildyd ; chundnclii inare Zabiir 
men likhd hai, ki Tii merd Betd hai, 
aj lii mai|i terd bdp hua. 

34 Aur is ki bdbat, ki us no ubc 
murdon men se uthaya, la ki ba'd us 
ke na sare, ydn kahd, ki Main DAiid 
ki pak aiir sachchi ni'aiiiaten tiunherj 
ddngd. 

35 Is liyo wuh dusri jagah bhi 
kahtd hai, ki Tu apne Quddns ko 
sarno ki hdlat dekhne na degd. 

36 Kyunki T)dud U) apne waqt men 
Khudd ki mar?,! bajd Idke ao gaya, aur 
apne bdpdddon se jd mild, aur sarne 
ki hdlat dekhi j 

37 Par yih, jisu Kliudd ne uthityd, 
sanie ki hdlat nahin dekhi. 

88 lf Paa, ai bhAio, yih tumhon 
ma'liim ho jdwe, ki usi ke wasilo tum 
ko gunahon kl mu'Afi ki khabar di 
jdti hai : 

39 Baiki ubi so har ek jo imdn laid, 



PtUvi aur Jtarnnbds A'AMA'L, XIV 

un sal) biton se, jin se tum M risi ki 
>li;»ri'.ii. k o r\\ se be-gunih uahin 
tkahar sakte the, bt-gundh thahartd. 

40 Pas kbahnnbir rftho, aisd na ho 
ki jo nnbion ki kitab men likha hai 
tua par dwe ; ki 

41 Ai tahqir kamewalo, dekho, aur 
ta'ajjub karo, »nr nest ho jio ; kyunki 
main tumhdre zamani; nii'ii ek kam 
kartd lniFj. aisi kam, ki koi tum H 
kaisd lii baydu karegi, tum kabin 
yanin na karwre. 

42 Jab Yahudi 'iMdotkhane ke 
biliar jite tho, gair-qaumon ue un se 
darkbwaat ki, ki y« batuu aglo sabt 
ko uu bc kahi jdcn. 

43 Jab majlifl uth gayi. babut 
Yahudi aur murid Khudi-parast Pul us 
aur Hama bda ke piclihe cliale: unhon 
iig uu bc kalam karke targib di, ki 
Khudd ki iii'amnt par qaim raheu. 

4.4 1 Dnare sabt ko qaril> s&h 
shahr ko log ikattbe hio, ki Khudd 
ki kaliin suneu. 

45 M agar itni hhlr dekhke Yahudi 
ddh se bhar gaye, aur kbikif kalue, 
aur kufr bakt.chue, Pulus ki bdtcn se 
niukhfthifat ki. 

46 Tab Pulus aur Barnaba* nitlar 
hoko bolo, ki Zarur lini ki K hudd ka 
kalam pahle tumhen aunayajae; bkin 
j i.--, baiki tumne ua ko radd kiya, aur 
ap ko hameaba ki zindagi ko liiq ua 
«anijlii, to dekbo, ham phirke gair- 
iiaumon ki taraf mufawajjih hote ha m. 

47 Kyunki Kliiidiiwanil ue yunhiij 
hanieo hukm diyd, ki Main ue tujh 
ko gair-qaumon ka nur muqarrar kiya, 
ta ki dunya ki intihi tak najiit kii 
ba'is b o. 

48 Tab gair-qaumen in balon ko 
sunke k bus h huin, aur Khuda ko ka- 
lam ki ta'rii' kamc lagin : aur jitne 
bamesba ki ziuda«i ke liyo taiyar kiye 
gaye the, i min Ide. 

49 Aur Khudi ki kalam ua tamani 
mulk men pliaila. 

50 Par Yahiidion ne Khudd-parast 

172 



Iquiiivm w:t± <i!e. 
aur 'i//.arwdli 'aurat'm aur shahr ko 
raison ko ubhari, aur Pulus aur Barna- 
bas par fasad utliayi, aur unhen apni 
surbuddnn H nikal diyi. 

5L Tab wc apne panwori ki klnik 
un par jhdrke Iqunitim men ie. 

52 Aur sh&gird khuahi aur Riili i 
Quds ae bliar gaye. 

XIV BA'B. 

AUR Iqrmii.nu mari yuti ht'id, ki ive 
ek sith Yabudion ke 'ibidat- 
kbiiim nii'n gaye, aur aisc taur par k;i- 
Idm kiya, ki Yahiidion aur Yi'minioii 
ki ek bad jama'al iman lai. 

2 Par un Yahiidion ne, jo iman na 
lae the, gair-qaumon ko ubhara, aur 
un ke dil L'liaiuii ki taraf bad kar diyc. 

3 Is liyo WO bahut diu wiihin nilir, 
aur Khudawand ki bdba: be-dharak 
kalimkarte the; wuh apno fazl ki "bal. 
par gawAbJ deti, aur un ko bitbon 
se niahdnidn aur achambbc dikhata 
rahi. 

4 Aur shahr ko \o#m mcn phi'it 
puri : ha'ze Yahiidion ki, aur ba'ze 
raaiilrm ki taraf ho gaye. 

Par jab gair-qaumwakm aur Ya- 
hiidion Tiu iijine BBttMsoB samet fasad 
uthiyi, ki unhen be-'izzat aur un par 
jinUhrau kareij, 

Wt y ih ma'liiin karke Luqiuniya 
ke shahr Lustri aur Darbo aur un k<: 
isy&s ke mulk nien libage; 

7 Aur wahaii Injil sunate rahe. 

8 )j Aur Luatra men ek shftkha, jis 
ke panwon meD taqat na thi, baitba 
thi : wuh apni mi ke pet hi se lunja 
thd, aur kabhi na chali ; 

9 U» ne Piilue ko biten karte suni; 
jis ne ua ki taraf gaur se dekhke, aur 
darydt't karke ki us merj imin hai ki 
changi howe, 

10 Bari iwiz se kabi, ki Apnc pdu- 
>n par 6ldhi khard bo; wuh uclihai- 

ke chalne laga. 

11 Logon ne yih, jo Pulus ne kiyd 
thd, dekhke, awa/. buland karke, Lu- 



Wuhdn ke Tahudi A' A 

i|imuiya ki boli men katul, Dewte fiil m t 
ke bL«B men ha.ui }«r utre haig. 

12 Aur unhotj ne Baraabaa ko Zeus 
kaha, aur l'iilus kn Harmes, is liye ki 
wuh kalam men tahui karta thd. 

13 Aur Zeij*, jo ki un ke shahr ke 
saroline tM, na ke pujari ne, bati aur 
ph u Ion ke bar phatakon. par lake 
iogonke sat.Ii cbaria ki ciurbani karcn. 

14 Jali ilarnabas aur Pulus rasillon 
no yih suni, to apne. kapre phsrc, aur 
logon ko bicb men kiide, yih chillake, 

15 Aurkahkc,ki Ai mardo, tum yih 
kya kaiti ho? Ham bhi insan hain, 
aur tatahan tarah hawass rakhtc, aur 
timihoii Injil Hunite hain, ti ki in IjA- 
tiloii se kln&ra karke zinda. Khuda ki 
taraf phiro, jis ne asomu, aur zauiin, 
aur samutidar, aur jo kuchh im men 
lini, patdd kiya .- 

16 Uh MC agle zamAne mog sab 
fiaumon ku dibor diya, ki apiii apni 
rah par chalen, 

17 Tis par bhi ua tie ihsan kuras, 
aur asmin ae haroare liye paiii barsane, 
aur mewon ki i'aslen ]iaiua karne, aur 
haindrc dikm ko khiuak aur khushi 
se bhar do u c se ap ko be-gawali ua 
chhori. 

18 Aur ye batcn kakke logon ko 
bari musbMI nc baV. raklia, ki un ko 
ipiriiiiii na charhawep.. 

19 f Aur Ynhiidlon. ae AntAkiya 
aur Iqunimn bc Ake, aur logon ko mall 
karke, Pulus ko sangsAr kiya, aur yih 
BHHJhke ki wuh niar gaya, use shahr 
ke bahar ghasit 'c gaye. 

20 Par jab tdiagird ua ki gird o pesh 
ikatthe luie, wuh u^hko shahr men 
aya ; aur dusrc din Barnabas ke satli 
Darbe ko chala gaya. 

21 Aur us shahr men Injil sunake, 
aur bahut se ahAgird karke, LusItA aur 
Ifjiinium aur Autakiya ko phire. 

22 Aur ahagirdon ke dilon ko taq- 
irlyat data, aur nasihat karte tbe, ki 
iman pir qaim rako, aur kaha, Zarur 
hai ki haru bahut rausihaten sah k e 

173 



L, XV, ijdl, at/at&d ii'Jidt-. 

Khuda ki badsbabat men dakhil 
hou. 

2. r ! Aur tinhou ne har ek kalisiye 
men un kr liye buaurgon ko muijarrar 
karke, aur roza ke aath du'i roangke, 
unhetj Khudawaiul ko, jis par iman 
Ide the, BompA 

24 Aur Pisidiya ao guKarke PaTTi- 
fuliya mag pahunohe. 

25 Aur Parga men kaMia sunA"ku 
Attaliya ko gaye : 

2li Aur wahan se jahA?, par charb- 
ke AntikiyA rnon ae, jahan ae U3 kam 
ke liye, jo unhog ne ab pura kiya, 
Khuda ke fiizl par aompa gaye the. 

27 Aur unhori ne pahunehke kali- 
atvc ku ikatlhe kiya, aur sab kuchh jo 
Khuda ne un ke siath kiya, auT yili k i 
us ne gair-qnumon ke liye iman ka 
darwaza khol.i, bayan kiya. 

28 Aur we ^li;igi'.dorj ke sath wahan 
bahut din ralie. 

XV BA'B. 

AU B \m'xe Yahudiya se ake bhaion 
ko ta'Hm dpne lage, ki Agar 
MdsA ki sunnat ke muwafiq turuhira 
khatna na ho, to tum tiajdt nahiii pa 
sakte. 

2 Pas jab Piilus aur Barnahaa se un 
" bahut takrir o balu lidi rlii, 

to unhon ne yih thahrAyd ki Piilus 
aur Barnabas, aur un men se chand 
aur iog, la ki tahqiq ke liye, rasiilog 
aur buzurgon ke pas Yarusakin men 
jaen. 

3 So we kali«iye se kuchh dur pa- 
huuchae jake Eair-qaumon ke rujiV 
laue ka bayan Karte hi'ie Finike aur 
S&mariya se gii7,re. Aur sab bh&fojj 
ko bahut khush kiy.i, 

i Aur jab Yariisalam nien pahunehe, 
kalisiye aur rastUon aur buzurgon ne 
un ko qabul kiya, aur unhon ne, jo 
luirhli Khuda ne un ke sath kiya tha, 
hayau kiva, 

S Tab Parisiog ke nrqe mes se **" 
'zon ne, jo iman Ide the, uthke kaha, 
ki Un ka khatua kuniii, aur Musa ki 



Agy&r ke khatna ki babat 

shai i'at par ckalne ka hukm deud,zarur 

hai. 

G ^ Tab rasul aur buzurgjam'ahue, 
ki ia bdt ko sochen. 

7 Aurjabbiiri bahs hiii, Parru3 ne 
khard hoku un se kahA, Ai bhAio, tum 
jantii ho ki baUut diri hrio ki Khudd 
ne haru men. se mujhc ctumd, ki gair- 
ciaunieri mcri zuhdn se Injil ki bit 
suneg, aur imdn lAwen. 

8 Aur Khudd nc.jodilki jdntdhai, 
un par gawahi di, ki un ko bhi hanidri 
tarah Kiih i Quds di ; 

9 Aur iman se un ki dil pak karke 
ham raen aur un men kuchh farq na 
rokha, 

10 Tas ab tum kyiin Khuda ko dz- 
mate ho, ki ahAgirdon ki gardan par 
jua rakhe, jis ka na hanidre bdpddde 
na hain uthfi sakte tbc ? 

11 Aur h ani ko yaqfn hai k i ban 
Klnulawand Tim' Masih ke fazl sb 
liojdt p&weoge, aur uni tarah se we bbf 
pdwengo. 

12 T Tab adri jamd'ftt chup rahi, 
aur Barnabaa aur Pfilus se yih bayAn 
aunne lap, ki Khuda ne kaiai nisha- 
nian aur kardmaten un ke waailo 
gair-qauinon men zdhir kin. 

13 T" Jab we khAmoah hiie, Ya'qub 
kalme lagd, Ai bhdio, mati Huno ; 

14 Shama'im nc bayan kiyd hai, ki 
kis tarah Khudd nopahiegair tytumi :j 
par nigdh ki, ki un men se ek guroh 
apne nam ke liyc chun le ; 

15 Aur ia ae nabion ki baten inilti 
hain : chunanehi likhd bai, ki 

16 Ba'd is ke main phir Alingi, aur 
DAdd ke gire hiie dera ko uthAungA : 
aur U6 ku trite phute ki maraniuiat 
karke use phir k hari kariingi: 

17 Ki log kA bauiya, aur aab gair- 
OKimaft, Jo mere niin ki kahlili hain, 
Khudiiwund ko dhumlhcii. Khuda- 
wand, jo yih Bab kuchh kartd, aisA 
fani'ldl : i hai. 

18 KhudA ko dunyd ke aburu' se 
apne sab kdm nia'lum hain. 

174 



A'AMAX, XV. takrar M kowi. 

10 So merf aalAh yih hai, ki un par 
jo gair-na union men ae IChudi ki taruf 
phire hain, bera na (Ulen : 

20 Par un ko likh bliejen, ki buton 
ki gandagiorj.aur ha nim k Ari, aur gald- 
ghonti hiii chizon, aur lu.li li se kindru 
rahen, 

21 Kyiinkl Igle zamAne se har shahr 
men Musi" ki sluirl'at ke innnddi- 
karncwdlo hote Ae hain, aur har saht 
ke din wuh 'ibadut-khanon men parhi 
jAtf. 

22 Tab rasulon aur buzurgon ne, 
sAri kalisiye aamet, bihtar jdnd ki 
apne men se kai shakhs chunke Pu- 
lua aur BaroabAs ke' «Ath AntdkiyA 
jnen bhejerj ; ya'ne, YahiidAh ko, ki 
jis kd laaab iiarsabi» bal, aur Silds 
ko, jo bhaion men muqaddam ddmi 



tho; 

23 Aur un ke hdtb yih likh bhcjd ; 
ki Un bhdion ko, jo gair-qaumon men 
M liiiin, aur Antakiya, aur Suri ya, aur 
Qihqiya men rahte, raaiilon aur bu- 
zurgon aur bhdion kd silam : 

24 Azbaski hain ne auuA ki ham 
men se ba'zon ne, jin ko baui ne hukm 
nahin kiyd, jdke tumben anni bAton se 
ghalira diyd, aur tumhdre dilon ko yih 
kahke pareshdn kiyd, ki Khatna karo, 
aur sliari'at par chalo : 

25 So ham nc ok-dil hoke bihtar 
jAni ki ba'z cliuue hfie ddmion ko 
apne 'azizon Barnabds aur Piilua ko 
sath, 

26 ,To ki aise ddmi hain, ki unbon 
ne apni jdn hamAre Khudawand Y isi 
Masih ke ndm par fehatre men da'.i, 
tnmbdre pds bhejen. 

27 ChunAnchi ham ne Yahud Ah aur 
SiUs ko bhejAjaur we jb bdten EUbinf 
bbi baydn karenge. 

28 Kyunki TSiih i Quds ne aur bnn 
ne bihtar jinA ki in zaniri bAton ki! 
hiwA, tum par aur kuchh bojh na 
dAlen : 

'Jlt Ki tum buton ke t'harbdwon, aur 
lahu, aur galdghonti hiii chizon, aur 



Uli bal kdf-nsiil hond. 



A'AMA'L, XVI. 



haramkan se parhesi karo. Agar-tuml 2 Ai 



PiUus aur Sila* H babat. 
Lustra nur Jqun: 



chizon m ap ko bacha-e rakhoge, to Win bhaioii ke mudik nekn&iu tha. 



khrth kiiroge. Salamat raho. 

30 Tab wo rukhsat hoko Antikiya 



Pulus ne chaha ki use apno sath 
chale ; tab us ko le jiike un Yahii- 



iiioii io ; aur jiimd'&t ko ikat tha- karke dion ke «abah, jo un at.rdl" men the, 



khatt de diyd. 

" 31 We use parhke is tasalli ki bdt 

si- kliimh hiie. 

82 Aur Yuhiidih aur 806« ne, ki we 
blii nabi the, blnlinn ko halmt si bdton 
se nasihat karke taqwiyat di. 

33 Aur we kuchh din rahko sahih 
salamat bhaion bu rukh.^it hoke rasiil- 
oii ke nas gaye. 

34 Mngar Silds ne wahan rahnd 
bihtar jaili. 

35 Aur Pulua aur Barnabds Anta- 
kiya rnen nih k e bahut aur logon ko 
satu Khudawand ka kalam sikhlate 
aur u» ki baahdrat dete the. 

30 1 Aur kai KM ba'd Pulus no 
Barnabds se kaha, A 'o, har ek ahahr 
men, jahan ham nc Khuda ka kalam 
suiidya, phir jake apne bhaiott ko de- 
khen, ki k&isc hain. 

37 Aur Barnabds ki ralah tlii, ki 
Yuhaima ko, jia ka laqal> Marqus hai, 
apne sath le jae. 

38 Magar Pulus ne munasih na 
j;ina ki us shakhs ko, jo Pamluliya 
men un se judd liiia, aur us kara ke 
liye un ke sang na gay&j sdth le jae. 

39 Tab un men aisi taknir hrii, k 
ek diisre se juda ho gaya; aur Barna- 
bas Marqus ko leke jahaz par Kupmu 
ko rawdna hua ; 

40 Aur Pulus ne Silds ko pasand 
k iya, aur bhaion se Khudd ke fazl ke 
Mipurd hoke rawdna hiia. 

41 Aur Suriya aur Qiliqiy& men 
guzarke kalisiyaon ko taqwiyat detA 
ph ini. 

XVI BA-B. 

W UU Darbe aur Lustra men pa- 
hunclia : aur, dekho, wahan 



ka. khatna kiya, kyiinki we sab jAnte 
the ki is kA bdp Yunani th£. 

4 Aur jab wo shahrun min guzarte 
e, to un hukraon ko, jo racafop aur 

huzurgog ne Yiimsahun men thahrdyd 
tha, uiifieii pahunchAyd, ki un ki 
muhdfazat karen. 

5 So kalisiyden Iman men mubut 
huiij, aur ginti men roz ba roa barhti 
gayin. 

6 Jab we Friigiya aur Galatiya ke 
mulk ko guzre, to Ruh i Quda nc un- 
ben mnn'a kiya, ki Asia men kalam 

. sundwon. 

7 Tab we Mi'isiya. men Ake Bitii- 
niya men jdne ki tadbir raeri lage : par 
Ruh ne unhen jane na diya. 

S Sowb Miisiya se guzarkar Troas 
u i ■ ■ f_ nur ia, 

t) Aur Pulus ne rAt ko royi dekhi ; 
ki ek Maqaduni Adini khara hdi, aur 
us ki mienat karke kahta hai, ki Piir 
utar, aur Maqaddniya men dkebamari 
madad kar. 

10 Jon us ne roya dekhi, ust dani 
ham ne Maqaddniya men jAnc ka 
i rada kiya, yih yaqin karke ki Kim- 
tUwand no hameg buldya, ki unben 
Injil snnawen. 

11 Pas Troas se kishti kholko ham 
sidhe Samutiwjiya men, aur diisre din 
NiyApulia men, ae ; 

12 Aur wahan so Filippi men ao, 
jo Maqadiiniya ki us qiBniat ka mu* 
qaddain sbulir aur ltumion ki basti 
hai : ham kuchh din usi shahr meij 
rahe. 

13 Aur sabt ke din sbahr ko bahar 
nadi kinAre gaye, jahan du'a mdngne 
ka diistur tha; aur haitbke un 'aurat- 



Timtaus nime ek «hagird tha, jis ki on se, jo ikatihi thin, kabiin karne 
mdYahudin tbi.juiindn lai; par us kajlage. 

bap Yunani tba : | 14 T Aur Thuatira shahr ki ek, 

176 



Puitis o SUas M </<iid hoin'i. A' AMA'L, XVI. DArogn ka murid harui. 



Kbudd-parant 'aurat LudiA nAm, qir- 
miz bechnewdli, Buuti thi : ub kd dil 
Khiidawnnd ne. kliolA, ki Piilus ki 
bAton par ji lagayA. 

15 Aur jab uh nc apne gharAne 
Baruet baptiama paya, to minnat karke 
kaha, Agar tumben yaqin hai ki main 
KhudAwand ki imdndar MU, to ehalko 
mere ghar men nilio. Aur hamen 
zabardasti le gayi. 

16 ^ Aur aisd hiid, ki jab ham 
du'A mingoe kl jagah Jfte Hip, ok 
chhokri, jis men gaib-dani ki ruh 
samai thi, hamen mil!, jo mib-sd : ' 
apne mdlikon ke liyc bah u t kuchh 
peidft k arti thi : 

17 Ub ne Pi'iIuh ke aur liamArc 
pichhe Ako chiUAke kahfi, ki Ye admi 
Khuda Ta'ild ko bande hain, jo ham 
lio najdt ki rih balAtc hain. 

IB Yih us ne bahut dimm tak kiyA. 
A'khir Pulua ranjida lnia, aur phirke 
us'ruh se kahA, ki Main tujhe Yisu' 
Masih ke iiam par hukm karti hug, 
ki is so nikal jd. Wuh uni dam nikal 
gayi. 

19 % Jab us ke mdlikon nc dekha 
ki thi ki kumai ki urwned jati rahi, to 
Piilus o Silau kn pakarke cljauk men 
sardArorj ke pas khinoh la chale. 

20 Aur uiiln-n faiijdari ke hdkimon 
ke age le jake kahd, ki Ye Admi, jo 
Yahudi hain, hamare sdiahr ko bahut 
satAte hain, 

21 Aur harn ko aisi rasmen batAto, 
jin ka rndniia aur uu par 'amal karna 
hamen, ki Rnmi hairj, rawA nahin. 

22 Tab bhir milke un ki muklidlafat 
inen ut.lii : aur f nijddri ke hakinion ne 
un ke kapre phdrko un ko bet mdrne 
ka hukm tiiya. 



f A'dhi rAt ko Ffilus aur Silds 
du'A mangto hue KhudA ki aiiAisli ke 
git gAte the; aur bandlme unhen 
aunte the. 

26 Tab ekbArgi barA bhimchAl Ayd, 
nisA ki qaid-khAnc ki uew blii hil 
gayi : aur jiiat sab darwazo khul gaye, 
aur aab ki beriAn gir gayi n. 

27 Aur qaid-khdne kA dAroga jdg 
utha, aur jab qaid-khdne ke darwAne 
khule dekhe, to yiiiVaimnlikc ki ban- 
dhue bhdg gaye,t«lwdr khinehko chAhA 
ki apne ta.in mdr ddle. 

28 Tab Pului+ ne hari AwAz se pn- 
kdrkc kahA, Apno ta.in mii|sdn mat 
pahunelia: kyuiiki ham sah yahdn 
maujud hain. 

29 Tab wuh chirag mangwAke hlii- 
tar daurA, aur kampS. huA IMlus aur 
SilAs ke pAnwon par girA, 

30 Aur unhen bAhar lAke kahA, Ai 
Btlhibo, main kyA karian ki najit 
|. ; iiinV 

31 Unhon ne kaha, ki Khudiwand 
Yisii' Masih par imAu IA, ki hi aur 
t«rA gharAnA najAt pAwegA. 

32 Tab unhun ne us ko, aur sab ko 
jo us ko ghar men thi', Khudawand Jiii 
kalam sunAyA. 

S3 Aur us ne rat ki usi ghari unhen 
leke un ke zakhin dhoe: aur wunhin 
us ne, aur sab ue jo ub ke the, baj>- 
t isma pAyA. 

34 Aur unhen apne ghar lAke un ke 
sAmhne dastarkhwAn biohhAyA, aur 
apno tamAm gbar aamet Khuda par 
iman lake khuwhi ki. 

35 Jab din huA faujdAn' ke hakimon 
ne piyAdon sc kahla bliejA, ki Un 
admion ko chhor de. 

36 Tab qaid-VhAne ke dAroga ne 



23 Aur unhen bahu t mArke uaJd-'Pulus ko is bdt ki khabar di, ki Fauj- 
khine men ddld, mir f]aid-khane ke diri ke hdkimorj m kahlA bliejd, ki 
darogaso tiikid ki, ki hari hoshyAi'i sc'iumhen chhor den: pas ab nikalke 
un ki nigahbaui kar. [salAmat chale jdo. 

■'i Ub ne aiaA hukm pAke unhen 37 Par Pulua ne un se kahA, ki 
andar ke qaid-khdne roen dala, aur un Unhon ne hamen, jo Ri'imi hain, It;- 
ke pdnw kAth inen t.hok di'ye. |guuah sAbit kiye, logon ke sAmhne bet 

"176 



TasmhmUji Tahudion ka 
marke qaid men dald : aur tb ham ko 
chupko nikalte h;im? aisa na hogd ; 
baiki wc iip ake hamen nikal h; dialon. 

38 Tab piyadon ne ye biiten faujddri 
ke hakimon ko suniin : jab unhon 
sund ki ltuuii hain, todar gaye. 

39 Aur ake nun ruandyd, aur 
bahar lake miituat ki, ki shahr 
chale jaejj. 

40 Tab wa qaid-khdne se nikalkc 
Ludid ke yahan gaye : aur bhdion. ku 
dekhke unhen nasihat ki. aur rawfi.na 
hde. 

XVII BATI. 

TAB we Amfipulis aur Apullonid 
ae guzarke Taswaluuinc mon, ja- 
liiih Yaluulion ka ck 'ibddatkli&iia tiba, 



A' AM' AL, XVII. mmhn paT fttad uthdnd. 
karke kahte hain, ki bddshah to dilari 
bai, ya'ue, Yisu'. 

8 So unhon ne logon, aur shahr ke 
sardamn ko, yib sunakc ghabrd diya. 
*9 Tab unhon ne Yasiin aur baqion 
se zamiu leku unhen ehhor diya. ■ 

10 f Li;kin bhdion ne usi dam 
ratotj rat Pulua aur Silau ko Barid 
shahr rnen bhej diya; we wahai] 
pahunchkc Yab.vn.Uoti ku 'ibadat-khaiie 



4e: 

2 Aur Pulus apuc dasttSr par o 
paa andar gaya, aur tin sablon 
niuvishton ki baton ka charcha un ke 
sdth kiva." 

3 Ki un ka bhed kholta, aur dalil 
lake kahta tha, ki Zariir tha ki Masih 
dukh ufliavve, aur murdon men se ji 
ut^he ; aur ki yih Yisil', jia ki mai 
tur.ihen manadi kartd hun, wuhi Masi 
hai. 

4 Tab un men so ba'zon ne min 
liyd, aur Pulua aur Silas ke aharik 
htic : aur Khudd-parast Ytindnion. ki 
bui jaina'at, aur bahuteri ashraf ' 
rnteii bhi. 

5 U Par Yahud ion ne jo iman 
lie, dab ae bharke bdzdriou uien se 
kai ek shariron ko apue sath liya, aur 
hliir higakc shahr mcn hangarua kiyd, 
aur Y 7 asiiri ka <;har ghtrfee unhen 
dhundba, ki logon ke samlme khinch 
Idwen. 

(i Aur jjib unhen na paya, to YasYin 

aur kai bhdion ko shahr ke aarddron 

■ Nilliito Jiiir kh'njc-h lio, ki Ye 

ihutlu, jinhon ne jahdii ko ula| diya, 

yaharj bai ae hain | 

7 Un ki mibmaol Y daun ne ki ; aur 
we aab Qaisar ko hukrnon ki bar khilafi 
177 



ahdg. ke log TassaIuniqlon se 
nok-zat the ; ki unhoij ne bare sliauq 
se kaldm ko qabfil kiya, aur roz roe 
nawjfihton mon dhftndhte rahe, ki yo 
baten yilnhi hnin, ya nahirj- 

12 ls waKtc babutere un men se 
iman Ue ; aur Yunani sharif 'auraten 
aur mard bhi thrtre na the. 

13 Jab Taa9aiuniqe ko Y'ahiidiori 
no jana, ki Piilua Khuda k a kalam 
Baria rnen bhi sunata bai, to wahan 
bhi ake logon ko ubhara. 

14 Tab bhlion ne filfaur Pulus ko 
rukhnat kiya, ki samundar ki taraf 
jae; lekirt Silas aur Titntaus wabig 
raho. 

S Aur we jo Pdlus ki rahbari 
karte the, usio Ateni tak lae : aur Si]as 
aur Timtaua ke liye hukru leke ki jis 
jaldi se ho sake us ke jida awen, iswina 
hue. 

16 1 Aur jis waqt Pulus AUni 
zn un ki nih lakta tha, jab u« ne 

dek ha ki shahr butorj se bhara hai, to 
us ka ji jal gaya. 

17 Ia iiyo wuh 'ibailaf-khine men 
Yabddiorj aur Khndd-parastorj se, aur 
chauk mL-n un j>e Jo ruz use milte the, 
bjiliss ksirta tha. 

18 Tab kai Afquri aur BtoioJ '4Um 
uaae bahasne la«a, aur ba'zon ne kaha, 
ki Yih Ivakwasi kya kaba cbabti hai ? 
auron ne k.ib.i, Yih gair dewton ka 
kiiaiwr-donewala ma'ldm partdhai ; is 
liye ki wtih unhcrj Yisd' aur idydmat 
ki klui^hkhabiiri dcta, thd. 

10 Tab we use pakar ke Ariupagus 



MAh Ateni m*n A'AMA'L, XVIII. Injil m >dt&. 

par 1« gaye, aur kahd, A'yd hameiiiki KhudA sono, rtipe, yd patthar ki 
rna'liim lio «akta hai, ki yili uayi maulud hai, jo ddmi ki liunar o tadbir 
ta'Ifni, jo td detd hai, kyd hai ? j bc gariie. 

20 Kyilnki M\ lnundre kanon mr-ri SG Uaraz ki KhudA, jahalat ko 
anokhi batin pahunchiUd hai ! sohami wutog u tarah HjSu ah sah adrnlon 
jatid cfaahtc hai r, ki iu n kyd garaz ! ko kir jngftfe bukin deta, bai, ki tauba 
hai. karen : 



21 (Ia wdste ki sare Ateniwaio aur 
inusifir jo wahdii rahd? thi', apiii 
ftmtt kd waqt, siwa nayi bat kahni 
aur Buniie ke, dfisre kam men iiahin 
katt* the.) 

22 T Tab Piilus Ariupagits ke bich 
men kkani hoko boli, Ai Ateniwaio, 
main dokhta huij l;i tua har surat H 
dewton ko bnre pujncwale ho. 

23 Kyunki main ne sair karte, aur 
tunilidro ma'budnn par nazar kartc 
bne, ek qiirbdugdh pai, jis par vih 
likha thd.ki NA'-MA'I.U'M KHUDA' 
KB LIYB. Pas jis ko tumbcraa'lum 
kiyo pnjte ho, main tuni ko lisi ki 
khabar deta hiin. 

24 Khuda, ju ne dunya aur Bab 
kuchh p its men hai [Midi kiya, ji.s 
hiU ki wuh dsinan aur Uimin ka Malik 
hai, ]ia(h ki batuli hiii haikalon men 
nabig rahtd ; 

25 Na adtoion ke lt&th se khidmat 
leta, goyd ki kisii chiz kd inuhtaj hai, 
kyimid wuh to dp sah ko zindagi aur 
sdn» aur tab kuclih bakhshtd hai 

26 Aur ek hi lahu Re admi^ii ki sab 
qauinen tamdni zamin ki sath par 
basrte ke liye paidfi kin, aur tnuqarrar 
waoton, aur uu ki sukr.nat ki haddon 
ko thahravd ; 

27 T:i. ki Kimddwand ko dhundh- 
cn, shdyad ki totolkar use pdwen, 
a;>arehi wuh bani rarti kisi m dur 
nahin : 

2y Kyfirjki usf se ham jito, aur 
chalte phirto, aur maujud haig ; jaisd 



tutnhdre i-hd'iron nwg 
ne kahd hai, ki Ha: 
hain- 



31 Kyunki un ne ek din thahraya 
hai, jis men wuh ra^ti ae dunyd ki 
'addlat kar. gd, u* ddmi ki ma'rilat, 
jise us no muqarrar kiyd; aur use 
murdoij men n ufhake yih bat sab par 
sabit ki. 

32 \ Aur jab unhon ne nmrdon ke 
ji nthne ki bdt suni, to ba'/e thatllid 
indnio lage ; aur baV.on ne kaiid, b* ki 
babat Iiaiu tujh se phir Buncnge, 

33 Tab Pdlus un ku dariuiyan se 
c ha Ia gaya. 

34 Par kitnc admi ua se milke 
imdu Ide : un men Diunusius Ariu- 
[«i'.tis kd ek Galdhkar, aur Damaris 
name ek 'aurat, aur kai aur un ke sdth 
the. 

XVIII BA'B. 

BA'D us ke Pulus Ateni se rawdna 
hoke Qurintua men dyd. 
Aur wahdn Atjula ndme ek Ta- 
hfidi ko pdyd, jia ki paiddish Puntus 
ki thi, aur uiihin dinon apni joru 
Prisqilla ke adth Italia se dyd thd : 
(kyi'mki Qlaiidius u« hukm diya thd 
ki no Yahudi Ram se nikal jdwen :) 
so wuh un ke pas gaya, 

3 Aur is liyc ki wuh un ka hani- 
pesha thd, un ke sdlh raba, aur kdro 
karue lagi : kyiinki un kd peslia 
kliaima-ihfzi thd, 

4 Aurwuh har eabt k^'ibiiiiat-khanc 
men bahs kartd, aur yahiidion aur 
Yiindnion ko q^il karri thd. 

5 Aur jab Silas aur Timidns Ma- 
qndviiiiya se dc, Piilua ji men majbdr 



Wii ha'zoji.hfid, aur Yahlidiw ku dge gawdhi di 



i hi ki nasi ' 1 



IlBd' wnlu Masih hai. 
(j Jab wo inwjdbala karne, aur kul'r 



29 Pas Khuda ki aasl boke hamen bakne lage, uh ne apne kapre jhdrke 
muudaib nahin ki yih khiyal karcnjun ae kahd, Tumhdrd khun tumhiri 



Qt*rintttt mt.n vn'z binti A'AMA'L 
gardau par; main pAk hiirj : ab so 
gair-qaumon ki taraf jdiingd. 

7 f Wahdn bc wnh chald, aur 
Jiistus ndmu KhudA-parast koghar, jo 
'ibAdat-khdnc so mild thii, gayA. 

8 Aur 'ihadat-khanckdBarddr Kris- 
pus, apTie tamani ghar samet, Khudd- 
wand par iuidu layd : aur baliut se 
Qunnti suiiku imftn Ide, aur baptisma 
paya. 

9 Tab Khuddwand ne rdt ko roya 
men Ptilus sc kahA, Mat dar, par kanta 
ja, aur clnip na ho; 

10 Is liye ki main tere sdth hurj, 
nur koi tujh se bad-sul&ki karno na 

Cawega; kyiinki is ahahr men mere 
ahut log kain. 

11 So wuh derh bara« wahdn tha- 
barko u n ke darmiyau Khudd kd 
kaldni aikhdtA rahA. 

12 ■( Aur jab GAllio Akhaia ka 
Bdba tlid, Yahudi ekd karkc Pi'ilus 
|iar charh Ae, aur usc 'adAlat men le 
gaye, 

13 Aur kahA, Yih ahakha logon ko 
bahkdtA ki shari'at ke barkhildf Khudd 
ki jorastish harem 

14 Aur jubPufusiiccbdhdkimunb 
khole, Gilho ne Yahudion w kabd, Ai 
Yahudio,agar kuchh mim ydshararat 
hoti, to* wajib thd ki main sabr karko 
tunihirf suntA; 

15 Par agar yih suwal tutnhdrl 
ta'lim, aur rjdmon, aur sbari'at ke hann 
men hai, to tam bi jAno; kyi'mki 
main nahin chdhtA ki aisi h&ton ki 
raunsif hiin. 

16 Aur ua no unhen 'addla-t-gAh ae 
nikdl diyd. 

17 Tab eab Yimdnioii ne 'ibddflt- 
khdne ke sardAr Sostanes ko pakarke 
'adalat-gah ke sdmhnc mara. P: 
GAllio nu in baton fei kuchh parwd na 
ki. 

18 ^ Aur jab Piilus aur bhi baliut 
din wahdn rahA thd, tab bhdiun se 
rukhsat hoke, aur Qankrid men air 
uiundake, kyiuiki m ne tuaunat mini 

' 179 



XY[II. Apullus ki ioa'z foi.r„6. 

thijahd/ par Suriya ku rawdnd lmn, 
aur Pritwulld aur Aujili. us ke &tith 
the. 

L9 Aur Alasus men pahunehke us 
qa milieij wahin Dhhofd : aur dp 'iba- 
dat-kkduomenjdko Ya'ktidion se bdten 
kiri. 

20 Tab unliorj ne ua se darkhwdst 
lu, ki mu kurhh din uu ku Batil rahe, 
par us ne na nidnA; 

21 Baiki uu m; yih kahke rukksat 
liiid, ki bar hal men iiuijhe zanit hai 
ki Yarusaliim mm 'id i iyanda ko 
kanin; par agar Khud.i clidlie.to tum- 
bare pds pbir aungd. Aur Afasus se 
jaliaK par sawir boko cbala. 

22 Aur Qaisariya men utarke Ujiar 
cbarh gayd, aur jab kaliajye se ^nldiii 
lialni tfni, Aatikiya ko utar gaya. 

23 Aur kuchh diu rahku wahij K 
rawdnd hi'id, aur Galatiya aur Frdgiya 
ke m u Ikon men barabar i-u/urta, aur 

b shdgirdon ko rjHpviyat deti fiMTd. 

21 % Aur Apullua udnie ek Yahu- 
di, jiaki paidiisb Iskaudaria ki thi, jo 
zuhAii-dwarsliakJiHaur pdk nawishtoij 
men barA qdbil thd, Al'asus iuuii pa- 
huneba. 

25 Is abjjfhi uv rpufcUwaad ki rah 
ki tarbiyat pai thi ; aur dil meu sar- 
^arm lioke kalam karta, aur sihhal se 
rpmd&wand ki Mten «ikbAtA tha, 
piirsjirrYdbiiimAUAbaptiama jdntdtha, 

2R Wuh ibAddt-klidne men be-dba- 
rak Imlue lagi: aur Aqnli aur Pria- 
i[illd ne, us ki suake use apoa tath 
liyA, aur us ko Khudd ki rah ziyada 
durusti se batdi. 

27 Jab uh ne Akhaia niea utar jdne 
kA irdtla kiyd, to bhaion ue shAgirdou 
ko likhkc darkhwast kf ki us ko tjabul 
karen : us ne walian j>ahunclike un 
ki, jo fezl ke sabab im;in lae the, baii 
madad ki : 

28 Kyurjki uu no pak namahtcig se 
sdhit kurke ki yih Yisii' wuh Masih 
l.ui, Yaiiddii'ii ki> sah ke age bari- zor 
shur xv ijdil kiyd. 



Putus ke hdth m A'AMA'L, XIX. 

xix ba'h. 

AUB aisA Mi, ki jab Apullun 
Qurintii8 mon thA, Pilus lipnr 
ke mulkon bc guzarke Afaaua men 
AyA, aur kaf ahAgirdon ko pAko, 

2 Un sg kalia, Kya tom ne, jab h 
iniAn 16«, Biih i Quds pai ? Unhorj ne 
nae kahA, Hara no to suni blii nahin. 
ki KiUi i Quds hai. 

3 Ua no uu sk kuini, Pas tu.ni ne 
kia kA baptitiiiia paya? Wo bola, ki 
Y'ubannA kii baptiama, 

4 Tab Piilua ne kaili, YuhannA no 
to tauba k£ baprisma diyi, logon ae 
y i b kabte hue Vi ua par jo ttum pi- 
chhe AtA hai, ya'ne liati' par, hnAn 
lawen, 

5 tJnlion ne yib aunkarKhudawand 
Tisii' ke nAui par baptiama pAyi. 

6 Aur jab TMIus ne un pat hath 
rakhe the, Ruh i Quds un mr Ai, aur 
tarah tarah ki ziibAuun bolne aur 
nubdwat karne lage. 

7 We sab ddnii barali «k the. 

8 Aur wali 'ibadat-kbAne mag jAke 
bo-dharak bolta, aur tin mahinon. tak 
bahs k'arta, aur KhudA ki liAdahihat 
ki bAtcti unhen samjhAt.A rahA : 

9 Ltskin jab ba'zon ko dil sakht ho 
gaye, aur we be-imAn luie, baiki log* 
uii ku aAmhne ih rAli ko buni kahnc 
liigo, Ui ne un se kiiuire hoke elia- 

?'irdon, ko ala» kiyA, aur bar roz kisi 
urannus nAme ko madrase merj bahs 
karii thA. 

10 Tih do bara» tak hotA rahA ; aisa 
ki Asia ko sab rahnewalon no, kyd 
Yahudi kyd Yunani, KliudAwand Ti»ti' 
ka kuldni aumi. 

11 Aur KhudA Pulus ke hAtaon as 
bare bare nm'ajize dikhAtAthA; 

12 YahAn tak ki niniAl aur patke 
us ke badan ko ehhuwake biinAron 
par dAlte the, aur un ki hiraAriAn jAti 
ra.lit.iii, aur buri n'ihen uu se uikaljati 
thin. 

13 K' Tab ba'ze AwAra jhArne pln'ink- 
newAle Yahudion ne iklu.ivAr kiyA ki 

180 



Ruh ka milna, 
uti par, jin iiieu buri n'ihoii samAi thin, 
Khudawaud Yisii' kA nAm phunkke 
kaheg, ki Ilam tuai ku UI Yla£' ki 
qasam dete hain, jis ki I'ulua umiiadi 

Kartii bai 

14 Aur un map Sqera Yahudi sar- 
dAr kAhin ko &&t beto the, jo yib. karte 
the, 

15 Tab btiri ruh ne jawAb men 
kaliA, ki Yisii' ko main jAtitA, aur 
Pilus m bhi waqif hiiii ; l>ar tum 
kaun ho? 

16 Aur wiih sbaklis, jis par buri 
nih thi, un par lapkA, aur galib Ako 
un par aisi ziyAdatl ki, ki wo natige 
aur ghAyal us gbar ae bha^e. 

1" Aur yih bat sab Yahudion aur 
Y'iinauion ko, jo Afaaus niun mhte" the, 
tna'lum hui ; tab nabhon. merj dar 
samAyA, aur Kbudawand Yinu' ke nAin 
ki buzurgi ki gayi. 

18 Aur bahuteron ne un men se, jo 
iman lAe tbe, ake apne kArnon ko 
qabul diyA, aur zAbir kiyA j 

19 Aur luihutorj ne, jo jidiigari 
karte the, apni kitAbtn ikatthi karke 
sab logon ke Age jala din ; aiir jab un 
kC qiniat kA hiaAb kiyA, to pacliaa 
bazArrupiya t lin.li rt. 

20 lui tarah Khud&wand ka kalAm 
uihayat barli gayA aur galib IiuA. 

21 T Jab yih lio cliuka, l'iilua ne 
apne dil men t.bAtiA, ki Maqadimiya 
aur Akhaia se hoke Yaru&alam merj 
jAiin, aur kahA, ki WahAn jAne ko 
ba'd Iliiro ko bhi mujhe deklinA zarrir 
hai. 

22 So un merj ho, jo us ki khidmat 
karte the, do nhaklis TimtAuK aur 
AraatuH ko Maqaduniya mag bhejko 
Ap kuchh din Asia men raba. 

1'S Aur us waqt is riin ki babat bara 
fasAd uthA. 

24 Ky6nki Demefehu iiaino ek bu- 
nAr jo Artamis ke rupable niandir 
banAta thA, aur u a ]ioshawAlon k o 
bahul kannva detA thA; 

25 TJs ne un ko, aur gairon ko jo 



Bumeiriu» Pulim par A'AMA'L, XX. fasiid harpa kartu. 

wabd kilin karte the, jam'a karke ki Afasion kd nhahr ban devi Artamis 
kaha, ki Ai miirdo, tuni iante lio ki ki, nur us mirat ki Jo Zeua ki taraf se 
harndri fardgat isi kara ki badattlat giri, pi'ija-karnewdld hai ? 
hfH. 36 Pas jab koi m baton ku khildl 

26 Aur tum dekhtu aur aunte ho nahiy. kali sakta, to wajib lini ki linu 
kl sirfAiasus men nabirj, baiki tamani thanie raho, aur be soche kuchh na 
' 'karo. 

37 Kyiinki ye mani jin ko turnya- 
hdn Ide, na mandir ke chor, na nun- 
hdri devi ke nimbi-karnewale hain, 

38 Pas agar Deinetriua aur us ke 
haiii-pesha kisd par da'wd takhta bon, 
to 'audlat kiuili bai, aur Su.be haitlie 



Asia ko aarib mon, ie 1'oIub ne bahut 
se logon ko targib dckar gumrdh kar 
diyd nai, ki kahtd hai, yili Jo hatli ke 
bando bain Khuild nahfn hain. 

27 So Url yilii khatra nahin, ki 
hamdrd pesha be-qaar ho jde, baiki 
bari den Artamis kii mandir bUi , . _ 
jiiehi/. liu jde, aur us ki buzurgi, jiau hain: ek duBre par ndliah karen. 



tamani Asia aur airi dunya piijti hai, 
jati rahc. 



3W Par jis surat mcij tum kol aur 
bat tahqiq karne chahte ho, to dini 



28 Jab unhoii no yih Bima, to gusne majlis men faisal hogd. 



bhar gaye, aur chillakc kaha, ki 
Afttffan ki Artamis bari bai. 

29 Aur i.;un;un ihidDf men balwa 
hua: aur Bab niilke CJahis aur Aris- 
tarkhus ko, jo, Magadouly» ke ralinc- 
wale aur l'tilus ke ham-safar the, 
pakarke tamashaedh ko daure. 

30 Aur jab Pulus ne chahd ki log- 
on. ko darmiydn jdOj to shdgirdori ne 
iise jdne na diyi. 

31 Aur Asia ke buzurgorj men se 
ba'aon ne, jo us ke dost the, us ke pas 
ddmi bhejke minnatki ki tamdshagdh 
men niat jd. 

32 Aur bata kuchh ohillAe, aurba'- 
ze kuchh : kyunki jania'at barham 
darliain lio gayi tbi ; aur aksaron ne 
na jand ki baui kis liyo ikat^he huo 
hain. 

33 Tab unhon ne Sikandar ko, jisa 
Yahudi dhakiyatethe, liliir inen se? 
kar diyd. Aur Sikandar ne lidth 
ishdra karke e-ha-hd ki logon ke sdnibne 
'uzr kare. 

34 Par jab unhon ne j&nd kt wuh 
Yahudi hai, to &ab ham-dwaz hoke do 
ghante ke qarib chilldte rahe, ki Afa- 
sion ki Artamis bari hai. 

35 Aur jab ahanr ke muharrir 
logon ko tbandhd kiyd, to kabd, Ai 
Afasia, kami Admi bal jo nabin jduta 

181 



40 Kyiinki harami khatra hai ki iij 
ko liahve ke Waste akta pir ndlisb ho, 
isliyeki koi sabab nabin k i jis SC hara 
ia hangame kd jawdb de saken. 

41 Aur yih kabke inajlia ko bar- 
khwdst kiyd. 

XX BA"B. 

JAB bullar uiauqilf hua, I'dlus ne 
sbdgirdoa ko bulako unbon sa- 
Idm kiyd ; tab wnhan tio raw&na hiia, 
ki Maijaduniya ko jae. 

2 Aur un atrdf se guzarke, aur 
urihen bahut nasihat karke, Ydudii 
men dyd, 

3 Aur tln mahitum tak wahdrj rahil. 
Phk jis waqt jahds par Suciya merj 
jdno ko tbd, Yahudi ua ki ghit men 
lage : tab um ki yih italah hul, ki Ma- 
qaduniya ki nih Ke phire. 

4 Aur Sopatrun Haridi, aur Aris- 
tarkhuti aur Sikiin<luN, jo Tassaluniqe 
ko ' the, aur Gaius Darbe kd, aur 
TimlauB, aur Tukhikus aur Tnit'mius, 
jo Asia Ite tbc, Asia tak us ko sdth 
gaye. 

5 Wc ige jdke hamdre liye Troaa 
men thahre. 

B Aur fatir ke dinon ke ba'd liam 
Pilippi se jahdz pir rawana boko 
panoli i.l i 1 1 ke 'nrso men Troda men un 



PtBvs A/afus ke •jiasisoii. lu. A'AMA 
ke pas pahuuclit; ; aur sAt din waktu 
thahre. 

7 Aur hafte ke pahlc din, jab shA- 
L'in) r* -ti topM ko ikattho Ae, Puitis ne, 
ki dnare di'n jane ko thA, ini ko Bath 
kalam kiyi, aur apiul kalam Adhi rat 
tak barhAya. 

8 Aiir us bilikhdne par, jahAn wo 
ikatthe thc, haluit uliirag jal ruLe. 

S Anr Yiitakhus udin ek jawAn 
khirki jiar baithA thA; usko ban nind 
Af ; BU jab Palui dor lak biten kaita 
ralid, wuh mAre nind ke jhukko tinrc 
darje kg niche gir pard, aur murda 
utbAyd gaya. 

10 Tab Pulne utnrke oh Upa^ gayA, 
aur galo lagake kaka, Siat ghabrAo; 
kyunki us ki jdn us mcrj bai. 

11 Aur uparjAkeroti ton, aur khdko 
ittii der tak un se bAUm kartA rabd, kf 
bbor ho gnyi ,- isi tarah se wuh i'halA 
gayA. 

I 'J Aur wc us jawan ko jttd Ide, aur 
nihAyat khAtirjarn'a htie. 

13 ^ Aur hara jaluiz pol Acu AaSUB 
ke gaye, i? irAdo par ki wahAn Pulus 
k ' atuie wilb cliarhii b'n, kyinjki wuh 
wabari paidal jAno ka i rada karke yiSn 
fartnd gayA thA. 

14 Jab wuh Ausun mcu hamerj niihi, 
hain usu cliarhdku Mitulene meji de. 

1.1 Aur wahaij se jahil kholke 
dnsn diri Klinis ke ertinhiif Ae; aur 
tisre r#n Samus men dikail hiie; aur 
TroguUbun raon luarjAret karke ek diu 
ke ba'd Miletus men ae. 

1G Kyunki PAlta us (bani thA ki 
Afcus ae guzar jde, aini na bo ki us 
ko Asia men rabnc ae der lage: is liye 
ki wuh jul.ii kartA thA, ta ki agar us 
se ho sake, to Pantek ust ko diu ko 
Yanisahtm nwu ^t 6, 

17 T Aur us ae Milctus sn Afnsua 
men kakld bbeike kaliniye ke bu- 
zurgoii ko buinya. 

18 Aur jab wu di ko pai Ae, to un- 
hejj kalia, Tum jauto ho ki pahle 
diu bc jis ruen main Asia men AvA, 

183 



L, XX. «osi'Aac tarif, 

ki* tarah har watit tumhdrc aAth 
rahd; 

l'J Ki kamAl farotaui aur Angrion 
ke Hdth, aur uri Azmdishon ko nahke 
jin men Yahiidion ku ehat lagtne bo 
main phaoad tlid, KhudAwand ki 
khidmat kartA raha : 

20 Ki kyi'inkar main. ne koi bit, jo 
tumbAro fAida ki dii, rakii na dibori : 
baiki tumben khabar di, aur tum "ko 
jamd'at men aur ghar ghs? sikhAi j 

21 Aur Yahudion aur YunAnion ko 
sdnihue gawdhi di, ki Khudi ke Age 
tauba karo, aur hantare Khudawand 
Yi.-ii' ICatfb uar i mau lio. 

22 Aur ab, dekbo, main ruh kd 
bandbii Yonisaliuji ko jdtd Jnin, aur 
ualun .jAntA ki wahdg mujli par kyi 
guzregA : 

23 Magar itud, ki Bub i Quds bar 
sbabr meii yih kalike gawAbt detl hai 
ki qaid a uiuaibat mero liye UiivAr 
baig. 

24 Lckin main uso kucbb nahiri ia- 
majhta, na apni jdn ko 'ani/, rakhta, 
ki apnA daura aur wuh khidmat bbi, 
jo main ne KhudAwand Yisd* ae pAi, 
ki Kliud:! ke fazl ki Injil pai gawahi 
dAn, khuslii su pura katun. 

25 Aur ab, dekho, main jantd hiin 
ki tum sab, jin ko darmiyAn main 
KhudA ki bAdshAbat ki maiiAdi kartt 
phira, mcrA munb phir ua dokhoge. 

20 Pas main aj ke din tumben 
avtfb nkhU lu'uj, ki main sab ko 
khun se pAk hur. 

27 Kyunki main KhudA ki flAri 
maslahat Tunihen snuAno so biz n 
raiiA. 

28 % Pas apni aur us sire galk ki 
khaburddri karo, jis par Bfih i Qud« 
ne. tumben nigahbdn thahrAya, ki 
KliudA ki kalisiyu ko, jiac us ne apue 
hi lahu we mol liyA, chardo. 

29 Kyunki main yih jautA hiin ki 
mero jArie ke ba\l [jliaraewAle lilirriye 
tumhdre dnrniiyAn dwcnge, jiuhori 
galla par kuchh tara na AwogA. 



Piilus Ya n't salam men A'AMA' 

30 Aur khurt ttno merj so ddmi 
uthenge, ju ulti batrii kahensp\ ki 
dkAtprdeg ku ftpnf taraf kliiuch len. 

31 ls liye jagte mho, aur yid ra- 
kho ki main tin baras rat, rlin ru rokc 
bar ek ko chitdne sg baz na dyd. 

32 Ai bhiiio, ab main tu.mb.en Khu- 
da nur us ke fsujl ke kaum ko somptd, 
hiirj, j.i ki tumben kdmil knr «akta 
hai, aur sarn muqaddason men miras 
ik 1 sakti. 

33 Main ne kisi ke. riipo, yd sone, 
ya kapri; kd Idlach nahm kiyd. 

84 lialki tum a p jdntc bn ki iiilun 
hdthon ne meri nur men sitbion ki 
zaniratan raf'n kiri. 

35 Main ne sab b&ten batdm, ki 
yiin hi milmat karke kamz-oron ki 
madad karnd, aur Khuddwand Yisu' 
ki bdten rfd rakhua, zanir hai, ki us 
ne kabsi, Dcna lene se mubarak hai. 

30 J Aur us ne yih kahke ghntnc 
teke, aur uu sah ke sath du'd mdugi. 

37 Aur wc sab bahi.it roe, aur Piilus 
ke gale se Ing la^ko uge chuninc lage, 

38 Aur khdsskar ia bdt par gamgin 
hne, jo us ne kahi thi, ki Turn BMf£ 
munh pbir na dokhoge. Aur unhon 
ne «se jahaz tak pahunchdya. 

XXI BA'B. 

AUR aied hiid, ki jab hain un se 
mushkil se judi boks rawan» 
hfio th*\ U' w'dbi rah Qi'ia inen de, aur 
diisre din Rudus, aur wnhan se Pateri 
men,. 

2 Aur ek jahdz Fim'cm ko jdte bt'ie 
pako us par charlic, aur rawdna hue. 

3 Aur jab Kuprus nazar dyd, «se 
baen hdth chhorkar Suriya ko chalo, 
aur Siar meti lagdyd: kyunki wabdn 
jaha/ kd bojh niirud thi. 

i Aur jab shdgird khojne se mile 
the, to ham &&t PM wahari rahe : unhon 
ne Ruh ki raa'rifat Piilus se kalid, ki 
Yarusalam ko na jdna. 

5 Par haru «n dinon ku purd karke 
nikle, aur cbalo gaye ; aur sabhon «o 
joriion aur larkon samt'.t dialir ke bdhnr 
183 



L, XXI. phirjdtd. 

tak ham ko pahunchdya ; aur ham ne 
samundar ke kandre par ghutue tekko 
du'd mdiigi. 

6 Aur ham ek dusrc se widd' hoke 
jahaz par charhe; aur wo npne apno 
gbar ko phire. 

7 Aur ham Sur ro jabdz kd safar 
tamdin karko I'tulamais men pa- 
hunehe, aur bJi&iog ko salam karke 
ek din «n k? sath rahe. 

8 Ihisrc din Prilus aur ham,jo us 
ke sdthf the, rawdna hoke Q,aisany;i 
men de: aur Failbiin khush-khabari 
deupwdlo ke yalidn, jo un aaton men 
bc tha, utarko us ke sdth rahe. 

9 Aur us ki char kunwdri betidn 
t-hin, jo nubswiit karti thijj. 

10 Aur j-»b ham wuhdn babut roz 
ralic, A-abus Edme ok nabi Yahudiya 
se utar dyd. 

11 TTs ne hamdro pds dke Ptilus kd 
kamartmnd uthd liyd, aur apnc hdlh 
pdmv b:aidliki! knlid, Hrih ul Quds yi'nj 
kahti hai, L's mard ko, jis kd yih 
kjimnrband Jini, Yahudi Y'arnsalam 
men yiinhin bandherjge, aur gair- 
(p/amog ke bdthon incn hnwdla kar- 
engc. 

12 Jab yih sunil, to ham nc aur 
wahdn ko logon ne us ki minnat ki 
ki Yarusalam ko niv jdwe. 

13 Tar Puitis nc jawab diyd, ki 
Tum k ya karte ho, ki rote aur mori 
dil torte ho? kyunki main na sirf 
bdndhe jdne, baiki Yarusalam meu 
Kiiudiiwand Yi™' ko ndm pu matitie 
k'o bhi taiydr lnin. 

14 So jab us no na mdnd, to ham 
yih kahko chup rahe, ki Jo Khudd ki 
uiarzi ho. 

15 Aur un dinoj) ke ha'd ham npne 
safar ke asbdb ko taiydr karke Yuru- 
ailam k o gaye. 

16 Aur bisanya se kai ek sh;igird 
bamdre satli chale, aur h&meg Mnason 
Kuprusi ek qadini shigird ke pas la 
gaye, ki ham us ke yahan inihmdn 
hone ko tbc. 



We u» par hamla karte. A'AMA 1 

17 Aur jiil) ham Yartisahiin mei} 
pahuncho, bhaioij ne khushi se hanien 
([aliri 1 kiya. 

18 Aur ilusro din Puhishamdre sdth 
Ya'qiib ke pas gayd ; aur sab buzurg 
wahdn ikatt.ln; tfio. 

19 Aur lis ne unherj salam karke, 
jo kuchh Khuda ne un ki khidmat ku 
wasile gair-qaumon men kiya tha, 
murasaal haydn kiya. 

20 Aur unhon ne yih sunke Khu- 
ddwand ki sitaisli ki, aur vs ko kahd, 
Ai bhai, tu dekhtd hai ki Y&hiidion 
men se kitne hazdr haiij jo iman Ide: 
aur sab shari'at ke gairatmand hai n. 

21 Aur unhon ne tore haqq mag 
khabar pai, ki tu sab Yahudlon ko, 
jo gair-qaunion ke darmiyan rahto 
hain, sikhata hai ki Musa se phir 
jaen, ki kahta hai, Apue larkon ka 
krmtns niat karo, na aharfat ke 
dasturon par chalo. 

22 Ab kyd karun? Ing bo-shnkk 
kasratsc jam 'a honge ; kyunki sunenge 
ki t u ay-a hai. 

23 s', i yih kir, jo ham tujh se kahte 
hain; HamAru pas char mard hain, 
jinli'-n nii/.r adA karui hai; 

24 Unhen leke dp ko un ko sdth 
pak kar, aur uu ko liyo kuchh kharch 
kar, ta ki we apnd air mundAwcn: to 
wab janerjge ki jo baten bani ne tere 
haqq mon suni hain, su kuchh nahin ; 
baiki td ap bhi shari'at ko hifz karke 
durust etialtd hai, 

25 Parjogair-qaumon men se iman 
lio, un ki babat ham ne Umbraku 
Hkha hai, ki we aisi aisi baten ua 
maneg: magar buton ko charhdwe, 
aur lahii, aur gala ghonti bui ohtepfe 
aur haranikdri se, ap ko mahfuz «kli- 
en. 

~2G Tab PAlui un ruardon ko leke, 
aur dusre din ap ko un ku sdth pak 
kurku, haikal men dakhil h^d, aur 
khabar di ki pak karne ke diu, jab 
tak ki ia uien. se har ek ki uazr na 
charhai jae, pfire kareiige. 
184 



L, XXI, QiVa ka sarddr use bachaiii. 
| 27 Par jab aat din pure hone par 
the, Aaia ke Yahildion n e use hai k a 1 
men dekhke sah loguii ko ubhdrd, aur 
us par hath dale, 

28 Yon "chillako ki, Ai Israelj 
mardo, madad karo ; Yih wuhi admi 
hai, jo aab ko har jngah qaunt ke, aur 
shari'at ke, aur li makan ke khilaf 
sikhdtd lini : aur 'a lava ia ke Yunanion 
ko blii haikal meii laya, aur ia pak 
makan ko napdk kiya hai. 

29 (Kyiitjki uiilinn ue ajje Trufinms 
A faai ko u» ke sdih shnhr men dekhd 
tha, jis ki babat unhon ne kbiydl 
kiyi, ki Pulus us ko haikal mon laya 
tha.) 

30 Aur tamdm shahr men hangdma 
had, aur los daurke jam'a hilo; aur 
Pfilus ko pakarke haikal ke biliar 
ghafiitd; aur filfaur darwaze baud kiye 
gayo." 

31 Aur jab we us ka qatl ke darpai 
tho, fauj ke sardar ko khabar pabun- 
chi, ki tamdm Vnrusala'm mett huilar 
ho rahii hai. 

W' uh usi dam aipdhion aur au- 
baiiaron ko leke un par daurd : aur wo 
sarddr aur sipdhfon ko dpkhkc Piilus 
ke m Ani t. 1 se hiz do. 

Tab sardar no nazdik dkc uso 
giriftar kiya, aur do zanjinm sebdudh- 
no kd hukni diya ; aur puebhd, ki Yih 
kaun kai, aur us ne kya kiyd ? 

34 Aur bhir racn ae ba'ze kuchh 
chillde, aur 1 '.iV, ■ kuchh : so jab shor 

gul ke sabab kuchh haqiqat daiyaft 
na kar sakd, to hukm diya, ki Use 
qil'a men le jao. 

35 Aur jab sErhi tak pahunehd, tu 
logon ke hujam ke sabab aipdhion ko 
use iitliaua para. 

__ Kyurjki dangal cliilldta hua us 

ke piekhe pard, ki Use utha dai. 

37 Aur jab Piilus ko qil'a ke andar 

jdoe bn, us ue sarddr se kabd, Kyd 

ujbe ijdzat hai ki tujh se kuchh 

kahiin? Us no kabd, Kyd Yunani 

jdntd hai ? 



Pilus layan' karta 

38 Pas tu wuh Mieri nahin, jo iri 
dinon *o Age fanod uthAke un chAr 
bazar dakuon ku jan^a! men le gavA ? 

39 £q1ub iie kahA, ki Main Yahudi 
Adini nun, Qiliqiya ke shaiir Tarsus 
nAme ki, jo kam mashhiir nahin hai, 
rahnewala hun ; main teri minnat 
kartd hiin, ki ratrjhe logon ae boluc ki 
ijazitt do. 

40 Jab i«s ne use ijAzat di, Pfilue ne 
airlii par khare hoke togOBj ko Mtb se 
isfiArakiyd. Jab eab cnup chdp hi<c, 
wuk 'Ibrani z uban men bomfl lagd.aur 
kaki, 

XXII BA'B. 

Al bhASo, aur ai aba, mera 'uzr jo ab 
tuui M kartd hiit} sana. 

2 Jab unhon no annA ki 'Ibrani 
zubAn rnen un M bolta hai, to aur bhi 
chup huo. S. i iis ne kahd, 

3 Main to Yahudi admf hun, QiU- 
q>ya ke sbahr Tarsus men twiidd hiU, 
lekjn isi shahr men mori parwarit>h 
mil, nur Gamaliel ke aadamon par 
bapdadoii ki shari'at ki birffctcirj mes 
tarbiyat pdi, aur KhudA ko liyo aisa 
gairatiuand tha, jaise tum aib dj ko 
diri lio. 

4 Chundnchi main ne mardon aur 
Guratan ko bamlbke aur qaii.}-kbaiic 
men dAlke is tariqa-\vAl<in koniaut tak 
satAyd. 

5 Baiki sardar kabin, aur huzurgon 
ki s4ri jama'at, bhi mero gawAh hain : 
ki un se main tahimu ke liye kbatt 
loke Dimishq ko rawana hiiA, ki jitne 
wahAn bon, unhen bhi bandlikc Yarii- 
sakm men lilin, ta ki saza paivon. 

6 Par jab main chala jAti, aur 
Dimishq ke nazdik pahuiicha thd, to 
aisi hf.d, ki do pahar ke qarib cki-ek 
bara nur Asmat, so mere girdAgird 
ckarnka. 

7 Aur main zarnin par gir pari, 
aur AwAz suni, jo mujhe kabti tbi, ki 
Ai fitilus, Siilua, tti inujlio kviui satata 
hal? 

8 ilain ne jawAb diyft, ki Ai Khu- 

185 



A'AMA'L, XXII. ki kyunkar mwid k&d. 

dAwand, tii kauo hai? Us nc mujh 
.-t- kiil.a, Main Yisii' Nisan hi'nj, ji.st- 
tu Balita W. 

9 AurmeresAthionne nurtodekhd, 
aur dar gayc; lekin us ki awaz, Jo 
mujhe bulat» thA, na suni. 

10 Tab main ne kalis, Ai Khudd- 
wand, main kyikaruri? Khud'awand 
ne niujh se kaiti, Uth, aur Dimifchq 
mcrj jji; wahan Kib' kuclih jo tere 
ksite ki; liye muqarrar huA hai, tujho 
kahi jSega. 

11 Aur jab main us mir ke jalai fce 
sabab na dekh sakA, to apne sAtbion 
ke mere hit h tbAmbno ac main 
Dimishq men AyA. 

12 Aur Hautiniah ndm ok tnanj, jo 
shari'at ke muwifia <limliir, aur wahan 
ke Hb rahncwilo Yabudion ke nazdik 
nek-iiiiin thA, 

13 Mere pas AyA, aur kbare hnke 
lujhe kaba, Ai bhai Silius, phir binA 
o. Aur usi gbari main ne us par 

nigAli k S. 

14 Aur us ne kahA, HamAre bAp- 
dadon ke KJiudA ne Lujh ko Age se 
barguzidaki.ya,ki tu tu ki niarni jAne, 
aur us KAstbdz ko dekbe, aur us ke 
muiih ki awdz auno ; 

15 Kyunki t^ uskeliyesabAdmion 
ke Agc uu bAton ki, jo tii ne dekhfii", 

r sunin, gawAh hogA. 

10 Aur ab kytm der karta hai? 
uthke baptisma le, aur KbudAwm.] 
kA nam lgke apno gunihon ko dho 
dil. 

17 Aur jab main Yarusalam men 
pbir AyA, aur haikal nten dn'A mAngtA 
thA, aisd hiia, ki main bekbud ho 
BW< ; 

18 Aur na ko dokhA, jo mujho 
kahtd thA, Jaldi kar, aur shitab 
Yanisalam so nikal jd; kytinki teri 
gawdhi mere haqq men ipjn'il na 
karengc. 

19 Aur main ne kaha, Ai Khtidi- 
wand, wo Ap jAnte h ain ki" main 
unben, jo tujh par iman Ide, qaid 



Pulm bayan harta A'AMA'L, XXIII. 

karla, aur har ek 'ibddat-khdne mvQ 
koro mdrtd thd : 

20 Aur jab tere sbahid Staliinus kd 
khiin bahaya gityd, main bhi wahdn 
k Lara, aur us ke qat I par ra>,i tha, aur 
tis ku aatilon ko kapron ki khabarddri 
karti tha. 

21 Aur us ne miijli H kahd, Ja, ki 
main tujhe {jair-qaunion ku pas diir 
bhejiirj^d. 

22 We isi bdt tak uh ki sun rahe 
tab apni Awaz buland karke ciiilliic, ki 
Aise ko ramin par ko uthd dai, ki us 
ka jit-a raknd muuiihili uahhj. 

23 Aur jab we chilldte, aur apno 
kaprc phciiktc, aur khdk nrato the, 

24 Sard»r no hukm diya, ki Use 
qil'a niog le jdwen, aur faniiiiyd, ki 
Use kore marka azmawtii ; ta ki use 
ma'liim ho ki we kis sahab us ki zidd 
mm yt'ijj chillde. 

2o Jab we use tasmon eo jakarte 
the, Piilus nc uh mibaddr sg, jo pds 
kbard tha, kaba, Kyd tumben jain 
hai ki ok ddmi ko, jo Riimi aur bc- 
qusur hai, kore maro ? 

26 Subadar yili sunke aftyi, aur 
sarddr ko khabar di, aur kaha, Kha- 
bardar, tu kyd kiyd chalita hai 
kynuki yib ddmi Bdtni hai. 

L'7 Aur fiarddr ne pas ake tu ko 
kaha, Mujbe linl-il, kyd tii Kuini hai? 
Uh qo kahd, Hdn. 

28 Bardar u-' jawdh diya, ki Main 
ne bahut naqd deke yih rutba hasil 
kiyd. Pfilus ne kaha, Main tu alat 
hi puida lu'ia. 

2!i Filfaur we, jo us ko dzniaya 
chdhto the, us ee ban ac; aur sarddr 
bhi, yih jdukar ki wuh TCumi hai, aur 
main ne use bdndhd, dai gayd. 

30 Subh, ko ia irdua sc ki haqiqat 
ko jdne, ki Yahudi us par kyd da'wd 
rakhu: hain, ub ki Banjirag kholin, aur 
hukm diya, ki aardar kabin aur uu ki 



ki ky-unkar murid Aiii't. 
XXIII BA'B. 
rjlAB P&lus ue Sadr Majlis ki taraf 



I nazar karke kahd, Ai bhdio, 

main aj tak kamal liikniyati m Khuda 
ke huzur chald. 

2 Tab sarddr ktihin Flandnidh ne 
un ko, jo ub ko pas k hara the, Imkm 
diya, ki Us ke lnunh par thaperd 
mdren. 

3 Tab Fulua no us ko kaha, Khudd 
tujhe maregd, ni sul'edi pheri hui 
diwdr: kyd ui hai thd. hai, ki shari'at 
kt- MHivviiti'j inera, infsdf ka», MI 
shari'at ko barkhildf mujlie rodrne ka 
hukm deta hai'? 

4 Unlum no, jo pdfl khare the kahd, 
Kyd ni Khuda ko sardar kdhiu ko 
burd-kahtkhai? 

5 Piilus nekaha, Ai bhdio, main ue 
na jana ki sarddr kahin hui ; kyunki 
likhi liai, ki Apni riaum ke sarddr ko 
burd mu t kau. 

6 Aur Pulus yih janke ki ba'ze 
Sadiiqi aur ba'za Fariwi hain, Majlis 
men pukdrd, ki Ai bhdio, nuig Pa- 
risi, aur Farisi kd betd hiin ; 



nilirdog kl babat umraed aur i|iy;i- 
niat ke sabab mujh j>ar ilzdm iiiti 



iota 



7 Jab us ne yib kaha, Farision aur 
Raduijiou men kikrdr hui : aur Majlis 
nioii plult pari. 

y Kyunki Saduqi to kahte haig, ki 
qiydmat nahin, aur na iirislita, na ruh 
hai : par Fanai donon kd iqrdr karte 
hain. 

9 Aur bard shor hud : aur FarUiou 
ko firqo ke fnqih uthe, aur yun kahke 
jhflgarne lage, ki Ham is ddtni men 
kuchh burdi nalitn pdte hain ; ]iar agar 
kifi ruli yd nrishte ne is se kaldm kiyd 
lin, to ham Khuda sc na lareii. 

10 Aur jab bari takrir hiii, to sar- 
lar ne, is khauf sc ki inabadd Pulus u n 

phara jawe, fauj ko hukm diyd, ki 



Bari Badr Majlis jam'a howen; phir.Utarke use un ke liicli B6 zabardnsti 

Piilus konSche le jake un ke bieh ineri nikdle, aurqiramcn le dwt*. 

khard kiyd. | 11 Aur uni rat K huddwand ne us ke 



Pulvs Sadr Mujtis ke age A'AMA'L, XXIII. 



pas dke kaha, Ai Tulus, klidtir-jnrii'a 

rakli : ki jaisa tii iic raeri bdbat Yani- 

Mtam nien gawdhi di, waisa lii tujlii 

1 Btiin mca bhi (jawabi dena zariir hai. 

1L' Aur jab iJin luU, ba'ze Yahudion 
ne ckd karkc la'nat ki qasani khiU, 
aur kalut, ki Juli tak liam Tiilus ko 
nal! na kartm, mi kuclih khdegge na 
jiicijge. 

18 Aur we, jinhon no dpas men yili 
pu mi kMf, ciiafiH so ziyai.ia tho. 

14 So unhoij ne sarddr kahinoij aur 
buaurgon ke pas jake kuli», Haru ne 
la'nnt ki aanm khai, ki jab tak Palu* 
koqati na karen, kuehli nachakhorjge. 

16 l'as ab tuni Sadr Majlis warnet 

':■■ sardar se 'arz karo, ki IcaJ «u» 

ure pas la.vc, p iya tum uh ki 

i i ilr ki Laqfqat ziyada darvali 
fBji, chAlit*- ho : par ham taiyar hain 
ki us ke pahuuche ae pahlo use haldk 
karen,. 

16 Aur Puitis kd bhdnjd im ki «hat 
ka hal Biinkc chaltt, aur qil'a men jake 
PtUuskokhaKu di. 

17 Tab Piilus ne subaddron men. se 
pk ko bulakc kana, Ia jawdn ko sardar 
ku pas le jja ; ki wuh ubc kucbh kahd 
ohahta lif.i. 

18 Pm wuli nse aardar ]ias le gflya, 
aur kahd, Piilus qaidi ne mtrjbe apne 

E as bahikc darkhwdat ki, ki is jawan 
ci tere pas latin, ki tujh so kuchh kaha 
clialita hai. 

19 Tah aardar nc us ka hath pa- 
karke, aur uae alag le jdke, jnidilia. 'k i 
W uh kvd hai, jo mujh se kala chahta 
hai? 

20 Vb no kaha, Yahudion ne cka 
k iya hai, ki tujh sc diirkliwist karen, 
ki k:il l'iilus ko Sadr Majlis men, Idwe, 
§a?i kj we ns ke Ml kiaur bhi tahqi- 
qai kiya chdhtu hain. 

21 Pas tu un ki namaniyo, kyiiiiki 
un merj chaiis shakhs se ziyada us ki 
AU mem lage hain, iiiiiii.u nc h'nat 

... ..... M.'";: L_i i.: I. 



ah t.'iiyar, | 



hazii- kota, 
r tere wa'da ke muulazir 



haiij. 

22 Tab sardar ne jawdn ko rukh- 
sat kiya, aur hnkm diya, ki Kisi se 
niat kah, ki tii ne initjii par yih zahir 
kiya. 

23 Aur do flubaddrnrj ko pas bulake 
kahd, Do sau aipahi, aur sattar sawar, 
aur do san blidlebardar, Mtt ki' tfjsri 
^biiri taiyar kar rakho, ki Qaisariya ko 
jdwerj ; 

21 Aur jiinwar bhi ha/ir karo, ki 
PtUuB ko aawttr karke Felikaa hakim 
ke pas sahih ^alamat pahunchfiwcn. 

25 Aur is mazrmin ka khatt likha : 

26 Qlaudiu« Liisias ka Felikas 
hakim bahddurko salam. 

27 Is mard ko Yahudion ue pakra, 
aur use halak karne par the ; par-main 
yih ma'him karkc ki Riimi hai, fauj 
samet charh gaya, aur OM chhura 
laya. 

28 Aur jab cliaha" ki daryiift kar- 
i'in, ki uiihon ne kis Rabab se us par 
nalisli ki, to use un ki Sadr Majlis mcn. 
le gaytf ; 

29 Aur daryaft kiya ki we npni 
shari'at ke maidorj ki babat us par 
udlisli kavle hain, p:ir us ka koi cpimir 
nahin thahrd jo o,atl ya qaid ke laiq 
fao. 

Aur jab mujho ittila' hflf, ki 
Yahudi is mard ki [ikat mcB lajc ham, 
main nc use jal'l tere pas bht'j diya, aur 
us ke muilda'ion ko bin hukiu diyi, ki 
tere huziir us par da'wi karon. Ziyada 
salam, 

31 Pas aipaliirm ne, hukm ke mu- 
wafin, Piilus ko Lftke ritofl rat Anti- 
patris men jiahunchayi. 

32 Aur dttfre din sawaroi} ko us ke 
sath rawana karkc iip qil'a ko phire. 

33 Uiihon ne Qaitciriya mag pa- 
hunoliko hAkim ko khatt diyA, aur 
Pulus ko bhi us ke age hazir kiya. 

34 Hakim ne khatt parhke piichhd, 



hai, k i jabtak use halak. ki Wuh kissiiba'ka hai? 'Aur rnaliim 
-akarcL>. na khaenge ua pienge ; aur (karkc ki Qiliqiya kd haij 



Putus Fdikm ke dje 



A'AMA'L, XXIV. apni ta'Um ki kytfai karta. 



i Kflha.Jab tera mudda'i bhi bd/ir 
honge, main turi Buiuinga. Aur hukru 
diya, ki Uw Herodls ki bargdh men 
qaid raklum. 

XXIV BA'B. 

PA'NOH din ke be'd Harianlah sar- 
dAr kdhio ba'z buicurgon. nur Tar- 



tullus nan» ok wakil ke sath wahdn. 
avd, aur hakim ke age PiIIub par naliBh 
ki. 

2 Jab wuk butaya gaya, Tartullus 
larydd kame lagi, aur kahA, Ralihaz 
is ke ki tore waaflo hamen, hari cliain, 
aur teri rtur-andeshl ae is qaurn ke 
liyp intizdm ke achchhe BUJAm bottt 
hain, 

3~Ai Felikas bahAdur, hani is ko 
liar waqt aur har jagah kamal sauki 
guzar! ke sAtu. mau lete hara- 

4 Par is liye ki tujhe ziydda taklif 
n» dan, maini teri ruiuuai kartA hurj, 
ki tu apni milirbani ae hamari do ok 
baten ROH. 

6 Ki ham iui is mard ko mufsid, aur 
tamam dnnya ke Hab Yaliudion men 
fitna-angez, aur Ndaarion ki bid'at kft 
ek sarda'r pAyA ; 

6 Ua ne baikat ko nApAk karne kA 
bhi qaad kiyA, aur ham ne tine pakra, 
aur chaha ki apni shari'at ke muwd- 
fiq ub k! \iddiat karen. 

7 Par Lusias sarddr alce bari zabar- 
dastl ko sath u«e h amar e hAtuon 
chhiu le gaya. 

8 Aur ua ke nmdda'ion ko hukm 
diya, ki tere paa jaen : so td tfp tahqiq 
karke in sab baton ko, jin ki baru un 
par nali-h kartu ham, khud usi 88 
daryaft kar «akta hai. 

9 Aur Yalnidion no bhi mAn liya, 
aur kahd, ki Y.! hdlen. yiinhlri hain. 

10 TnbPulus ne, jabhAkinisebolne 
ka jahara pitya, jawab diya, Azhaski 
main iauta bun ki td bahu t banci] §e 
is (janin ka hakim bai, main bari 
kbaiir-jiima'l se ftjmi'tUBr bayan karlii 
nun : 

11 Ky utiki tu daryaft kar sakti 

188" 



hai, ki ti6rah diri se ziydda nahin luic 
ki main. Yarusalaiu uicy 'ibadat karne 

gfty*- 

12 Aur unhon ne haikal inenniujhe 
kiai ke sAth liahs karte, ya logon men 

lawid nthdtena ]>aya, na 'ihddat-kbau- 
otj mtm, na shalir roeg ; 



13 Aur na in bdton ko, jin ki we 
mujh _par ab nAlish. karte bain, sabit 
kar sakto hain. 

14 Leldn turo edmhnc yih iqrdr kar- 
ti hdn, ki jia rab ko we bid'&t kahte 
hain, ils( men apOfl bapiiidon ke Khu- 
,l(i ki bandagi kaiti, aur sab kuchh jo 
sliari'at aur iiabion ki kitaborj Uien 
tikba hai, yaqin janta: 

15 Aur Kliiida 88 yih ummed rakh- 
tri hiin, jis ko we bhi mau leto hain, ki 
murdotj kt qiyamat hogi, ky& ra^toa 
kyii iia^rastoij ki. 

16 Aur main i»i sababkoshitri kar- 
ta hi'in, ki hauiwha Kliuda aur atlmion 
ke age meia dii mujhe malimat na 
karo. 

17 Ab kai baras ba'd main apni 
qaum ko khairiit [«ihunchino, aur nazr 
charhanc "aya lilin. 

18 Is par Asia ke ba'ze Yahudion no 
mujhe haikal inon taharat kiye hiie 
paya, par na to dangal ko sdth bote, 
ua faaad uthate dekha, 

19 8o iiaheri tere sfimhne Mzir 
hona, aur agar un ka m n j h par kuclih 
da'wa bo, nalish karmi wajib tia, 

20 Ya yihi kbud kahiCB, ki jab main 
Sadr Majlis ke .samhuc kliara tha, 

iUJh TUtfa kuchh badl pai ; 

21 Magar isi ek bit ki bdbat, jo 
main neun men khara hoke pukani, 
ki Mtirdon ki qiyamat ke «bab aj 
mujh }iar iTzam lio tA hai. 

•H 1'Vlikan ne, jo is tariqa ki biiten 
khiib jaiita tha, yih stinke unhen 
t'dkliir mm dala, aur kahi, Jab Lusi- 
as 'fauj kd sarddr Awe, to main tum- 
hArc iouqaddamo ki *ab bal. n !;d(.al 
kaningd. 

23" Aur Kubadar ko bukm diya, ki 



A'AMAT,, XXV. 
HIT drAm 

kisi 



Putus ka, 

?i';]us ki kbabardari kflr, aur 
■_. rakh, siur uh ke logoti men. 
-■ m khidmat kanie,yA us paBAne 
m mau'a mat kar. 

24 Aurchancl roz ba'd Felikas do 
»pni joni Prrisilla ke sAth, jo Yahndin 
ihi, Akc Ptfli.is ktf hu)a Meja, aur oaao 
llaalh ke dfn k! suni. 

86 J';ir jad «uli rAstbazi, aur par- 
hezgdri, aur ayanda 'adAlat ki l>dbat 
bd«*n kar rabi tha, to Felikas Bfl 
khaufkluikc jawab diyd, Is waqtjA; 
fur*Rt pake tujhe phir bulatinga. 

2R Pai us ko yib ummed bhi thi, 
ki Pulu« se kuchh naqd pAwe, ta ki 
us ko chhor de : is Bye uae aksar bti- 
lata, aur us ko sAth ptftogA kartA tha. 

27 Aur jab do baras guzre, Purkius 
Festus, Felikas ka qAim ruaqam ho 
AyA: aur Felikas yih chAhko ki Ya- 
iuidion ko apna raanimin kare, Priius 
ko qaid iii men chhor paya. 

XXY BA'B. 

PAS Festus sfiba men ddkhil hoke 
tin roz ha'd Qa.isariya se Yaru- 
niarj) ko gaya. 

2 Tab sarda-r kabin aur Yahiidion 
ko ra,ison ne us ke dge Ptilus par nA- 
lisli k i ; 

3 Aur us ke muqaddanie men yih 
milirbani cbdhl ki use Yarfisalam 
men hnla bheje : aur ghfit rucn, tbe ki 
uh ko rAh men niar dalerj. 

4 Par FtfftUB ne jawab diyd, k i 
Pfilua to Qai«iriya hi men qaid rabe, 
aur main ap jald wahAn jAurjga ; 

5 Aur kaha, Pas tum men se jinben 
maqdu> ha sath ohakm ; aur agar is 
shnklis uien kuchh badi hai, us par 
B&Uu) karen. 

6 8o un ke danniydn din daa ek 
rahko Qaisariya ko gayd ; aur dda- 
re din 'addlat ke takht par liaithke 
hulun diya, ki Pulus ko liwen. 

7 Jab wuh hazir h<U, we Yahudi, 
jo Yartisalam su de the, us ke gird 
khare hoke Pulua par bahutorl aur 

189 



F\gtut ko agojand. 
bbftj'i nAJishen karne lape, jo sAbit na 
kar saken. 

8 Us dg apnd 'nar knrke kabA, ki 
Main ne na Yahiidion ki ahnri'at ka, 
aur na haikal kA, aur n» Qais»r kA, koi 
gunAh kiyA hai. 

9 Par Festua ne yih clidhkc ki 
Y;il)iiili- m ko ajuiii manmvm kare, 
PfiJus ku Jamih dek» kahd, KyA tu 
chahtd hai ki Yarfisalam ko jae, aur 
wahAn mere Ag« iri bdton ki bAbat 
terA insaf hn 't 

10 Par Pulus ne kaha, Mairj Qaisar 
ke takht i 'adilat ku Age khnrA hurj ; 
chAhiye ki yakin merA ins&f ho; Ya- 
hudioQ kA main ne kuchli oitttil nahin 
kiyA, chunnncLi tti bhi kinib jAntA 
hai. 

11 Par agar cjusurwAr hdn, aur 
maia n« kuchh qatl ka lAiq kiyA, to 
mArejAne ne inkAr nahin kartA; par 
jo un batori ki, jin ki we mujh par 
nAIish karte hain, kuchh asi nahin, to 
koi mujh ko un ke hawala nahin kar 
sakta. Main Qfttnr ki iluhAi detA hun. 

12 Tab Festus ne salAhkAron se 
maslahat karke iawAb diya, ki Tu ne 
Qaiaar hi ki duliAi di; Qaisar hi ke 
I-as jAegA. 

13 Aur kuchh diu "bito Agrippa 
badshAh aur Barnitn' Qais4iriya men 
Ae, ki Festus ko salam karun. 

14 Aur jab ka,i din wahAn raho 
the, Festus ne Polo» kA hai bad«hah 
se zikr kiyA, aur kaba, Ek shakfut hai 
jise Felikas qaid men chhor guya : 

15 Us par, jab main Yarfisalam 
men thA, sardAr kAhinTjii aur Ya- 
hfidion ko buzurgon no iiAlish ki, aur 
cbAhA ki uh par sazA ki hukm diyi 
jae. 

16 Unhcn main ne jawab diyA, ki 
Rfimion kd dastfir naliin ki kisfAdmi 
ko halakat ke liye hawala kare-j, jab 
tak ki uiudda'i 'alaihi apne muddalta) 
ke rfi-ba-rt na ho, aur da'wd kA jawAb 
na dene pdwe. 

17 So jab we yahan bdham hoe, 



Qauar H <fnhdl dettd. A'AMA'L, 

main ne kuchli dor na ki, baiki diisrc 
din takhl par baithkar liukm diya, ki 
L's niard ko lio. 

18 Par jab us ke mwlda'i khare 
lilit?, unhon ne us ke haqq mm aisd 
koi ilxam pcsL na kiva, jia ka mujhe 
khiydl tlia: 

19 Baiki apne din aur kisi Yisii' ki 
bdbat, jo uiar gaya, jiso Pulus kahta. 
thd ki zinda hai, ns ne bahs kartu the. 

20 Jab main is tarah ki takrir se 
shakk men para Iba, us se piichbd, 
Eyii tu Yarusala.ni nien jdne ko razi 
hai, ki waliari in batoii ka faisala lio? 

21 Par jab Piilus no duhai di, ki 
mera insaf Jandb i 'A'li hi ki tahi]jq 
par nmuquf rabo, main ne liukm diya, 
ki jab lak use Qaisar ku pas na bbej 
liun, us ki nlgahbani karcii. 

22 Tab Agrippa ne Fwstwa se kaki. 
Main bhi chahta liun ki is admt ki 
sunun. W uh bola, Kiil tu us ki siuiega. 

23 Pas diare din, jab Agrippa aur 
Baniiqi hari uban o uhaukat se, sardar- 
on aur ubahi ke ra.ison ke siilh, di- 
wankbino nien dakbil Liic, Festus ke 
lmkiii se Pulus ko lac. 

24 Tab Festus ne kaba, Ai Agrippa 
bddshah, aur sab mardo jo hamare sath 
hazir ho, tnm is ko dekhte lio, jis ki 
babat YahVidiim ki sari guroli Yani- 
ealam men aur yaban more pichlie 
pari, aur duU&Li bai, ki Us ki age ko 
jita rahnd wajib nahin. 

25 Par jab mujh se daryitft hud ki 
us no kuchh qatl ke laiq nahin kiya, 
aur us ne dp Jaiiab i 'A'li ki duhai di. 
to main nc thand, ki use bbej dun. 

26 Aur mujhe us ke haqq mori ki^i 
bat kd yaqiu nahin, ki apne khuda- 
wand ho likhi'm. Is waste main no 
use tumhare age, aur kbass kar terw 
huzur, ai Agrippa badsbah., b.a»ir kiya 
bai, \i ki tahqiqat ke ba'd kuehh likli 
sakiin : 

27 Kyunki qaidi ko bhejnd, aur 
nalishen bhi, jo us par hain, na batdna, 
mujhe na-munisib ma'h'mi liota liai. 

190 



xxvi r.A'ii. 

1AB Agrippa ne Pulus se knhi. 
.L Tujhe apnd 'uar karne ki ijdzat 
bab Tab Pulus hith phaildke apni 
'uzr yiin bayan fcartie Ingd: 

2 Ki Al had.shdh Agrippa, mi Bab 
baton ki bdbat, jin ka Yahudi mujh 
j»r da'wa karte hain, aj tero s;imhne 
uzr ksirua apni sa'id'at jdnla bfin ; 

;I Khasa is liye ki tu Yahudion ki 
Bab raamon aur maslon se waqif hai; 
is fiabab main teri rninnat kartii hiin, 
ki tahammurne merf sun. 

4 Pas nierl ciial ko jawdni sg, ki 
kis tarah ehuru' so ipnl qanm ke 
darmiyau Yariisalaru nn:ii nibahta 
raha, yih aab Yabiidi jantf hain : 

5 8o we mujhe shurii' xo janke 
a^ar chahen to grawahi defl, ki maiij 
Farisi lioke ham logori ke mazhab ke 
sab se parhezgar firqc ku muwdfiq 
z'mdagi kfttta thd. 

fi Aur ab us wa'de ki ummed ke 
eabab, jo Khuda ne hamare MpdadcO 
se kiya tha, nniin 'lulalat men bazir 
k iya gaya- hun : 

I "Us bl wa'de ko pAne ki ummed 
par hamare barah firqe dil o jan 6e 
rat din banda-zi kiya karto hain. Isi 
ummed ko Siibab, ai bailsliah Agripp;i, 
Vulimli !ii'.ij!i par ffcryAd karte bain. 

y Yih bat kyi'iy r»-4'atibar samajhte 
ho, ki Kliudti murdon ko jilat-a. hai? 

9 Han, main ne bhi eamjha ki 
Yisii' Kasari ke nam ki liahut bar- 
kbilafi karna mujh i«r wajib hai. 

10 So bhi main ue Yaruaalam meg 
kiya : aur sardar kdbinon ne ikhtiyiir 
pako liahut se muqadd:ison ko ijiiid- 
kbaiio men band kiya; aur Jab qail 
iiiye jdtn. the, main ham i bliartd tlia. 

II Aur bar 'ibai.lat-kluuic men ak- 
sar unhen sana dilake zabardastl un 
se kufr kahwata ; aur uu par nibayat 
janin knrke begauon ke shahron tak 
aatdta tbd. 

12 Is hal men jab sardar kdhi 



J'jrijip'i ke httzir 

W ikhtiydr aur parw. 

&faalabq kn jdtd thd; 

13 Do pahar ko, ai badsh&h, main 
ne rdh men dekhd, ki dsnidn no ok nur, 
siinij se barraq, mere aur mere B&thion 
ke gird chamaktd bni. 

14 Jab ham sab zamhi par <-ir ]«trc, 
main ne ok awdz suni, jo niujli w 
bolti, anr 'Ibrani y.uUlu men kahti tbf, 
ki Ai yubin, Sdlus, tfi mujhu kyun 
satata hai? paiue ki kil par irit in&rniL 
tore liye mu&hkii b&i 

15 Main. ne kaha, Ai Khuddwand, 
tu bina hai V Wub bold/Main Stoff 
hurj, jise tu satata hai. 

113 Lekin uth, aurapnepdnwoTi par 
khani ho: kyiinki maiii ia liye tujh 
imr zdhir lnia, ki tujho uu chizoii kd 
khidini aur gawdh tjialir:ivm, jinbey 
tu ne dekhd, aur jo main tujh par 
z.iiliir kariingd; 

17 Aur maiii tujhe bachdiirjgd U 
qaum aur gair-qaumon ae, jin ke pas 
ah tujhe bhejta hiiii, 

IH Ki tn" ao k/ dukhen kliol de, ti 
ki andherc se ujalo, aur Shaitdu ke 
ikhtiydr se Khuda ki taraf ph iren, aur 
gundhon ki nni'afi, aur inuqaddatiun 
men miras pdwen, tu inidu ke Vttfle 
jo mujh par hai. 

19 Ih liye, ai badshab Agrinpa, 
main us aumani royd kd mi-farmdii na 
luidT 

20 Baiki pakde utihog.jo Dimisbq, 
aur Yarrtsalani, aur sdre mulk Valid- 
diya men haiu, aur gair-<{iHiii]'m ko 
bhi, chitdyd, ki tauba karen, aur 
Khudi ki taraf phireQ, aur tauita ke 
muwdiiq 'amal karen. 

21 Iiihin baton ke sabab Yalnidiori 
no uiujbe hnikal men jwkarke mere 
qatl ka qasd kiyii. 

22 Par Khudd so madad pdkc aj 
tsk khard Mrfl, nur cbhote )>are pir 
piwahi detd, aur kuchh naluri kasta 
In'm, magac we bdterj jiu ke wdtu' 
hono ki khabar nabit 
bin di hai': 

191 



VAMA'U XXVII. 
gi l«ike 



apitA 't'zr bayan ketrna. 

23 Ki Masih dukii uthdwcgd, aur 
murdofl mm ae pahli ji uthuga, aur ia 
qaum aur guir-qaumi>n ko nur dikbld- 
wegd. 

21 Jab wub iipnd "uar yi'm kartd 
tba, Fostus nu bari liwaz se kahd, Ai 
1 lulus, tu di wan a hai ; bubut 'ilm ne 
tujh o diwana kiya. 

25 Wuh bola, Ai Fcs'tus bahddur, 
main diwdna uahin ; Iwiiki Kacbdi aur 
lioshydri ki baten kiihta liun ; 

26' Ki bddfihdii, jis ke samiiue ;ib 
main lit-dliaralc boltd bui), y ih baton 
i:inia hmj | baLki luujbe yaqia hai, ki 
in bdton men se koi nu par ohUpi na- 
hin ; kyiinki yih mdjard to kom: meij 
nsag htm. 

27~Ai badshdh Agrip]M, kyd td 
nabiorj par yaipn lata¥ main jantd 
hrin ki yaqiu iatd hai. 

28 Tab Agrippe ne Piilua se kabd, 
Nazdik bal ki teru samjluiiie se main 
Masilii ho jdfin. 

29 Pulus bold, Khudd kare, ki sirf 
tu bi nnbin, baiki sab jo dj muri suut« 
bain, faqat naatiik uahin, luilki hilkull 
aiwe howen, JalsA main b\in, bagair in 
zanjiron ke. 

30 Jab ub ne yih kaba tba, bddalidh, 
aur hikiin, aur Harniqi, aur un ky 
hani-niahiD utho : 

31 Aur alag jake ok diisrc se baton 
karne aur kahne lage, ki Yih ddtni 
aisa kucbii nahin karld, jo qfltl yd 
qaid ke ldiq ho. 

32 Aur AfilipMi nu Fesfcuj se kahd. 
Agar Qaisar ki iluhdi na detd, to yih 
ddmi cltlnit Kaktd. 

XXVII BA/B. 

AUR jab muqarrar hua ki hamja- 
bdz |ar Iidlia ko jden, uuhon no 
l'ulua aur kitue aur qatdion ku Jiilius 
ndin AusustUBi paltan. ke ek siibadar 
ke hawdla kiyi. 

2 Aur ham Adramutteui jahdz par, 

aur Muad ue jo Asia ke kiitdra kindre jdiie par thd, 

[tliarhke rawdna hue ; aur Aris tarkhua 



PtWws ka jahae y<w 

Macmdilm TMoahadaakf hnmAre sAth 

tha. 

3 Drisre din hnvn Bsldi Tm _ 
hunche. Aur J61iii8 ne Piilus «e 
khusli-suluki karke ijAzat di, ki apne 
doston ke pas jake cliain kare. 

i WaMfl n rawAna hokfi Kupn 
ke niche niche guzre, ia liyo ki hawA 
mukhdlif thi. 

5 Alir jab ham Qiliqiya aur Pamfii- 
liyriki: ssitmmdarfloguCTO the, to Munl 
nam Luqm ke shahr men Ae. 

6 Wahan subadAr ne IskandariA ka 
ek jahaz Italia ko jfito hue pako ha- 
men iis par bithaya. 

7 Aur jab bam bahut din Abis t a 
AliiHta ciiiilo, aur mushkil se Kuidi 
ke sAmhne Ae, to is Jiye ki hawa b; 
men Age barhuo na doti thi, Qretc ke 
niche niche Salmone ke sAnihne hoke 



8 Aur us se ba-mushkU guzarkc 
kisi maqam men, jo Husn-Bandar 
kiihlata hai, ao: LasoiA shahr iis ke 
nazdik thA. 

H Itne men, jab bahut waqt guzrd, 
aur ab jahaz ke cbalne men khatra 
parA, is liyo ki roza ka din bhi guzar 
gaya thA, Pulus no unhnn chitAyA, 

10 Aur unhen kahA, Ai mardo, 
main dekht.A Ini n ki is safar ke «Ath 
taklif aur bahut nuqsAn hogA, 11:1 sirf 
bojh aur jahaz ka, baiki hamAri janon 
k;i bhi. 

11 Par srfibadAr no nAkliuda aur 
jahAz ke mAlik ki bdton ko Pulus ki 
baton se ziyada niAnA. 

12 Aur is liyc ki wuh bandar jArA 
kiit-iii' ke liy<: achchhA na thA, aksaron 
ini salah ki ki wahan H bhi rawan» 
hon, ki agar ho sake to Finlke men 
pahuuchko JArA kAten: ki wuh Q.ret« 
kA ek bandar thA, jo dakkhin ]adt- 
chhim aur u Uar pachchhim ke rukh 
tiiA. 

13 Jab kuchh kuchh dakkini hawA 
cbalne lagi, un hon ne yih samajhke 
ki apne matlab ko pahunehe langar | tApii men jA pnrenge. 

192 



A'AMA'L, XXVII. Rum ku j,\„,\ 

uthayA, aur Qrete kA kinAra pakarke 
rawAna h u e. 

14 Lekin thori dur ba'd ek barl tri- 
fAni hawa, jo Yiirukludon kablat.i hai, 
us par se utbke un par ]>ari. 

15 Aur jab jahil/, ikhtiyar men na 
rahA, aur hnw.ika sAmhnA na kar «aka, 
to hain ne use chhor diyA, ki clialA jAe. 

16 Aur ek tAprt ke tale, jis kA nAm 
Qlaudu hai, bah gaye, aur hari inush- 
kil se dongi ko qabu men lAo. 

17 Use unlion no pas lake tadbiren 
kiri, aur jahaz ko niche se bAndhA; 
aur chor-bAlu mcn dha.s jAno ke dar Be 
ham no jaliAz ki pAl wAI utar diyA, 
aur yiirdii (-halo gWW. 

18 Par jab Andhi nc liamcn. nihA- 
yat satAyA, to diisre din unhon ne 
jiihAz ka bojb phcnk diyA. 

19 Aur tisro din ham ne apne hath- 
on se jahil kA asbAb bhi pheukA, 

20 Aur jab bahut dinon tnk na s\\- 
raj aur na Ure nazar Ae, aur bari 
Andhi chalti rahi, Akhir ko bachne ki 
urnmed hamen bilkull na rahi. 

21 Aur bahut fAqnn ke ba'd Pulus 
ne un ke bich men khare hoke kaM, 
Ai mardo, lAzim to thA ki tum meri 
bAt mdnke Qrelo «e rawAna na hotc, 

ir yih taklif aur muptau ua uthAte. 

22 Par ab tumhari miniiat kartA 
hiin ki khAtir-jaiu'a nkliu ; ki tum 
men, se kisi k! jan lui noqsrfll na hogA, 
faqnt jahAa kA; 

n 'Kyunki KhudA, jis kA main hun, 
jis ki baudagi karta hun, us kA 
firishta isi rAt ko mere pAs AyA, 

24 Aur kahA, Ai Piilus, mat dar; 
kyiinki zarnr hai, ki tu Qaisar ke dge 
hAzir ho ; aur, dekh, KlmdA no sah ko, 
jo tero sAth jahAz men sawAr liain, 
i-ujhi! ba.khsh diyA. 

25 Is liye, ai mardo, kli.itir-jam'a 
ho, kyi'mki main KhudA pBt i'atiqad 
rakhtA hun ki jaisA mujh se kahA 
jin y A, waisA h i hogA. 

26 Lekin zariir hai ki ham kivi 



■ t/, u 



■ ;<*!lhl A'AilA']., XXViH 

Jali chandahwin rat ai, ki jiw 



/i, ;./.■ 



.,.(„. 



darya e Adrii BMB takra 
rahe the, iwllu rdt, ko mallaliim m 
atkal bc malam ki.v:i, ki kiwi vmilk ke 
.... '!ii. bfltn j'iilmnche . 

28 Aur pdui ki tuah leko bis pursa 
(•ayil : nur thori age barhke aur phir 

■ «• ]»ndrah pursa paya. 

29 Aur ia gar ac ki mabada chatan- 
"'J I' iir j* P*i«lh jahaz ko pichhe «e 
<bar lancar drile, aursubh ki khwahiah 
inea Ingc roho, 

30 Aur jab mallalion na chaha ki 
jahil/, pir M bhag ja-eri, aur i* bahan* 
sg ki gttlahi tc langar dalcn, ooiiire ku 
samundar men utanic lagc, 

31 Pulus db bundar aur sipahion 
se kaha, Agar ye jaliaz par ua raheri, 
lo tum unhin bach nakte, 

82 Tt\h Bipfhiofl Iie donge kf rassf 
katko asa gira diya. 

;1S Aur din hone na pay.i ki Polusi 
ne eab ki mhmat ki, ki Kuchh khao, 
aur kaha, A'j chaudah din hut ki 
turn rak dekhto ho, aur ftioa kiya, aur 
kuchb kbilna na liyi. 

34 h liye turahari udnnat knrta 
nun, ki kuchli khaiyo, ki is mon tuni- 
iiart nalatnati hai ; kyt'inki tum mon 
H ttiKi ke Bir ka ek bal jhar ua 
jaega. 

35 Aur yih kahke U ne roti li, aur 
mi sal i ke wimhnc Khuda ka nhukr 
kiya, aur torke khano laga. 

36 'lidi we pab kbatir-jam'a ht'ic, 
aur ap blii kuclib kliaya. 

37 Aur sab railake jahaz men do 
mu cbibattnr adini tlie. 

'> Aur unbon m khake aur ser 
hnke anaj ko samundar incn phenk 
. .a. a ir jahaz halka kiya. 

39 Aur jab din hd&, unhorj ne ua 
ramin ko na pahchaiia : par ek kol 
dekha, jis ka kinara hamwar tlia, aur 

I cq m- chahi ki agu ho aake, to 
>aliiz ko uh par charha le jiien. 

10 Sn langar kfttke saniundar mon, 
chhor diye, aur patwaron ki nwsian 
193 



bhi kholin, nur pai hawa kn rukh par 
charhakc kbiftre ki taraf chulo. 

•11 Aur ek jabali, jah(in do «imun- 
dar mite tbe, pahuncliku jabat ko 
«amin par dauri diya; so galabi to 
dliakka khakw |ibaijKgayl, |>ar pichhal 
lahron ke zor ao tiit gayii. 

42 Aur Hipiilui.ii ki yih sahih thi.ki 
rini'liiaj kn m.'ir dili'ti, U ho k) kol 
pairke bbagjaa 

43 Lokin siibnd&r ne, yih chahkc 
ki Pul uh ko baohawo, un kois iradese 
baz rakhil, aur hukm diya, ki J» log 
[.air eakte baiti jiaiilo ki'idke kinare 
par jAeij : 

44 Aur baqi, ha'7.0 takbton par, aur 
ba'ze jahiz ke aur asbab ur. Aur 
yrinliiii ini», ki sah ko Bab aalimat 
kbusliki ]iar pahunehe. 

XXVIII BA'C. 

AUR jab bach nikle the, tab jari 
gaye ki us tapii ka uam Malite 

2 Aur ub ke jangli Mshiiulou 11« 
ham pai uiltayat udhrbani ki : kyiin- 
ki menh ki j hari aur jare ke Sftbab 
unhon ne ag itulgai, aur baui eablion 
ko pan bulaya. 

3 Aur jab Piilus ne likri ka gflttha 
jam'a karkc ag mon dala, ek nag gar- 
mi pako riikla, aur us ke hath par 
lipat gaya. 

4 Jynnhin un janglion ne wuli kira 
us ko hatii par lipta dekhd, ek nts 
diisre se kaha, Yti^inan yib Adini 
kiuini liai, ki agarehi samiindar se 
bach gaya, pH Ilahi iriti^am un jhw 
naluri rfetA hai. 

5 Par us no kfre ko ag men jhatak 
diyi, aur kuchli sara oa paya, 

6 Par we rounlazir the ki wuh toj 
jaegd, ya ekaek marke gir parcga : 
lekin jab der tak intiaar kiy:i, aur 
dckba ki tu ko kuclib zarar na 
pahuneba, to aur khiyal karke kaha, 
ki Yih ek dewt;i hal, 

7 Aur us jagah ke dspas Publiua 
name us tapii ko sardar ki milkiyat 

N 



Pilus Rum men 



A'AMA'L, 



thi ; ub ne hiimerj j*har le jAke tin din 
t&k bsiri dosti ne min mani ki. 

8 Aur yiln huA, ki Publius kd bdp 
tap aur jiryin i lahu se bimAr parA 
thA: Pulus ne lis ke pAs jake du'A 
mAngl, aur ub par hath mkhke ufie 
changa kiyA. 

U Pas jab yih mnshhur buA, tab 
aur log, jo taptl men blmJr the, ae, 
aur change hue: 

10 Aur unhon ne hamari bart 'izzat 
ki ; aur chalte waqt, jo kuchh h amen 
darkAr thi, lAd diya. 

Jl Aur tin mnhine ba'd Iskaudari 
jahAz ]>ar, jo jare bhitr ua tapii men 
raba, aur jis kA nishAn Bfftflknri Iba, 
rawAna hm 

12 Aur BirAipis men lagAke ttn din 
rahe. 

13 Aur wahan Be Rcghim men 
ghiim Ae : aur jab ek ros ba'd dakha- 
niyachali, dusru diu Putiuii meii ae: 

14 Walian ham bhaion ku pake un 
ki minnat se sat din un ke pas rahe: 
aur yunhin Rum ko chale. 

10 Wal.an ae bhii hamar! khabar 
sunke Appius ke diarik aur Tin-SarA 
tak hamaro istiabal ko Ae: aur Pulus 
ne unbes dekhkar Khuda kA ahukr 
luyii. .uii klmnijiun'a ln'iA. 

10 Jab ham Rum men pnhunche, 
su hadir ne qaidion ko risau i khAsu ke 
eiirdar ke hawai a kiya: par Piilua ko 
ijAzat bui ki ukelA ek upahi ke uith, 
jo us kA nigahbAn thA, raba 

17 Aur ynn hiiA, ki titi ro?, ba'd 
Fulua ne Yahudiun ke ra,ison ko bfi- 
ham bulaya: aur jab ikatthe biie, un 
se kaha, Ai bhlio, harchand main no 
ijamn ki aur bApdAdon ki tariqon ke 
khilAf kuchh na kiyA, tau bhi qaidi 
hoke Yanisalam re Rnmton ke hathem 
men hawaJa kiyA gaya. 

18 Unhon ne merA bAl daryAft 
karke chAha, ki mujhe chhor den, 
kyunki mere qatl kA koi wabah ua tha. 

19 Par jab Yabudion ne inukhA- 
lafat ki, main ne lachAri bc Q«isar ki 

194 



XXVIII. Injil U manadi kartd. 

duhfii di; par la waste tiahin, ki apui 
qaum par faryad karae kA mori koi 
sabab hal. 

20 So isi liyo main no tumben 
bulaya, ki tumben dekhtin, aur guft- 
ogii karun ; kyunki larAol bi ki ummcd 
ko eabab main ia zanjir Be bandhi 

L'l Tnbon ne us sti kahi, Ham ne 
mi Valu'uiiya so tere haqq men khatt 
pAe, na bhaion men so kiai ne Akc teri 
kuchh khabar uundi, >A Itadi bayan k(. 

22 Par ham chahte bain ki tujh ae 
sunen, ki lu kyA winiajhtA hai : kyunki 
is firqe ki babat ham ko ma'luni b"ii, 
ki sab kahin use burd kahtc haiii. 

23 Aur jab unhon ne ua ko liye ek 
din thuhnlya, bshaten ua ke dere par 
Ae; us ne un ko Kliuda ki badahAbat 
par gawAbi dy deko, aur MiisA ki 
ahari'at aur nabion kl kitab ge Mastilt 
ke liaqf[ men dab'len IA Jake, aubh se 
shani tak ta'Iim diya kiya. 

24 Aur ba'zoii ne us ki Mttsn ko 
man liya, aur ba'ze be-iniAn rahe. 

25 Jab apa.s men inuttnfi'i na ln'ie, 
we PiihiH ke yih ek bAtkahte hi cliah* 
gaye, ki Riib i Quda ne Yaa'aiyah uahi 
ki ma'rifat hamare bdpdadon ae kbub 
kaha, 

26 Aur farmAya, ki Is qaum ke pds 
jA, aur knh, ki T uni k.inoii ne aunoge, 
par na samjhope : aur Atikhon *<■■ '.lekh- 
oge, par daryAft na karoge : 

27 Kytinki is qaum k£ dil inota 
huA, aur we apnc kAnon Be lincbA 
sunte hain, nur unhon ne apni Ankhcii 
ini'ind lin : ai.sA na ho, ki ankhon Be 
dekhen, aur kanon H Ktiuen, aur dil se 
sarujhen, aur ruju' lAwon, aur main 
iitilien changA karun. 

2S Paa tum ko malfim liowc, ki 
KbudA ki uajAt gair-qauuion ke pda 
bheji gayi, aur we use aun bhi lengi. 

29 Jab us ne yih bAten kahi thiii, 
Yahudi Apas men bahut bahs kartu 
ciialc gaye. 

"■) Aur Piilua puro do baras apne 



Piiln* Injil ki labat RU'MI'ON, I. layan harta,. 

kirae ko ghar mon rnlid, aur eab ko joltok Klmda ki hfclslialiat k( nmnMi 
ua pas Ate th<? qabul klya, ko.rtd, nur Khudawnnd Yisii' Masih ki 

31 Anr kamal be-parw&l m bini rok jbatoij sikhata nih». 



20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord, 

Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook 

has been released s o that we are able 

to learn more about you and wiser versions. 

Please help itto have wide circulation 

Please help the people responsible for 

making this Ebook available. 

Please help them to be able to have more 

resources available to help others. 

Please help them to have all the resources, 

the funds, the strength and the time that they 

need and ask for in order to be able 

to keep working for You. 

I pray that you would encourage them and 

that you protect them physically and 

spiritually, and the work & ministry that 

they are engaged in. 

I pray that you would protect them from the 
Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them 
or their work and projects, or slowthem down. 

Please help them to find Godly friends who 

are able to help. Provide helpful transportation 

for their consistent use. 

Remind me to pray for them often as this 

will help and encourage them. 



Please give them your wisdom and 
understanding sothey can better followyou, 
and I ask you to do 
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen, 



Prayers 



a Few Resources 



Ideas and Ebooks (Livres / Libros) 
For your Consideration 



Glad to have this New Testament ? 



Help us by PRAYING for us !! 



Invest in your own Eternity 
Spend time praying ! 



(thank you) 



SHARE THIS PDF (E-Book) with your Friends 

So thatthey will have a stronger 

Spiritual Life ALSO 



Concerning Christians and Christianity 

1. Christians are those who follow the teachings 
ofJesusChrist. 

2. The Teachings of Jesus Christ are explained in the 
book called the Gospel (Injil) or the New Testament. 

3. The New Testament is the First Place to find and record 

the teachings of Jesus Christ, by those who actually knew Him. 

4. The New Testament has never been disproved 
archeologically or historically. It has and remains accurate. 

5. The New Testament P redicts thatcertainevents will happen in the 
Future, 

7. The ReliabilityoftheOld Testament and the New Testa menta re 
clear indications of the accuracy ofthe New Testament, 

8. J esus C hrist did Notfail in His missionon Earth. 

9. Jesus Christ P re-existed, This means thatHeexisted BEFORE 
the Creation ofthe World. 

10. When C hristians worship J esus C hrist, they are NOT worshiping 
another Human being, 

11. J esus C hrist did notbecomeGod by performing good works, 

12. Christians cannotperform good works in order to go to Heaven. Those 
who wantto find God mustadmit they are notable to be PerfectorHoly, 
and that they need the helpofGod to helpthemgetridoftheirSins, 



14, More than 500 M illion Christians around the world todayare NOT 
Roman Catholic, The Vaticandoes NOT speakfor C hristianity in many 
situations. 



Concerning Christians and Christianity (2) 

1 5. Judas did NOT die in the place of Jesus Christ on 
the cross. 

16. Jesus Christ had no motive to escape his fate. Jesus Christ 
was born to communicate His message of Hope and 
Redemption for mankind. 

1 7. Without the Blood of Jesus, it would be impossible for those 
who believe in Jesus Christ to be saved, to have Eternal Life. 

18. Christians worship ONE God, NOT three Gods, 

19. InTrue Christianity, Historically, the Trinity is = 



a) God the Father 

b) God the Son 

c) God the Holy Spirit 



20. The worship of Angels orCreated Beings, orCreatures oranything 
exceptGod (God the Father, God the Son [Jesus Christ], 

and God the Holy Spirit, isforbidden. 

21. The Trinity IS NOT = Mary, J oseph and J esus 

22. The Trinity is NOT = J esus, J oseph and God the Father 

23. Gabriel is NOTanothernameforJesus Christ. 



24. Anyone can become a Christian if they wantto. 

25. Christianity IS notsomething thatcan bedone EXTERNALLY. 
A person is a Christian becauseof whatthey believe in theirHeart, 
inside of them.Theirown sincerity before God is the true test. 

26. Those who acceptan electronic mark[666] forthe purchaseofgoods, 
in their right hand orforehead are NOT able to become Christians. 



Concerning Christians and Christianity (3) 

Peopleare innocent if they do not know and have no wayofknowing that 
theyaredoing wrong.The Christian God places theknowledgeofgood 
and bad in the hearts of each and every individual. 

NooneexceptGod is Holy. 

Itis wrong to murder innocent people. 

It is wrong to kill Christians who have notactively harmed anyone. 

People are NOT Christians simply because theirfamily is "Christian". 

Peopleare NOT Christian because they are born INTO a "Christian"family. 

Apersoncannotbecomea Christian "AUTOMATICALLY". 

Noonecan beBORN a Christian, butbecominga true Christian will guarantee 
Eternal Life, in Heaven and with God. 

ThePresumptionthata person is a Christian simply because they are 
going into a Church and sitting there is False. 

Churches have people inside of them thatare NOT Christian, butthey 
wantto learn more aboutGod. 

A Church, or a Church Official CANNOT MAKE anyone a Christian. 

Christians do NOT convertanyone by Force, because this action is a 
violationoftheCHOlCES thatGOD alone is abletomake.To force others would 
suggestthatGod is weak, and cannotdothis by H imself. The Christian God has 
much Strength butuses ittoshow loveand help in this life, notunkindness. 

OnlyGod could FORCE someone to do something againsttheir will, and 
the C reator of the Universedoes NOT behavein thatmanner. 

The Choice of whatto believe or notto believe is up to Each individual, 
who mustmake uptheirown mind, oftheirfree will. 

There is no way to impose Christianity on anyone by Force. 



Conversions by Force to Islam are NOTrecognized byGOD or Christians. 



Concerning Christians and Christianity (4) 

Those who are converted from Christianity to Islam by Force 
or coercion, are Still Christian, AND STILL considered Christian. 



Once a person is recognized by God as a genuine Christian, they are 
"sealed" permanently. There is no way for any Human to change this. 

Forcing any Christian to say that they convert or accept Islam simply 
makes that Christian to state something which is FALSE. There is 
no such thing as Genuine conversion that God can recognize 
OUT of Christianity, if that person was a Christian. 

To suggest that Christians could be converted by Force, actually 
means (signifies) that there are actions that humans can take that can 
FORCE God somehow to UNDO or ALTER what He has done. This is 
not the case. Actions that Humans Force other Humans to take are 
not recognized by God as a true Change of Mind, ora Change of Heart 

Once a person becomes a Christian, Ali of their sins (past, present, 
and future) are forgiven. They are reconciled to God for Eternity, and 
nothing can change this. Forced Conversionsto Islam are not considered 
Valid eitherby God or Christians. No one can undo in the Heart of 
a person, what God can do. The link between a Christian and God 
is a link that Cannot be broken. Saying anything to the contrary 
will not alter or change this. 

Christians do not Depend on their sanctuaries or Church buildings 
in order to meet with God. Harming a building againsttheGod who made 
the Universe is not a genuine sign of success or progress. Christians 
simply make use of any buildings. Christians are able to meet and 
pray and talk to God by themselves, wit a Church building and 
without a Priest or Pastor. God is always with them. 

Harming a Church building simply proves that some people are afraid 
of Church Buildings. That is all. The Earliest Christians did not have 
Churches or Buildings for Hundreds of Years. 

Harming a Church Building does not harm God, and itdoes not harm 
Christians. It simply makes them go and use a different building, or 
to meet without one. 



Concerning Christians and Christianity (5) 

Some people have not examined churches very much. MANY are 
very simple and do NOT have decorations or much inside of them. 
In Christianity, this is intentional. This symbolism is on purpose, 
intending to signify that the INNER LIFE of the Christian, is what is 
importantto God, and NOT the building in which people worship. 

Man looks on the external and outward appearance. GOD looks on 
the inner heart of each individual. 

There would be no reason for anyone to become upset, if they did 
not think that Christianity was making progress. Those who are upset 
are upset because Christianity has answers, reasons and arguments 
that do not seem to be defeated. God is big enough to defend himself. 

If Christianity is false, it should be possible to explain to Christians 
why and how Christianity is false. Killing or harming Christians is only 
an excuse, a method of hiding from the reality that intellectual 
conversation and explanations of those who are violent do NOT have 
the answers to defend with kindness or reason what they believe. 

Christians believe that almost all violence is a waste of time. It does 
not accomplish what it is "supposed" to accomplish. Those who 
have arguments are able to advance those and explain them to others 
Those who do not use violence instead. This method does not 
convince Christians or others to adopt methods of violence. 

People become like the God they serve. If the God they serve is 
unkind and unmerciful, that is what the followers become. If the God 
being worshiped is cruel and mean to women and children, then that 
is what the followers of that God usually will become. 
Jesus Christ is love. Christians try to be loving. 



People have the option of accepting to believe in the Teachings of 
Jesus Christ in the New Testament or rejecting those teaching. The 
choice in this life is up to each person. God is the one who makes 
His own rules. Thankfully, the God of this world decided to use 
Love and kindness to explain Himself so that all of us would have 
a chance to learn and to experience the unconditional love of Jesus 
Christ. (books are listed in this Ebook. Those who want to refute 
Christianity may want to start by refuting the books listed in this PDF) 



Concerning Christians and Christianity (6) 

True Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are not 
Christians. Christians are NOT afraid to have conversations with those who are 
islamic or from any other faith. 

Christians are NOT afraid to talk aboutthe weakness of Christianity, ifthatis a topic 
someone else wants to discuss. 

Christians willnotstoneyou orharmyou becauseyou disagree with them. 

Christian will notmakeyouslave IF you do NOT convertto Christianity. 

Those who truly believe in theTRUTH ofwhattheyclaim to believe are NOT afraid 
to discuss the contentof whatthey believe with other people. 

Christians mayshare with you thatyou are not 100% perfectand Holy, and Christians 
will Admitand acknowledge thatTHEY are NOT perfectorHoly. 

Christians admitthattheyneed asavior, thattheycannotbegoodenough on their 
own.andthattheycannotperform ENOUGH good and HOLY actions to pleaseGod. 
Thatis thestarting pointforanyonetobecomea Christian. 

Those who engage Christians in discussions aboutreligion should be willing to look 
atthe history, the archeology, the science and all of the aspects of religion and the 
books thattheyuseordefend. Thatis simplybeing honest. And those who seek 
spiritual truth are NOT afraid to discuss honestiy issues of religion. 

IF GOD is GOD, then GOD will STILL be GOD after a conversation takes place. 
Those who follow God should be willing to think and use the mind thatGod gave to 
them. IF God gave people a mind, HE expects them to use it. Discussions are part 
of the use of the mind. 



There is a lot of history about OTHER religions thatcan befound in the West. In 
other nations, FEAR ofbeing wrong induces and provokes censorship. But history 
can be proven and demonstrated. The Dead Sea Scrolls were found in 1947-48. 
Those scrolls contained the J ewish Old Testament. They were dated scientifically 
tobe 200yearsOLDER than the time of J esus Christ. The J ewish Old Testament 
has NOTbeenchangedoraltered.This issimplya scientific and historic Fact. 

God Preserves His Word. His word is the Old and New Testament. IF you are 
seeking truth, what do you have to fear from Truth ? 



Concerning History and the Early Church 

Christians do NOT pray to MARY. The Bible never teaches to Pray 
to Mary. Mary was born a human sinner, and became a Christ-follower. 

Prayers to ANY Human (Except Jesus Christ, who was God 
who became Human for a short time) is IDOLATRY 

Christians do not pray To Statues, which is IDOLATRY 

Christians do not pray To Icons, which is a Graven Image, 
which is ALSO IDOLATRY. 

The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Mary. 

The Early Church and the Early Christians did NOT pray to Saints, 
as this would be blasphemy, and taking worship and adoration 
away from God. 

It is the Mediation of Jesus Christ alone which serves to 
communicate between God and Man, and NOT any other Human. 

Christians know which books of the Bible are part of the Bible and 
belong in the Bible. There is a great deal of evidence and 
documentation over the whole world for the conclusion, about 
which books belong in the Bible. 

Some books mav help to clarifv or explain (these are Free Books): 



Forthose who read English: 

1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the 
Worship of Images was established, by John Mendham - 1850 

2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler 

3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler 

4) The worship of Mary [proven to be Unbiblical] 
by James Endell Tyler 



THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE 



Concerning History and the Early Church 

We recommend, foryour potential consideration, 
the following books: 



1) The Seventh General Council (held 787 AD) in which the 
Worship of Images was established, with copious notes 
from the Caroline books compiled by order of 
Charlemagne by Rev John Mendham - 1850 



2) Image worship in the Church of Rome by James Endell Tyler 

The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be contrary 
to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the primitive church 
and to invoive contradictory and irreconcilable doctrines within the 
Church of Rome itself (1847) 



3) Primitive Christian Worship by James Endell Tyler 

Primitive christian worship, or, The evidence of Holy Scripture and 
the church, concerning the invocation of saints and angels, and the 
blessed Virgin Mary (1840) 



4) The worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler 



5) The Pope of Rome and the popes of the Oriental Orthodox 
Church 

by Caesarious Tondini (1875) also makes for interesting reading, 
even though it is a Roman Catholic work which was approved 
with the Nihil Obstat (not indexed by the inquisition) notice. 



THESE BOOKS are AVAILABLE For FREE ONLINE 



Concerning History and the Roman Catholic Church 



Historic Information on the Roman Catholic Church 
can be found - in online searches - under the words: 

papai, roman catholic, papist, popish, 
romanist, vatican, popery, romish, 

There are many free Ebooks available 
online and at Google that cover these topics. 



There is of course the Standard 

works on the proven history of the Vatican: 

The Two Babylons by Alexander Hislop, which uses 
more than 200 ancient Latin and Greek sources. 

The Roman Schism illustrated from the Records 



of the Earlv Roman Catholic Church 



by Rev. Perceval. 



Those who have trouble with Vatican documents concerning 
early Church Councils should conduct their own research 
into a document called the " Donation of Constantine ", 
which was the false land grant from the Roman Emperors 
to the Vatican. 



Saved - How To become a 

Christian 

how to be saved 

A Christian is someone 

who believes the 

following 



Steps to Take 'm order to become a 

true Christian, to be Saved & Have a 

real relationship & genuine 

experience with the real God 

Read, understand, accept and 

believe the following verses from 

the Bible: 

1. AM men are sinners and fail short 
of God's perfect Standard 

Romans 3: 23 states that 

For all have sinned, and come short of 

the glory of God; 



2. Sin - which is imperfection in our 
lives - denies us eternal life with 
God. But God sent his son Jesus 
Christ as a gift to give us freely 
Eternal Life by believing on Jesus 
Christ. 

Romans 6: 23 states 
For the wages of sin is death; but the 
gift of God is eternal life through Jesus 
Christ our Lord. 

3. You can be saved, and you are 
saved by Faith in Jesus Christ. You 
cannot be saved by your good 
works, because they are not "good 
enough". But God's good work of 
sending Jesus Christ to save us, 
and our response of believing - of 
having faith - in Jesus Christ, that is 
what saves each of us. 

Ephesians 2: 8-9 states 

8 For by grace are ye saved through 
faith; and that not of yourselves: it is 
the gift of God: 

9 Not of works, lest any man should 
boast. 



4.God did not wait for us to become 
perfect in order to accept or 
unconditionally love us. He sent 
Jesus Christ to save us, even 
though we are sinners. So Jesus 
Christ died to save us from our sins, 
and to save us from eternal 
separation from God. 

Romans 5:8 states 

But God commendeth his love toward 
us, in that, while we were yet sinners, 
Christ died for us. 

5. God loved the world so much that 
He sent his one and only Son to die, 
so that by believing in Jesus Christ, 
we obtain Eternal Life. 

John 3: 16 states 

For God so loved the world, that he 
gave his only begotten Son, that 
whosoever believeth in him should not 
perish, but have everlasting life. 

6. If you believe in Jesus Christ, and 
in what he did on the Cross for us, 
by dying there for us, you know for a 



fact that you have been given 
Eternal Life. 

I John 5: 13 states 
These things have I written unto you 
that believe on the name of the Son of 
God; that ye may know that ye have 
eternal life, and that ye may believe on 
the name of the Son of God. 

7. If you confess your sins to God, 
he hears you take this step, and you 
can know for sure that He does hear 
you, and his response to you is to 
forgive you of those sins, so that 
they are not remembered against 
you, and not attributed to you ever 
again. 

I John 1 : 9 states 

If we confess our sins, he is faithful and 

just to forgive us our sins, and to 

cleanse us from all unrighteousness. 

If you believe these verses, or want 

to believe these verses, pray the 

following: 

" Lord Jesus, I need you. Thank you 

for dying on the cross for my sins. I 

open the door of my life and ask you 



to save me from my sins and give 
me eternal life. Thank you for 
forgiving me of my sins and giving 
me eternal life. I receive you as my 
Savior and Lord. Please take control 
of the throne of my life. Make me the 
kind of person you want me to be. 
Help me to understand you, and to 
know you and to learn how to follow 
you. Free me from all of the things in 
my life that prevent me from 
following you. In the name of the 
one and only and true Jesus Christ I 
ask all these things now, Amen". 

Does this prayer express your desire to 
know God and to want to know His love 
? If you are sincere in praying this 
prayer, Jesus Christ comes into your 
heart and your life, just as He said he 
would. 

It often takes courage to decide to 
become a Christian. It is the right 
decision to make, but It is difficult to 
fight against part of ourselves that 
wants to hang on, or to find against 
that part of our selves that has 
trouble changing. The good news is 



that you do not need to change 
yourself. Just Cry out to God, pray 
and he will begin to change you. 
God does not expect you to become 
perfect before you come to Him. Not 
at alL.this is why He sent Jesus...so 
that we would not have to become 
perfect before being able to know 
God. 

Steps to take once you have asked 
Jesus to come into you r life 

Find the following passages in the 
Bible and begin to read them: 

1. Read Psalm 23 (in the middle of 
the Old Testament - the 1st half of 
the Bible) 

2. Read Psalm 91 

3. Read the Books in the New 
Testament (in the Bible) of John, 
Romans & I John 

4. Tell someone of your prayer and 
your seeking God. Share that with 
someone close to you. 

5. Obtain some of the books on the 
list of books, and begin to read 



them, so that you can understand 
more about God and how He works. 

6. Pray, that is - just talk to and with 
God, thank Him for saving you, and 
tell him your 

fears and concerns, and ask him for 
help and guidance. 

7. email or tell someone about the 
great decision you have made today 
m 



Does the "being saved" 
process only work for those 
who believe ? 

For the person who is not yet 
saved, their understanding of 
1) their state of sin and 2) God's 
personal love and care for 
them, and His desire and 
ability to save them....is what 
enables anyone to become 
saved. 

So yes, the "being saved" 
process works only for those 



who believe in J esus Christ 
and Him only, and place their 
faith in Him and in His work 
done on the Cross. 

■ ■■and if so , then how does 
believing save a person? 

Believing saves a person because of 
what it allows God to do in the Heart 
and Soul of that person. 

But it is not simply the fact of a 
"belief". The issue is not having 
"belief" but rather what we have a 
belief about. 

IF a person believes in Salvation by 
Faith Alone in Jesus Christ (ask us 
by email if this is not clear), then 
That belief saves them. Why ? 
because they are magical ? 
No, because of the sovereignty of 
God, because of what God does to 
them, when they ask him into their 
heart & life. When a person decides 
to place their faith in Jesus Christ 
and ask Him to forgive them of 



their sins and invite Jesus Christ 
into their life & heart, this is what 
saves them - because of what God 
does for them at that moment in 
time. 

At that moment in time when they 
sincerely believe and ask God to 
save them (as described above), 
God takes the life of that person, 
and in accordance with the will of 
that human, having requested God 
to save them from their sins through 
Jesus Christ - God takes that 
person's life and sins [all sins past, 
present and future], and allocates 
them to the category: of "one of 
those people who Accepted the Free 
Gift of Eternal Salvation that God 
offers". 

From that point forward, their sins 
are no longer counted against them, 
because that is an account that is 
paid by the shed blood of Jesus 
Christ. And there is no person that 
could ever sin so much, that God's 
love would not be good enough for 
them, or that would somehow not be 
able to be covered by the penalty of 



death that Jesus Christ paid the 
price for. (otherwise, sin would be 
more powerful than Jesus Christ - 
which is not true). 

Sometimes, People have trouble 
believing in Jesus Christ because of 
two extremes: 

First the extreme that they are not 
sinners (usually, this means that a 
person has not committed a "serious" 
sin, such as "murder", but God says that 
all sins separates us from God, even 
supposedly-small sins. We - as humans 
- tend to evaluate sin into more serious 
and less serious categories, because we 
do not understand just how serious 
"small" sin is). 

Since we are all sinners, we all have 
a need for God, in order to have 
eternal salvation. 

Second the extreme that they are 
notgood enough for Jesus Christ to 
save them. This is basically done by 
those who reject the Free offer of 
Salvation by Christ Jesus because 
those people are -literally - unwilling 



to believe. After death, they will 
believe, but they can only chose 
Eternal Life BEFORE they die. 
The fact is that all of us, are not 
good enough for Jesus Christ to 
save them. That is why Paul wrote in 
the Bible "For all have sinned, and 
come short of the glory of God" 
(Romans 3:23). 

Thankfully, that is not the end of the 
story, because he also wrote " For the 
wages of sin is death; but the gift of God 
is eternal life through Jesus Christ our 
Lord. "(Romans 6: 23) 



That Free offer of salvation is 
clarified in the following passage: 

John 3: 16 For God so loved the 
world, that he gave his only 
begotten Son, that whosoever 
believeth in him should not perish, 
but have everlasting life. 
17 For God sent not his Son into the 
world to condemn the world; but 
that the world through him might be 
saved. 



Prayers that count 

The prayers that God hears 

We don't make the rules any more 
than you do. We just want to help 
others know how to reach God, and 
know that God cares about them 
personally. 

The only prayers that make it to 
Heaven where God dwells are those 
prayers that are prayed directly to 
Him " through Jesus Christ " or "in 
the name of Jesus Chrisf. 

God hears our prayers because we 
obey the method that God has 
established for us to be able to 
reach him. If we want Him to hear 
us, then we must use the methods 
that He has given us to 
communicate with Him. 



And he explains - in the New 
Testament - what that method is: 
talking to God (praying) in 
accordance with God's will - and 
coming to Him in the name of Jesus 
Christ. Here are some examples of 
that from the New Testament: 

(Acts 3:6) Then Peter said, Silver and 
gold have I none; but such as I have give 
I thee: In the name of Jesus Christ of 
Nazareth rise up and walk. 

(Acts 16:18) And this did she many days. 
But Paul, being grieved, turned and said 
to the spirit, I command thee in the 
name of Jesus Christ to come out of her. 
And he came out the same hour. 

(Acts 9:27) But Barnabas took him, and 
brought him to the apostles, and 
declared unto them how he had seen the 
Lord in the way, and that he had spoken 
to him, and how he had preached boldly 
at Damascus in the name of Jesus. 



(2 Cor 3:4) And such trust have we 
through Christ to God-ward: (i.e. 
toward God) 

(Gal 4:7) Wherefore thou art no more a 
servant, but a son; and if a son, then an 
heir of God through Christ . 
(Eph 2:7) That in the ages to come he 
might show the exceeding [spiritual] 
riches of his grace in his kindness toward 
us through Christ Jesus . 

(Phil 4:7) And the peace of God, which 
passeth all understanding, shall keep 
your hearts and minds through Christ 
Jesus. 

(Acts 4:2) Being grieved that they taught 
the people, and preached through Jesus 
the resurrection from the dead. 

(Rom 1:8) First, I thank my God 
through Jesus Christ for you all, that 
your faith is spoken of throughout the 
whole world. 

(Rom 6:11) Likewise reckon ye also 
yourselves to be dead indeed unto sin, 



but alive unto God through Jesus Christ 
our Lord. 

(Rom 6:23) For the wages of sin is death; 
but the gift of God is eternal life through 
Jesus Christ our Lord. 

(Rom 15:17) I have therefore whereof I 
may glory through Jesus Christ in those 
things which pertain to God. 

(Rom 16:27) To God only wise, be glory 
through Jesus Christ for ever. Amen. 

(1 Pet 4:11) ...if any man minister, let 
him do it as of the ability which God 
giveth: that God in all things may be 
glorified through Jesus Christ , to whom 
be praise and dominion for ever and 
ever. Amen. 

(Gal 3:14) That the blessing of Abraham 
might come on the Gentiles through 
Jesus Christ ; that we might receive the 
promise of the [Holy] Spirit through 
faith. 



(Titus 3:6) Which he shed on us 
abundantly through Jesus Christ our 
Saviour; 

(Heb 13:21) Make you perfect in every 
good work to do his will, working in you 
that which is wellpleasing in his sight, 
through Jesus Christ; to whom be glory 
for ever and ever. Amen. 



Anyone who has guestions is encouraged to contact us bv 
email, with the address that is posted on our website. 



Note for Foreign Language and 
International Readers & Users 



Foreign Language Versions of the 
Introduction and Postcript/Afterword 
will be included (hopefully) in future 
editions. 



IF a person wanted to become a Christian, what would they pray ? 



God, I am praying this to you so that you will help me. Please help 
me to want to know you better. Please help me to become a Christian. 

God I admit that I am not perfect. I understand that you cannot allow 
anyone into Heaven who is not perfect and Holy. I understand that 
if I believe in Jesus Christ and in what He did, that God you will 
see my life through the sacrifice of Jesus Christ, and that this will 
allow me to have eternal life and know that I am going to Heaven. 

God, I admit that I have sin and things in my life that are not perfect. 
I know I have sinned in my life. Please forgive me of my sins. 
I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God, that He came to Earth 
to save those who ask Him, and that He died to pay the penalty for 
all of my sins. 

I understand that Jesus physically died and physically arose from the 
dead, and that God can forgive me because of the death and 
resurrection of Jesus Christ. I thank you for dying for me, and for 
paying the price for my sins. I accept to believe in you, and I thank 
you Lord God from all of my heart for your help and for sending 
your Son to die and raise from the Dead. 

I pray that you would help me to read your word the Bible. I 
renounce anything in my life, my thoughts and my actions that is 
not from you, and I do this in the name of Jesus Christ. Help me 
to not be spiritually deceived. Help me to grow and learn how to have 
a strong Christian walk for you, and to be a good example, with your 
help. Help me to have and develop a love of your word the Bible, and 
please bring to my life, people and situations that will help me to 
understand how to live my life as your servant. Help me to learn 
how to share the good news with those who may be willing to learn 
or to know. I ask these things in the name of Jesus Christ, and 
I thank you for what you have done for me, Amen. 



Please Remember: Christianity is NEVER forced. No one can 

force anyone to become a Christian. God does NOT recognize 

any desire for Him, unless it is genuine and motivated from 

the inside of each of us. 



Prayers for help to God 

In MANY LANGUAGES 

For YOU, for US, for your Family 



Dear God, 

Thank you that this New Testament has been released so 

that we are able to learn more about you. 

Please help the people responsible for making this 
Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to 
work fast, and make more Electronic books available 
Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the 
strength and the time that they need in order to be able to 
keep working for You. 

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on 
an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue 
and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the 
work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to 
not have fear and to remember that you are the God who 
answers prayer and who is in charge of everything. 

I pray that you would encourage them, 

and that you protect them, and the work & ministry that they 



are engaged in. I pray that you would protect them from 
the Spiritual Forces or other obstacles that could harm them 
or slow them down. 

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think 
of the people who have made this edition available, so that I 
can pray for them and so they can continue to help more 
people 

I pray that you would give me a love of your 
Holy Word (the New Testament), and that you would give 
me spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better 
and to understand the period of time that we are living in. 
Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that 
I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want 
to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in 
my area and around the world. 

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and 
those who work on the website and those who help them 
your wisdom. 

I pray that you would help the individual members of their 
family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but 
to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in 
every way. and I ask you to do these things 
in the name of Jesus, 
Amen, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



5 minutos a ayudar excepto otros - diferencie eterno 



Dios querido, 

gracias que se ha lanzado este nuevo testamento 

de modo que poder aprender mas sobre usted. 

Ayude por favor a la gente responsable de hacer este Ebook disponible. 

Ayudele por favor a poder trabajar rapidamente, y haga que 

mas Ebooks disponible por favor le ayuda a tener todos los recursos, 

los fondos, la fuerza y el tiempo que necesitan 

para poder guardar el trabajar para usted. 

Ayude por favor a los que sean parte del equipo que 

les ayuda sobre una base diaria. Por favor deles la fuerza para continuar 

y para dar a cada uno de ellos la comprension espiritual para el trabajo 
que usted quisiera que hicieran. Ayude por favor a cada uno de 
ellos a no tener miedo y a no recordar que usted es el dios que contesta 

a rezo y que esta a cargo de todo. 

Ruego que usted los animara, y que usted los proteja, 

y el trabajo y el ministerio que estan contratados adentro. 

Ruego que usted los protegiera contra las fuerzas espirituales 

que podrian danarlas o retardarlas abajo. Ayudeme por favor cuando 

utilizo este nuevo testamento tambien para pensar en ellas de modo 

que pueda rogar para ellas y asi que pueden continuar ayudando a mas 
gente Ruego que usted me diera un amor de su palabra santa, 
y que usted me daria la sabiduria y el discernimiento espirituales 

para conocerle mejor y para entender los tiempos que estamos 
adentro y como ocuparse de las dificultades que me enfrentan con cada dia. 
Senor God, me ayuda a desear conocerle mejor y desear ayudar 
a otros cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Ruego que usted 
diera el Web site y los de Ebook el equipo y los que trabajan en 

que les ayudan su sabiduria. Ruego que usted ayudara a los miembros 
individuales de su familia (y de mi familia) espiritual a no ser engahado, 

pero entenderle y desear aceptarle y seguir de cada manera. 
y pido que usted haga estas cosas en el nombre de Jesus, amen, i 



(por que lo hacemos tradujeron esto a muchas idiomas? 

Porque necesitamos a tanto rezo como sea posible, 

y a tanta gente que ruega para nosotros y el este ministerio 

tan a menudo como sea posible. Gracias por su ayuda. 

El rezo es una de las mejores maneras que usted puede ayudarnos mas) 



Hungarian 



Hungary, Hungarian, Hungary Hungarian Maygar PrayerJ ezus Krisztus 

Imadsag hoz Isten Hogyan viselkedni Imadkozik hoz tud hall az en m 

viselkedni kerdez ad segitszamomra 

Hungarian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God 
- explained in Hungarian Language 

Beszelo -hoz Isten , a Alkoto -bol Vilagegyetem , a Lord : 

1. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz imadkozik a 
dolog amit Vennem kell imadkozik 

2. amit 6n akar ad szamomra a batorsag -hoz hisz 6n es 
elfogad amit akrsz fgy csinalni eletemmel , helyett en 
felemel az en -m sajat akarat ( szandek ) fenti one. 

3. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz nem enged az en -m 
fel -bol ismeretlen -hoz valik a kifogas , vagy a alap ertem 
nem -hoz szolgal you. 

4. amit 6n akar add nekem segit -hoz lat es -hoz megtanul 
hogyan viselkedni volna a szellemi ero Szuksegem van ( 
atmeno -a szo a Biblia ) egy ) reszere a esemeny elore es b 
betii ) reszere az en -m sajat szemelyes szellemi utazas. 

5. Amit 6n Isten akar add nekem segit -hoz akar -hoz szolgal 
On tobb 

6. Amit 6n akar emlekeztet en -hoz -val beszel 6n 
prayerwhen ) En csalodott vagy -ban nehezseg , helyett 
kiprobalas -hoz hatarozat dolog en magam egyetlen atmeno 
az en -m emberi ero. 



7. Amit 6n akar add nekem Bolcsesseg es egy sziv toltott - 
val Bibliai Bolcsesseg azert EN akar szolgal 6n tobb 
hatekonyan. 

8. Amit 6n akar adjon nekem egy -t vagy -hoz dolgozoszoba 
-a szo , a Biblia ,( a Uj Vegrendelet Evangelium -bol Budi ), 
-ra egy szemelyes alap 

9. amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra azert En kepes -hoz 
eszrevesz dolog -ban Biblia ( -a szo ) melyik EN tud 
szemelyesen elmond -hoz , es amit akarat segitsen nekem ert 
amit akrsz en -hoz csinal eletemben. 

10. Amit 6n akar add nekem nagy itelokepesseg , -hoz ert 
hogyan viselkedni megmagyaraz -hoz masikak ki 6n , es 
amit EN akar kepesnek lenni megtenni megtanul hogyan 
viselkedni megtanul es tud hogyan viselkedni kiall mellett 
6n es en -a szo ( a Biblia ) 

1 1 . Amit 6n akar hoz emberek ( vagy websites ) eletemben 
ki akar -hoz tud 6n es en , ki van eros -ban -uk pontos 
megertes -bol 6n ( Isten ); es Amit 6n akar hoz emberek ( 
vagy websites ) eletemben ki lesz kepes -hoz batorit en -hoz 
pontosan megtanul hogyan viselkedni feloszt a Biblia a szo - 
bol igazsag (2 Komocsin 215:). 

12. Amit 6n akar segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul -hoz volna 
nagy megertes korulbelul melyik Biblia valtozat van legjobb 
, melyik van a leg— bb pontos , es melyik birtokol a leg— bb 
szellemi ero & ero , es melyik valtozat egyeztet -val a 
eredeti kezirat amit 6n ihletett a froi hivatas -bol Uj 
Vegrendelet -hoz fr. 

13. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra -hoz hasznal idom -ban 
egy jo ut , es nem -hoz elpusztit idom -ra Hamis vagy iires 
modszer kozelebb keriilni -hoz Isten ( de amit van nem 



hiisegesen Bibliai ), es hol azok modszer termel nem hosszu 
ideje vagy tartos szellemi gyiimolcs. 

14. Amit 6n akar ad segitseg szamomra -hoz ert mit tenni 
keres -ban egy templom vagy egy istentisztelet helye , mi 
fajta -bol kerdes -hoz kerdez , es amit 6n akar segitsen 
nekem -hoz talai hivok vagy egy lelkesz -val nagy szellemi 
bolcsesseg helyett konnyii vagy hamis valaszol. 

15. amit 6n akar okoz en -hoz emlekszik -hoz memorizal -a 
szo a Biblia ( mint Romaiak 8), azert EN tud volna ez 
szivemben es volna az en -m torodik elokeszitett , es lenni 
kesz ad egy valaszol -hoz masikak -bol remel amit Nekem 
van koriilbelul 6n. 

16. Amit 6n akar hoz segit szamomra azert az en -m sajat 
teologia es tetelek -hoz egyeterteni -a szo , a Biblia es amit 
6n akar folytatodik segiteni neki en tud hogyan az en -m 
megertes -bol doktrina lehet kozmiivesitett azert az en -m 
sajat elet , eletmod es megertes folytatodik -hoz lenni zaro - 
hoz amit akrsz ez -hoz lenni ertem. 

17. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szellemi bepillantas ( 
kovetkeztetes ) tobb es tobb , es amit hol az en -m megertes 
vagy eszrevetel -bol 6n van nem pontos , amit 6n akar 
segitsen nekem -hoz megtanul ki Jezus Krisztus hiisegesen 
van. 

18. Amit 6n akar ad segit szamomra azert EN akar kepesnek 
lenni megtenni szetvalaszt akarmi hamis ritusok melyik 
Nekem van fiigges -ra , -bol -a tiszta tanitas -ban Biblia , ha 
akarmi mibol En alabbiak van nem -bol Isten , vagy van 
ellenkezo -hoz amit akrsz -hoz tanit minket koriilbelul 
alabbiak 6n. 



19. Amit akarmi kenyszerit -bol rossz akar nem eltesz 
akarmi szellemi megertes melyik Nekem van , de elegge 
amit EN akar megtart a tudas -bol hogyan viselkedni tud 6n 
es en nem -hoz lenni tevedesben lenni ezekben a napokban - 
bol szellemi csalas. 

20. Amit 6n akar hoz szellemi ero es segit szamomra azert 
EN akarat nem -hoz lenni resze a Nagy Eses El vagy -bol 
akarmi mozgalom melyik akar lenni lelkileg utanzott -hoz 
6n es en -hoz -a Szent Szo 

21. Amit ha van akarmi amit Nekem van megtett eletemben 
, vagy barmilyen modon amit Nekem van nem alperes -hoz 
6n ahogy ettem kellet volna volna es ez minden 
megakadalyozas en -bol egyik gyaloglas veled , vagy 
birtoklas megertes , amit 6n akar hoz azok dolog / valasz / 
esemeny vissza bele az en -m torodik , azert EN akar 
lemond oket neveben Jezus Krisztus , es mind az osszes -uk 
hat es kovetkezmeny , es amit 6n akar helyettesit akarmi 
uresseg ,sadness vagy ketsegbeeses eletemben -val a Orom - 
bol Lord , es amit EN akar lenni tobb fokuszalva tanulas - 
hoz kovet 6n mellett olvaso -a szo , a Biblia 

22. Amit 6n akar nyit az en -m szemek azert EN akar 
kepesnek lenni megtenni vilagosan lat es felismer ha van 
egy Nagy Csalas korulbelul Szellemi tema , hogyan 
viselkedni ert ez jelenseg ( vagy ezek esemeny ) -bol egy 
Bibliai perspektiva , es amit 6n akar add nekem bolcsesseg - 
hoz tud es lgy amit EN akarat megtanul hogyan viselkedni 
segit barataim es szeretett egyek ( rokon ) nem lenni resze it. 

23. Amit 6n akar biztosit amit egyszer az en -m szemek van 
kinyitott es az en -m torodik ert a szellemi jelentoseg -bol 
idoszerii esemeny bevetel hely a vilagon , amit 6n akar 
elokeszit szivem elfogadtatni magam -a igazsag , es amit 6n 
akar segitsen nekem ert hogyan viselkedni talai batorsag es 



ero atmeno -a Szent Szo , a Biblia. Neveben Jezus Krisztus , 
En kerdezek mindezekert igazol kivansagom -hoz lenni -ban 
megallapodas -a akarat , es En kerdezes reszere -a 
bolcsesseg es kocsit berelni szerelem -bol Igazsag Amen 



Tobb alul -bol Oldal 
Hogyan viselkedni volna Orokelet 



Vagyunk boldog ha ez oldalra dol ( -bol imadsag kereslet - 
hoz Isten ) van kepes -hoz tamogat 6n. Mi ert ez majus nem 
lenni a legjobb vagy a leg— bb hatasos forditas. Mi ert amit 
vannak sok kiilonbozo ways -bol kifejezheto gondolkodas es 
szoveg. Ha onnek van egy javaslat reszere egy jobb forditas 
, vagy ha tetszene neked -hoz fog egy kicsi osszeg -bol idod 
-hoz kiild javaslatok hozzank , lesz lenni eteladag ezer -bol 
mas emberek is , ki akarat akkor olvas a kozmiivesitett 
forditas. Mi gyakran volna egy Uj Vegrendelet elerheto -ban 
-a nyelv vagy -ban nyelvek amit van ritka vagy regi. Ha 6n 
latszo reszere egy Uj Vegrendelet -ban egy kulonleges nyelv 
, legyen szives fr hozzank. Is , akarunk hogy biztosak 
legyiink es megprobal -hoz kommunikal amit neha , 
megtessziik felajanl konyv amit van nem Szabad es amit 
csinal ar penz. De ha 6n nem tud ad nehanyuk elektronikus 
konyv , mi tud gyakran csinal egy cserel -bol elektronikus 
konyv reszere segit -val forditas vagy forditas dolgozik. 
Csinalsz nem kell lenni profi munkas , csak keves szabalyos 
szemely akit erdekel eteladag. Onnek kellene volna egy 
szamitogep vagy onnek kellene volna belepes -hoz egy 
szamitogep -on -a helyi konyvtar vagy kollegium vagy 
egyetem , ota azok altalaban volna jobb kapcsolatok -hoz 
Internet. 



Tudod is altalaban alapft -a sajat szemelyes SZABAD 
elektronikus posta szamla mellett halado mail.yahoo.com 



Legyen szives fog egy pillanat -hoz talai a elektronikus 
posta cim elhelyezett alul vagy a veg ebbol oldal. Mi remel 
lesz kiild elektronikus posta hozzank , ha ez -bol segit vagy 
batoritas. Mi is batorit 6n -hoz kapcsolat minket 
vonatkozolag Elektronikus Konyv hogy tudunk felajanl amit 
van nelkiil ar , es szabad. 



MegtessziAk volna sok konyv -ban kiAlfoldi nyelvek , de 
megtesszuk nem mindig hely oket -hoz kap elektronikusan ( 
letolt ) mert mi egyetlen csinal elerheto a konyv vagy a tema 
amit van a leg— bb kereslet. Mi batorit 6n -hoz folytatodik - 
hoz imadkozik -hoz Isten es -hoz folytatodik -hoz megtanul 
rola mellett olvaso a Uj Vegrendelet. Mi szivesen lat -a 
kerdes es magyarazat mellett elektronikus posta. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Italian 

Italian- Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - 
explained in Italian Language 



italian prayer jesus Cristo Preghiera come pregare al del dio il dio puo 
sentirsi preghiera come chiedere dio di dare allaiuto me 



Parlando al dio, il creatore dell'universo, il signore: 

1. che dareste me al coraggio pregare le cose di che ho 
bisogno per pregare 

2. che dareste me al coraggio crederli ed accettare che cosa 
desiderate fare con la mia vita, anziche me che exalting il 
miei propri volonta (intenzione) sopra il vostro. 

3. che mi dareste l'aiuto per non lasciare i miei timori dello 
sconosciuto transformarsi in nelle giustificazioni, o la base 
per me per non servirlo. 

4. che mi dareste l'aiuto per vedere ed imparare come avere 
la resistenza spiritosa io abbia bisogno (con la vostra parola 
bibbia) di a) per gli eventi avanti e b) per il mio proprio 
viaggio spiritoso personale. 

5. Che dio mi dareste l'aiuto per desiderare servirli di piu 

6. Che mi ricordereste comunicare con voi (prayer)when io 
sono frustrati o in difficolta, invece di provare a risolvere le 
cose io stesso soltanto con la mia resistenza umana. 

7. Che mi dareste la saggezza e un cuore si e riempito di 
saggezza biblica in modo che li servissi piu efficacemente. 

8. Che mi dareste un desiderio studiare la vostra parola, la 
bibbia, (il nuovo gospel del Testamento di John), a titolo 
personale, 

9. che dareste ad assistenza me in modo che possa notare le 
cose nella bibbia (la vostra parola) a cui posso riferire 
personalmente ed a che lo aiutera a capire che cosa lo 
desiderate fare nella mia vita. 



10. Che mi dareste il discernment grande, per capire come 
spiegare ad altri che siate e che potrei imparare come 
imparare e sapere levarsi in piedi in su per voi e la vostra 
parola (bibbia) 

1 1 . Che portereste la gente (o i Web site) nella mia vita che 
desidera conoscerla e che e forte nella loro comprensione 
esatta di voi (dio); e quello portereste la gente (o i Web site) 
nella mia vita che potra consigliarmi imparare esattamente 
come dividere la bibbia la parola della verita (2 coda di todo 
2:15). 

12. Che lo aiutereste ad imparare avere comprensione 
grande circa quale versione della bibbia e la cosa migliore, 
che e la piu esatta e che ha la resistenza & l'alimentazione 
piu spiritose e che la versione accosente con i manoscritti 
originali che avete ispirato gli autori di nuovo Testamento 
scrivere. 

13. Che dareste l'aiuto me per usare il mio tempo in un buon 
senso e per non sprecare il mio tempo sui metodi falsi o 
vuoti di ottenere piu vicino al dio (ma a quello non sia 
allineare biblico) e dove quei metodi non producono frutta 
spiritosa di lunga durata o durevole. 

14. Che dareste l'assistenza me capire che cosa cercare in 
una chiesa o in un posto di culto, che generi di domande da 
chiedere e che lo aiutereste a trovare i believers o un pastor 
con saggezza spiritosa grande anziche le risposte facili o 
false. 

15. di che lo indurreste a ricordarsi per memorizzare la 
vostra parola la bibbia (quale Romans 8), di modo che posso 
averlo nel mio cuore e fare la mia prepararsi mente ed e 



aspetti per dare una risposta ad altre della speranza che ho 
circa voi. 

16. Che portereste l'aiuto me in modo che la mie proprie 
teologia e dottrine per accosentire con la vostra parola, la 
bibbia e che continuereste a aiutarli a sapere la mia 
comprensione della dottrina puo essere migliorata in modo 
che la miei propri vita, lifestyle e capire continui ad essere 
piu vicino a che cosa lo desiderate essere per me. 

17. Che aprireste la mia comprensione spiritosa 
(conclusioni) di piu e piu e che dove la mia comprensione o 
percezione di voi non e esatta, che lo aiutereste ad imparare 
chi Jesus Christ allineare e. 

18. Che dareste l'aiuto me in modo che possa separare tutti i 
rituali falsi da cui ho dipeso, dai vostri insegnamenti liberi 
nella bibbia, se c'e ne di che cosa sono seguente non e del 
dio, o e contrari a che cosa desiderate per insegnarli - circa 
quanto segue. 

19. Che alcune forze della malvagita non toglierebbero la 
comprensione affatto spiritosa che abbia, ma piuttosto che 
mantennrei la conoscenza di come conoscerli e non essere 
ingannato dentro attualmente di inganno spiritoso. 

20. Che portereste la resistenza spiritosa ed aiutereste a me 
in modo che non faccia parte del ritirarsi grande o di alcun 
movimento che sarebbe spiritual falsificato a voi ed alla 
vostra parola santa. 

21. Quello se ci e qualche cosa che faccia nella mia vita, o 
qualsiasi senso che non ho risposto a voi come dovrei avere 
e quello sta impedendomi di camminare con voi, o avere 
capire, che portereste quei things/responses/events 
nuovamente dentro la mia mente, di modo che rinuncerei 



loro in nome di Jesus Christ e tutte i loro effetti e 
conseguenze e che sostituireste tutta la emptiness, tristezza o 
disperazione nella mia vita con la gioia del signore e che di 
piu sarei messo a fuoco sull'imparare seguirli leggendo la 
vostra parola, bibbia. 

22. Che aprireste i miei ocehi in modo che possa vedere e 
riconoseere chiaramente se ci e un inganno grande cirea i 
soggetti spiritosi, come capire questo fenomeno (o questi 
eventi) da una prospettiva biblica e che mi dareste la 
saggezza per sapere ed in modo che impari come aiutare i 
miei amici ed amavo ones (parenti) per non fare parte di 
esso. 

23. Che vi accertereste che i miei ocehi siano aperti una 
volta e la mia mente capisce l'importanza spiritosa degli 
eventi correnti che avvengono nel mondo, che abbiate 
preparato il mio cuore per accettare la vostra verita e che lo 
aiutereste a capire come trovare il coraggio e la resistenza 
con la vostra parola santa, la bibbia. In nome di Jesus Christ, 
chiedo queste cose che confermano il mio desiderio essere 
nell'accordo la vostra volonta e sto chiedendo la vostra 
saggezza ed avere un amore della verita, Amen. 



Piu in calce alla pagina 
come avere vita Eterna 



Siamo felici se questa lista (delle richieste di preghiera al 
dio) puo aiutarli. Capiamo che questa non puo essere la 
traduzione migliore o piu efficace. Capiamo che ci sono 
molti sensi differenti di esprimere i pensieri e le parole. Se 
avete un suggerimento per una traduzione migliore, o se 



voleste occorrere una piccola quantita di vostro tempo di 
trasmettere i suggerimenti noi, aiuterete i migliaia della 
gente inoltre, che allora leggera la traduzione migliorata. 
Abbiamo spesso un nuovo Testamento disponibile in vostra 
lingua o nelle lingue che sono rare o vecchie. 

Se state cercando un nuovo Testamento in una lingua 
specifica, scriva prego noi. Inoltre, desideriamo essere sicuri 
e proviamo a comunicare a volte quello, offriamo i libri che 
non sono liberi e che costano i soldi. Ma se non potete 
permettersi alcuni di quei libri elettronici, possiamo fare 
spesso uno scambio di libri elettronici per aiuto con la 
traduzione o il lavoro di traduzione. 



Non dovete essere un operaio professionista, solo una 
persona normale che e interessata nell'assistenza. Dovreste 
avere un calcolatore o dovreste avere accesso ad un 
calcolatore alla vostra biblioteca o universita o universita 
locale, poiche quelli hanno solitamente collegamenti 
migliori al Internet. Potete anche stabilire solitamente il 
vostro proprio cliente LIBERO personale della posta 
elettronica andando al ### di mail.yahoo.com prego 
occorrete un momen to per trovare l'indirizzo della posta 
elettronica situato alla parte inferiore o all'estremita di 
questa pagina. Speriamo che trasmettiate la posta elettronica 
noi, se questa e di aiuto o di incoraggiamento. Inoltre vi 
consigliamo metterseli in contatto con riguardo ai libri 
elettronici che offriamo quello siamo senza costo e 

che libero abbiamo molti libri nelle lingue straniere, ma 
non le disponiamo sempre per ricevere elettronicamente 
(trasferimento dai sistema centrale verso i satelliti) perche 
rendiamo soltanto disponibile i libri o i soggetti che sono 
chiesti. Vi consigliamo continuare a pregare al dio ed a 
continuare ad imparare circa lui leggendo il nuovo 



Testamento. Accogliamo favorevolmente le vostre domande 
ed osservazioni da posta elettronica 



Preghiera al dio Caro Dio, Grazie che questo gospel o 
questo nuovo Testamento e stato liberato in modo che 
possiamo impararvi piu circa. Aiuti prego la gente 
responsabile del rendere questo litaro elettronico disponibile. 
Conoscete che chi sono e potete aiutarle. 

Aiutile prego a potere funzionare velocemente e renda i libri 
piu elettronici disponibili Aiutili prego ad avere tutte le 
risorse, i soldi, la resistenza ed il tempo di che hanno 
bisogno per potere continuare a funzionare per voi. 
Aiuti prego quelli che fanno parte della squadra che le aiuta 
su una base giornaliere. Prego dia loro la resistenza per 
continuare e dare ciascuno di loro la comprensione spiritosa 
per il lavoro che li desiderate fare. Aiuti loro prego ciascuno 
a non avere timore ed a non ricordarsi di che siete il dio che 
risponde alla preghiera e che e incaricato di tutto. Prego che 
consigliereste loro e che li proteggete ed il lavoro & il 
ministero che sono agganciati dentro. 

Prego che li proteggereste dalle forze spiritose o da altri 
ostacoli che potrebbero nuoc o ritardarli giu. Aiutilo prego 
quando uso questo nuovo Testamento anche per pensare alla 
gente che ha reso questa edizione disponibile, di modo che 
posso pregare per loro ed in modo da puo continuare a 
aiutare piu gente. 

Prego che mi dareste un amore della vostra parola santa (il 
nuovo Testamento) e che mi dareste la saggezza ed il 
discernment spiritosi per conoscerli meglio e per capire il 



periodo di tempo ou stiamo vivendo. Aiutilo prego a sapere 
risolvere le difficolta che sono confrontato con ogni giorno. 
II signore God, lo aiuta a desiderare conoscerli piu meglio e 
desiderare aiutare altri cristiani nella mia zona ed intorno al 
mondo. 

Prego che dareste la squadra elettronica e coloro del libro 
che le aiuta la vostra saggezza. 

Prego che aiutereste i diversi membri della loro famiglia (e 
della mia famiglia) spiritual a non essere ingannati, ma 
capirli e desiderare accettarli e seguire in ogni senso. Inoltre 
diaci la comodita ed il consiglio in questi periodi ed io vi 
chiedono di fare queste cose in nome di Jesus, amen, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

PORTUGUESE PORTUGUESE 



Portuguese PrayerCristo Pedidoa DeusComoorara Deus 
podemouvirmy pedido perguntar Deus darajuda a me 
Portuguese - Prayer Requests (praying / Talkin g) to God 
- explained in Portugues (Portugues) Language 



Falando ao deus, o criador do universo, senhor: 



1 . que voce daria a mim a coragem pray as coisas que eu 
necessito pray 

2. que voce daria a mim a coragem o acreditar e aceitar o 
que voce quer fazer com minha vida, em vez de mim que 
exalting meus proprios vontade (intencao) acima de seu. 

3. que voce me daria a ajuda para nao deixar meus medos do 
desconhecido se transformar as desculpas, ou a base para 
mim para nao lhe servir. 

4. que voce me daria a ajuda para ver e aprender como ter a 
forca espiritual mim necessite (com sua palavra o bible) a) 
para os eventos adiante e b) para minha propria viagem 
espiritual pessoal. 

5. Que voce deus me daria a ajuda para querer lhe servir 
mais 

6. Que voce me lembraria falar com voce (prayer)when me 
sao frustrados ou na dificuldade, em vez de tentar resolver 
coisas eu mesmo somente com minha forca humana. 

7. Que voce me daria a sabedoria e um coracao encheu-se 
com a sabedoria biblical de modo que eu lhe servisse mais 
eficazmente. 

8. Que voce me daria um desejo estudar sua palavra, o bible, 
(o gospel do testament novo de John), em uma base pessoal, 

9. que voce daria a auxflio a mim de modo que eu pudesse 
observar coisas no bible (sua palavra) a que eu posso 
pessoalmente se relacionar, e a que me ajudara compreender 
o que voce me quer fazer em minha vida. 

10. Que voce me daria o discernment grande, para 
compreender como explicar a outro que voce e, e que eu 



poderia aprender como aprender e saber estar acima para 
voce e sua palavra (o bible) 

1 1 . Que voce traria os povos (ou os Web site) em minha 
vida que querem o conhecer, e que sao fortes em sua 
compreensao exata de voce (deus); e isso voce traria povos 
(ou Web site) em minha vida que podera me incentivar 
aprender exatamente como dividir o bible a palavra da 
verdade (2 timothy 2: 15). 

12. Que voce me ajudaria aprender ter a compreensao 
grande sobre que versao do bible e a mais melhor, que sao a 
mais exata, e que tem a forca & o poder os mais espirituais, 
e que a versao concorda com os manuscritos originais que 
voce inspirou os autores do testament novo escrever. 

13. Que voce me daria a ajuda para usar meu tempo em uma 
maneira boa, e para nao desperdicar minha hora em metodos 
falsos ou vazios de comecar mais perto do deus (mas 
daquele nao seja verdadeiramente biblical), e onde aqueles 
metodos nao produzem nenhuma fruta espiritual a longo 
prazo ou duravel. 

14. Que voce me daria o auxflio compreender o que 
procurar em uma igreja ou em um lugar da adoracao, que 
tipos das perguntas a pedir, e que voce me ajudaria 
encontrar believers ou um pastor com sabedoria espiritual 
grande em vez das respostas faceis ou falsas. 15. que voce 
faria com que eu recordasse memorizar sua palavra o bible 
(tal como Romans 8), de modo que eu pudesse o ter em meu 
coracao e ter minha mente preparada, e estivessem pronto 
para dar uma resposta a outra da esperanca que eu tenho 
sobre voce. 

16. Que voce me traria a ajuda de modo que meus proprios 
theology e doutrinas para concordar com sua palavra, o 



bible e que voce continuaria a me ajudar saber minha 
compreensao da doutrina pode ser melhorada de modo que 
meus proprios vida, lifestyle e compreensao continuem a ser 
mais perto de o que voce a quer ser para mim. 

17. Que voce abriria minha introspeccao espiritual 
(conclusoes) mais e mais, e que onde minha compreensao 
ou percepcao de voce nao sao exata, que voce me ajudaria 
aprender quem Jesus Christ e verdadeiramente. 

18. Que voce me daria a ajuda de modo que eu possa 
separar todos os rituals falsos de que eu depender, de seus 
ensinos desobstruidos no bible, se alguma de o que eu sou 
seguinte nao sao do deus, nem sao contrarias a o que voce 
quer nos ensinar - sobre o seguir. 

19. Que nenhumas forcas do evil nao removeriam a 
compreensao espiritual que eu tenho, mas rather que eu 
reteria o conhecimento de como o conhecer e nao ser iludido 
nestes dias do deception espiritual. 

20. Que voce traria a forca espiritual e me ajudaria de modo 
que eu nao seja parte da queda grande afastado ou de 
nenhum movimento que fosse espiritual forjado a voce e a 
sua palavra holy. 

21. Isso se houver qualquer coisa que eu fiz em minha vida, 
ou alguma maneira que eu nao lhe respondi como eu devo 
ter e aquela esta impedindo que eu ande com voce, ou ter a 
compreensao, que voce traria aqueles 
things/responses/events para tras em minha mente, de modo 
que eu os renunciasse no nome de Jesus Christ, e em todas 
seus efeitos e consequencias, e que voce substituiria todo o 
emptiness, sadness ou desespero em minha vida com a 
alegria do senhor, e que eu estaria focalizado mais na 
aprendizagem o seguir lendo sua palavra, o bible. 



22. Que voce abriria meus olhos de modo que eu possa ver e 
reconhecer claramente se houver um deception grande sobre 
topicos espirituais, como compreender este fenomeno (ou 
estes eventos) de um perspective biblical, e que voce me 
daria a sabedoria para saber e de modo que eu aprenderei 
como ajudar a meus amigos e amei (parentes) nao ser parte 
dela. 

23. Que voce se asseguraria de que meus olhos estejam 
abertos uma vez e minha mente compreende o significado 
espiritual dos eventos atuais que ocorrem no mundo, que 
voce prepararia meu coracao para aceitar sua verdade, e que 
voce me ajudaria compreender como encontrar a coragem e 
a forca com sua palavra holy, o bible. No nome de Jesus 
Christ, eu peco estas coisas que confirmam meu desejo ser 
no acordo sua vontade, e eu estou pedindo sua sabedoria e 
para ter um amor da verdade, Amen. 



Mais no fundo da pagina 
como ter a vida eternal 



Nos estamos contentes se esta lista (de pedidos do prayer ao 
deus) puder lhe ajudar. Nos compreendemos que esta nao 
pode ser a mais melhor ou traducao a mais eficaz. Nos 
compreendemos que ha muitas maneiras diferentes de 
expressar pensamentos e palavras. Se voce tiver uma 
sugestao para uma traducao melhor, ou se voce gostar de 
fazer exame de um pouco de seu tempo nos emitir 
sugestoes, voce estara ajudando a milhares dos povos 
tambem, que lerao entao a traducao melhorada. Nos temos 
frequentemente um testament novo disponivel em sua lingua 
ou nas linguas que sao raras ou velhas. Se voce estiver 
procurando um testament novo em uma lingua especifica, 
escreva-nos por favor. 



Tambem, nos queremos ser certos e tentamos comunicar as 
vezes isso, nos oferecemos os livros que nao estao livres e 
que custam o dinheiro. Mas se voce nao puder ter recursos 
para alguns daqueles livros eletronicos, nos podemos 
frequentemente fazer uma troca de livros eletronicos para a 
ajuda com traducao ou trabalho da traducao. Voce nao tem 
que ser um trabalhador profissional, only uma pessoa 
regular que esteja interessada na ajuda. 

Voce deve ter um computador ou voce deve ter o acesso a 
um computador em sua biblioteca ou faculdade ou 
universidade local, desde que aqueles tem geralmente 
conexoes melhores ao Internet. 



Voce pode tambem geralmente estabelecer seu proprio 
cliente LIVRE pessoal do correio eletronico indo ao ### de 
mail.yahoo.com faz exame por favor de um momento para 
encontrar o endereco do correio eletronico ficado situado no 
fundo ou na extremidade desta pagina. Nos esperamos que 
voce nos emita o correio eletronico, se este for da ajuda ou 
do incentivo. Nos incentivamo-lo tambem contatar-nos a 
respeito dos livros eletronicos que nos oferecemos a isso 
somos sem custo, e 

que livre nos temos muitos livros em linguas extrangeiras, 
mas nos nao as colocamos sempre para receber 
eletronicamente (download) porque nos fazemos somente 
disponivel os livros ou os topicos que sao os mais pedidos. 
Nos incentivamo-lo continuar a pray ao deus e a continuar a 
aprender sobre ele lendo o testament novo. Nos damos boas- 
vindas a seus perguntas e comentarios pelo correio 
eletronico. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Estimado Dios , Gracias aquel esto Nuevo Testamen to has 
estado disparador a fin de que nosotros estamos capaz a 
aprender mas acerca de usted. Por favor ayudeme la gente 
responsable por haciendo esto Electronica litaro disponible. 
Por favor ayudeme esten capaz de obra ayuna , y hacer mas 
Electronica libros mayor disponible Por favor ayudeme 
esten haber todo el recursos , el dinero , el potencia y el 
tiempo aquel ellos necesidad para poder guardar laboral para 
ti. Por favor ayudeme esos aquel esta parte de la equipo 
aquel ayuda ellas en un corriente base. 

Por favor dar ellas el potencia a continuar y dar cada de ellas 
el espiritual comprension por lo obra aquel usted necesidad 
esten hacer. Por favor ayudeme cada de esten no haber 
miedo y a acordarse de aquel usted esta el Dios quien 
respuestas oracion y quien es el encargado de todo. 
Oro aquel usted haria animar ellas , y aquel usted amparar 
ellas , y los trabajadores & ministerio aquel son ocupado en. 
Oro aquel usted haria amparar ellas desde el Espiritual 
Fuerzas o otro obstaculos aquel puedes dano ellas o lento 
ellas down. 

Por favor ayudeme cuando YO uso esto Nuevo Testamento 
a tambien creer de la personas quien haber hecho esto 
edicion disponible , a fin de que YO lata orar por ellas y asi 
ellos lata continuar a ayuda mas personas Oro aquel usted 
haria deme un amor de su Santo Palabra ( el Nuevo 
Testamento ), y aquel usted haria deme espiritual juicio y 
discernimientos saber usted mejor y a comprender el tiempo 
aquel nosotros estamos viviente en. 



Por favor ayiideme saber como a tratar con el dificultades 
aquel Estoy confrontar con todos los dias. Senor Dios , 
Ayiidame querer saber usted Mejor y querer a ayuda otro 
Cristianos en mi area y alrededor del mundo. Oro aquel 
usted haria dar el Electronica libro equipo y esos quien obra 
en la telas y esos quien ayuda ellas su juicio. 

Oro aquel usted haria ayuda el individuo miembros de su 
familia ( y mi familia ) a no estar espiritualmente enganado , 
pero a comprender usted y querer a aceptar y seguir usted en 
todos los dias camino. y YO preguntar usted hacer estos 
cosas en nombre de Jesus , Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Kjsere God , Takk skal du ha det denne Ny Testamentet 

er blitt befridd i den grad at vi er dugelig a h0re flere om du. 
Behage hjelpe folket ansvarlig for gj0r denne Elektronisk 
bestille anvendelig. Behage hjelpe seg a bli kj0pedyktig 
arbeide rask , og lage flere Elektronisk b0ker anvendelig 
Behage hjelpe seg a ha alle ressursene , pengene , det styrke 
og klokken det de n0d for at vsere i stand til oppbevare 
arbeider til deres. 

Behage hjelpe dem det er del av teamet det hjelpe seg opp 
pa en hverdags basis. Behage gir seg det styrke a fortsette og 
gir hver av seg det sprit forstaelse for det arbeide det du 
0nske seg a gj0re. 



Behage hjelpe hver av seg a ikke ha rank og a erindre det du 
er det God hvem svar b0nn og hvem er i ledelsen av alt. JEG 
be det du ville oppmuntre seg , og det du beskytte seg , og 
det arbeide & ministerium det de er forlovet inne. JEG be 
det du ville beskytte seg fra det Sprit Presser eller annet 
obstacles det kunne skade seg eller langsom seg ned. 

Behage hjelpe meg nar JEG bruk denne Ny Testamentet a 
likeledes tenke pa folket hvem ha fremstilt denne opplag 
anvendelig , i den grad at JEG kanne be for seg hvorfor de 
kanne fortsette a hjelpe flere folk JEG be det du ville gir 
meg en kjserlighet til din Hellig Ord ( det Ny Testamentet ), 
og det du ville gir meg sprit klokskap og discernment a vite 
du bedre og a oppfatte perioden det vi lever inne. 
Behage hjelpe meg a vite hvor a beskjeftige seg med 
problemene det JEG er stilt overfor hver dag. Lord God , 
Hjelpe meg a vil gjerne vite du Bedre og a vil gjerne hjelpe 
annet Kristen inne meg omrade og i nserheten verden. 
JEG be det du ville gir det Elektronisk bestille lag og dem 
hvem arbeide med det website og dem hvem hjelpe seg din 
klokskap. JEG be det du ville hjelpe individet medlemmer 
av deres slekt ( og meg slekt ) a ikke vsere spiritually narret , 
bortsett fra a oppfatte du og a vil gjerne godkjenne og f0lge 
etter etter du inne enhver vei. og JEG anmode du a gj0re 
disse saker inne navnet av Jesus , Samarbeidsvillig , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

SWEDISH - SUEDE - SUEDOIS 



Swedish - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - 
explained in Swedish Language 

Swedish Prayer Bon till Gud Jesus Hur till Be Hur kanna 
hora min Hur till fraga Gud till ger hjalp finna ande Ledning 
Talande till Gud , skaparen om Universum , den Var Herre 
och Fralsare : 

1 . sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till be sakerna sa 
pass Jag nod till be 

2. sa pass du skulle ger till jag tapperheten till tro pa du och 
accept vad du vilja till gor med min liv , i stallet for jag 
upphoja min aga vilja ( avsikt ) over din. 

3. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till inte lata min radsla om 
okand till bli den ursakta , eller basisten for jag inte till tjana 
you. 

4. sa pass du skulle ge mig hjalp till se och till lara sig hur 
till har den ande styrka Jag nod ( igenom din uttrycka bibeln 
) en ) for handelsen fore och b ) for min aga personlig ande 
resa. 

5. Sa pass du Gud skulle ge mig hjalp till vilja till tjana Du 
mer 

6. Sa pass du skulle paminna jag till samtal med du 
prayerwhen ) JAG er frustrerat eller i svarigheten , i stallet 
for forsokande till besluta sakerna mig sjalv bara igenom 
min mansklig styrka. 

7. Sa pass du skulle ge mig Visdom och en hjartan fyllt med 
Biblisk Visdom sa fakta at JAG skulle tjana du mer 
effektivt. 8. Sa pass du skulle ge mig en onska till studera 
din uttrycka , bibeln , ( den Ny Testamente Evangelium av 
John ), pa en personlig basis 9. sa pass du skulle ger hjalp 



till jag sa fakta at JAG er kopa duktig marka sakerna inne 
om Bibel ( din uttrycka ) vilken JAG kanna personlig beratta 
till , och den dar vill hjalpa mig forsta vad du vilja jag till 
gor i min liv. 

10. Sa pass du skulle ge mig stor discernment , till forsta hur 
till forklara till sjalvaste vem du er , och sa pass JAG skulle 
kunde lara sig hur till lara sig och veta hur till lopa upp for 
du och mig din uttrycka ( bibeln ) 

1 1. Sa pass du skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i 
min liv vem vilja till veta du och mig , vem de/vi/du/ni ar 
stark i deras exakt forstandet av du ( Gud ); och Sa pass du 
skulle komma med folk ( eller websites ) i min liv vem vilja 
kunde uppmuntra jag till ackurat lara sig hur till fordela 
bibeln orden av sanning Timothy 215:). 

12. Sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till lara sig till har stor 
forstandet om vilken Bibel version ar bast , vilken ar mest 
exakt , och vilken har mest ande styrka & formaga , och 
vilken version samtycke med det original manuskripten sa 
pass du inspirerat forfattarna om Ny Testamente till skriva. 

13. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till anvanda min tid i 
en god vag , och inte till slosa min tid pa Falsk eller tom 
metoderna till komma narmare till Gud ( utom sa pass 
blandar inte sant Biblisk ), och var den har metoderna 
produkter ingen for lange siden tid eller varande ande frukt. 



14. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag till forsta vad till blick 
for i en kyrka eller en stalle av dyrkan , vad slagen av 
sporsmalen till fraga , och sa pass du skulle hjalpa mig till 
finna tro pa eller en pastor med stor ande visdom i stallet for 
latt eller falsk svar. 



15. sa pass du skulle orsak jag till minas till minnesmarke 
din uttrycka bibeln ( sadan som Romersk 8), sa fakta at JAG 
kanna har den i min hjartan och har min sinne beredd , och 
vara rede till a ger en svar till sjalvaste om hoppa pa att Jag 
har omkring du. 

16. Sa pass du skulle komma med hjalp till jag sa fakta at 
min aga theology och doktrin till samtycke med din uttrycka 
, bibeln och sa pass du skulle fortsatta till hjalpa mig veta 
hur min forstandet av doktrin kanna bli forbattrat sa fakta at 
min aga liv , livsform och forstandet fortsatt till vara nojer 
till vad siut du vilja den till vara for jag. 

17. Sa pass du skulle oppen min ande inblicken ( 
sluttningarna ) mer och mer , och sa pass var min forstandet 
eller uppfattningen av du ar inte exakt , sa pass du skulle 
hjalpa mig till lara sig vem Jesus Christ sant ar. 

18. Sa pass du skulle ger hjalp till jag sa fakta at JAG skulle 
kunde skild fran nagon falsk ritual vilken Jag har bero pa , 
fran din klar undervisning inne om Bibel , eventuell om vad 
JAG foljer ar inte av Gud , eller ar i strid mot vad du vilja 
till undervisa oss omkring foljande du. 

19. Sa pass nagon pressar av onda skulle inte ta bort nagon 
ande forstandet vilken Jag har , utom hellre sa pass JAG 
skulle halia kvar kunskap om hur till veta du och mig inte 
till bli lurat i den har dagen av ande bedrageri. 

20. Sa pass du skulle komma med ande styrka och hjalp till 
jag sa fakta at Jag vill inte till bli del om den Stor Stjarnfall 
Bort eller av nagon rorelse vilken skulle bli spiritually 
forfalskad till du och mig till din Helig Uttrycka 

21. Sa pass om dar er nagot sa pass Jag har gjort det min liv 
, eller nagon vag sa pass Jag har inte reagerat till du sa JAG 



skulle har och den dar er forhindrande jag fran endera 
vandrande med du , eller har forstandet , sa pass du skulle 
komma med den har sakerna / svaren / handelsen rygg in i 
min sinne , sa fakta at JAG skulle avsaga sig dem inne om 
Namn av Jesus Christ , och all av deras verkningen och 
konsekvenserna , och sa pass du skulle satta tillbaka nagon 
tomhet ,sadness eller fortvivlan i min liv med det Gladje om 
Var Herre och Fralsare , och sa pass JAG skulle bli mer 
focusen pa inlarningen till folja du vid lasande din uttrycka , 
den Bibel 

22. Sa pass du skulle oppen min oga sa fakta at JAG skulle 
kunde klar se och recognize om dar er en Stor Bedrageri 
omkring Ande amnena , hur till forsta den har phenomenon 
( eller de har handelsen ) fran en Biblisk perspektiv , och sa 
pass du skulle ge mig visdom till veta och sa sa pass Jag vill 
lara sig hur till hjalp min vannerna och alskat en ( slaktingen 
) inte bli del om it. 



23. Sa pass du skulle tillforsakra sa pass en gang min oga 
de/vi/du/ni ar oppnat och min sinne forstar den ande mening 
av strom handelsen tagande stalle pa jorden , sa pass du 
skulle forbereda min hjartan till accept din sanning , och sa 
pass du skulle hjalpa mig forsta hur till finna mod och styrka 
igenom din Helig Uttrycka , bibeln. Inne om namn av Jesus 
Christ , JAG fraga om de har sakerna bekraftande min onska 
till vara i folje avtalen din vilja , och JAG fragar till deras 
visdom och till har en karlek om den Sanning 
Samar betsvillig 



Mer pa botten av Sida 
Hur till har Oandlig Liv 



Vi er glad om den har lista over ( bon anmoder till Gud ) ar 
duglig till hjalpa du. Vi forsta den har Maj inte bli den bast 
eller mest effektiv oversattning. Vi forsta det dar de/vi/du/ni 
ar manga olik vag av yttranden tanken och orden. Om du har 
en forslagen for en battre oversattning , eller om du skulle 
lik till ta en liten belopp av din tid till sanda forslag till oss , 
du vill bli hjalpande tusenden av annan folk ocksa , vem 
vilja da lasa den forbattrat oversattning. Vi ofta har en Ny 
Testamente tillganglig i din sprak eller i spraken sa pass 
de/vi/du/ni ar sallsynt eller gammal. Om du er sett for en Ny 
Testamente i en bestamd sprak , behaga skriva till oss. 
Ocksa , vi behov till vara saker och forsok till meddela sa 
pass ibland , vi gor erbjudande bokna sa pass blandar inte 
Fri och sa pass gor kostnad pengar. Utom om du kan icke 
har rad med det nagot om den har elektronisk bokna , vi 
kanna ofta gor en byta av elektronisk bokna for hjalp med 
oversattning eller oversattning verk. 

Du hade inte till vara en professionell arbetaren , enda et par 
regelbunden person vem er han intresserad i hjalpande. Du 
borde har en computern eller du borde ha ingang till en 
computern pa din lokal bibliotek eller college eller 
universitet , sedan dess den har vanligtvis har battre 
forbindelserna till Internet. Du kanna ocksa vanligtvis 
grunda din aga personlig FRI elektronisk sanda med posten 
redovisa vid gar till mail.yahoo.com 

### Behaga ta en stund till finna den elektronisk sanda med 
posten adress lokaliserat nederst eller sluten av den har sida. 
Vi hoppas du vill sanda elektronisk sanda med posten till 
oss , om den har er av hjalp eller uppmuntran. Vi ocksa 
uppmuntra du till komma i kontakt med oss angaande 
Elektronisk Bokna sa pass vi erbjudande sa pass de/vi/du/ni 
ar utan kostnad , och fri. 



Vi gor har manga bokna i utlandsk spraken , utom vi inte 
alltid stalle dem till ta emot elektronisk ( data overfor ) 
emedan vi bara gora tillganglig bokna eller amnena sa pass 
de/vi/du/ni ar mest begaret. Vi uppmuntra du till fortsatta till 
be till Gud och till fortsatta till lara sig omkring Honom vid 
lasande den Ny Testamente. Vi valkomnande din 
sporsmalen och kommentarerna vid elektronisk sanda med 
posten. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Anwylyd Celi , Ddiolch 'eh a hon 'n Grai 
Destament gollyngwyd fel a allwn at ddysg hychwaneg 
amdanat. Blesio chyfnertha 'r boblogi 'n atebol achos yn 
gwneud hon Electronic llyfr ar gael. 

Blesio chyfnertha 'u at all gweithia ymprydia , a gwna 
hychwaneg Electronic llyfrau ar gael Blesio chyfnertha 'u at 
ca pawb 'r adnoddau , 'r arian , 'r chryfder a 'r amsera a hwy 
angen er all cadw yn gweithio atat. Blesio chyfnertha hynny 
sy barthu chan 'r heigia a chyfnertha 'u acha an everyday 
sail. 

Blesio anrhega 'u 'r chryfder at arhosa a anrhega pob un 
chanddyn 'r 'n ysbrydol yn deall achos 'r gweithia a 'eh 
angen 'u at gwna. 

Blesio chyfnertha pob un chanddyn at mo ca arswyda a at 
atgofia a ach 'r Celi a atebiadau arawd a sy i mewn 
chyhudda chan bopeth. Archa a anogech 'u , a a achlesi 'u , a 
'r gweithia & gweinidogaeth a ]n cyflogedig i mewn. Archa 



a achlesech 'u chan 'r 'n Ysbrydol Grymoedd ai arall 
rhwystrau a could amhara 'u ai arafa 'u i lawr. 
Blesio chyfnertha 'm pryd Arfera hon 'n Grai Destament at 
hefyd dybied chan 'r boblogi a wedi gwneud hon argraffiad 
ar gael , fel a Alla gweddi'o am 'u a fel allan arhosa at 
chyfnertha hychwaneg boblogi Archa a anrhegech 'm 
anwylaeth chan 'eh 'n gysegr-lan Eiria ( 'r 'n Grai Destament 
), a a anrhegech 'm 'n ysbrydol callineb a ddirnadaeth at 
adnabod gwellhawch a at ddeall 'r atalnod chan amsera a ]m 
yn bucheddu i mewn. Blesio chyfnertha 'm at adnabod fel at 
ymdrin 'r afrwyddinebau a Dwi wynebedig ag ddiwedydd. 
Arglwydd Celi , Chyfnertha 'm at angen at adnabod 
gwellhawch a at angen at chyfnertha arall Cristnogion i 
mewn 'm arwynebedd a am 'r byd. Archa a anrhegech 'r 
Electronic llyfr heigia a hynny a gweithia acha 'r website a 
hynny a chyfnertha 'u 'eh callineb. Archa a chyfnerthech 'r 
hunigol aelodau chan 'n hwy deulu ( a 'm deulu ) at mo bod 
'n ysbrydol dwylledig , namyn at ddeall 'eh a at angen at 
chymer a canlyn 'eh i mewn 'n bob ffordd. a Archa 'eh at 
gwna hyn bethau i mewn 'r enwa chan lesu , Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Iceland -\ Icelandic 



Icelan d 

Icelandic Icelandic - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) 

to God - explained in Icelandic Language 

Prayer Isceland Icelandic Jesus Kristur Baen til Guo 
Hvernig til Bioja Hvernig geta spyrja gefa hjalpa andlegur 
Leiosogn 



Tal til Gu5 the Skapari af the Alheimur the Herra : 

1 . bessi bu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til biSja the hlutur 
pessi EG porf til bi9ja 

2. pessi pu vildi gefa til mig the hugrekki til trua pu og 
piggja hva5a pu vilja til komast af me5 minn lif , i staSinn af 
mig upphefja minn eiga vilja ( asetningur ) yfir pinn. 

3. pessi pu vildi gefa mig hjalpa til ekki lata minn ogurlegur 
af the opekktur til verSa the afsokun , e5a the undirstaSa 
fyrir mig ekki til bera fram you. 4. J)essi J)u vildi gefa mig 
hjalpa til sja og til lsera hvernig til hafa the andlegur styrkur 
EG J)6rf ( i gegnum J)inn or5 the Biblia a ) fyrir the atburSur 
a undan ) og b ) fyrir minn eiga personulegur andlegur fer5. 

5. E>essi J)u Gu5 vildi gefa mig hjalpa til vilja til bera fram 
M fleiri 6. E>essi J)u vildi minna a mig til tala me5 f)u 
prayerwhen ) EG er svekktur e5a i vandi , i staSinn af 
erfiSur til asetningur hlutur eg sjalfur eini i gegnum minn 
mannlegur styrkur. 

7. E>essi J)u vildi gefa mig Viska og a hjarta fiskflak me5 
Bibliulegur Viska svo bessi EG vildi bera fram J)u fleiri a 
ahrifarikan hatt. 

8. l^essi bu vildi gefa mig a longun til nema binn or5 the 
Biblia the Nyja testamentiS GuSspjall af Klosett ), a a 
personulegur undirstaSa 

9. J)essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig svo J)essi EG er fser til 
taka eftir hlutur i the Biblia ( binn or5 ) hver EG geta 
personulega segja fra til , og J)essi vilja hjalpa mig skilja 
hvaSa pu vilja mig til gera ut af vi5 minn lif. 



10. J>essi J)u vildi gefa mig mikill skarpskyggni , til skilja 
hvernig til litskyra til annar hver J)u ert , og J)essi EG vildi 
vera fser til lsera hvernig til lsera og vita hvernig til standa 
me5 J)u og f>inn or5 the Biblia ) 

1 1 . f>essi bu vildi koma me5 folk ( e5a websites ) i minn lif 
hver vilja til vita bu , og hver ert sterkur i beirra nakvsemur 
skilningur af J)u ( gu5 ); og E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 folk ( 
e5a websites ) i minn lif hver vilja vera fser til hvetja mig til 
nakvsemur lsera hvernig til deila the Biblia the or5 gu5s 
sannleikur (2 HrseSslugjarn 215:). 

12. J>essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera til hafa mikill 
skilningur 65ur i hver Biblia utgafa er bestur , hver er 
nakvsemur , og hver hefur the andlegur styrkur & mattur , og 
hver utgafa samj)ykkja me5 the frumeintak handrit J)essi J)u 
biasa i brjost the ritstorf af the Nyja testamentiS til skrifa. 

13. l>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig til nota minn timi i g65 
kaup vegur , og ekki til soa minn timi a Falskur e5a tomur 
a5fer5 til fa loka til Gu5 ( en J)essi ert ekki hreinskilnislega 
Bibliulegur ), og hvar bessir a5fer5 avextir og grsenmeti 
neitun langur or5 e5a varanlegur andlegur avoxtur. 

14. E>essi J)u vildi gefa a5sto5 til mig til skilja hvaSa til leita 
a5 i a kirkja e5a a staSur af dyrkun , hvaSa g65ur af 
spurning til spyrja , og J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til finna 
trumaSur e5a a prestur me5 mikill andlegur viska i staSinn 
af J)segilegur e5a falskur svar. 

15. J)essi J)u vildi orsok mig til muna til leggja a minniS J)inn 
or5 the Biblia ( svo sem eins og Latneskt letur 8), svo J)essi 
EG geta hafa ba5 i minn hjarta og hafa minn hugur tilbuinn , 
og vera tilbuinn til gefa oakveSinn greinir i ensku svar til 
annar af the von bessi EG hafa 65ur i J)ii. 



16. E>essi J)u vildi koma me5 hjalpa til mig svo pessi minn 
eiga guSfrseSi og kenning til vera i samrsemi vi5 J)inn or5 
the Biblia og bessi bu vildi halda afram til hjalpa mig vita 
hvernig minn skilningur af kenning geta vera bseta svo bessi 
minn eiga lif lifestyle og skilningur halda afram til vera loka 
til hvaSa bu vilja ba9 til vera fyrir mig. 

17. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn andlegur innsyn ( endir ) fleiri 
og fleiri , og bessi hvar minn skilningur e5a skynjun af bu er 
ekki nakvsemur , J)essi J)u vildi hjalpa mig til lsera hver Jesus 
Kristur hreinskilnislega er. 

18. J>essi J)u vildi gefa hjalpa til mig svo pessi EG vildi vera 
fser til aSskilinn allir falskur helgisiSir hver EG hafa 
6sjalfstse5i a , fra J)inn bjartur kennsla i the Biblia , ef allir af 
hvaSa EG er hopur stuSningsmanna er ekki af Gu5 , e5a er 
gegn hvaSa bu vilja til kenna okkur 65ur i hopur 
stuSningsmanna J)u. 

19. E>essi allir herafli af vondur vildi ekki taka burt allir 
andlegur skilningur hver EG hafa , en fremur J)essi EG vildi 
halda the vitneskja af hvernig til vita J)u og ekki til vera 
blekkja i bessir sem minnir a gomlu dagana) af andlegur 
blekking. 

20. E>essi bu vildi koma me5 andlegur styrkur og hjalpa til 
mig svo pessi EG vilja ekki til vera hluti af the Mikill Bylta 
Burt e5a af allir hreyfing hver vildi vera andlegur folsun til 
J)u og til J)inn Heilagur Or5 

21. E>essi ef there er nokkuS J)essi EG hafa buinn minn lif , 
e5a allir vegur J)essi EG hafa ekki sa sem svarar til J)u eins 
og EG 6x1 hafa og bessi er sem koma ma i veg fyrir e6a 
afstyra mig fra annar hvor gangandi me9 J)u , e6a having 
skilningur , J)essi J)u vildi koma me5 J)essir hlutur / svar / 



atbur9ur bak inn i minn hugur , svo bessi EG vildi afheita ba 
i the Nafn af Jesiis Kristur , og ekki minna en beirra ahrif og 
aflei9ing , og bessi bii vildi skipta um allir tomleiki ,sadness 
e9a orvsnting i minn lff me9 the Gle9i af the Herra , og 
pessi EG vildi vera fleiri brennidepill a lserdomur til fylgja 
bu vi9 lestur binn or9 the Biblia 

22. J>essi bu vildi opinn minn augsyn svo pessi EG vildi vera 
fser til greinilega sja og bekkjanlegur ef there er a Mikill 
Blekking 65ur i Andlegur atri9i , hvernig til skilja this q ( 
e9a pessir atbur9ur ) fra a Bibliulegur yfirsyn , og bessi bii 
vildi gefa mig viska til vita og svo bessi EG vilja lsera 
hvernig til hjalpa minn vinatta og ast sjalfur ( settingi ) ekki 
vera hluti af it. 

23. E>essi bii vildi tryggja J)essi einu sinni minn augsyn ert 
opnari og minn hugur skilja the andlegur merking af 
straumur atbur<3ur hrifandi sta5ur i the verold , J)essi J)u vildi 
undirbiia minn hjarta til biggja binn sannleikur , og J)essi J)ii 
vildi hjalpa mig skilja hvernig til finna hugrekki og styrkur i 
gegnum J)inn Heilagur Or9 the Biblia. I the nafn af Jesiis 
Kristur , EG spyrja fyrir J)essir hlutur staSfesta minn longun 
til vera i samkomulag J)inn vilja , og EG er asking fyrir J)inn 
viska og til hafa a ast af the Sannleikur Mottsekilegur 



Fleiri a the Botn af Bla9si9a 
Hvernig til hafa Eilifur Lif 



Vi5 ert gla5ur ef this listi ( af bsen bei9ni til Gu9 ) er fser til 
a5sto9a J)ii. Vi9 skilja this mega ekki vera the bestur e9a 
arangursrikur J)y9ing. Vi9 skilja J)essi there ert margir olikur 
lifha9arhaettir af tjaning hugsun og or9. Ef J)ii hafa a 
uppastunga fyrir a betri J)y9ing , e9a ef J)ii vildi eins og til 



taka a litill magn af binn timi til senda uppastunga til okkur , 
pu vilja vera skammtur pusund af annar folk einnig , hver 
vilja pa lesa the bseta bySing. 

Vi5 oft hafa a Nyja testamen ti5 laus i binn tungumal e5a i 
tungumal pessi ert sjaldgsefur e5a gamall. Ef pu ert utlit fyrir 
a Nyja testamentiS i a serstakur tungumal , poknast skrifa til 
okkur. Einnig , vi5 vilja til vera viss og reyna til miSla J)essi 
stundum , vi5 gera tilboS bok J)essi ert ekki Frjals og J)essi 
gera kostnaSur peningar. En ef J)u geta ekki hafa efni a 
sumir af J)essir raftseknilegur bok , vi5 geta oft gera 
oakveSinn greinir i ensku skipti af raftseknilegur bok fyrir 
hjalpa me5 pySing e5a pySing vinna. M gera ekki ver5a a5 
vera a faglegur verkamaSur , eini a venjulegur manneskja 
hver er ahugasamur i skammtur. M 6x1 hafa a tolva e5a bii 
6x1 hafa aSgangur til a tolva a J)inn heimamaSur bokasafn 
e5a haskoli e5a haskoli , siSan bessir venjulega hafa betri 
tengsl til the. M geta einnig venjulega stofnsetja binn eiga 
personulegur FRJALS raftseknilegur postur reikningur vi5 
a5 fara til mail.yahoo.com 



E>6knast taka a augnablik til finna the raftseknilegur postur 
heimilisfang staSgreina a the botn e5a the endir af this 
bla5si5a. Vi5 von bu vilja senda raftseknilegur postur til 
okkur , ef this er af hjalpa e5a hvatning. Vi5 einnig hvetja 
pu til snerting okkur viSvikjandi Raftseknilegur Bok J)essi 
vi5 tilbod bessi ert an kostnaSur , og frjals. 



Vi5 gera hafa margir bok i erlendur tungumal , en vi5 gera 
ekki alltaf staSur J)a til taka a moti electronically ( ssekja 
skra af fjarlsegri tolvu ) J)vi vi5 eini gera laus the bok e5a the 
atri5i J)essi ert the beiSni. Vi5 hvetja bu til halda afram til 
bi5ja til Gu5 og til halda afram til lsera 65ur i Hann vi5 



lestur the Nyja testamenti9. Vi9 velkominn J)inn spurning og 
athugasemd vi9 raftseknilegur postur. 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Danish - Danemark 



Danish - Prayer Requests (praying / T alking) to God - 
e x p I a i n e d in Danish Language 

Prayer Danish Dannish Denmarkjesus Bon hentilGod HvorBed 
kunne hore mig Hvoropfordre indromme haelp hen mig 

Taler hen til God , den Skaberen i den Alt , den Lord : 1. at 
jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til bed den sager 
at JEG savn hen til bed 

2. at jer ville indr0mme hen til mig den mod hen til tro jer 
og optage hvad jer ville gerne lave hos mig liv , istedet for 
mig ophoje mig besidde vil ( hensigt ) ovenfor jeres. 

3. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ikke lade mig 
skrsek i den ubekendt hen til blive den bede om tilgivelse , 
eller den holdepunkt nemlig mig ikke hen til anrette you. 

4. at jer ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til se efter og hen til 
laere hvor hen til nyde den appel krsefter JEG savn ( 
igennem jeres ord den Bibel ) en ) nemlig den begivenheder 
foran og b ) nemlig mig besidde personlig appel rejse. 

5. At jer God ville indr0mme mig hjselp hen til ville gerne 
anrette Jer flere 



6. At jer ville erindre mig hen til samtale hos jer prayerwhen 
) Jeg er kuldkastet eller i problem , istedet for pr0ver hen til 
l0se sager selv bare igennem mig human krsefter. 

7. At jer ville indr0mme mig Klogskab og en hjerte fyldte 
hos Bibelsk Klogskab i den grad at JEG ville anrette jer 
flere effektive. 

8. At jer ville indr0mme mig en lyst hen til lsese jeres ord , 
den Bibel , ( den Ny Testamente Gospel i John ), oven pa en 
personlig holdepunkt 

9. at jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at Jeg er 
k0bedygtig mserke sager i den Bibel ( jeres ord ) hvilke JEG 
kunne jeg for mit vedkommende henh0re til , og at vil hjselp 
mig opfatte hvad jer savn mig hen til lave i mig liv. 

10. At jer ville indr0mme mig stor discernment , hen til 
opfatte hvor hen til forklare hen til andre hvem du er , og at 
JEG ville vaere i stand til laere hvor hen til laere og kende 
hvor hen til rage op nemlig jer og jeres ord ( den Bibel ) 

1 1 . At jer ville overbringe folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv 
hvem ville gerne kende jer , og hvem er kraftig i deres 
n0jagtig opfattelse i jer God ); og At jer ville overbringe 
folk ( eller websites ) i mig liv hvem vil vaere i stand til give 
mod mig hen til akkurat lasre hvor hen til skille den Bibel 
den ord i sandhed Timothy 215:). 

12. At jer ville hjaelp mig hen til laere hen til nyde stor 
opfattelse hvorom Bibel gengivelse er bedst , hvilke er h0jst 
n0jagtig , og hvilke har den h0jst appel kraefter & kraft , og 
hvilke gengivelse indvilliger hos den selvstasndig 
handskreven at jer inspireret den forfatteres i den Ny 
Testamente hen til skriv. 



13. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til hjselp mig 
gang i en artig made , og ikke hen til affald mig gang oven 
pa Falsk eller indholdsl0s metoder hen til komme nsermere 
hen til God ( men at er ikke sandelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor 
dem metoder opf0re for ikke sa lsenge siden periode eller 
varer appel fruit. 

14. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig hen til opfatte 
hvad hen til kigge efter i en kirke eller en opstille i 
andagts0gende , hvad arter i sp0rgsmal hen til opfordre , og 
at jer ville hjselp mig hen til hitte tro eller en sidst hos stor 
appel klogskab istedet for nemme eller falsk svar. 

15. at jer ville hidf0re mig hen til huske hen til lsere udenad 
jeres ord den Bibel ( sasom Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG 
kunne nyde sig i mig hjerte og nyde mig indre forberedt , og 
vsere rede til at indr0mme en besvare hen til andre i den 
habe pa at Jeg har omkring jer. 

16. At jer ville overbringe hjselp hen til mig i den grad at 
mig besidde theology og doctrines hen til samtykke med 
jeres ord , den Bibel og at jer ville fortssette hen til hjselp 
mig kende hvor mig opfattelse i doctrine kan forbedret i den 
grad at mig besidde liv lifestyle og opfattelse fortssetter at 
blive n0jere hvortil jer savn sig at blive nemlig mig. 

17. At jer ville lukke op mig appel indblik ( afslutninger ) 
flere og flere , og at der hvor mig opfattelse eller 
opfattelsesevne i jer er ikke n0jagtig , at jer ville hjselp mig 
hen til lsere hvem Jesus Christ sandelig er. 

18. At jer ville indr0mme hjselp hen til mig i den grad at 
JEG ville vsere i stand til selvstsendig hvilken som helst 
falsk rituals hvilke Jeg har afhsenge oven pa , af jeres slette 
lserer i den Bibel , eventuel hvoraf Jeg er nseste er ikke i God 



, eller er imod hvad jer ville gerne belsere os omkring nseste 
jer. 

19. At hvilken som helst tvinger i darlig ville ikke holde 
bortrejst hvilken som helst appel opfattelse hvilke Jeg har , 
men nsermest at JEG ville beholde den kundskab i hvor hen 
til kende jer og ikke at blive narrede i i denne tid i appel 
bedrag. 

20. At jer ville overbringe appel krsefter og hjselp hen til mig 
i den grad at Ja ikke at blive noget af den Stor Nedadgaende 
Bortrejst eller i hvilken som helst bevsegelse som kunne 
vsere spiritually counterfeit hen til jer og hen til jeres Hellig 
Ord 

2 1 . At selv om der er alt at Jeg har skakmat mig liv , eller 
hvilken som helst made at Jeg har ikke reageret hen til jer 
nemlig JEG burde nyde og det vil sige afholder mig af enten 
den ene eller den anden af omvandrende hos jer , eller har 
opfattelse , at jer ville overbringe dem sager / svar / 
begivenheder igen i mig indre , i den grad at JEG ville afsta 
fra sig i den Bensevne i Jesus Christ , og al i deres effekter 
og f0lger , og at jer ville skifte ud hvilken som helst tomhed 
,sadness eller opgive habet i mig liv hos den Glsede i den 
Lord , og at JEG ville vsere flere indstille oven pa indlasring 
hen til komme efter jer af lsesning jeres ord , den Bibel 

22. At jer ville lukke op mig ojne i den grad at JEG ville 
vsere i stand til klart se efter og anerkende selv om der er en 
Stor Bedrag omkring Appel emner , hvor hen til opfatte 
indevaerende phenomenon ( eller disse begivenheder ) af en 
Bibelsk perspektiv , og at jer ville indr0mme mig klogskab 
hen til kende hvorfor at Ja laere hvor hen til hjaelp mig 
bekendte og elske ones ( slasgtninge ) ikke vaere noget af it. 



23. At jer ville sikre sig at nar f0rst mig 0jne er anlagde og 
mig indre forstar den appel vsegt i indevserende 
begivenheder indtagelse opstille pa jorden , at jer ville lsegge 
til rette mig hjerte hen til optage jeres sandhed , og at jer 
ville hjselp mig opfatte hvor hen til hitte mod og krsefter 
igennem jeres Hellig Ord , den Bibel. I den bensevne i Jesus 
Christ , JEG anmode om disse sager bekrseftende mig lyst at 
blive overensstemmende jeres vil , og Jeg er bede om 
nemlig jeres klogskab og hen til nyde en kserlighed til den 
Sandhed Amen 



Flere forneden S ide 
Hvor hen til nyde Evig Liv 



Vi er glad selv om indevserende liste over ( b0n anmoder 
hen til God ) er kan hen til hjselpe jer. Vi opfatte 
indevserende ma ikke vsere den bedst eller hojst effektiv 
gengivelse. Vi er klar over, at der er mange anderledes veje i 
gengivelse indfald og ord. Selv om du har en henstilling 
nemlig en bedre gengivelse , eller selv om jer ville gerne 
hen til holde en ringe bel0b i jeres gang hen til sende 
antydninger hen til os , jer vil vsere hjalp tusindvis i andre 
ligeledes , hvem vil sa er der ikke mere lsese den forbedret 
gengivelse. 

Vi ofte nyde en Ny Testamente anvendelig i jeres sprog eller 
i sprogene at er sjselden eller forhenvserende. Selv om du er 
ser ud nemlig en Ny Testamente i en specifik sprog , behage 
henvende sig til os. Ligeledes , vi ville gerne vsere sikker og 
pr0ve hen til overf0rer at engang imellem , vi lave pristilbud 
b0ger at er ufri og at lave omkostninger penge. Men selv om 
jer kan ikke afgive noget af dem elektronisk b0ger , vi 
kunne ofte lave en udveksle i elektronisk b0ger nemlig 



hjselp hos gengivelse eller gengivelse arbejde. Jer som ikke 
har at blive en professional arbejder , kun fa sand 
pagseldende hvem er interesseret i hjalp. 

Jer burde nyde en computer eller jer burde have adgang til 
en computer henne ved jeres lokal bibliotek eller kollegium 
eller universitet , siden dem til hverdag nyde bedre 
slsegtskaber hen til den indre. Jer kunne ligeledes til hverdag 
indrette jeres besidde personlig OMKOSTNINGSFRIT 
elektronisk indlevere beretning af igangvserende hen til 
mail.yahoo.com 

### 

Behage holde for et ojeblik siden hen til hitte den 
elektronisk indlevere henvende placeret nederst eller den 
enden pa legen indevserende side. Vi hab jer vil sende 
elektronisk indlevere hen til os , selv om indevserende er i 
hjaslp eller ophjaelpning. Vi ligeledes give mod jer hen til 
henvende sig til os med henblik pa Elektronisk B0ger at vi 
pristilbud at er uden omkostninger , og omkostningsfrit. 

Vi lave nyde mange b0ger i udenlandsk sprogene , men vi 
lave ikke altid opstille sig hen til byde velkommen 
elektronisk ( dataoverf0re ) fordi vi bare skabe anvendelig 
den b0ger eller den emner at er den h0jst anmodede. 

Vi give mod jer hen til fortssette hen til bed hen til God og 
hen til fortssette hen til laere omkring Sig af laesning den Ny 
Testamente. Vi velkommen jeres sp0rgsmal og 
bemaerkninger af elektronisk indlevere. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Norway - Norway - Norwegian - 

Norway - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained 
in Norwegian Language 

Norway Norwegian Nordic Prayer Jesus Christ a God Hvor Be 
kanne hore meg bonn anmode gir hjelpe meg finner sprit Som kan 
ledes 



Snakker a God , skaperen av det Univers , det Lord : 

1. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a be tingene det JEG 
n0d a be 

2. det du ville gir a meg tapperheten a mene du og 
godkjenne hva du vil gjerne gj0re med meg livet , istedet for 
meg opph0ye meg egen ville ( hensikten ) over din. 

3. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a ikke utleie meg rank av det 
ubekjent a bli det be om tilgivelse , eller grunnlaget for meg 
ikke for a anrette you. 

4. det du ville gir meg hjelpe a se og a hore hvor a har den 
sprit styrke JEG n0d ( igjennom din ord bibelen ) en ) for 
begivenhetene for ut og b ) for meg egen personlig sprit 
reise. 

5. Det du God ville gir meg hjelpe a vil gjerne anrette Du 
flere 

6. Det du ville minne meg a samtalen med du prayerwhen ) 
JEG er frustrert eller inne problemet , istedet for pr0ver a 
l0se saker meg selv bare igjennom meg human styrke. 



7. Det du ville gir meg Klokskap og en hjertet fylte med 
Bibelsk Klokskap i den grad at JEG ville anrette du flere 
effektivt. 

8. Det du ville gir meg en 0nske a studere din ord , bibelen , 
( det Ny Testamentet Gospel av John ), opp pa en personlig 
basis 

9. det du ville gir assistanse a meg i den grad at JEG er 
kj0pedyktig legge merke til saker inne bibelen ( din ord ) 
hvilke JEG kanne personlig fortelle til , og det vill hjelpe 
meg oppfatte hva du 0nske meg a gj0re inne meg livet. 



10. Det du ville gir meg stor discernment , a oppfatte hvor a 
forklare a andre hvem du er , og det JEG ville vsere i stand 
til h0re hvor a h0re og vite hvor a sta opp for du og din ord ( 
bibelen ) 

1 1 . Det du ville bringe folk ( eller websites ) inne meg livet 
hvem vil gjerne vite du , og hvem er kraftig inne deres 
akkurat forstaelse av du God ); og Det du ville bringe folk ( 
eller websites ) inne meg livet hvem ville vsere i stand til 
oppmuntre meg a akkurat h0re hvor a dividere bibelen ordet 
av sannhet (Timothy 215:). 

12. Det du ville hjelpe meg a h0re a ha stor forstaelse om 
hvilken Bibel versjon er best , hvilke er h0yst akkurat , og 
hvilke har de fleste sprit styrke & makt , og hvilke versjon 
avtaler med det original manuskriptet det du inspirert 
forfatternes av det Ny Testamentet a skrive. 

13. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg a bruk meg tid inne en fint 
vei , og ikke for a sl0seri meg tid opp pa False eller tom 
emballasje metoder a komme naermere a God ( bortsett fra 



det er tkke virkelig Bibelsk ), og der hvor dem metoder 
tilvirke for ikke sa lenge siden frist eller varer sprit fruit. 

14. Det du ville gir assistanse a meg a oppfatte hva a kikke 
etter inne en kirken eller en sted av -tilbeder , hva arter av 
sp0rsmal a anmode , og det du ville hjelpe meg a finner 
mene eller en fortid med stor sprit klokskap istedet for lett 
eller false svar. 

15. det du ville anledning meg a erindre a huske din ord 
bibelen ( som Romersk 8), i den grad at JEG kanne ha den 
inne meg hjertet og ha meg sinn ferdig , og vsere rede til a 
gir en svaret a andre av det hape pa at JEG ha om du. 

16. Det du ville bringe hjelpe a meg i den grad at meg egen 
theology og doctrines a vsere enig i din ord , bibelen og det 
du ville fortsette a hjelpe meg vite hvor meg forstaelse av 
doctrine kan forbedret i den grad at meg egen livet lifestyle 
og forstaelse fortsetter a bli n0yere hvorfor du 0nske den a 
bli for meg. 

17. Det du ville apen meg sprit innblikk ( konklusjonene ) 
flere og flere , og det der hvor meg forstaelse eller 
oppfattelse av du er ikke akkurat , det du ville hjelpe meg a 
h0re hvem Jesus Christ virkelig er. 

18. Det du ville gir hjelpe a meg i den grad at JEG ville 
vsere i stand til separat alle false rituals hvilke JEG ha 
avhenge opp pa , fra din helt lserer inne bibelen , eventuell 
av hva JEG f0lger er ikke av God , eller er i motsetning til 
hva du vil gjerne lsere oss om fulgte du. 

19. Det alle presser av darlig ville ikke ta fjerne alle sprit 
forstaelse hvilke JEG ha , bortsett fra temmelig det JEG 
ville selge i detalj kjennskapen til hvor a vite du og ikke for 
a vsere narret inne i disse dager av sprit bedrag. 



20. Det du ville taringe sprit styrke og hjelpe a meg i den 
grad at Jeg vil ikke for a vsere del av det Stor Faller Fjerne 
eller av alle bevegelse hvilket kunne vsere spiritually 
counterfeit a du og a din Hellig Ord 

21. Det hvis det er alt det JEG ha gjort det meg livet , eller 
alle vei det JEG ha ikke reagert a du idet JEG burde ha og 
det er forhindrer meg fra enten den ene eller den andre av 
gaing med du , eller har forstaelse , det du ville bringe dem 
saker / svar / begivenheter rygg i meg sinn , i den grad at 
JEG ville renonsere pa seg inne navnet av Jesus Christ , og 
alle av deres virkninger og konsekvensene , og det du ville 
ombytte alle tomhet ,sadness eller gi opp hapet inne meg 
livet med det Glede av det Lord , og det JEG ville vsere flere 
fokusere opp pa innlsering a f0lge etter etter du av lesing din 
ord , det Bibel 

22. Det du ville apen meg eyes i den grad at JEG ville vsere i 
stand til klare se og anerkjenne hvis det er en Stor Bedrag 
om Sprit emner , hvor a oppfatte denne phenomenon ( eller 
disse begivenheter ) fra en Bibelsk perspektiv , og det du 
ville gir meg klokskap a vite hvorfor det Jeg vil h0re hvor a 
hjelpe meg venner og elsket seg ( slektningene ) ikke vsere 
del av it. 

23. Det du ville sikre det en gang meg eyes er apen og meg 
sinn forstar det sprit vekt av aktuelle begivenheter tar sted 
pa jorden , det du ville forberede meg hjertet a godkjenne 
din sannhet , og det du ville hjelpe meg oppfatte hvor a 
finner tapperheten og styrke igjennom din Hellig Ord , 
bibelen. Inne navnet av Jesus Christ , JEG anmode om disse 
saker bekreftende meg 0nske a bli i f0lge avtalen din ville , 
og JEG sp0r til deres klokskap og a har en kjserlighet til det 
Sannhet Samarbeidsvillig 



Flere pa bunnen av S ide 
Hvor a ha Evig Livet 



Vi er glad hvis denne liste over ( b0nn anmoder a God ) er 
dugelig a hjelpe du. Vi oppfatte denne kanskje ikke vsere det 
best eller h0yst effektiv oversettelse. Vi forsta det der er 
mange annerledes veier av gjengivelsen innfall og ord. Hvis 
du har en forslag for en bedre oversettelse , eller hvis du 
ville like a ta en liten bel0pet av din tid a sende antydninger 
a oss , du ville vsere hjalp tusenvis av andre mennesker 
likeledes , hvem ville sa lese det forbedret oversettelse. Vi 
ofte har en Ny Testamentet anvendelig inne din 
omgangssprak eller inne sprakene det er sjelden eller gamle. 
Hvis du er ser for en Ny Testamentet inne en spesifikk 
omgangssprak , behage skrive til oss. Likeledes , vi vil 
gjerne vsere sikker og pr0ve a meddele det en gang imellom 
, vi gj0re tilbud b0ker det er ufri og det gj0re bekostning 
pengene. 

Bortsett fra hvis du kan ikke by noen av dem elektronisk 
b0ker , vi kanne ofte gj0re en bytte av elektronisk b0ker for 
hjelpe med oversettelse eller oversettelse arbeide. Du som 
ikke har a bli en profesjonell arbeider , kun fa stamgjest 
personen hvem er interessert i hjalp. Du burde har en 
computer eller du burde ha adgang til en computer for din 
innenbys bibliotek eller universitet eller universitet , siden 
dem vanligvis ha bedre forbindelser a det sykehuslege. Du 
kanne likeledes vanligvis opprette din egen personlig 
LEDIG elektronisk innlevere regningen av gar a 
mail.yahoo.com 

Behage ta en 0yeblikk a finner det elektronisk innlevere 
henvende seg lokalisert nederst eller utgangen av denne 
side. Vi hape du ville sende elektronisk innlevere a oss , 



hvis denne er av hjelpe eller oppmuntring. Vi likeledes 
oppmuntre du a sette seg i forbindelse med oss angaende 
Elektronisk B0ker det vi tilbud det er uten bekostning , og 
ledig. 

Vi gj0re ha mange b0ker inne utenlandsk sprakene , bortsett 
fra vi ikke alltid sted seg a fa elektronisk ( dataoverf0re ) 
fordi vi bare lage anvendelig b0kene eller emnene det er de 
fleste anmodet. Vi oppmuntre du a fortsette a be a God og a 
fortsette a h0re om Seg av lesing det Ny Testamentet. Vi 
velkommen din sp0rsmal og kommentarer av elektronisk 
innlevere. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Modern Greek 



IlpooetOT oto 0e6 Aya7mx6c; 0e6<;, Eac; et)xapioxorjLie 6xt 
aox6 to Erjayyeko f) ao-cf) r) vea 5ia9f)Kn exet 
oaieXerj9epco9ei exot cboxe eiuaoxe oe 9eor| va ud9ot)ue 
7ieptoo6xepcflv yta oa;. ITapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe xovq 
av9pd)7iorj<; apuoStorjc; yta va Kaxaoxf|oei aox6 xo 
rjIeKipoviKo Pipiio 5ta9eotuo. Eepexe 710101 eivat Koa eioxe 
oe 9eor) va xovq Por|9f|oexe. ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta 
va eioxe oe 9eor) va a7taoxoXr|9ei ypf)yopa, Kat va 
KaraoTrioei oe 7ieptoo6xepa r|XeKxpoviKd Pipiia 5ta9eot|ia 
ITapaKaM) xovq Por|9f|oxe yta va exexe olouc; xovq 7t6porj<;, 
ia xpTHiaxa, xn 5i3vaur| Kat xo xpovo 6xt xp£tdCovxai 
7tpoiceiuevorj va eivat oe 9eor) va oi)vexioot)v yta oa;. 
ITapaKaM Por|9f|oxe eKeivot 7torj eivat uepoc; xnc; oudSac; 
7tot) xovq Por)9d oe Ka9r|uepivr| pdor). ITapaKaM xovq 
5cboxe xn 5i3vaur| yta va ouvexioexe Kat va 5cboexe oe Kd9e 
evav ajco xovq xo O7upixoorjal kov> KoraMpaivet yta xnv 



epyaoia 6xi xox>q 9eXexe yia va K&veie. riapaKaM) Por|9f|oxe 
Kd9e evac; oaio xovq yia va lit|v exexe xo (p6(3o Kai yia va 
9i)Lir|9eixe 6xi eioxe o ©eoc; ran) ajiavid oxr|v 7tpooeuxii Kai 
7iou eivai iwiei)9i)voc; yia 6Xa. 
npooei3xo(iai 6xi 9a xovq ev9appi3vaxe, Kai 6xi xouc; 
7tpooxaxei)exe, Kai r) epyaoia & xo raoupyeio 6xi 
(Tumieieyouv. 

llpooeDxoLiai 6xi 9a xorx; 7tpooxaxeDaxe ajt6 tt? 7rvei)LiaxiKec; 
SuvdLieic; f) dXXa eLira>5ia ran) 9a Lutoporjoav va zovc, 
pXdv|/ouv f) va xouc; emPpaSwouv. IlapaKaM) Lie Por|9f|oxe 
6xav xpT)oi|i07ioicb ao-ciiv xnv vea 5ia9f|KT| yia va oKecprcb 
87iiori<; xovq av9pcbran)c; ran) exouv Kaxaoxf|oei auxf|V xnv 
8k5ooti 5ia9eoiLir|, exoi cboxe Lutopcb va 7tpooer|9cb yia xouc; 
Kai exoi Lutoporjv va oi)vexioouv va Por|9oi3v 7iepioo6xepouc; 
av9pcbran>c 

npooei)xo(iai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe Liia ayd7tr| xou iepoi3 Word 
oac; (r) vea 5ia9f|KT|), Kai 6xi 9a liou 5ivaxe xnv 7rveuLiaxiKec; 
(ppovr|OT| Kai xn 5idKpior| yia va oac; ^epexe Kalurepa Kai 
yia va KaxaXdpexe xn xpoviKf) 7iepio5o 6xi (^ouLie Lieoa. 
IlapaKalcb Lie Por|9f|oxe yia va ^epexe rak; va e^exdoei xicj 
SuoKoMec; 6xi epxoLiai avxiLiexcora)c; Lie Kd9e rpepa. O 
A6p5ocj God, Lie Por)9d yia va 9eXf|oei va oacj ^epei 
Kalrjiepa Kai va 9eXf|oei va Por|9f|oei dlloucj Xpioxiavoucj 
oxr|v 7iepioxT) uou Kai oe 6X0 xov koolio. 
ITpooeuxoLiai 6xi 9a 5ivaxe xnv r|XeKxpoviKf| OLidSa Pipiicov 
Kai eKeivoi ram xoucj Por|9ouv r) (ppovr|of| oacj. ripooeuxoLiai 
6xi 9a Por|9ouoaxe ia LieLiovcoLieva Lielr) xncj oiKoyeveidcj 
xoucj (Kai xr|<; oiKoyeveidcj liou) yia va e^a7taxr|9eixe 6x1 
7tvei)uaxiKd, dkla na va oac KaialaPeie Kai na va 
9eXf|oexe va oac 5exxeixe Kai va aKoXou9f|oexe Lie Kd9e 
xpo7io. Eraoric raxpexexe lio; xnv dveor) Kai o5r|yiec oe 
aurouc xouc xpovouc Kai oac (^rrccb yia va kovco auxd xa 
7tpdyLiaxa 0x0 ovoLia xou Inoou, Amen, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



German - Deutch - Allemand 

German Prayers Gebet zum Gott wie man wie horen kann 
dass meinem Gebet wie bittet Hilfe zu mir zu geben wie 
man geistige Anleitung 

German - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - 
explained in German Language 

Mit Gott sprechen, der Schopfer des Universums, der Lord: 

L, die Sie zu mir dem Mut, die Sachen zu beten geben 
wiirden, die ich benotige, um 2. zu beten, die Sie zu mir dem 
Mut, Ihnen zu glauben und anzunehmen geben wiirden, was 
Sie mit meinem Leben tun mochten, anstelle von mir meine 
Selbst erhebend Wille (Absicht) uber Direm. 

3., denen Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um meine Furcht vor 
dem Unbekannten die Entschuldigungen nicht werden zu 
lassen oder die Grundlage fur mich, zum Sie nicht zu 
dienen. 

4., der Sie mir Hilfe, um zu sehen geben wiirden und zu 
erlernen, wie man die geistige Starke ich hat, benotigen Sie 
(durch Ihr Wort die Bibel) A) fur die Falle voran und B) fur 
meine eigene personliche geistige Reise. 

5. DaB Sie Gott mir Hilfe geben wiirden, um Sie mehr 
dienen zu wiinschen 



6. DaB Sie mich erinnern wiirden, mit Ihnen zu sprechen 
(prayer)when mich werden frustriert oder in der 
Schwierigkeit, anstatt zu versuchen, Sachen selbst nur durch 
meine menschliche Starke zu beheben. 

7. DaB Sie mir Klugheit und ein Herz geben wiirden, fullten 
mit biblischer Klugheit, damit ich Sie effektiv dienen wiirde. 

8. DaB Sie mir einen Wunsch geben wiirden, Ihr Wort, die 
Bibel zu studieren, (das neues Testament-Evangelium von 
John) auf personlicher Ebene 

9. das Sie Unterstutzung zu mir geben wiirden, damit ich 
bin, Sachen in der Bibel (Ihr Wort) zu beachten der ich auf 
und der personlich beziehen kann mir hilft, zu verstehen, 
was Sie mich in meinem Leben tun wunschen. 

10. DaB Sie mir groBe Einsicht geben wiirden, um zu 
verstehen wie nian anderen erklart, die Sie sind, und daB ich 
sein wiirde, zu erlernen, wie nian erlernt und kann fiir Sie 
und Ihr Wort (die Bibel) oben stehen 

11. DaB Sie Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen 
wiirden, die Sie kennen mochten und die in ihrem genauen 
Verstandnis von Ihnen stark sind (Gott); und das wiirden Sie 
Leute (oder Web site) in meinem Leben holen, das ist, mich 
anzuregen, genau zu erlernen, wie nian die Bibel das Wort 
der Wahrheit (2 Timotheegras 2: 15) teilt. 

12. DaB Sie mir helfen wiirden zu erlernen, groBes 
Verstandnis uber, welche Bibelversion zu haben am besten 
ist, die am genauesten ist und die die geistigste Starke u. die 
Energie hat und dem Version mit den ursprunglichen 
Manuskripten ubereinstimmt, daB Sie die Autoren des neuen 
Testaments anspornten zu schreiben. 



13. DaB Sie mir Hilfe, um meine Zeit in einer guten Weise 
zu verwenden geben wiirden, und meine Zeit auf den 
falschen oder leeren Methoden nicht zu vergeuden, naeher 
an Gott (aber dem, zu erhalten nicht wirklich biblisch seien 
Sie) und wo jene Methoden keine lange Bezeichnung oder 
dauerhafte geistige Frucht produzieren. 

14. DaB Sie mir Unterstiitzung geben wiirden, was zu 
verstehen, in einer Kirche oder in einem Ort der Anbetung 
zu suchen, welche Arten der Fragen zum zu bitten und daB 
Sie mir helfen wiirden, Glaubiger oder einen Pastor mit 
groBer geistiger Klugheit anstelle von den einfachen oder 
falschen Antworten zu finden. 

15. den Sie mich veranlassen wiirden, mich zu erinnern, um 
sich Ihr Wort zu merken die Bibel (wie Romans ist 8), damit 
ich es in meinem Herzen haben und an meinen Verstand 
sich vorbereiten lassen kann, und bereit, eine Antwort zu 
anderen der Hoffnung zu geben, die ich uber Sie habe. 

16. DaB Sie mir Hilfe damit meine eigene Theologie und 
Lehren holen wiirden, um mit Ihrem Wort, die Bibel 
ubereinzustimmen und daB Sie fortfahren wiirden, mir zu 
helfen, zu konnen, mein Verstandnis der Lehre verbessert 
werden kann, damit mein eigenes Leben, Lebensstil und 
Verstehen fortfahrt, zu sein naeher an, was Sie es fur mich 
sein wunschen. 

17. DaB Sie meinen geistigen Einblick 
(Zusammenfassungen) mehr und mehr offnen wiirden und 
daB, wo mein Verstandnis oder Vorstellung von Ihnen nicht 
genau ist, daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu erlernen, wem 
Jesus Christ wirklich ist. 



18. DaB Sie mir Hilfe geben wiirden, damit ich in der 
LageSEIN wiirde, alle falschen Rituale zu trennen, denen 
ich von, von Hirem freien Unterricht in der Bibel, wenn 
irgendwelche abgehangen habe von, was ich folgend bin, ist 
nicht vom Gott, oder ist kontrar zu, was Sie uns unterrichten 
wiinschen - uber das Folgen Sie. 

19. DaB keine Krafte des Ubels nicht irgendwie geistiges 
Verstandnis wegnehmen wiirden, das ich habe, aber eher, 
daB ich das Wissen behalten wiirde von, wie man Sie kennt 
und nicht an diesen Tagen der geistigen Tauschung betrogen 
wird. 

20. DaB Sie geistige Starke holen und zu mir helfen wiirden, 
damit ich nicht ein Teil von groBen weg fallen oder 
irgendeiner Bewegung bin, die zu Ihnen und zu Ihrem 
heiligen Wort Angelegenheiten nachgemacht sein wiirde. 

21. Das, wenn es alles gibt, das ich in meinem Leben getan 
habe oder irgendeine Weise, daB ich nicht auf Sie reagiert 
habe, wie ich haben sollte und die mich entweder am Gehen 
mit Ihnen hindert oder Haben des Verstehens, daB Sie jene 
things/responses/events zuriick in meinen Verstand, damit 
ich auf sie im Namen Jesus Christ verzichten wiirde, und 
alle ihre von und von Konsequenzen holen wiirden und daB 
Sie jede mogliche Leere, Traurigkeit oder Verzweiflung in 
meinem Leben mit der Freude am Lord ersetzen wiirden und 
daB ich mehr auf das Lernen, Ihnen zu folgen gerichtet 
wiirde, indem man Ihr Wort las, die Bibel. 

22. DaB Sie meine Augen offnen wiirden, damit ich in der 
LageSEIN wiirde, offenbar zu sehen und zu erkennen, wenn 
es eine groBe Tauschung uber geistige Themen gibt, wie 
man dieses Phanomen (oder diese Falle) von einer 
biblischen Perspektive und daB Sie mir Klugheit geben 
wiirden, um zu wissen und damit ich erlernt versteht, wie 



man meinen Freunden und liebte eine (Verwandte) ein Teil 
von ihm nicht zu sein hilft. 

23 DaB Sie sicherstellen wiirden, daB einmal meine Augen 
und mein Verstand geoffnet sind, versteht die geistige 
Bedeutung der gegenwartigen Falle, die in der Welt 
stattfinden, daB Sie mein Herz vorbereiten wiirden, um Ihre 
Wahrheit anzunehmen und daB Sie mir helfen wiirden, zu 
verstehen, wie man Mut und Starke durch Ihr heiliges Wort, 
die Bibel findet. Im Namen Jesus Christ, bitte ich um diese 
Sachen, die meinen Wunsch bestatigen, Ihr Wille 
iibereinzustimmen, und ich bitte um Hire Klugheit und eine 
Liebe der Wahrheit zu haben, Amen. 



Mehr an der Unterseite der Seite 
wie man ewiges Leben u. 
Hat 



Wir sind froh, wenn diese Liste (der Gebetantrage zum 
Gott) in der LagelST, Sie zu unterstutzen. Wir verstehen, 
daB diese moglicherweise nicht die beste oder 
wirkungsvollste Ubersetzung sein kann. Wir verstehen, daB 
es viele unterschiedliche Weisen des Ausdriickens von von 
Gedanken und von von Wortern gibt. Wenn Sie einen 
Vorschlag fiir eine bessere Ubersetzung haben oder wenn 
Sie etwas Ihrer Zeit dauern mochten, Vorschlage zu 
schicken uns, werden Sie Tausenden der Leute auch helfen, 
die dann die verbesserte Ubersetzung lesen. Wir haben 
haufig ein neues Testament, das in Ihrer Sprache oder in den 
Sprachen vorhanden ist, die selten oder alt sind. 



Wenn Sie nach einem neuen Testament in einer spezifischen 
Sprache suchen, schreiben Sie uns bitte. Auch wir mochten 
sicher sein und versuchen, das manchmal mitzuteilen, bieten 
wir Biicher an, die nicht frei sind und die Geld kosten. 
Aber, wenn Sie nicht einige jener elektronischen Biicher 
sich leisten konnen, konnen wir einen Austausch der 
elektronischen Biicher ftir Hilfe bei der Ubersetzung oder 
bei der Ubersetzung Arbeit haufig tun. Sie miissen nicht ein 
professioneller Arbeiter sein, nur eine regelmaBige Person, 
die interessiert ist, an zu helfen. 

Sie sollten einen Computer haben, oder Sie sollten Zugang 
zu einem Computer an Ihrer lokalen Bibliothek oder 
Hochschule oder Universitat haben, da die normalerweise 
bessere Anschliisse zum Internet haben. Sie konnen Ihr 
eigenes personliches FREIES Konto der elektronischen 
Post, indem Sie zum mail.yahoo.com 



auch normalerweise herstellen gehen dauern bitte einen 
Moment, um die Adresse der elektronischen Post zu finden 
befunden an der Unterseite oder am Ende dieser Seite. 
Wir hoffen, daB Sie uns elektronische Post schicken, wenn 
diese hilfreich oder Ermutigung ist. Wir regen Sie auch an, 
mit uns hinsichtlich der elektronischen Biicher in 
Verbindung zu treten, die wir dem sind ohne Kosten und 
freies 



anbieten, die, wir viele Biicher in den Fremdsprachen haben, 
aber wir nicht sie immer setzen, um elektronisch zu 
empfangen (Download) weil wir nur vorhanden die Biicher 
oder die Themen bilden, die erbeten sind. Wir regen Sie an 
fortzufahren, zum Gott zu beten und fortzufahren, uber ihn 
zu erlernen, indem wir das neue Testament lesen. Wir 



begriiBen Dire Fragen und Anmerkungen durch 
elektronische Post. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Caro Deus , Obrigada que esta Novo Testamento tem sido 
lancado de modo a que nos somos capaz aprender mais 
sobre a ti. Por favor ajudar a gente responsavel por fazendo 
esta Electronico livro disponivel. 

Por favor ajudar eles estarem capaz de trabalho rapidamente 
, e fazer mais Electronico livros disponivel Por favor ajudar 
eles haverem todos os recursos , o dinheiro , a forca e as 
horas que elas precisar a fim de ser capaz de guardar 
trabalhando para si. 

Por favor ajudar aquelas esse are parte da equipa essa ajuda 
lhes num todos os dias base. Por favor dar lhes a forca 
continuar e dar cada deles o espiritual comprendendo para o 
trabalho que voce quer eles fazerem. Por favor ajudar cada 
um deles para nao ter medo e lembrar que tu es o deus o 
qual respostas oracao e quem e encarregado de todas as 
coisas. 

EU orar que a ti would encorajar lhes , e que voce protege 
lhes , e o trabalho & ministerio que elas sao comprometido 
em. EU orar que voce protegeria lhes de o Espiritual Forcas 
ou outro barreiras isso podeia ser maleficio lhes ou lento 
lhes abaixo. 

Por favor ajudar a mim quando Eu uso esta Novo 
Testamento para tambem reflectir a gente o qual ter feito 
esta edicao disponivel , de modo a que eu possa orar para 
eles e por conseguinte eles podem continuar ajudar mais 



pessoas EU orar que voce daria a mim um amar do seu 
Divino Palavra ( o novo Testamento ), e que voce daria a 
mim espiritual sabedoria e discernment conhecer a ti melhor 
e para comprender o periodo de tempo que nos somos 
vivendo em. 

Por favor ajudar eu saber como lidar com as dificuldades 
que Eu sou confrontado com todos os dias. Lorde Deus , 
Ajudar eu querer conhecer a ti Melhor e querer ajudar outro 
Christian no meu area e pelo mundo. EU orar que voce daria 
o Electronico livro equipa e aquelas o qual trabalho no 
Websters e aqueles que ajudar lhes seu sabedoria. EU orar 
que voce ajudaria o individuo membros do seu familia ( e a 
minha familia ) para nao ser espiritual enganar , mas 
comprender a ti e querer aceitar e seguir a ti em todos 
bastante. e Eu pergunto voce fazer estas coisas em nome de 
Jesus , Amen , 



Dear God, 

Thank you that this New Testament 
has been released so that we are able 
to learn more about you. 

Please help the people responsible for making this 
Electronic book available. Please help them to be able to 
work fast, and make more Electronic books available 
Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the 
strength and the time that they need in order to be able to 
keep working for You. 

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on 
an everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue 
and give each of them the spiritual understanding for the 
work that you want them to do. Please help each of them to 
not have fear and to remember that you are the God who 



answers prayer and who is in charge of everything. 

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect 
them, and the work & ministry that they are engaged in. 
I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces 
or other obstacles that could harm them or slow them down. 

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think 
of the people who have made this edition available, so that I 
can pray for them and so they can continue to help more 
people 

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word 
(the New Testament), and that you would give me spiritual 
wisdom and discernment to know you better and to 
understand the period of time that we are living in. 

Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that 
I am confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want 
to know you Better and to want to help other Christians in 
my area and around the world. 

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and 
those who work on the website and those who help them 
your wisdom. 

I pray that you would help the individual members of their 
family (and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but 
to understand you and to want to accept and follow you in 
every way. 

and I ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus, 
Amen, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Croatian Croatian Croatian 



Croatian - Prayer Requests (praying ) to God - explained 
in Croatian Language 

Croatian Croatia Prayer Isus Krist Moljenje to Bog Kako to 
Moliti moze cuti moj pitati popustanje ponuditi mene 

Govorenje to Bog , Stvoritelj dana Svemir , Gospodar : 

1. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to moliti predmet taj 
Trebam to moliti 

2. taj te ce popustanje meni u hrabrost to vjerovati te i 
prihvatiti sto koji zelite za napraviti sa mojim zivot , 
umjesto mene uznijeti moj posjedovati htijenje ( namjera ) 
iznad tvoj. 

3. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi ne pustiti moj 
strahovanje dana nepoznat postati isprika , ili baza za mene 
ne to posluzitelj you. 

4. taj te ce popustanje mene ponuditi vidjeti i nauciti kako to 
imati duhovni snaga Trebam ( preko tvoj rijec Biblija ) ) za 
jedan dan dogadaj ispred i b ) za moj posjedovati osobni 
duhovni putovanje. 



5. Taj te Bog ce popustanje mene ponuditi istanje to 
posluzitelj Te vise 

6. Taj te ce podsjetiti mene to pricati sa te prayerwhen ) Ja 
sam frustriran ili u problemima , umjesto tezak to odluka 
predmet ja osobno jedini preko moj covjecji snaga. 

7. Taj te ce popustanje mene Mudrost i srce ispunjen sa 
Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA ce posluzitelj te vise efektivno. 

8. Taj te ce popustanje mene zelja to studirati tvoj rijec , 
Biblija , ( novim Oporuka Evandelje od John ), na osobni 
baza 

9. taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u tako da Ja sam u 
mogucnosti to obavijest predmet in Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sto 
Ja mogu osobni povezivati se , i da htijenje pomoc mene 
shvatiti sto koji zelite mene za napraviti u mojem zivot. 

10. Taj te ce popustanje mene velik raspoznavanje , to 
shvatiti kako to objasniti to ostali tko ti si , i da JA bi bilo u 
mogucnosti nauciti kako nauciti i znati kako to pristajati uza 
sto te i tvoj rijec ( Biblija ) 

1 1 . Taj te ce donijeti narod ( ili websiteovi ) u mojem zivot 
tko istanje to znati te , i tko jesu jak in njihov tocnost 
sporazum od te ( bog ); i da te ce donijeti narod ( ili 
websiteovi ) u mojem zivot koji ce biti u mogucnosti to 
hrabriti mene to precizan naucite kako podijeliti Biblija rijec 
od istina (2 Plasljiv 215:). 

12. Taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti to imati velik sporazum o 
sto Biblija inacici je najbolji , sto je vecina tocnost , i sto je 
preko duhovni snaga & Power PC , i sto inacici sporazum sa 
izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut autorstvo dana Nov Oporuka 
to pisati. 



13. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene koristenje moj 
vrijeme in dobar put , i ne to prosipati moj vrijeme na 
Neistinit ili prazan Metodije da biste dobili Zatvori to Bog ( 
ali koji nisu vjerno Biblijski ), i gdje svi oni Metodije 
stvarajuci nijedan ceznuti uvjeti ili trajan duhovni voce. 

14. Taj te ce popustanje pomoc meni u to shvatiti sto uciniti 
traziti in Churchill ili mjesto od moliti se , sto rod od pitanje 
to pitati , i da te ce pomoc mene pronaci onaj koji vjeruje ili 
pastor sa velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lahak ili neistinit 
odgovoriti. 

15. taj te ce nanijeti mene to sjecati se to sjecati se tvoj rijec 
Biblija ( kao sto je Rumunjski 8), tako da Ja mogu imati 
Internet u mojem srce i imati moj imati sto protiv spreman , 
i biti spreman to popustanje odgovoriti to ostali dana 
uzdanica taj Imam o te. 

16. Taj te ce donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj posjedovati 
teologija i doktrina to poklapati se tvoj rijec , Biblija i da te 
ce nastaviti to pomoc mene znati kako moj sporazum od 
doktrina moze poboljsati tako da moj posjedovati zivot , stil 
zivota i sporazum nastaviti biti Zatvori to sto koji zelite 
Internet biti za mene. 

17. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj duhovni unutar ( zakljucak ) 
vise i vise , i da gdje svi moj sporazum ili percepcija od te 
nije tocnost , taj te ce pomoc mene nauciti tko Isus Krist 
vjerno je. 

18. Taj te ce popustanje ponuditi mene tako da JA bi bilo u 
mogucnosti to odijeljen bilo koji neistinit ritualni sto Imam 
zavisnost na , from tvoj jasan pomoc u ucenju in Biblija , 
ako postoje od sto Ja sam sljedece nije od Bog , ili je ugovor 
to sto koji zelite to vas nauciti nas o sljedece te. 



19. Taj bilo koji sila od zlo ce ne oduteti bilo koji duhovni 
sporazum sto Imam , ali radije taj JA ce cvrsto drzati znanje 
kako to znati te i ne biti lukav in te dani od duhovni varka. 

20. Taj te ce donijeti duhovni snaga i ponuditi mene tako da 
JA nece biti dio ognjevit Jesen Daleko ili od bilo koji pokret 
sto bi bilo produhovljeno krivotvoren novac vama i u vas 

S vet Rijec 

21. Da ako ima je ista taj Imam ispunjavanja u mojem zivot 
, ili bilo koji put taj Imam ne odgovaranje vama kao JA 
trebaju imati i da je koji se moze sprijeciti mene sa ili 
hodanje sa te , ili vlasnistvo sporazum , taj te ce donijeti oni 
predmet / reakcija / dogadaj leda u moj imati sto protiv , 
tako da JA ce odreci se njima in ime od Isus Krist , i svi od 
njihov efekt i posljedica , i da te ce opet staviti bilo koji 
praznina ,sadness ili izgubiti nadu u mojem zivot sa Ono sto 
pruza uzitak dana Gospodar , i da JA bi bilo vise fokusirati 
na znanje to udarac te mimo citanje tvoj rijec , Biblija 

22. Taj te ce OpenBSD moj oci tako da JA bi bilo u 
mogucnosti to jasno vidjeti i prepoznati ako ima Velik 
Varka o Duhovni tema , kako to shvatiti ovaj fenomen ( ili 
te dogadaj ) from Biblijski perspektiva , i da te ce 
popustanje mene mudrost to znati i tako dalje taj JA htijenje 
naucite kako pomoc moj prijatelj i voljen sam sebe ( 
odnosni ) ne biti dio it. 

23. Taj te ce osigurali da jedanput moj oci jesu OpenBSD i 
moj imati sto protiv shvatiti duhovni izrazajnost od tekuci 
dogadaj uzimanje mjesto u svijetu , taj te ce pripremiti moj 
srce to prihvatiti tvoj istina , i da te ce pomoc mene shvatiti 
kako pronaci hrabrost i snaga preko tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija. 
In ime od Isus Krist , JA traziti te predmet potvrditi moj 



zelja biti slozno tvoj htijenje , i Ja sam iskanje tvoj mudrost i 
to imati hatar dana Istina Da 



Vise podno Stranica 
Kako to imati Vjecan Zivot 



Mi jesu veseo ako ovaj rub ( od moljenje molba to Bog ) je 
u mogucnosti to pomoci te. Mi shvatiti ovaj mozda nece biti 
najbolji ili vecina djelotvoran prevodenje. Mi shvatiti koji su 
mnogobrojan razlicit putevi od istiskivanje misao i rijec. 
Ukoliko imati sugestija za bolji prevodenje , ili ukoliko ce 
voljeti uzeti malolitrazan iznos od tvoj vrijeme to poslati 
sugestija nama , te htijenje biti pomoc tisuca od ostali narod 
isto tako , koji ce onda citanje oplemenjen prevodenje. Mi 
vise puta imati Nov Oporuka raspoloziv u vas jezik ili in 
jezik koji su rijedak ili star. Ako ste oblicje za Nov Oporuka 
in specifican jezik , ugoditi korespondirati nas. Isto tako , mi 
istanje istinabog i pokusati komunicirati taj katkada , mi 
obaviti ponuda knjiga koji nisu Slobodan i da obaviti trosak 
novac. 

Ali ukoliko ne moci priustiti neki od oni elektronski knjiga , 
mi moze vise puta obaviti izmjena od elektronski knjiga za 
pomoc sa prevodenje ili prevodenje funkcionirati. Nemate 
biti koji se odnosi na zvanje radnik , samo jedan dan 
pravilan osoba tko je zainteresirana za pomoc. Te trebaju 
imati racunalo ili te trebaju imati pristup to racunalo at tvoj 
lokalni knjiznica ili fakulteti ili sveucilista , otada oni obicno 
imati bolji povezivanje to Internet. Mozete isto tako obicno 
utemeljiti tvoj posjedovati osobni SLOBODAN elektronicka 
posta racun odlaskom na mail.yahoo.com 



Ugoditi uzeti tren pronaci elektronicka posta adresa smjestiti 
na dnu ili kraj od ovaj stranica. Nadamo se te htijenje poslati 
elektronicka posta nama , ako ovaj je od pomoc ili 
hrabrenje. Mi isto tako hrabriti te to kontakt nas zabrinutost 
Elektronski Knjiga koju nudimo koji su sa trosak , i 
slobodan. 

Mi obaviti imati mnogobrojan knjiga in stran jezik , ali mi 
ne uvijek mjesto njima to primiti elektronski ( preuzimanje 
datoteka ) jer mi jedini izraditi raspoloziv knjiga ili tema 
koji su preko molba. Mi hrabriti te to nastaviti to moliti to 
Bog i to nastaviti nauciti o Njemu mimo citanje novim 
Oporuka. Mi dobrodosli na tvoj pitanje i komentirajte mimo 
elektronicka posta. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

CZECH CZECH TCHEK 

Czech Prayer Modlitba Kristian jezuita Kristus az k Buh Jak 
Modlit Buh pocinovat slyset modlitba k ptat Buh darovat 
pomoci mne 

Czech - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - 
explained in Czech Language 

Mluveni az k Buh , clen urcity Stvof itel of clen urcity 
Soubor , clen urcity Hospodin : 

1 . aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az 
k modlit clen urcity majetek aby Nemusim az k modlit 

2. aby tebe chtel bych darovat az k mne clen urcity kuraz az 
k domnivat se tebe a pfijmout jaky tebe potfeba az k jednat 
ma duch , misto mne povysit ja sam vule ( cfl ) nad tvuj. 



3. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k ne dovolit 
ma bat se of clen urcity neznama az k stat se clen urcity 
odpustit , ci clen urcity baze do mne rozchazet se v nazorech 
slouzit you. 

4. aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k videt a az k 
dostat instrukce jak? az k mit clen urcity duchovni sfla 
Nemusim ( docela tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ) jeden ) do 
clen urcity pfihoda vpfed a b ) do ja sam osobni duchovni 
cesta. 

5. Aby tebe Buh chtel bych darovat mne pomoci az k 
potfeba az k slouzit Tebe vice 6. Aby tebe chtel bych 
pfipomenout komu mne az k rozmlouvat s tebe prayerwhen 
) JA am zmafeny ci do nesnaz , misto trying az k analyzovat 
majetek ja sam ale docela ma lidsky sfla. 

7. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne Moudrost a jeden srdce 
nakyp s Biblicky Moudrost tak, ze JA chtel bych slouzit 
tebe vice efektivni. 8. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne 
jeden porucit az k uceni tvuj slovo , clen urcity Bible , ( 
Novy zakon Evangelium of Jan ), dale jeden osobni baze 

9. aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne tak, ze J A 
am schopny az k oznameni majetek do clen urcity Bible ( 
tvuj slovo ) kdo Dovedu co se me tyce byt v pomeru k sem 
tam , to postaci pomoci mne dovidat se jaky tebe potfeba 
mne az k zavrazdit ma duch. 

10. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne celek bystrost , az k 
dovidat se jak? az k jasne se vyjadf it az k jini kdo tebe ar , a 
aby JA chtel bych byt schopny az k dostat instrukce jak? az 
k dostat instrukce a vRdRt jak? az k postavit se za tebe a 
tvuj slovo ( clen urcity Bible ) 



1 1 . Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci websites ) do ma duch 
kdo potfeba az k vRdRt tebe , a kdo ar silny do jejich pfesny 
dohoda of tebe ( buh ); a Aby tebe chtel bych nest lid ( ci 
websites ) do ma duch kdo vule byt schopny az k dodat 
mysli mne az k pfesny dostat instrukce jak? az k delit clen 
urcity Bible Pismo svate pravda (2 Bazlivy 215:). 

12. Aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne az k dostat instrukce az 
k mit celek dohoda kolem kdo Bible liceni is nejlepe , kdo is 
nejcetnejsi pfesny , a kdo 3sg.prez.od have clen urcity 
nejcetnejsi duchovni sila & mnozstvi , a kdo liceni souhlasi 
jit s duchem casu original rukopis aby tebe dychat clen 
urcity spisovatele of Novy zakon az k psat. 

13. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne az k 
cviceni ma cas do jeden blaho cesta , a rozchazet se v 
nazorech zpustosit ma cas dale Chybny ci hladovy metody 
az k brat blizky az k Buh ( kdyby ne ar ne opravdu Biblicky 
), a kde those metody napsat ne dlouha hlaska cas ci 
{lastingllstalylltrvaly} } duchovni nest ovoce. 

14. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoc az k mne az k 
dovidat se jaky az k hledat do jeden cirkev ci jeden bydliste 
of uctivani , jaky rody of otazky az k ptat se , a aby tebe 
chtel bych pomoci mne az k nalez vef fci ci jeden duchovni s 
celek duchovni moudrost misto bezstarostny ci chybny 
odpovida. 

15. aby tebe chtel bych byt pficinou mne na pametnou az k 
memorovat tvuj slovo clen urcity Bible ( jako takovy Riman 
8), tak, ze Dovedu mit ono do ma srdce a mit ma mysl 
pfipraveny , a byt hbity az k darovat neurc. clen byt v 
souhlase s jini of clen urcity nadeje aby Mam u sebe tebe. 

16. Aby tebe chtel bych nest pomoci az k mne tak, ze ja sam 
bohoslovi a doktrina az k souhlasit s tvuj slovo , clen urcity 



Bible a aby tebe chtel bych stale byt pomoci mne vRdRt 
jak? ma dohoda of doktrina pocfnovat byt opravit tak, ze ja 
sam duch lifestyle a dohoda odrocit az k byt blizky k 
jakemu licelu tebe potfeba ono az k byt pro mne. 

17. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny ma duchovni jasnozfenf 
( konec ) cim dale, tim vice , a aby kde ma dohoda ci 
chapavost of tebe is ne pfesny , aby tebe chtel bych pomoci 
mne az k dostat instrukce kdo Jezuita Kristus opravdu is. 

18. Aby tebe chtel bych darovat pomoci az k mne tak, ze JA 
chtel bych byt schopny az k oddeleny jakykoliv chybny 
obfad kdo J A mit duvera dale , dle tvuj cely doktrina do clen 
urcity Bible , jestli vubec of jaky JA am nasledujici is ne of 
Buh , ci is proti cemu jaky tebe potfeba az k ucit us kolem 
nasledujici tebe. 

19. Aby jakykoliv dohnat of nestesti chtel bych ne odebrat 
jakykoliv duchovni dohoda kdo JA mit , aby ne dosti aby JA 
chtel bych drzet clen urcity znalost ceho jak? az k vRdRt 
tebe a rozchazet se v nazorech byt kiamat do tezaury days of 
duchovni klam. 

20. Aby tebe chtel bych nest duchovni sila a pomoci az k 
mne tak, ze JA vule rozchazet se v nazorech byt cast of 
notablove Klesani Pryc ci of jakykoliv pohyb kdo chtel bych 
byt duchovo falsovat az k tebe a az k tvuj Svaty Slovo 

21. Aby -li tam is cokoli aby JA mit utahany ma duch , ci 
jakkoli aby JA mit ne dotazovana osoba az k tebe ackoliv 
Sel bych mit a to jest opatfeni mne dle jeden nebo druhy 
kraceni s tebe , ci having dohoda , aby tebe chtel bych nest 
those majetek / citlivost pfistroje / pfihoda bek do ma mysl , 
tak, ze JA chtel bych nectit barvu je jmenem koho Jezuita 
Kristus , a celek of jejich dojem a dosah , a aby tebe chtel 
bych dat na dfivejsi misto jakykoliv emptiness ,sadness ci 



beznadejnost do ma duch jit s duchem casu Radost of clen 
urcity Hospodin , a aby J chtel bych byt vice lozisko dale 
ucenost az k doprovazet tebe do cetba tvuj slovo , Bible 

22. Aby tebe chtel bych nechraneny probuh tak, ze J A chtel 
bych byt schopny az k jasne videt a pochopit -li tam is jeden 
Celek Klam kolem Duchovni namet , jak? az k dovidat se 
tato pfechodny ( ci tezaury pfihoda ) dle jeden Biblicky 
perspektiva , a aby tebe chtel bych darovat mne moudrost az 
k vRdRt a tak, ze JA vule dostat instrukce jak? poslouzit 
jidlem ma druh a Amor sam ( pfibuzni ) ne byt cast of it. 

23. Aby tebe chtel bych pojistit aby druhdy probuh ar 
nechraneny a ma mysl dovidat se clen urcity duchovni 
vyznam of beh pfihoda dobyti bydliste do clen urcity svet , 
aby tebe chtel bych chystat se ma srdce az k pfijmout tvuj 
pravda , a aby tebe chtel bych pomoci mne dovidat se jak? 
az k nalez kuraz a sila docela tvuj Svaty Slovo , clen urcity 
Bible. Jmenem koho Jezuita Kristus , JA tazat se na tezaury 
majetek bifmovat ma porucit az k bjH; doma souhlas tvuj 
vule , a JA am ptani se do tvuj moudrost a az k mit jeden 
laska ke komu clen urcity Pravda Amen 



Vice v clen urcity Dno of Blok 
Jak? az k mit Nekonecny Duch 



My ar rad -li tato barevny pruh of modlitba dotaz az k Buh 
is schopny az k pomahat tebe. My dovidat se tato moci ne 
byt clen urcity nejlepe ci nejcetnejsi efektivni desifrovani. 
My dovidat se tamhleten ar mnoho neobvykly cesty of 
interpretace domneni a slova. -li tebe mit jeden navrh do 
jeden lepe desifrovani , ci -li tebe chtel bych do teze mfry az 



k brat jeden maly cinit of tvuj cas az k poslat navrhy az k us 
, tebe vule byt porce jidla tisic of druhy lid rovnez , kdo vule 
nekdy cist clen urcity opravit desifrovani. My casto mit 
jeden Novy Posledni vule pfistupny do tvuj jazyk ci do 
jazyk aby ar nedovafeny ci davny. -li tebe ar hledet do jeden 
Novy Posledni vule do jeden specificky jazyk , byt pfijemny 
psat az k us. Rovnez , my potfeba az k jiste a namahat az k 
byt ve styku aby nekdy , my cinit nabidka blok aby ar ne 
Drzy a aby cinit cena penize. 

Aby ne -li tebe delostfelectvo pfitok nejaky of those 
elektronicky blok , my pocinovat casto cinit neurc. clen 
burza of elektronicky blok do pomoci s desifrovani ci 
desifrovani prace. Tebe cinit ne mit az k bjH; jeden odborny 
delnik , ale jeden pofadny osoba kdo is obchod do porce 
jidla. Tebe pozadovat mit jeden pocitac ci tebe pozadovat 
mit pfistup az k jeden pocitac v tvuj lokalka knihovna ci 
akademie ci univerzita , od te doby those obvykly mit lepe 
klientela az k clen urcity internovana osoba. Tebe pocinovat 
rovnez obvykly upevnit tvuj drahy osobni DRZY 
elektronicka posta ucet do existujici az k mail.yahoo.com 

BjH; pfijemny brat jeden dulezitost az k nalez clen urcity 
elektronicka posta adresovat nalezt v clen urcity dno ci clen 
urcity cfl of tato blok. My nadeje tebe vule poslat 
elektronicka posta az k us , -li tato is of pomoci ci podpora. 
My rovnez dodat mysli tebe az k dotyk us pokud jde o 
Elektronicky Blok aby my nabidka aby ar bez cena , a drzy. 



My cinit mit mnoho blok do cizi jazyk , aby ne my cinit 
nekdy bydliste je az k dostat electronically ( zavadeni ) 
ponevadz my ale delat pfistupny clen urcity blok ci clen 
urcity namet aby ar clen urcity nejcetnejsi dotaz. My dodat 
mysli tebe az k stale byt modlit az k Buh a az k stale byt 



dostat instrukce kolem Jemu do cetba Novy zakon. My vftat 
tvuj otazky a poznamky do elektronicka posta. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Drogi Bog , Dzigkujg 6 w ten Nowy Testament 

ma byl zwolniony byle tylko jestesmy able wobec nauczyc 
si§ liczniejszy okolo ty. Prosz§ mi pomoc ludzie 
odpowiedzialny pod katem wykonaniem ten Elektroniczny 
ksiazka rozporzadzalny. 

Prosz§ mi pomoc im zostac wyplacalny praca umocowany , 
i zrobic liczniejszy Elektroniczny ksiazki rozporzadzalny 
Prosz§ mi pomoc im wobec miec wszystko ten zasoby , ten 
pieniadze , ten sila i ten czas 6w oni potrzebowac w klasa 
zostac wyplacalny utrzymywac dzialanie pod k^tem Ty. 
Prosz§ mi pomoc 6w 6w jestescie obowi^zek od ten druzyna 
6w wspolpracownik imuan codzienny podstawa. 

Podobac si§ dawac im ten sila wobec kontynuowac i dawac 
kazdy od im ten duchowy zgoda pod katem ten praca 6w ty 
potrzeba im wobec czynic. Prosz§ mi pomoc kazdy od im 
wobec nie miec strach i wobec zapamietac 6w jestes ten 
Bog ktory odpowiedzi modlitwa i ktory jest w koszt od 
wszystko. JA blagac 6w ty bylby zach^cac im , i 6w ty 
ochraniac im , i ten praca & ministerstwo 6w oni sa^ zaj^ty. 
J A blagac 6w ty bylby ochraniac im z ten Duchowy Sily 
zbrojne albo inny przeszkody 6w kulisy szkoda im albo 
powolny im w dol. Prosz§ mi pomoc podczas JA uzywac 
ten Nowy Testament wobec takze pomyslec od ludzie ktory 
miec wykonane ten wydanie rozporzadzalny , byle tylko JA 



puszka metalowa modlic si§ za im i tak oni puszka 
metalowa robic w dalszym ciaj>u wspolpracownik 

liczniejszy spoleczeristwo JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac mi 
pewien milosc od twoj Swi^ty Wyraz ( ten Nowy Testament 
), i 6w ty bylby dawac mi duchowy madrosc i orientacja 
wobec znac ty polepszyc i wobec rozumiec ten okres 6w 
jestesmy zyjacy w. Prosz§ mi pomoc wobec znac jak wobec 
zawierac z transakcj^ ten trudnosci 6w JA jestem 
skonfrontowany rezygnowac codziennie. 

Lord Bog , Wspolpracownik mi wobec potrzeba wobec znac 
ty Polepszyc i wobec potrzeba wobec wspolpracownik inny 
Chrzescijanie w moj powierzchnia i wokolo ten swiat. 
JA blagac 6w ty bylby dawac ten Elektroniczny ksiazka 
druzyna i 6w ktory praca od pajeczyny i 6w ktory 
wspolpracownik im twoj madrosc. JA blagac 6w ty bylby 
wspolpracownik ten indywidualny czlonki od ich rodzina ( i 
moj rodzina ) wobec nie byc duchowo zwodzil , oprocz 
wobec rozumiec ty i ja wobec potrzeba wobec uznawac i 
nastepowac po ty w na wszelki sposob. i JA zapytac ty 
wobec czynic tych rzeczy na Boga Jezus , Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Slovenian 



Slovenian 



Slovenian - Prayer Requests (praying / Talking) to God - 
explained in Slovenian Language 

slovenian prayer jezuit Kristus molitev Bog kako prositi kako moci 
slisati svoj zaprositi podati ponuditi komu kaj mi 



pri aparatu imeti se za boga , tvorec od vsemirje , bog : 

1 . to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum prositi stvari to rabim 
prositi 

2. to vi hoteti izrociti mi pogum v vernik vi ter uvazevati 
kaksen hoces vzdrzati svoj zivljenje , namesto mi 
navdusenje svoj lasten hoteti ( namen ) zgoraj vas. 

3. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj ne pustiti svoj 
grozen od neznano v postati opravicilo , ali osnova navzlic 
ne streci you. 

4. to vi hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj zagledati ter 
zvedeti kako imeti bozji zakon cvrstost rabim ( skozi vas 
izraziti z besedami biblija ) a ) zakaj pripetljaj spredaj ter b ) 
zakaj svoj lasten oseben netelesen potovanje. 

5. to vi Bog hoteti izrociti mi ponuditi komu kaj biti brez 
streci vi vec 

6. to vi hoteti spomniti se mi pogovarjati se vi prayerwhen ) 
jaz sem unicen ali v tezava , namesto tezaven odlociti stvari 
sebi sele skozi svoj cloveski cvrstost. 

7. to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost ter a srcika poin Biblical 
modrost tako da jaz hoteti zacetni udarec z zogo vi vec 
razpolozljiv. 



8. to vi hoteti izrociti mi a zahteva studirati vas izraziti z 
besedami , biblija , ( novi testament evangelij od John ), 
naprej a oseben osnova 

9. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi tako da morem opaziti 
stvari v biblija ( vas izraziti z besedami ) kateri morem 
osebno tikati se cesa , ter to zadostuje pomoc mi razumeti 
kaksen vi biti brez mi uganjati v svoj zivljenje. 

10. to vi hoteti izrociti mi velik bistroumnost , v razumeti 
kako razlagati drugim kdo vi ste , ter to jaz domisljavec 
zmozen zvedeti kako zvedeti ter znanje kako stati pokoncu 
zakaj vi ter vas izraziti z besedami ( biblija ) 

1 1. to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali websites ) v svoj zivljenje 
kdo biti brez znati vi , ter kdo ste krepek v svoj natancen 
razumeven od vi ( Bog ); ter to vi hoteti privleci narod ( ali 
websites ) v svoj zivljenje kdo hoteti obstati zmozen v 
podzigati mi v natancen zvedeti kako razpreti biblija izraziti 
z besedami od resnica (2 plasljiv 215:). 

12. to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti imeti velik razumeven 
priblizno kateri biblija prevod je najprimernejsi , kateri je 
najvec natancen , ter kateri has najvec netelesen cvrstost & 
sila , ter kateri prevod strinjati se s samorasel rokopis to vi 
vdihniti pisec od novi testament pisati. 

13. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi rabiti svoj cas 
v a dober izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti , ter ne v 
razsipavati svoj cas naprej napacen ali puhel metoda 
zadobiti sklepnik v Bog ( ce ze ne ste ne resnicno Biblical ), 
ter kraj oni metoda predelki ne dolg pogoj ali trajen 
netelesen sadje. 

14. to vi hoteti izrociti pomoc mi v razumeti kaksen iskati v 
a cerkvica ali a mesto od castiti , kaksen milosten od 
vprasanje zaprositi , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi najti vernik ali 
a pastor s velik netelesen modrost namesto neprisiljen ali 
napacen odgovor. 

15. to vi hoteti vzrok mi spomniti se nauciti se na pamet vas 
izraziti z besedami biblija ( kot na primer retoromanski 8), 
tako da morem zivljati to v svoj srcika ter zivljati svoj srce 



pripravljen , ter obstati radovoljen podati odgovor drugim 
od upanje to imam priblizno vi. 

16. to vi hoteti privleci ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da svoj 
lasten teologija ter nauk ujemati se s vas izraziti z besedami 
, biblija ter to vi hoteti vzdrznost v pomoc mi znanje kako 
svoj razumeven od nauk moci obstati izpopolniti tako da 
svoj lasten zivljenje lifestyle ter razumeven vzdrznost to live 
at warefare with s. o. sklepnik eemu vi biti brez to v obstati 
navzlic. 

17. to vi hoteti plan svoj netelesen vpogled ( sklep ) bolj in 
bolj , ter to kraj svoj razumeven ali zaznavanje od vi ni 
natancen , to vi hoteti pomoc mi zvedeti kdo jezuit Kristus 
resnicno je. 

18. to vi hoteti izrociti ponuditi komu kaj mi tako da jaz 
domisljavec zmozen razstati se poljuben napacen cerkveni 
obredi kateri imam odvisnost naprej , s vas veder 
poucevanje v biblija , ce sploh kateri od kaksen jaz sem 
sledec ni od Bog , ali je nasprotno eemu kaksen hoces uciti 
nas priblizno sledec vi. 

19. to poljuben vojna sila od zlo hoteti ne odvzeti poljuben 
netelesen razumeven kateri imam , sele precej to jaz hoteti 
obdrzati znanost od kako znati vi ter ne v obstati goljufati 
dandanes od netelesen prevara. 

20. to vi hoteti privleci netelesen cvrstost ter ponuditi komu 
kaj mi tako da nocem v obstati del od velika gospoda 
padanje stran ali od poljuben tok kateri domisljavec 
netelesen ponarejen vam na uslugo ter v vas svet izraziti z 
besedami 

21. to ce je nic to imam velja v svoj zivljenje , ali vsekakor 
to imam ne odgovor vam na uslugo kot jaz should zivljati 
ter to je preprecljiv mi s vsak izmed obeh pesacenje z vami , 
ali imetje razumeven , to vi hoteti privleci oni stvari / 
odgovor / pripetljaj prislon v svoj srce , tako da jaz hoteti 
odreci se jih v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus , 
ter prav do svoj vrednostni papirji ter posledica , ter to vi 
hoteti nadomestiti poljuben puhlost ,sadness ali obup v svoj 



zivljenje s veselje od bog , ter to jaz domisljavec vec zarisce 
naprej ucenje slediti vi z citanje vas izraziti z besedami , 
biblija 

22. to vi hoteti plan svoj oci tako da jaz domisljavec zmozen 
v jasno zagledati ter pred sodiscem se pismeno obvezati ce 
je a velik prevara priblizno netelesen predmet , kako v 
razumeti to fenomen ( ali od this pripetljaj ) s a Biblical 
perspektiven , ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi modrost znati ter 
tako da bom se ucil kako v pomoc svoj prijateljstvo ter 
ljubezen sam sebe, sebi, se ( zlahta ) ne obstati del od it. 

23. to vi hoteti zavarovati to nekoc svoj oci ste odpirac ter 
svoj srce razumeti bozji zakon pomen od tok pripetljaj 
taking mesto na svetu , to vi hoteti pripraviti se svoj srcika 
vzeti vas resnica , ter to vi hoteti pomoc mi razumeti kako 
najti pogum ter cvrstost skozi vas svet izraziti z besedami , 
biblija. v imenu ljudstva, usmiljenja itd. jezuit Kristus , jaz 
prositi od this stvari potrditi svoj zahteva v biti znotraj 
pogodba vas hoteti , ter vprasam zakaj vas modrost ter imeti 
a ljubezen od resnica Amen. 



vec pravzaprav od stran 
kako imeti vecen zivljenje 



mi smo vesel ce to zapisati v seznam ( od molitev prosnja v 
Bog ) je zmozen pomagati vi. mi razumeti to maj ne obstati 
najboljsi ali najvec uspesen prevod. mi razumeti to so veliko 
razlicen ways od iztisljiv mnenje ter izraziti z besedami. ce 
vi zivljati a nasvet zakaj a rajsi prevod , ali ce vi hoteti vsec 
biti zavzeti a tesen znesek od vas cas posiljati nasvet v nas , 
bos pomaganje tisoc od drugi narod tudi , kdo hoteti torej 
citanje izpopolniti prevod. mi pogosto zivljati a nova zaveza 



pri roki v vas jezik ali v jezik to ste redek ali star. ce isces a 
nova zaveza v a poseben jezik , prosim napisati rabiti. tudi , 
mi biti brez v obstati varen ter zaceti v biti obhajan to vcasih 
, mi delati oferirati knjiga to ste ne prost ter to delati strosek 
penez. 

sele ce vi ne morem privosciti si nekaj tega oni elektronski 
knjiga , mi moci pogosto delati mena od elektronski knjiga 
zakaj pomoc s prevod ali prevod opus. vi nikar ne zivljati to 
live at warefare with s. o. a poklicen delavec , sele a reden 
oseba kdo je zavzet v pomaganje. vi should zivljati a 
racunalo ali vi should zivljati postranski v a racunalo v vas 
tukajsnji knjiznica ali visja gimnazija ali univerza , odkar 
oni navadno zivljati rajsi vez v stazist v bolnisnici. vi moci 
tudi navadno ustanoviti vas lasten oseben prost elektronski 
verizna srajca racun z tekoc v mail.yahoo.com 

prosim zalotiti a vaznost za odkriti elektronski verizna srajca 
ogovor poiskati pravzaprav ali prenehati od to stran. mi 
upanje bos poslal elektronski verizna srajca v nas , ce to je 
od pomoc ali encouragement. mi tudi podzigati vi v zveza 
nas zadeven elektronski knjiga to mi oferirati to ste ce ne 
strosek , ter prost. 

mi delati zivljati veliko knjiga v tuji jeziki , sele mi nikar ne 
zmeraj mesto jih sprejeti electronically ( travnato gricevje ) 
zato ker mi sele izdelovanje pri roki knjiga ali predmet to ste 
najvec prosnja. mi podzigati vi v vzdrznost prositi v Bog ter 
v vzdrznost zvedeti priblizno njega z citanje novi testament. 
mi izreci dobrodoslico vas vprasanje ter razloziti z 
elektronski verizna srajca. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



srckan Bog , the same to to nova 
zaveza has been izpusttakodamismo 

zmozen zvedeti vec priblizno vi. prosim pomoc preprosti 
ljudje odgovoren zakaj izdelava to elektronski knjiga pri 
roki. 

prosim pomoc jih premoci opus nagel , ter izdelovanje vec 
elektronski knjiga pri roki prosim pomoc jih imeti vsi 
sredstvo , penez , cvrstost ter cas to oni potreba zato da 
obstati zmozen vzdrzevati ki dela zakaj vi. 
prosim pomoc oni to ste del od skupina to pomoc jih naprej 
vsakdanji osnova. prosim izrociti jih cvrstost v vzdrznost ter 
izrociti vsakteri od jih bozji zakon razumeven zakaj opus to 
vi biti brez jih uganjati. prosim pomoc vsakteri od jih v ne 
zivljati strah ter spomniti se to vi ste Bog kdo odgovor 
molitev ter kdo je v ukaz od vse. 

jaz predlagati da vi hoteti podzigati jih , ter to vi zavarovati 
jih , ter opus & ministrstvo to oni so zaposlen s cim. jaz 
predlagati da vi hoteti zavarovati jih s netelesen vojna sila 
ali drugi zapreka to strjena lava skoda jih ali pocasi vozite 
jih niz. prosim pomoc mi cas jaz raba to nova zaveza v tudi 
pretehtati od preprosti ljudje kdo zivljati narejen to naklada 
pri roki , 

tako da morem prositi za jih ter tudi oni moci vzdrznost v 
pomoc vec narod jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti mi a 
ljubezen od vas svet izraziti z besedami ( novi testament ), 
ter to vi hoteti izrociti mi netelesen modrost ter bistroumnost 



znati vi rajsi ter v razumeti epoha od cas to mi smo zivljenje 
v. 

prosim pomoc mi znati kako v obravnavati tezek to jaz sem 
soociti s vsak dan. lord Bog , pomoc mi hoteti znanje vi rajsi 
ter hoteti pomoc drugi krscanski v svoj area ter po svetu. 
jaz predlagati da vi hoteti izrociti elektronski knjiga skupina 
ter oni kdo opus naprej tkalec ter oni kdo pomoc jih vas 
modrost. jaz predlagati da vi hoteti pomoc poedinec 
clanstvo od svoj rodbina ( ter svoj rodbina ) v ne obstati 
netelesen goljufati , sele v razumeti vi ter hoteti uvazevati 
ter slediti vi v sleherni izuriti za hojo ali jezo po cesti. ter jaz 
zaprositi vi uganjati od this stvari v imenu ljudstva, 
usmiljenja itd. jezuit , Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



llltlhal diyOS , pasalamatan ka atipan ng pawid ito 
bago testamento may been pakawalan pagayon atipan ng 
pawid tayo ay able sa mag-aral laling marami buongpaligid 
ka. masiyahan tumulong ang mga tao may pananagutan 
dahil sa making ito Electronic book makukuha. masiyahan 
tumulong kanila sa maaari able sa gumawa ayuno , at gawin 
laling marami Electronic books makukuha masiyahan 
tumulong kanila sa may lahat ang mapamaraan , ang salapi , 
ang lakas at ang takdaan ng oras atipan ng pawid sila 
mangilangan di iutos sa maaari able sa tago gumawa dahil 
saka. 

masiyahan tumulong those atipan ng pawid ay mahati ng 
ang itambal atipan ng pawid tumulong kanila sa isa pang- 
araw-araw batayan. masiyahan bigyan kanila ang lakas sa 
mapatuloy at bigyan bawa't isa ng kanila ang tangayin pang- 
unawa dahil sa ang gumawa atipan ng pawid ka magkulang 



kanila sa gumawa. masiyahan tumulong bawa't isa ng kanila 
sa hindi may katakutan at sa gunitain atipan ng pawid ka ay 
ang diyos sino sumagot dasal at sino ay di pagbintangan ng 
lahat ng bagay. 

ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would palakasin ang loob 
kanila , at atipan ng pawid ka ipagsanggalang kanila , at ang 
gumawa & magkalinga atipan ng pawid sila ay kumuha di. 
ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would ipagsanggalang 
kanila sa ang tangayin pilitin o iba sagwil atipan ng pawid 
could saktan kanila o slow kanila itumba. 
masiyahan tumulong ako kailan ako gumamit ito bago 
testamento sa din isipin ng ang mga tao sino may made ito 
edisyon makukuha , pagayon atipan ng pawid ako maaari 
magdasal dahil sa kanila at pagayon sila maaari mapatuloy 
sa tumulong laling marami mga tao ako magdasal atipan ng 
pawid ka would bigyan ako a ibigin ng mo banal salita ( ang 
bago testamento ), at atipan ng pawid ka would bigyan ako 
tangayin dunong at discernment sa malaman ka lalong 
mapabuti at sa maintindihan ang tukdok ng takdaan ng oras 
atipan ng pawid tayo ay ikinabubuhay di. 
masiyahan tumulong ako sa malaman paano sa makitungo 
kumuha ang mahirap hindi madali atipan ng pawid ako ay 
confronted kumuha bawa't araw. panginoon diyos , 
tumulong ako sa magkulang sa malaman ka lalong mapabuti 
at sa magkulang sa tumulong iba binyagan di akin malawak 
at sa tabi-tabi ang daigdig. ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka 
would bigyan ang Electronic book itambal at those sino 
gumawa sa ang website at those sino tumulong kanila mo 
dunong. 

ako magdasal atipan ng pawid ka would tumulong ang isang 
tao pagkakasapi ng kanila mag-anak ( at akin mag-anak ) sa 
hindi maaari spiritually dayain , datapuwa't sa maintindihan 
ka at sa magkulang sa tanggapin at sundan ka di bawa't 
daan. at ako humingi ka sa gumawa tesis bagay di ang 
pangalanan ng heswita , susugan , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Armas Jumala , Kiittaa te etta' nyt kuluva 
Veres Jalkisaados has esittamislupa joten etta me 
aari eteva jotta kuulla enemman jokseenkin te. 

Haluta auttaa ihmiset edesvastuullinen ajaksi ansaitseva nyt 
kuluva Elektroninen kirjanpidollinen saatavana. Haluta 
auttaa heidat jotta olla eteva jotta aikaansaada paastota , ja 
ehtia enemman Elektroninen luettelossa saatavana Haluta 
auttaa heidat jotta hankkia aivan varat , raha , kesto ja aika 
etta he kaivata kotona aste jotta olla eteva jotta elatus 
tyoskentely ajaksi Te. 

Haluta auttaa ne etta aari erita -lta joukkue etta auttaa heidat 
model after by jokapaivainen kivijalka. Haluta kimmoisuus 
heidat kesto jotta jatkaa ja kimmoisuus joka -lta heidat 
henki- ymmartavainen ajaksi aikaansaada etta te haluta 
heidat jotta ajaa. 

Haluta auttaa joka -lta heidat jotta ei hankkia pelata ja jotta 
muistaa etta te aari Jumala joka tottelee nimea hartaushetki 
ja joka on kotona hinta -lta kaikki. I-KIRJAIN pyytaa 
hartaasti etta te edistaa heidat , ja etta te suojata heidat , ja 
aikaansaada & ministerikausi etta he aari varattu kotona. I- 
KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te suojata heidat polveutua 
Henki- Joukko eli toinen este etta haitta heidat eli hitaasti 
heidat heittaa. Haluta auttaa we jahka I-KIRJAIN apu nyt 
kuluva Veres Jalkisaados jotta kin ajatella -lta ihmiset joka 
hankkia kokoonpantu nyt kuluva painos saatavana , joten 
etta I-KIRJAIN kanisteri pyytaa hartaasti ajaksi heidat ja 



joten he kanisteri jatkaa jotta auttaa enemman ihmiset I- 
KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus we lempia -lta 
sinun Pyha Sana ( Veres Jalkisaados ), ja etta te kimmoisuus 
we henki- viisaus ja arvostelukyky jotta osata te vedonlyoja 
ja jotta kasittaa aika -lta aika etta me aari asuen kotona. 
Haluta auttaa we jotta osata kuinka jotta antaa avulla 
hankala etta I-KIRJAIN olen asettaa vastakkain avulla joka 
aika. Haltija Jumala , Auttaa we jotta haluta jotta osata te 
Vedonlyoja ja jotta haluta jotta auttaa toinen Kristitty kotona 
minun kohta ja liepeilla maailma. 

I-KIRJAIN pyytaa hartaasti etta te kimmoisuus Elektroninen 
kirjanpidollinen joukkue ja ne joka aikaansaada model after 
kudos ja ne joka auttaa heidat sinun viisaus. I-KIRJAIN 
pyytaa hartaasti etta te auttaa yksilo jasenmaara -lta heidan 
heimo ( ja minun heimo ) jotta ei olla henkisesti eksyttaa , 
ainoastaan jotta kasittaa te ja jotta haluta jotta hyvaksya ja 
harjoittaa te kotona joka elamantapa. ja I-KIRJAIN anoa te 
jotta ajaa nama tavarat kotona maine -lta Jeesus , 
Vastuunalainen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Raring Gud , Tack sjalv sa pass den har Ny 

Testamente er blitt befriaren sa fakta at vi er 
duglig till lara sig mer omkring du. Behag hjalpamig 
folk ansvarig for tillverkningen den har Elektronisk bok 
tillganglig. 



Behag hjalpa mig dem till vara kopa duktig verk fort , och 
gora mer Elektronisk bokna tillganglig Behag hjalpa mig 
dem till har alla resurserna , pengarna , den styrka och tiden 
sa pass de behov for att kunde halia arbetande till deras. 
Behag hjalpa mig den har sa pass de/vi/du/ni ar del om 
spannen sa pass hjalp dem pa en daglig basis. Behaga ger 
dem den styrka till fortsatta och ger var av dem den ande 
forstandet for den verk sa pass du vilja dem till gor. Behag 
hjalpa mig var av dem till inte har radsla och till minas sa 
pass du er den Gud vem svar bon och vem er han i lidelse av 
allting. 

JAG be sa pass du skulle uppmuntra dem , och sa pass du 
skydda dem , och den verk & ministaren sa pass de er 
forlovad i. 

JAG be sa pass du skulle skydda dem fran den Ande Pressar 
eller annan hinder sa pass kunde skada dem eller langsam 
dem ned. Behag hjalpa mig nar JAG anvanda den har Ny 
Testamente till ocksa tanka om folk vem har gjord den har 
upplagan tillganglig , sa fakta at JAG kanna be for dem och 
sa de kanna fortsatta till hjalp mer folk JAG be sa pass du 
skulle ge mig en karlek om din Helig Uttrycka ( den Ny 
Testamente ), och sa pass du skulle ge mig ande visdom och 
discernment till veta du battre och till forsta den period av 
tid sa pass vi er levande i. 

Behag hjalpa mig till veta hur till ha att gora med 
svarigheten sa pass JAG er stillt overfor var dag. Var Herre 
och Fralsare Gud , Hjalpa mig till vilja till veta du Battre 
och till vilja till hjalp annan Kristen i min areal och i 
omkrets det varld. JAG be sa pass du skulle ger den 
Elektronisk bok sla sig ihop och den har vem arbeta pa den 
spindelvav och den har vem hjalp dem din visdom. 
JAG be sa pass du skulle hjalp individuellt medlemmen av 
deras familj ( och min familj ) till inte bli spiritually lurat , 
utom till forsta du och mig till vilja till accept och folja du i 
varje vag. och JAG fraga du till gor de har sakerna inne om 
namn av Jesus , Samarbetsvillig , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Allerkserest God , Tak for lan at indevaerende Ny 
Testamente er blevet l0st i den grad at vi er kan hen til lasre 
flere omkring jer. Behage hjaelp den folk ansvarlig nemlig 
g0r indevaerende Elektronisk skrift anvendelig. Behage 
hjselp sig at blive k0bedygtig arbejde holdbar , og skabe 
flere Elektronisk b0ger anvendelig Behage hjaslp sig hen til 
nyde en hel ressourcer , den penge , den krasfter og den gang 
at de savn for at vaere i stand til opbevare i orden nemlig Jer. 

Behage hjaelp dem at er noget af den hold at hjaslp sig oven 
pa en hverdags holdepunkt. Behage indr0mme sig den 
krasfter hen til fortsastte og indr0mme hver i sig den appel 
opfattelse nemlig den arbejde at jer savn sig hen til lave. 
Behage hjaelp hver i sig hen til ikke nyde skrask og hen til 
huske at du er den God hvem svar b0n og hvem star for 
arrangementet i alt. 

JEG bed at jer ville give mod sig , og at jer sikre sig , og 
den arbejde & ministerium at de er forlovet i. JEG bed at jer 
ville sikre sig af den Appel Tvinger eller anden hindring at 
kunne afbrask sig eller sen sig nede. 

Behage hjaelp mig hvor JEG hjaelp indevaerende Ny 
Testamente hen til ligeledes hitte pa den folk hvem nyde 
skabt indevaerende oplag anvendelig , i den grad at JEG 
kunne bed nemlig sig hvorfor de kunne fortsastte hen til 
hjaelp flere folk JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme mig en 



kserlighed til jeres Hellig Ord ( den Ny Testamente ), og at 
jer ville indr0mme mig appel klogskab og discernment hen 
til kende jer bedre og hen til opfatte den periode at vi er 
nulevende i. 

Behage hjselp mig hen til kende hvor hen til omhandle den 
problemer at Jeg er stillet over for hver dag. Lord God , 
Hjselp mig hen til ville gerne kende jer Bedre og hen til ville 
gerne hjselp anden Christians i mig omrade og omkring den 
jord. 

JEG bed at jer ville indr0mme den Elektronisk skrift hold og 
dem hvem arbejde med den website og dem hvem hjselp sig 
jeres klogskab. JEG bed at jer ville hjselp den individ 
medlemmer i deres slsegt ( og mig slsegt ) hen til ikke vsere 
spiritually narrede , men hen til opfatte jer og hen til ville 
gerne optage og komme efter jer i al mulig made. og JEG 
opfordre jer hen til lave disse sager i den bensevne i Jesus , 
Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



MojiHTBa k 6ory ,3,oporoii Bor, Bm hto Swjih 
BbinymeHbi oto Gospel hjih otot hobmh testament TaK, 
^rro Mbi GyaeM BbiyHHTb 6ojrbiiie o Bac. Ilo5KajryHCTa 
noMorHTe jikwim OTBercTBeHHbiM ajih /jenaTb OTy 
3jieKTpoHHyio KHHry HMeiomeiica. Bbi 3HaeTe ohh h bm 
M05KeTe noMOHb hm. rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm MOHb 
pa6oTaTb 6bicrpo, h c/tejiaiiTe 6onee aneKTpoHHbie khhth 
HMeiomeiica rio5KajryHCTa noMorHTe hm HMerb Bce 



pecypcbi, AeHbr, npoHHOCTb h BpeMa Koropbie ohh ajih roro 
^rroGbi MOHb #ep>KaTb pa6oTaTb ajih Bac. ItoKanyiiCTa 
noMorHTe tcm dyjjyr nacTbio KOMaimM noMoraeT hm Ha 
e5KeAHeBHoe ocHOBamie. nroicajiyHCTa Rawre hm npoHHOCTb 
jxm roro MTo6bi npo^oiDKaTb h /jaBaTb KaayjOMy H3 hx 
AyxoBHoe BHHKaHne jxm pa6oTbi mto bm xothtc hx 
c^enaTb. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe KaayjOMy H3 hx He HMeTb 
crpax h He BcnoMHHaTb mto bm oy^eTe 6oroM OTBeHaiOT 
MOJiHTBe h in charge of bcc il mojho mto bm o6oaphjih hx, 
h mto bm 3amHmaeTe hx, h pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcTBO mto 

OHH BKJUOHeHM BHyTpH. 

il MOJIK) MTO BM 3aiHHTHJIH HX OT #yXOBHMX yCHJIHH HJIH 

Apyrnx npenoH CMornn noBpeAHTb hm hjih 3aMeAJnrrb hm 
bhh3. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe Kor/ia a Hcnojib3yio stot 
hobmh testament raioKe jxm roro mto6m /jyMaTb mo^eH 
AenajiH stot BapnaHT HMeiomeHca, TaK, mto a CMory 
noMOJiHTb jxm hx h no3TOMy hx CMorHTe npoAOJDKaTb 
noMOHb 6onbHie mo/ieH. 

JI Momo mto bm ziajiH MHe Bjno6jieHHOCTb Baniero 
CBaTeHHiero cnoBa (HoBbraa 3aBeT), h mto bm /iaJiH MHe 
AyxoBHbie npeMy/ipocTb h pacno3HaHHe jxm roro mto6m 
3HaTb Bac 6onee jryHine h noroiTb nepno/io BpeMeHH 
kotopom mm 5KHBeM b. Ilo5KajiyHCTa noMorHTe MHe cyMerb 
KaK o6maTbca c 3arpyAHeHHHMH mto a confronted c 
KaayiMM /iHeM. JlopA Bor, noMoraeT MHe xoTerb 3HaTb Bac 
6onee nyHHie h xoTeTb noMOHb /ipyrHM xpHcraaHKaM b 
Moen o6nacTH h BOicpyr MHpa. 

il MOJIK) MTO BM /lajIH 3JieKTpOHHyK) KOMaH/iy H Te KHHrH 

noMoraiOT hm Bania npeMy/ipocTb. il mojho mto bm 

nOMOrjIH HH^HBH/iyajIbHMM HJieHaM HX CeMbH (h Moen 

ceMbn) /iyxoBHOCT 6biTb o6MaHyTMM, ho noHaTb Bac H 
xoTeTb npHHaTb h nocneAOBaTb 3a Bac b icaawH ^opore. 
TaK5Ke Aanre HaM komiJiopt h HaBe^eHKe b sth BpeMeHa h a 



cnpaniHBaeM, mto bm jiejiaere oth Bemji in the name of 
CbfflOK 6ora, jesus christ, aMHHb, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



,3,par Bor , Ejiaroaapa th to3h to3h Hob 
3aBemaHne has p.p. ot be ocBoSoacaaBaM TaKa 
to3h Hne CTe cnocoSeH kbm yna ce noBene 
HaOKOJiO th. XapecBaM noMaraM onpeflejiHrejieH hjich 
xopa OTroBopeH 3a npnroTBaHe to3h Electronic KHHra 
HajiineH. 

XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH kt>m pa6oTa 
nocra , h npaBfl noBene Electronic KHiDKapHHHa HainmeH 
XapecBaM noMaraM rax ki>m HMaM uhji onpeAejiHrejieH 
HjieH cpeACTBO , onpeAejiHTejieH hikh napn , 
onpeAejiHTeneH hjich ycTOHHHBOCT h onpeAejiHrejieH hjich 
BpeMe to3h Te wyama in pe# ki>m 6i>Aa cnoco6eH ki>m 
/rbp5Ka /TBH5KeHHe 3a Th. XapecBaM noMaraM ot that to3h 
cre nacT Ha onpeAejiHrejieH hjich Birpar to3h noMaraM rax 
Ha an BceKH^HeBeH 6a3a. 

XapecBaM ^aBaM rax onpe/tejiHreneH hjich yctohhhboct 
ki>m npo^tiDKaBaM h /laBaM BceKH Ha rax onpe/tejinTeneH 
HjieH /ryxoBeH cxBamaHe 3a oirpeaejiHTejieH hjkh pa6oTa 
TO3H th jnmca Tax ki>m npaBa. 

XapecBaM noMaraM BceKH Ha Tax ki>m He HMaM crpax h ki>m 
noMHH to3h th cre onpeAejiHrejieH HjieH Bor koh OTroBop 
MOJiHTBa h koh e in m>jiHH Ha bchhko. A3 mojih to3h th yac 
Haci>pHaBaM Tax , h to3h th 3aiHHraBaM Tax , h 



onpe^ejnrreneH hjich pa6oTa & MHHHcrepcrBO to3h Te cre 
3am>iDKaBaM in. A3 mojih to3h th yac 3amHTaBaM rax ot 
onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH ,HyxoBeH Cnna hjih /ipyr npenKa to3h 
p.t. ot can Bpe^a rax hjih 6aBeH rax rono Bi>3BHiiieHHe. 
XapecBaM noMaraM me Kora A3 ynoTpe6a to3h Hob 
3aBemaHHe kt>m cbiho mhcjih Ha onpeAejnrrejieH hjich xopa 

KOH HMaM p.t. H p.p. OT make T03H H3£aHHe HajIHHeH , TaKa 

TO3H A3 Mora mojih 3a rax h TaKa Te Mora npo^tJCKaBaM 
kt>m noMaraM noBene xopa A3 mojih to3h th yac AaBaM me 
a jho6ob Ha your Cbot JfyMa ( onpe^ejinTeneH HjieH Hob 
3aBemaHHe ), h to3h th yac /jaBaM me /ryxoBeH Mi>/rpocT h 
pa3JiHHaBaHe ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p h ki>m pa36npaM 
onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH nepno/i Ha BpeMe to3h HHe cre 5khb 
in. XapecBaM noMaraM me ki>m 3Haa Kaic ki>m pa3AaBaM c 
onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH MbHen to3h A3 cbm ronpaBaM npeA c 
BceKH Ren. 

JlopA Bor , IloMaraM me kt>m jnmca ki>m 3Haa th no-Ao6i>p 
h ki>m jnmca ki>m noMaraM /ipyr Xphcthhhckh in my iuiom 
h HaoKono onpe^ejiKTeneH HjieH cbot. 

A3 MOJiH to3h th yac ^SBaM onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH Electronic 
KHHra Bnpar h ot that koh pa6oTa Ha onpeAejnrrejieH HjieH 
website h ot that koh noMaraM Tax your Mi>/rpocT. A3 mojih 
to3h th y5K noMaraM onpe^ejiHreneH HjieH jnmeH HjieHCTBO 
Ha TexeH ceMeiicTBO ( h my ceMeiicTBO ) ki>m He 6i>Aa 
/ryxoBeH H3MaMBaM , ho ki>m pa36npaM th h ki>m jnmca kt>m 
npneMaM h cjie^BaM th in BceKH m>T. h A3 mrraM th ki>m 
npaBa Te3H Hemo in onpeflejnrrejieH hjich HMe Ha He3yHT , 
Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. §u bu Incil bkz. 

have be serbest brrakmak taki biz are giiclii -e dogru 
ogrenmek daha hakktnda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek 
belgili tanimlik insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu 
elektronik kitap elde edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek 
onlan -e dogru muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik 
kitap elde edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlan -e 
dogru -si olmak tiim belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili 
tanimlik para , belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman 
adi. 

su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu 
etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik 
takim adi. su yardim etmek onlan ustunde an her temel. 
mutlu etmek vermek onlan belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru 
devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlan belgili tanimlik 
ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi. 
su sen istemek onlan -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim 
etmek her -in onlan -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e 
dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim 
yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I 
dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti ylireklendirmek onlan , ve adi. 
su sen korumak onlan , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi. 
su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti 
korumak onlan —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger 
engel adi. 

su -ebil zarar onlan ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek 
yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da 
dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§ 
bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin 
onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim 



etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek 
beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tammlik Incil ), 
ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve 
discernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru 
anlamak belgili tanimlik dondiirmemem adi. su biz are canh 
iginde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek 
nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tammlik muskulat adi. 
su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim 
etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve 
-e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan 
icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua 
etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tammlik elektronik 
kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o 
kim yardim etmek onlari senin akilhlik. 
I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tammlik 
bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil 
var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e 
dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol. 
ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adma Isa , 
amin , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



sevgili mabut , eyvallah adi. su bu Incil bkz. have be serbest 
brrakmak taki biz are gu^lii -e dogru ogrenmek daha 



hakkinda sen. mutlu etmek yardim etmek belgili tanimlik 
insanlar -den sorumlu icin yapim bu elektronik kitap elde 
edilebilir. mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru 
muktedir i§ hizli , ve yapmak daha elektronik kitap elde 
edilebilir mutlu etmek yardim etmek onlari -e dogru -si 
olmak timi belgili tanimlik kaynak , belgili tanimlik para , 
belgili tanimlik gue ve belgili tanimlik zaman adi. 
su onlar liizum icin muktedir almak calisma icin sen. mutlu 
etmek yardim etmek o adi. su are boliim -in belgili tanimlik 
takim adi. su yardim etmek onlari ustiinde an her temel. 
mutlu etmek vermek onlari belgili tanimlik gue -e dogru 
devam etmek ve vermek her -in onlari belgili tanimlik 
ruhani basiret icin belgili tanimlik i§ adi. 

su sen istemek onlari -e dogru yapmak. mutlu etmek yardim 
etmek her -in onlari -e dogru degil -si olmak korkmak ve -e 
dogru animsamak adi. su sen are belgili tanimlik mabut kim 
yanit dua ve kim bkz. be icinde fiyat istemek -in her sey. I 
dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yureklendirmek onlari , ve adi. 
su sen korumak onlari , ve belgili tanimlik i§ & bakanlik adi. 
su onlar are me§gul icinde. I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti 
korumak onlari —dan belgili tanimlik ruhani gue ya da diger 
engel adi. 

su -ebil zarar onlari ya da yava§ onlan asagi. mutlu etmek 
yardim etmek beni ne zaman I kullanma bu Incil -e dogru da 
dusun belgili tanimlik insanlar kim -si olmak -den yapilmi§ 
bu baski elde edilebilir , taki I -ebilmek dua etmek icin 
onlan vesaire onlar -ebilmek devam etmek -e dogru yardim 
etmek daha insanlar I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek 
beni a ask -in senin kutsal kelime ( belgili tanimlik Incil ), 
ve adi. su sen -cekti vermek beni ruhani akillihk ve 
diseernment -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve -e dogru 
anlamak belgili tanimlik dondurmemem adi. su biz are canh 
icinde. mutlu etmek yardim etmek beni -e dogru bilmek 
nasil -e dogru dagitmak ile belgili tanimlik muskulat adi. 



su I am kar§i koymak ile her giin. efendi mabut , yardim 
etmek beni -e dogru istemek -e dogru bilmek sen daha iyi ve 
-e dogru istemek -e dogru yardim etmek diger Hristiyan 
icinde benim alan ve cevrede belgili tanimlik diinya. I dua 
etmek adi. su sen -cekti vermek belgili tanimlik elektronik 
kitap takim ve o kim i§ iistiinde belgili tanimlik website ve o 
kim yardim etmek onlari senin akillilik. 
I dua etmek adi. su sen -cekti yardim etmek belgili tanimlik 
bireysel aza -in onlarin aile ( ve benim aile ) -e dogru degil 
var olmak ruhani aldatmak , ama -e dogru anlamak sen ve -e 
dogru istemek -e dogru almak ve izlemek sen icinde her yol. 
ve I sormak sen -e dogru yapmak bunlar e§ya adina Isa , 
amin , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Serbia - Servia - Serbian 

Serbia Serbian Servian Prayer Isus Krist Molitva Bog Kako 
Moliti moci cuti moj molitva za pitati davati ponuditi mene 
otkriti duhovni Vodstvo 

Serbia ■ Prayer Requests (p r a y in g ) to G od ■ e x p la in e d in 

Serbian (servian) L anguage 

Molitva za Bog ## Kako za Moliti za Bog 
Kako Bog moci cuti moj molitva 
Kako za pitati Bog za davati ponuditi mene 
Kako otkriti duhovni Vodstvo 



Kako za naci predaja iz urok Raspolozenje 

Kako za zasluga odredeni clan istinit Bog nad Nebo 

Kako otkriti odredeni clan Hriscanin Bog 
Kako za moliti za Bog droz Isus Krist 
JA imati nikada molitva pre nego 
Vazan za Bog 
Bog zeljan ljubavi svaki osoba osoba 

Isus Krist moci pomoc 
Se Bog Biti stalo moj zivot 
Molitva Trazenju 

stvar taj te moc oskudica za uzeti u obzir govorenje za Bog 
okolo Molitva Trazenju kod te , okolo te 



Govorenje za Bog , odredeni clan Kreator nad odredeni 
clan Svemir , odredeni clan Gospodar : 

1 . taj te davati za mene odredeni clan hrabrost za moliti 
odredeni clan stvar taj JA potreba za moliti 2. taj te davati za 
mene odredeni clan hrabrost za verovati te pa primiti sta te 
oskudica raditi s moj zivot , umjesto mene uznijeti moj 
vlastiti volja ( namera ) iznad vas. 

3. taj te davati mene ponuditi ne career moj bojazan nad 
odredeni clan nepoznat za postati odredeni clan isprika , 
inace odredeni clan osnovica umjesto mene ne za sluziti 
you. 

4. taj te davati mene ponuditi vidjeti pa uciti kako za imati 
odredeni clan duhovni sway JA potreba ( droz tvoj rijec 



Biblija ) jedan ) umjesto odredeni clan dogadaj ispred pa P ) 
umjesto moj vlastiti crew duhovni putovanje. 

5. Taj te Bog davati mene ponuditi oskudica za sluziti Te 
briny 

6. Taj te podsetiti mene za razgovarati sa te prayerwhen ) JA 
sam frustriran inace u problemima , umjesto tezak za odluka 
stvar ja sam jedini droz moj ljudsko bice sway. 

7. Taj te davati mene Mudrost pa jedan srce ispunjen s 
Biblijski Mudrost tako da JA sluziti te briny delotvorno. 

8. Taj te davati mene jedan zelja za ucenje tvoj rijec , Biblija 
, ( odredeni clan Novi Zavjet Evandelje nad Zahod ), na 
temelju jedan crew osnovica 9. taj te davati pomoc za mene 
tako da JA sam u mogucnosti za obavestenje stvar unutra 
Biblija ( tvoj rijec ) sta JA moci osobno vezati za , pa taj 
volja pomoc mene shvatiti sta te oskudica mene raditi unutra 
moj zivot. 

10. Taj te davati mene velik raspoznavanje , za shvatiti kako 
za objasniti za ostali tko te biti , pa taj JA moci uciti kako 
uciti pa knotkle kako za pristajati uza sto te pa tvoj rijec ( 
Biblija ) 

11. Taj te donijeti narod ( inace websites ) unutra moj zivot 
tko oskudica za knotkle te , pa tko biti jak unutra njihov 
precizan sporazum nad te ( Bog ); pa Taj te donijeti narod ( 
inace websites ) unutra moj zivot tko ce biti u mogucnosti za 
ohrabriti mene za tocno uciti kako za podeliti Biblija rec nad 
istina (2 Timotej 215:). 

12. Taj te pomoc mene uciti za imati velik sporazum okolo 
sta Biblija prikaz 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu najbolji , sta 
3. lice od TO BE u prezentu vecina precizan , pa sta je preko 



duhovni sway & snaga , pa sta prtkaz sloziti se s odredeni 
clan izvorni rukopis taj te nadahnut odredeni clan autorstvo 
nad odredeni clan Novi Zavjet za pisati. 

13. Taj te davati ponuditi mene za korist moj vrijeme unutra 
jedan dobar put , pa ne za uzaludnost moj vrijeme na 
temelju Neistinit inace prazan metod za dobiti zaglavni 
kamen za Bog ( ipak taj nisu vjerno Biblijski ), pa kuda tim 
metod proizvod nijedan dug rok inace trajan duhovni voce. 

14. Taj te davati pomoc za mene za shvatiti sta za traziti 
unutra jedan crkva inace jedan mjesto nad zasluga , sta rod 
nad sumnja za pitati , pa taj te pomoc mene za naci vernik 
inace jedan parson s velik duhovni mudrost umjesto lak 
inace neistinit odgovor. 

15. taj te uzrok mene za secati se za sjecati se tvoj rijec 
Biblija ( takav kao Latinluk 8), tako da JA moci imati pik na 
moj srce pa imati moj pamcenje spreman , pa biti spreman 
za davati dobro odgovarati ostali nad odredeni clan nadati se 
taj JA imati okolo te. 

16. Taj te donijeti ponuditi mene tako da moj vlastiti 
teologija pa doktrina za slagati tvoj rijec , Biblija pa taj te 
nastaviti za pomoc mene knotkle kako moj sporazum nad 
doktrina moci poboljsati tako da moj vlastiti zivot , stil 
zivota pa sporazum nastavlja da bude zaglavni kamen za sta 
te oskudica to da bude umjesto mene. 

17. Taj te otvoren moj duhovni uvid ( zakljucak ) sve vise , 
pa taj kuda moj sporazum inace percepcija nad te nije 
precizan , taj te pomoc mene uciti tko Isus Krist vjerno 3. 
lice od TO BE u prezentu. 

18. Taj te davati ponuditi mene tako da JA moci za odvojen 
iko neistinit obredni sta JA imati zavisnost na temelju , iz 



tvoj jasan poucavanje unutra Biblija , ako postoje nad sta JA 
sam sledece nije nad Bog , inace 3. lice od TO BE u 
prezentu u suprotnosti sa sta te oskudica za poucavati nama 
okolo sledece te. 

19. Taj iko sile nad urok ne oduteti iko duhovni sporazum 
sta JA imati , ipak radije taj JA zadrzati odredeni clan znanje 
nad kako za knotkle te pa ne da bude lukav unutra ovih dan 
nad duhovni varka. 

20. Taj te donijeti duhovni sway pa ponuditi mene tako da 
JA volja ne da bude dio nad odredeni clan Velik Koji pada 
Daleko inace nad iko pokret sta postojati produhovljeno 
krivotvoriti za te pa za tvoj Svet Rijec 

21. Taj da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu bilo sto taj J A 
imati ispunjavanja unutra moj zivot , inace iko put taj JA ne 
imate odgovaranje za te ace JA treba imati pa taj 3. lice od 
TO BE u prezentu sprjecavanje mene iz oba hodanje s te , 
inace imajuci sporazum , taj te donijeti tim stvar / odgovor / 
dogadaj leda u moj pamcenje , tako da JA odreci se njima u 
ime Isus Krist , pa svi nad njihov vrijednosni papiri pa 
posledica , pa taj te opet staviti iko praznina ,sadness inace 
ocajavati unutra moj zivot s odredeni clan Radost nad 
odredeni clan Gospodar , pa taj JA postojati briny 
usredotocen na temelju znanje za sledii te kod citanje tvoj 
rijec , odredeni clan Biblija 

22. Taj te otvoren moj oci tako da JA moci za jasno vidjeti 
pa prepoznati da onde 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu jedan 
Velik Varka okolo Duhovni tema , kako za shvatiti danasji 
fenomen ( inace ovih dogadaj ) iz jedan Biblijski 
perspektiva , pa taj te davati mene mudrost za knotkle i tako 
taj JA volja uciti kako za pomoc moj prijatelj pa voljen sam 
sebe ( rodbina ) ne postojati dio nad it. 



23. Taj te osigurati taj jednom moj oci biti otvoreni pa moj 
pamcenje shvatiti odredeni clan duhovni izrazajnost nad 
trenutni zbivanja uzimanje mjesto unutra odredeni clan svet 
, taj te pripremiti moj srce prihvatiti tvoj istina , pa taj te 
pomoc mene shvatiti kako za naci hrabrost pa sway droz 
tvoj Svet Rijec , Biblija. U ime Isus Krist , JA traziti ovih 
stvar potvrdujuci moj zelja da bude slozno tvoj volja , pa JA 
sam iskanje tvoj mudrost pa za imati jedan ljubav nad 
odredeni clan Istina Da 



Briny podno Stranica 
Kako za imati Vjecan Zivot 



Nama biti dearth da danasji foil ( nad molitva trazenju za 
Bog ) 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu u mogucnosti za pomoci 
te. Nama shvatiti danasji ne moze biti odredeni clan najbolji 
inace vecina delotvoran prevod. Nama shvatiti taj onde biti 
mnogobrojan razlicit putevi nad izraziv misao pa reci. Da te 
imati jedan sugestija umjesto jedan bolji prevod , inace da te 
slican za uzeti jedan malen kolicina nad tvoj vrijeme za 
poslati sugestija nama , te ce biti pomaganje hiljadu nad 
ostali narod isto , tko volja onda citanje odredeni clan 
poboljsan prevod. Nama cesto imati jedan Novi Zavjet 
raspoloziv unutra tvoj jezik inace unutra jezik taj biti redak 
inace star. 

Da te biti handsome umjesto jedan Novi Zavjet unutra jedan 
specifican jezik , ugoditi pisati nama. Isto , nama oskudica 
da bude siguran pa probati za komunicirati taj katkada , 
nama ciniti ponuda knjiga taj nisu Slobodan pa taj ciniti 
kostati novac. Ipak da te ne moci priustiti neki od tim 
elektronicki knjiga , nama moci cesto ciniti dobro razmena 



nad elektronicki knjiga umjesto pomoc s prevod inace 
prevod posao. 



Te ne morati postojati jedan strucan radnik , jedini jedan 
pravilan osoba tko 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu zainteresiran 
za pomaganje. Te treba imati jedan racunar inace te treba 
imati pristup za jedan racunar kod tvoj mestanin biblioteka 
inace univerzitet inace univerzitet , otada tim obicno imati 
bolji spoj za odredeni clan Internet. Te moci isto obicno 
utemeljiti tvoj vlastiti crew SLOBODAN elektronski posta 
racun kod lijeganje mail.yahoo.com 

Ugoditi uzeti maloprije otkriti odredeni clan elektronski 
posta adresa smjesten podno inace odredeni clan kraj nad 
danasji stranica. Nama nadati se te volja poslati elektronski 
posta nama , da danasji 3. lice od TO BE u prezentu nad 
pomoc inace hrabrenje. Nama isto ohrabriti te za dodir nama 
u vezi sa Elektronicki Knjiga taj nama ponuda taj biti van 
kostati , pa slobodan. 



Nama ciniti imati mnogobrojan knjiga unutra stran jezik , 
ipak nama ne uvijek mjesto njima za primiti elektronski ( 
skidati podatke ) zato nama jedini napraviti raspoloziv 
odredeni clan knjiga inace odredeni clan tema taj biti preko 
zatrazen. Nama ohrabriti te za nastaviti za moliti za Bog pa 
za nastaviti uciti okolo Njemu kod citanje odredeni clan 
Novi Zavjet. Nama dobrodosao tvoj sumnja pa primedba 
kod elektronski posta. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Draga Dumnezeu , Multumesc that this Nou Testament 

has been released so that noi sintem capabil la spre learn 
mai mult despre tu. 

Te rog ajuta-ma oamenii responsible pentru making this 
Electronic carte folositor. Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre a fi 
capabil la spre work rapid , §i a face mai mult Electronic 
carte folositor Te rog ajuta-ma pe ei la spre have tot art.hot. 
resources , art.hot. bani , art.hot. strength §i art.hot. timp that 
ei nevoie inauntru ordine la spre a fi capabil la spre a pastra 
working pentru Tu. 

Te rog ajuta-ma aceia that esti part de la team that ajutor pe 
ei on un fiecare basis. A face pe plac la a da pe ei art.hot. 
strength la spre a continua §i a da each de pe ei art.hot. spirit 
understanding pentru art.hot. work that tu nevoie pe ei la 
spre a face. 

Te rog ajuta-ma each de pe ei la spre nu have fear sj la spre 
a-§i aminti that tu esti art.hot. Dumnezeu cine answers 
prayer §i cine este el inauntru acuzatie de tot. I pray that tu 
trec.de la will encourage pe ei , §i that tu a proteja pe ei , §i 
art.hot. work & ministru that ei sint ocupat inauntru. I pray 
that tu trec.de la will a proteja pe ei de la art.hot. Spirit 
Forces sau alt obstacles that a putut harm pe ei sau lent pe ei 
jos. 

Te rog ajuta-ma cind I folos this Nou Testament la spre de 
asemenea think de la oameni cine have made this a redacta 
folositor so that I a putea pray pentru pe ei §i so ei a putea a 



continua la spre ajutor mai mult oameni I pray that tu trec.de 
la will da-mi o dragoste de al tau Holy Cuvint ( art.hot. Nou 
Testament ), §i that tu trec.de la will acorda-mi spirit 
wisdom §i discernment la spre know tu better §i la spre 
understand art.hot. perioada de timp that noi sintem viu 
inauntru. 

Te rog ajuta-ma la spre know cum la spre deal cu art.hot. 
difficulties that I sint confronted cu fiecare zi. Lord 
Dumnezeu , Ajuta-ma help la spre nevoie la spre know tu 
Better §i la spre nevoie la spre ajutor alt Crestin inauntru 
meu arie §i around art.hot. lume. I pray that tu trec.de la will 
a da art.hot. 

Electronic carte team §i aceia cine work pe website §i aceia 
cine ajutor pe ei al tau wisdom. I pray that tu trec.de la will 
ajutor art.hot. individual members de lor familie ( §i meu 
familie ) la spre nu a fi spiritually deceived , numai la spre 
understand tu §i eu la spre nevoie la spre accent §i a urma tu 
inauntru fiecare way. §i I a intreba tu la spre a face acestia 
things in nume de Jesus , Amen , 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Russian - Russe - Russie 

Russian Prayer Requests - 



MojIHTBa K 

6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k 

6ora KaK 6or mtokct ycjibmiaTb MoeMy 

MOJiHTBe KaK cnpocHTb, mto 6or min noMomb k MHe 

KaK HaiiTH ;ryxoBHoe naBejieime 

KaK Hairra deliverance ot 3Jieiiniero 

;ryxoB KaK noKjiOHHTbca noncTHHe 6or 

paa KaK Hairra xpHCTHaHCKoe 

6ora KaK noMOJiHTb k 6ory ro 

jesus christ a mncorjia He MOJinna nepeA 

BaacHbiM k Bino6jieHHOCTaM 6ora 

6ora KajK^oe HHAHBH/ryajibHoe 

jesus, kotop nepcoHbi christ M05KeT noMOHb 

AenaeT BHHMaTenbHOCTb 6ora o mohx Bemax 

3anpOCOB MOJiHTBe 

5KH3HH Bbl MOrjIH XOTeTb JJJIH paCCMOTpeHHH nOrOBOpHTb K 

6ory o 3anpocax MOJiHTBe 
BaMH, o mc 



ToBopam k 6ory, co3/jaTejib BcejieHHoro, jiop/j: 
1. bbi /jajiii 6bi k MHe CMejiocTii noiviojiHTfc itemn h /jjih 

TOrO HT06bI nOMOJIHTfc 

2. Bbl JjaJIH 6bl K MHe CMejIOCTH BepHTb BaM H npHHHMaTb 

bm xoTHTe CAenaTb c Moen >KH3Hbio, BMecTO MeHa exalting 
moh bojih (HaMepne) Han tbohm. 

3. bm jjaJiH 6bi MHe noMOHjb jxm roro mtoGm He 
npenaTCTBOBaTb mohm CTpaxaM HencBecTHa craTb 

OTrOBOpKaMH, HJIH OCHOBa JlJUl MeH3, KOTOp Hy5KHO He 

cjry5KHTb bm. 4. bm jjajiH 6m MHe noMomb jxm roro mtoGm 



yBjmeTb h BbiyHHTb KaK HMeTb /ryxoBHyio npoHHOCTb a 
(nepe3 Banie cjiobo 6h6jihh) a) /via cjiynaeB Bnepea h 6) 
jxm Moero co6cTBeHHoro jnmHoro /ryxoBHoro 
nyTeniecTBHH. 

5. ^to bm 6or ziajiH MHe noMomb jxm toto hto6m xoTeTb 
cny5KHTb bm 6onbnie 

6. ^to bm remind, mto a pa3roBapHBan c BaMH (prayer)when 
a ce6a paccrpobre hjih b 3aTpy/nieHHH, bmccto m>rraTbca 
pa3peniHTb Benin TOJibKO nepe3 mok> jnoACKyio npoHHOCTb. 

7. ^to bm AajiH MHe npeMy/ipocTb h cepaue 3anojiHHjio c 
6h6ji6hckoh npeMy/ipocTbio Taic HOIT a cjiy>KHji 6m bm 

3(J)(J)eKTHBHO. 

8. ^to bm ziajiH MHe 5KenaHHe royHHTb Bame cjiobo, 
6h6jihk>, (HoBbina 3aBeT Gospel john), on a personal basis, 

9. Bbl flaJIH 6bl nOMOIHH K MHe TaK, MTO a 6y/Ty 3aMeTHTb 

Benin b 6h6jihh (BameM cnoBe) a Mory jihhho orHecra k, h 
KOTopoH noM05KeT MHe noHaTb bm xoTHTe MeHa c/ienaTb b 

MOeH 5KH3HH. 

10. ^to bm /jajiH MHe 6ojibmoe pacno3HaHHe, jxm roro 
MTo6bi noHaTb KaK o6i>acHHTb k /ipyrHM KOTopbie bm, h mto 
a Mor BbiyHHTb KaK BbiyHHTb h cyMeTb KaK croaTb BBepx 
AJia Bac h Bamero cnoBa (6h6jihh) 

1 1 . ^to bm npHHecjiH moAeH (hjih websites) b Moen 5kh3hh 

XOTaT 3HaTb BaC, H KOTOpbK CHJIbHM B HX TOHHOM 

BHHKaHHH Bac (6or); h to bm npHHecjiH 6m jnoAen (hjih 
websites) b Moen 5kh3hh dyjier 060/rpHTb MeHa tohho 
BbiyHHTb KaK pa3AejiHTb 6h6jihk> cjiobo npaB/rbi (2 timothy 
2:15). 



12. ^to Bbi noMorjiH MHe BbiyHHTb HMeTb 6onbnioe 
BHHKaHne o KOTopbiH BapnaHT 6h6jihh caMbie jryHHrae, 

KOTOpbIH CaMbIH TOHHbIH, H KOTOpbIH HMeeT CaMbK 

AyxoBHbie npoHHOCTb & cnny, h KOTopaa BapnaHT 
cornaniaeTca c nepBOHanajibHO pyKonncaMH mto bm 
BOOAynieBHjiH aBTopbi HoBbina 3aBeT HanncaTb. 

13. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe jxm Hcnojib30BaHiui Moero 
BpeMeHH b xopomeH Aopore, h jxm roro mtoGm He 

paCTOHHTejIbCTBOBaTb MOe BpeMfl Ha JK»KHbIX HJIH nyCTbK 

MeTOAax nonyHHTb closer to 6or (ho to He 6y/rbre 
noHCTHHe 6h6ji6hck), h rae Te MeroAbi He npoH3BOAflT 

HHKaKOH AOJirOCpOHHbIH HJIH lastillg /iyXOBHbIH 

njiOAOOBom. 

14. ^to bm /jajiH noMomb k MHe noHHTb look for b nepicoB 

HJIH MeCTe nOKJIOHeHHa, HTO BH/Tbl BOnpOCOB, KOTOp Hy5KHO 

cnpocHTb, h mto bm noMorjiH MHe HaHTH BepyiomHx HJIH 
pastor c 6ojibHiOH /ryxoBHOH npeMy/rpocTbio bmccto jierKHx 

HJIH JI05KHbIX OTBeTOB. 

15. Bbi npHHHHHJIH 6bl MeHH BCnOMHHTb /TJIH TOrO MT06bI 

3anoMHHTb Bame cjiobo 6h6jihh (such as Romans 8), Taic, 
mto a CMory HMeTb ero b MoeM cep/me h HMeTb moh pa3yM 
6biTb noAroTOBjieHHbiM, h totobo #aTb otbct k /ipyroMy H3 
ynoBaHHa KOTopoe a HMeio o Bac. 

16. ^to bm npHHecjiH noMomb k MHe TaK HOn MOH 
co6cTBeHHbie Teojioraa h ^OKrpHHbi jxm roro mto6h 
corjiacHTbca c BaniHM cjiobom, 6n6jiHeH h mto bm 
npoAOJDKajiHCb noMOHb MHe cyvieTb KaK Moe BHHKaHne 

AOKTpHHbl M05KHO yjiyHHIHTb TaK, MTO MOH C06CTBeHHbie 

5KH3Hb, lifestyle h noHHMaTb 6y/ryT npoAOJDKaTbca 6biTb 
closer to Bbi xoTHre hx 6biTb jxm measi. 



17. ^TO Bbl paCKpbIJIH MOK) flyXOBHyK> npOHHIjaTejIbHOCTb 

(3atcjiK)HeHHJi) 6onbnie h 6onbnie, h mto rae moh BHHKainie 
hjih BoenpHHaTHe Bac He tohhm, mto bm noMornn MHe 
BbiyHHTb jesus christ noncTHHe. 

18. ^to bm p,ajm noMomb k MHe Taic HOI1 a Mor 6m 
OT/iejiHTb ino6bie jio>KHbie pHTyanbi a 3aBHceji Ha, ot BaniHx 
acHbK npenoAaBaTenbCTB b 6h6jihh, ecnn jno6oe H3, to a 
following He 6ora, hjih npoTHBonoji05KHbi k bm xoTHTe jxm 
Toro MTo6bi HayHHTb HaM - o cne^OBaTb 3a BaMH. 

19. ^to jno6bie ycHjma 3Jia take away HHCKOJibKO /ryxoBHoe 
BHHKaHne a HMeio, ho aobojh>ho mto a coxpaHHji 3HaHHe 
KaK 3HaTb Bac h 6biTb o6MaHyTbiM BHyTpn these days 
AyxoBHoro o6MaHa. 

20. ^to bm npHHecjiH /ryxoBiryio npoHHOCTb h noMorjiH k 
MHe TaK HOn a He oy/ry Hacrbio 6ojh>hioh nanaTb nponb 
hjih jno6oro ABiDKeHHa 6bijio 6m /ryxoBHOCT counterfeit k 
BaM h k BanieMy CBaTeraiieMy cjiOBy. 

21. To ecjiH MTO-HH6bmb, to a ^ejiaji b Moen 5kh3hh, hjih 
jno6aa ^opora mto a He OTBenaji k BaM no Mepe roro KaK a 
AOjraceH HMeTb h to npeAOTBpamaeT MeHa ot hjih ryjiaTb c 

BaMH, HJIH HMeTb nOHHMaTb, MTO Bbl npHHecjiH Te 

things/responses/events back into moh pa3yM, TaK HOI1 a 
OTpenbjica 6bi ot hx in the name of jesus christ, h Bce H3 hx 

BJIHaHHH H nOCJieACTBHH, H MTO Bbl 3aMCHHJIH jno6bie 

emptiness, TOCKjiHBOCTb hjih despair b Moen 5KH3HH c 
yTexoii jiopaa, h mto a 6ojibnie 6mji c<J)OKyciipoBaH Ha 
yHHTb nocjieAOBaTb 3a BaMH nyreM HHraTb Bame cjiobo, 
6n6jiHa. 

22. ^to bm pacKpbijiH moh rjia3a TaK HOn a Mor 6m acHO 
yBH/ieTb h y3HaTb ecjiH 6y#eT 6ojh>hioh o6MaH o /ryxoBHbix 
TeMax, to KaK noHaTb 3to aBjieHHe (hjih 3th cjrynaH) ot 



6H6neiiCKOH nepcneKTHBM, h mto bm muai MHe 
npeMy/ipocTb ajih roro hto6m 3HaTb h TaK HOn a Bbiyny 

KaK nOMOHb MOHM ^py3b3M H nOJIK)6HJI OAHH 

(poACTBeHHHKH) £jih roro MTo6bi He 6biTb HacTbio ee. 

23 ^to bm o6ecneHHjiH mto pa3 moh raa3a pacicpbiHbi h moh 
pa3yM noHHMaeT #yxoBHoe 3HaneHHe TeKymHe co6mthji 
npHHHMaa Mecro b Mnpe, mto bm ikwotobhjih Moe cep/me 
jxm roro MTo6bi npn3HaBaTb Bamy npaB/iy, h mto bm 
noMorjiH MHe noiwTb KaK Hairra CMenocTb h npoHHOCTb 
nepe3 Banie CBaTeraiiee cjiobo, 6h6jihio. In the name of 
jesus christ, a npomy 3th BemH noATBep5K/iaa Moe jKejiamie 
6biTb b cooTBeTCTBHH Banieii BOJien, h a npomy Bania 
npeMy/ipocTb h HMeTb Bjno6jieHHOCTb npaB/iM, AMHHb. 



Bojibine Ha /me cTpaHHHM 

KaK HMeTb BeHHaaa }KH3Hb 



Mbl paUOCTHM eCJIH 3TOT CnHCOK (3anpOCOB MOJIHTBe K 

6ory) M05KeT noMOHb BaM. Mbi noHHMaeM sto He mtokct 
6biTb caMMH nyHHiHH hjih caMMH 3(J)(J)eKTHBHMH nepeBOA. 
Mbi noHHMaeM mto 6y#yT MHoro no-pa3HOMy ^opor 
BbipaacaTb mmcjih h cnoBa. Ecjih bm HMeeTe npeAJi05KeHHe 
jxm 6onee jryHiiiero nepeBOAa, hjih ecjin bm xoTen 6mjih 6m 
npHHHTb Manoe KOjnmecTBO Baniero BpeMeHH nocnaTb 
npeAJi05KeHHa k HaM, to bm oy^eTe noMoraTb TbionaM 
jnoAax TaioKe, KOTopbie nocne 3Toro npoHHraiOT 
yjryHHieHHMH nepeBOA. Mbi nacTO HMeeM hobmh testament 
HMeiomHHca b BanieM a3bnce hjih b a3bncax pe/pco hjih 
CTapo. Ecjih bm CMOTpHTe jxm hoboto testament b 
cneijHiJiHHecKH a3bnce, to nwKajryHCTa HanHHiHTe k HaM. 



Taioice, mm xothm 6biTb yBepeHbi h nbiraeMca CBa3MBaTb to 
HHor/ia, mm npeAJiaraeM khhfh KOTopbie He cbo6oaho h 

KOTOpbK CTOHT /KJHbr. Ho eCJIH Bbl He M05KeTe n03BOJIHTb 
HeKOTOpbK H3 Tex 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr, TO Mbi M05KCM MaCTO 

ZienaTb o6mch 3jieKrpoHHbix KHHr ajih noMOimi c 
nepeBOAOM hjih pa6oTOH nepeBOAa. Bbi He aojdkhm 6biTb 
npoiJieccHOHajibHbiM pa6oTHHKOM, TOJibKO peryjiapHO 
nepcoHa KOTopaa 3aHHTepecoBaHa b noMoraTb. 

Bbl AOJDKHbl HMeTb KOMnblOTep HJIH Bbl /K)JI5KHbI HMCTb 

AOCTyn k KOMnbiOTepy Ha BaniHx MecTHbix apxHBe hjih 
KOJiJie5Ke hjih yHHBepcHTeTe, b Bimy Toro mto Te oGhhho 
HMeiOT 6ojiee jryHHine coe/niHeHiDi k HHTepHeTy. 

Bbi M05KeTe TaK5Ke oGhhho ycTaHaBjiHBaTb Bani 
co6cTBeHHbiH jnpiHbiH CBOBO^HO yner sjieKipoHHaaa 
noHTa nyTeM h^th k mail.yahoo.com no5KajryHCTa 
npHHHMaeTe momcht ajih Toro hto6m CHHraTb a/ipec nocjie 
Toro KaK 3jieKTpoHHaaa noHTa Bbi pacnojKraceHM Ha /me 

HJIH KOHIje 3T0H CTpaHHHM. 

Mbi HaneeMca bm nonuieT ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa k HaM, ecjni 
3to noMOHjH hjih noompeHiui. Mbi Taioice oGo^paeM Bac 

CB33aTbCa Mbi OTHOCHTejIbHO 3JieKTpOHHbIX KHHr Mbi 

npeAJiaraeM TOMy 6e3 ijeHbi, h cbo6oaho, kotop mm HMeeM 
MHoro KHHr b HHoerpaHHbK a3MKax, ho mm Bcer/ia He 
ycTaHaBjiHBaeM hx ajih Toro mto6m nojryHHTb sjieKTpoHHO 
(download) noTOMy mto mm TOJibKO ^eJiaeM HMeiomeca 
KHHrH hjih TeMM KOTopbie cnpaniHBaTb. Mbi o6oApaeM Bac 

npOAOJDKaTb nOMOJIHTb K 6ory H npOAOJDKHTb BbiyHHTb o 

eM nyTeM HHraTb HoBbina 3aBeT. Mbi npHBeTCTByeM Baiira 
BonpocM h KOMMeHTapHH ajieKipoHHaaa noHTa. 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



ARABIC -LANGUEARABE 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

l(_£»l ljjt_l i 

IJjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs I j ^!jj JjlAJ* tA-S It^fd mj^j^ 5 ' 
I Jjd* ^I^jcjoI ^iXs £?afc_ I 4>jU j j' Jj*y <J ' jl3j s jl Jjj 1 -^ l<-!\? 



J j i lP '<-!<J> 'd\s i^jm» i Ji^J» J Jf>L>"jj<-! £j 4J Jkjs*. 

i^j I JJs i j Cj-i^Jcjf ^yb^Caj, ? j I JjjlCJ I Jjj^l£° Ij £l£J»I f j 

lj£ji_j|cj I Jc^ L^f^j I j igo^jp? 'j M^>* ft>l 'cis L>*-*i 

Ijjrl* ^jJ^JCJ^ ^ j^l l(j*l£jf oil £oJ £A,£ J Jj— *^J 'l£i><=' 

'^MJ f j ' Jj'lK 

I^j IJ<J> I j liljCJ C^-ia^ j_£ ^i_j Jd! liljf* IJfjJ^ia (IJ^oJ 'J^A,^) 

' jlj^ Lyj-* ^£^t£ jl£ '<Jjj^l£° j'<-t^f> s jlJUijo Ij C^jUi Ijtii 

IlJ^J J— ay jl JljCJJS Ijjf j_£o l<_K^_£ tl^l/L^ M^ '. 

I JjtI* ^I^JCJ^ L-q_£ f£j-£ *4;5M^ S I J^lfJ (£ I Jo^jM^ 

I Ji^_£ Cjjl^o I jj_£ ii!J ^j^. I JJjjJ I J<J> lSi^'^JLS ^JL^ 'j 

CI^JLJ I ji! IlJ^J JjjLf^ 'j jjJ£^ ' J'^JlS j '<JfL> u L5C'^'^'J ^-^S 

MiJ^ 'JfjKj 5 J^jJ '<-fe.'<Jf. 

I^j I J<J> Jii!j> I j l£^-H,£ I Jii!cj|i_j I Jl Jii!cjjj j_£ IJ^ jC£i_j jl Ji^ j 

I^j I JJs Jii!j> I j lSijJ£„ j lUijb I^jCjsI (j^I^Jcj^) Jl lSC^S- 

^.1 ^Ja^ jl I Jj»C^O jl JcJjtlJO L-q_£ sio I JjjlCJ 4 jUaJlJ j» j^j> 'j 
IU£-J sio I Jijiki* U)^ Ijj^ l£i>"j£. ' '(>l£ j 



Prayer to God 

Dear God, 

Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has 
been released so that we are able to learn more about 
you. 

Please help the people responsible for making this 
Electronic book available. You know who they are and 
you are able to help them. 

Please help them to be able to work fast, and make 
more Electronic books available 

Please help them to have all the resources, the 
money, the strength and the time that they need in 
order to be able to keep working for You. 

Please help those that are part of the team that help 
them on an everyday basis. Please give them the 
strength to continue and give each of them the spiritual 
understanding for the work that you want them to do. 



Please help each of them to not have fear and to 

remember 

that you are the God who answers prayer and who is 

in charge of everything. 

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you 
protect them, and the work & ministry that they are 
engaged in. 

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual 



Forces or other obstacles that could harm them or 
slow them down. 

Please help me when I use this New Testament to 
also think of the people who have made this edition 
available, so that I can pray for them and so they can 
continue to help more people. 

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word 
(the New Testament), and that you would give me 
spiritual wisdom and discernment to know you better 
and to understand the period of time that we are living 
in. 

Please help me to know how to deal with the 
difficulties that I am confronted with every day. Lord 
God, Help me to want to know you Better and to want 
to help other Christians in my area and around the 
world. 

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team 
and those who help them your wisdom. God, help me 
to understand you better. Please help my family to 
understand you better also. 

I pray that you would help the individual members of 
their family (and my family) to not be spiritually 
deceived, but to understand you and to want to accept 
and follow you in every way. 

Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I 
ask you to do these things in the name of Jesus , 
Amen, 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

A FEW BOOKS for NEW CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



King James Version - The best and ideal would be the 
text of the 1611, [referring to the 66 books of the Old and 
New Testaments] as produced by the original 
translators. 



Geneva Bible - Version of the Old Testament and New 
Testament produced starting around 1560. Produced 
with the help of T (Beza)., who also produced an 
accurate LATIN version of the New Testament, based on 
the Textus Receptus. 

The Geneva Bible (several Editions of it) are available - 
as of this writing at www.archive.org in PDF 

Bible of Jay Green - Jay Green was the Translator for 
the Trinitarian Bible Society. His work is based on the 
Ancient Koine Greek Text (Textus Receptus) from 
which he translated directly. His work encompasses both 
Hebrew as well as Koine Greek (The Greek spoken at 
the time of Jesus Christ). 

The Translation of the New Testament [of Jay Green] 
can be found online in PDF for Free 



R-La grande charte d'Angleterre ; ouvrage precede d'un 
Precis - This is simply the MAGNA CHARTA, which 
recognizes liberty for everyone. 

Gallagher, Mason - Was the Apostle Peter ever at Rome 

Cannon of the Old Testament and the New Testament 
or Why the Bible is Complete without the Apocrypha and 
unwritten Traditions by Professor Archibald Alexander 
Princeton Theological Seminary 

1851 - Presbyterian Board of Publications. [available online 
Free ] 

Historical Evidences of the Truth of the Scripture Records 
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE DOUBTS AND 
DISCOVERIES OF MODERN TIMES, by George 
Rawlinson - Lectures Delivered at Oxford University 
[available online Free ] 

The Apostolicity of Trinitarianism - by George Stanley 
Faber - 1 832 - 3 Vol / 3 Tomes [available online Free ] 

The image-worship of the Church of Rome : proved to be 

contrary to Holy Scripture and the faith and discipline of the 

primitive church ; and to involve contradictory and 

irreconcilable doctrines within the Church of Rome itself 

(1847) 

by James Endell Tyler, 1789-1851 



Calvin defended : a memoir of the life, character, and 
principles of John Calvin (1909) by Smyth, Thomas, 1808- 
1873 ; Publish: Philadelphia : Presbyterian Board of 
Publication. [available online Free ] 



The Supreme Godhead of Christ, the Corner-stone of 
Christianity by W. Gordon - 1855[available online Free ] 



A history of the work of redemption containing the outlines 

of a body of divinity ... 

Author: Edwards, Jonathan, 1703-1758. 

Publication Info: Philadelphia,: Presbyterian board of 

publication, [available online Free ] 



The origin of pagan idolatry ascertained from historical 



testimony and circumstantial evidence. - by George Stanley 
Faber - 1816 3 Vol. / 3 Tomes [available online Free ] 

The Seventh General Council, the Second of Nicaea, Held 
A.D. 787, in which the Worship of Images was established 
- based on early documents by Rev. John Mendham - 1850 
[documents how this far-reaching Council went away from 
early Christianity and the New Testament] 



Worship of Mary by James Endell Tyler [available online 
Free ] 

The Papai System from its origin to the present time 

A Historical Sketch of every doctrine, claim and practice of 

the Church of Rome by William Cathcart, DD 

1 872 - [available online Free ] 

The Protestant exiles of Zillerthal; their persecutions and 
expatriation from the Tyrol, on separating from the Romish 
church - [available online Free ] 

An essay on apostolical succession- being a defence of a 
genuine ministry - by Rev Thomas Powell - 1846 



An inquiry into the history and theology of the ancient 
Vallenses and Albigenses; as exhibiting, agreeably to the 
promises, the perpetuity of the sincere church of Christ 
Publish info London, Seeley and Burnside, - by George 
Stanley Faber - 1838 [available online Free ] 



The Israel of the Alps. A complete history of the Waldenses 
and their colonies (1875) by Alexis Muston (History of the 
Waldensians) - 2 Vol/ 2 Tome - Available in English and 
Separately ALSO in French [available online Free ] 



Encouragement for Women 

Amy Charmichael 

AMY CARMICHAEL - From Sunrise Land 
[available online Free ] 

AMY CARMICHAEL - Lotus buds (1910) 
[available online Free ] 

AMY CARMICHAEL - Overweights of joy (1906) 
[available online Free ] 

AMY CARMICHAEL -Walker of Tinnevelly (1916) 
[available online Free ] 

AMY CARMICHAEL -After Everest ; the experiences of a 
mountaineer and medical mission (1936) 
[available online Free ] 

AMY CARMICHAEL -The continuation of a story ([1914 



[available online Free ] 



AMY CARMICHAEL -Ragland, pioneer (1922) 
[available online Free] 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY OF HUNGARIAN CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



fflSTORY OF THE PROTESTANT CHURCH IN 
HUNGARY By J. H. MERLE D'AUBIGNE - 
1 854 [available online Free ] 



Hungary and Kossuth-An Exposition of the Late Hungarian 

Revolution by Tefft 

1852 [available online Free ] 

Secret history of the Austrian government and of its ... 
persecutions of Protestants By Joseph Alfred Michiels - 
1859 [available online Free ] 

Sketches in Remembrance of the Hungarian Struggle for 
Independence and National Freedom Edited by Kastner 
(Circ. 1853) [available online Free ] 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY OF FRENCH CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 1 
[available online Free ] 

La Bible Francaise de Calvin V 2 
[available online Free ] 

VAUDOIS - A memoir of Felix Neff, pastor of the High 
Alps [available online Free ] 

La France Protestante - ou, Vies des protestants francais 
par Haag - 1 856 - 6 Tomes [available online Free ] 



Musee des protestans celebres 



Ftude sur les Academies Protestantes en France au xvie et 
au xviie siecle - Bourchenin - 1 882 [available online Free ] 

Les plus anciennes melodies de l'eglise protestante de 
Strasbourg et leurs auteurs [microform] (1928) [available 
online Free ] 



L'Israel des Alpes: Premiere histoire complete des Vaudois 



du Piemont et de leurs colonies 



Par Alexis Muston ; Publie par Marc Ducloux, 1 85 1 



(2 Tomes) Lavailable online Free J 



GALLICA - http://gallica.bnf.fr 

Histoire ecclesiastique - 3 Tomes - by Theodore de Beze, 
[available online Free ] | 



][ 



] 



BEZE-Sermons sur l'histoire de la resurrection de Notre- 
Seigneur Jesus-Christ [available online Free ] 

DE BEZE - Confession de la foy chrestienne [available 
online Free ] 

Vie de J. Calvin by Theodore de Beze, [available online 
Free ] 

Confession d'Augsbourg (francais). 1550-Melanchthon 
[available online Free ] 

La BIBLE-1'ed. de, Geneve-par F. Perrin, 1567 [available 
online Free ] 

Hobbes - Leviathan ou La matiere, la forme et la puissance 
d'un etat ecclesiastique et civil [available online Free ] 

L'Eglise et l'Etat a Geneve du vivant de Calvin 
Roget, Amedee (1825-1883). 
[available online Free ] 

LUTHER-Commentaire de l'epitre aux Galates [available 
online Free ] 

Petite chronique protestante de France [available online Free 
] 



Histoire de la guerre des hussites et du Concile de Basle 
2 Tomes [recheck for accuracy] 



Les Vaudois et l'Inquisition-par Th. de Cauzons (1908) 
[available online Free ] 

Glossaire vaudois-par P. -M. Callet [available online Free ] 

Musee des protestans celebres ou Portraits et notices 
biographiques et litteraires des personnes les plus eminens 
dans l'histoire de la reformation et du protestantisme par une 
societe de gens de lettres [available online Free ] 

( publ. par Mr. G. T. Doin; Publication : Paris : Weyer : Treuttel et Wurtz : 
Scherff [et al.], 1821-1824 - 6 vol./6 Tomes : ill. ; in-8 
Doin, Guillaume-Tell (1794-1854). Editeur scientifique) 

Notions elementaires de grammaire comparee pour servir a 
l'etude des trois langues classiques [available online Free ] 

Thesaurus graecae linguae ab Henrico Stephano constructus. 
Tomus I : in quo praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit 
vocabula in certas classes distribuit, multiplici derivatorum 
serie... 

( Estienne, Henri (1528-1598). Auteur du texte Tomus I, II, III, IV : in quo 
praeter alia plurima quae primus praestitit vocabula in certas classes 
distribuit, multiplici derivatorum serie; Thesaurus graecae linguae ab 

Henrico Stephano constructus ) [available online Free ] 



La liberte chretienne; etude sur le principe de la piete chez 
Luther ; Strasbourg, Librairie Istra, 1922 - Will, Robert 
[available online Free ] 

Bible-N.T.(francais)-1523 - Lefevre d'Etaples [available 
online Free ] 

Calvin considere comme exegete - Par Auguste Vesson 
[available online Free ] 



Reuss, Rodolphe - Les eglises protestantes d'Alsace pendant 
laRevolution (1789-1802) [available online Free ] 

WEBBER-Ethique_protestante-L'ethique protestante et 
l'esprit du capitalisme (1904-1905) [available online Free ] 

French Protestantism, 1559-1562 (1918) 
Kelly, Caleb Guyer -[available online Free ] 

History of the French Protestant Refugees, from the 
Revocation of the Edict of Nan tes 1 854 [available online 
Free ] 

The History of the French, Walloon, Dutch and Other 
Foreign Protestant Refugees Settled in 1846 [available 
online Free ] 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Italian and/or Spanish/Castillian/ etc 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Histo ria del Con cilio Tridentino (SAR PI) [available online 
Free ] [ 



rm 



Aldrete, Bernardo Jose de - Del origen, y principio de la 
lengua castellana 6 romace que oi se usa en Espana 

SAVANAROLA-Vindicias historicas por la inocencia de 
Fr. Geronimo Savonarola 



Biblia en lengua espanola traduzida palabra por palabra de 
la verdad hebrayca-FERRARA 

Biblia. Espanolll602-translaciones por Cypriano de Valera 
( misspelled occasionally as Cypriano de Varela ) [available 
online Free ] 

Reina Valera 1602 - New Testament Available at 
www.archive.org [available online Free ] 

La Biblia : que es, los sacros libros del Vieio y Nuevo 
Testamento 

Valera, Cipriano de, 1532-1625 
Los dos tratados del papa, i de la misa - escritos por 
Cipriano D. Valera ; i por el publicados primero el a. 1588, 
luego el a. 1599; i ahora fielmente reimpresos [Madrid], 
1 85 1 [available online Free ] 

Valera, Cipriano de, 15327-1625 

Aviso a los de la iglesia romana, sobre la indiccion de 

jubileo, por la bulla del papa Clemente octavo. 

English Title = An answere or admonition to those of the 

Church of Rome, touching the iubile, proclaimed by the 

bull, made and set foorth by Pope Clement the eyght, for the 

yeare of our Lord. 1600. Translated out of French [available 

online Free ] 

Spanish Protestants in the Sixteenth Century by Cornelius 
August Wilkens French [available online Free ] 

Historia de Los Protestantes Espanoles Y de Su Persecucion 
Por Felipe II - Adolfo de Castro - 1 85 1 (also Available in 
English) [available online Free ] 

The Spanish Protestants and Their Persecution by Philip II 



- 1851 - Adolfo de Castro [available online Free ] 

Institvcion de la religion christiana; 
Institutio Christianae religionis. Spanish 
Calvin, Jean, 1509-1564 

Instituzion religiosa escrita por Juan Calvino el ano 1536 y 
traduzida al castellano por Cipriano de Valera. 
Calvino, Juan. 

Catecismo que significa: forma de instrucion, que contiene 

los principios de la religion de dios, util y necessario para 

todo fiel Christiano : compuesto en manera de dialogo, 

donde pregunta el maestro, y responde el discipulo 

En casa de Ricardo del Campo, M.D.XCVI [1596] Calvino, 

Juan. 

Tratado para confirmar los pobres catiuos de Berueria en la 
catolica y antigua se, y religion Christiana: y para los 
consolar con la Palabra de Dios en las afliciones que 
padecen por el evangelio de lesu Christo. [...] Al fin deste 
tratado hallareys un enxambre de los falsos milagros, y 
illusiones del Demonio con que Maria de la visitacion priora 
de la Anunciada de Lisboa engano a muy muchos: y de 
como fue descubierta y condenada al fin del ano de .1588 
En casa de Pedro Shorto, Ano de. 1594 
Valera, Cipriano de, 



Biblia de Ferrara, corregida por Haham R. Samuel de 
Casseres 

The Protestan t exiles of Madeira (c 1860) French [available 
online Free ] 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT 
PartA - Foryour consideration 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



For Christians who want a serious, detailed and 
historical account of the versions of the New Testament, 
and of the issues involved in the historic defense of 
authentic and true Christianity. 



John William Burgon [ Oxford] - 1 The traditional text of the 
Holy Gospels vindicated and established (1896) [available 
online Free ] 

John William Burgon [ Oxford] -2 The causes of the 
corruption of the traditional text of the Holy Gospel 
[available online Free ] 

John William Burgon [ Oxford] - The Revision Revised 
(A scholarly in-depth defense of Ancient Greek Text of the 
New Testament) [available online Free ] 

Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL 
by GINSBURG-VOL 1 [available online Free ] 

Intro to Vol 1 from INTRO to MASSORETICO CRITICAL 
by GINSBURG-VOL 2 [available online Free ] 

Horse Mosaicse; or, A view of the Mosaical records, with 
respect to their coincidence with profane antiquity; their 



internal credibility; and their connection with Christianity; 
comprehending the substance of eight lectures read before 
the University of Oxford, in the year 1801; pursuant to the 
will of the late Rev. John Bampton, A.M. / By George 
Stanley Faber -Oxford : The University press, 1801 
[Topic: defense of the authorship of Moses and the 
historical accuracy of the Old Testament] [available online 
Free ] 

TC The English Revisers' Greek Text-Shown to be 
Unauthorized, Except by Egyptian Copies Discarded 
[available online Free ] 

CANON of the Old and New Testament by Archibald 
Alexander [available online Free ] 

An inquiry into the integrity of the Greek Vulgate- or, 
Received text of the New Testament 1815 92mb [available 
online Free ] 



A vindication of 1 John, v. 7 from the objections of M. 
Griesbach [available online Free ] 



The Burning of the Bibles- Defence of the Protestant 
Version - Nathan Moore - 1 843 

A dictionarie of the French and English tongues 1611 
Cotgrave, Randle - [available online Free ] 



The Canon of the New Testament vindicated in answer to 
the objections of J. T. in his Amyntor, with several additions 
[available online Free ] 



the paramount authority of the Holy Scriptures vindicated 
(1868) 



Histoire du Canon des Saintes-ecritures Dans L'eglise 
Chretienne ; Reuss (1863) [available online Free ] 

Histoire de la Societe biblique protestante de Paris, 1818 a 
1 868 [available online Free ] 

L'academie protestante de Nimes et Samuel Petit 

Le manuel des chretiens protestants : Simple exposition des 
croyances et des pratiques - Par Emilien Frossard - 1 866 



Jean-Frederic Osterwald, pasteur a Neuchatel 

David Martin 

The canon of the Holy Scriptures from the double point of 
view of science and of faith (1862) [available online Free ] 



CODEX B 
H. Hoskier 



E 



ALLIES by 
1914)2Vol[ 



Jniversity of M 



vailable online 7 ree ] 



chigan Scholar 



&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY OF VERSIONS of the NEW TESTAMENT 
Part B - not Recommended 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 



Modern Versions of the New Testament, most of which 
were produced after 1910, are based upon a newly invented 
text, by modern professors, many of whom did not claim to 
believe in the New Testament, the Death and Physical 



Resurrection of Jesus Christ, or the necessity of Personal 
Repentance for Salvation. 

The Translations have been accomplished all around the 
world in many languages, starting with changeover from the 
older accurate Greek Text, to the modern invented one, 
starting between 1904 and 1910 depending on which 
edition, which translation team, and which publisher. 



We cannot recommend: the New Testament or Bible of 
Louis Segond. This man was probably well intentioned, but 
his translation are actually based on the 8 th Critical edition 
of Tischendorf, who opposed the Reformation, the 
Historicity of the Books of the Bible, and the Greek Text 
used by Christians for thousands of years. 

For additional information on versions, type on the Internet 
Search: "verses missing in the NIV" and you will find more 
material. 



We cannot recommend the english-language NKJV, even 
though it claims to depend on the Textus Receptus. That is 
not exactly accurate. The NKJV makes this claim based on 
the ecclectic [mixed and confused] greek text collated 
officially by Herman von Soden. The problem is that von 
Soden did not accomplish this by himself and used 40 
assistants, without recording who chose which text or the 
names of those students. Herman Hoskier [Scholar, 
University of Michigan] was accurate in demonstrating the 
links between Sinaiticus, Vaticanus, and the Greek Text of 
Von Soden. Thus what is explained as being "based on" the 
Textus Receptus actually was a departure from that very 
text. 



The Old Testaments of almost all modern language Bibles, 
in almost all languages is a CHANGED text. It does NOT 
conform to the historic Old Testament, and is based instead 
on the recent work of the German Kittel, who can be easily 
considered an Apostate by historic Lutheran standards. 
(more in a momen tf). 

The Old Testament of the NKJV is based on the New 
Hebrew Translation of Kittel. [die Biblia Hebraica von 
Rudolf Kittel ] Kittel remains problematic for his own 
approach to translation. 

Kittel, the translator of the Old Testament [for almost all 
modern editions of the Bible]: 

1. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was 
accurate. 

2. Did not believe that the Pentateuch he translated was the 
same as the original Pentateuch. 

3. Did not believe in the inspiration of the Old Testament or 
the New Testament. 



4. Did not believe in what Martin Luther would believe 
would constitute Salvation (salvation by Faith alone, in 
Christ Jesus alone). 

5. Considered the Old Testament to be a mixture compiled 
by tribes who were themselves confused about their own 
religion. 

Most people today who are Christians would consider Kittel 
to be a Heretical Apostate since he denies the inspiration of 
the Bible and the accuracy of the words of Jesus in the New 
Testament. Kittel today would be refused to be allowed to 
be a Pastor or a translator. His translation work misleads 



and misguides people into error, whenever they read his 
work. 

The Evidence against Kittel is not small. It is simply the 
work of Kittel himself, and what he wrote. Much of the 
evidence can be found in: 

A history ofthe Hebrews (1895) by R Kittel - 2 Vol 

Essentially, Kittel proceeds from a number of directions to 
undermine the Old Testament and the history of the 
Hebrews, by pretending to take a scholarly approach. Kittel 
did not seem to like the Hebrews much, but he did seem to 
like ancient pagan and mystery religions. (see the Two 
Babylons by Hislop, or History of the Temple by 
Edersheim, and then compare). 

His son Gerhard Kittel, a "scholar" who worked for the 
German Bible Society in Germany in World War II, with 
full aproval of the State, ALSO was not a Christian and 
would ALSO be considered an apostate. Gerhard Kittel 
served as advisor to the leader of Germany in World War II. 
After the war, Gerhard Kittel was tried for War Crimes. 

On the basis of the Documentation, those who believe in the 
Bible and in Historic Christianity are compelled to find 
ALTERNATIVE texts to the Old Testament translated by 
Kittel or the New Testaments that depart from the historic 
Ancient Koine Greek. 

Both Kittel Sr and Kittel Jr appear to have been false 
Christians, and may continue to mislead many. People who 
cannot understand how this can happen may want to read a 
few books including : 

Seduction of Christianity by Dave Hunt. 



The Agony of Deceit by Horton 

Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey 

The Battle for the Bible by Harold Lindsell (Editor of 

Christianity Today) 

Those who want more information about Kittel should 
consult: 

1) Problems with Kittel - Short paper sometimes available 
online or at www.archive.org 

2) The Theological Faculty of the University of Jena during 
the Third .... in PDF [can be found online sometimes] 

by S. Heschel, Professor, Dartmouth College 

3) Theologians under .... : Gerhard Kittel, Paul Althaus, and 
Emanuel Hirsch / Robert P. Ericksen. 

Publish info New Haven : Yale University Press, 1985. 
(New Haven, 1987) 

4) Leonore Siegele - Wenschkewitz, Neutestamentliche 
Wissenschaft vor der Judenfrage: Gerhard Kittels 
theologische Arbeit im Wandel deutscher Geschichte 
(Miinchen: Kaiser, 1980). 



5) Rethinking the German Church Struggle 
by John S. Conway [online] 

http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual4/chapl8.html 



6) Betrayal: German Churches and the Holocaust 

by Robert P. Ericksen (Editor), Susannah Heschel (Editor) 



Questions about (PDF) Ebooks: 

I notice that you have lists of Ebooks here. 

I understand that you may want others to know about 

the books, but why here ? 

There are several reasons why this was done. 

1) so that people who know nothing about Christianity have 
a place to start. There are now thousands of books about 
Christianity available. Knowing where to begin can be 
difficult. These books simply represent ideas and a 
potential starting place. 

2) so that people can learn what other Christians were like, 
who lived before. We live in a world that still 
concentrates on the tasks of the moment, but pays little 
attention to the past. Today, many people do not know 
HOW other Christians lived their daily lives, in centuries 
past. Some of these books are from the past. They offer 
the struggles and the methods of responding through their 
Christian faith, in their own daily lives, some from 
hundreds of years ago. In addition, many of those books 
are documented and have good sources. This seems to be 
a good way for Christians from the past to encourage 
those in the present. 

3) Histories of certain Christians DO belong to those who 
are those who are native to those churches, those 
geographic areas, or who speak those languages. 

But although that is true, many churches today have 
communities or denominations that have transcended 
and surpassed the local geographic areas from 
where they initially or originally arose. It is good for 
believers who are from OTHER geographic areas, to 
learn more about foreign languages and foreign cultures. 
Anything that can help to accomplish this, is movement 



in the right direction. 

4) It is normal for people to believe that if their church or 
their denomination is in one geographic location, that The 
history of that place is best expressed by those who are 
LOCAL historians. Unfortunately, today, this is often 
NOT accurate. 

The reason is that many places have suffered 
from wars and from local disasters. This is especially true 
in Africa and the Near and Middle East. The Local 
historic records and documents were destroyed. Those 
documents that have survived, has survived OUTSIDE 
of those Areas of conflict. Much of their earlier history 
of the Eastern portion of the Roman Empire, is mostly 
known because of the record keepers of the West, and 
because of the travelers from the areas of Western 
Christianity. In many ways, Western Christianity is often 
still the record keeper of those from the East. 

There is a great deal of historical records in the West, 
about the Near East. Those who live there today in the 
near East and Middle East know almost nothing about. 
We suggest some sources that may be of assistance. 



- So you want to bring people closer, and that is a good 
answer, but why include records or books from England 
or from French speaking authors ? 

1) Much of the material dealing with Eastern Orthodoxy OR 
dealing with the matters of Syria, The Byzantine Empire, 
Africa or Asia, were written about, in French. Please 
remember that until very recently, FRENCH was the language 
of the educated classes around the world, AND that it was the 
MAIN language for diplomats, consuls and ambassadors 
and envoys. As a result, there is value in helping those who 



have an interest in French ALSO know where to start, 
concerning matters of Faith and History. 

Some of the material listed in French simply gives people a 
starting point for learning about Christianity in Europe, from a 
non-English point of view. Other books are listed so that 
people can read some of those sources firsthand, for 
themselves and come to their own conclusions. 

English Christians should be happy that they have a great 
spiritual heritage and examples, and rejoice also that the 
French can say the same. The examples of the strong and good 
Christians that have come before belong to everyone to all 
Christians, to all those who aspire to have good examples. 

About the materials that deal with England, most of the world 
STILL does not realize that the records in England are usually 
MUCH older than the ecclesiastical records of OTHER areas 
of the world. England was divided up into geographic areas 
and Churches had great influence in the nation. That had not 
changed in England until the last few decades. Some of the 
records about Christianity in England 
Go back for more than one thousand years, in an 
UNBROKEN line. One can follow the changes to the diocese 
through the different languages, through the different or 
changing legal documents and through the 
Rights confirmed to the churches. 

Other areas of the world are claimed to be very ANCIENT in 
dealing with Christianity, but there is very little of actual 
documentation, of actual agreements, of actual legal 
descriptions, of actual records of local ceremonies, of actual 
local church councils, of the relationship between the secular 
State law, and the guidelines or rules of the Church. England 
was never invaded by those who posed a direct 
threat to its church institutions. The records were kept, so the 
records and documentation are in fact a much stronger 
Basis for the documenting of Christianity in earlier times. 



Most Christians from the East do not know about this, and it 
would be good for them to learn more. In addition, there are 
also records in the Nations and Provinces of Europe, that have 
been kept where Roman Catholic Records demonstrate the 
authenticity of earlier Christian groups that pre-date the 
authority of the Bishop of Rome, even in the Western half of 
the Roman Empire. Some of those sources are listed herein 
also. 

Finally, in the matter of suggesting books about Christianity 
and Other languages, please remember that each group likes to 
learn about its own past, and its own progress. 

The French should be humbly proud of those Christians who 
were in France and who were brave and wise and 
demonstrated courage and a strong faithfulness to God. The 
Germans should learn and know the same thing about their 
history, as should the Spaniards and the Germans, and each 
and every other Nation and People-group. No matter who we 
are or where we are from, we can find something positive and 
good to encourage us and be glad that there were some who 
came before us, to show us a better way to live, by their faith 
and their Godly examples. 



In closing it would be good perhaps to state what is 
obvious: 

This ebook is likely to travel far and wide. Feel free to post 
online and use and print. 

In many parts of the world, Christianity is deliberately falsely 
represented. It is represented as IF faith in God would make 



someone "anti-intellectual" or somehow afraid of ideas or 
thinking. Nothing could be further from the truth. 

Many people today do not know that the history of science 
today is edited to leave out the deep Christianity that most of 
the top scientists have held until very recent times. 

Since God created the World and the scientific laws that 
govern it, it makes sense that God is the designer. No one is 
more scientific than God. 

Many of the great scientists in the World are still Active 
Christians, with a consciously DEEP faith in God. Christians 
are not afraid of thinking for themselves. There are many 
secularists today who attempt to suggest that Christianity is for 
those who are feeble. The truth is that many of those are too 
feeble and too intellectually unprepared to answer the 
questions that Christianity asks of each man and each woman. 

Those who do not have faith in Jesus Christ and who are 
secular simply often worship themselves, under the disguise 
of the theory of Evolution. But the chaos of the world today 
leaves most who are secular WITHOUT a guide or a method 
to explain either purpose in life, or the events that are taking 
place across the planet. Christianity with its record of 2000 
years - (and please do not confuse the Vatican with 
Christianity, they are often not the same) - has 
a record of helping people navigate in difficult times. 

Christianity teaches leaders to be humble and accountable, it 
helps merchants to trade honestly, and fathers to love their 
children and their wife. Christianity finds no value in doing 
harm to others for the purpose of self-interest. Usually doing 
harm to others is a method of expressing that ones faith in God 
is insufficient, therefore [the logic goes, that] harm must be 
done to others. 



Behaving in that wrong manner is simply a Lack of faith in 
God, and therefore those who harm others from Other faiths 
and other religions are usually demonstrating a Lack of Faith 
in the God that THEY worship. 

If God is all powerful, and if God can change the minds of 
others, and if God can reveal himself, then WHY harm anyone 
else who does not agree ? During THIS lifetime, it seems that 
each of us has the right to be wrong ,and the right to make up 
his own mind. Is it not up to God to deal with others in the 
afterlife ? 

We provide answers, and help for those who seek truth (yes 
actual truth can be actually found and discovered, which is a 
shocking statement to many people who thought this was not 
genuinely possible). 

God is a loving God. He offers Eternal Life to those who 
repent and believe in his message in the New Testament. But 
God also allows each individual to decide for themselves. This 
does not allow any of us to change or decide the rules. God is 
still God. We all are under his rules every time we are 
breathing, with each pulse that continues to beat in our heart. 

God does not convince people against their Will. That annoys 
some people also, because they would like God to make 
decisions for them. But if people want to be Free, let them 
demonstrate this by exercising their own Freedom of choosing 
whether to follow God or not. (being able to chose to accept or 
reject God is not the same as being able to chose the 
consequences. Only the choice of which direction to Go is up 
to us. The consequences are whatever God has 
Actually declared them to be. Agreeing with Him or not will 
not change this. 

Christianity is a source of internal strength and provides 
answers that almost no other religious system even claims to 
provide or attempts to provide. 



Something usually happens to those who are intellectually 
honest and investigate Christianity. Many times, they find that 
Christianity is the most authentic, accurate and historic 
account of the history of the world. 

It is the genuine answers and the genuine internal peace and 
help that Christians can find through their God which bothers 
those who are afraid to search for God. We only hope that 
each person will embrace their spiritual j ourney 
And take the challenge upon themselves to ask the question 
about how to find Truth and accurate answers. 

The answers CAN be found. Some of these books are simply 
provided to help people find a few of the pieces that will serve 
as a means to encourage them in thinking and in having their 
inner questions answered. 

We continue to find more answers every day. We have not 
arrived and we certainly are not perfect. But if we have helped 
others to proceed a bit farther on their own journeys, certainly 
the effort will not have been in vain. 



Psalm 50:15 

15 And call upon me in the day of trouble: I will deliver 

thee, and thou shalt glorify me. 



Psalm 90 

91:1 He that dwelleth in the secret place of the most High 

shall abide under the shadow of the Almighty. 

2 I will say of the LORD, He is my refuge and my fortress: 
my God; in him will I trust. 

3 Surely he shall deliver thee from the snare of the fowler, 
and from the noisome pestilence. 

4 He shall cover thee with his feathers, and under his wings 
shalt thou trust: his truth shall be thy shield and buckler. 

5 Thou shalt not be afraid for the terror by night; nor for the 
arrow that flieth by day; 

6 Nor for the pestilence that walketh in darkness; nor for 
the destruction that wasteth at noonday. 

7 A thousand shall fail at thy side, and ten thousand at thy 
right hand; but it shall not come nigh thee. 

8 Only with thine eyes shalt thou behold and see the reward 
of the wicked. 

9 Because thou hast made the LORD, which is my refuge, 
even the most High, thy habitation; 

10 There shall no evil befall thee, neither shall any plague 
come nigh thy dwelling. 

1 1 For he shall give his angels charge over thee, to keep 
thee in all thy ways. 

12 They shall bear thee up in their hands, lest thou dash thy 
foot against a stone. 

13 Thou shalt tread upon the lion and adder: the young lion 
and the dragon shalt thou trample under feet. 



14 Because he hath set his love upon me, therefore will I 
deliver him: I will set him on high, because he hath known 
my name. 

15 He shall call upon me, and I will answer him: I will be 
with him in trouble; I will deliver him, and honour him. 

16 With long life will I satisfy him, and show him my 
salvation. 



Psalm 23 

23: 1 A Psalm of David. The LORD is my shepherd; I shall 

not wan t. 

2 He maketh me to lie down in green pastures: he leadeth 
me beside the still waters. 

3 He restoreth my soul: he leadeth me in the paths of 
righteousness for his name's sake. 

4 Yea, though I walk through the valley of the shadow of 
death, I will fear no evil: for thou art with me; thy rod and 
thy staff they comfort me. 

5 Thou preparest a table before me in the presence of mine 
enemies: thou anointest my head with oil; my cup runneth 
over. 

6 Surely goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days 
of my life: and I will dwell in the house of the LORD for 
ever. 



With My Whole Heart - With 
all my heart 

"with my whole heart" 

lf we truly expect God to respond to us, we must be 
willing to make the commitment to Him with our 
whole heart. 

This means making a commitment to Him with our 
ENTIRE, or ALL of our heart. Many people do not 
want to be truly committed to God. They simply want 
God to rescue them at that moment, so that they can 
continue to ignore Him and refuse to do what they 
should. God knows those who ask help sincerely and 
those who do not. God knows each of our thoughts. 
God knows our true intentions, the intentions we 
consciously admit to, and the intentions we may not 
want to admit to. God knows us better than we know 
ourselves. When we are truly and honestly and 
sincerely praying to find God, and wanting Him with all 
of our heart, or with our whole heart, THAT is when 
God DOES respond. 

What should people do if they cannot make this 
commitment to God, or if they are afraid to do this ? 
Pray : 



Lord God, I do not knowyou well enough, please help 
me to know you better, and please help me to 
understand you. Change my desire to serve you and 
help me to want to be committed to you with my whole 
heart. I pray that you would send into my life those 
who can help me, or places where I can find accurate 
Information about You. Please preserve me and help 
me grow so that I can be entirely committed to you. I n 
the name of Jesus, Amen. 



Here are some verses in the Bible that demonstrate 
that God responds to those who are committed with 
their whole heart. 



(Psa 9:1 KJV) To the chief Musician upon Muthlabben, 
A Psalm of David. I will praise thee, O LORD with my 
whole heart; I will show forth all thy marvellous works. 

(Psa 111:1 KJV) Praise ye the LORD. I will praise the 
LORD with my whole heart, in the assembly of the 
upright, and in the congregation. 
(Psa 1 19:2 KJV) Blessed are they that keep his 
testimonies, and that seek him with my whole heart. 

(Psa 119:10 KJV) With my whole heart have I sought 
thee: O let me not wander from thy commandments. 

(Psa 1 19:34 KJV) Give me understanding, and I shall 
keep thy law; yea, I shall observe with my whole heart. 

(Psa 1 19:58 KJV) I entreated thy favour with my whole 
heart: be merciful unto me according to thy word. 



(Psa 1 19:69 KJV) The proud have forged a lie against 
me: but I will keep thy precepts with my whole heart. 

(Psa 119:145 KJV) KOPH. I cried with my whole heart; 
hear me, O LORD: I will keep thy statutes. 

(Psa 138:1 KJV) A Psalm of David. I will praise thee 
with my whole heart: before the gods will I sing praise 
unto thee. 

(Isa 1 :5 KJV) Why should ye be stricken any more? ye 
will revolt more and more: the whole head is sick, and 
the whole heart faint. 

(Jer 3:10 KJV) And yet for all this her treacherous 
sister Judah hath not turned unto me with her whole 
heart, but feignedly, saith the LORD. 

(Jer 24:7 KJV) And I will give them an heart to know 
me, that I am the LORD: and they shall be my people, 
and I will be their God: for they shall return unto me 
with their whole heart. 

(Jer 32:41 KJV) Yea, I will rejoice over them to do 
them good, and I will plant them in this land assuredly 
with my whole heart and with my whole soul. 



I Peter 3:15 But sanctify the Lord God in your hearts: 
and be ready always to give an answer to every man 
that asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you with 
meekness and fear: 



II Timothy 2: 15 Study to show thyself approved unto 
God, a workman that needeth not to be ashamed, 
rightly dividing the word of truth. 



Christian Conversions - According to the Bible - 
Can NEVER be forced. 

Any Conversion to Christianity which would be 
"Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in 
His True and KIND nature, that those who come to 

Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to 
Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL. 



Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support 
Forced Conversions. 

That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced. 



Co re Universal Rights 

The right to believe, to worship and witness 

The right to change one's belief or religion 

The right to join together and express one's 
belief 



PROPHECY, THE END of DAYS, and the WORLD 
the Next Few Years. 



What you may need to know 



There is much talk these days in the Islamic world 
about the Time of Jacob, also known as the End 
Times or the End of Days'. 

The records of Christianity and the records of Islam 
both seem to speak about the End Times. But the 
records of the Old and New Testaments have a record 
in the area of prophecy of events that are predicted to 
occur hundreds of years before they happen, and that 
record is 100% accurate. 

According to Christianity, in order for a prophet or a 
writer or an author to truly be a prophet of God, that 
individual must be 1 00% correct 1 00% of the time. 

This Standard is applied to the Old and New 
Testaments (the Bible), and the verdict is that the Bible 
is 1 00% accurate, 1 00% of the time. History and 
Archeology confirms this, for those with the patience 
And courage to seek truth and accuracy. 

What has been done sometimes in the name of 
Christianity, is not always good. But true Christians 
and Christian examples remain strong, solid and 
encouraging. True Christians have nothing to regret 



nor be ashamed of. Offereing help to others is not 
wrong. 



There are many perspectives on the return of Jesus 
Christ. The New Testaments seems to predict the 
return of Two Messiahs BOTH of whom both claim to 
be Jesus Christ. 

The first Messiah who returns to help those who 
believe in Him actually does not come to Earth. His 
feet do NOT touch Jerusalem at that point in time. 
That first Messiah calls his followers (Christ-followers) 
to Him, and they are caught up or meet Jesus Christ in 
the air, where their time with God starts at that 
moment. 



The second Messiah is the one who announces that 
"He" is the one who has returned to Earth to establish 
His Kingdom. He establishes a Temple in the location 
of the Dome of the Rock [Temple Mount] in Jerusalem, 
also re-institutes the jewish sacrifices of the Old 
Testament, and proclaims that He is going to rule on 
Earth. Only this Messiah who will call himself "Christ" 
will be a false Messiah, in other words the False 
Christ, the Wrong Christ. 



During this time, Christians believe that they are to 
continue to be kind to their friends and neighbors, 
whether those neighbors and friends are Christians or 
Moslems or Hindus or anything else. This remains true 
in the End Times. 



In the End Times according to Christianity, Christians 
are mostly the observers of the greatness of God, 
explaining to those who want to know, what is taking 
place in the world and why these things are 
happening. 

In every generation of humans, there are many who 
claim that they WANT to live in a world without God. 
For that reason, God is going to give them what they 
want. Those people will have 1) a world without God, 
but where 2) a false Messiah arrives claiming to be 
Christ, and only an understanding of accurate 
Christianity will be able to help and show those people 
how to have Eternal Life. 

The false Messiah comes onto the world stage and 
exercises power and dominion [over the entire world], 
ruling from the geographic location of the Ancient 
Roman Empire. 

The false Messiah (obviously) denies that he is false, 
and institutes a system of global economic domination 
of a global economic system of money. 

That money is a "symbolic" currency. As Christians 
today understand this, the currency of the False 
messiah is not based on Gold or Silver. 

The currency that the False messiah establishes is 
"cashless". It does not require paper currency. In fact, 
the new currency will be global, and it is expected to 
be cashless, without actual currency. 



But it will be based on banking principles in the West, 
and this False Messiah will cause those who are 
jewish to believe that their Messiah has returned. Like 
much of the rest of the world, many will be deceived by 
the False Messiah who will accomplish many miracles 
and will institute his system of global economic 
domination. 

The False Messiah will cause that the entire world and 
governmental structure will cause the implementation 
of his false economic system of currency. 

That economic system is a system of global 
dominance and global slavery. The global bankers will 
endorse this plan, believing that they will reap even 
greater profits than they currently do based on their 
system of unjust usury. 

This global currency will depend on computers to 
work, and computers will be used to keep records of 
all economic transactions all over the world. This will 
be a closed economic system, one that can only be 
used by those who have accepted the false currency 
of the False Messiah. 

The False Messiah will cause each person to be 
obligated to accept to use the new currency, and each 
individual will be required to give homage, or attention, 
or reverence or adoration or some kind of worship, or 
allegiance or loyalty to the false messiah, in order to 
be able to use the new cashless currency. 

The new cashless currency will have one feature that 
those "who have wisdom" will recognize: the new 



cashless system in order to be used will require each 
human to have a particular mark or "identifier" or 
system of individual identification for each and every 
single separate person on the planet. 

That may seem impossible. But even now, there are 
millions and billions of computer records that are kept 
on the populations of all nations that are already using 
modern banking. Therefore it is not difficult to 
understand that keeping track of 7 billion humans 
around the world is not anything that is difficult, even 
at this moment. 

This system may seem impossible to establish 
especially for those not familiar with the details of 
power inside the European Union or the West. But 
then if all of this is only fiction, then it should not harm 
anyone to read this, and then prove many years from 
now that all of these concerns were false. 



The new cashless system will incorporate a number 
within itself, as part of its numbering system. That 
number has been identified and predicted for two 
thousand years: it is the number "six hundred and sixty 
six" or 666. 

That may seem impossible, but actually this number is 
already used as a primary tracking number within the 
computer inventory systems of the world, long before 
you have read these few pages. 

The number is already incorporated in almost all 
goods and products that are sold around the world: the 



number is within something called the Bar Code that 
can be found on all products for sale around the world. 

Please remember that in order for all of this to be 
significant, it must be part of an economic system that 
requires each human to receive or accept their own 
numbering on their right hand or their forehead. The 
mark could be visible, but it is likely to be invisible to 
the eyes, but visible to machines, scanners and 
computers. 

This bar code has a formal name: it is called the UPC 
or Universal Product Code. 

An individual UPC number is assigned to each 
physical product that is sold on this planet. The UPC 
or Universal Product Code already does incorporate 
that number 666 in all products. 

The lines [vertical lines] and the spacing between 
them, and the lines themselves, their own symetry 
determine the numbers and how those lines [the UPC 
bar code] are read or scanned by the computers used 
today. 

The UPC has 666 built within it, and it is simply the two 
long lines on the left of the bar code, the two long lines 
on the right of the bar code, and the two long lines in 
the middle of the bar code. The two long lines on the 
left are read by computers and scanners as the 
number "six" [ 6 ], and so are the two long lines in the 
middle and the right side. Together, they form a part of 
the bar code that in fact is 6 - 6 - 6 or six hundred and 
sixty six. 



Well it will not take long for some to dispute this. Even 
some theologians have taken to dispute the disclosure 
of the number 666, suggesting instead that the correct 
number to watch for prophetically is not 666 but 61 6. 

That is simply foolishness and a distraction. When this 
economic system is implemented, one of the signs that 
will accompany this will be the leaders of all faiths and 
all religions who will falsely state that there is no 
problem and no risk in accepting the mark of the slave, 
the mark of those who accept to worship the False 
Messiah. 

These events were discussed a long time ago in the 
Old Testament book of Daniel, and in the Final and 
last book of the New Testament which is also called 
the Revelation of the Apostle Saint John, or simply 
"Revelation". 

The Apostle John was the last living apostle of Jesus 
Christ. He lived until around the year 95 A. D. and he is 
the one who taught the early church and the early 
Christians which books of the Bible were written by his 
fellow Apostles (and remember he wrote five books of 
the New Testament himself, the gospel of John, the 
small Epistles of 1 John, 2 John and 3 John, and the 
book of Revelation), and could be used and trusted. 



The early Christians knew which books were to be 
included in the Bible and which books were not. 



] : 



: [ 



A modern book has explained much of this. It was 
simply called "Jesus is coming" and was written by 
W. E. B Blackstone. 

It is easy to dismiss Christians as zionists. (Not all 
Christians are zionists in anycase). [ and obviously, 
being pro-jewish is NOT the same thing as being in 
favor of the official government of israel. And one can 
be a Christian and desire good for both Jews and 
Arabs]. But Christian Zionists are not perceived friends 
of the jews when they are warning the Jews, even 
about their Jewish state, that the Messiah who comes 
to tell them that he is their Messiah, will be the False 
Messiah. 

The Ancient Book of Daniel is in the Old Testament. It 
must be read alongside the New Testament book of 
Revelation, in order to give understanding to those 
who want to understand prophecy and the events 
predicted in the End Times or the End of this Age. 

Christians understand that God is the one who is God, 
and He brings about the End Times because the 
planet does not belong to itself. The planet does not 
belong to Humans, or to the false [demonic] beings 
who pretend to come from other planets. 

The planet belongs to God and He is the one who 
causes everyone rich and poor, to understand through 
the events in the End of Days, that God is serious 
about being God, and humans do not have much time 
to get their own life in order, and to give an account to 
God who is going to return and require that account of 
each Human, on a personal and individual basis. 



That task is so impossible to understand that all that 
humans can do is understand and come to God, with 
the understanding that God may or may not require 
their sacrifice, but He does require those who seek 
Him to read and understand and follow the words and 
doctrines of Jesus Christ as explained in the New 
Testament. [The Gospel of John is a good place to 
start]. 

All those who have come before can do, is leave a few 
things around, for those who will be left to try to 
understand these events in a very short period of time. 

The literal understanding of the Times of the End is 
that they will last seven years, and that much of 
humanity will perish during that time through a variety 
of catastrophes and disasters, all of which God refuses 
to stop for a planet that has been saying that they do 
not need Him anymore. 

If they do not need Him, then they should not complain 
when these events occur. If they Do need God, then 
they should be honest enough to admit this, try to find 
God, pray to find God and that they will not be 
deceived and that God would help them to find Him. 

The economic system that requires a mark may have 
a different formulation for the number 666. It may stay 
the same as it is now, or it may change. But at this 
current time, no one is [yet] required to have this mark 
personally on their mark or forehead, though if the 
dollar dies or is replaced by a new currency, the new 
currency may be the one that is either an interim 



currency, or the new currency of the mark, to be used 
only by those who accepted to be marked 
[electronically branded], so they can then use their 
mark along with the mark of the new economic 
system. 

A "beast" is a monster, but one that at the same time is 

usually both 1 ) ferocious and \ 

2) evil in addition to being overpowering and strong. 

The new economic system will be ferocious and 
overpowering. It will be directed by the False Messiah 
and the Beast. (There are 3 Evil guys described in the 
book of Revelation). The economic system using the 
mark, becomes the "mark of the beast", because of 
two factors: 

1) the one who runs and directs the system is a beast 
who is ruled by Evil and by Satan 

2) the economic system of the mark of the beast takes 
on those characteristics of the beast also. 

[the system for those who refuse to go along will not 
be kind nor tolerant, but more likely a combination of 
the worst of the roman empire, the worst of stalinist 
soviet communist USSR, and the worst of the the time 
under Hitler.] 

It will be impossible to buy anything without the mark 
of the beast. Most likely, it may start out as optional 
and quickly become mandatory. As soon as the 
economic mark will be made mandatory, itwill become 
a crime of life or death to try to conduct economic 
transactions without the official government 



permission, from the millions and millions of people 
who have foolishly already decided to consent to 
accept the mark. It will also be a capital crime to help 
or assist anyone who would refuse to accept the mark. 
Therefore the system of the beast will prevent 
neutrality: it will prevent people from having the choice 
of being able to "not make a choice". For that reason, 
all humans will chose, and then God will classify each 
person according to the choice that they have made, 
that choice having Eternal consequences. 

You can be assured that there will be billion dollar 
contracts by public relations firms to convince you that 
accepting your individual mark on your right hand or 
forehead will help you, will save civilization, will help 
mother earth, will help us all work collectively, will 
allow to work, and oh yes, would allow you, 
incidentally to be able to buy food to eat. 

The book of Revelation says those who accept the 
mark undergo a "deception", the implication being that 
those who accept the mark are spiritually deceived into 
acceptance of the upside-down universe: where evil is 
viewed as good, and good is viewed as evil. 
At that point, the new Messiah would be perceived as 
real and genuine by those who have accepted the 
mark, until later on when they will realize that they 
have been deceived, but at that point it will be 
impossible for them to change their mind or their 
commitment to the false Messiah, and this would have 
Eternal Consequences for them. The time to decide 
therefore is before that time. Now would probably be a 
good time, in case these things matter to you, who are 
reading this. 



Didyoujustlaugh ? 

Those sillly bar codes... 

That was pretty funny ... 

But seriously... What does your laughter tell you about yourself ? 

Does it tell you that the idea of tracking you is so strange, 
that you have really never thought about it before ? 

Do you think that other people may have thought about it, 
even though you might not ? 

England has more than 2 Million cameras right now. 

Do they track everything because all things are a strong danger ? 

Or. . .do the cameras track people. . just in case ? 

So what do you think would happen if someone 

could track you 1) 100% of the time 2) with 100% certainty 

3) with 100% accuracy 4 ) with 100% of all that you do ? 

If Tracking with a mark on your right-hand or forehead 
becomes mandatory by law, and it will be a crime to not 
have that mark, and it will also be impossible to buy or 
sell without it, do you know how you would respond ? 

What would you do if your eternal destiny largely depended 
on your answer to this question ? 

If you are still here when these questions are valid, you 
should know your eternal destiny (after death. . .for eternity) 
does depend on your answer. 



Satan-worship on a Planetary Scale: When ? 




The Characteristics of the First Beast 
How Ali humans will be the ones Deceived and 

actually ALL Humans [with one exception] Worship the Beast 



The Power of the Beasi comes from Satan 



Satan 



Revelation 13:1 
2 And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard, 
and his feet were as the feet of a bear, 

and his mouth as the mouth of a lion: and the dragon gave him 

his power, and his seat, and great authority. 



Oops: Satan-worship is not a good idea 



Revelation 13: 

4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power 
unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, 

saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him? 



Revelation 13: The Beast 

6 And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God.jd blaspheme 
his name, and his tabernacle, and them thatdwell in,>reaven. 

7 And it was given unto him to make war with the#aints, and 
to overcome them: and power was given him ** 

over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations. 



5 minutes of Information to change 
vourEtemal destination ? 



Revelation 13: 



The Beast 



8 And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship himfr 

whoseriames are not written 

in tbe book of life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world. 



Evefy single human worships the beast, infesstheir individual name is written in God's book of life 



Revelation 13: 

9 If any man have an ear, let him hear. 



IttzkBsaspecialirdsrslancfrglDLrd&stardwhBtisbeirgsaid. 



Note: The First Beast is the Anti-C hrist 



666 and YOUR taking the Mark || Q QQ ^ Q f Revelation 



The C haracteristics of the Second Beast and 666 



rhe False Prophet 



Revelation 13: ▼ 

13:11 And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth 

and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon. 



Revelation 13J 



False Prophet 



The AntiChrist 



1 2 And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, 
and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship 
the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed. 




Revelation 13: 

13 And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down 

from heaveSvon the earth in the sight of men, 



^ 



Revelation 13:14 And dfeeeiveth them that dwell on the earth by 
the means of those miracIeVvuhich heJjad power to do in the sight 
of the beast; saying to them thaSoIwerism the earth, that they should 
make an image to the beast, which nBdtne wound by a sword, 
and did live. 




Revelation 13:15 And he had power t^give life unto the image 
of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, 
and cause that as many as would/fot worship the image of the beast 
should be killed. 



Image of the beast may bea R obotor Computer image,or a hologram, Butit 
isanerip'tvthrouori which the Beast [Antj-C hristl exterids power overmankind 



Revelation 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, 
rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark 
in their right hand , or in their foreheads : 

1 7 And that no man might buy or sell, save [except] he that had the mark, 
or the name of the beast, or the number of his name. 



"Man" = Mankind, menAND women 



Revelation 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding 
count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; 

and his number is Six hundred threescore and six. [GGvj 



The Book of Revelation needs to 

understanding on E 



c alono with the O.T. Book of Daniel in order to make sense. r or 
n R-ive 5:inn m the bu: T-s "woEicylorisbyH ;l:p 



What is the "Book of Life" ? Is YOUR name in it ? 



(Phil 4:3 KJV) [Saint Paul Knewofthe Book of Life:] And I entreat [ask] thee also, 
true yokefellow, [fellow-worker] help those women which laboured 
with me in the gospel, with Clement also, and with other my 
fellow labourers, whose names are in the boc 



(Rev 3:5 KJV) He that overcometh, the same shall be clothed in 

white raiment; and I will not blot out his name out of the book of Mfe, 

but I will confess his name before my Father, and before his angels. 

(Rev 13:8 KJV) And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship him* 
whose names are not written in the book of Mfe of the Lamb slain 
from the foundation of the world. 

(Rev 17:8 KJV) The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; 
and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: 
and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder^zz 



whose names were not written in the book of Mfe 

of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and i 



and the books were opened: and another book was opened, 
which is the book of I ife: and the dead were judged out of those things 
which were written in the books, according to their works. 



(Rev 20:15 KJV) And whosoever was not found written in the 
book of Mfe was cast into the lake of fire. 



(Rev 21 :27 KJV) And there shall in no wise enter into it any thing 
defileth, neither whatsoever worketh abomination. or maketh a lie: 
but they which are written in the Lamb's book of Mfe 



(Rev 22: 19 KJV) And if any man shall take away from the words 

of the book of this prophecy, God shall take away his part 
out of the book of I ife, and out of the holy city, and from the things 

Which are Written in thiS bOOk. ™ S w.rnlr<,lnRe,!2:19refer S toln!lU mi orTran ! J.tDni«l» [ )vi»,Bme»Dr«oriheBDIe 
Note:The Lamb slain f:o" jj ; I Fthe i ■ i is I esus Christ lesus Christwas the pre-existen: C-eator of the L.r.ive f se (lohn II 



God claims that He knows each of our hearts. God 
also claims to know everything about us, all of our 
accomplishments and all of our sins also. But God 
sends Jesus Christ to save us through His words in 
the New Testament. Those who ignore them take a 
heavy risk to themselves, especially where this risk is 
one of Eternity. 

As the saying goes, Eternity is a long time to be 
wrong. For that reason, it is important to understand 
who Jesus Christ truly is and who He actually claimed 
to be. 

Here is where all of this connects back to the End of 
Days: Those who accept to take and participate in the 
economic system that incorporates the use of the 
number "six hundred and sixty six" on their right-hand 
or their forehead forfeit [give u p] their opportunity for 
Eternal Life and Heaven, and Eternity with God. 

According to the Bible, Satan is not some clever guy 
meant to give people just " a little bit of harmless fun". 
Satan is not your budy. Satan is not your friend, simply 
out to help you have a "good time". 

Satan is a real being, who is one of the most powerful 
and intelligent beings ever created. 

He used to be an Angel, but turned against God. 
Satan is the one who will be in charge of the planet 
during the time of the false Messiah. 



This is Standard historic Christian doctrine, and this is 
the doctrines that have been proclaimed since the 
Early Christians. These are NOT innovations, these 
are not anything new. [sources - Free - provided at the 
of this for those who want to know more in PDF 
Download] 

You may ask: Well, what does this have to do with the 
End of Days and the Economic System ? 

God wants people to worship him Freely, but if they 
want to oppose God, God will allow them to make that 
choice. But making a choice, is not the same thing as 
being able to chose the consequences of that choice. 

There is no one in Christianity who will convince 
anyone against their Will to worship God. God tells 
each person they are responsible. From that point on, 
the burden is on them, they can respond to God or not, 
and their own response determines their own fate and 
consequences, especially for Eternity. 

The nature of a God is that He makes the rules and is 
not required to explain anything to anyone. However 
because God loves each person and wants them to 
chose Him (and not chose to follow Satan), God wrote 
roughly 1500 pages of material in the Old and New 
Testament (the Bible) to help people make their own 
choice. 

The specific characteristic of accepting to use the 
Economic [most likely cashless] system is that those 
humans who use it must agree to accept the False 
messiah as their own savior. 



The Bible refers to this as worship. Let us not loose 
track of definitions: It does not matter whether the 
person will admit this or not. Worship consists of doing 
the actions that a deity, such as God, would 
understand worship to be. 

God says that those who accept to take the economic 
mark in their right-hand or their forehead will forfeit 
their Life with Him, and will never be able to be saved. 

From that point on, those who have accepted to use 
the economic system by the mark on their right hand 
or forehead have declared themselves - by their action 
- to be the enemy of God. 

But God is the one who deals with those who are His 
enemies. The presumption is also that those who have 
agreed to accept the new economic cashless system 
which uses the mark have undergone an internal 
change. By their action, they have agreed to be under 
the dominion of evil (just like those who accepted 
Sauron in the Lord of the Rings) and this new 
allegiance to the False Messiah, His economic system 
of the mark, and the acceptance of the ruler of the 
False Messiah who will accomplish many false 
miracles (through the power of the fallen angel Satan) 
has consequences: it will change the person who 
takes this mark, even while they will deny that inner 
transformation to the willing acceptance of evil has 
taken place. 

In anycase, it will not be enough to reject the Mark. 
People who decide to reject the mark, and there will be 



millions, are hardly okay or alright. They will have very 
little time to actually decide and accept to believe the 
words of Jesus Christ in the New Testament. if they 
can find New Testaments that are accurate. 

The New Testament that is accurate is that which has 
been used by the Historic Christian Church for 
thousands of years. If it was good enough for the 
Earlier Christians, it remains good enough today. 

This would be the New Testaments that are based on 
the received text of the Koine Greek New Testament. 
This would include the Scrivener Version of 1860 [FH A 
Scrivener] [do not use versions of his, published after 
his death], and the Standard Koine Greek version of 
the New Testament published by Cura. P. Wilson, 
such as the version of 1833. 

These two Ancient Koine Greek Testaments are based 
on the {western calendar} 1550-51 greek textof 
Robert Estienne, sometimes called Stephens or 
Stephanus. 

The False Messiah in the New Testament has another 
name. He is not the true Christ, therefore by falsely 
claiming to be the true one, he reveals himself to be 
the AntiChrist. But rem ember at that point in time 
where He rules, he will not be officially claiming to be 
evil. On the contrary, he will claim to be the true 
Messiah of love, miracles and peace. 

These facts then are what missionaries may share. 
Missionaries do not work for any government of the 
West, as this is prohibited and illegal in the West. 



[Missionaries in Islam often ARE funded by their own 
islamic republic]. 

Christian Missionaries have only one goal which is to 
inform and acquaint you with facts that you may find 
interesting and that may save your Eternal life for you 
and your family. 

Listening to any missionary will not make you a 
Christian. Missionaries are ordinary people. They have 
decided that they will try to help others by presenting 
truth and kindness to others. Those who hear what 
they have to say are free to accept or reject what they 
say. That is all. 

Missionaries are usually very educated and devote 
much time (often many years) to learning about other 
people and about other cultures. They do not try to do 
this in order to gain their Eternal Life. By definition, 
Christians already have accepted and received 
Eternal Life. 

Christians do not need to worry about Salvation by 
doing good works. For the true Christian, there is no 
relationship between good works and obtaining 
salvation. Salvation for each individual on the planet is 
Free, Christians are those who have understood and 
accepted to believe this. They already possess this 
from the instant that they become Christians and 
accept the words of Jesus in the New Testament. 

Missionaries do NOT earn their way to heaven by 
saving or converting other people. 



Missionaries agree to share the good news of 
Christianity, because of the individual and personal 
good that this same message has accomplished for 
them, on the inside of who they are. Missionaries risk 
a lot to communicate the Love of God to others. Most 
people cannot even understand this. Many people 
today have lives that are without hope and without 
purpose. Millions are aimless and without goals on the 
larger scale. But Christians will risk much to share the 
gospel with others, because that is what God 
commands them to do and wants them to do. 

In England the challenge is not that people are 
ignorant of how to be saved and have Eternal life. 
Many are, but the challenge is for those who have 
already heard this to understand that this is really true, 
genuinely accurate. It is easy to hide doubts behind 
the walls of the propaganda that is falsely called 
"science" these days. 

People think they must not admit to being religious, 
since this might not be "sophisticated". But God is the 
most sophisticated one of all. As the saying goes: He 
is no fool to give up that which cannot keep, in 
order to gain that which he cannot loose [referring 
to Eternal Life offered by God through Christ]. 

As they will admit, Missionaries are sinners also. If you 
do not believe this, ask them. Then ask them what 
they have done about their own sins, and listen to their 
answers. Missionaries do not claim to be better than 
others. They only claim that the mercy of God that has 



been given to them, can be given to everyone else 
also. 

Missionaries could be anywhere else in the world. 
They may not have to come to your area of the planet. 
But if God sends them there, maybe you should thank 
God that he cares enough to send those who risk 
hardship and difficulty for being brave enough to try to 
obey God and give you information that may save your 
Eternal life. 

Most missionaries have given up a life of comfort and 
riches that they could have had in their own nations. 
They have made this choice to try to show the love of 
God to others. This example is worthy of kindness and 
respect. 

Christians usually are there to help, or to establish 
schools or hospitals. Christians do not do these things 
in order to earn or merit their eternal life. They do 
these things as a result of being transformed and 
changed for the betterment [amelioration] of others, by 
God 

Christians are not a witness to themselves, but to the 
God that they serve. Those who worship a mean and 
cruel God will become mean and cruel. Those who 
worship a God of love and help and mercy and 
kindness will demonstrate love, help, mercy and 
kindness to others. People become like the God they 
serve. 

Some people say that if a person has harmed a 
Christian, that they cannot become a Christian. But 



that is NOT true. Saint Paul, even before he became a 
Christian persecuted Christians. Then God showed 
Him how Paul was acting against God. Paul became a 
Christian. 

Jesus Christ came to save everyone including 
murderers and prostitutes. No one is holy enough to 
be allowed into Heaven with any sins or imperfection 
in their life. God is too Holy to allow this. God can 
regenerate and change anyone if they are sincere 
when they repent, and if they are seeking God with all 
of their heart. Read it for yourself in the New 
Testament gospel of John. 

There is no need to be afraid, or to allow fear to be in 
control. Christianity teaches a life of inner peace, not 
a life ruled by fear. 

No one in true Christianity will ever convert you by 
force, since that would be disrespectful to God, and an 
infringement upon His dominion. There are many 
people in religions that are very rich because they try 
to censor and keep information from reaching those 
who would benefit most by it. 

Many of those same people are rich, and do not want 
their positions to be affected. They would rule by fear 
and the threat of force and violence. Humans who try 
these methods bring greatcurses upon themselves. 
Ouestions that have been raised legitimately require 
answers. The events which have been predicted will 
occur. They cannot be stopped by humans (though 
they may be delayed by prayer). 



There are some books listed along with this New 
Testament. We would urge you to consider them so 
that you may find the answers you are seeking: 



Historic Mainstream Books that may be of use: 

Jesus is Corning by W. E. B. Blackstone 

available online for Free [PDF] at www.archive.org 

How to study the Bible by R.A. Torrey 
available online for Free [PDF] 

The Canon of the Old and New Testaments by 
Archibald Alexander - available online for Free [PDF] 

Pilgrim's Progress - An explanation of the life as a 
Christian, in narrative. Very good, Other language 
versions are known to exist in French, German ; Dutch, 
Arabic, and Chinese. Available online for Free Pdf and 
maybe from Google Books. 

an explanation of the number 666 = " Recapitulated 
apostasy the true rationale of the concealed" name of 
the Roman empire by George Stanley Faber - best for 
those Christians and/or for those who know English 

language well Available for Free online at Archive.org or with 
Google books 

Versions of the Bible that are sound and accurate 
include: 

Ethiopic New Testament - 1 857 

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 



Italian Diodati Edition - Original 

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books 

Spanish - 1 602 Reina Valera Edition - Original 

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books 



The Arabic Bible - 1869 Cornelius Van Dyke [We 
recommend the original editions of 1 867 and 1 869 
only] - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 



Sanskrit / Sanscrit Bible - Yes, Sanskrit is still used 
today in India. The Sanscrit 3dition that is accurate is 
the version by Wenger. Available forFree online [PDF] atArchive.org 
or with Uoogle books 



Tamil - (Tamou) 
Edition of 1859 (India) 



Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 

Karen - The Karen New Testament (Sgau Karen) 

Available for Free o iline [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 

Burmese - Myanmar - Burma - New Testament 
avaiiabie. Edition of i 650. 

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 

Hindi - The New Testament in Hindi, also called 
Hindustani. Editions preferable before 1881 . 

Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 

Le Nouveau Testament - Ostervald - 1 868-72 
(be cautious as many Ostervald and David Martin 
versions in French have been altered). The french 



version of Louis Segond is popular but is actually 
based on the text of Westcott and Hort. 

Accurate Osterval version available for Free online at Archive.org or 
with Google books 

Hungarian Bible - 1 692 - Original 

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books 

The Persian New Testament - 1 837 version of Henry 
Martyn - Available for Free online [PDF] atArchive.org or with Google books 

Ali the Messianic Prophecies of the Bible by Lockyer. 

The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by C. Cumbey. 

The Case for Christ - Strobel 



Eines Christen reise nach der seligen ewigkeit : 
welche in unterschiedlichen artigen sinnbildern, den 
gantzen zustand einer bussfertigen und 
gottsuchenden seele vorstellet in englischer sprache 
beschrieben durch Johann Bunjan, lehrer in Betford, 
um seiner furtrefflichkeit willen in die hochteutsche 
sprache ubersetzt 



Le voyage du Chretien vers l'eternite bienheureuse : 
ou l'on voit representes, sous diverses images, les 
differents etats, les progres et l'heureuse fin d'une ame 
Chretienne qui cherche dieu en Jesus-Christ 



Auteur(s) : Bunyan, John (1 628-1 688). Auteur du 
texte 

Le pelerinage d'un nomme Chretien - ecrit sous 
l'allegorie d'un songe / [par John Bunyan] ; trad. de 
l'anglais avec une pref. [par Robert Estienne] 

Available for Free online at Archive.org or with Google books 

Baxter, Richard Title Die ewige Ruhe der Heiligen. 
Dargestellt von Richard Baxter. 



Pilgerreise zur seligen Ewigkeit. Von Johann Bunyan. 
Aus dem Englischen neu ubersetzt 



Der himlische Wandersmann : oder Eine 
Beschreibung vom Menschen der in Himmel kommt: 
Sammt dem Wege darin er wandelt, den Zeichen und 
der Spure da er durchgehet, und einige Anweisungen 
wie man laufen soli das Kleinod zu ergreifen / 
Beschrieben in Englischer Sprache durch Johannes 
Bunyan. 



II pellegrinaggio del cristiano / tradotto da.ll' inglese di 
John Bunyan dai Stanislao Bianciardi 
Firenze : Tipografia e. Libr. Claudiana 



Author Bunyan, John, 1 628-1 688 

Title Tian lu li cheng 

[China] : Mei yi mei zong hui, 1857 



El viador, bajo del simil de un sueno por Juan Bunyan 



"Everyone has the right to freedom of 

thought, conscience and religion; this right 

includes freedom to change his religion or 

belief, and freedom, either alone or in 

community with others and in public or 

private, to manifest his religion or belief in 

teaching, practice, worship and observance." 

- Article 18 of the U. N. Universal 
Declaration of Human Rights - 



Christian Conversions - According to the Bible 
Can NEVER be forced. 



Any Conversion to Christianity which would be 
"Forced" would NOT be recognized by God. It is in 
His True and KIND nature, that those who come to 

Him and choose to believe in Him, must come to 
Him OF THEIR OWN FREE WILL. 



Don't Let anyone tell you that Christians support 
Forced Conversions. 

That is False. True Christianity is NEVER forced. 



Co re Universal Rights 

The right to believe, to worship and witness 

The right to change one's belief or religion 

The right to join together and express one's 
belief 



The subject of the End Times in the west is called Biblical 
Prophecy. For more information on this topic, feel free to consult 
the Standard books on this including: The Late Great Planet Earth 
(Lindsey), and the Charts of Clarence Larkin may give someone a 
quick overview. Things to come by Dwight Pentecost is interesting 
though technical. Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Cumbey will 
offer a quick read to those who are able to obtain a rare copy. The 
Christian in Complete Armor by Gurnall [Free Online] will offer a 
source of spiritual strength to those who have the courage and 
wisdom to read it. 

Some of Larkin's Material is available for Free online. 



Remedv and Help for Occult & Demonic Forces 



We include this short section for those who would like to 
take immediate action, in order to help their life or the life 
of someone that they care about. 

The following covers a topic called the topic of "disembodied 
spirits" or the topic of Spirits in the world around us. 

Christianity teaches that there are 1) spiritual forces that are 
created by Him, and that work with God, and 2) that there are 
spiritual forces that rebelled against God, and try to use their 
influence to harm the good that God accomplishes. 

Christianity does NOT recognize that there are neutral 
spiritual forces. Christianity does not recognize that there are 
spirits thatroam the earth with no destination or purpose. 
Christianity teaches that spiritual forces may attempt to 
contact or respond those who seek them, and that those forces 
are evil and will do harm to humans. 

The reason is that Humans can be deceived by spiritual forces 
that would claim to be good, but are not. The Christian 
solution is to simply have nothing to do with forces that are 
not part of the Kingdom of God and of Jesus Christ. 

Those who disagree have the right to chose, but should not 
complain if they find out that the spiritual forces they contact 
truly are evil and deceive them. Most people do NOT find this 
out for many years, until their life is wasted and it is too late to 
do much for God. THAT is exactly the purpose of those 
forces, to cause humans to spend their life and their time 
chasing things which do not matter instead of investing in 
their own spiritual future, in the afterlife. 



Some people think that life is to be lived on Earth, while 
others understand that life here is simply a down-payment. 
Life here is simply time to prepare for the next thousands of 
years, with God and others who serve Him. 

Christianity does NOT recognize the category of spiritual 
entities (spirits) that are full of Mischief, or mischievous. 

Christianity would conclude that those spirits, where they 
actually exist, are causing mischief as a trick to prompt 
humans to become involved with them, in the same manner 
as a human will puli a piece of string in front of a CAT in 
order to watch the cat react. 

There are humans who have ALREAD Y found out that certain 
spiritual forces are Evil. These people have tried to get rid of 
them but do not know how. There is no solution thatexists 
other than to genuinely become a Christian and then take the 
steps that the Bible instructs. 

Incantations and rituals do not "force" any spiritual entity to 
do anything. No ritual by a priest was ever effective 
BECAUSE it was a ritual, or because it contained certain 
words. However, spirits DO respond to those who are truly 
Chrsitians, and THEY can certainly tell those who are 
genuinely Christians (followers of the true Jesus Christ), and 
those who are faking this or are insincere. It is a BAD idea to 
attempt to fool or deceive a Demon. THAT does not work, 
AND humans who try this only end up with much 
ensnarement by those demonic forces. 

There are solutions to these dilemmas. None of them will 
work for those who are not saved or for those who are NOT 
Christian. Try it if you want, but be prepared for the 
consequences. 



Demonic Spirits play by the rules that GOD lays down and 
NOT by the rules that you may have been mis-led into 
believing by some slick occult publishing company. 

Witches have precious little power in fact, and the few that do 
are under such oppression and such personal bondage that they 
have no freedom, but they will not speak this truth to others. 

The price of their freedom (they have been told) is the 
ensnarement or seduction of others. The following prayers are 
provided in case they are of assistance. Those who use them 
must be true Christians, and recognized by God as such. 

Having said that, spiritual warfare and spiritual conflict (since 
this IS that area: the conflict in spiritual realms between 
spiritual forces) is very much like running or any other long 
distance task: it is long term preparation that makes the 
difference. 

A new Christian is NOT to be dealing with demonic forces, 
and would be well advised to seek advice from those who 
are serious, sober, and committed genuine Christians for many 
years, before dealing with these areas. 



Many books have been written on this topic. Many of them are 
written by those who are occultists who are possessed and 
seeking to mislead others. We will recommend OTHER 
Christian books at the end of this section for those who wish 
to pursue these matters with the seriousness they deserve. 
Most of the books available in these areas for Christians are 
written in English or German. 

Also, it may not be enough to pray these prayers once. It may 
take much time to have the impact desired. In order to have 
personal victory in these areas over demonic spirits: 

1) One must be a Genuine Christian 



2) One must seek to actively follow God 

3) One must spend much TIME reading the Bible, and 

4) One must spend much TIME praying and learning HOW 
to pray to God in the name of Jesus Christ, in accordance 
(agreement) with the information and principles explained 
in the New Testament. 



prayer of renunciation of Demonic Forces 

Prayer to renounce witchcraft and/or any spiritual 
practice contrary to God and His given instructions 



{Whether you have decided to become a Christian 20 years 
ago or five minutes ago, you can still pray this prayer. If you 
are not a Christian believer, or if you are confused about what 
this means, no problem. Just go to the section on how to 
become a Christian, pray that prayer, and then come back and 
pray this one} 

Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I 
should Lord, I find this prayer difficult and I pray that you 
would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to 
pray it and mean it. 

Lord, I come to you because I am a true Christian believer, I 

(your name here) , being under the Blood of Jesus, 

claiming the Mind of Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby 
present my request to you boldly before your Throne of Grace 
(Ephesians 2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-1 1). I ask 
that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil 
presence from acting that might try to keep me from praying 
this prayer, in the name of Jesus and in the power of your 
blood. I pray that you would give me your spiritual strength 
and your spiritual protection. I thank you for what you did for 
me by dying on the cross for me. 

I come before you in prayer today In the name of Jesus Christ 
because I want to renounce any and all practices that are 
contrary to you or to your teachings. I come before you today 
in the name of Jesus Christ. 

I come before you today because I want to renounce any 
contact or seeking of any spirit or spiritual entity other than 



the Christian Triune God or the Son of God, Jesus Christ. I 
want to renounce any and all of my behaviors and practice of 
allowing myself to contact the spiritual world or pray to/ 
through spiritual entities or people, that are not Jesus Christ. 

I recognize that the Bible states that we can only come to God 
through Jesus Christ, and through no other persons or spirits. 

I come before you today because I want to renounce any and 
all of my spiritism, spirit-contact, witchcraft and occult 
practices, as well as any spiritual or other practice which is 
against you or contrary to you, and I ask for your favor and 
help to help me renounce these activities. 

At this moment, I choose by my own will to renounce and 
reprove all works of darkness in my life and the lives of the 
generations of those whom I have joined. I include blood 
relatives as well as adoptive relatives and any mates, or any 
others whom I have joined such as lovers, seducers whether 
these were my (whichever applies to you - if you are not 
sure... include them all) wife/wives, husband/husbands, and 
children/grand-children/great-grandchildren. In the name of 
Jesus Christ, I hereby renounce any and every oath, 
commitment, covenant, decision, curse, fetish, decision, 
intention, word or thought, or gesture, and I hereby renounce 
any and every fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that 
encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or 
anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bringing 
works of darkness to my own life. 



Lord God, in the name of Jesus Christ, I hereby choose to 
renounce all unfruitful works of darkness, and have no further 
fellowship with them from this time forth (Romans 13: 
12/Ephesians 5: 11) 

I do this through the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior, 



through His Blood that was shed for me, 

through his precious Body given for me, 

through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever 
suffer, 

I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and spirit, 
may be completely set free from every sinful work of the past 
brought about by the sins of those before me. 

I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, Spiritually wrong 
promise, or evil covenant, curse, action, word, or deed or 
attitude - from my actions or my past be laid against my 
account - in heaven or in or on the earth. By this action today, 
I hereby serve notice that the handwriting of ordinances 
written against me and my generations are blotted out in my 
life - effective as far back as needs be to the very first though, 
word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2: 13-14). 

I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about serving 
You God, in reverence of You and seeking your counsel in 
everything I do. I submit my life unto You as a living sacrifice 
- holy and acceptable in Your sight, which is my reasonable 
service. (Romans 12:1) 

Dear Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present 
this petition before you today, I thank You that You have 
heard me this day, and granted my every expression in 
accordance with Your will. I know that You have done this 
solely because of what Your Son, the true and only Jesus 
Christ, accomplished for me, by dying and paying the price for 
my sins on the cross. 

Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my 
prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your 
grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to 



serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember 
that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your 
word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I 
pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to 
do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you. I pray 
that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and bring 
true Christian friends in my life who will strengthen my walk 
with You and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path 
with you. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things 
in the name of Jesus, and I thank you that I am now free in 
deed, according to what you have shared with you in the Bible 
(Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1, 
John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27). 

(Note: take time to look up these verses in the Bible which can 
be found in the Bible. You may want to write them down, and 
memorize them as well. It is good practice and will serve you 
well). 

I pray Lord that you would help me to remember that each 
time I am tempted, that I can come back and talk with you, 
and read the Bible for strength and encouragement. 

In the name of Jesus Christ I have asked all of these things, 
and I thank you for giving them to me, Amen. 



The Spiritual Problems caused by Spiritual Explorations 
of Witchcraft & Dark Spirituality - HereditaryWitchcraft 



There is such a thing as occult forces that try to force families 
to serve them, for many decades, and for many generations. 
Some families did not KNOW how to fight the demonic 
spirits. Therefore they gave in to them, and serve those forces, 
and try to force their other family members to do this. 

This needs to be resisted, but true freedom and true resistance 
can only be found in those who truly accept and believe the 
message of Jesus Christ as the New Testament confirms and 
explains. This is only ONE book of many portions of the New 
Testament. The New Testament is comprised of 27 books. 



Prayer to be forgiven for sins committed while exploring 
darkness and/or evil and prayers to be forgiven for sins 
committed in & during witchcraft 



Some people will wrongly tell you that this prayer cannot or 
will not have a good impact on your life. Whether they 
consciously know it or not, those who say that are people who 
are trying to trick you. But if this prayer would really have no 
effect on your life, then it certainly cannot hurt to pray it. 



Lord God, I do not come always to talk with you when I 
should. Lord, I find this prayer difficult and pray that you 
would give me the grace, strength and courage that I need to 
pray it and be totally sincere. Lord, I come to you because I 
am now a true Christian believer, and because I, (your name 
here) . being under the Blood of Jesus, claiming the Mind of 
Jesus, and the Spirit of Jesus, do hereby present my request to 



you boldly before your Throne of Grace (Ephesians 
2:3/Hebrews 4:14-16/Philippians 2: 1-11). 

I ask that you would neutralize and prevent any force or evil 
presence that might try to keep me from praying this prayer, in 
the name of Jesus and in the power of your blood. I pray that 
you would strengthen me as I pray this and that my mind 
would be clear, and that I would be able to concentrate on 
talking with you and on what I would like to pray. I thank you 
for coming to my help as you said you would in the Bible, and 
despite the tricks of any evil forces to convince me of the 
opposite. I thank you that you Love me Lord, even if I do not 
always feel as though you do because I am notperfect. 

I thank you for what you did for me by dying on the cross for 
me. I thank you Lord, because I know that you are more 
powerful than the forces which may have been controlling my 
life, and which were exercising influence in my life that I want 
to be sure is terminated and over. I come to you in prayer 
today Lord, because I want to be delivered from all 
consequences of hereditary involvement in the occult or any 
occult curses which have impacted my life and/or hereditary 
witchcraft and all of the sins and curses which have come 
from those activities. I choose by my own will and I do now 
renounce and reprove all works of darkness in my life and the 
lives of the generations of those past and present whom I have 
joined. 

Choosing by my own will Lord Jesus Christ, I renounce any 
and all curses or effects of my past actions, habits, thought 
processes and any other activity or intention contrary to your 
character and contrary to your word the Bible. any relatives of 
mine who have been in the occult which you know about 
Lord, and whereby I am or have been affected by any of their 
actions, thoughts, words or deeds. In your name and by my 
will with your help and depending upon you, I renounce all 
occult blessings, all occult heritage and all occult 
consequences, as well as any demonic spirits or inspiration, 



which have a basis for interference or influence in my life, 
either because of my own actions or because of the actions of 
any of my ancestors or relatives which has an effect on me- 
whatever evil effect that might be. 

In this renunciation Lord, I include blood and adoptive 
relatives and any mates, such as lovers, seducers andrapists 
wife/wives, husband/husbands, and children/grand- 
children/great-grandchildren. I hereby renounce any and every 
oath, commitment, covenant, decision, action, curse, fetish, 
gesture, and fleshly and immoral intimacies and unions that 
encouraged or brought about iniquity in my own life, or 
anyone meeting the above stated requirements for bring works 
of darkness to my own life. 

[ you should take time out at this point, recalling to your mind 
any known names or circumstances - especially if there have 
been rapes or seductions that you know about, from or towards 
you, or that you participated in or witnessed. Take each 
situation and person individually and ask the Lord to forgive 
you of your involvement and participation in each of these 
situations. Where the situation applies instead to others, ask 
that they would come to realize the wrongness of their action, 
and that they would be drawn to the Lord and that they would 
repent and be saved ] 

Lord, I hereby choose to renounce all unfruitful works of 
darkness, and have no further fellowship with them from this 
time forth (Romans 13: 12/Ephesians 5: 11) I do this through 
the Name of Jesus Christ, my Savior, through His Blood that 
was shed for me, through his precious Body given for me, 
through his Mind that suffered beyond anything I could ever 
suffer. I do this so that my whole being - body, mind, soul and 
spirit, may be completely set free from every sinful work of 
the past brought about by my sins or the sins of those before 
me. I do this so that no Luciferian, Satanic, or evil covenant, 
curse, or fetish from the past be laid against my account - in 
heaven or in or on the earth. 



By this action right now today, I hereby serve notice that the 
handwriting of ordinances written against me and my 
generations are blotted out - effective as far back as needs be 
to the very first though, word, deed or gesture. (Ephesians 2: 
13-14).I do this so that from this day forward, I may go about 
serving You, Father, in reverence of You and seeking your 
counsel in everything I do. I submit my life unto You here and 
now as a living sacrifice - holy and acceptable in Your sight, 
which is my reasonable service. (Romans 12:1) Dear 
Heavenly Father, and Judge of the Universe, as I present this 
petition before you today, I thank You that You have heard me 
today, and granted my every expression in accordance with 
Your will. 

I know that You have done this solely because of what Your 
Son, the true and only Jesus Christ, accomplished for me, by 
dying and paying the price for my redemption on the cross. 
Thank You from the depth of all of my being, for hearing my 
prayers and granting my petition. Please remind me of your 
grace and love on a daily basis. Please help me to seek to 
serve and follow you, and help me to continue to remember 
that you have forgiven me, and that I can take you at your 
word and trust what you have given to me in your Bible. I 
pray that you would help me to not do wrong, and to decide to 
do what is right, and to take active steps to follow you. 

I pray that you would fiil me with joy, comfort and hope and 
bring friends in my life who will strengthen my walk with You 
and encourage me to grow in the right spiritual path with you. 
I ask Lord that you would give me spiritual discernment so 
that I would not be deceived by others, and so that I would 
follow you in the ways that you want me to. I pray that you 
would help me to understand you and know you better and 
that you would help me be an effective messenger of yours to 
communicate the truths of the Gospel and live and stand up for 
You. You know Lord that I have asked all of these things in 
the name of Jesus Christ, and I thank you that I am now free in 



deed, according to what you have shared with me in the Bible 
(Romans 6:22, Galatians 5:1, Romans 8:1, Romans 7:24, 8:1, 
John 8:36, 1 Corinthians 12:27). In the name of Jesus Christ, 
Amen. 

LIST OF ACCURATE BOOKS on the OCCULT / 
DEMONIC SPIRITS for those who are CHRISTIANS 
and who sincerely want to know more to help 
themselves, and their family members 



These books are available at a bookstore online at 
www.amazon.com . They MAY be available through 
other places online (on the internet). 



Demonology Past and Present by Kurt Koch- Available 
ALSO in German 

Occult ABC by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German 

Other Books by Kurt Koch - Available ALSO in German 

Demons in the World Today: A Study of Occultism in the 
Light of God's Word by Merril Unger 

The Beautiful Side of Evil by J. Michaelsen 

Inside the New Age Nightmare: For the First Time Ever...a 
Former Top New Age Leader Takes You on a Dramatic 
Journey by Baer 

Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow by Constance Cumbey 

Die sanfte Verfiihrung (Cumbey Constance) 
Book Description: 1987. Die Autorin beschreibt in diesem 
Standardwerk Entstehung, Lehren, Ziele und okkulte Wurzeln 
der New-Age-Bewegung. Sie enthiillt beklemmende 



Parallelen zur ....biblischer Endzeitprophezeiungen. 
Hardcover, guter Zustand, Verlag Schulte & Gerth, 
Taschenbuch Neues Zeitalter (Geheimwissen), Religiose 
Zeitfragen S. 300, 

A Planned Deception: The Staging of a New Age Messiah 
(ISBN: 0935897003 / 0-935897-00-3) Cumbey, Constance 
Pointe Publishers 

The Adversary by Marc Bubeck 

Overcoming the Adversary by Marc Bubeck 

Destroying the Works ofWitchcraft Through Fasting & 
Prayer by Ruth Brown 



Orthodoxy & Heresy: A Biblical Guide to Doctrinal 
Discernment by Robert Bowman 

Beyond Seduction: A Return to Biblical Christianity by D. 
Hunt 

Pilgrim's Progress by John Bunyan - The most widely 
translated Christian book after the Bible. (Yes, an edition in 
German, Dutch, French, Italian, Spanish, Portugues, and 
Arabic have all been made). Note: Pilgrim's Progress by John 
Bunyan is available for FREE online. 



The Christian in Complete Armour, or, A treatise of the 
Saints by Pastor (Rev.) William GURNALL - in One Volume 
or in Three Volumes - available for FREE online 
(the term "saints" used here simply means Christians). 



i i'"> ' 'iiifiiii siM 



*r ^«rg «O ^ tf*y 



Bgg®5r 






J?V 



' - 









'*=*->;- : 



lesa®** 






5=T** ■'■■■ 



0_S fl_i_e © P. 





\^>W?i ijcj xj.A iybSJiJi 4^.1 


| 


1 "* ■ 


uoV:»| r * 


■ ilo'^1 


! 

1 

I 

i 
j 

i 
1 
i 


i 


l*&? r n 


o 


irV^ 


* ■ 


u-Wi rs - 


' 


^>J^ 


i , 






1 * 


o^ifi 


• 


fc-*J*' 


IT 


* Ojtf l^j** 


TA 


• 


^JW 







n 


ir 


v?j 


e 


U-> ' 


ii 


r 


U-Jr-J? ' 


r 


UV*! > 


w; 


■ 


Lr>L>.r f 





' ^°"_r. * 


" 


* 


tfcfe 


\ 


Uji r 


i 


r 


u— Jl 


\ 


U-j, r 


t 


* 


^ 


\ 


*** 


i 


• 


&lf 


rr ■ 




o 


■ 


iQ^ L; i 




J'* Ojj—s'3 *■*— < 4*^.? 


V 


w 


^j^i i-j r 








i 
! 

1 



^ y- i 1 ■ v> -^ c W. ^ ■ f *>jt ■£> Buiijfj . waa^ Jj uTj * . v_T '&>%% 3£\ 

4~^ fp. V' ^S ty {.J' J^-i-JK ^JS^^J^-vijfiij SSj^'-uS ^j 

JAS £„ J! *,& &y.*fe'jif W/ j£b til ^o* J WV\ j^i iv*g~M Jp_J 
^■'.A* *?.s g~ vl ci^ J^S t?- o'j ■ asv 1 * **'.y 

,-^j tjtgt i. 1 , ^ ^.'Ai . i2S i-\Sj «-w *,_, siV, u > 



W^ii.u 



■ U" **' £>>' ^_7' J» V S J;- t^-^^ o"^ ■ 2tfc)j«l (.j' Jo-fe iSl v-ii ^ i^b afl 

J» L^*; (T, r»* i"\^\ j.i\, ^,J\ ihKi. '^.\ ^J«» fjp\ . 'JL.J, iii : U»\ \Jj rt 



»*<J 



</> </-' e^ ^ -^ 






. urv 



->-r t V'^"'V 



(J~ A * "T 



503 . ^'-.ubuLujJ r»i*» *J)^ *!^ 



507 
516 
522 
526 
528 
552 
561 






570 . u^lj* o^,L=j ^JjJ |»lc J <tiL, 

576 . i_SjJ_y»- ^yU»-^ J}' j»* *A\mj 

585 . i^)l^ t^^-y. (_s^ / x **N«*| 

586 . l£|Ijs>- u*^ 3 -^ f^" 1 (•** ^""V 

587 .. . !_£;'_)=- ^Ii^vi #(* *<Jwy 
590 ..^1 i_s'^>-y. CUUiliU L-jUi" 



1 ***&?* 

83 u^lr* JsWF' 

135 Isj! JjustI 

221 iL-jj Jjjk-'I 

288 ... . ^V.;^ lM Sr>^ 
371 . j»j i (J"*V i-S/^*- l/" k "-V> *«"; 
405 . | -/ w-« r > t>-»'u lJjI}*- c/*" J V '*' ( -> a 7 

9 

437 U~-^y 

459 . . jjUHL i^lja- (jJjJ *<db; 
470 . ^luw^ilj '-S''^ \J^3i ^"J 
481 ui^. <J-&Ij ^Ija» ,jjjj 'aSL, 

489 . ujLuAaj i^Ijjs» (jJ^J; J <KlUy 

- / - j 

496 . ^UhjJLjJo |j*>Ijj J;l <*!L> 



II nnn 



-&LA- 



mi iiii.ii imiiiei'ii 
IHOCA XPII€TA, 

BtpHO h tomho nptseAeH'B OTT. ntpEOC6pa3H0-TO. 



Bi KiiHroneraTnmi^s-Ts Ha A. X. Eomariiraa. 
1ST4. 



ii-^° •= = 

1" l>jj J&jiSgfr Js*fl 

76 s^l i/S^i ^~i^ J^* 

124 5^1 t/i^jU B^'y J^' 

204 iijj,! ^jb eeli^ J**M 

266 Jl^f'd/Jj-; 

34 5 . . . . • jujdjlwo j a Jjj los , ^iJj**»! (V*y ?i 

377 Li"^ *<ft*> s^jL-jl^js CilJj^ u-y!# 

407 >*aJ\j ''iiUj, sJjl-jjni.js WjM. (j^jj 

428 ^..JLj, s^jJa-L!^ ffiUj-j, ijijijj 

438 ^jjiiL», s^lJLy^il isJJy-, (j-y!j) 

449 ^uJU, i^LLi isJJj^ u^JJ 

457 * *»*aJI**>i 5y«LwJ«9 i^Uj«*jj (^j^^i 

464 l*"^' *A\mj a^jL&jILJ (itllj-^ (j^jj 

471 ^jaJ\j •'aIU., 5^jLxJj!L-j isuj-i, (j^jijJ. 

475 i*?"^ **^"»i *-<jljy*A> eUj->, (j-j!_>5 

484 , ^Ajlj ■'aIL., 4-jjIjj*1j l£l!j-Jj u"J^JJ 

49 1 -oiJLii iWLJ isUj-^ L^iJyi 

495 juajLj, ii^i-J ("ilJyu, fj»yjl 

496 ^»>a!1-, s^LjL^c isJJj-jj (j-yijj 

521 ^)u«j? ''aIL^ i£l!j-^ tjj"i 

530 jj-Vjl ***•$? *4W> isUj-; (j^u 

539 ,j»^ '*i*>?'*^ dJy-, ,j-^u 

544 ^Vjl *a?>j? 'JU; «sU}-, l$5 

553 ^^ **J^) <^_r^ ^ 

534 ^AilU'JU, eUU, ^«s 

555 ^i~»jf- ^JL-, idj^-, \±jV, 

558 ^^-a-j <*l*,jS€ 






1 ...Evangile seion Matthieu */jj\ ^^i ^^» Jrf^ 

76 ...Evangile seion Marc t/jj^ t&^h ^~L^ J-~?^ 

1 24.., Evangile seion Luc ijjy\ ^oijU eli^ J-sM 

904 .. Evangile seion Jean s^jjl l? 1 -^ ^L?* lW 1 ' 

266,. les Actes des Apotres, JLfl bKUyu, 

345.. Epitre auxRomains .«aJU, s^Ujj CsU».-, (j-j!jj 

377 * . Premiere epitre aux Corinthiens . . . ^mA«1 AJU*». 8 J oImjb&J . ifi (£tUa>*J, , uiojaJ 
407. Deuxreme epitre aux Corinthiens. ^wA-JJ iJW, 8 >i r.lwj ojlj j «9 £)JewJ, (yjjjj 

428.. Epitre aux Galates ~>a)Lj, s^liJj^c (sUj»», (j"j!j{ 

438..Epitreaux Ephesiens -jaIU, sJJUj^il l£)Jj-, (_>-y!jJ 

449., Epitre aux Philippiens -.aIU, s^LJL» eUj-, (j-jljj 

457. . Epitre aux Colossiens ^>a)L-, s^jL.-jJjii dJ^u, (j^Ji 

464 Premiere epitre aux Thessaloniciens jmJbI ^aJLai. II j r J* tf jtwi (!iJJ***i r wijo 

471 Deux 'emeepitre-Thessaloniciens, ^AJIJ ^AjL*»» sJoLX-Jfl]L*J (£U«*j, /jrfjJV. 

■i i O . Premiere epitre a Timothee -u* J «I jJw, AuU^be^Ot? (iiija*u, (Uji!») 

484. Deuxieme epitre a Timothee j^A*JU AJu*i. Am^Ua^Oo (£a]*-j, ^ujaja^ 

49 1 . .Epitre a Tite ^»a!Lu, *-yio eMj-^, (j^J_ji 

495..Epitrea Philemon ^.aIUj. AJji-J l£)Jw, <j*j!jJ 

49e,.L'EpttreauxHebreux >*a!L^ s^J^ dJ^-, y-j5j> 

52 1 . . Epitre de Jacques ^i^^f- *a1Lj. uAlj»,. uji« 

530.. Premiere epitre de Pierre.. Ji^'^jf- *a!L, (sl)j«^ ^-^o 
539. Deuxieme epitre de Pierre. ,uAJt) s a~oj£ ''aJLj, miiyj \j»Ja\ 

544. .Premiere epitre de Jean «"^j' f **»jS i 'J^j isljvui .ts; 

553_ > Deuxieme epitre de Jean ^uajIj ^aSL», Uillj-». ,,•*; 

554..Troisieme epitre de Jean ^uasTC *a1U>, e)JLj, ,£*■• 

555.. Epitre de Jude ^fi^j? *A*| ^j^j^jH 

558 •• l'Apocalypse. nommte parfois Revelations, ,.,,,,,,- •(•..■••••*•••• m*>5>h 1!£aJ . £*£". 

Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament 






JOt^s- J^S- 



■/"* 



,ur 






-'t,-** 

jJkk* i (jjlj |^lj ^ (j^ 1 jV- JJ 1 
^y.^-1 I Al. J *_—> 



IN THE 

HINDUSTAN! LANGUAGE. 



jfjf-n 3 -«j j^c / - - - - - - <*><* 

ffjf-n ^ -«j c^fc^-n ^ _.---•« 

?fjf~o o (ifp/f -c^ tm^f-r\ / - - - - - s "° l 

* f l f - n a ^ -^ f^" f - - - - - <■'* 

ff ! f " n fl ^ jpr^ / - - - - ' - kv-i 

ff^n ^ -^ jjrffn ^ - - - - - 

jCjT»n ^ p f^ -pj j^vrfP / " " " " " alaW 

ff l f " n 3 ^ "^ f^°f - - - " " MJ 

ffjf«n ^ -«^ T»rfn ^ ^ J 

'W 1 F l**lr ------ -" J 

«Wi /^ ir^ff ------- ,AI 

fa f' \rv - - - - - - ~"' 

^n p l( iffi . . - - - - ji 

•/* Z 1 ic*T - - - - ' 

re** 






^ 



w, - - - - - - - la*- K y^e 

^^ - . - - - ki- 11^ K i_r^ ; : 

ji: 1t ,_ _ .. - - - iai- 1wj«i) o ij^jis^ 

fw - - - - - - s*=- ir^ ^ ^*-y. 

i«vi - - - - " " 1==- j/"^ » V°-}t 

is», - - - - - - " lai- £ 'i^j-yi 

P, 3 - - - - i_>U/ ^ CiAai&o J_ ^y. 



INJIL I MUQADDAS, 



YA NE, 



HAMARE KHUDAWAND AUR NAJAT-DENEWALE 



YISIJ' MASIH 



KA NAYA 'AHD-NAMA. 



IS KA TARJUMA YUNANI ZUBAN SE ZUBAN I URDU MEN 
BANA.RAS TRANSLATION COM1IITTEE SE K1YA GAYA, J1SE 
TAS.HIH KARKE AB TISRI'bAR CHHAPWATE. 



U 



LONDON: 

PRINTED FOR THE 

BRIT1SH AND FOREIGN BIBLE SOCIETY, 
INSTITUTED IJST THE YEAR 1804. 



MDCCCLX. 



THE 


NEW TESTAMENT 


OF OUB 


LORD AND SAVIOUR 


lE'SUS CHR'IST.' 


isr SGAU KAREJV. 


II CoS OO 5 ) 33l£ cSl S c8l 93 S » 


2d Edition.— 4000. 


Translated by Francis Mason 



MAULMAIN, 

AMERICAN MISSION PRESS, 
THOS. S. RANNEY. 

1850. 



«coSs» 



ul« 



«scib 

u'iojs 

ojioof> • • 
\S\oop . . . 
oo^«i8«ioo^ 
801 • • • • 

C06JSoj8iiou . . . 

oo^pojsuji . . . 

O3C0100 . . 
<SSS<980S • • 

ISCOIOS . • 

cocSab • • 
008BlCOJf»On . . 

oosbico^djo . . 
ooiooo8«o« . . 

o 

00100088 j n . . 
00008 - • • • 

oicoSS . . 
ai(3i . - - ■ 
ooicBS . - 

0800 0813» . - 
OtOOfflglJl • • 

oSioo^oSjSoAo» 

oSlCofSoSfoO^g j d 
«SlOO^oS^aA^n 
0J31 .'.'., 

OjfcSptf) . . . 



. «3 . . . . • ■ o 

. u^ ..... . <IJ 

C01 . . . • - • 03E 

. tSi • s ° n 

«100^ . • . . JjS 

. 8 3=1 

• oo^ao . . . . qj<> 

- ro^«j . . . . <?<>j 

cocoi 9°J 

038 9 = 3 

o 

13COI 9J9 

COc88 9?J 

008110 95° 

ODSHJ 991 

O0l»0 > • • • 98' 
O0X«J • • ■ 9G3* 



00 ■ - 
131 . 

ai • 

9 

ooi . 

o8«o . 
o8nj • 
081» o 
cSnj 
d8i«5 

°8 • 

c8p . 



9G0* 

i 
■ 9« 

9Jo* 

9<15 

9»P. 

96J 

9«<l 

jos 

30E 

500 

930 



I 



■coSsoC 



«u 



«soc- 

«Sojs 

OOlCOp • • . 

oo^oiSwioo^ . 
«jol 

CD^SojSlOii . . . 

ooe^ojsijo . . . 
rocoioo . . 

OESC3508 . . 
(SCOIOS . . 

cocSsb • • 
oo!eicol»o» . . 

C03©TCO|dJ1 . . 
001BOD8I1O1I . . 

o 
O31«0088_/n . ■ 

OOOJ! . . • 

oicoSS . . 
ffii^t ... 
ooifSS . . . 

O800ffl8o 3« • . 

caco ^8j j » • • 
oSioojSoSfjoD^oa 
o8icof>o9£cctf« J n 

oSlCO^oSfioo^i 
Cg3t . . . 

o&SPfll . . . 



tf} . , Matthew . 3 
«S. . Marc- . w 
cm . Luke - . , 33 g 
c8i . John ' . . ooo 

BlCoS Acts of A P ostles J9S 

Q . . Romans , 
roqS«0 ICorinthians . 
COQp0 I l' Corinthians 
COCOl . Galatians, . 
Ephesians 
Phlippians 
, Colossians . 



93C1 
990 
<3"J 

5°J 
9==. 
9J9 
S3J 
99° 
991 
93° 
9 Co 
9G0 

9« 

9S» 

919 

9»o, 

osnj . " , ' 8ter . . . 9£j 

COl « O I [ Epistle I Letter of] John 511 
cSlHj " 1 Epistle - Letter of] John go^ 
c8l«3 '" t Epistle-Letter of] John « g 
CO . J H de • • • ■ *8on 
CO p , Revelation ■ • * 330 



008 . 

O 

13C01 

oocSs 

COSH O ' Thessalonians . 

a 

CO 2 D I 1 1' Thessalonians 

__» 

COIO ITimothy • 

OOIbJ "Timothy 

00 • - Titus 

QX • Philemon , . 
(21 • Hebrews 

001 . .James , 

OSfiO . I Peter . . 
II Peter . _ 




«coSaafitt 



OOaSoosnon . . • 
OO^^C^Haj» . . • 
OOCOICO . . 

n i vv • • • 

.00 

OC01OS . . 

cocSsb . • 

008ST.CO|iOn . • 
C08ST.CO|l J « • • 
OO1UOO80O» . . 

o 

ooiacos» jn . • 

0O0O8 • • • ■ 

csicgSS . . 
si(9)i ... . - 
ooicBS ... 

0800 080 O» . . 
0100 08» J U • • 

c8ioo|3c8r>oAoi 
o8icojSc8£atfi j ■ 
oSioo^oS^oo^i 
casi . . . . 

a&s^ . . . 



iyg v Evangile seion Matthieu 3 
«y5| , .Evangile seion Marc <1J 

C01 .Evangile seion Luc • ^^E 
f\Ri ,, Evangile seion Jean , o o o 
(2X001 , Actes des Apotres. J 5 B 
8 , Epitrs aux Romains , ^0*X 

OOG) S« O P^mtere opltre alJ . Crin.hiens 39 " 
OOQpO /Douniimoipitro Corinthlens 9°J 

QQQ31 m EpitreauxGalates, £oj 

<}Qg # Epttre aux Ephesiens $d^ 

o 
(3 COl Epltre aux Philippiens pjc 

G3COS EpTtre aux ColossienscOl 

00 "U O Promi4ra api*™ Thessalonlclens CCO 
**\T°fl I ^ euK '^ me ^P'_ tre Thessaloniciens 

001 'l O prem,J "? ^P"* 6 iTIniotluSe, 
OOlll I Deux ^' rB _ 6 f ,ttrB «Timothee , 

qj . Epttre a Tite , m 
<31_ B Epitre a Philemon , 
/•■^ - L'Epttreaux Hebreux £93 
001 . Epitre de Jacques , 919 
OS«0 • * epitredePierre pa^ 
OSflJ De uxieme -dePierre pgj 

fKjT B D p remiere epltre de Jean # CffO 
tfVjltf I Oeuxiemc cpitrc- dc Jean* 9^9 

/jH^K^ Troisieme epltre de Jean • f)OQ 

EpTtre de Jude' • 900 

'ApNatypse. nommae pirfois Rsvelations 430 



9J1 
93 = 
pEo s 
S Eo* 
M** 



Neues Testament / New Testament / Le Nouveau Testament 



THE 

NEW TESTAMEN! 

OF 01- K 

LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST, 

IN TAMIL: 

WBH REFERENCES, CONTEKTS 0E III E CHAPTEES AND CHRONOLOGY, 
FROM THE EKGLISH. 



e_*«5 faJiTL-jj^.TaiiU 



fip go su rr 3, & iu ih ^Giresfliti&s.jiuurTGb 



& f & JZ5! IU Q <5iJ <£ dF/Bdfi^^TJTSU U ffl Q & T $ ^ ^ 



MADRAS: 
THE MADRAS AUXILIARY BIBLE SOCIETY. 

PRINTEDATTHE AMERICAN ttlMIOH PRESS. 

1859. 



oo©£gco5)S)G|8(S oooo6oq|5sn 









THE NEW TESTAMENT 

IN BURMESE. 

oo©£cco^3G|S(^i ogco8oqj5sr» 








THE 


New 


Testament 




OF 


OTTR 


LORD AED SAVIOTJR 




JESUS OHRIST: 


.■SEransIatrti into tfjc Butmesc, tam tljt ©ciginiil ffimft, 


E 


y Rev. A. JUDSON, D. D. 


ANU EDITED, WITH CONTENTS 0» CHAPTERS ANU REFERENCES, 


B 


r Rev. E. A. STKVRNS, D. I). 




-^^^3=^^= 




R A. N GO N: 


2PUBL1SHED BY 
:Seeond Edition,-5,000. 


1-HE AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONAEV VStOK, 
AT THEIR MISSION PRESS. 
F. D. PHINNEV, SUPT. 
l88 5 . 



ogGooo£scq|5s ^>g cq]5sc§dJ330gS^ooi^)os 



ooSgcpojSe 

OOGp8GOOOGpCO]&8 

GOOooBoSeo . . . 

ODSp80J^8JoSsD 

sgcpoioSogoGSoS 

OgCpfflioS^cSoDKSoS 

ogGpoioSooc8c»ci>o8 

Qg£peioS©opcoc©oS 

ept>ioSg"]£ogyG©:>S 

G^Oo8qo5©0 

aoooSogSs . . 

G0OD^Draj&8 
GJ|DCO<f^c8gS8 

GCOjpooos^oocBrajjSa 

GO3Qu9S^0Oc8cq)&8 
GCK>E[8ggSoD£8©ro3! . . . 
GOD0l>GCqj<X>C»^3Oj^CI3j58 
OGt»OOOB^OO^C(J)tS8 . . . 

GOSOGjos^ooj^rag&a 



onraSsnSecigtSsojSi aj]58^o«uo)c4 oao|a:x>oSjje!»5i ocraJpjS 

■ic58|£oj8(:)§8c5]£l Q^e^C3008D£BD£|l S»3C0?8(t^8r^ iijScfjS 
=O^llC^33OJI053lc^£80cSs|6c^8C0^!»3CT?8^8t^^aigSl1 OCloSp 

sSSJoScoeoos (i) §e:»5i (cgf&e^ec03c»3a>5'8(o§8§ c^5coSc^^c^ 

CD^II^oSjf§8 (l) C»gS(§S^oSlSoOS^8n^(3COgSl[ 



QgooSoqj<5s j \ oq]<Ssc§(i32»g5$o« 




5l£aoi)3C|goS .... Matthew .... 


5l£«Dr^sc|go6 .... Marc - 

jSojodoosjEoS .... Luke-- ■■•■ 
5)Eeco3co^3G|So£. . John - .... 


«D 
Gt.VSS 


•oow^GODSoggj .... Acts of Apostles .... 


OD 


GGp«(3 c03©9 .... Romans .... 


GGp 


Eroo&j^-lgcflgeoogueeDS .... J Corinthians 


GCOO> 


efDO^^lSoIsso^cStOCBoS . . II Corinthians 
ocdDo8gol38D .... .... Galatians . . 


J GC03> 

oco 


GisoS|3ol383 .... .... Ephesians 


c 


ScS8[oqo1o§)D .... .... Phlipplans . 


8 


Gro3GCODob(oDOl3©D ' .... Colossians 


sodo 


0300COOeCOD§oSSo r lo©0030e©o£ ' Thessalonians 


3 COoS 


CX>o530:>GCOD§o5|o3cn3809c8eoc©D£ " Thessalonians 


J 030§ 


c8GWDCCOjo3ol96)OOC«G©^£ .... 1 Timothy . , 


o o9 


cBGGOGCcgdlgSD^cfiuOGSoS . . II Timothy 


j c8 


cfiojgdloeo .... .... Titus . . . 

8gCO(^S(3o)q©0 . . .... Philemon 


c8 
8cco- 


GOOgS5ol3©^ .... .... Hebrews. , . 


GOO 


5|£a50trjiyffiol3SO .... James. . 


COO 


C|£G0ro<j)[3dl380OgUG8DS .... IPeter . . . 


GO 


J|£GOOD^jffiol3S0qc8o0Ge3S .. MPeter. 


J GCi 
n 3 GO>3 


G)£GOD0COS[Scn3©0OM«G©D£ .. 1 [ Epistle / Letter of] Joh 




a£G030coEScno©03c8oDG©o£ " [Epistle-Letterof] Joh 


5|£GO53C0ifficn3B0ODcS(X)SSD£ I" [Epistle-Letterof] John ^ c <a 3 


5j£a^rj(p3cf)3B3 .... .... Jude .... 

<g03cr$ag&8 .... . . Revelation .... 





ca>3coc»po£§ag&8 . . 

g«8o3po£§reg& . , 

«° 33 ?°83l 

8cgDDS^ooc8ra]& 

GGiS^i03^0od3oDj&8 . . 
UDCo8oS^DO£§r>3j&8 . . 



33Wp5^DUC^p;ii 



scOdoo 

§ 

C033^> 

8 

p 

(»0 

e» 

•*>% 

0)0 
«OCO 



THE 

NEW TESTAMENT 

OF OUE 

LORD AND SAVIOUR JESUS CHRIST 

TBANSLATED INTO TELDGU 

FROM THE ORIGINAL GREEK. 

§T_g $ » o ■ # tf. 

e8s6 ^ So ^rsler^A&o-O H 33 76 «T* tf -O o -iS w <S tf 8. 
J?,;» ^sio oO"E_o tSoII 









MADRAS: 










PEINTED AT THE AMEKICAN MISSION 


PBESS 




FOE 


THE 


MADKAS 


AUIHIAET 


BIBLE 


S C I E T T, 






And sold at their 


Depository, 155 Popham's Broadway 










18 60. 







THE BOOKS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



^°3& ,jf,o&>S&>, 3{£sSue>aMS'j r _ "3tfR>. 



5o"g 

&*&(,_ 

-W"^ ...- ... 
:3Sr-tf«Sb 

5^S^ 

O §"8o§ 

J> §"8o§ 

K'aScK) 

^lsl> 

pS&i 

S"eS"^\ ... 

O •^Sj«5>"6j • • • 



. . . -30~ 

oa. 
. . . -stf 

jn 
. . .s><y 

ClSL 

. . . Oe_ 
o3 



_9 ^^tf^S^ 

-s 8"»»q5c55cD. 
©e&> . . . 

^"A • • • 



z» 
3 Serasi 



s5SCsk>. 



b' 
3 
n 
o3 
>« 

3 

n 
o 



ftEjIiTUP' 



XCIV9": 



pa:fnr : P «»» R3\,t ¥l! 



ppi>fi:Ticntfi« 



0>TVA ! VX.fl: 



PitiTCPWP» : ooj(Ai£*:: 



These texts conforms to the T. R. 
as far as we know. Anyone having questions about this 
text should compare it to the Stephens / Estienne Version 
in Koine (Ancient) Greek of 1 550/1 551 , which is the root 
Standard historic Ancient Greek text of the New Testamen t 



LE 



NOUVEAU TESTAMENT 



D E 



NOTRE SEIGNEIffi JESTJS-CHBIST 



d'apres la veesion revce 



Par J. F. OSTERVALD 




PARIS 

SOCIETE BIBLIQUE DE FRANCE 

41, RUE LA BRUYBRE 
1872 
One of the Reliable copies of the French New Testament - Une Bible fidele. 
Available sometimes [and Free (gratis) ] atwww.archive.org 



TABLE DES LIVRES 



DU NOUVEAU TESTAMENT 



Evangile seion saint Matthieu . 
EVanfrile seion saint Marc . . . 
Evangile seion saint Lue . . . . 
Evaiigile seion saint Jean . . . 

Les Actes des Apotres 

Epitre de saint Paul aux Ko- 

mains 

I" E-pttre aux Corinthiens . . . 
II* Epitre aux Corinthiens . . . 

Epitre aux Galates 

Epitre aux Ephesiens 

Epitre aux Philippiens 

Epitre aux Colossiens 

I" fipitre aux Thessalonicieus. 



rlcd 

chap. 


P»6 e » 


28 


1 


1G 


52 


24 


85 


21 


139 


23 


179 


18 


232 


16 


253 


13 


277 


6 


292 


6 


300 


4 


307 


4 


313 


5 


318 



It c Epitre aux Thessaloniciens. 

£ re Epitre a Timothee 

H* Epitre k Timothee 

Epitre a Tite 

Epitre a Philemon 

Epitre aux Hebreux 

Epitre de saint Jaeques 

l re Epitre de saint Pierre .... 
II e Emtre de saint Pierre .... 

I rt Epitre de saint Jean 

H e fipitre de saint Jean 

III 1 Epitre de saint Jean 

Epitre de saint Jude 

Apoealypse de saint Jean . ... 22 



Nombre 
d» 

chap. 

3 


Page* 
323 


6 


326 


4 


332 


3 


336 


1 


339 


13 


340 


5 


357 


5 


362 


3 


369 


5 


37-3 


1 


379 


1 


380 


1 


381 



Le signe f indique la division du texte en paragraphes. 
La Bible la plus fidele = Texte Recu - Grec Koine - d'Estienne (1550-51) 



BOOKS OF THE SBW TESTAMENT. 

Matthew 28 

Mark ... 16 

Luke 24 

John 21 

The Acts 28 

Epistle to the Eomans ... 16 

I. Corinthians ... ... ... 16 

II. Corinthians... ... ... 13 

Galatians ... ... ... 6 

Ephesians 6 

Philippians ... ... ... 4 

Colossians 4 

I.'Thessalonians ... ... 5 

II. Thessalonians ... ... 3 

L Timothy ... 6 

II. Timothy 4 

Titus 3 

Philemon ... ... ... 1 

Hebrews ... 13 

Epistle of James ... ... 5 

I. Peter 5 

II. Peter 3 

I. John ... 5 

II. John 1 

Ht. John 1 

Jude 1 

Kevelation .. 22 



imMmt 



mA+ntt 

3|£>\"Tpf 



.PT 

SHtr 

SHft 
^5ft 

'W'—' pT 






stii^a» 



■SLjfj-jji. n .. 



«Alfjgii 
FfJA£#ff& 

«a«».hs 

mA&Mm 

ftAjfeEBSttiH 
■&Aae£&«ttii 

•gAmmm 



m: 



mmmm 



Chinese Simplified - Request to God 



isgw±ifr, wms&mmT ummnm^^M^^^ 






m%mij]miMmm^mnmm«y3Xft,immi 
t. 

«at^jf#^#,{nsiHjtt#,{nfgii^ft B as#AR a»f«f, /s 









Chinese Traditional - Talking to the Lord of Heaven 






mm, Mtmmmi mEjmmMi mj.x^& §m«5# 

tm&mi£mmmmtmmmmmMmm^A&, & 
immtmmmmmmmmmmmm^A& mm, t 









Chinese Traditional - Request to God 



ss«±#, mmmmmmmjtmmm^ 









mm, i&mmtMi mRimm^n M_ax#& mwm& 
n mm, Mtimm mmm^m^msLimTM^ 

tm&mismmmmimmmmMmm^A&, & 
immtm^m^mmmmmmmmm^A& mm, m 

God mr, mmmmmM^mMMmintMmfcfen 






'-A4 



•ff 



Bii 



;?«KfPSP* 



^Jl«;m«*Wi?P»W«*, HP1, 



Korean - Request to God 






5 

J 

, & 


9 


5 ? 


5 


( 


) 


1 


.God 




( 


) 


• 


1 

5 


5 

,Amen 


) 



Gebet zum Gott 

Lieber Gott, Danke, daB dieses Evangelium oder dieses neue Testament 
freigegeben worden ist, damit wir in der LageSIND, mehr uber Sie zu erlernen. 
Helfen Sie bitte den Leuten, die fiir das Zur Verfiigung stellen dieses 
elektronischen Buches verantwortlich sind. Sie wissen, daB wem sie sind und 
SieSIND in der Lage, ihnen zu helfen. 

Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, in der Lage zu SEIN, schnell zu arbeiten, und stellen Sie 
elektronischere Biicher zur Verfiigung Helfen Sie ihnen bitte, alle 
Betriebsmittel, das Geld, die Starke und die Zeit zu haben, die sie zwecks sein 
miissen fiir, Sie zu arbeiten zu halten. 

Helfen Sie bitte denen, die ein Teil der Mannschaft sind, das ihnen auf einer 
taglichen Grundlage helfen. Geben Sie ihnen die Starke bitte, um jedem von 
ihnen das geistige Verstandnis fiir die Arbeit fortzusetzen und zu geben, daB 
Sie sie tun wiinschen. Helfen Sie bitte jedem von ihnen, Furcht nicht zu haben 
und daran zu erinnern, daB Sie der Gott sind, der Gebet beantwortet und der 
verantwortlich fiir alles ist. 

Ich bete, daB Sie sie anregen wiirden und daB Sie sie schiitzen und die Arbeit u. 
das Ministerium, daB sie innen engagiert werden. Ich bete, daB Sie sie vor den 
geistigen Kraften oder anderen Hindernissen schiitzen wiirden, die sie 
schadigen oder sie verlangsamen konnten. 

Helfen Sie mir bitte, wenn ich dieses neue Testament benutze, um an die Leute 
auch zu denken, die diese Ausgabe zur Verfiigung gestellt haben, damit ich fiir 
sie und also, sie beten kann kann fortfahren, mehr Leuten zu helfen. 

Ich bete, daB Sie mir eine Liebe Ihres heiligen Wortes (das neue Testament) 
geben wiirden und daB Sie mir geistige Klugheit und Einsicht, um Sie besser zu 
kennen geben wiirden und den Zeitabschnitt zu verstehen, dem wir in leben. 
Helfen Sie mir bitte, zu konnen die Schwierigkeiten beschaftigen, daB ich mit 
jeden Tag konfrontiert werde. 

Lord God, helfen mir Sie besser kennen und zu wiinschen anderen Christen in 
meinem Bereich und um die Welt helfen wiinschen. Ich bete, daB Sie die 
elektronische Buchmannschaft und -die geben wiirden, die ihnen Ihre Klugheit 
helfen. Ich bete, daB Sie den einzelnen Mitgliedern ihrer Familie (und meiner 
Familie) helfen wiirden nicht Angelegenheiten betrogen zu werden, aber, Sie 
zu verstehen und Sie in jeder Weise annehmen und folgen zu wiinschen. Geben 
Sie uns Komfort auch und Anleitung in diesen Zeiten und ich bitten Sie, diese 
Sachen im Namen Jesus zu tun, amen, 



Prayer to God 

Dear God, 

Thank you that this Gospel or this New Testament has been released 
so that we are able to learn more about you. 

Please help the people responsible for making this Electronic book 
available. You know who they are and you are able to help them. 

Please help them to be able to work fast, and make more Electronic 
books available 

Please help them to have all the resources, the money, the strength 
and the time that they need in order to be able to keep working 
for You. 

Please help those that are part of the team that help them on an 
everyday basis. Please give them the strength to continue and give 
each of them the spiritual understanding for the work that you want 
them to do. 



Please help each of them to not have fear and to remember 
that you are the God who answers prayer and who is in charge of 
everything. 

I pray that you would encourage them, and that you protect them, and 
the work & ministry that they are engaged in. 

I pray that you would protect them from the Spiritual Forces or other 
obstacles that could harm them or slow them down. 

Please help me when I use this New Testament to also think of the 
people who have made this edition available, so that I can pray for 
them and so they can continue to help more people. 

I pray that you would give me a love of your Holy Word (the New 
Testament), and that you would give me spiritual wisdom and 
discernment to know you better and to understand the period of time 
that we are living in. 



Please help me to know how to deal with the difficulties that I am 
confronted with every day. Lord God, Help me to want to know you 
Better and to want to help other Christians in my area and around the 
world. 

I pray that you would give the Electronic book team and those who 
help them your wisdom. 

I pray that you would help the individual members of their family 
(and my family) to not be spiritually deceived, but to understand you 
and to want to accept and follow you in every way. 

Also give us comfort and guidance in these times and I ask you to do 
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen, 



Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
books can be obtained [downloaded] for Free and without 
cost 






Nfiw Tfistamfint 



E 



Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 1 



B 



Arabic New Testament - P d lt # 2 



CT 



Arabic New Testament - Pait #3 



GREEKNEWTESTAMENT 

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT GRECQUE 



New Testament- CLASSIC KOINE - GREC ANCIENT - 



ISEWTESTAlVENr in LATIN 

NOUVEAU TESTAMENT -LATIN 



Telecharaez d o u r en a r r i v e r au oaaes IGratuit-evidement) 



Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
bookscan beobtained [downloaded] [telecharaer] forFreeand withoutcost 



PERSIAN - PERSE - IRANIAN - FARSI 



Nfiw Tfistamfint 



Nouveau Testament persan [Perse - Iran] - 
Farsca Yeni Ahit- Nuevo Testamento pers a 
Persisch Neuen Testament -Testamento Novo persa 



Persian Farsi New Testament - P art # 1 



Persian Iranian New Testament - P art #2 

i 

Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #3 

i Z 

Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #4 
Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #5 
Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #6 



Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #7 



Persian Iranian New Testament - Part #8 



Persian Farsi New Testament - Part #9 



ETHIOPIC - AMHARIC 



Nfiw Tfistamfint 



EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt # 1 



Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #2 



E thiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #3 



EthiODic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #4 



Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #5 



Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #6 



Ethiooic Amharic New Testament - Pdlt #7 



C licking on these links will take you to pages where these 
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedlfor Free and withoutcost 



■URKISH NEWTESTAMENT 



Neuen Testaments in turkischer 

Classic Turkish in ARABIC Scrio 



New Testament - TURKISH in Arabic Scrip 

Turkish New Testament (Arabic Scrip / Scriptj-Tiirk Yeni Ahit - 
Neuen Testaments in turkischer- Nuevo Testamento en turco- 
Nouveau Testament en turc ■ Nieuwe Testament in hetTurks 





Classic Turkish New Testament - 




1 Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




I Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




1 Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




1 Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic 


Turkish New Testament - 




Classic Turkish New Testament - 



Part#1 



Part#2 



Part#3 



Part#4 



Part#5 



Part#6 



Part#7 



Part#8 



Part# 9 



Part# 1 



U 



Part#11 



Part# 12 



NOUVEAU TESTAMENT HONGROIS - HONGRIE 



HUNGARIAN N.T. Matthew - #1 



hungarian - II Thes saloiiians - #14 



HUNGARIAN N.T. Marc 



HUNGARIAN- 1 Timothy-* 15 



HUNGARIAN N.T. Luke 



HUNGARIAN N.T. J ohn 



-#4 



HUNGARIAN N.T. Acts 



-#5 



HUNGARIAN N.T. Romans -#6 



HUNGARIAN- 1 Corinthians -#7 



HUNGARIAN- II Corinthians - #8 




HUNGARIAN- Galatians - #9 

■ 



HUNGARIAN- E phesians -#10 

■ 



HUNGARIAN -Philippians -#11 



HUNGARIAN -Colossians -#12 
■ 



HUNGARIAN - 1 Thessalonians - # 13 



HUNGARIAN- II Timothy- #16 



HUNGARIAN N.T.TITUS -#17 



HUNGARIAN -Philemon-* 18 



HUNGARIAN -Hebrews- #19 



HUNGARIAN -James - #20 



HUNGARIAN- 1 Peter -#21 



HUNGARIAN- II Peter -#22 



HUNGARIAN- 1-3 J ohn -#23 



HUNGARIAN N.T. J ude 




HUNGARIAN -Revelation -#25 



Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost 




C licking on these links will take you to pages where these 
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without 



Classic Tamil New Testament 

Neues Testament des Tamil -Tamil dilinde yeni vasiyetname 

Nieuwe Testament in het Tamil-taal - 

An accurate & lasting translation 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



Part#l 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testam 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL (Tamou) INDIA New Testament 



TAMIL NT-Part#13 



TAMIL NT-Part#15 



TAMIL NT-Part#14 



TAMIL NT-Part#16 



Clickto goto pages where books can beobtained [downloaded]- Free 



i 



KAREN (Sgau)NEWTESTAMENT 



New Testament 



3 




URDU - PAKISTAN / INDIA 



'ew Testament 



URDU New Testament- P art#l 



H 



rt#2 [T 



URDU New Testament - P a 



URDU New Testament- P art #3 



E 



URDU New Testament 



-Part#4 



HINDI ■ HINDUSTANI New Testament 



O 



B 



TELEGU New Testament 



n 



TAMIL New Testament 



KAREN New Testament 



BURMA MYANMAR New Testament 



ASSAMESE New Testament 



Chinese New Testament 



GUI ARAT NewTestamenl 



Sanscrit Sanskrit New Testament 



Anc ient G reek New Testament 


Indonesia New Testament 





Arabic New Testament 



T 



I I 



izerbanan Azan Azen New Testamen 



Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
bookscan be obtained fdownloadedl for F ree and without 




BURMA MYANMAR Part#13 



BURMA MYANMAR Part#15 



BURMA MYANMAR \M Part#14 



BURMA MYANMAR 



FJ Part#16 



Click to goto pages where books can be obtained [downloaded]-Free 




Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
books can beobtained [downloaded]forFreeand withoutcost 



MODERN GREEKNEWTESTAMENT 




Clicking on these links will take you to pages where these 
books can beobtained [downloadedl for F ree and without cost 



20 seconds for Fellow Christians - Dear Lord, 

Thank you thatthis PDF Ebook 

has been released s o that we are able 

to learn more about you and wiser versions. 

Please help itto have wide circulation 

Please help the people responsible for 

making this Ebook available. 

Please help them to be able to have more 

resources available to help others. 

Please help them to have all the resources, 

the funds, the strength and the time that they 

need and ask for in order to be able 

to keep working for You. 

I pray that you would encourage them and 

that you protect them physically and 

spiritually, and the work & ministry that 

they are engaged in. 

I pray that you would protect them from the 
Spiritual or other Forces that could harm them 
or their work and projects, or slowthem down. 

Please help them to find Godly friends who 

are able to help. Provide helpful transportation 

for their consistent use. 

Remind me to pray for them often as this 

will help and encourage them. 



Please give them your wisdom and 
understanding sothey can better followyou, 
and I ask you to do 
these things in the name of Jesus, Amen,